<?xml version="1.0"?>
<?xml-stylesheet type="text/xsl" href="cfr.xsl"?>
<CFRGRANULE xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:noNamespaceSchemaLocation="CFRMergedXML.xsd">
  <FDSYS>
    <CFRTITLE>40</CFRTITLE>
    <CFRTITLETEXT>Protection of Environment</CFRTITLETEXT>
    <VOL>2</VOL>
    <DATE>1998-07-01</DATE>
    <ORIGINALDATE>1998-07-01</ORIGINALDATE>
    <COVERONLY>false</COVERONLY>
    <TITLE>AIR PROGRAMS</TITLE>
    <GRANULENUM>C</GRANULENUM>
    <HEADING>SUBCHAPTER C</HEADING>
    <ANCESTORS>
      <PARENT HEADING="" SEQ="1"/>
    </ANCESTORS>
  </FDSYS>
  <SUBCHAP TYPE="N">
    <PRTPAGE P="5"/>
    <HD SOURCE="HED">SUBCHAPTER C—AIR PROGRAMS</HD>
    <PART>
      <EAR>Pt. 50</EAR>
      <HD SOURCE="HED">PART 50—NATIONAL PRIMARY AND SECONDARY AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STANDARDS</HD>
      <CONTENTS>
        <SECHD>Sec.</SECHD>
        <SECTNO>50.1</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT>Definitions.</SUBJECT>
        <SECTNO>50.2</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT>Scope.</SUBJECT>
        <SECTNO>50.3</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT>Reference conditions.</SUBJECT>
        <SECTNO>50.4</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT>National primary ambient air quality standards for sulfur oxides (sulfur dioxide).</SUBJECT>
        <SECTNO>50.5</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT>National secondary ambient air quality standard for sulfur oxides (sulfur dioxide).</SUBJECT>
        <SECTNO>50.6</SECTNO>

        <SUBJECT>National primary and secondary ambient air quality standards for PM<E T="52">10</E>.</SUBJECT>
        <SECTNO>50.7</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT>National primary and secondary ambient air quality standards for particulate matter.</SUBJECT>
        <SECTNO>50.8</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT>National primary ambient air quality standards for carbon monoxide.</SUBJECT>
        <SECTNO>50.9</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT>National 1-hour primary and secondary ambient air quality standards for ozone.</SUBJECT>
        <SECTNO>50.10</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT>National 8-hour primary and secondary ambient air quality standards for ozone.</SUBJECT>
        <SECTNO>50.11</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT>National primary and secondary ambient air quality standards for nitrogen dioxide.</SUBJECT>
        <SECTNO>50.12</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT>National primary and secondary ambient air quality standards for lead.</SUBJECT>
        <APP>
          <E T="05">Appendix A to Part 50—Reference Method for the Determination of Sulfur Dioxide in the Atmosphere (Pararosaniline Method)</E>
        </APP>
        <APP>
          <E T="05">Appendix B to Part 50—Reference Method for the Determination of Suspended Particulate Matter in the Atmosphere (High-Volume Method)</E>
        </APP>
        <APP>
          <E T="05">Appendix C to Part 50—Measurement Principle and Calibration Procedure for the Measurement of Carbon Monoxide in the Atmosphere (Non-Dispersive Infrared Photometry)</E>
        </APP>
        <APP>
          <E T="05">Appendix D to Part 50—Measurement Principle and Calibration Procedure for the Measurement of Ozone in the Atmosphere</E>
        </APP>
        <APP>
          <E T="05">Appendix E to Part 50 [Reserved]</E>
        </APP>
        <APP>
          <E T="05">Appendix F to Part 50—Measurement Principle and Calibration Procedure for the Measurement of Nitrogen Dioxide in the Atmosphere (Gas Phase Chemiluminescence)</E>
        </APP>
        <APP>
          <E T="05">Appendix G to Part 50—Reference Method for the Determination of Lead in Suspended Particulate Matter Collected From Ambient Air</E>
        </APP>
        <APP>
          <E T="05">Appendix H to Part 50—Interpretation of the 1-Hour  Primary and Secondary National Ambient Air Quality Standards for Ozone</E>
        </APP>
        <APP>
          <E T="05">Appendix I to Part 50—Interpretation of the 8-Hour Primary and Secondary National Ambient Air Quality Standards for Ozone</E>
        </APP>
        <APP>
          <E T="05">Appendix J to Part 50—Reference Method for the Determination of Particulate Matter as PM</E>
          <E T="52">10</E>
          <E T="05">in the Atmosphere</E>
        </APP>
        <APP>
          <E T="05">Appendix K to Part 50—Interpretation of the National Ambient Air Quality Standards for Particulate Matter</E>
        </APP>
        <APP>
          <E T="05">Appendix L to Part 50—Reference Method for the Determination of Fine Particulate Matter as PM</E>
          <E T="52">2.5</E>
          <E T="05"> in the Atmosphere</E>
        </APP>
        <APP>
          <E T="05">Appendix M to Part 50—Reference Method for the Determination of Particulate Matter as PM</E>
          <E T="52">10</E>
          <E T="05">in the Atmosphere</E>
        </APP>
        <APP>
          <E T="05">Appendix N to Part 50—Interpretation of the National Ambient Air Quality Standards for Particulate Matter</E>
        </APP>
      </CONTENTS>
      <AUTH>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">Authority:</HD>
        <P>42 U.S.C. 7401, <E T="03">et seq.</E>
        </P>
      </AUTH>
      <SOURCE>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">Source:</HD>
        <P>36 FR 22384, Nov. 25, 1971, unless otherwise noted.</P>
      </SOURCE>
      <SECTION>
        <SECTNO>§ 50.1</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT>Definitions.</SUBJECT>
        <P>(a) As used in this part, all terms not defined herein shall have the meaning given them by the Act.</P>
        <P>(b) <E T="03">Act</E> means the Clean Air Act, as amended (42 U.S.C. 1857-18571, as amended by Pub. L. 91-604).</P>
        <P>(c) <E T="03">Agency</E> means the Environmental Protection Agency.</P>
        <P>(d) <E T="03">Administrator</E> means the Administrator of the Environmental Protection Agency.</P>
        <P>(e) <E T="03">Ambient air</E> means that portion of the atmosphere, external to buildings, to which the general public has access.</P>
        <P>(f) <E T="03">Reference method</E> means a method of sampling and analyzing the ambient air for an air pollutant that is specified as a reference method in an appendix to this part, or a method that has been designated as a reference method in accordance with part 53 of this chapter; it does not include a method for which a reference method designation has been cancelled in accordance with § 53.11 or § 53.16 of this chapter.</P>
        <P>(g) <E T="03">Equivalent method</E> means a method of sampling and analyzing the ambient air for an air pollutant that has been designated as an equivalent method in accordance with part 53 of this chapter; it does not include a method for which an equivalent method designation has <PRTPAGE P="6"/>been cancelled in accordance with § 53.11 or § 53.16 of this chapter.</P>
        <P>(h) <E T="03">Traceable</E> means that a local standard has been compared and certified either directly or via not more than one intermediate standard, to a primary standard such as a National Bureau of Standards Standard Reference Material (NBS SRM), or a USEPA/NBS-approved Certified Reference Material (CRM).</P>
        <P>(i) <E T="03">Indian country</E> is as defined in 18 U.S.C. 1151.</P>
        <CITA>[36 FR 22384, Nov. 25, 1971, as amended at 41 FR 11253, Mar. 17, 1976; 48 FR 2529, Jan. 20, 1983; 63 FR 7274, Feb. 12, 1998]</CITA>
      </SECTION>
      <SECTION>
        <SECTNO>§ 50.2</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT>Scope.</SUBJECT>
        <P>(a) National primary and secondary ambient air quality standards under section 109 of the Act are set forth in this part.</P>
        <P>(b) National primary ambient air quality standards define levels of air quality which the Administrator judges are necessary, with an adequate margin of safety, to protect the public health. National secondary ambient air quality standards define levels of air quality which the Administrator judges necessary to protect the public welfare from any known or anticipated adverse effects of a pollutant. Such standards are subject to revision, and additional primary and secondary standards may be promulgated as the Administrator deems necessary to protect the public health and welfare.</P>
        <P>(c) The promulgation of national primary and secondary ambient air quality standards shall not be considered in any manner to allow significant deterioration of existing air quality in any portion of any State or Indian country.</P>
        <P>(d) The proposal, promulgation, or revision of national primary and secondary ambient air quality standards shall not prohibit any State or Indian country from establishing ambient air quality standards for that State or area under a tribal CAA program or any portion thereof which are more stringent than the national standards.</P>
        <CITA>[36 FR 22384, Nov. 25, 1971, as amended at 63 FR 7274, Feb. 12, 1998]</CITA>
      </SECTION>
      <SECTION>
        <SECTNO>§ 50.3</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT> Reference conditions.</SUBJECT>

        <P>All measurements of air quality that are expressed as mass per unit volume (e.g., micrograms per cubic meter) other than for the particulate matter (PM<E T="52">10</E> and PM<E T="52">2.5</E>) standards contained in § 50.7 shall be corrected to a reference temperature of 25 °C and a reference pressure of 760 millimeters of mercury (1,013.2 millibars).  Measurements of PM<E T="52">10</E> and PM<E T="52">2.5</E> for purposes of comparison to the standards contained in § 50.7 shall be reported based on actual ambient air volume measured at the actual ambient temperature and pressure at the monitoring site during the measurement period.</P>
        <CITA>[62 FR 38711, July 18, 1997]</CITA>
      </SECTION>
      <SECTION>
        <SECTNO>§ 50.4</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT>National primary ambient air quality standards for sulfur oxides (sulfur dioxide).</SUBJECT>
        <P>(a) The level of the annual standard is 0.030 parts per million (ppm), not to be exceeded in a calendar year. The annual arithmetic mean shall be rounded to three decimal places (fractional parts equal to or greater than 0.0005 ppm shall be rounded up).</P>
        <P>(b) The level of the 24-hour standard is 0.14 parts per million (ppm), not to be exceeded more than once per calendar year. The 24-hour averages shall be determined from successive nonoverlapping 24-hour blocks starting at midnight each calendar day and shall be rounded to two decimal places (fractional parts equal to or greater than 0.005 ppm shall be rounded up).</P>
        <P>(c) Sulfur oxides shall be measured in the ambient air as sulfur dioxide by the reference method described in appendix A to this part or by an equivalent method designated in accordance with part 53 of this chapter.</P>

        <P>(d) To demonstrate attainment, the annual arithmetic mean and the second-highest 24-hour averages must be based upon hourly data that are at least 75 percent complete in each calendar quarter. A 24-hour block average shall be considered valid if at least 75 percent of the hourly averages for the 24-hour period are available. In the event that only 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, or 23 hourly averages are available, the 24-hour block average shall be computed as the sum of the available hourly <PRTPAGE P="7"/>averages using 18, 19, etc. as the divisor. If fewer than 18 hourly averages are available, but the 24-hour average would exceed the level of the standard when zeros are substituted for the missing values, subject to the rounding rule of paragraph (b) of this section, then this shall be considered a valid 24-hour average. In this case, the 24-hour block average shall be computed as the sum of the available hourly averages divided by 24.</P>
        <CITA>[61 FR 25579, May 22, 1996]</CITA>
      </SECTION>
      <SECTION>
        <SECTNO>§ 50.5</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT>National secondary ambient air quality standard for sulfur oxides (sulfur dioxide).</SUBJECT>
        <P>(a) The level of the 3-hour standard is 0.5 parts per million (ppm), not to be exceeded more than once per calendar year. The 3-hour averages shall be determined from successive nonoverlapping 3-hour blocks starting at midnight each calendar day and shall be rounded to 1 decimal place (fractional parts equal to or greater than 0.05 ppm shall be rounded up).</P>
        <P>(b) Sulfur oxides shall be measured in the ambient air as sulfur dioxide by the reference method described in appendix A of this part or by an equivalent method designated in accordance with part 53 of this chapter.</P>
        <P>(c) To demonstrate attainment, the second-highest 3-hour average must be based upon hourly data that are at least 75 percent complete in each calendar quarter. A 3-hour block average shall be considered valid only if all three hourly averages for the 3-hour period are available. If only one or two hourly averages are available, but the 3-hour average would exceed the level of the standard when zeros are substituted for the missing values, subject to the rounding rule of paragraph (a) of this section, then this shall be considered a valid 3-hour average. In all cases, the 3-hour block average shall be computed as the sum of the hourly averages divided by 3.</P>
        <CITA>[61 FR 25580, May 22, 1996]</CITA>
      </SECTION>
      <SECTION>
        <SECTNO>§ 50.6</SECTNO>

        <SUBJECT> National primary and secondary ambient air quality standards for PM<E T="52">10</E>.</SUBJECT>
        <P>(a) The level of the national primary and secondary 24-hour ambient air quality standards for particulate matter is 150 micrograms per cubic meter (μg/m<SU>3</SU>), 24-hour average concentration. The standards are attained when the expected number of days per calendar year with a 24-hour average concentration above 150 μg/m<SU>3</SU>, as determined in accordance with appendix K to this part, is equal to or less than one.</P>
        <P>(b) The level of the national primary and secondary annual standards for particulate matter is 50 micrograms per cubic meter (μg/m<SU>3</SU>), annual arithmetic mean. The standards are attained when the expected annual arithmetic mean concentration, as determined in accordance with appendix K to this part, is less than or equal to 50 μg/m<SU>3</SU>.</P>

        <P>(c) For the purpose of determining attainment of the primary and secondary standards, particulate matter shall be measured in the ambient air as PM<E T="52">10</E> (particles with an aerodynamic diameter less than or equal to a nominal 10 micrometers) by:</P>
        <P>(1) A reference method based on appendix J and designated in accordance with part 53 of this chapter, or</P>
        <P>(2) An equivalent method designated in accordance with part 53 of this chapter.</P>
        <P>(d) The PM<E T="52">10</E> standards set forth in this section will no longer apply to an area not attaining these standards as of September 16, 1997, once EPA takes final action to promulgate a rule pursuant to section 172(e) of the Clean Air Act, as amended (42 U.S.C. 7472(e)) applicable to the area. The PM<E T="52">10</E> standards set forth in this section will no longer apply to an area attaining these standards as of September 16, 1997, once EPA approves a State Implementation Plan (SIP) applicable to the area containing all PM<E T="52">10</E> control measures adopted and implemented by the State prior to September 16, 1997, and a section 110 SIP implementing the PM standards published on July 18, 1997. <PRTPAGE P="8"/>SIP approvals are codified in 40 CFR part 52.</P>
        <CITA>[52 FR 24663, July 1, 1987, as amended at 62 FR 38711, July 18, 1997]</CITA>
      </SECTION>
      <SECTION>
        <SECTNO>§ 50.7</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT> National primary and secondary ambient air quality  standards for particulate matter.</SUBJECT>
        <P>(a) The national primary and secondary ambient air quality standards for particulate matter are:</P>
        <P>(1) 15.0 micrograms per cubic meter (<E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E>) annual arithmetic mean concentration, and 65 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E> 24-hour average concentration measured in the ambient air as PM<E T="52">2.5</E> (particles with an aerodynamic diameter less than or equal to a nominal 2.5 micrometers) by either:</P>
        <P>(i) A reference method based on appendix L of this part and designated in accordance with part 53 of this chapter; or</P>
        <P>(ii) An equivalent method designated in accordance with part 53 of this chapter.</P>
        <P>(2) 50 micrograms per cubic meter (<E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E>) annual arithmetic mean concentration, and 150 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E> 24-hour average concentration measured in the ambient air as PM<E T="52">10</E> (particles with an aerodynamic diameter less than or equal to a nominal 10 micrometers) by either:</P>
        <P>(i) A reference method based on appendix M of this part and designated in accordance with part 53 of this chapter; or</P>
        <P>(ii) An equivalent method designated in accordance with part 53 of this chapter.</P>
        <P>(b) The annual primary and secondary PM<E T="52">2.5</E> standards are met when the annual arithmetic mean concentration, as determined in accordance with appendix N of this part, is less than or equal to 15.0 micrograms per cubic meter.</P>
        <P>(c) The 24-hour primary and secondary PM<E T="52">2.5</E> standards are met when the 98<E T="51">th</E> percentile 24-hour concentration, as determined in accordance with appendix N of this part, is less than or equal to 65 micrograms per cubic meter.</P>
        <P>(d) The annual primary and secondary PM<E T="52">10</E> standards are met when the annual arithmetic mean concentration, as determined in accordance with appendix N of this part, is less than or equal to 50 micrograms per cubic meter.</P>
        <P>(e) The 24-hour primary and secondary PM<E T="52">10</E> standards are met when the 99<E T="51">th</E> percentile 24-hour concentration, as determined in accordance with appendix N of this part, is less than or equal to 150 micrograms per cubic meter.</P>
        <CITA>[62 FR 38711, July 18, 1997]</CITA>
      </SECTION>
      <SECTION>
        <SECTNO>§ 50.8</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT>National primary ambient air quality standards for carbon monoxide.</SUBJECT>
        <P>(a) The national primary ambient air quality standards for carbon monoxide are:</P>
        <P>(1) 9 parts per million (10 milligrams per cubic meter) for an 8-hour average concentration not to be exceeded more than once per year and</P>
        <P>(2) 35 parts per million (40 milligrams per cubic meter) for a 1-hour average concentration not to be exceeded more than once per year.</P>
        <P>(b) The levels of carbon monoxide in the ambient air shall be measured by:</P>
        <P>(1) A reference method based on appendix C and designated in accordance with part 53 of this chapter, or</P>
        <P>(2) An equivalent method designated in accordance with part 53 of this chapter.</P>
        <P>(c) An 8-hour average shall be considered valid if at least 75 percent of the hourly average for the 8-hour period are available. In the event that only six (or seven) hourly averages are available, the 8-hour average shall be computed on the basis of the hours available using six (or seven) as the divisor.</P>
        <P>(d) When summarizing data for comparision with the standards, averages shall be stated to one decimal place. Comparison of the data with the levels of the standards in parts per million shall be made in terms of integers with fractional parts of 0.5 or greater rounding up.</P>
        <CITA>[50 FR 37501, Sept. 13, 1985]</CITA>
      </SECTION>
      <SECTION>
        <SECTNO>§ 50.9</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT> National 1-hour primary and secondary ambient air quality standards for ozone.</SUBJECT>

        <P>(a) The level of the national 1-hour primary and secondary ambient air quality standards for ozone measured <PRTPAGE P="9"/>by a reference method based on appendix D to this part and designated in accordance with part 53 of this chapter, is 0.12 parts per million (235 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E>). The standard is attained when the expected number of days per calendar year with maximum hourly average concentrations above 0.12 parts per million (235 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E>) is equal to or less than 1, as determined by appendix H to this part.</P>
        <P>(b) The 1-hour standards set forth in this section will no longer apply to an area once EPA determines that the area has air quality meeting the 1-hour standard. Area designations are codified in 40 CFR part 81.</P>
        <CITA>[62 FR 38894, July 18, 1997]</CITA>
      </SECTION>
      <SECTION>
        <SECTNO>§ 50.10</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT> National 8-hour primary and secondary ambient air quality standards for ozone.</SUBJECT>
        <P>(a) The level of the national 8-hour primary and secondary ambient air quality standards for ozone, measured by a reference method based on appendix D to this part and designated in accordance with part 53 of this chapter, is 0.08 parts per million (ppm), daily maximum 8-hour average.</P>
        <P>(b) The 8-hour primary and secondary ozone ambient air quality standards are met at an ambient air quality monitoring site when the average of the annual fourth-highest daily maximum 8-hour average ozone concentration is less than or equal to 0.08 ppm, as determined in accordance with appendix I to this part.</P>
        <CITA>[62 FR 38894, July 18, 1997]</CITA>
      </SECTION>
      <SECTION>
        <SECTNO>§ 50.11</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT>National primary and secondary ambient air quality standards for nitrogen dioxide.</SUBJECT>
        <P>(a) The level of the national primary ambient air quality standard for nitrogen dioxide is 0.053 parts per million (100 micrograms per cubic meter), annual arithmetic mean concentration.</P>
        <P>(b) The level of national secondary ambient air quality standard for nitrogen dioxide is 0.053 parts per million (100 micrograms per cubic meter), annual arithmetic mean concentration.</P>
        <P>(c) The levels of the standards shall be measured by:</P>
        <P>(1) A reference method based on appendix F and designated in accordance with part 53 of this chapter, or</P>
        <P>(2) An equivalent method designated in accordance with part 53 of this chapter.</P>
        <P>(d) The standards are attained when the annual arithmetic mean concentration in a calendar year is less than or equal to 0.053 ppm, rounded to three decimal places (fractional parts equal to or greater than 0.0005 ppm must be rounded up). To demonstrate attainment, an annual mean must be based upon hourly data that are at least 75 percent complete or upon data derived from manual methods that are at least 75 percent complete for the scheduled sampling days in each calendar quarter.</P>
        <CITA>[50 FR 25544, June 19, 1985]</CITA>
      </SECTION>
      <SECTION>
        <SECTNO>§ 50.12</SECTNO>
        <SUBJECT>National primary and secondary ambient air quality standards for lead.</SUBJECT>
        <P>National primary and secondary ambient air quality standards for lead and its compounds, measured as elemental lead by a reference method based on appendix G to this part, or by an equivalent method, are: 1.5 micrograms per cubic meter, maximum arithmetic mean averaged over a calendar quarter.</P>
        <SECAUTH>(Secs. 109, 301(a) Clean Air Act as amended (42 U.S.C. 7409, 7601(a)))</SECAUTH>
        <CITA>[43 FR 46258, Oct. 5, 1978]</CITA>
      </SECTION>
      <APPENDIX>
        <EAR>Pt. 50, App. A</EAR>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">
          <E T="05">Appendix A to Part 50—Reference Method for the Determination of Sulfur Dioxide in the Atmosphere (Pararosaniline Method)</E>
        </HD>
        <P>1.0 <E T="03">Applicability.</E>
        </P>

        <P>1.1 This method provides a measurement of the concentration of sulfur dioxide (SO<E T="52">2</E>) in ambient air for determining compliance with the primary and secondary national ambient air quality standards for sulfur oxides (sulfur dioxide) as specified in § 50.4 and § 50.5 of this chapter. The method is applicable to the measurement of ambient SO<E T="52">2</E> concentrations using sampling periods ranging from 30 minutes to 24 hours. Additional quality assurance procedures and guidance are provided in part 58, appendixes A and B, of this chapter and in references 1 and 2.</P>
        <P>2.0 <E T="03">Principle.</E>
        </P>

        <P>2.1 A measured volume of air is bubbled through a solution of 0.04 M potassium tetrachloromercurate (TCM). The SO<E T="52">2</E> present in the air stream reacts with -the TCM solution to form a stable mono-chloro-sulfonatomercurate(<E T="03">3</E>) complex. Once formed, this complex resists air oxi-da-tion(<E T="03">4, <PRTPAGE P="10"/>5</E>) and is stable in the presence of strong oxidants such as ozone and oxides of nitrogen. During subsequent analysis, the complex is reacted with acid-bleached para-rosaniline dye and for-mal-de-hyde to form an intensely colored para-rosaniline methyl sulfonic acid.(<E T="03">6</E>) The optical density of this species is determined spectro-photo-metrically at 548 nm and is directly related to the amount of SO<E T="52">2</E> collected. The total volume of air sampled, corrected to EPA reference conditions (25 °C, 760 mm Hg [101 kPa]), is determined from the measured flow rate and the sampling time. The concentration of SO<E T="52">2</E> in the ambient air is computed and expressed in micrograms per standard cubic meter (<E T="61">μ</E>g/std m<E T="51">3</E>).</P>
        <P>3.0 <E T="03">Range.</E>
        </P>
        <P>3.1 The lower limit of detection of SO<E T="52">2</E> in 10 mL of TCM is 0.75 <E T="61">μ</E>g (based on collaborative test results).(<E T="03">7</E>) This represents a concentration of 25 <E T="61">μ</E>g SO<E T="52">2</E>/m<E T="51">3</E> (0.01 ppm) in an air sample of 30 standard liters (short-term sampling) and a concentration of 13 <E T="61">μ</E>g SO<E T="52">2</E>/m<E T="51">3</E> (0.005 ppm) in an air sample of 288 standard liters (long-term sampling). Concentrations less than 25 <E T="61">μ</E>g SO<E T="52">2</E>/m<E T="51">3</E> can be measured by sampling larger volumes of ambient air; however, the collection efficiency falls off rapidly at low concentrations.(<E T="03">8, 9</E>) Beer's law is adhered to up to 34 <E T="61">μ</E>g of SO<E T="52">2</E> in 25 mL of final solution. This upper limit of the analysis range represents a concentration of 1,130 <E T="61">μ</E>g SO<E T="52">2</E>/m<E T="51">3</E> (0.43 ppm) in an air sample of 30 standard liters and a concentration of 590 <E T="61">μ</E>g SO<E T="52">2</E>/m<E T="51">3</E> (0.23 ppm) in an air sample of 288 standard liters. Higher concentrations can be measured by collecting a smaller volume of air, by increasing the volume of absorbing solution, or by diluting a suitable portion of the collected sample with absorbing solution prior to analysis.</P>
        <P>4.0 <E T="03">Interferences.</E>
        </P>

        <P>4.1 The effects of the principal potential interferences have been minimized or eliminated in the following manner: Nitrogen oxides by the addition of sulfamic acid,(<E T="03">10, 11</E>) heavy metals by the addition of ethylenediamine tetracetic acid disodium salt (EDTA) and phosphoric acid,(<E T="03">10, 12</E>) and ozone by time delay.(<E T="03">10</E>) Up to 60 <E T="61">μ</E>g Fe (III), 22 <E T="61">μ</E>g V (V), 10 <E T="61">μ</E>g Cu (II), 10 <E T="61">μ</E>g Mn (II), and 10 <E T="61">μ</E>g Cr (III) in 10 mL absorbing reagent can be tolerated in the procedure.(<E T="03">10</E>) No significant interference has been encountered with 2.3 <E T="61">μ</E>g NH<E T="52">3</E>.(<E T="03">13</E>)</P>
        <P>5.0 <E T="03">Precision and Accuracy.</E>
        </P>

        <P>5.1 The precision of the analysis is 4.6 percent (at the 95 percent confidence level) based on the analysis of standard sulfite samples.(<E T="03">10</E>)</P>
        <P>5.2 Collaborative test results (<E T="03">14</E>) based on the analysis of synthetic test atmospheres (SO<E T="52">2</E> in scrubbed air) using the 24-hour sampling procedure and the sulfite-TCM calibration procedure show that:
        </P>

        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">• The replication error varies linearly with concentration from <E T="61">±</E>2.5 <E T="61">μ</E>g/m<SU>3</SU> at concentrations of 100 <E T="61">μ</E>g/m<SU>3</SU> to <E T="61">±</E>7 <E T="61">μ</E>g/m<SU>3</SU> at concentrations of 400 <E T="61">μ</E>g/m<SU>3</SU>.</FP>

        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">• The day-to-day variability within an individual laboratory (repeatability) varies linearly with concentration from <E T="61">±</E>18.1 <E T="61">μ</E>g/m<SU>3</SU> at levels of 100 <E T="61">μ</E>g/m<SU>3</SU> to <E T="61">±</E>50.9 <E T="61">μ</E>g/m<SU>3</SU> at levels of 400 <E T="61">μ</E>g/m<SU>3</SU>.</FP>

        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">• The day-to-day variability between two or more laboratories (reproducibility) varies linearly with concentration from <E T="61">±</E>36.9 <E T="61">μ</E>g/m<SU>3</SU> at levels of 100 <E T="61">μ</E>g/m<SU>3</SU> to <E T="61">±</E>103.5 <E T="61">μ</E> g/m<SU>3</SU> at levels of 400 <E T="61">μ</E>g/m<SU>3</SU>.</FP>

        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">• The method has a concentration-dependent bias, which becomes significant at the 95 percent confidence level at the high concentration level. Observed values tend to be lower than the expected SO<E T="52">2</E> concentration level.</FP>
        
        <P>6.0 <E T="03">Stability.</E>
        </P>

        <P>6.1 By sampling in a controlled temperature environment of 15°<E T="61">±</E>10 °C, greater than 98.9 percent of the SO<E T="52">2</E>-TCM complex is retained at the completion of sampling. (<E T="03">15</E>) If kept at 5 °C following the completion of sampling, the collected sample has been found to be stable for up to 30 days.(<E T="03">10</E>) The presence of EDTA enhances the stability of SO<E T="52">2</E> in the TCM solution and the rate of decay is independent of the concentration of SO<E T="52">2</E>.(<E T="03">16</E>)</P>
        <P>7.0 <E T="03">Apparatus.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.1 <E T="03">Sampling.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.1.1 <E T="03">Sample probe:</E> A sample probe meeting the requirements of section 7 of 40 CFR part 58, appendix E (Teflon<E T="04">®</E> or glass with residence time less than 20 sec.) is used to transport ambient air to the sampling train location. The end of the probe should be designed or oriented to preclude the sampling of precipitation, large particles, etc. A suitable probe can be constructed from Teflon<E T="04">®</E> tubing connected to an inverted funnel.</P>
        <P>7.1.2 <E T="03">Absorber—short-term sampling:</E> An all glass midget impinger having a solution capacity of 30 mL and a stem clearance of 4<E T="61">±</E>1 mm from the bottom of the vessel is used for sampling periods of 30 minutes and 1 hour (or any period considerably less than 24 hours). Such an impinger is shown in Figure 1. These impingers are commercially available from distributors such as Ace Glass, Incorporated.</P>
        <P>7.1.3 <E T="03">Absorber—24-hour sampling:</E> A polypropylene tube 32 mm in diameter and 164 mm long (available from Bel Art Products, Pequammock, NJ) is used as the absorber. The cap of the absorber must be a polypropylene cap with two ports (rubber stoppers are unacceptable because the absorbing reagent can react with the stopper to yield erroneously high SO<E T="52">2</E> concentrations). A glass impinger stem, 6 mm in diameter and 158 mm long, is inserted into one port of the absorber cap. The tip of the stem is tapered to a small diameter orifice (0.4<E T="61">±</E>0.1 mm) such that a No. 79 jeweler's drill bit will pass through the opening but a No. 78 drill bit <PRTPAGE P="11"/>will not. Clearance from the bottom of the absorber to the tip of the stem must be 6<E T="61">±</E>2 mm. Glass stems can be fabricated by any reputable glass blower or can be obtained from a scientific supply firm. Upon receipt, the orifice test should be performed to verify the orifice size. The 50 mL volume level should be permanently marked on the absorber. The assembled absorber is shown in Figure 2.</P>
        <P>7.1.4 <E T="03">Moisture trap:</E> A moisture trap constructed of a glass trap as shown in Figure 1 or a polypropylene tube as shown in Figure 2 is placed between the absorber tube and flow control device to prevent entrained liquid from reaching the flow control device. The tube is packed with indicating silica gel as shown in Figure 2. Glass wool may be substituted for silica gel when collecting short-term samples (1 hour or less) as shown in Figure 1, or for long term (24 hour) samples if flow changes are not routinely encountered.</P>
        <P>7.1.5 <E T="03">Cap seals:</E> The absorber and moisture trap caps must seal securely to prevent leaks during use. Heat-shrink material as shown in Figure 2 can be used to retain the cap seals if there is any chance of the caps coming loose during sampling, shipment, or storage.</P>
        <GPH DEEP="420" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="12"/>
          <GID>50-702.eps</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="497" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="13"/>
          <GID>50-703.eps</GID>
        </GPH>
        <PRTPAGE P="14"/>
        <P>7.1.6 <E T="03">Flow control device:</E> A calibrated rotameter and needle valve combination capable of maintaining and measuring air flow to within <E T="61">±</E>2 percent is suitable for short-term sampling but may not be used for long-term sampling. A critical orifice can be used for regulating flow rate for both long-term and short-term sampling. A 22-gauge hypodermic needle 25 mm long may be used as a critical orifice to yield a flow rate of approximately 1 L/min for a 30-minute sampling period. When sampling for 1 hour, a 23-gauge hypodermic needle 16 mm in length will provide a flow rate of approximately 0.5 L/min. Flow control for a 24-hour sample may be provided by a 27-gauge hypodermic needle critical orifice that is 9.5 mm in length. The flow rate should be in the range of 0.18 to 0.22 L/min.</P>
        <P>7.1.7 <E T="03">Flow measurement device:</E> Device calibrated as specified in 9.4.1 and used to measure sample flow rate at the monitoring site.</P>
        <P>7.1.8 <E T="03">Membrane particle filter:</E> A membrane filter of 0.8 to 2 μm porosity is used to protect the flow controller from particles during long-term sampling. This item is optional for short-term sampling.</P>
        <P>7.1.9 <E T="03">Vacuum pump:</E> A vacuum pump equipped with a vacuum gauge and capable of maintaining at least 70 kPa (0.7 atm) vacuum differential across the flow control device at the specified flow rate is required for sampling.</P>
        <P>7.1.10 <E T="03">Temperature control device:</E> The temperature of the absorbing solution during sampling must be maintained at 15° <E T="61">±</E>10 °C. As soon as possible following sampling and until analysis, the temperature of the collected sample must be maintained at 5° <E T="61">±</E>5 °C. Where an extended period of time may elapse before the collected sample can be moved to the lower storage temperature, a collection temperature near the lower limit of the 15 <E T="61">±</E> 10 °C range should be used to minimize losses during this period. Thermoelectric coolers specifically designed for this temperature control are available commercially and normally operate in the range of 5° to 15 °C. Small refrigerators can be modified to provide the required temperature control; however, inlet lines must be insulated from the lower temperatures to prevent condensation when sampling under humid conditions. A small heating pad may be necessary when sampling at low temperatures (<E T="61">&lt;</E>7 °C) to prevent the absorbing solution from freezing.<E T="03">(17)</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.1.11 <E T="03">Sampling train container:</E> The absorbing solution must be shielded from light during and after sampling. Most commercially available sampler trains are enclosed in a light-proof box.</P>
        <P>7.1.12 <E T="03">Timer:</E> A timer is recommended to initiate and to stop sampling for the 24-hour period. The timer is not a required piece of equipment; however, without the timer a technician would be required to start and stop the sampling manually. An elapsed time meter is also recommended to determine the duration of the sampling period.</P>
        <P>7.2 <E T="03">Shipping.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.2.1 <E T="03">Shipping container:</E> A shipping container that can maintain a temperature of 5° <E T="61">±</E>5 °C is used for transporting the sample from the collection site to the analytical laboratory. Ice coolers or refrigerated shipping containers have been found to be satisfactory. The use of eutectic cold packs instead of ice will give a more stable temperature control. Such equipment is available from Cole-Parmer Company, 7425 North Oak Park Avenue, Chicago, IL 60648.</P>
        <P>7.3 <E T="03">Analysis.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.3.1 <E T="03">Spectrophoto-meter:</E> A spectrophotom-eter suitable for measurement of absorb-ances at 548 nm with an effective spectral bandwidth of less than 15 nm is required for analysis. If the spectrophotometer reads out in transmittance, convert to absorbance as follows:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="13" SPAN="1">
          <MID>EC08NO91.000</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">A = absorbance, and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">T = transmittance (0<E T="61">&lt;≧</E>T<E T="61">&lt;</E>1).</FP>
        
        <P>A standard wavelength filter traceable to the National Bureau of Standards is used to verify the wavelength calibration according to the procedure enclosed with the filter. The wavelength calibration must be verified upon initial receipt of the instrument and after each 160 hours of normal use or every 6 months, whichever occurs first.</P>
        <P>7.3.2 <E T="03">Spectrophotometer cells:</E> A set of 1-cm path length cells suitable for use in the visible region is used during analysis. If the cells are unmatched, a matching correction factor must be determined according to Section 10.1.</P>
        <P>7.3.3 <E T="03">Temperature control device:</E> The color development step during analysis must be conducted in an environment that is in the range of 20° to 30 °C and controlled to <E T="61">±</E>1 °C. Both calibration and sample analysis must be performed under identical conditions (within 1 °C). Adequate temperature control may be obtained by means of constant temperature baths, water baths with manual temperature control, or temperature controlled rooms.</P>
        <P>7.3.4 <E T="03">Glassware:</E> Class A volumetric glassware of various capacities is required for preparing and standardizing reagents and standards and for dispensing solutions during analysis. These included pipets, volumetric flasks, and burets.</P>
        <P>7.3.5 <E T="03">TCM waste receptacle:</E> A glass waste receptacle is required for the storage of spent TCM solution. This vessel should be stoppered and stored in a hood at all times.</P>
        <P>8.0 <E T="03">Reagents.</E>
        </P>
        <P>8.1 <E T="03">Sampling.</E>
          <PRTPAGE P="15"/>
        </P>
        <P>8.1.1 <E T="03">Distilled water:</E> Purity of distilled water must be verified by the following procedure:(<E T="03">18</E>)</P>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">• Place 0.20 mL of potassium permanganate solution (0.316 g/L), 500 mL of distilled water, and 1mL of concentrated sulfuric acid in a chemically resistant glass bottle, stopper the bottle, and allow to stand.</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">• If the permanganate color (pink) does not disappear completely after a period of 1 hour at room temperature, the water is suitable for use.</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">• If the permanganate color does disappear, the water can be purified by redistilling with one crystal each of barium hydroxide and potassium permanganate in an all glass still.</FP>
        
        <P>8.1.2 <E T="03">Absorbing reagent</E> (0.04 M potassium tetrachloromercurate [TCM]): Dissolve 10.86 g mercuric chloride, 0.066 g EDTA, and 6.0 g potassium chloride in distilled water and dilute to volume with distilled water in a 1,000-mL volumetric flask. (<E T="03">Caution:</E> Mercuric chloride is highly poisonous. If spilled on skin, flush with water immediately.) The pH of this reagent should be between 3.0 and 5.0 (<E T="03">10</E>) Check the pH of the absorbing solution by using pH indicating paper or a pH meter. If the pH of the solution is not between 3.0 and 5.0, dispose of the solution according to one of the disposal techniques described in Section 13.0. The absorbing reagent is normally stable for 6 months. If a precipitate forms, dispose of the reagent according to one of the procedures described in Section 13.0.</P>
        <P>8.2 <E T="03">Analysis</E>.</P>
        <P>8.2.1 <E T="03">Sulfamic acid</E> (0.6%): Dissolve 0.6 g sulfamic acid in 100 mL distilled water. Perpare fresh daily.</P>
        <P>8.2.2 <E T="03">Formaldehyde</E> (0.2%): Dilute 5 mL formaldehyde solution (36 to 38 percent) to 1,000 mL with distilled water. Prepare fresh daily.</P>
        <P>8.2.3 <E T="03">Stock iodine solution</E> (0.1 N): Place 12.7 g resublimed iodine in a 250-mL beaker and add 40 g potassium iodide and 25 mL water. Stir until dissolved, transfer to a 1,000 mL volumetric flask and dilute to volume with distilled water.</P>
        <P>8.2.4 <E T="03">Iodine solution</E> (0.01 N): Prepare approximately 0.01 N iodine solution by diluting 50 mL of stock iodine solution (Section 8.2.3) to 500 mL with distilled water.</P>
        <P>8.2.5 <E T="03">Starch indicator solution:</E> Triturate 0.4 g soluble starch and 0.002 g mercuric iodide (preservative) with enough distilled water to form a paste. Add the paste slowly to 200 mL of boiling distilled water and continue boiling until clear. Cool and transfer the solution to a glass stopperd bottle.</P>
        <P>8.2.6 <E T="03">1 N hydrochloric acid:</E> Slowly and while stirring, add 86 mL of concentrated hydrochloric acid to 500 mL of distilled water. Allow to cool and dilute to 1,000 mL with distilled water.</P>
        <P>8.2.7 <E T="03">Potassium iodate solution:</E> Accurately weigh to the nearest 0.1 mg, 1.5 g (record weight) of primary standard grade potassium iodate that has been previously dried at 180 °C for at least 3 hours and cooled in a dessicator. Dissolve, then dilute to volume in a 500-mL volumetric flask with distilled water.</P>
        <P>8.2.8 <E T="03">Stock sodium thiosulfate solution</E> (0.1 N): Prepare a stock solution by dissolving 25 g sodium thiosulfate (Na<E T="52">2</E> S<E T="52">2</E> O<E T="52">3</E>÷5H<E T="52">2</E> O) in 1,000 mL freshly boiled, cooled, distilled water and adding 0.1 g sodium carbonate to the solution. Allow the solution to stand at least 1 day before standardizing. To standardize, accurately pipet 50 mL of potassium iodate solution (Section 8.2.7) into a 500-mL iodine flask and add 2.0 g of potassium iodide and 10 mL of 1 N HCl. Stopper the flask and allow to stand for 5 minutes. Titrate the solution with stock sodium thiosulfate solution (Section 8.2.8) to a pale yellow color. Add 5 mL of starch solution (Section 8.2.5) and titrate until the blue color just disappears. Calculate the normality (N<E T="52">s</E>) of the stock sodium thiosulfate solution as follows:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="26" SPAN="1">
          <MID>EC08NO91.001</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">M = volume of thiosulfate required in mL, and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">W = weight of potassium iodate in g (recorded weight in Section 8.2.7).</FP>
        <MATH DEEP="19" SPAN="1">
          <MID>EC08NO91.002</MID>
        </MATH>
        <P>8.2.9<E T="03">Working sodium thiosulfate titrant</E> (0.01 N): Accurately pipet 100 mL of stock sodium thiosulfate solution (Section 8.2.8) into a 1,000-mL volumetric flask and dilute to volume with freshly boiled, cooled, distilled water. Calculate the normality of the working sodium thiosulfate titrant (N<E T="22">T</E>) as follows:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="13" SPAN="1">
          <MID>EC08NO91.003</MID>
        </MATH>
        <P>8.2.10 <E T="03">Standardized sulfite solution for the preparation of working sulfite-TCM solution:</E> Dissolve 0.30 g sodium metabisulfite (Na<E T="22">2</E> S<E T="22">2</E> O<E T="22">5</E>) or 0.40 g sodium sulfite (Na<E T="22">2</E> SO<E T="22">3</E>) in 500 mL of recently boiled, cooled, distilled water. (Sulfite solution is unstable; it is therefore important to use water of the highest purity to minimize this instability.) This solution contains the equivalent of 320 to 400 <E T="61">μ</E>g SO<E T="22">2</E>/mL. The actual concentration of the solution is determined by adding excess iodine and back-titrating with standard sodium thiosulfate solution. To back-titrate, pipet 50 mL of the 0.01 N iodine solution (Section 8.2.4) into each of two 500-mL iodine flasks (A and B). To flask A (blank) add 25 mL distilled water, and to flask B (sample) <PRTPAGE P="16"/>pipet 25 mL sulfite solution. Stopper the  flasks and allow to stand for 5 minutes. Prepare the working sulfite-TCM solution (Section 8.2.11) immediately prior to adding the iodine solution to the flasks. Using a buret containing standardized 0.01 N thiosulfate titrant (Section 8.2.9), titrate the solution in each flask to a pale yellow color. Then add 5 mL starch solution (Section 8.2.5) and continue the titration until the blue color just disappears.</P>
        <P>8.2.11 <E T="03">Working sulfite-TCM solution:</E> Accurately pipet 5 mL of the standard sulfite solution (Section 8.2.10) into a 250-mL volumetric flask and dilute to volume with 0.04 M TCM. Calculate the concentration of sulfur dioxide in the working solution as follows:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="27" SPAN="2">
          <MID>EC08NO91.004</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">A = volume of thiosulfate titrant required for the blank, mL;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">B = volume of thiosulfate titrant required for the sample, mL;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">N<E T="22">T</E> = normality of the thiosulfate titrant, from equation (3);</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">32,000 = milliequivalent weight of SO<E T="22">2,</E>
          <E T="61">μ</E>g;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">25 = volume of standard sulfite solution, mL; and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">0.02 = dilution factor.</FP>
        
        <P>This solution is stable for 30 days if kept at 5 °C. (16) If not kept at 5 °C, prepare fresh daily.</P>
        <P>8.2.12 <E T="03">Purified pararosaniline (PRA) stock solution</E> (0.2% nominal):</P>
        <P>8.2.12.1 <E T="03">Dye specifications—</E>
          
        </P>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">• The dye must have a maximum absorbance at a wavelength of 540 nm when assayed in a buffered solution of 0.1 M sodium acetate-acetic acid;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">• The absorbance of the reagent blank, which is temperature sensitive (0.015 absorbance unit/ °C), must not exceed 0.170 at 22 °C with a 1-cm optical path length when the blank is prepared according to the specified procedure;</FP>

        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">• The calibration curve (Section 10.0) must have a slope equal to 0.030<E T="61">±</E>0.002 absorbance unit/<E T="61">μ</E>g SO<E T="22">2</E> with a 1-cm optical path length when the dye is pure and the sulfite solution is properly standardized.</FP>
        
        <P>8.2.12.2 <E T="03">Preparation of stock PRA solution—</E> A specially purified (99 to 100 percent pure) solution of pararosaniline, which meets the above specifications, is commercially available in the required 0.20 percent concentration (Harleco Co.). Alternatively, the dye may be purified, a stock solution prepared, and then assayed according to the procedure as described below.<E T="03">(10)</E>
        </P>
        <P>8.2.12.3 <E T="03">Purification procedure for PRA—</E>
        </P>

        <P>1. Place 100 mL each of 1-butanol and 1 N HCl in a large separatory funnel (250-mL) and allow to equilibrate. Note: Certain batches of 1-butanol contain oxidants that create an SO<E T="22">2</E> demand. Before using, check by placing 20 mL of 1-butanol and 5 mL of 20 percent potassium iodide (KI) solution in a 50-mL separatory funnel and shake thoroughly. If a yellow color appears in the alcohol phase, redistill the 1-butanol from silver oxide and collect the middle fraction or purchase a new supply of 1-butanol.</P>
        <P>2. Weigh 100 mg of pararosaniline hydrochloride dye (PRA) in a small beaker. Add 50 mL of the equilibrated acid (drain in acid from the bottom of the separatory funnel in 1.) to the beaker and let stand for several minutes. Discard the remaining acid phase in the separatory funnel.</P>
        <P>3. To a 125-mL separatory funnel, add 50 mL of the equilibrated 1-butanol (draw the 1-butanol from the top of the separatory funnel in 1.). Transfer the acid solution (from 2.) containing the dye to the funnel and shake carefully to extract. The violet impurity will transfer to the organic phase.</P>
        <P>4. Transfer the lower aqueous phase into another separatory funnel, add 20 mL of equilibrated 1-butanol, and extract again.</P>
        <P>5. Repeat the extraction procedure with three more 10-mL portions of equilibrated 1-butanol.</P>
        <P>6. After the final extraction, filter the acid phase through a cotton plug into a 50-mL volumetric flask and bring to volume with 1 N HCl. This stock reagent will be a yellowish red.</P>
        <P>7. To check the purity of the PRA, perform the assay and adjustment of concentration (Section 8.2.12.4) and prepare a reagent blank (Section 11.2); the absorbance of this reagent blank at 540 nm should be less than 0.170 at 22 °C. If the absorbance is greater than 0.170 under these conditions, further extractions should be performed.</P>
        <P>8.2.12.4 <E T="03">PRA assay procedure—</E> The concentration of pararosaniline hydrochloride (PRA) need be assayed only once after purification. It is also recommended that commercial solutions of pararosaniline be assayed when first purchased. The assay procedure is as follows:<E T="03">(10)</E>
        </P>

        <P>1. Prepare 1 M acetate-acetic acid buffer stock solution with a pH of 4.79 by dissolving <PRTPAGE P="17"/>13.61 g of sodium acetate trihydrate in distilled water in a 100-mL volumetric flask. Add 5.70 mL of glacial acetic acid and dilute to volume with distilled water.</P>
        <P>2. Pipet 1 mL of the stock PRA solution obtained from the purification process or from a commercial source into a 100-mL volumetric flask and dilute to volume with distilled water.</P>
        <P>3. Transfer a 5-mL aliquot of the diluted PRA solution from 2. into a 50-mL volumetric flask. Add 5mL of 1 M acetate-acetic acid buffer solution from 1. and dilute the mixture to volume with distilled water. Let the mixture stand for 1 hour.</P>
        <P>4. Measure the absorbance of the above solution at 540 nm with a spectrophotometer against a distilled water reference. Compute the percentage of nominal concentration of PRA by</P>
        <MATH DEEP="26" SPAN="1">
          <MID>EC08NO91.005</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">A = measured absorbance of the final mixture (absorbance units);</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">W = weight in grams of the PRA dye used in the assay to prepare 50 mL of stock solution (for example, 0.100 g of dye was used to prepare 50 mL of solution in the purification procedure; when obtained from commercial sources, use the stated concentration to compute W; for 98% PRA, W=.098 g.); and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">K = 21.3 for spectrophotometers having a spectral bandwidth of less than 15 nm and a path length of 1 cm.</FP>
        
        <P>8.2.13  <E T="03">Pararosaniline reagent:</E> To a 250-mL volumetric flask, add 20 mL of stock PRA solution. Add an additional 0.2 mL of stock solution for each percentage that the stock assays below 100 percent. Then add 25 mL of 3 M phosphoric acid and dilute to volume with distilled water. The reagent is stable for at least 9 months. Store away from heat and light.</P>
        <P>9.0  <E T="03">Sampling Procedure.</E>
        </P>
        <P>9.1  <E T="03">General Considerations.</E> Procedures are described for short-term sampling (30-minute and 1-hour) and for long-term sampling (24-hour). Different combinations of absorbing reagent volume, sampling rate, and sampling time can be selected to meet special needs. For combinations other than those specifically described, the conditions must be adjusted so that linearity is maintained between absorbance and concentration over the dynamic range. Absorbing reagent volumes less than 10 mL are not recommended. The collection efficiency is above 98 percent for the conditions described; however, the efficiency may be substantially lower when sampling concentrations below 25<E T="61">μγ</E>SO<E T="52">2</E>/m<SU>3</SU>.(<E T="03">8,9</E>)</P>
        <P>9.2 <E T="03">30-Minute and 1-Hour Sampling.</E> Place 10 mL of TCM absorbing reagent in a midget impinger and seal the impinger with a thin film of silicon stopcock grease (around the ground glass joint). Insert the sealed impinger into the sampling train as shown in Figure 1, making sure that all connections between the various components are leak tight. Greaseless ball joint fittings, heat shrinkable Teflon<E T="51">®</E> tubing, or Teflon<E T="51">®</E> tube fittings may be used to attain leakfree conditions for portions of the sampling train that come into contact with air containing SO<E T="22">2.</E> Shield the absorbing reagent from direct sunlight by covering the impinger with aluminum foil or by enclosing the sampling train in a light-proof box. Determine the flow rate according to Section 9.4.2. Collect the sample at 1<E T="61">±</E>0.10 L/min for 30-minute sampling or 0.500<E T="61">±</E>0.05 L/min for 1-hour sampling. Record the exact sampling time in minutes, as the sample volume will later be determined using the sampling flow rate and the sampling time. Record the atmospheric pressure and temperature.</P>
        <P>9.3 <E T="03">24-Hour Sampling.</E> Place 50 mL of TCM absorbing solution in a large absorber, close the cap, and, if needed, apply the heat shrink material as shown in Figure 3. Verify that the reagent level is at the 50 mL mark on the absorber. Insert the sealed absorber into the sampling train as shown in Figure 2. At this time verify that the absorber temperature is controlled to 15<E T="61">±</E>10 °C. During sampling, the absorber temperature must be controlled to prevent decomposition of the collected complex. From the onset of sampling until analysis, the absorbing solution must be protected from direct sunlight. Determine the flow rate according to Section 9.4.2. Collect the sample for 24 hours from midnight to midnight at a flow rate of 0.200<E T="61">±</E>0.020 L/min. A start/stop timer is helpful for initiating and stopping sampling and an elapsed time meter will be useful for determining the sampling time.</P>
        <GPH DEEP="340" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="18"/>
          <GID>50-708.eps</GID>
        </GPH>
        <P>9.4 <E T="03">Flow Measurement.</E>
        </P>
        <P>9.4.1 <E T="03">Calibration:</E> Flow measuring devices used for the on-site flow measurements required in 9.4.2 must be calibrated against a reliable flow or volume standard such as an NBS traceable bubble flowmeter or calibrated wet test meter. Rotameters or critical orifices used in the sampling train may be calibrated, if desired, as a quality control check, but such calibration shall not replace the on-site flow measurements required by 9.4.2. In-line rotameters, if they are to be calibrated, should be calibrated in situ, with the appropriate volume of solution in the absorber.</P>
        <P>9.4.2 <E T="03">Determination of flow rate at sampling site:</E> For short-term samples, the standard flow rate is determined at the sampling site at the initiation and completion of sample collection with a calibrated flow measuring device connected to the inlet of the absorber. For 24-hour samples, the standard flow rate is determined at the time the absorber is placed in the sampling train and again when the absorber is removed from the train for shipment to the analytical laboratory with a calibrated flow measuring device connected to the inlet of the sampling train. The flow rate determination must be made with all components of the sampling system in operation (e.g., the absorber temperature controller and any sample box heaters must also be operating). Equation 6 may be used to determine the standard flow rate when a calibrated positive displacement meter is used as the flow measuring device. Other types of calibrated flow measuring devices may also be used to determine the flow rate at the sampling site provided that the user applies any appropriate corrections to devices for which output is dependent on temperature or pressure.</P>
        <MATH DEEP="33" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="19"/>
          <MID>EC08NO91.006</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Q<E T="52">std</E> = flow rate at standard conditions, std L/min (25 °C and 760 mm Hg);</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Q<E T="52">act</E> = flow rate at monitoring site conditions, L/min;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">P<E T="52">b</E> = barometric pressure at monitoring site conditions, mm Hg or kPa;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">RH = fractional relative humidity of the air being measured;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">P<E T="52">H</E>
          <E T="0362">2</E>
          <E T="52">O</E> = vapor pressure of water at the temperature of the air in the flow or volume standard, in the same units as P<E T="52">b,</E> (for wet volume standards only, i.e., bubble flowmeter or wet test meter; for dry standards, i.e., dry test meter, P<E T="52">H</E>
          <E T="0362">2</E>
          <E T="52">O</E>=0);</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">P<E T="52">std</E> = standard barometric pressure, in the same units as P<E T="52">b</E> (760 mm Hg or 101 kPa); and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">T<E T="52">meter</E> = temperature of the air in the flow or volume standard, °C (e.g., bubble flowmeter).</FP>
        
        <P>If a barometer is not available, the following equation may be used to determine the barometric pressure:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="12" SPAN="2">
          <MID>EC08NO91.007</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">H = sampling site elevation above sea level in meters.</FP>
        
        <P>If the initial flow rate (Q<E T="52">i</E>) differs from the flow rate of the critical orifice or the flow rate indicated by the flowmeter in the sampling train (Q<E T="52">c</E>) by more than 5 percent as determined by equation (8), check for leaks and redetermine Q<E T="52">i</E>.</P>
        <MATH DEEP="29" SPAN="1">
          <MID>EC08NO91.008</MID>
        </MATH>

        <P>Invalidate the sample if the difference between the initial (Q<E T="52">i</E>) and final (Q<E T="52">f</E>) flow rates is more than 5 percent as determined by equation (9):</P>
        <MATH DEEP="29" SPAN="1">
          <MID>EC08NO91.009</MID>
        </MATH>
        <P>9.5 <E T="03">Sample Storage and Shipment.</E> Remove the impinger or absorber from the sampling train and stopper immediately. Verify that the temperature of the absorber is not above 25 °C. Mark the level of the solution with a temporary (e.g., grease pencil) mark. If the sample will not be analyzed within 12 hours of sampling, it must be stored at 5° <E T="61">±</E>5 °C until analysis. Analysis must occur within 30 days. If the sample is transported or shipped for a period exceeding 12 hours, it is recommended that thermal coolers using eutectic ice packs, refrigerated shipping containers, etc., be used for periods up to 48 hours. (<E T="03">17</E>) Measure the temperature of the absorber solution when the shipment is received. Invalidate the sample if the temperature is above 10 °C. Store the sample at 5° <E T="61">±</E>5 °C until it is analyzed.</P>
        <P>10.0 <E T="03">Analytical Calibration.</E>
        </P>
        <P>10.1 <E T="03">Spectrophotometer Cell Matching.</E> If unmatched spectrophotometer cells are used, an absorbance correction factor must be determined as follows:</P>
        <P>1. Fill all cells with distilled water and designate the one that has the lowest absorbance at 548 nm as the reference. (This reference cell should be marked as such and continually used for this purpose throughout all future analyses.)</P>
        <P>2. Zero the spectrophotometer with the reference cell.</P>
        <P>3. Determine the absorbance of the remaining cells (A<E T="22">c</E>) in relation to the reference cell and record these values for future use. Mark all cells in a manner that adequately identifies the correction.</P>
        <P>The corrected absorbance during future analyses using each cell is determining as follows:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="13" SPAN="1">
          <MID>EC08NO91.010</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">A = corrected absorbance,</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">A<E T="22">obs</E> = uncorrected absorbance, and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">A<E T="22">c</E> = cell correction.</FP>
        
        <P>10.2 <E T="03">Static Calibration Procedure</E> (Option 1). Prepare a dilute working sulfite-TCM solution by diluting 10 mL of the working sulfite-TCM solution (Section 8.2.11) to 100 mL with TCM absorbing reagent. Following the table below, accurately pipet the indicated volumes of the sulfite-TCM solutions into a series of 25-mL volumetric flasks. Add TCM absorbing reagent as indicated to bring the volume in each flask to 10 mL.<PRTPAGE P="20"/>
        </P>
        <GPOTABLE CDEF="s40,8,8,8" COLS="4" OPTS="L2">
          <BOXHD>
            <CHED H="1">Sulfite-TCM solution</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Volume of sulfite-TCM solution</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Volume of TCM, mL</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Total μg SO<E T="22">2</E> (approx.*</CHED>
          </BOXHD>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Working</ENT>
            <ENT>4.0</ENT>
            <ENT>6.0</ENT>
            <ENT>28.8</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Working</ENT>
            <ENT>3.0</ENT>
            <ENT>7.0</ENT>
            <ENT>21.6</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Working</ENT>
            <ENT>2.0</ENT>
            <ENT>8.0</ENT>
            <ENT>14.4</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Dilute working</ENT>
            <ENT>10.0</ENT>
            <ENT>0.0</ENT>
            <ENT>7.2</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Dilute working</ENT>
            <ENT>5.0</ENT>
            <ENT>5.0</ENT>
            <ENT>3.6</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="11"/>
            <ENT>0.0</ENT>
            <ENT>10.0</ENT>
            <ENT>0.0</ENT>
          </ROW>

          <TNOTE>*Based on working sulfite-TCM solution concentration of 7.2 μg SO<E T="22">2</E>/mL; the actual total μg SO<E T="22">2</E> must be calculated using equation 11 below.</TNOTE>
        </GPOTABLE>

        <P>To each volumetric flask, add 1 mL 0.6% sulfamic acid (Section 8.2.1), accurately pipet 2 mL 0.2% formaldehyde solution (Section 8.2.2), then add 5 mL pararosaniline solution (Section 8.2.13). Start a laboratory timer that has been set for 30 minutes. Bring all flasks to volume with recently boiled and cooled distilled water and mix thoroughly. The color must be developed (during the 30-minute period) in a temperature environment in the range of 20° to 30 °C, which is controlled to <E T="21">±</E>1 °C. For increased precision, a constant temperature bath is recommended during the color development step. After 30 minutes, determine the corrected absorbance of each standard at 548 nm against a distilled water reference (Section 10.1). Denote this absorbance as (A). Distilled water is used in the reference cell rather than the reagant blank because of the temperature sensitivity of the reagent blank. Calculate the total micrograms SO<E T="22">2</E> in each solution:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="13" SPAN="2">
          <MID>EC08NO91.011</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">V<E T="22">TCM/SO</E>
          <E T="04">2</E> = volume of sulfite-TCM solution used, mL;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">C<E T="22">TCM/SO</E>
          <E T="04">2</E> = concentration of sulfur dioxide in the working sulfite-TCM, μg SO<E T="22">2</E>/mL (from equation 4); and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">D = dilution factor (D = 1 for the working sulfite-TCM solution; D = 0.1 for the diluted working sulfite-TCM solution).</FP>
        

        <P>A calibration equation is determined using the method of linear least squares (Section 12.1). The total micrograms SO<E T="22">2</E> contained in each solution is the x variable, and the corrected absorbance (eq. 10) associated with each solution is the y variable. For the calibration to be valid, the slope must be in the range of 0.030 <E T="21">±</E>0.002 absorbance unit/μg SO<E T="22">2,</E> the intercept as determined by the least squares method must be equal to or less than 0.170 absorbance unit when the color is developed at 22 °C (add 0.015 to this 0.170 specification for each °C above 22 °C) and the correlation coefficient must be greater than 0.998. If these criteria are not met, it may be the result of an impure dye and/or an improperly standardized sulfite-TCM solution. A calibration factor (B<E T="22">s</E>) is determined by calculating the reciprocal of the slope and is subsequently used for calculating the sample concentration (Section 12.3).</P>
        <P>10.3 <E T="03">Dynamic Calibration Procedures</E> (Option 2). Atmospheres containing accurately known concentrations of sulfur dioxide are prepared using permeation devices. In the systems for generating these atmospheres, the permeation device emits gaseous SO<E T="22">2</E> at a known, low, constant rate, provided the temperature of the device is held constant (<E T="21">±</E>0.1 °C) and the device has been accurately calibrated at the temperature of use. The SO<E T="22">2</E> permeating from the device is carried by a low flow of dry carrier gas to a mixing chamber where it is diluted with SO<E T="22">2</E>-free air to the desired concentration and supplied to a vented manifold. A typical system is shown schematically in Figure 4 and this system and other similar systems have been described in detail by O'Keeffe and Ortman; (<E T="03">19</E>) Scaringelli, Frey, and Saltzman, (<E T="03">20</E>) and Scaringelli, O'Keeffe, Rosenberg, and -Bell. (<E T="03">21</E>) Permeation devices may be prepared or purchased and in both cases must be traceable either to a National Bureau of Standards (NBS) Standard Reference Material (SRM 1625, SRM 1626, SRM 1627) or to an NBS/EPA-approved commercially available Certified Reference Material (CRM). CRM's are described in Reference 22, and a list of CRM sources is available from the address shown for Reference 22. A recommended protocol for certifying a permeation device to an NBS SRM or CRM is given in Section 2.0.7 of Reference 2. Device permeation rates of 0.2 to 0.4 μg/min, inert gas flows of about 50 mL/min, and dilution air flow rates from 1.1 to 15 L/min conveniently yield standard atmospheres in the range of 25 to 600 μg SO<E T="22">2</E>/m<E T="21">3</E> (0.010 to 0.230 ppm).</P>
        <P>10.3.1 <E T="03">Calibration Option 2A</E> (30-minute and 1-hour samples): Generate a series of six standard atmospheres of SO<E T="22">2</E> (e.g., 0, 50, 100, 200, 350, 500, 750 μg/m<E T="21">3</E>) by adjusting the dilution flow rates appropriately. The concentration of SO<E T="22">2</E> in each atmosphere is calculated as follows:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="32" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.014</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <PRTPAGE P="21"/>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">C<E T="22">a</E> = concentration of SO<E T="22">2</E> at standard conditions, μg/m<E T="21">3</E>;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">P<E T="22">r</E> = permeation rate, μg/min;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Q<E T="22">d</E> = flow rate of dilution air, std L/min; and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Q<E T="22">p</E> = flow rate of carrier gas across permeation device, std L/min.</FP>
        <GPH DEEP="454" SPAN="2">
          <GID>50-712.eps</GID>
        </GPH>
        <PRTPAGE P="22"/>

        <P>Be sure that the total flow rate of the standard exceeds the flow demand of the sample train, with the excess flow vented at atmospheric pressure. Sample each atmosphere using similar apparatus as shown in Figure 1 and under the same conditions as field sampling (i.e., use same absorbing reagent volume and sample same volume of air at an equivalent flow rate). Due to the length of the sampling periods required, this method is not recommended for 24-hour sampling. At the completion of sampling, quantitatively transfer the contents of each impinger to one of a series of 25-mL volumetric flasks (if 10 mL of absorbing solution was used) using small amounts of distilled water for rinse (<E T="61">&lt;</E>5mL). If <E T="61">&gt;</E>10 mL of absorbing solution was used, bring the absorber solution in each impinger to orginal volume with distilled H<E T="52">2</E> O and pipet 10-mL portions from each impinger into a series of 25-mL volumetric flasks. If the color development steps are not to be started within 12 hours of sampling, store the solutions at 5° <E T="61">±</E> 5 °C. Calculate the total micrograms SO<E T="52">2</E> in each solution as follows:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="27" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.015</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">C<E T="52">a</E> = concentration of SO<E T="52">2</E> in the standard atmosphere, <E T="61">μ</E>g/m<SU>3</SU> ;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">O<E T="52">s</E> = sampling flow rate, std L/min;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">t=sampling time, min;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">V<E T="52">a</E> = volume of absorbing solution used for color development (10 mL); and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">V<E T="52">b</E> = volume of absorbing solution used for sampling, mL.</FP>
        

        <P>Add the remaining reagents for color development in the same manner as in Section 10.2 for static solutions. Calculate a calibration equation and a calibration factor (B<E T="52">g</E>) according to Section 10.2, adhering to all the specified criteria.</P>

        <P>10.3.2 Calibration Option 2B (24-hour samples): Generate a standard atmosphere containing approximately 1,050 <E T="61">μ</E>g SO<E T="52">2</E>/m<SU>3</SU> and calculate the exact concentration according to equation 12. Set up a series of six absorbers according to Figure 2 and connect to a common manifold for sampling the standard atmosphere. Be sure that the total flow rate of the standard exceeds the flow demand at the sample manifold, with the excess flow vented at atmospheric pressure. The absorbers are then allowed to sample the atmosphere for varying time periods to yield solutions containing 0, 0.2, 0.6, 1.0, 1.4, 1.8, and 2.2 <E T="61">μ</E>g SO<E T="52">2</E>/mL solution. The sampling times required to attain these solution concentrations are calculated as follows:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="28" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.016</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">t = sampling time, min;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">V<E T="52">b</E> = volume of absorbing solution used for sampling (50 mL);</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">C<E T="52">s</E> = desired concentration of SO<E T="52">2</E> in the absorbing solution, <E T="61">μ</E>g/mL;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">C<E T="52">a</E> = concentration of the standard atmosphere calculated according to equation 12, <E T="61">μ</E>g/m<SU>3</SU> ; and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Q<E T="52">s</E> = sampling flow rate, std L/min.</FP>
        

        <P>At the completion of sampling, bring the absorber solutions to original volume with distilled water. Pipet a 10-mL portion from each absorber into one of a series of 25-mL volumetric flasks. If the color development steps are not to be started within 12 hours of sampling, store the solutions at 5° <E T="61">±</E> 5 °C. Add the remaining reagents for color development in the same manner as in Section 10.2 for static solutions. Calculate the total <E T="61">μ</E>g SO<E T="52">2</E> in each standard as follows:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="32" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.017</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">V<E T="52">a</E> = volume of absorbing solution used for color development (10 mL).</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">All other parameters are defined in equation 14.</FP>
        

        <P>Calculate a calibration equation and a calibration factor (B<E T="52">t</E>) according to Section 10.2 adhering to all the specified criteria.</P>
        <P>11.0 <E T="03">Sample Preparation and Analysis.</E>
        </P>
        <P>11.1 <E T="03">Sample Preparation.</E> Remove the samples from the shipping container. If the shipment period exceeded 12 hours from the completion of sampling, verify that the temperature is below 10 °C. Also, compare the solution level to the temporary level mark on the absorber. If either the temperature is above 10 °C or there was significant loss (more than 10 mL) of the sample during shipping, make an appropriate notation in the record and invalidate the sample. Prepare the samples for analysis as follows:</P>

        <P>1. For 30-minute or 1-hour samples: Quantitatively transfer the entire 10 mL amount of absorbing solution to a 25-mL volumetric flask and rinse with a small amount (<E T="61">&lt;</E>5 mL) of distilled water.</P>

        <P>2. For 24-hour samples: If the volume of the sample is less than the original 50-mL volume (permanent mark on the absorber), adjust the volume back to the original volume with distilled water to compensate for water lost to evaporation during sampling. If the final volume is greater than the original volume, the volume must be measured using a graduated cylinder. To analyze, pipet 10 mL <PRTPAGE P="23"/>of the solution into a 25-mL volumetric flask.</P>
        <P>11.2 <E T="03">Sample Analysis.</E> For each set of determinations, prepare a reagent blank by adding 10 mL TCM absorbing solution to a 25-mL volumetric flask, and two control standards  containing  approximately  5  and -15 <E T="61">μ</E>g SO<E T="52">2,</E> respectively. The control standards are prepared according to Section 10.2 or 10.3. The analysis is carried out as follows:</P>
        <P>1. Allow the sample to stand 20 minutes after the completion of sampling to allow any ozone to decompose (if applicable).</P>
        <P>2. To each 25-mL volumetric flask containing reagent blank, sample, or control standard, add 1 mL of 0.6% sulfamic acid (Section 8.2.1) and allow to react for 10 min.</P>
        <P>3. Accurately pipet 2 mL of 0.2% formaldehyde solution (Section 8.2.2) and then 5 mL of pararosaniline solution (Section 8.2.13) into each flask. Start a laboratory timer set at 30 minutes.</P>
        <P>4. Bring each flask to volume with recently boiled and cooled distilled water and mix thoroughly.</P>

        <P>5. During the 30 minutes, the solutions must be in a temperature controlled environment in the range of 20° to 30 °C maintained to <E T="21">±</E> 1 °C. This temperature must also be within 1 °C of that used during calibration.</P>

        <P>6. After 30 minutes and before 60 minutes, determine the corrected absorbances (equation 10) of each solution at 548 nm using 1-cm optical path length cells against a distilled water reference (Section 10.1). (<E T="03">Distilled water is used as a reference instead of the reagent blank because of the sensitivity of the reagent blank to temperature.)</E>
        </P>
        <P>7. Do not allow the colored solution to stand in the cells because a film may be deposited. Clean the cells with isopropyl alcohol after use.</P>
        <P>8. The reagent blank must be within 0.03 absorbance units of the intercept of the calibration equation determined in Section 10.</P>
        <P>11.3 <E T="03">Absorbance range.</E> If the absorbance of the sample solution ranges between 1.0 and 2.0, the sample can be diluted 1:1 with a portion of the reagent blank and the absorbance redetermined within 5 minutes. Solutions with higher absorbances can be diluted up to sixfold with the reagent blank in order to obtain scale readings of less than 1.0 absorbance unit. However, it is recommended that a smaller portion (<E T="61">&lt;</E>10 mL) of the original sample be reanalyzed (if possible) if the sample requires a dilution greater than 1:1.</P>
        <P>11.4 <E T="03">Reaqent disposal.</E> All reagents containing mercury compounds must be stored and disposed of using one of the procedures contained in Section 13. Until disposal, the discarded solutions can be stored in closed glass containers and should be left in a fume hood.</P>
        <P>12.0 <E T="03">Calculations.</E>
        </P>
        <P>12.1 <E T="03">Calibration Slope, Intercept, and Correlation Coefficient.</E> The method of least squares is used to calculate a calibration equation in the form of:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="12" SPAN="1">
          <MID>EC08NO91.012</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">y = corrected absorbance,</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">m = slope, absorbance unit/μg SO<E T="52">2,</E>
        </FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x = micrograms of SO<E T="52">2,</E>
        </FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">b = y intercept (absorbance units).</FP>
        
        <P>The slope (m), intercept (b), and correlation coefficient (r) are calculated as follows:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="22" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.018</MID>
        </MATH>
        <MATH DEEP="21" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.019</MID>
        </MATH>
        <MATH DEEP="25" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.020</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where n is the number of calibration points.</FP>
        <P>A data form (Figure 5) is supplied for easily organizing calibration data when the slope, intercept, and correlation coefficient are calculated by hand.</P>
        <P>12.2 <E T="03">Total Sample Volume.</E> Determine the sampling volume at standard conditions as follows:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="25" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.021</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">V<E T="52">std</E> = sampling volume in std L,</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Q<E T="52">i</E> = standard flow rate determined at the initiation of sampling in std L/min,</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Q<E T="52">f</E> = standard flow rate determined at the completion of sampling is std L/min, and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">t = total sampling time, min.</FP>
        
        <P>12.3 <E T="03">Sulfur Dioxide Concentration.</E> Calculate and report the concentration of each sample as follows:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="32" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.022</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">A = corrected absorbance of the sample solution, from equation (10);</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">A<E T="52">o</E> = corrected absorbance of the reagent blank, using equation (10);</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">B<E T="52">x</E> = calibration factor equal to B<E T="52">s,</E> B<E T="52">g,</E> or B<E T="52">t</E> depending on the calibration procedure used, the reciprocal of the slope of the calibration equation;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">V<E T="52">a</E> = volume of absorber solution analyzed, mL;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">V<E T="52">b</E> = total volume of solution in absorber (see 11.1-2), mL; and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">V<E T="52">std</E> = standard air volume sampled, std L (from Section 12.2).<PRTPAGE P="24"/>
        </FP>
        <GPOTABLE CDEF="s5,r5,r5,r5,r5,4" COLS="6" OPTS="L2">
          <TTITLE>
            <E T="04">Data Form</E>
          </TTITLE>
          <TDESC>[For hand calculations]</TDESC>
          <BOXHD>
            <CHED H="1">Calibration point no.</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Micro- grams So<E T="52">2</E>
            </CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Absor- bance units</CHED>
            <CHED H="1"/>
            <CHED H="1"/>
            <CHED H="1"/>
          </BOXHD>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="22"/>
            <ENT O="oi0">(x) </ENT>
            <ENT O="oi0">(y) </ENT>
            <ENT O="oi0">x<E T="51">2</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT O="oi0">xy </ENT>
            <ENT O="oi0">y<E T="51">2</E>
            </ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">1</ENT>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">2</ENT>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">3</ENT>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">4</ENT>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">5</ENT>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">6</ENT>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
          </ROW>
        </GPOTABLE>
        <FP>
          <E T="61">Σ</E> x=<E T="72">___</E>
          <E T="61">Σ</E> y=<E T="72">___</E>
          <E T="61">Σ</E> x<SU>2</SU>=<E T="72">___</E>
          <E T="61">Σ</E>xy<E T="72">___</E>
          <E T="61">Σ</E>y<SU>2</SU>
          <E T="72">___</E>
        </FP>
        <FP>n=<E T="72">___</E> (number of pairs of coordinates.)</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-DASH"/>
        
        <FP>
          <E T="04">Figure 5.</E> Data form for hand calculations.</FP>
        

        <P>12.4 Control Standards. Calculate the analyzed micrograms of SO<E T="22">2</E> in each control standard as follows:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="15" SPAN="1">
          <MID>EC08NO91.070</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">C<E T="22">q</E> = analyzed <E T="61">μ</E>g SO<E T="22">2</E> in each control standard,</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">A = corrected absorbance of the control standard, and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">A<E T="22">o</E> = corrected absorbance of the reagent blank.</FP>
        

        <P>The difference between the true and analyzed values of the control standards must not be greater than 1 <E T="61">μ</E>g. If the difference is greater than 1 <E T="61">μ</E>g, the source of the discrepancy must be identified and corrected.</P>
        <P>12.5 Conversion of <E T="61">μ</E>g/m<E T="21">3</E> to ppm (v/v). If desired, the concentration of sulfur dioxide at reference conditions can be converted to ppm SO<E T="22">2</E> (v/v) as follows:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="25" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.023</MID>
        </MATH>
        <P>13.0 The TCM absorbing solution and any reagents containing mercury compounds must be treated and disposed of by one of the methods discussed below. Both methods remove greater than 99.99 percent of the mercury.</P>
        <P>13.1 <E T="03">Disposal of Mercury-Containing Solutions.</E>
        </P>
        <P>13.2 <E T="03">Method for Forming an Amalgam.</E>
        </P>
        <P>1. Place the waste solution in an uncapped vessel in a hood.</P>
        <P>2. For each liter of waste solution, add approximately 10 g of sodium carbonate until neutralization has occurred (NaOH may have to be used).</P>
        <P>3. Following neutralization, add 10 g of granular zinc or magnesium.</P>
        <P>4. Stir the solution in a hood for 24 hours. Caution must be exercised as hydrogen gas is evolved by this treatment process.</P>
        <P>5. After 24 hours, allow the solution to stand without stirring to allow the mercury amalgam (solid black material) to settle to the bottom of the waste receptacle.</P>
        <P>6. Upon settling, decant and discard the supernatant liquid.</P>
        <P>7. Quantitatively transfer the solid material to a container and allow to dry.</P>
        <P>8. The solid material can be sent to a mercury reclaiming plant. It must not be discarded.</P>
        <P>13.3 <E T="03">Method Using Aluminum Foil Strips.</E>
        </P>
        <P>1. Place the waste solution in an uncapped vessel in a hood.</P>
        <P>2. For each liter of waste solution, add approximately 10 g of aluminum foil strips. If all the aluminum is consumed and no gas is evolved, add an additional 10 g of foil. Repeat until the foil is no longer consumed and allow the gas to evolve for 24 hours.</P>
        <P>3. Decant the supernatant liquid and discard.</P>
        <P>4. Transfer the elemental mercury that has settled to the bottom of the vessel to a storage container.</P>
        <P>5. The mercury can be sent to a mercury reclaiming plant. It must not be discarded.</P>
        <P>14.0 <E T="03">References for SO</E>
          <E T="22">2</E>
          <E T="03">Method.</E>
        </P>
        <P>1. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems, Volume I, Principles. EPA-600/9-76-005, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711, 1976.</P>
        <P>2. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems, Volume II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711, 1977.</P>

        <P>3. Dasqupta, P. K., and K. B. DeCesare. Stability of Sulfur Dioxide in Formaldehyde and Its Anomalous Behavior in Tetrachloromercurate (II). Submitted for publication in <E T="03">Atmospheric Environment,</E> 1982.</P>
        <P>4. West, P. W., and G. C. Gaeke. Fixation of Sulfur Dioxide as Disulfitomercurate (II) and Subsequent Colorimetric Estimation. Anal. Chem., 28:1816, 1956.</P>
        <P>5. Ephraim, F. Inorganic Chemistry. P. C. L. Thorne and E. R. Roberts, Eds., 5th Edition, Interscience, 1948, p. 562.</P>
        <P>6. Lyles, G. R., F. B. Dowling, and V. J. Blanchard. Quantitative Determination of Formaldehyde in the Parts Per Hundred Million Concentration Level. J. Air. Poll. Cont. Assoc., Vol. 15(106), 1965.</P>
        <P>7. McKee, H. C., R. E. Childers, and O. Saenz, Jr. Collaborative Study of Reference Method for Determination of Sulfur Dioxide in the Atmosphere (Pararosaniline Method). EPA-APTD-0903, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711, September 1971.</P>

        <P>8. Urone, P., J. B. Evans, and C. M. Noyes. Tracer Techniques in Sulfur—Air Pollution Studies Apparatus and Studies of Sulfur Dioxide Colorimetric and Conductometric Methods. Anal. Chem., 37: 1104, 1965.<PRTPAGE P="25"/>
        </P>
        <P>9. Bostrom, C. E. The Absorption of Sulfur Dioxide at Low Concentrations (pphm) Studied by an Isotopic Tracer Method. Intern. J. Air Water Poll., 9:333, 1965.</P>
        <P>10. Scaringelli, F. P., B. E. Saltzman, and S. A. Frey. Spectrophotometric Determination of Atmospheric Sulfur Dioxide. Anal. Chem., 39: 1709, 1967.</P>
        <P>11. Pate, J. B., B. E. Ammons, G. A. Swanson, and J. P. Lodge, Jr. Nitrite Interference in Spectrophotometric Determination of Atmospheric Sulfur Dioxide. Anal. Chem., 37:942, 1965.</P>
        <P>12. Zurlo, N., and A. M. Griffini. Measurement of the Sulfur Dioxide Content of the Air in the Presence of Oxides of Nitrogen and Heavy Metals. Medicina Lavoro, 53:330, 1962.</P>
        <P>13. Rehme, K. A., and F. P. Scaringelli. Effect of Ammonia on the Spectrophotometric Determination of Atmospheric Concentrations of Sulfur Dioxide. Anal. Chem., 47:2474, 1975.</P>
        <P>14. McCoy, R. A., D. E. Camann, and H. C. McKee. Collaborative Study of Reference Method for Determination of Sulfur Dioxide in the Atmosphere (Pararosaniline Method) (24-Hour Sampling). EPA-650/4-74-027, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711, December 1973.</P>
        <P>15. Fuerst, R. G. Improved Temperature Stability of Sulfur Dioxide Samples Collected by the Federal Reference Method. EPA-600/4-78-018, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711, April 1978.</P>
        <P>16. Scaringelli, F. P., L. Elfers, D. Norris, and S. Hochheiser. Enhanced Stability of Sulfur Dioxide in Solution. Anal. Chem., 42:1818, 1970.</P>
        <P>17. Martin, B. E. Sulfur Dioxide Bubbler Temperature Study. EPA-600/4-77-040, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711, August 1977.</P>
        <P>18. American Society for Testing and Materials. ASTM Standards, Water; Atmospheric Analysis. Part 23. Philadelphia, PA, October 1968, p. 226.</P>
        <P>19. O'Keeffe, A. E., and G. C. Ortman. Primary Standards for Trace Gas Analysis. Anal. Chem., 38:760, 1966.</P>
        <P>20. Scaringelli, F. P., S. A. Frey, and B. E. Saltzman. Evaluation of Teflon Permeation Tubes for Use with Sulfur Dioxide. Amer. Ind. Hygiene Assoc. J., 28:260, 1967.</P>
        <P>21. Scaringelli, F. P., A. E. O'Keeffe, E. Rosenberg, and J. P. Bell, Preparation of Known Concentrations of Gases and Vapors With Permeation Devices Calibrated Gravimetrically. Anal. Chem., 42:871, 1970.</P>
        <P>22. A Procedure for Establishing Traceability of Gas Mixtures to Certain National Bureau of Standards Standard Reference Materials. EPA-600/7-81-010, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory (MD-77), Research Triangle Park, NC 27711, January 1981.</P>
        <CITA>[47 FR 54899, Dec. 6, 1982; 48 FR 17355, Apr. 22, 1983]</CITA>
      </APPENDIX>
      <APPENDIX>
        <EAR>Pt. 50, App. B</EAR>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">
          <E T="05">Appendix B to Part 50—Reference Method for the Determination of Suspended Particulate Matter in the Atmosphere (High-Volume Method)</E>
        </HD>
        <P>1.0 <E T="03">Applicability.</E>
        </P>
        <P>1.1 This method provides a measurement of the mass concentration of total suspended particulate matter (TSP) in ambient air for determining compliance with the primary and secondary national ambient air quality standards for particulate matter as specified in § 50.6 and § 50.7 of this chapter. The measurement process is nondestructive, and the size of the sample collected is usually adequate for subsequent chemical analysis. Quality assurance procedures and guidance are provided in part 58, appendixes A and B, of this chapter and in References 1 and 2.</P>
        <P>2.0 <E T="03">Principle.</E>
        </P>

        <P>2.1 An air sampler, properly located at the measurement site, draws a measured quantity of ambient air into a covered housing and through a filter during a 24-hr (nominal) sampling period. The sampler flow rate and the geometry of the shelter favor the collection of particles up to 25-50 <E T="61">μ</E>m (aerodynamic diameter), depending on wind speed and direction.(<E T="03">3</E>) The filters used are specified to have a minimum collection efficiency of 99 percent for 0.3 <E T="61">μ</E>m (DOP) particles (see Section 7.1.4).</P>

        <P>2.2 The filter is weighed (after moisture equilibration) before and after use to determine the net weight (mass) gain. The total volume of air sampled, corrected to EPA standard conditions (25 °C, 760 mm Hg [101 kPa]), is determined from the measured flow rate and the sampling time. The concentration of total suspended particulate matter in the ambient air is computed as the mass of collected particles divided by the volume of air sampled, corrected to standard conditions, and is expressed in micrograms per standard cubic meter (<E T="61">μ</E>g/std m<E T="51">3</E>). For samples collected at temperatures and pressures significantly different than standard conditions, these corrected concentrations may differ substantially from actual concentrations (micrograms per actual cubic meter), particularly at high elevations. The actual particulate matter concentration can be calculated from the corrected concentration using the actual temperature and pressure during the sampling period.</P>
        <P>3.0 <E T="03">Range.</E>
        </P>

        <P>3.1 The approximate concentration range of the method is 2 to 750 <E T="61">μ</E>g/std m<E T="51">3.</E> The upper limit is determined by the point at which the sampler can no longer maintain the specified <PRTPAGE P="26"/>flow rate due to the increased pressure drop of the loaded filter. This point is affected by particle size distribution, moisture content of the collected particles, and variability from filter to filter, among other things. The lower limit is determined by the sensitivity of the balance (see Section 7.10) and by inherent sources of error (see Section 6).</P>

        <P>3.2 At wind speeds between 1.3 and 4.5 m/sec (3 and 10 mph), the high-volume air sampler has been found to collect particles up to 25 to 50 <E T="61">μ</E>m, depending on wind speed and direction.(<E T="03">3</E>) For the filter specified in Section 7.1, there is effectively no lower limit on the particle size collected.</P>
        <P>4.0 <E T="03">Precision.</E>
        </P>

        <P>4.1 Based upon collaborative testing, the relative standard deviation (coefficient of variation) for single analyst precision (repeatability) of the method is 3.0 percent. The corresponding value for interlaboratory precision (reproducibility) is 3.7 percent.(<E T="03">4</E>)</P>
        <P>5.0 <E T="03">Accuracy.</E>
        </P>
        <P>5.1 The absolute accuracy of the method is undefined because of the complex nature of atmospheric particulate matter and the difficulty in determining the “true” particulate matter concentration. This method provides a measure of particulate matter concentration suitable for the purpose specified under Section 1.0, Applicability.</P>
        <P>6.0 <E T="03">Inherent Sources of Error.</E>
        </P>
        <P>6.1 <E T="03">Airflow variation.</E> The weight of material collected on the filter represents the (integrated) sum of the product of the instantaneous flow rate times the instantaneous particle concentration. Therefore, dividing this weight by the average flow rate over the sampling period yields the true particulate matter concentration only when the flow rate is constant over the period. The error resulting from a nonconstant flow rate depends on the magnitude of the instantaneous changes in the flow rate and in the particulate matter concentration. Normally, such errors are not large, but they can be greatly reduced by equipping the sampler with an automatic flow controlling mechanism that maintains constant flow during the sampling period. Use of a contant flow controller is recommended.*<FTREF/>
        </P>
        <FTNT>
          <P>*At elevated altitudes, the effectiveness of automatic flow controllers may be reduced because of a reduction in the maximum sampler flow.</P>
        </FTNT>
        <P>6.2 <E T="03">Air volume measurement.</E> If the flow rate changes substantially or nonuniformly during the sampling period, appreciable error in the estimated air volume may result from using the average of the presampling and postsampling flow rates. Greater air volume measurement accuracy may be achieved by (1) equipping the sampler with a flow controlling mechanism that maintains constant air flow during the sampling period,* (2) using a calibrated, continuous flow rate recording device to record the actual flow rate during the samping period and integrating the flow rate over the period, or (3) any other means that will accurately measure the total air volume sampled during the sampling period. Use of a continuous flow recorder is recommended, particularly if the sampler is not equipped with a constant flow controller.</P>
        <P>6.3 <E T="03">Loss of volatiles.</E> Volatile particles collected on the filter may be lost during subsequent sampling or during shipment and/or storage of the filter prior to the postsampling weighing.(<E T="03">5</E>) Although such losses are largely unavoidable, the filter should be reweighed as soon after sampling as practical.</P>
        <P>6.4 <E T="03">Artifact particulate matter.</E> Artifact particulate matter can be formed on the surface of alkaline glass fiber filters by oxidation of acid gases in the sample air, resulting in a higher than true TSP determination.(<E T="03">6 7</E>) This effect usually occurs early in the sample period and is a function of the filter pH and the presence of acid gases. It is generally believed to account for only a small percentage of the filter weight gain, but the effect may become more significant where relatively small particulate weights are collected.</P>
        <P>6.5 <E T="03">Humidity.</E> Glass fiber filters are comparatively insensitive to changes in relative humidity, but collected particulate matter can be hygroscopic.(<E T="03">8</E>) The moisture conditioning procedure minimizes but may not completely eliminate error due to moisture.</P>
        <P>6.6 <E T="03">Filter handling.</E> Careful handling of the filter between the presampling and postsampling weighings is necessary to avoid errors due to loss of fibers or particles from the filter. A filter paper cartridge or cassette used to protect the filter can minimize handling errors. (See Reference 2, Section 2).</P>
        <P>6.7 <E T="03">Nonsampled particulate matter.</E> Particulate matter may be deposited on the filter by wind during periods when the sampler is inoperative. (<E T="03">9</E>) It is recommended that errors from this source be minimized by an automatic mechanical device that keeps the filter covered during nonsampling periods, or by timely installation and retrieval of filters to minimize the nonsampling periods prior to and following operation.</P>
        <P>6.8 <E T="03">Timing errors.</E> Samplers are normally controlled by clock timers set to start and stop the sampler at midnight. Errors in the nominal 1,440-min sampling period may result from a power interruption during the sampling period or from a discrepancy between the start or stop time recorded on the filter information record and the actual start or stop time of the sampler. Such discrepancies may be caused by (1) poor resolution of the timer set-points, (2) timer error due to power interruption, (3) missetting of <PRTPAGE P="27"/>the timer, or (4) timer malfunction. In general, digital electronic timers have much better set-point resolution than mechanical timers, but require a battery backup system to maintain continuity of operation after a power interruption. A continuous flow recorder or elapsed time meter provides an indication of the sampler run-time, as well as indication of any power interruption during the sampling period and is therefore recommended.</P>
        <P>6.9 <E T="03">Recirculation of sampler exhaust.</E> Under stagnant wind conditions, sampler exhaust air can be resampled. This effect does not appear to affect the TSP measurement substantially, but may result in increased carbon and copper in the collected sample. (<E T="03">10</E>) This problem can be reduced by ducting the exhaust air well away, preferably downwind, from the sampler.</P>
        <P>7.0 <E T="03">Apparatus.</E>
        </P>
        <P>(See References 1 and 2 for quality assurance information.)</P>
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>

          <P>Samplers purchased prior to the effective date of this amendment are not subject to specifications preceded by (<E T="61">†</E>).</P>
        </NOTE>
        <P>7.1 <E T="03">Filter.</E> (Filters supplied by the Environmental Protection Agency can be assumed to meet the following criteria. Additional specifications are required if the sample is to be analyzed chemically.)</P>
        <P>7.1.1 <E T="03">Size:</E> 20.3 <E T="61">±</E> 0.2 <E T="61">×</E> 25.4 <E T="61">±</E> 0.2 <E T="11">cm (nominal 8 </E>× 10 in).</P>
        <P>7.1.2 <E T="03">Nominal exposed area:</E> 406.5 cm<SU>2</SU> (63 in<SU>2</SU>).</P>
        <P>7.1.3. <E T="03">Material:</E> Glass fiber or other relatively inert, nonhygroscopic material. (<E T="03">8</E>)</P>
        <P>7.1.4 <E T="03">Collection efficiency:</E> 99 percent minimum as measured by the DOP test (ASTM-2986) for particles of 0.3 <E T="61">μ</E>m diameter.</P>
        <P>7.1.5 <E T="03">Recommended pressure drop range:</E> 42-54 mm Hg (5.6-7.2 kPa) at a flow rate of 1.5 std m<SU>3</SU>/min through the nominal exposed area.</P>
        <P>7.1.6 <E T="03">pH:</E> 6 to 10. (<E T="03">11</E>)</P>
        <P>7.1.7 <E T="03">Integrity:</E> 2.4 mg maximum weight loss. (<E T="03">11</E>)</P>
        <P>7.1.8 <E T="03">Pinholes:</E> None.</P>
        <P>7.1.9 <E T="03">Tear strength:</E> 500 g minimum for 20 mm wide strip cut from filter in weakest dimension. (See ASTM Test D828-60).</P>
        <P>7.1.10 <E T="03">Brittleness:</E> No cracks or material separations after single lengthwise crease.</P>
        <P>7.2 <E T="03">Sampler.</E> The air sampler shall provide means for drawing the air sample, via reduced pressure, through the filter at a uniform face velocity.</P>
        <P>7.2.1 The sampler shall have suitable means to:</P>
        <P>a. Hold and seal the filter to the sampler housing.</P>
        <P>b. Allow the filter to be changed conveniently.</P>
        <P>c. Preclude leaks that would cause error in the measurement of the air volume passing through the filter.</P>
        <P>d. (<E T="61">†</E>)<FTREF/> Manually adjust the flow rate to accommodate variations in filter pressure drop and site line voltage and altitude. The adjustment may be accomplished by an automatic flow controller or by a manual flow adjustment device. Any manual adjustment device must be designed with positive detents or other means to avoid unintentional changes in the setting.</P>
        <FTNT>
          <P>(<E T="61">†</E>) See note at beginning of Section 7 of this appendix.</P>
        </FTNT>
        <P>7.2.2 <E T="03">Minimum sample flow rate, heavily loaded filter:</E> 1.1 m<E T="21">3</E>/min (39 ft<E T="21">3</E>/min).<E T="61">††</E>
          <FTREF/>
        </P>
        <FTNT>
          <P>
            <E T="61">††</E> These specifications are in actual air volume units; to convert to EPA standard air volume units, multiply the specifications by (P<E T="52">b</E>/P<E T="52">std</E>)(298/T) where P<E T="52">b</E> and T are the barometric pressure in mm Hg (or kPa) and the temperature in K at the sampler, and P<E T="22">std</E> is 760 mm Hg (or 101 kPa).</P>
        </FTNT>
        <P>7.2.3 <E T="03">Maximum sample flow rate, clean filter:</E> 1.7 m<E T="21">3</E>/min (60 ft<E T="21">3</E>/min).<E T="61">††</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.2.4 <E T="03">Blower Motor:</E> The motor must be capable of continuous operation for 24-hr periods.</P>
        <P>7.3 <E T="03">Sampler shelter.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.3.1 The sampler shelter shall:</P>
        <P>a. Maintain the filter in a horizontal position at least 1 m above the sampler supporting surface so that sample air is drawn downward through the filter.</P>
        <P>b. Be rectangular in shape with a gabled roof, similar to the design shown in Figure 1.</P>
        <P>c. Cover and protect the filter and sampler from precipitation and other weather.</P>
        <P>d. Discharge exhaust air at least 40 cm from the sample air inlet.</P>
        <P>e. Be designed to minimize the collection of dust from the supporting surface by incorporating a baffle between the exhaust outlet and the supporting surface.</P>

        <P>7.3.2 The sampler cover or roof shall overhang the sampler housing somewhat, as shown in Figure 1, and shall be mounted so as to form an air inlet gap between the cover and the sampler housing walls. <E T="51">†</E> This sample air inlet should be approximately uniform on all sides of the sampler. <E T="51">†</E> The area of the sample air inlet must be sized to provide an effective particle capture air velocity of between 20 and 35 cm/sec at the recommended operational flow rate. The capture velocity is the sample air flow rate divided by the inlet area measured in a horizontal plane at the lower edge of the cover. <E T="51">†</E> Ideally, the inlet area and operational flow rate should be selected to obtain a capture air velocity of 25 <E T="61">±</E>
          <E T="11">2 cm/sec.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.4 <E T="03">Flow rate measurement devices.</E>
        </P>

        <P>7.4.1 The sampler shall incorporate a flow rate measurement device capable of indicating the total sampler flow rate. Two common types of flow indicators covered in the calibration procedure are (1) an electronic mass flowmeter and (2) an orifice or orifices located in the sample air stream together with <PRTPAGE P="28"/>a suitable pressure indicator such as a manometer, or aneroid pressure gauge. A pressure recorder may be used with an orifice to provide a continuous record of the flow. Other types of flow indicators (including rotameters) having comparable precision and accuracy are also acceptable.</P>
        <P>7.4.2 <E T="61">†</E> The flow rate measurement device must be capable of being calibrated and read in units corresponding to a flow rate which is readable to the nearest 0.02 std m<E T="51">3</E>/min over the range 1.0 to 1.8 std m<E T="51">3</E>/min.</P>
        <P>7.5 <E T="03">Thermometer,</E> to indicate the approximate air temperature at the flow rate measurement orifice, when temperature corrections are used.</P>
        <P>7.5.1 <E T="03">Range:</E> −40° to +50 °C (223-323 K).</P>
        <P>7.5.2 <E T="03">Resolution:</E> 2 °C (2 K).</P>
        <P>7.6 <E T="03">Barometer,</E> to indicate barometric pressure at the flow rate measurement orifice, when pressure corrections are used.</P>
        <P>7.6.1 <E T="03">Range:</E> 500 to 800 mm Hg (66-106 kPa).</P>
        <P>7.6.2 <E T="03">Resolution:</E>
          <E T="61">±</E>
          <E T="11">5 mm Hg (0.67 kPa).</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.7 <E T="03">Timing/control device.</E>
        </P>

        <P>7.7.1 The timing device must be capable of starting and stopping the sampler to obtain an elapsed run-time of 24 hr <E T="61">±</E>1 hr (1,440 <E T="61">±</E>60 min).</P>
        <P>7.7.2 <E T="03">Accuracy of time setting:</E>
          <E T="61">±</E>
          <E T="11">30 min, or better. (See Section 6.8).</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.8 <E T="03">Flow rate transfer standard,</E> traceable to a primary standard. (See Section 9.2.)</P>
        <P>7.8.1 <E T="03">Approximate range:</E> 1.0 to 1.8 m<E T="21">3</E>/min.</P>
        <P>7.8.2 <E T="03">Resolution:</E> 0.02 m<E T="21">3</E>/min.</P>
        <P>7.8.3 <E T="03">Reproducibility:</E>
          <E T="61">±</E>
          <E T="11">2 percent (2 times coefficient of variation) over normal ranges of ambient temperature and pressure for the stated flow rate range. (See Reference 2, Section 2.)</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.8.4 <E T="03">Maximum pressure drop at 1.7 std m</E>
          <E T="21">3</E>
          <E T="11">/min; 50 cm H</E>
          <E T="02">2</E> O (5 kPa).</P>
        <P>7.8.5 The flow rate transfer standard must connect without leaks to the inlet of the sampler and measure the flow rate of the total air sample.</P>

        <P>7.8.6 The flow rate transfer standard must include a means to vary the sampler flow rate over the range of 1.0 to 1.8 m<E T="21">3</E>/min (35-64 ft<E T="21">3</E>/min) by introducing various levels of flow resistance between the sampler and the transfer standard inlet.</P>
        <P>7.8.7 The conventional type of flow transfer standard consists of: An orifice unit with adapter that connects to the inlet of the sampler, a manometer or other device to measure orifice pressure drop, a means to vary the flow through the sampler unit, a thermometer to measure the ambient temperature, and a barometer to measure ambient pressure. Two such devices are shown in Figures 2a and 2b. Figure 2a shows multiple fixed resistance plates, which necessitate disassembly of the unit each time the flow resistance is changed. A preferable design, illustrated in Figure 2b, has a variable flow restriction that can be adjusted externally without disassembly of the unit. Use of a conventional, orifice-type transfer standard is assumed in the calibration procedure (Section 9). However, the use of other types of transfer standards meeting the above specifications, such as the one shown in Figure 2c, may be approved; see the note following Section 9.1.</P>
        <P>7.9 <E T="03">Filter conditioning environment</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.9.1 <E T="03">Controlled temperature:</E> between 15° and 30 °C with less than <E T="21">±</E>3 °C variation during equilibration period.</P>
        <P>7.9.2 <E T="03">Controlled humidity:</E> Less than 50 percent relative humidity, constant within <E T="21">±</E>5 percent.</P>
        <P>7.10 <E T="03">Analytical balance.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.10.1 <E T="03">Sensitivity:</E> 0.1 mg.</P>
        <P>7.10.2 Weighing chamber designed to accept an unfolded 20.3 x 25.4 cm (8 x 10 in) filter.</P>
        <P>7.11 <E T="03">Area light source,</E> similar to X-ray film viewer, to backlight filters for visual inspection.</P>
        <P>7.12 <E T="03">Numbering device,</E> capable of printing identification numbers on the filters before they are placed in the filter conditioning environment, if not numbered by the supplier.</P>
        <P>8.0 <E T="03">Procedure.</E>
        </P>
        <P>(See References 1 and 2 for quality assurance information.)</P>
        <P>8.1 Number each filter, if not already numbered, near its edge with a unique identification number.</P>
        <P>8.2 Backlight each filter and inspect for pinholes, particles, and other imperfections; filters with visible imperfections must not be used.</P>
        <P>8.3 Equilibrate each filter in the conditioning environment for at least 24-hr.</P>

        <P>8.4 Following equilibration, weigh each filter to the nearest milligram and record this tare weight (W<E T="52">i</E>) with the filter identification number.</P>
        <P>8.5 Do not bend or fold the filter before collection of the sample.</P>
        <P>8.6 Open the shelter and install a numbered, preweighed filter in the sampler, following the sampler manufacturer's instructions. During inclement weather, precautions must be taken while changing filters to prevent damage to the clean filter and loss of sample from or damage to the exposed filter. Filter cassettes that can be loaded and unloaded in the laboratory may be used to minimize this problem (See Section 6.6).</P>
        <P>8.7 Close the shelter and run the sampler for at least 5 min to establish run-temperature conditions.</P>

        <P>8.8 Record the flow indicator reading and, if needed, the barometric pressure (P <E T="22">3</E>) and the ambient temperature (T <E T="22">3</E>) see NOTE following step 8.12). Stop the sampler. Determine the sampler flow rate (see Section 10.1); if it is outside the acceptable range (1.1 to 1.7 m<E T="21">3</E>/min [39-60 ft<E T="21">3</E>/min]), use a different filter, or adjust the sampler flow rate. Warning: Substantial flow adjustments may affect the <PRTPAGE P="29"/>calibration of the orifice-type flow indicators and may necessitate recalibration.</P>
        <P>8.9 Record the sampler identification information (filter number, site location or identification number, sample date, and starting time).</P>
        <P>8.10 Set the timer to start and stop the sampler such that the sampler runs 24-hrs, from midnight to midnight (local time).</P>
        <P>8.11 As soon as practical following the sampling period, run the sampler for at least 5 min to again establish run-temperature conditions.</P>

        <P>8.12 Record the flow indicator reading and, if needed, the barometric pressure (P <E T="22">3</E>) and the ambient temperature (T <E T="22">3</E>).</P>
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>

          <P>No onsite pressure or temperature measurements are necessary if the sampler flow indicator does not require pressure or temperature corrections (e.g., a mass flowmeter) or if average barometric pressure and seasonal average temperature for the site are incorporated into the sampler calibration (see step 9.3.9). For individual pressure and temperature corrections, the ambient pressure and temperature can be obtained by onsite measurements or from a nearby weather station. Barometric pressure readings obtained from airports must be station pressure, not corrected to sea level, and may need to be corrected for differences in elevation between the sampler site and the airport. For samplers having flow recorders but not constant flow controllers, the average temperature and pressure at the site <E T="03">during the sampling period</E> should be estimated from weather bureau or other available data.</P>
        </NOTE>
        <P>8.13 Stop the sampler and carefully remove the filter, following the sampler manufacturer's instructions. Touch only the outer edges of the filter. See the precautions in step 8.6.</P>
        <P>8.14 Fold the filter in half lengthwise so that only surfaces with collected particulate matter are in contact and place it in the filter holder (glassine envelope or manila folder).</P>

        <P>8.15 Record the ending time or elapsed time on the filter information record, either from the stop set-point time, from an elapsed time indicator, or from a continuous flow record. The sample period must be 1,440 <E T="61">±</E> 60 min. for a valid sample.</P>
        <P>8.16 Record on the filter information record any other factors, such as meteorological conditions, construction activity, fires or dust storms, etc., that might be pertinent to the measurement. If the sample is known to be defective, void it at this time.</P>
        <P>8.17 Equilibrate the exposed filter in the conditioning environment for at least 24-hrs.</P>
        <P>8.18 Immediately after equilibration, reweigh the filter to the nearest milligram and record the gross weight with the filter identification number. See Section 10 for TSP concentration calculations.</P>
        <P>9.0 <E T="03">Calibration.</E>
        </P>
        <P>9.1 Calibration of the high volume sampler's flow indicating or control device is necessary to establish traceability of the field measurement to a primary standard via a flow rate transfer standard. Figure 3a illustrates the certification of the flow rate transfer standard and Figure 3b illustrates its use in calibrating a sampler flow indicator. Determination of the corrected flow rate from the sampler flow indicator, illustrated in Figure 3c, is addressed in Section 10.1</P>
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>
          <P>The following calibration procedure applies to a conventional orifice-type flow transfer standard and an orifice-type flow indicator in the sampler (the most common types). For samplers using a pressure recorder having a square-root scale, 3 other acceptable calibration procedures are provided in Reference 12. Other types of transfer standards may be used if the manufacturer or user provides an appropriately modified calibration procedure that has been approved by EPA under Section 2.8 of appendix C to part 58 of this chapter.</P>
        </NOTE>
        <P>9.2 <E T="03">Certification of the flow rate transfer standard.</E>
        </P>
        <P>9.2.1 <E T="03">Equipment required:</E> Positive displacement standard volume meter traceable to the National Bureau of Standards (such as a Roots meter or equivalent), stop-watch, manometer, thermometer, and barometer.</P>
        <P>9.2.2 Connect the flow rate transfer standard to the inlet of the standard volume meter. Connect the manometer to measure the pressure at the inlet of the standard volume meter. Connect the orifice manometer to the pressure tap on the transfer standard. Connect a high-volume air pump (such as a high-volume sampler blower) to the outlet side of the standard volume meter. See Figure 3a.</P>
        <P>9.2.3 Check for leaks by temporarily clamping both manometer lines (to avoid fluid loss) and blocking the orifice with a large-diameter rubber stopper, wide cellophane tape, or other suitable means. Start the high-volume air pump and note any change in the standard volume meter reading. The reading should remain constant. If the reading changes, locate any leaks by listening for a whistling sound and/or retightening all connections, making sure that all gaskets are properly installed.</P>
        <P>9.2.4 After satisfactorily completing the leak check as described above, unclamp both manometer lines and zero both manometers.</P>

        <P>9.2.5 Achieve the appropriate flow rate through the system, either by means of the variable flow resistance in the transfer standard or by varying the voltage to the air pump. (Use of resistance plates as shown in Figure 1a is discouraged because the above leak check must be repeated each time a new resistance plate is installed.) At least five different but constant flow rates, evenly distributed, with at least three in the specified <PRTPAGE P="30"/>flow rate interval (1.1 to 1.7 m<SU>3</SU>/min [39-60 ft <SU>3</SU>/min]), are required.</P>
        <P>9.2.6 Measure and record the certification data on a form similar to the one illustrated in Figure 4 according to the following steps.</P>
        <P>9.2.7 Observe the barometric pressure and record as P<E T="52">1</E> (item 8 in Figure 4).</P>

        <P>9.2.8 Read the ambient temperature in the vicinity of the standard volume meter and record it as T<E T="52">1</E> (item 9 in Figure 4).</P>
        <P>9.2.9 Start the blower motor, adjust the flow, and allow the system to run for at least 1 min for a constant motor speed to be attained.</P>

        <P>9.2.10 Observe the standard volume meter reading and simultaneously start a stopwatch. Record the initial meter reading (V<E T="52">i</E>) in column 1 of Figure 4.</P>
        <P>9.2.11 Maintain this constant flow rate until at least 3 m<E T="51">3</E> of air have passed through the standard volume meter. Record the standard volume meter inlet pressure manometer reading as <E T="61">Δ</E>P (column 5 in Figure 4), and the orifice manometer reading as <E T="61">Δ</E>H (column 7 in Figure 4). Be sure to indicate the correct units of measurement.</P>
        <P>9.2.12 After at least 3 m<E T="51">3</E> of air have passed through the system, observe the standard volume meter reading while simultaneously stopping the stopwatch. Record the final meter reading (V<E T="52">f</E>) in column 2 and the elapsed time (t) in column 3 of Figure 4.</P>

        <P>9.2.13 Calculate the volume measured by the standard volume meter at meter conditions of temperature and pressures as V<E T="52">m</E>=V<E T="52">f</E>−V<E T="52">i.</E> Record in column 4 of Figure 4.</P>
        <P>9.2.14 Correct this volume to standard volume (std m<E T="51">3</E>
          <E T="11">) as follows:</E>
        </P>
        <MATH DEEP="29" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.024</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">V<E T="52">std</E> = standard volume, std m<E T="51">3</E>
          <E T="11">;</E>
        </FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">V<E T="52">m</E> = actual volume measured by the standard volume meter;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">P<E T="52">1</E> = barometric pressure during calibration, mm Hg or kPa;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
          <E T="61">Δ</E>P = differential pressure at inlet to volume meter, mm Hg or kPa;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">P<E T="52">std</E> = 760 mm Hg or 101 kPa;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">T<E T="52">std</E> = 298 K;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">T<E T="52">1</E> = ambient temperature during calibration, K.</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Calculate the standard flow rate (std m<E T="51">3</E>/min) as follows:</FP>
        <MATH DEEP="23" SPAN="1">
          <MID>EC08NO91.013</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Q<E T="52">std</E> = standard volumetric flow rate, std m<E T="51">3</E>/min</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">t = elapsed time, minutes.</FP>
        
        <P>Record Q<E T="52">std</E> to the nearest 0.01 std m<E T="51">3</E>/min in column 6 of Figure 4.</P>

        <P>9.2.15 Repeat steps 9.2.9 through 9.2.14 for at least four additional constant flow rates, evenly spaced over the approximate range of 1.0 to 1.8 std m<E T="51">3</E>/min (35-64 ft<SU>3</SU>/min).</P>
        <P>9.2.16 For each flow, compute
        </P>
        <FP>
          <E T="61">√ΔΔ</E>H (P<E T="22">1</E>/P<E T="22">std</E>)(298/T<E T="22">1</E>)</FP>
        
        <FP>(column 7a of Figure 4) and plot these value against Q<E T="52">std</E> as shown in Figure 3a. Be sure to use consistent units (mm Hg or kPa) for barometric pressure. Draw the orifice transfer standard certification curve or calculate the linear least squares slope (m) and intercept (b) of the certification curve:</FP>
        
        <FP>
          <E T="61">√ΔΔ</E>H (P<E T="22">1</E>/P<E T="22">std</E>)(298/T<E T="22">1</E>)</FP>
        
        <FP>=mQ<E T="52">std</E>+b. See Figures 3 and 4. A certification graph should be readable to 0.02 std m<SU>3</SU>/min.</FP>
        <P>9.2.17 Recalibrate the transfer standard annually or as required by applicable quality control procedures. (See Reference 2.)</P>
        <P>9.3 <E T="03">Calibration of sampler flow indicator.</E>
        </P>
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>
          <P>For samplers equipped with a flow controlling device, the flow controller must be disabled to allow flow changes during calibration of the sampler's flow indicator, or the alternate calibration of the flow controller given in 9.4 may be used. For samplers using an orifice-type flow indicator downstream of the motor, do not vary the flow rate by adjusting the voltage or power supplied to the sampler.</P>
        </NOTE>
        <P>9.3.1 A form similar to the one illustrated in Figure 5 should be used to record the calibration data.</P>
        <P>9.3.2 Connect the transfer standard to the inlet of the sampler. Connect the orifice manometer to the orifice pressure tap, as illustrated in Figure 3b. Make sure there are no leaks between the orifice unit and the sampler.</P>
        <P>9.3.3 Operate the sampler for at least 5 minutes to establish thermal equilibrium prior to the calibration.</P>
        <P>9.3.4 Measure and record the ambient temperature, T<E T="52">2,</E> and the barometric pressure, P<E T="52">2,</E> during calibration.</P>
        <P>9.3.5 Adjust the variable resistance or, if applicable, insert the appropriate resistance plate (or no plate) to achieve the desired flow rate.</P>

        <P>9.3.6 Let the sampler run for at least 2 min to re-establish the run-temperature conditions. Read and record the pressure drop across the orifice (<E T="61">Δ</E>H) and the sampler flow rate indication (I) in the appropriate columns of Figure 5.</P>
        <P>9.3.7 Calculate <E T="61">√ΔΔ</E>H(P<E T="22">2</E>/P<E T="22">std</E>)(298/T<E T="22">2</E>) and determine the flow rate at standard conditions (Q<E T="22">std</E>) either graphically from the certification curve or by calculating Q<E T="22">std</E> from the least square slope and intercept of the transfer standard's transposed certification curve: Q<E T="22">std</E>=1/m <E T="61">√Δ</E>H(P<E T="22">2</E>/P<E T="22">std</E>)(298/T<E T="22">2</E>)−b. Record the value of Q<E T="22">std</E> on Figure 5.<PRTPAGE P="31"/>
        </P>

        <P>9.3.8 Repeat steps 9.3.5, 9.3.6, and 9.3.7 for several additional flow rates distributed over a range that includes 1.1 to 1.7 std m<E T="21">3</E>/min.</P>

        <P>9.3.9 Determine the calibration curve by plotting values of the appropriate expression involving I, selected from table 1, against Q<E T="22">std.</E> The choice of expression from table 1 depends on the flow rate measurement device used (see Section 7.4.1) and also on whether the calibration curve is to incorporate geographic average barometric pressure (P<E T="22">a</E>) and seasonal average temperature (T<E T="22">a</E>) for the site to approximate actual pressure and temperature. Where P<E T="22">a</E> and T<E T="22">a</E> can be determined for a site for a seasonal period such that the actual barometric pressure and temperature at the site do not vary by more than <E T="61">±</E>60 mm Hg (8 kPa) from P<E T="22">a</E> or <E T="61">±</E>15 °C from T<E T="22">a,</E> respectively, then using P<E T="22">a</E> and T<E T="22">a</E> avoids the need for subsequent pressure and temperature calculation when the sampler is used. The geographic average barometric pressure (P<E T="22">a</E>) may be estimated from an altitude-pressure table or by making an (approximate) elevation correction of −26 mm Hg (−3.46 kPa) for each 305 m (1,000 ft) above sea level (760 mm Hg or 101 kPa). The seasonal average temperature (T<E T="22">a</E>) may be estimated from weather station or other records. Be sure to use consistent units (mm Hg or kPa) for barometric pressure.</P>

        <P>9.3.10 Draw the sampler calibration curve or calculate the linear least squares slope (m), intercept (b), and correlation coefficient of the calibration curve: [Expression from table 1]= mQ<E T="22">std</E>+b. See Figures 3 and 5. Calibration curves should be readable to 0.02 std m<E T="21">3</E>/min.</P>
        <P>9.3.11 For a sampler equipped with a flow controller, the flow controlling mechanism should be re-enabled and set to a flow near the lower flow limit to allow maximum control range. The sample flow rate should be verified at this time with a clean filter installed. Then add two or more filters to the sampler to see if the flow controller maintains a constant flow; this is particularly important at high altitudes where the range of the flow controller may be reduced.</P>
        <P>9.4 Alternate calibration of flow-controlled samplers. A flow-controlled sampler may be calibrated solely at its controlled flow rate, provided that previous operating history of the sampler demonstrates that the flow rate is stable and reliable. In this case, the flow indicator may remain uncalibrated but should be used to indicate any relative change between initial and final flows, and the sampler should be recalibrated more often to minimize potential loss of samples because of controller malfunction.</P>
        <P>9.4.1 Set the flow controller for a flow near the lower limit of the flow range to allow maximum control range.</P>
        <P>9.4.2 Install a clean filter in the sampler and carry out steps 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.3.4, 9.3.6, and 9.3.7.</P>
        <P>9.4.3 Following calibration, add one or two additional clean filters to the sampler, reconnect the transfer standard, and operate the sampler to verify that the controller maintains the same calibrated flow rate; this is particularly important at high altitudes where the flow control range may be reduced.</P>
        <GPH DEEP="200" SPAN="2">
          <GID>50-723.eps</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="217" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="32"/>
          <GID>50-724.eps</GID>
        </GPH>
        
        <P>10.0 <E T="03">Calculations of TSP Concentration.</E>
        </P>
        <P>10.1 Determine the average sampler flow rate during the sampling period according to either 10.1.1 or 10.1.2 below.</P>

        <P>10.1.1 For a sampler without a continuous flow recorder, determine the appropriate expression to be used from table 2 corresponding to the one from table 1 used in step 9.3.9. Using this appropriate expression, determine Q<E T="22">std</E> for the initial flow rate from the sampler calibration curve, either graphically or from the transposed regression equation:
        </P>
        <FP>Q<E T="22">std</E> =</FP>
        <FP>1/m ([Appropriate expression from table 2]−b)</FP>
        
        <FP>Similarly, determine Q<E T="22">std</E> from the final flow reading, and calculate the average flow Q<E T="22">std</E> as one-half the sum of the initial and final flow rates.</FP>

        <P>10.1.2 For a sampler with a continuous flow recorder, determine the average flow rate device reading, I, for the period. Determine the appropriate expression from table 2 corresponding to the one from table 1 used in step 9.3.9. Then using this expression and the average flow rate reading, determine Q<E T="22">std</E> from the sampler calibration curve, either graphically or from the transposed regression equation:
        </P>
        <FP>Q<E T="22">std</E> =</FP>
        
        <FP>1/m ([Appropriate expression from table 2]−b)</FP>

        <P>If the trace shows substantial flow change during the sampling period, greater accuracy may be achieved by dividing the sampling period into intervals and calculating an average reading before determining Q<E T="22">std</E>.</P>
        <P>10.2 Calculate the total air volume sampled as:
        </P>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">V−Q<E T="22">std</E>× t</FP>
        
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">V = total air volume sampled, in standard volume units, std m<SU>3</SU>/;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Q<E T="22">std</E> = average standard flow rate, std m<SU>3</SU>/min;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">t = sampling time, min.</FP>
        
        <P>10.3 Calculate and report the particulate matter concentration as:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="22" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.025</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">TSP = mass concentration of total suspended particulate matter, μg/std m<SU>3</SU>;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">W<E T="22">i</E> = initial weight of clean filter, g;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">W<E T="22">f</E> = final weight of exposed filter, g;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">V = air volume sampled, converted to standard conditions, std m<SU>3</SU>,</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">10<SU>6</SU> = conversion of g to μg.</FP>
        

        <P>10.4 If desired, the actual particulate matter concentration (see Section 2.2) can be calculated as follows:
        </P>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">(TSP)<E T="22">a</E>=TSP (P<E T="22">3</E>/P<E T="22">std</E>)(298/T<E T="22">3</E>)</FP>
        
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">(TSP)<E T="22">a</E> = actual concentration at field conditions, μg/m<SU>3</SU>;<PRTPAGE P="33"/>
        </FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">TSP = concentration at standard conditions, μg/std m<SU>3</SU>;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">P<E T="22">3</E> = average barometric pressure during sampling period, mm Hg;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">P<E T="22">std</E> = 760 mn Hg (or 101 kPa);</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">T<E T="22">3</E> = average ambient temperature during sampling period, K.</FP>
        
        <P>11.0 <E T="03">References.</E>
        </P>
        <P>1. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems, Volume I, Principles. EPA-600/9-76-005, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711, 1976.</P>
        <P>2. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems, Volume II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711, 1977.</P>

        <P>3. Wedding, J. B., A. R. McFarland, and J. E. Cernak. Large Particle Collection Characteristics of Ambient Aerosol Samplers. Environ. Sci. Technol. <E T="03">11:</E>387-390, 1977.</P>
        <P>4. McKee, H. C., et al. Collaborative Testing of Methods to Measure Air Pollutants, I. The High-Volume Method for Suspended Particulate Matter. J. Air Poll. Cont. Assoc., 22 (342), 1972.</P>
        <P>5. Clement, R. E., and F. W. Karasek. Sample Composition Changes in Sampling and Analysis of Organic Compounds in Aerosols. The Intern. J. Environ. Anal. Chem., 7:109, 1979.</P>
        <P>6. Lee, R. E., Jr., and J. Wagman. A Sampling Anomaly in the Determination of Atmospheric Sulfuric Concentration. Am. Ind. Hygiene Assoc. J., 27:266, 1966.</P>
        <P>7. Appel, B. R., et al. Interference Effects in Sampling Particulate Nitrate in Ambient Air. Atmospheric Environment, 13:319, 1979.</P>
        <P>8. Tierney, G. P., and W. D. Conner. Hygroscopic Effects on Weight Determinations of Particulates Collected on Glass-Fiber Filters. Am. Ind. Hygiene Assoc. J., 28:363, 1967.</P>
        <P>9. Chahal, H. S., and D. J. Romano. High-Volume Sampling Effect of Windborne Particulate Matter Deposited During Idle Periods. J. Air Poll. Cont. Assoc., Vol. 26 (885), 1976.</P>
        <P>10. Patterson, R. K. Aerosol Contamination from High-Volume Sampler Exhaust. J. Air Poll. Cont. Assoc., Vol. 30 (169), 1980.</P>
        <P>11. EPA Test Procedures for Determining pH and Integrity of High-Volume Air Filters. QAD/M-80.01. Available from the Methods Standardization Branch, Quality Assurance Division, Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory (MD-77), U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711, 1980.</P>
        <P>12. Smith, F., P. S. Wohlschlegel, R. S. C. Rogers, and D. J. Mulligan. Investigation of Flow Rate Calibration Procedures Associated with the High-Volume Method for Determination of Suspended Particulates. EPA-600/4-78-047, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC, June 1978.</P>
        <GPH DEEP="262" SPAN="1">
          <GID>50-725.eps</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="464" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="34"/>
          <GID>50-726.eps</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="446" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="35"/>
          <GID>50-727.eps</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="493" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="36"/>
          <GID>50-728.eps</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="388" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="37"/>
          <GID>50-729.eps</GID>
        </GPH>
        <CITA TYPE="W">[47 FR 54912, Dec. 6, 1982; 48 FR 17355, Apr. 22, 1983]</CITA>
      </APPENDIX>
      <APPENDIX>
        <EAR>Pt. 50, App. C</EAR>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">
          <E T="05">Appendix C to Part 50—Measurement Principle and Calibration Procedure for the Measurement of Carbon Monoxide in the Atmosphere (Non-Dispersive Infrared Photometry)</E>
        </HD>
        <HD SOURCE="HD1">Measurement Principle</HD>

        <P>1. Measurements are based on the absorption of infrared radiation by carbon monoxide (CO) in a non-dispersive photometer. Infrared energy from a source is passed through a cell containing the gas sample to be analyzed, and the quantitative absorption of energy by CO in the sample cell is measured by a suitable detector. The photometer is sensitized to CO by employing CO gas in either the detector or in a filter cell in the optical path, thereby limiting the measured absorption to one or more of the characteristic wavelengths at which CO strongly absorbs. Optical filters or other means may <PRTPAGE P="38"/>also be used to limit sensitivity of the photometer to a narrow band of interest. Various schemes may be used to provide a suitable zero reference for the photometer. The measured absorption is converted to an electrical output signal, which is related to the concentration of CO in the measurement cell.</P>
        <P>2. An analyzer based on this principle will be considered a reference method only if it has been designated as a reference method in accordance with part 53 of this chapter.</P>
        <P>3. Sampling considerations.</P>
        <P>The use of a particle filter on the sample inlet line of an NDIR CO analyzer is optional and left to the discretion of the user or the manufacturer. Use of filter should depend on the analyzer's susceptibility to interference, malfunction, or damage due to particles.</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD1">Calibration Procedure</HD>
        <P>1. <E T="03">Principle.</E> Either of two methods may be used for dynamic multipoint calibration of CO analyzers:</P>
        <P>(1) One method uses a single certified standard cylinder of CO, diluted as necessary with zero air, to obtain the various calibration concentrations needed.</P>
        <P>(2) The other method uses individual certified standard cylinders of CO for each concentration needed. Additional information on calibration may be found in Section 2.0.9 of Reference 1.</P>
        <P>2. <E T="03">Apparatus.</E> The major components and typical configurations of the calibration systems for the two calibration methods are shown in Figures 1 and 2.</P>

        <P>2.1 Flow controller(s). Device capable of adjusting and regulating flow rates. Flow rates for the dilution method (Figure 1) must be regulated to <E T="61">±</E> 1%.</P>

        <P>2.2 Flow meter(s). Calibrated flow meter capable of measuring and monitoring flow rates. Flow rates for the dilution method (Figure 1) must be measured with an accuracy of <E T="61">±</E> 2% of the measured value.</P>
        <P>2.3 Pressure regulator(s) for standard CO cylinder(s). Regulator must have nonreactive diaphragm and internal parts and a suitable delivery pressure.</P>
        <P>2.4 Mixing chamber. A chamber designed to provide thorough mixing of CO and diluent air for the dilution method.</P>
        <P>2.5 Output manifold. The output manifold should be of sufficient diameter to insure an insignificant pressure drop at the analyzer connection. The system must have a vent designed to insure atmospheric pressure at the manifold and to prevent ambient air from entering the manifold.</P>
        <P>3. <E T="03">Reagents.</E>
        </P>
        <P>3.1 CO concentration standard(s). Cylinder(s) of CO in air containing appropriate concentrations(s) of CO suitable for the selected operating range of the analyzer under calibration; CO standards for the dilution method may be contained in a nitrogen matrix if the zero air dilution ratio is not less than 100:1. The assay of the cylinder(s) must be traceable either to a National Bureau of Standards (NBS) CO in air Standard Reference Material (SRM) or to an NBS/EPA-approved commercially available Certified Reference Material (CRM). CRM's are described in Reference 2, and a list of CRM sources is available from the address shown for Reference 2. A recommended protocol for certifying CO gas cylinders against either a CO SRM or a CRM is given in Reference 1. CO gas cylinders should be recertified on a regular basis as determined by the local quality control program.</P>

        <P>3.2 Dilution gas (zero air). Air, free of contaminants which will cause a detectable response on the CO analyzer. The zero air should contain <E T="61">&lt;</E>0.1 ppm CO. A procedure for generating zero air is given in Reference 1.</P>
        <P>4. <E T="03">Procedure Using Dynamic Dilution Method.</E>
        </P>
        <P>4.1 Assemble a dynamic calibration system such as the one shown in Figure 1. All calibration gases including zero air must be introduced into the sample inlet of the analyzer system. For specific operating instructions refer to the manufacturer's manual.</P>
        <P>4.2 Insure that all flowmeters are properly calibrated, under the conditions of use, if appropriate, against an authoritative standard such as a soap-bubble meter or wet-test meter. All volumetric flowrates should be corrected to 25 °C and 760 mm Hg (101 kPa). A discussion on calibration of flowmeters is given in Reference 1.</P>
        <P>4.3 Select the operating range of the CO analyzer to be calibrated.</P>
        <P>4.4 Connect the signal output of the CO analyzer to the input of the strip chart recorder or other data collection device. All adjustments to the analyzer should be based on the appropriate strip chart or data device readings. References to analyzer responses in the procedure given below refer to recorder or data device responses.</P>

        <P>4.5 Adjust the calibration system to deliver zero air to the output manifold. The total air flow must exceed the total demand of the analyzer(s) connected to the output manifold to insure that no ambient air is pulled into the manifold vent. Allow the analyzer to sample zero air until a stable respose is obtained. After the response has stabilized, adjust the analyzer zero control. Offsetting the analyzer zero adjustments to +5 percent of scale is recommended to facilitate observing negative zero drift. Record the stable zero air response as Z<E T="52">CO</E>.</P>

        <P>4.6 Adjust the zero air flow and the CO flow from the standard CO cylinder to provide a diluted CO concentration of approximately 80 percent of the upper range limit (URL) of the operating range of the analyzer. The total air flow must exceed the total demand of the analyzer(s) connected to the output manifold to insure that no ambient air is <PRTPAGE P="39"/>pulled into the manifold vent. The exact CO concentration is calculated from:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="28" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.026</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">[CO]<E T="22">OUT</E> = diluted CO concentration at the output manifold, ppm;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">[CO]<E T="22">STD</E> = concentration of the undiluted CO standard, ppm;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">F<E T="22">CO</E> = flow rate of the CO standard corrected to 25 °C and 760 mm Hg, (101 kPa), L/min; and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">F<E T="22">D</E> = flow rate of the dilution air corrected to 25 °C and 760 mm Hg, (101 kPa), L/min.</FP>
        

        <P>Sample this CO concentration until a stable response is obtained. Adjust the analyzer span control to obtain a recorder response as indicated below:
        </P>
        <FP>Recorder response (percent scale) =</FP>
        
        <MATH DEEP="25" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.027</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">URL = nominal upper range limit of the analyzer's operating range, and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Z<E T="22">CO</E> = analyzer response to zero air, % scale.</FP>
        

        <P>If substantial adjustment of the analyzer span control is required, it may be necessary to recheck the zero and span adjustments by repeating Steps 4.5 and 4.6. Record the CO concentration and the analyzer's response. 4.7 Generate several additional concentrations (at least three evenly spaced points across the remaining scale are suggested to verify linearity) by decreasing F<E T="22">CO</E> or increasing F<E T="22">D.</E> Be sure the total flow exceeds the analyzer's total flow demand. For each concentration generated, calculate the exact CO concentration using Equation (1). Record the concentration and the analyzer's response for each concentration. Plot the analyzer responses versus the corresponding CO concentrations and draw or calculate the calibration curve.</P>
        <P>5. <E T="03">Procedure Using Multiple Cylinder Method.</E> Use the procedure for the dynamic dilution method with the following changes:</P>
        <P>5.1 Use a multi-cylinder system such as the typical one shown in Figure 2.</P>
        <P>5.2 The flowmeter need not be accurately calibrated, provided the flow in the output manifold exceeds the analyzer's flow demand.</P>
        <P>5.3 The various CO calibration concentrations required in Steps 4.6 and 4.7 are obtained without dilution by selecting the appropriate certified standard cylinder.</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD1">References</HD>
        <P>1. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems, Volume II—Ambient Air Specific Methods, EPA-600/4-77-027a, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711, 1977.</P>
        <P>2. A procedure for Establishing Traceability of Gas Mixtures to Certain National Bureau of Standards Standard Reference Materials. EPA-600/7-81-010, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory (MD-77), Research Triangle Park, NC 27711, January 1981.</P>
        <GPH DEEP="500" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="40"/>
          <GID>50-732.eps</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="500" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="41"/>
          <GID>50-733.eps</GID>
        </GPH>
        <CITA TYPE="W">[47 FR 54922, Dec. 6, 1982; 48 FR 17355, Apr. 22, 1983]</CITA>
      </APPENDIX>
      <APPENDIX>
        <PRTPAGE P="42"/>
        <EAR>Pt. 50, App. D</EAR>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">
          <E T="05">Appendix D to Part 50—Measurement Principle and Calibration Procedure for the Measurement of Ozone in the Atmosphere</E>
        </HD>
        <HD SOURCE="HD1">measurement principle</HD>
        <P>1. Ambient air and ethylene are delivered simultaneously to a mixing zone where the ozone in the air reacts with the ethylene to emit light, which is detected by a photomultiplier tube. The resulting photocurrent is amplified and is either read directly or displayed on a recorder.</P>
        <P>2. An analyzer based on this principle will be considered a reference method only if it has been designated as a reference method in accordance with part 53 of this chapter and calibrated as follows:</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD1">calibration procedure</HD>
        <P>1. <E T="03">Principle.</E> The calibration procedure is based on the photometric assay of ozone (O<E T="22">3</E>) concentrations in a dynamic flow system. The concentration of O<E T="22">3</E> in an absorption cell is determined from a measurement of the amount of 254 nm light absorbed by the sample. This determination requires knowledge of (1) the absorption coefficient (<E T="21">α</E>) of O<E T="22">3</E> at 254 nm, (2) the optical path length (<E T="03">l</E>) through the sample, (3) the transmittance of the sample at a wavelength of 254 nm, and (4) the temperature (T) and pressure (P) of the sample. The transmittance is defined as the ratio I/I<E T="22">0,</E> where I is the intensity of light which passes through the cell and is sensed by the detector when the cell contains an O<E T="22">3</E> sample, and I<E T="22">0</E> is the intensity of light which passes through the cell and is sensed by the detector when the cell contains zero air. It is assumed that all conditions of the system, except for the contents of the absorption cell, are identical during measurement of I and I<E T="22">0.</E> The quantities defined above are related by the Beer-Lambert absorption law,</P>
        <MATH DEEP="28" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.028</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
          <E T="21">α</E> = absorption coefficient of O<E T="22">3</E> at 254 nm=308<E T="21">±</E>4 atm<E T="21">−1</E> cm<E T="21">−1</E> at 0 °C and 760 torr. <E T="21">(1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7)</E>
        </FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
          <E T="03">c</E> = O<E T="22">3</E> concentration in atmospheres</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
          <E T="03">l</E> = optical path length in cm</FP>
        
        <P>In practice, a stable O<E T="22">3</E> generator is used to produce O<E T="22">3</E> concentrations over the required range. Each O<E T="22">3</E> concentration is determined from the measurement of the transmittance (I/I<E T="22">0</E>) of the sample at 254 nm with a photometer of path length <E T="03">l</E> and calculated from the equation,</P>
        <MATH DEEP="50" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.029</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>The calculated O<E T="22">3</E> concentrations must be corrected for O<E T="22">3</E> losses which may occur in the photometer and for the temperature and pressure of the sample.</FP>
        <P>2. <E T="03">Applicability.</E> This procedure is applicable to the calibration of ambient air O<E T="22">3</E> analyzers, either directly or by means of a transfer standard certified by this procedure. Transfer standards must meet the requirements and specifications set forth in Reference 8.</P>
        <P>3. <E T="03">Apparatus.</E> A complete UV calibration system consists of an ozone generator, an output port or manifold, a photometer, an appropriate source of zero air, and other components as necessary. The configuration must provide a stable ozone concentration at the system output and allow the photometer to accurately assay the output concentration to the precision specified for the photometer (3.1). Figure 1 shows a commonly used configuration and serves to illustrate the calibration procedure which follows. Other configurations may require appropriate variations in the procedural steps. All connections between components in the calibration system downstream of the O<E T="22">3</E> generator should be of glass, Teflon, or other relatively inert materials. Additional information regarding the assembly of a UV photometric calibration apparatus is given in Reference 9. For certification of transfer standards which provide their own source of O<E T="22">3,</E> the transfer standard may replace the O<E T="22">3</E> generator and possibly other components shown in Figure 1; see Reference 8 for guidance.</P>
        <P>3.1 <E T="03">UV photometer.</E> The photometer consists of a low-pressure mercury discharge lamp, (optional) collimation optics, an absorption cell, a detector, and signal-processing electronics, as illustrated in Figure 1. It must be capable of measuring the transmittance, I/I<E T="22">0,</E> at a wavelength of 254 nm with sufficient precision such that the standard deviation of the concentration measurements does not exceed the greater of 0.005 ppm or 3% of the concentration. Because the low-pressure mercury lamp radiates at several wavelengths, the photometer must incorporate suitable means to assure that no O<E T="22">3</E> is generated in the cell by the lamp, and that at least 99.5% of the radiation sensed by the detector is 254 nm radiation. (This can be readily achieved by prudent selection of optical filter and detector response characteristics.) The length of the light path through the absorption cell must be known with an accuracy of at least 99.5%. In addition, the cell and associated plumbing must be designed to minimize loss of O<E T="22">3</E> from contact with cell <PRTPAGE P="43"/>walls and gas handling components. See Reference 9 for additional information.</P>
        <P>3.2 <E T="03">Air flow controllers.</E> Devices capable of regulating air flows as necessary to meet the output stability and photometer precision requirements.</P>
        <P>3.3 <E T="03">Ozone generator.</E> Device capable of generating stable levels of O<E T="22">3</E> over the required concentration range.</P>
        <P>3.4 <E T="03">Output manifold.</E> The output manifold should be constructed of glass, Teflon, or other relatively inert material, and should be of sufficient diameter to insure a negligible pressure drop at the photometer connection and other output ports. The system must have a vent designed to insure atmospheric pressure in the manifold and to prevent ambient air from entering the manifold.</P>
        <P>3.5 <E T="03">Two-way valve.</E> Manual or automatic valve, or other means to switch the photometer flow between zero air and the O<E T="22">3</E> concentration.</P>
        <P>3.6 <E T="03">Temperature indicator.</E> Accurate to <E T="21">±</E>1 °C.</P>
        <P>3.7 <E T="03">Barometer or pressure indicator.</E> Accurate to <E T="21">±</E>2 torr.</P>
        <P>4. <E T="03">Reagents.</E>
        </P>
        <P>4.1 <E T="03">Zero air.</E> The zero air must be free of contaminants which would cause a detectable response from the O<E T="22">3</E> analyzer, and it should be free of NO, C<E T="22">2</E> H<E T="22">4,</E> and other species which react with O<E T="22">3.</E> A procedure for generating suitable zero air is given in Reference 9. As shown in Figure 1, the zero air supplied to the photometer cell for the I<E T="22">0</E> reference measurement must be derived from the same source as the zero air used for generation of the ozone concentration to be assayed (I measurement). When using the photometer to certify a transfer standard having its own source of ozone, see Reference 8 for guidance on meeting this requirement.</P>
        <P>5. <E T="03">Procedure.</E>
        </P>
        <P>5.1 <E T="03">General operation.</E> The calibration photometer must be dedicated exclusively to use as a calibration standard. It should always be used with clean, filtered calibration gases, and never used for ambient air sampling. Consideration should be given to locating the calibration photometer in a clean laboratory where it can be stationary, protected from physical shock, operated by a responsible analyst, and used as a common standard for all field calibrations via transfer standards.</P>
        <P>5.2 <E T="03">Preparation.</E> Proper operation of the photometer is of critical importance to the accuracy of this procedure. The following steps will help to verify proper operation. The steps are not necessarily required prior to each use of the photometer. Upon initial operation of the photometer, these steps should be carried out frequently, with all quantitative results or indications recorded in a chronological record either in tabular form or plotted on a graphical chart. As the performance and stability record of the photometer is established, the frequency of these steps may be reduced consistent with the documented stability of the photometer.</P>
        <P>5.2.1 <E T="03">Instruction manual:</E> Carry out all set up and adjustment procedures or checks as described in the operation or instruction manual associated with the photometer.</P>
        <P>5.2.2 <E T="03">System check:</E> Check the photometer system for integrity, leaks, cleanliness, proper flowrates, etc. Service or replace filters and zero air scrubbers or other consumable materials, as necessary.</P>
        <P>5.2.3 <E T="03">Linearity:</E> Verify that the photometer manufacturer has adequately established that the linearity error of the photometer is less than 3%, or test the linearity by dilution as follows: Generate and assay an O<E T="22">3</E> concentration near the upper range limit of the system (0.5 or 1.0 ppm), then accurately dilute that concentration with zero air and reassay it. Repeat at several different dilution ratios. Compare the assay of the original concentration with the assay of the diluted concentration divided by the dilution ratio, as follows</P>
        <MATH DEEP="28" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.030</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">E = linearity error, percent</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">A<E T="22">1</E> = assay of the original concentration</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">A<E T="22">2</E> = assay of the diluted concentration</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">R = dilution ratio = flow of original concentration divided by the total flow</FP>
        
        <P>The linearity error must be less than 5%. Since the accuracy of the measured flow-rates will affect the linearity error as measured this way, the test is not necessarily conclusive. Additional information on verifying linearity is contained in Reference 9.</P>
        <P>5.2.4 <E T="03">Intercomparison:</E> When possible, the photometer should be occasionally intercompared, either directly or via transfer standards, with calibration photometers used by other agencies or laboratories.</P>
        <P>5.2.5 <E T="03">Ozone losses:</E> Some portion of the O<E T="22">3</E> may be lost upon contact with the photometer cell walls and gas handling components. The magnitude of this loss must be determined and used to correct the calculated O<E T="22">3</E> concentration. This loss must not exceed 5%. Some guidelines for quantitatively determining this loss are discussed in Reference 9.</P>
        <P>5.3 <E T="03">Assay of O</E>
          <E T="22">3</E> concentrations.</P>
        <P>5.3.1 Allow the photometer system to warm up and stabilizer.</P>
        <P>5.3.2 Verify that the flowrate through the photometer absorption cell, F allows the cell to be flushed in a reasonably short period of time (2 liter/min is a typical flow). The precision of the measurements is inversely related to the time required for flushing, since the photometer drift error increases with time.</P>

        <P>5.3.3 Insure that the flowrate into the output manifold is at least 1 liter/min greater <PRTPAGE P="44"/>than the total flowrate required by the photometer and any other flow demand connected to the manifold.</P>
        <P>5.3.4 Insure that the flowrate of zero air, F<E T="22">z,</E> is at least 1 liter/min greater than the flowrate required by the photometer.</P>

        <P>5.3.5 With zero air flowing in the output manifold, actuate the two-way valve to allow the photometer to sample first the manifold zero air, then F<E T="22">z.</E> The two photometer readings must be equal (I=I<E T="22">o</E>).</P>
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>
          <P>In some commercially available photometers, the operation of the two-way valve and various other operations in section 5.3 may be carried out automatically by the photometer.</P>
        </NOTE>
        <P>5.3.6 Adjust the O<E T="22">3</E> generator to produce an O<E T="22">3</E> concentration as needed.</P>

        <P>5.3.7 Actuate the two-way valve to allow the photometer to sample zero air until the absorption cell is thoroughly flushed and record the stable measured value of I<E T="22">o</E>.</P>
        <P>5.3.8 Actuate the two-way valve to allow the photometer to sample the ozone concentration until the absorption cell is thoroughly flushed and record the stable measured value of I.</P>
        <P>5.3.9 Record the temperature and pressure of the sample in the photometer absorption cell. (See Reference 9 for guidance.)</P>
        <P>5.3.10 Calculate the O<E T="22">3</E> concentration from equation 4. An average of several determinations will provide better precision.</P>
        <MATH DEEP="024" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.032</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">[O<E T="22">3</E>]<E T="22">OUT</E> = O<E T="22">3</E> concentration, ppm</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
          <E T="21">α</E> = absorption coefficient of O<E T="22">3</E> at 254 nm=308 atm<E T="21">−1</E> cm<E T="21">−1</E> at 0 °C and 760 torr</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
          <E T="03">l</E> = optical path length, cm</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">T = sample temperature, K</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">P = sample pressure, torr</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">L = correction factor for O<E T="22">3</E> losses from 5.2.5=(1-fraction O<E T="22">3</E> lost).</FP>
        
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>

          <P>Some commercial photometers may automatically evaluate all or part of equation 4. It is the operator's responsibility to verify that all of the information required for equation 4 is obtained, either automatically by the photometer or manually. For “automatic” photometers which evaluate the first term of equation 4 based on a linear approximation, a manual correction may be required, particularly at higher O<E T="22">3</E> levels. See the photometer instruction manual and Reference 9 for guidance.</P>
        </NOTE>
        <P>5.3.11 Obtain additional O<E T="22">3</E> concentration standards as necessary by repeating steps 5.3.6 to 5.3.10 or by Option 1.</P>
        <P>5.4 <E T="03">Certification of transfer standards.</E> A transfer standard is certified by relating the output of the transfer standard to one or more ozone standards as determined according to section 5.3. The exact procedure varies depending on the nature and design of the transfer standard. Consult Reference 8 for guidance.</P>
        <P>5.5 <E T="03">Calibration of ozone analyzers.</E> Ozone analyzers are calibrated as follows, using ozone standards obtained directly according to section 5.3 or by means of a certified transfer standard.</P>
        <P>5.5.1 Allow sufficient time for the O<E T="22">3</E> analyzer and the photometer or transfer standard to warmup and stabilize.</P>
        <P>5.5.2 Allow the O<E T="22">3</E> analyzer to sample zero air until a stable response is obtained and adjust the O<E T="22">3</E> analyzer's zero control. Offsetting the analyzer's zero adjustment to +5% of scale is recommended to facilitate observing negative zero drift. Record the stable zero air response as “Z”.</P>
        <P>5.5.3 Generate an O<E T="22">3</E> concentration standard of approximately 80% of the desired upper range limit (URL) of the O<E T="22">3</E> analyzer. Allow the O<E T="22">3</E> analyzer to sample this O<E T="22">3</E> concentration standard until a stable response is obtained.</P>
        <P>5.5.4 Adjust the O<E T="22">3</E> analyzer's span control to obtain a convenient recorder response as indicated below:</P>
        <P>recorder response (%scale) =</P>
        <MATH DEEP="21" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.033</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">URL = upper range limit of the O<E T="22">3</E> analyzer, ppm</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Z = recorder response with zero air, % scale</FP>
        
        <P>Record the O<E T="22">3</E> concentration and the corresponding analyzer response. If substantial adjustment of the span control is necessary, recheck the zero and span adjustments by repeating steps 5.5.2 to 5.5.4.</P>
        <P>5.5.5 Generate several other O<E T="22">3</E> concentration standards (at least 5 others are recommended) over the scale range of the O<E T="22">3</E> analyzer by adjusting the O<E T="22">3</E> source or by Option 1. For each O<E T="22">3</E> concentration standard, record the O<E T="22">3</E> and the corresponding analyzer response.</P>
        <P>5.5.6 Plot the O<E T="22">3</E> analyzer responses versus the corresponding O<E T="22">3</E> concentrations and draw the O<E T="22">3</E> analyzer's calibration curve or calculate the appropriate response factor.</P>
        <P>5.5.7 <E T="03">Option 1:</E> The various O<E T="22">3</E> concentrations required in steps 5.3.11 and 5.5.5 may be obtained by dilution of the O<E T="22">3</E> concentration generated in steps 5.3.6 and 5.5.3. With this option, accurate flow measurements are required. The dynamic calibration system may be modified as shown in Figure 2 to allow for dilution air to be metered in downstream of the O<E T="22">3</E> generator. A mixing chamber between the O<E T="22">3</E> generator and the output manifold is also required. The flowrate through the O<E T="22">3</E> generator (F<E T="22">o</E>) and the dilution air flowrate <PRTPAGE P="45"/>(F<E T="22">D</E>) are measured with a reliable flow or volume standard traceable to NBS. Each O<E T="22">3</E> concentration generated by dilution is calculated from:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="36" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.031</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">[O<E T="22">3</E>]′<E T="22">OUT</E> = diluted O<E T="22">3</E> concentration, ppm</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">F<E T="22">0</E> = flowrate through the O<E T="22">3</E> generator, liter/min</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">F<E T="22">D</E> = diluent air flowrate, liter/min</FP>
        <HD SOURCE="HD1">References</HD>

        <P>1. E.C.Y. Inn and Y. Tanaka, “Absorption coefficient of Ozone in the Ultraviolet and Visible Regions”, <E T="03">J. Opt. Soc. Am., 43,</E> 870 (1953).</P>

        <P>2. A. G. Hearn, “Absorption of Ozone in the Ultraviolet and Visible Regions of the Spectrum”, <E T="03">Proc. Phys. Soc.</E> (London), <E T="03">78,</E> 932 (1961).</P>

        <P>3. W. B. DeMore and O. Raper, “Hartley Band Extinction Coefficients of Ozone in the Gas Phase and in Liquid Nitrogen, Carbon Monoxide, and Argon”, <E T="03">J. Phys. Chem., 68,</E> 412 (1964).</P>

        <P>4. M. Griggs, “Absorption Coefficients of Ozone in the Ultraviolet and Visible Regions”, <E T="03">J. Chem. Phys., 49,</E> 857 (1968).</P>

        <P>5. K. H. Becker, U. Schurath, and H. Seitz, “Ozone Olefin Reactions in the Gas Phase. 1. Rate Constants and Activation Energies”, <E T="03">Int'l Jour. of Chem. Kinetics,</E> VI, 725 (1974).</P>

        <P>6. M. A. A. Clyne and J. A. Coxom, “Kinetic Studies of Oxy-halogen Radical Systems”, <E T="03">Proc. Roy. Soc., A303,</E> 207 (1968).</P>

        <P>7. J. W. Simons, R. J. Paur, H. A. Webster, and E. J. Bair, “Ozone Ultraviolet Photolysis. VI. The Ultraviolet Spectrum”, <E T="03">J. Chem. Phys., 59,</E> 1203 (1973).</P>
        <P>8. Transfer Standards for Calibration of Ambient Air Monitoring Analyzers for Ozone, EPA publication number EPA-600/4-79-056, EPA, National Exposure Research Laboratory, Department E, (MD-77B), Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.</P>
        <P>9.  Technical Assistance Document for the Calibration of Ambient Ozone Monitors, EPA publication number EPA-600/4-79-057, EPA, National Exposure Research Laboratory, Department E, (MD-77B), Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.</P>
        <GPH DEEP="500" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="46"/>
          <GID>50-738.eps</GID>
        </GPH>
        <PRTPAGE P="47"/>
        <CITA>[44 FR 8224, Feb. 8, 1979, as amended at 62 FR 38895, July 18, 1997]</CITA>
      </APPENDIX>
      <APPENDIX>
        <RESERVED>
          <E T="05">Appendix E to Part 50 [Reserved]</E>
        </RESERVED>
      </APPENDIX>
      <APPENDIX>
        <EAR>Pt. 50, App. F</EAR>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">
          <E T="05">Appendix F to Part 50—Measurement Principle and Calibration Procedure for the Measurement of Nitrogen Dioxide in the Atmosphere (Gas Phase -Chemi-lum-i-nes-cence)</E>
        </HD>
        <HD SOURCE="HD1">Principle and Applicability</HD>
        <P>1. Atmospheric concentrations of nitrogen dioxide (NO<E T="22">2</E>) are measured indirectly by photometrically measuring the light intensity, at wavelengths greater than 600 nanometers, resulting from the chem-i-lum-i-nes-cent reaction of nitric oxide (NO) with ozone (O<E T="22">3</E>). (<E T="03">1,2,3</E>) NO<E T="22">2</E> is first quantitatively reduced to NO(<E T="03">4,5,6</E>) by means of a converter. NO, which commonly exists in ambient air together with NO<E T="22">2,</E> passes through the converter unchanged causing a resultant total NO<E T="22">X</E> concentration equal to NO+NO<E T="22">2.</E> A sample of the input air is also measured without having passed through the converted. This latter NO measurement is subtracted from the former measurement (NO+NO<E T="22">2</E>) to yield the final NO<E T="22">2</E> measurement. The NO and NO+NO<E T="22">2</E> measurements may be made concurrently with dual systems, or cyclically with the same system provided the cycle time does not exceed 1 minute.</P>
        <P>2. <E T="03">Sampling considerations.</E>
        </P>
        <P>2.1 Chemiluminescence NO/NO<E T="22">X</E>/NO<E T="22">2</E> analyzers will respond to other nitrogen containing compounds, such as peroxyacetyl nitrate (PAN), which might be reduced to NO in the thermal converter. (<E T="03">7</E>) Atmospheric concentrations of these potential interferences are generally low relative to NO<E T="22">2</E> and valid NO<E T="22">2</E> measurements may be obtained. In certain geographical areas, where the concentration of these potential interferences is known or suspected to be high relative to NO<E T="22">2,</E> the use of an equivalent method for the measurement of NO<E T="22">2</E> is recommended.</P>

        <P>2.2 The use of integrating flasks on the sample inlet line of chemiluminescence NO/NO<E T="22">X</E>/NO<E T="22">2</E> analyzers is optional and left to couraged. The sample residence time between the sampling point and the analyzer should be kept to a minimum to avoid erroneous NO<E T="22">2</E> measurements resulting from the reaction of ambient levels of NO and O<E T="22">3</E> in the sampling system.</P>

        <P>2.3 The use of particulate filters on the sample inlet line of chemiluminescence NO/NO<E T="22">X</E>/NO<E T="22">2</E> analyzers is optional and left to the discretion of the user or the manufacturer.</P>

        <FP>Use of the filter should depend on the analyzer's susceptibility to interference, malfunction, or damage due to particulates. Users are cautioned that particulate matter concentrated on a filter may cause erroneous NO<E T="22">2</E> measurements and therefore filters should be changed frequently.</FP>
        <P>3. An analyzer based on this principle will be considered a reference method only if it has been designated as a reference method in accordance with part 53 of this chapter.</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD1">Calibration</HD>
        <P>1. <E T="03">Alternative A</E>—Gas phase titration (GPT) of an NO standard with O<E T="22">3</E>.</P>
        <P>
          <E T="03">Major equipment required:</E> Stable O<E T="22">3</E> generator. Chemiluminescence NO/NO<E T="22">X</E>/NO<E T="22">2</E> analyzer with strip chart recorder(s). NO concentration standard.</P>
        <P>1.1 <E T="03">Principle.</E> This calibration technique is based upon the rapid gas phase reaction between NO and O<E T="22">3</E> to produce stoichiometric quantities of NO<E T="22">2</E> in accordance with the following equation: (<E T="03">8</E>)</P>
        <MATH DEEP="12" SPAN="1">
          <MID>EC08NO91.075</MID>
        </MATH>

        <FP>The quantitative nature of this reaction is such that when the NO concentration is known, the concentration of NO<E T="22">2</E> can be determined. Ozone is added to excess NO in a dynamic calibration system, and the NO channel of the chemiluminescence NO/NO<E T="22">X</E>/NO<E T="22">2</E> analyzer is used as an indicator of changes in NO concentration. Upon the addition of O<E T="22">3,</E> the decrease in NO concentration observed on the calibrated NO channel is equivalent to the concentration of NO<E T="22">2</E> produced. The amount of NO<E T="22">2</E> generated may be varied by adding variable amounts of O<E T="22">3</E> from a stable uncalibrated O<E T="22">3</E> generator. (<E T="03">9</E>)</FP>
        <P>1.2 <E T="03">Apparatus.</E> Figure 1, a schematic of a typical GPT apparatus, shows the suggested configuration of the components listed below. All connections between components in the calibration system downstream from the O<E T="22">3</E> generator should be of glass, Teflon<E T="51">®,</E> or other non-reactive material.</P>
        <P>1.2.1 <E T="03">Air flow controllers.</E> Devices capable of maintaining constant air flows within <E T="21">±</E>2% of the required flowrate.</P>
        <P>1.2.2 <E T="03">NO flow controller.</E> A device capable of maintaining constant NO flows within <E T="21">±</E>2% of the required flowrate. Component parts in contact with the NO should be of a non-reactive material.</P>
        <P>1.2.3 <E T="03">Air flowmeters.</E> Calibrated flow-meters capable of measuring and monitor-ing air flowrates with an accuracy of <E T="21">±</E>2% of the measured flowrate.</P>
        <P>1.2.4 <E T="03">NO flowmeter.</E> A calibrated flowmeter capable of measuring and monitoring NO flowrates with an accuracy of <E T="21">±</E>2% of the measured flowrate. (Rotameters have been reported to operate unreliably when measuring low NO flows and are not recommended.)</P>
        <P>1.2.5 <E T="03">Pressure regulator for standard NO cylinder.</E> This regulator must have a nonreactive diaphragm and internal parts and a suitable delivery pressure.</P>
        <P>1.2.6 <E T="03">Ozone generator.</E> The generator must be capable of generating sufficient and stable <PRTPAGE P="48"/>levels of O<E T="22">3</E> for reaction with NO to generate NO<E T="22">2</E> concentrations in the range required. Ozone generators of the electric discharge type may produce NO and NO<E T="22">2</E> and are not recommended.</P>
        <P>1.2.7 <E T="03">Valve.</E> A valve may be used as shown in Figure 1 to divert the NO flow when zero air is required at the manifold. The valve should be constructed of glass, Teflon<E T="51">®,</E> or other nonreactive material.</P>
        <P>1.2.8 <E T="03">Reaction chamber.</E> A chamber, constructed of glass, Teflon<E T="51">®,</E> or other nonreactive material, for the quantitative reaction of O<E T="22">3</E> with excess NO. The chamber should be of sufficient volume (<E T="03">V</E>
          <E T="24">RC</E>) such that the residence time (<E T="03">t</E>
          <E T="24">R</E>) meets the requirements specified in 1.4. For practical reasons, t<E T="24">R</E> should be less than 2 minutes.</P>
        <P>1.2.9 <E T="03">Mixing chamber.</E> A chamber constructed of glass, Teflon<E T="51">®,</E> or other nonreactive material and designed to provide thorough mixing of reaction products and diluent air. The residence time is not critical when the dynamic parameter specification given in 1.4 is met.</P>
        <P>1.2.10 <E T="03">Output manifold.</E> The output manifold should be constructed of glass, Teflon<E T="51">®,</E> or other non-reactive material and should be of sufficient diameter to insure an insignificant pressure drop at the analyzer connection. The system must have a vent designed to insure atmospheric pressure at the manifold and to prevent ambient air from entering the manifold.</P>
        <P>1.3 <E T="03">Reagents.</E>
        </P>
        <P>1.3.1 <E T="03">NO concentration standard.</E> Gas cylinder standard containing 50 to 100 ppm NO in N<E T="22">2</E> with less than 1 ppm NO<E T="22">2.</E> This standard must be traceable to a National Bureau of Standards (NBS) NO in N<E T="22">2</E> Standard Reference Material (SRM 1683 or SRM 1684), an NBS NO<E T="22">2</E> Standard Reference Material (SRM 1629), or an NBS/EPA-approved commercially available Certified Reference Material (CRM). CRM's are described in Reference 14, and a list of CRM sources is available from the address shown for Reference 14. A recommended protocol for certifying NO gas cylinders against either an NO SRM or CRM is given in section 2.0.7 of Reference 15. Reference 13 gives procedures for certifying an NO gas cylinder against an NBS NO<E T="22">2</E> SRM and for determining the amount of NO<E T="22">2</E> impurity in an NO cylinder.</P>
        <P>1.3.2 <E T="03">Zero air.</E> Air, free of contaminants which will cause a detectable response on the NO/NO<E T="22">X</E>/NO<E T="22">2</E> analyzer or which might react with either NO, O<E T="22">3,</E> or NO<E T="22">2</E> in the gas phase titration. A procedure for generating zero air is given in reference 13.</P>
        <P>1.4 <E T="03">Dynamic parameter specification.</E>
        </P>
        <P>1.4.1 The O<E T="22">3</E> generator air flowrate (F<E T="22">0</E>) and NO flowrate (F<E T="22">NO</E>) (see Figure 1) must be adjusted such that the following relationship holds:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="12" SPAN="1">
          <MID>EC08NO91.076</MID>
        </MATH>
        <MATH DEEP="31" SPAN="1">
          <MID>EC08NO91.077</MID>
        </MATH>
        <MATH DEEP="27" SPAN="1">
          <MID>EC08NO91.078</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
          <E T="03">P</E>
          <E T="24">R</E> = dynamic parameter specification, determined empirically, to insure complete reaction of the available O<E T="22">3,</E> ppm-minute</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">[NO]<E T="24">RC</E> = NO concentration in the reaction chamber, ppm</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
          <E T="24">R</E> = residence time of the reactant gases in the reaction chamber, minute</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">[NO]<E T="22">STD</E> = concentration of the undiluted NO standard, ppm</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
          <E T="03">F</E>
          <E T="22">NO</E> = NO flowrate, scm<E T="21"> 3</E>/min</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
          <E T="03">F</E>
          <E T="22">O</E> = O<E T="22">3</E> generator air flowrate, scm<E T="21"> 3</E>/min</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
          <E T="03">V</E>
          <E T="24">RC</E> = volume of the reaction chamber, scm<E T="21"> 3</E>
        </FP>
        
        <P>1.4.2 The flow conditions to be used in the GPT system are determined by the following procedure:</P>
        <P>(a) Determine <E T="03">F</E>
          <E T="24">T,</E> the total flow required at the output manifold (<E T="03">F</E>
          <E T="24">T</E>=analyzer demand plus 10 to 50% excess).</P>
        <P>(b) Establish [NO]<E T="22">OUT</E> as the highest NO concentration (ppm) which will be required at the output manifold. [NO]<E T="22">OUT</E> should be approximately equivalent to 90% of the upper range limit (<E T="03">URL</E>) of the NO<E T="22">2</E> concentration range to be covered.</P>
        <P>(c) Determine F<E T="22">NO</E> as</P>
        <MATH DEEP="27" SPAN="1">
          <MID>EC08NO91.079</MID>
        </MATH>

        <P>(d) Select a convenient or available reaction chamber volume. Initially, a trial <E T="03">V</E>
          <E T="24">RC</E> may be selected to be in the range of approximately 200 to 500 scm<E T="21">3</E>.</P>
        <P>(e) Compute FO as</P>
        <MATH DEEP="38" SPAN="1">
          <MID>50-754.eps</MID>
        </MATH>
        <P>(f) Compute <E T="03">t</E>
          <E T="22">R</E> as</P>
        <MATH DEEP="27" SPAN="1">
          <MID>EC08NO91.080</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>Verify that <E T="03">t</E>
          <E T="24">R</E> &lt; 2 minutes. If not, select a reaction chamber with a smaller <E T="03">V</E>
          <E T="24">RC</E>.</FP>
        <P>(g) Compute the diluent air flowrate as</P>
        <MATH DEEP="12" SPAN="1">
          <MID>EC08NO91.081</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
          <E T="03">F</E>
          <E T="24">D</E> = diluent air flowrate, scm<E T="21"> 3</E>/min</FP>
        
        <PRTPAGE P="49"/>
        <P>(h) If <E T="03">F</E>
          <E T="24">O</E> turns out to be impractical for the desired system, select a reaction chamber having a different <E T="03">V</E>
          <E T="24">RC</E> and recompute <E T="03">F</E>
          <E T="24">O</E> and <E T="03">F</E>
          <E T="24">D</E>.</P>
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>

          <P>A dynamic parameter lower than 2.75 ppm-minutes may be used if it can be determined empirically that quantitative reaction of O<E T="22">3</E> with NO occurs. A procedure for making this determination as well as a more detailed discussion of the above requirements and other related considerations is given in reference 13.</P>
        </NOTE>
        <P>1.5 <E T="03">Procedure.</E>
        </P>
        <P>1.5.1 Assemble a dynamic calibration system such as the one shown in Figure 1.</P>
        <P>1.5.2 Insure that all flowmeters are calibrated under the conditions of use against a reliable standard such as a soap-bubble meter or wet-test meter. All volumetric flowrates should be corrected to 25 °C and 760 mm Hg. A discussion on the calibration of flowmeters is given in reference 13.</P>
        <P>1.5.3 Precautions must be taken to remove O<E T="22">2</E> and other contaminants from the NO pressure regulator and delivery system prior to the start of calibration to avoid any conversion of the standard NO to NO<E T="22">2.</E> Failure to do so can cause significant errors in calibration. This problem may be minimized by (1) carefully evacuating the regulator, when possible, after the regulator has been connected to the cylinder and before opening the cylinder valve; (2) thoroughly flushing the regulator and delivery system with NO after opening the cylinder valve; (3) not removing the regulator from the cylinder between calibrations unless absolutely necessary. Further discussion of these procedures is given in reference 13.</P>
        <P>1.5.4 Select the operating range of the NO/NO<E T="22">X</E>/NO<E T="22">2</E> analyzer to be calibrated. In order to obtain maximum precision and accuracy for NO<E T="22">2</E> calibration, all three channels of the analyzer should be set to the same range. If operation of the NO and NO<E T="22">X</E> channels on higher ranges is desired, subsequent recalibration of the NO and NO<E T="22">X</E> channels on the higher ranges is recommended.</P>
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>

          <P>Some analyzer designs may require identical ranges for NO, NO<E T="22">X,</E> and NO<E T="22">2</E> during operation of the analyzer.</P>
        </NOTE>
        <P>1.5.5 Connect the recorder output cable(s) of the NO/NO<E T="22">X</E>/NO<E T="22">2</E> analyzer to the input terminals of the strip chart recorder(s). All adjustments to the analyzer should be performed based on the appropriate strip chart readings. References to analyzer responses in the procedures given below refer to recorder responses.</P>
        <P>1.5.6 Determine the GPT flow conditions required to meet the dynamic parameter specification as indicated in 1.4.</P>
        <P>1.5.7 Adjust the diluent air and O<E T="22">3</E> generator air flows to obtain the flows determined in section 1.4.2. The total air flow must exceed the total demand of the analyzer(s) connected to the output manifold to insure that no ambient air is pulled into the manifold vent. Allow the analyzer to sample zero air until stable NO, NO<E T="22">X,</E> and NO<E T="22">2</E> responses are obtained. After the responses have stabilized, adjust the analyzer zero control(s).</P>
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>
          <P>Some analyzers may have separate zero controls for NO, NO<E T="22">X,</E> and NO<E T="22">2.</E> Other analyzers may have separate zero controls only for NO and NO<E T="22">X,</E> while still others may have only one zero control common to all three channels.</P>
        </NOTE>

        <P>Offsetting the analyzer zero adjustments to +5 percent of scale is recommended to facilitate observing negative zero drift. Record the stable zero air responses as Z<E T="22">NO,</E>
          <E T="04">Znox,</E> and <E T="04">Zno2</E>.</P>
        <P>1.5.8 <E T="03">Preparation of NO and NO</E>
          <E T="22">X</E>
          <E T="03">calibration curves.</E>
        </P>
        <P>1.5.8.1 <E T="03">Adjustment of NO span control.</E> Adjust the NO flow from the standard NO cylinder to generate an NO concentration of approximately 80 percent of the upper range limit (<E T="03">URL</E>) of the NO range. This exact NO concentration is calculated from:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="28" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.044</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">[NO]<E T="24">OUT</E> = diluted NO concentration at the output manifold, ppm</FP>
        
        <FP>Sample this NO concentration until the NO and NO<E T="22">X</E> responses have stabilized. Adjust the NO span control to obtain a recorder response as indicated below:</FP>
        
        <FP>recorder response (percent scale) =</FP>
        <MATH DEEP="30" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.045</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
          <E T="03">URL</E> = nominal upper range limit of the NO channel, ppm</FP>
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>
          <P>Some analyzers may have separate span controls for NO, NO<E T="22">X,</E> and NO<E T="22">2.</E> Other analyzers may have separate span controls only for NO and NO<E T="22">X,</E> while still others may have only one span control common to all three channels. When only one span control is available, the span adjustment is made on the NO channel of the analyzer.</P>
        </NOTE>
        <FP>If substantial adjustment of the NO span control is necessary, it may be necessary to recheck the zero and span adjustments by repeating steps 1.5.7 and 1.5.8.1. Record the NO concentration and the analyzer's NO response.</FP>
        <P>1.5.8.2 <E T="03">Adjustment of NO</E>
          <E T="22">X</E>
          <E T="03">span control.</E> When adjusting the analyzer's NO<E T="22">X</E> span control, the presence of any NO<E T="22">2</E> impurity in the standard NO cylinder must be taken into account. Procedures for determining the <PRTPAGE P="50"/>amount of NO<E T="22">2</E> impurity in the standard NO cylinder are given in reference 13. The exact NO<E T="22">X</E> concentration is calculated from:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="32" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.046</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">[NO<E T="22">X</E>]<E T="22">OUT</E> = diluted NO<E T="22">X</E> concentration at the output manifold, ppm</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">[NO<E T="22">2</E>]<E T="22">IMP</E> = concentration of NO<E T="22">2</E> impurity in the standard NO cylinder, ppm</FP>
        
        <FP>Adjust the NO<E T="22">X</E> span control to obtain a recorder response as indicated below:</FP>
        
        <FP>recorder response (% scale) =</FP>
        <MATH DEEP="30" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.047</MID>
        </MATH>
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>

          <P>If the analyzer has only one span control, the span adjustment is made on the NO channel and no further adjustment is made here for NO<E T="22">x.</E>
          </P>
        </NOTE>
        <FP>If substantial adjustment of the NO<E T="22">X</E> span control is necessary, it may be necessary to recheck the zero and span adjustments by repeating steps 1.5.7 and 1.5.8.2. Record the NO<E T="22">X</E> concentration and the analyzer's NO<E T="22">X</E> response.</FP>

        <P>1.5.8.3 Generate several additional concentrations (at least five evenly spaced points across the remaining scale are suggested to verify linearity) by decreasing F<E T="22">NO</E> or increasing F<E T="22">D.</E> For each concentration generated, calculate the exact NO and NO<E T="22">X</E> concentrations using equations (9) and (11) respectively. Record the analyzer's NO and NO<E T="22">X</E> responses for each concentration. Plot the analyzer responses versus the respective calculated NO and NO<E T="22">X</E> concentrations and draw or calculate the NO and NO<E T="22">X</E> calibration curves. For subsequent calibrations where linearity can be assumed, these curves may be checked with a two-point calibration consisting of a zero air point and NO and NO<E T="22">X</E> concentrations of approximately 80% of the <E T="03">URL</E>.</P>
        <P>1.5.9 <E T="03">Preparation of NO</E>
          <E T="24">2</E>
          <E T="03">calibration curve.</E>
        </P>
        <P>1.5.9.1 Assuming the NO<E T="22">2</E> zero has been properly adjusted while sampling zero air in step 1.5.7, adjust F<E T="22">O</E> and F<E T="22">D</E> as determined in section 1.4.2. Adjust F<E T="22">NO</E> to generate an NO concentration near 90% of the <E T="03">URL</E> of the NO range. Sample this NO concentration until the NO and NO<E T="22">X</E> responses have stabilized. Using the NO calibration curve obtained in section 1.5.8, measure and record the NO concentration as [NO]<E T="22">orig.</E> Using the NO<E T="22">X</E> calibration curve obtained in section 1.5.8, measure and record the NO<E T="22">X</E> concentration as [NO<E T="22">X</E>]<E T="22">orig</E>.</P>
        <P>1.5.9.2 Adjust the O<E T="22">3</E> generator to generate sufficient O<E T="22">3</E> to produce a decrease in the NO concentration equivalent to approximately 80% of the URL of the NO<E T="22">2</E> range. The decrease must not exceed 90% of the NO concentration determined in step 1.5.9.1. After the analyzer responses have stabilized, record the resultant NO and NO<E T="22">X</E> concentrations as [NO]<E T="22">rem</E> and [NO<E T="22">X</E>]<E T="22">rem</E>.</P>
        <P>1.5.9.3 Calculate the resulting NO<E T="22">2</E> concentration from:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="30" SPAN="2">
          <MID>EC08NO91.082</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">[NO<E T="22">2</E>]<E T="22">OUT</E> = diluted NO<E T="22">2</E> concentration at the output manifold, ppm</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">[NO]<E T="22">orig</E> = original NO concentration, prior to addition of O<E T="22">3,</E> ppm</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">[NO]<E T="22">rem</E> = NO concentration remaining after addition of O<E T="22">3,</E> ppm</FP>
        
        <FP>Adjust the NO<E T="22">2</E> span control to obtain a recorder response as indicated below:</FP>
        
        <FP>recorder response (% scale) =</FP>
        <MATH DEEP="22" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.048</MID>
        </MATH>
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>

          <P>If the analyzer has only one or two span controls, the span adjustments are made on the NO channel or NO and NO<E T="22">X</E> channels and no further adjustment is made here for NO<E T="22">2</E>.</P>
        </NOTE>
        <FP>If substantial adjustment of the NO<E T="22">2</E> span control is necessary, it may be necessary to recheck the zero and span adjustments by repeating steps 1.5.7 and 1.5.9.3. Record the NO<E T="22">2</E> concentration and the corresponding analyzer NO<E T="22">2</E> and NO<E T="22">X</E> responses.</FP>
        <P>1.5.9.4 Maintaining the same F<E T="22">NO,</E> F<E T="22">O,</E> and F<E T="22">D</E> as in section 1.5.9.1, adjust the ozone generator to obtain several other concentrations of NO<E T="22">2</E> over the NO<E T="22">2</E> range (at least five evenly spaced points across the remaining scale are suggested). Calculate each NO<E T="22">2</E> concentration using equation (13) and record the corresponding analyzer NO<E T="22">2</E> and NO<E T="22">X</E> responses. Plot the analyzer's NO<E T="22">2</E> responses <PRTPAGE P="51"/>versus the corresponding calculated NO<E T="22">2</E> concentrations and draw or calculate the NO<E T="22">2</E> calibration curve.</P>
        <P>1.5.10 <E T="03">Determination of converter efficiency.</E>
        </P>
        <P>1.5.10.1 For each NO<E T="22">2</E> concentration generated during the preparation of the NO<E T="22">2</E> calibration curve (see section 1.5.9) calculate the concentration of NO<E T="22">2</E> converted from:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="23" SPAN="2">
          <MID>EC08NO91.083</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">[NO<E T="22">2</E>]<E T="22">CONV</E> = concentration of NO<E T="22">2</E> converted, ppm</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">[NO<E T="22">X</E>]<E T="22">orig</E> = original NO<E T="22">X</E> concentration prior to addition of O<E T="22">3,</E> ppm</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">[NO<E T="22">X</E>]<E T="22">rem</E> = NO<E T="22">X</E> concentration remaining after addition of O<E T="22">3,</E> ppm</FP>
        
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>
          <P>Supplemental information on calibration and other procedures in this method are given in reference 13.</P>
        </NOTE>
        <FP>Plot [NO<E T="22">2</E>]<E T="22">CONV</E> (y-axis) versus [NO<E T="22">2</E>]<E T="22">OUT</E> (x-axis) and draw or calculate the converter efficiency curve. The slope of the curve times 100 is the average converter efficiency, E<E T="22">C.</E> The average converter efficiency must be greater than 96%; if it is less than 96%, replace or service the converter.</FP>
        <P>2. <E T="03">Alternative B—</E>NO<E T="22">2</E> permeation device.</P>
        <P>
          <E T="03">Major equipment required:</E>
        </P>
        <P>Stable O<E T="22">3</E> generator.</P>
        <P>Chemiluminescence NO/NO<E T="24">X</E>/NO<E T="22">2</E> analyzer with strip chart recorder(s).</P>
        <P>NO concentration standard.</P>
        <P>NO<E T="22">2</E> concentration standard.</P>
        <P>2.1 <E T="03">Principle.</E> Atmospheres containing accurately known concentrations of nitrogen dioxide are generated by means of a permeation device. (<E T="03">10</E>) The permeation device emits NO<E T="22">2</E> at a known constant rate provided the temperature of the device is held constant (<E T="21">±</E>0.1 °C) and the device has been accurately calibrated at the temperature of use. The NO<E T="22">2</E> emitted from the device is diluted with zero air to produce NO<E T="22">2</E> concentrations suitable for calibration of the NO<E T="22">2</E> channel of the NO/NO<E T="24">X</E>/NO<E T="22">2</E> analyzer. An NO concentration standard is used for calibration of the NO and NO<E T="24">X</E> channels of the analyzer.</P>
        <P>2.2 <E T="03">Apparatus.</E> A typical system suitable for generating the required NO and NO<E T="22">2</E> concentrations is shown in Figure 2. All connections between components downstream from the permeation device should be of glass, Teflon<E T="51">®,</E> or other non-reactive material.</P>
        <P>2.2.1 <E T="03">Air flow controllers.</E> Devices capable of maintaining constant air flows within <E T="21">±</E>2% of the required flowrate.</P>
        <P>2.2.2 <E T="03">NO flow controller.</E> A device capable of maintaining constant NO flows within <E T="21">±</E>2% of the required flowrate. Component parts in contact with the NO must be of a non-reactive material.</P>
        <P>2.2.3 <E T="03">Air flowmeters.</E> Calibrated flowmeters capable of measuring and monitoring air flowrates with an accuracy of <E T="21">±</E>2% of the measured flowrate.</P>
        <P>2.2.4 <E T="03">NO flowmeter.</E> A calibrated flowmeter capable of measuring and monitoring NO flowrates with an accuracy of <E T="21">±</E>2% of the measured flowrate. (Rotameters have been reported to operate unreliably when measuring low NO flows and are not recommended.)</P>
        <P>2.2.5 <E T="03">Pressure regulator for standard NO cylinder.</E> This regulator must have a non-reactive diaphragm and internal parts and a suitable delivery pressure.</P>
        <P>2.2.6 <E T="03">Drier.</E> Scrubber to remove moisture from the permeation device air system. The use of the drier is optional with NO<E T="22">2</E> permeation devices not sensitive to moisture. (Refer to the supplier's instructions for use of the permeation device.)</P>
        <P>2.2.7 <E T="03">Constant temperature chamber.</E> Chamber capable of housing the NO<E T="22">2</E> permeation device and maintaining its temperature to within <E T="21">±</E>0.1 °C.</P>
        <P>2.2.8 <E T="03">Temperature measuring device.</E> Device capable of measuring and monitoring the temperature of the NO<E T="22">2</E> permeation device with an accuracy of <E T="21">±</E>0.05 °C.</P>
        <P>2.2.9 <E T="03">Valves.</E> A valve may be used as shown in Figure 2 to divert the NO<E T="22">2</E> from the permeation device when zero air or NO is required at the manifold. A second valve may be used to divert the NO flow when zero air or NO<E T="22">2</E> is required at the manifold.</P>
        <P>The valves should be constructed of glass, Teflon<E T="51">®,</E> or other nonreactive material.</P>
        <P>2.2.10 <E T="03">Mixing chamber.</E> A chamber constructed of glass, Teflon<E T="51">®,</E> or other nonreactive material and designed to provide thorough mixing of pollutant gas streams and diluent air.</P>
        <P>2.2.11 <E T="03">Output manifold.</E> The output manifold should be constructed of glass, Teflon<E T="51">®,</E> or other non-reactive material and should be of sufficient diameter to insure an insignificant pressure drop at the analyzer connection. The system must have a vent designed to insure atmospheric pressure at the manifold and to prevent ambient air from entering the manifold.</P>
        <P>2.3 <E T="03">Reagents.</E>
        </P>
        <P>2.3.1 <E T="03">Calibration standards.</E> Calibration standards are required for both NO and NO<E T="22">2.</E> The reference standard for the calibration may be either an NO or NO<E T="22">2</E> standard, and <PRTPAGE P="52"/>must be traceable to a National Bureau of Standards (NBS) NO in N<E T="22">2</E> Standard Reference Material (SRM 1683 or SRM 1684), and NBS NO<E T="22">2</E> Standard Reference Material (SRM 1629), or an NBS/EPA-approved commercially available Certified Reference Material (CRM). CRM's are described in Reference 14, and a list of CRM sources is available from the address shown for Reference 14. Reference 15 gives recommended procedures for certifying an NO gas cylinder against an NO SRM or CRM and for certifying an NO<E T="22">2</E> permeation device against an NO<E T="22">2</E> SRM. Reference 13 contains procedures for certifying an NO gas cylinder against an NO<E T="22">2</E> SRM and for certifying an NO<E T="22">2</E> permeation device against an NO SRM or CRM. A procedure for determining the amount of NO<E T="22">2</E> impurity in an NO cylinder is also contained in Reference 13. The NO or NO<E T="22">2</E> standard selected as the reference standard must be used to certify the other standard to ensure consistency between the two standards.</P>
        <P>2.3.1.1 <E T="03">NO</E>
          <E T="22">2</E>
          <E T="03">Concentration standard.</E> A permeation device suitable for generating NO<E T="22">2</E> concentrations at the required flow-rates over the required concentration range. If the permeation device is used as the reference standard, it must be traceable to an SRM or CRM as specified in 2.3.1. If an NO cylinder is used as the reference standard, the NO<E T="22">2</E> permeation device must be certified against the NO standard according to the procedure given in Reference 13. The use of the permeation device should be in strict accordance with the instructions supplied with the device. Additional information regarding the use of permeation devices is given by Scaringelli et al. (11) and Rook et al. (12).</P>
        <P>2.3.1.2 <E T="03">NO Concentration standard.</E> Gas cylinder containing 50 to 100 ppm NO in N<E T="22">2</E> with less than 1 ppm NO<E T="22">2.</E> If this cylinder is used as the reference standard, the cylinder must be traceable to an SRM or CRM as specified in 2.3.1. If an NO<E T="22">2</E> permeation device is used as the reference standard, the NO cylinder must be certified against the NO<E T="22">2</E> standard according to the procedure given in Reference 13. The cylinder should be recertified on a regular basis as determined by the local quality control program.</P>
        <P>2.3.3 <E T="03">Zero air.</E> Air, free of contaminants which might react with NO or NO<E T="22">2</E> or cause a detectable response on the NO/NO<E T="24">X</E>/NO<E T="22">2</E> analyzer. When using permeation devices that are sensitive to moisture, the zero air passing across the permeation device must be dry to avoid surface reactions on the device. (Refer to the supplier's instructions for use of the permeation device.) A procedure for generating zero air is given in reference 13.</P>
        <P>2.4 <E T="03">Procedure.</E>
        </P>
        <P>2.4.1 Assemble the calibration apparatus such as the typical one shown in Figure 2.</P>
        <P>2.4.2 Insure that all flowmeters are calibrated under the conditions of use against a reliable standard such as a soap bubble meter or wet-test meter. All volumetric flowrates should be corrected to 25 °C and 760 mm Hg. A discussion on the calibration of flowmeters is given in reference 13.</P>

        <P>2.4.3 Install the permeation device in the constant temperature chamber. Provide a small fixed air flow (200-400 scm<E T="21"> 3</E>/min) across the device. The permeation device should always have a continuous air flow across it to prevent large buildup of NO<E T="22">2</E> in the system and a consequent restabilization period. Record the flowrate as FP. Allow the device to stabilize at the calibration temperature for at least 24 hours. The temperature must be adjusted and controlled to within <E T="21">±</E>0.1 °C or less of the calibration temperature as monitored with the temperature measuring device.</P>
        <P>2.4.4 Precautions must be taken to remove O<E T="22">2</E> and other contaminants from the NO pressure regulator and delivery system prior to the start of calibration to avoid any conversion of the standard NO to NO<E T="22">2.</E> Failure to do so can cause significant errors in calibration. This problem may be minimized by</P>
        <P>(1) Carefully evacuating the regulator, when possible, after the regulator has been connected to the cylinder and before opening the cylinder valve;</P>
        <P>(2) Thoroughly flushing the regulator and delivery system with NO after opening the cylinder valve;</P>
        <P>(3) Not removing the regulator from the cylinder between calibrations unless absolutely necessary. Further discussion of these procedures is given in reference 13.</P>
        <P>2.4.5 Select the operating range of the NO/NO<E T="24">X</E> NO<E T="22">2</E> analyzer to be calibrated. In order to obtain maximum precision and accuracy for NO<E T="22">2</E> calibration, all three channels of the analyzer should be set to the same range. If operation of the NO and NO<E T="24">X</E> channels on higher ranges is desired, subsequent recalibration of the NO and NO<E T="24">X</E> channels on the higher ranges is recommended.</P>
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>

          <P>Some analyzer designs may require identical ranges for NO, NO<E T="24">X,</E> and NO<E T="22">2</E> during operation of the analyzer.</P>
        </NOTE>
        <P>2.4.6 Connect the recorder output cable(s) of the NO/NO<E T="24">X</E>/NO<E T="22">2</E> analyzer to the input terminals of the strip chart recorder(s). All adjustments to the analyzer should be performed based on the appropriate strip chart readings. References to analyzer responses in the procedures given below refer to recorder responses.</P>

        <P>2.4.7 Switch the valve to vent the flow from the permeation device and adjust the diluent air flowrate, F<E T="24">D,</E> to provide zero air at the output manifold. The total air flow must exceed the total demand of the analyzer(s) connected to the output manifold to insure that no ambient air is pulled into the manifold vent. Allow the analyzer to sample zero air until stable NO, NO<E T="24">X,</E> and NO<E T="22">2</E> responses are <PRTPAGE P="53"/>obtained. After the responses have stabilized, adjust the analyzer zero control(s).</P>
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>
          <P>Some analyzers may have separate zero controls for NO, NO<E T="24">X,</E> and NO<E T="22">2.</E> Other analyzers may have separate zero controls only for NO and NO<E T="24">X,</E> while still others may have only one zero common control to all three channels.</P>
        </NOTE>

        <FP>Offsetting the analyzer zero adjustments to +5% of scale is recommended to facilitate observing negative zero drift. Record the stable zero air responses as Z<E T="22">NO,</E> Z<E T="22">NO</E>
          <E T="24">X,</E> and Z<E T="22">NO</E>
          <E T="22">2</E>.</FP>
        <P>2.4.8 <E T="03">Preparation of NO and NO</E>
          <E T="24">X</E>
          <E T="03">calibration curves.</E>
        </P>
        <P>2.4.8.1 <E T="03">Adjustment of NO span control.</E> Adjust the NO flow from the standard NO cylinder to generate an NO concentration of approximately 80% of the upper range limit (URL) of the NO range. The exact NO concentration is calculated from:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="28" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.049</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">[NO]<E T="22">OUT</E> = diluted NO concentration at the output manifold, ppm</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
          <E T="03">F</E>
          <E T="22">NO</E> = NO flowrate, scm<E T="21">3</E>/min</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">[NO]<E T="22">STD</E>=concentration of the undiluted NO standard, ppm</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
          <E T="03">F</E>
          <E T="24">D</E> = diluent air flowrate, scm<E T="21"> 3</E>/min</FP>
        
        <FP>Sample this NO concentration until the NO and NO<E T="22">X</E> responses have stabilized. Adjust the NO span control to obtain a recorder response as indicated below:</FP>
        
        <FP>recorder response (% scale) =</FP>
        <MATH DEEP="30" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.050</MID>
        </MATH>
        <P/>
        <MATH DEEP="30" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.051</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
          <E T="03">URL</E> = nominal upper range limit of the NO channel, ppm</FP>
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>
          <P>Some analyzers may have separate span controls for NO, NO<E T="24">X,</E> and NO<E T="22">2.</E> Other analyzers may have separate span controls only for NO and NO<E T="24">X,</E> while still others may have only one span control common to all three channels. When only one span control is available, the span adjustment is made on the NO channel of the analyzer.</P>
        </NOTE>
        <FP>If substantial adjustment of the NO span control is necessary, it may be necessary to recheck the zero and span adjustments by repeating steps 2.4.7 and 2.4.8.1. Record the NO concentration and the analyzer's NO response.</FP>
        <P>2.4.8.2 <E T="03">Adjustment of NO</E>
          <E T="24">X</E>
          <E T="03">span control.</E> When adjusting the analyzer's NO<E T="24">X</E> span control, the presence of any NO<E T="22">2</E> impurity in the standard NO cylinder must be taken into account. Procedures for determining the amount of NO<E T="22">2</E> impurity in the standard NO cylinder are given in reference 13. The exact NO<E T="24">X</E> concentration is calculated from:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="30" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.052</MID>
        </MATH>
        
        <FP>where:</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">[NO<E T="22">X</E>]<E T="22">OUT</E> = diluted NO<E T="22">X</E> cencentration at the output manifold, ppm</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">[NO<E T="22">2</E>]<E T="22">IMP</E> = concentration of NO<E T="22">2</E> impurity in the standard NO cylinder, ppm</FP>
        
        <FP>Adjust the NO<E T="24">X</E> span control to obtain a convenient recorder response as indicated below:</FP>
        
        <FP>recorder response (% scale)</FP>
        <MATH DEEP="30" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.053</MID>
        </MATH>
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>

          <P>If the analyzer has only one span control, the span adjustment is made on the NO channel and no further adjustment is made here for NO<E T="22">X</E>.</P>
        </NOTE>
        <FP>If substantial adjustment of the NO<E T="22">X</E> span control is necessary, it may be necessary to recheck the zero and span adjustments by repeating steps 2.4.7 and 2.4.8.2. Record the NO<E T="22">X</E> concentration and the analyzer's NO<E T="22">X</E> response.</FP>

        <P>2.4.8.3 Generate several additional concentrations (at least five evenly spaced points across the remaining scale are suggested to verify linearity) by decreasing F<E T="22">NO</E> or increasing <E T="03">F</E>
          <E T="24">D.</E> For each concentration generated, calculate the exact NO and NO<E T="22">X</E> concentrations using equations (16) and (18) respectively. Record the analyzer's NO and NO<E T="22">X</E> responses for each concentration. Plot the analyzer responses versus the respective calculated NO and NO<E T="22">X</E> concentrations and draw or calculate the NO and NO<E T="22">X</E> calibration curves. For subsequent calibrations where linearity can be assumed, these curves may be checked with a two-point calibration consisting of a zero point and NO and NO<E T="22">X</E> concentrations of approximately 80 percent of the URL.</P>
        <P>2.4.9 <E T="03">Preparation of NO</E>
          <E T="22">2</E>
          <E T="03">calibration curve.</E>
        </P>
        <P>2.4.9.1 Remove the NO flow. Assuming the NO<E T="22">2</E> zero has been properly adjusted while sampling zero air in step 2.4.7, switch the valve to provide NO<E T="22">2</E> at the output manifold.</P>
        <P>2.4.9.2 Adjust <E T="03">F</E>
          <E T="24">D</E> to generate an NO<E T="22">2</E> concentration of approximately 80 percent of the <E T="03">URL</E> of the NO<E T="22">2</E> range. The total air flow must exceed the demand of the analyzer(s) under calibration. The actual concentration of NO<E T="22">2</E> is calculated from:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="28" SPAN="1">
          <PRTPAGE P="54"/>
          <MID>ER31AU93.054</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">[NO<E T="22">2</E>]<E T="22">OUT</E> = diluted NO<E T="22">2</E> concentration at the output manifold, ppm</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
          <E T="03">R</E> = permeation rate, <E T="21">μ</E>g/min</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
          <E T="03">K</E> = 0.532<E T="21">μ</E>l NO<E T="22">2</E>/<E T="21">μ</E>g NO<E T="22">2</E> (at 25 °C and 760 mm Hg)</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
          <E T="03">F</E>
          <E T="24">p</E> = air flowrate across permeation device, scm<E T="21"> 3</E>/min</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
          <E T="03">F</E>
          <E T="24">D</E> = diluent air flowrate, scm<E T="21"> 3</E>/min</FP>
        
        <FP>Sample this NO<E T="22">2</E> concentration until the NO<E T="22">X</E> and NO<E T="22">2</E> responses have stabilized. Adjust the NO<E T="22">2</E> span control to obtain a recorder response as indicated below:</FP>
        
        <FP>recorder response (% scale)</FP>
        <MATH DEEP="30" SPAN="1">
          <MID>ER31AU93.055</MID>
        </MATH>
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>

          <P>If the analyzer has only one or two span controls, the span adjustments are made on the NO channel or NO and NO<E T="22">X</E> channels and no further adjustment is made here for NO<E T="22">2</E>.</P>
        </NOTE>
        
        <FP>If substantial adjustment of the NO<E T="22">2</E> span control is necessary it may be necessary to recheck the zero and span adjustments by repeating steps 2.4.7 and 2.4.9.2. Record the NO<E T="22">2</E> concentration and the analyzer's NO<E T="22">2</E> response. Using the NO<E T="22">X</E> calibration curve obtained in step 2.4.8, measure and record the NO<E T="22">X</E> concentration as [NO<E T="22">X</E>]<E T="22">M</E>.</FP>
        <P>2.4.9.3 Adjust <E T="03">F</E>
          <E T="24">D</E> to obtain several other concentrations of NO<E T="22">2</E> over the NO<E T="22">2</E> range (at least five evenly spaced points across the remaining scale are suggested). Calculate each NO<E T="22">2</E> concentration using equation (20) and record the corresponding analyzer NO<E T="22">2</E> and NO<E T="22">X</E> responses. Plot the analyzer's NO<E T="22">2</E> responses versus the corresponding calculated NO<E T="22">2</E> concentrations and draw or calculate the NO<E T="22">2</E> calibration curve.</P>
        <P>2.4.10 <E T="03">Determination of converter efficiency.</E>
        </P>
        <P>2.4.10.1 Plot [NO<E T="22">X</E>]<E T="22">M</E> (y-axis) versus [NO<E T="22">2</E>]<E T="22">OUT</E> (x-axis) and draw or calculate the converter efficiency curve. The slope of the curve times 100 is the average converter efficiency, <E T="03">E</E>
          <E T="24">C.</E> The average converter efficiency must be greater than 96 percent; if it is less than 96 percent, replace or service the converter.</P>
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>
          <P>Supplemental information on calibration and other procedures in this method are given in reference 13.</P>
        </NOTE>
        <P>3. <E T="03">Frequency of calibration.</E> The frequency of calibration, as well as the number of points necessary to establish the calibration curve and the frequency of other performance checks, will vary from one analyzer to another. The user's quality control program should provide guidelines for initial establishment of these variables and for subsequent alteration as operational experience is accumulated. Manufacturers of analyzers should include in their instruction/operation manuals information and guidance as to these variables and on other matters of operation, calibration, and quality control.</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD1">References</HD>
        <P>1. A. Fontijn, A. J. Sabadell, and R. J. Ronco, “Homogeneous Chemiluminescent Measurement of Nitric Oxide with Ozone,” Anal. Chem., 42, 575 (1970).</P>
        <P>2. D. H. Stedman, E. E. Daby, F. Stuhl, and H. Niki, “Analysis of Ozone and Nitric Oxide by a Chemiluminiscent Method in Laboratory and Atmospheric Studies of Photochemical Smog,” J. Air Poll. Control Assoc., 22, 260 (1972).</P>
        <P>3. B. E. Martin, J. A. Hodgeson, and R. K. Stevens, “Detection of Nitric Oxide Chemiluminescence at Atmospheric Pressure,” Presented at 164th National ACS Meeting, New York City, August 1972.</P>
        <P>4. J. A. Hodgeson, K. A. Rehme, B. E. Martin, and R. K. Stevens, “Measurements for Atmospheric Oxides of Nitrogen and Ammonia by Chemiluminescence,” Presented at 1972 APCA Meeting, Miami, FL, June 1972.</P>
        <P>5. R. K. Stevens and J. A. Hodgeson, “Applications of Chemiluminescence Reactions to the Measurement of Air Pollutants,” Anal. Chem., 45, 443A (1973).</P>

        <P>6. L. P. Breitenbach and M. Shelef, “Development of a Method for the Analysis of NO<E T="22">2</E> and NH<E T="22">3</E> by NO-Measuring Instruments,” J. Air Poll. Control Assoc., 23, 128 (1973).</P>

        <P>7. A. M. Winer, J. W. Peters, J. P. Smith, and J. N. Pitts, Jr., “Response of Commercial Chemiluminescent NO-NO<E T="22">2</E> Analyzers to Other Nitrogen-Containing Compounds,” Environ. Sci. Technol., 8, 1118 (1974).</P>
        <P>8. K. A. Rehme, B. E. Martin, and J. A. Hodgeson, Tentative Method for the Calibration of Nitric Oxide, Nitrogen Dioxide, and Ozone Analyzers by Gas Phase Titration,” EPA-R2-73-246, March 1974.</P>
        <P>9. J. A. Hodgeson, R. K. Stevens, and B. E. Martin, “A Stable Ozone Source Applicable as a Secondary Standard for Calibration of Atmospheric Monitors,” ISA Transactions, 11, 161 (1972).</P>
        <P>10. A. E. O'Keeffe and G. C. Ortman, “Primary Standards for Trace Gas Analysis,” Anal. Chem., 38, 760 (1966).</P>
        <P>11. F. P. Scaringelli, A. E. O'Keeffe, E. Rosenberg, and J. P. Bell, “Preparation of Known Concentrations of Gases and Vapors with Permeation Devices Calibrated Gravimetrically,” Anal. Chem., 42, 871 (1970).</P>

        <P>12. H. L. Rook, E. E. Hughes, R. S. Fuerst, and J. H. Margeson, “Operation Characteristics of NO<E T="22">2</E> Permeation Devices,” Presented at 167th National ACS Meeting, Los Angeles, CA, April 1974.<PRTPAGE P="55"/>
        </P>
        <P>13. E. C. Ellis, “Technical Assistance Document for the Chemiluminescence Measurement of Nitrogen Dioxide,” EPA-E600/4-75-003 (Available in draft form from the United States Environmental Protection Agency, Department E (MD-76), Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711).</P>
        <P>14. A Procedure for Establishing Traceability of Gas Mixtures to Certain National Bureau of Standards Standard Reference Materials. EPA-600/7-81-010, Joint publication by NBS and EPA. Available from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory (MD-77), Research Triangle Park, NC 27711, May 1981.</P>
        <P>15. <E T="03">Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems, Volume II, Ambient Air Specific Methods.</E> The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711. Publication No. EAP-600/4-77-027a.</P>
        <GPH DEEP="254" SPAN="2">
          <GID>50-761.eps</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="216" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="56"/>
          <GID>50-762.eps</GID>
        </GPH>
        <CITA TYPE="W">[41 FR 52688, Dec. 1, 1976, as amended at 48 FR 2529, Jan 20, 1983]</CITA>
      </APPENDIX>
      <APPENDIX>
        <EAR>Pt. 50, App. G</EAR>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">
          <E T="05">Appendix G to Part 50—Reference Method for the Determination of Lead in Suspended Particulate Matter Collected From Ambient Air</E>
        </HD>
        <P>1. <E T="03">Principle and applicability.</E>
        </P>

        <P>1.1 Ambient air suspended particulate matter is collected on a glass-fiber filter for 24 hours using a high volume air sampler. The analysis of the 24-hour samples may be performed for either individual samples or composites of the samples collected over a calendar month or quarter, provided that the compositing procedure has been approved in accordance with section 2.8 of appendix C to part 58 of this chapter—<E T="03">Modifications of methods by users.</E> (Guidance or assistance in requesting approval under Section 2.8 can be obtained from the address given in section 2.7 of appendix C to part 58 of this chapter.)</P>

        <P>1.2 Lead in the particulate matter is solubilized by extraction with nitric acid (HNO<E T="22">3</E>), facilitated by heat or by a mixture of HNO<E T="22">3</E> and hydrochloric acid (HCl) facilitated by ultrasonication.</P>
        <P>1.3 The lead content of the sample is analyzed by atomic absorption spectrometry using an air-acetylene flame, the 283.3 or 217.0 nm lead absorption line, and the optimum instrumental conditions recommended by the manufacturer.</P>
        <P>1.4 The ultrasonication extraction with HNO<E T="22">3</E>/HCl will extract metals other than lead from ambient particulate matter.</P>
        <P>2. <E T="03">Range, sensitivity, and lower detectable limit.</E> The values given below are typical of the methods capabilities. Absolute values will vary for individual situations depending on the type of instrument used, the lead line, and operating conditions.</P>
        <P>2.1 <E T="03">Range.</E> The typical range of the method is 0.07 to 7.5 <E T="21">μ</E>g Pb/m<E T="21">3</E> assuming an upper linear range of analysis of 15 <E T="21">μ</E>g/ml and an air volume of 2,400 m<E T="21">3</E>.</P>
        <P>2.2 <E T="03">Sensitivity.</E> Typical sensitivities for a 1 percent change in absorption (0.0044 absorbance units) are 0.2 and 0.5 <E T="21">μ</E>g Pb/ml for the 217.0 and 283.3 nm lines, respectively.</P>
        <P>2.3 <E T="03">Lower detectable limit (LDL).</E> A typical LDL is 0.07 <E T="21">μ</E>g Pb/m<E T="21">3.</E> The above value was calculated by doubling the between-laboratory standard deviation obtained for the lowest measurable lead concentration in a collaborative test of the method.(<E T="03">15</E>) An air volume of 2,400 m<E T="21">3</E> was assumed.</P>
        <P>3. <E T="03">Interferences.</E> Two types of interferences are possible: chemical and light scattering.</P>
        <P>3.1 <E T="03">Chemical.</E> Reports on the absence <E T="03">(1, 2, 3, 4, 5)</E> of chemical interferences far outweigh those reporting their presence, <E T="03">(6)</E> therefore, no correction for chemical interferences is given here. If the analyst suspects that the sample matrix is causing a chemical interference, the interference can be verified and corrected for by carrying out the analysis with and without the method of standard additions.<E T="03">(7)</E>
          <PRTPAGE P="57"/>
        </P>
        <P>3.2 <E T="03">Light scattering.</E> Nonatomic absorption or light scattering, produced by high concentrations of dissolved solids in the sample, can produce a significant interference, especially at low lead concentrations. (<E T="03">2</E>) The interference is greater at the 217.0 nm line than at the 283.3 nm line. No interference was observed using the 283.3 nm line with a similar method.(<E T="03">1</E>)</P>
        <P>Light scattering interferences can, however, be corrected for instrumentally. Since the dissolved solids can vary depending on the origin of the sample, the correction may be necessary, especially when using the 217.0 nm line. Dual beam instruments with a continuum source give the most accurate correction. A less accurate correction can be obtained by using a nonabsorbing lead line that is near the lead analytical line. Information on use of these correction techniques can be obtained from instrument manufacturers' manuals.</P>

        <P>If instrumental correction is not feasible, the interference can be eliminated by use of the ammonium pyrrolidinecarbodithioate-methylisobutyl ketone, chelation-solvent extraction technique of sample preparation.(<E T="03">8</E>)</P>
        <P>4. <E T="03">Precision and bias.</E>
        </P>

        <P>4.1 The high-volume sampling procedure used to collect ambient air particulate matter has a between-laboratory relative standard deviation of 3.7 percent over the range 80 to 125 <E T="21">μ</E>g/m<E T="21">3</E>.(<E T="03">9</E>) The combined extraction-analysis procedure has an average within-laboratory relative standard deviation of 5 to 6 percent over the range 1.5 to 15 <E T="21">μ</E>g Pb/ml, and an average between laboratory relative standard deviation of 7 to 9 percent over the same range. These values include use of either extraction procedure.</P>

        <P>4.2 Single laboratory experiments and collaborative testing indicate that there is no significant difference in lead recovery between the hot and ultrasonic extraction procedures.(<E T="03">15</E>)</P>
        <P>5. <E T="03">Apparatus.</E>
        </P>
        <P>5.1 <E T="03">Sampling.</E>
        </P>
        <P>5.1.1 <E T="03">High-Volume Sampler.</E> Use and calibrate the sampler as described in appendix B to this part.</P>
        <P>5.2 <E T="03">Analysis.</E>
        </P>
        <P>5.2.1 <E T="03">Atomic absorption spectrophotometer.</E> Equipped with lead hollow cathode or electrodeless discharge lamp.</P>
        <P>5.2.1.1 <E T="03">Acetylene.</E> The grade recommended by the instrument manufacturer should be used. Change cylinder when pressure drops below 50-100 psig.</P>
        <P>5.2.1.2 <E T="03">Air.</E> Filtered to remove particulate, oil, and water.</P>
        <P>5.2.2 <E T="03">Glassware.</E> Class A borosilicate glassware should be used throughout the analysis.</P>
        <P>5.2.2.1 <E T="03">Beakers.</E> 30 and 150 ml. graduated, Pyrex.</P>
        <P>5.2.2.2 <E T="03">Volumetric flasks.</E> 100-ml.</P>
        <P>5.2.2.3 <E T="03">Pipettes.</E> To deliver 50, 30, 15, 8, 4, 2, 1 ml.</P>
        <P>5.2.2.4 <E T="03">Cleaning.</E> All glassware should be scrupulously cleaned. The following procedure is suggested. Wash with laboratory detergent, rinse, soak for 4 hours in 20 percent (w/w) HNO<E T="22">3,</E> rinse 3 times with distilled-deionized water, and dry in a dust free manner.</P>
        <P>5.2.3 <E T="03">Hot plate.</E>
        </P>
        <P>5.2.4. <E T="03">Ultrasonication water bath, unheated.</E> Commercially available laboratory ultrasonic cleaning baths of 450 watts or higher “cleaning power,” i.e., actual ultrasonic power output to the bath have been found satisfactory.</P>
        <P>5.2.5 <E T="03">Template.</E> To aid in sectioning the glass-fiber filter. See figure 1 for dimensions.</P>
        <P>5.2.6 <E T="03">Pizza cutter.</E> Thin wheel. Thickness -1mm.</P>
        <P>5.2.7 <E T="03">Watch glass.</E>
        </P>
        <P>5.2.8 <E T="03">Polyethylene bottles.</E> For storage of samples. Linear polyethylene gives better storage stability than other polyethylenes and is preferred.</P>
        <P>5.2.9 Parafilm “M”.<SU>1</SU>
          <FTREF/> American Can Co., Marathon Products, Neenah, Wis., or equivalent.</P>
        <FTNT>
          <P>
            <SU>1</SU> Mention of commercial products does not imply endorsement by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.</P>
        </FTNT>
        <P>6. <E T="03">Reagents.</E>
        </P>
        <P>6.1 <E T="03">Sampling.</E>
        </P>
        <P>6.1.1 <E T="03">Glass fiber filters.</E> The specifications given below are intended to aid the user in obtaining high quality filters with reproducible properties. These specifications have been met by EPA contractors.</P>
        <P>6.1.1.1 <E T="03">Lead content.</E> The absolute lead content of filters is not critical, but low values are, of course, desirable. EPA typically obtains filters with a lead content of -75 <E T="21">μ</E>g/filter.</P>
        <P>It is important that the variation in lead content from filter to filter, within a given batch, be small.</P>
        <P>6.1.1.2 <E T="03">Testing.</E>
        </P>
        <P>6.1.1.2.1 For large batches of filters (&gt;500 filters) select at random 20 to 30 filters from a given batch. For small batches (&gt;500 filters) a lesser number of filters may be taken. Cut one <FR>3/4</FR>″×8″ strip from each filter anywhere in the filter. Analyze all strips, separately, according to the directions in sections 7 and 8.</P>
        <P>6.1.1.2.2 Calculate the total lead in each filter as</P>
        <MATH DEEP="26" SPAN="1">
          <MID>EC08NO91.084</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">F<E T="22">b</E> = Amount of lead per 72 square inches of filter, <E T="21">μ</E>g.</FP>
        
        <P>6.1.1.2.3 Calculate the mean, F<E T="22">b,</E> of the values and the relative standard deviation (standard deviation/mean × 100). If the relative standard deviation is high enough so <PRTPAGE P="58"/>that, in the analysts opinion, subtraction of F<E T="22">b,</E> (section 10.3) may result in a significant error in the <E T="21">μ</E>g Pb/m<E T="21">3,</E> the batch should be rejected.</P>
        <P>6.1.1.2.4 For acceptable batches, use the value of F<E T="22">b</E> to correct all lead analyses (section 10.3) of particulate matter collected using that batch of filters. If the analyses are below the LDL (section 2.3) no correction is necessary.</P>
        <P>6.2 <E T="03">Analysis.</E>
        </P>
        <P>6.2.1 Concentrated (15.6 <E T="03">M)</E> HNO<E T="22">3.</E> ACS reagent grade HNO<E T="22">3</E> and commercially available redistilled HNO<E T="22">3</E> has found to have sufficiently low lead concentrations.</P>
        <P>6.2.2 Concentrated (11.7 <E T="03">M</E>) HCl. ACS reagent grade.</P>
        <P>6.2.3 <E T="03">Distilled-deionized water.</E> (D.I. water).</P>
        <P>6.2.4 3 <E T="03">M</E> HNO<E T="22">3.</E> This solution is used in the hot extraction procedure. To prepare, add 192 ml of concentrated HNO<E T="22">3</E> to D.I. water in a 1 <E T="03">l</E> volumetric flask. Shake well, cool, and dilute to volume with D.I. water. <E T="03">Caution:</E> Nitric acid fumes are toxic. Prepare in a well ventilated fume hood.</P>
        <P>6.2.5 0.45 <E T="03">M</E> HNO<E T="22">3.</E> This solution is used as the matrix for calibration standards when using the hot extraction procedure. To prepare, add 29 ml of concentrated HNO<E T="22">3</E> to D.I. water in a 1 <E T="03">l</E> volumetric flask. Shake well, cool, and dilute to volume with D.I. water.</P>
        <P>6.2.6 2.6 <E T="03">M</E> HNO<E T="22">3</E>+0 to 0.9 <E T="03">M</E> HCl. This solution is used in the ultrasonic extraction procedure. The concentration of HCl can be varied from 0 to 0.9 <E T="03">M.</E> Directions are given for preparation of a 2.6 <E T="03">M</E> HNO<E T="22">3</E>+0.9 <E T="03">M</E> HCl solution. Place 167 ml of concentrated HNO<E T="22">3</E> into a 1 <E T="03">l</E> volumetric flask and add 77 ml of concentrated HCl. Stir 4 to 6 hours, dilute to nearly 1 <E T="03">l</E> with D.I. water, cool to room temperature, and dilute to 1 <E T="03">l</E>.</P>
        <P>6.2.7 0.40 <E T="03">M</E> HNO<E T="22">3</E> + X <E T="03">M</E> HCl. This solution is used as the matrix for calibration standards when using the ultrasonic extraction procedure. To prepare, add 26 ml of concentrated HNO<E T="22">3,</E> plus the ml of HCl required, to a 1 <E T="03">l</E> volumetric flask. Dilute to nearly 1 <E T="03">l</E> with D.I. water, cool to room temperature, and dilute to 1 <E T="03">l.</E> The amount of HCl required can be determined from the following equation:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="24" SPAN="1">
          <MID>EC08NO91.085</MID>
        </MATH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">y = ml of concentrated HCl required.</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x = molarity of HCl in 6.2.6.</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">0.15 = dilution factor in 7.2.2.</FP>
        
        <P>6.2.8 Lead nitrate, Pb(NO<E T="22">3</E>)<E T="22">2.</E> ACS reagent grade, purity 99.0 percent. Heat for 4 hours at 120 °C and cool in a desiccator.</P>
        <P>6.3 <E T="03">Calibration standards.</E>
        </P>
        <P>6.3.1 Master standard, 1000 <E T="21">μ</E>g Pb/ml in HNO<E T="22">3.</E> Dissolve 1.598 g of Pb(NO<E T="22">3</E>)<E T="22">2</E> in 0.45 <E T="03">M</E> HNO<E T="22">3</E> contained in a 1 <E T="03">l</E> volumetric flask and dilute to volume with 0.45 <E T="03">M</E> HNO<E T="22">3</E>.</P>
        <P>6.3.2 Master standard, 1000 <E T="21">μ</E>g Pb/ml in HNO<E T="22">3</E>/HCl. Prepare as in section 6.3.1 except use the HNO<E T="22">3</E>/HCl solution in section 6.2.7.</P>
        <P>Store standards in a polyethylene bottle. Commercially available certified lead standard solutions may also be used.</P>
        <P>7. <E T="03">Procedure.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.1 <E T="03">Sampling.</E> Collect samples for 24 hours using the procedure described in reference <E T="03">10</E> with glass-fiber filters meeting the specifications in section 6.1.1. Transport collected samples to the laboratory taking care to minimize contamination and loss of sample. (<E T="03">16).</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.2 <E T="03">Sample preparation.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.2.1 <E T="03">Hot extraction procedure.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.2.1.1 Cut a <FR>3/4</FR>″×8″ strip from the exposed filter using a template and a pizza cutter as described in Figures 1 and 2. Other cutting procedures may be used.</P>

        <P>Lead in ambient particulate matter collected on glass fiber filters has been shown to be uniformly distributed across the filter.<E T="21">1, 3, 11</E> Another study <E T="21">12</E> has shown that when sampling near a roadway, strip position contributes significantly to the overall variability associated with lead analyses. Therefore, when sampling near a roadway, additional strips should be analyzed to minimize this variability.</P>

        <P>7.2.1.2 Fold the strip in half twice and place in a 150-ml beaker. Add 15 ml of 3 <E T="03">M</E> HNO<E T="22">3</E> to cover the sample. The acid should completely cover the sample. Cover the beaker with a watch glass.</P>

        <P>7.2.1.3 Place beaker on the hot-plate, contained in a fume hood, and boil gently for 30 min. Do not let the sample evaporate to dryness. <E T="03">Caution:</E> Nitric acid fumes are toxic.</P>
        <P>7.2.1.4 Remove beaker from hot plate and cool to near room temperature.</P>
        <P>7.2.1.5 Quantitatively transfer the sample as follows:</P>
        <P>7.2.1.5.1 Rinse watch glass and sides of beaker with D.I. water.</P>
        <P>7.2.1.5.2 Decant extract and rinsings into a 100-ml volumetric flask.</P>

        <P>7.2.1.5.3 Add D.I. water to 40 ml mark on beaker, cover with watch glass, and set aside for a minimum of 30 minutes. This is a critical step and cannot be omitted since it allows the HNO<E T="22">3</E> trapped in the filter to diffuse into the rinse water.</P>
        <P>7.2.1.5.4 Decant the water from the filter into the volumetric flask.</P>
        <P>7.2.1.5.5 Rinse filter and beaker twice with D.I. water and add rinsings to volumetric flask until total volume is 80 to 85 ml.</P>
        <P>7.2.1.5.6 Stopper flask and shake vigorously. Set aside for approximately 5 minutes or until foam has dissipated.</P>
        <P>7.2.1.5.7 Bring solution to volume with D.I. water. Mix thoroughly.</P>

        <P>7.2.1.5.8 Allow solution to settle for one hour before proceeding with analysis.<PRTPAGE P="59"/>
        </P>
        <P>7.2.1.5.9 If sample is to be stored for subsequent analysis, transfer to a linear polyethylene bottle.</P>
        <P>7.2.2 <E T="03">Ultrasonic extraction procedure.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.2.2.1 Cut a <FR>3/4</FR>″×8″ strip from the exposed filter as described in section 7.2.1.1.</P>

        <P>7.2.2.2 Fold the strip in half twice and place in a 30 ml beaker. Add 15 ml of the HNO<E T="22">3</E>/HCl solution in section 6.2.6. The acid should completely cover the sample. Cover the beaker with parafilm.</P>
        <P>The parafilm should be placed over the beaker such that none of the parafilm is in contact with water in the ultrasonic bath. Otherwise, rinsing of the parafilm (section 7.2.2.4.1) may contaminate the sample.</P>
        <P>7.2.2.3 Place the beaker in the ultrasonication bath and operate for 30 minutes.</P>
        <P>7.2.2.4 Quantitatively transfer the sample as follows:</P>
        <P>7.2.2.4.1 Rinse parafilm and sides of beaker with D.I. water.</P>
        <P>7.2.2.4.2 Decant extract and rinsings into a 100 ml volumetric flask.</P>
        <P>7.2.2.4.3 Add 20 ml D.I. water to cover the filter strip, cover with parafilm, and set aside for a minimum of 30 minutes. This is a critical step and cannot be omitted. The sample is then processed as in sections 7.2.1.5.4 through 7.2.1.5.9.</P>
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>

          <P>Samples prepared by the hot extraction procedure are now in 0.45 <E T="03">M</E> HNO<E T="22">3.</E> Samples prepared by the ultrasonication procedure are in 0.40 <E T="03">M</E> HNO<E T="22">3</E> + X <E T="03">M</E> HCl.</P>
        </NOTE>
        <P>8. <E T="03">Analysis.</E>
        </P>
        <P>8.1 Set the wavelength of the monochromator at 283.3 or 217.0 nm. Set or align other instrumental operating conditions as recommended by the manufacturer.</P>
        <P>8.2 The sample can be analyzed directly from the volumetric flask, or an appropriate amount of sample decanted into a sample analysis tube. In either case, care should be taken not to disturb the settled solids.</P>
        <P>8.3 Aspirate samples, calibration standards and blanks (section 9.2) into the flame and record the equilibrium absorbance.</P>
        <P>8.4 Determine the lead concentration in <E T="21">μ</E>g Pb/ml, from the calibration curve, section 9.3.</P>
        <P>8.5 Samples that exceed the linear calibration range should be diluted with acid of the same concentration as the calibration standards and reanalyzed.</P>
        <P>9. <E T="03">Calibration.</E>
        </P>
        <P>9.1 <E T="03">Working standard,</E> 20 <E T="21">μ</E>g Pb/ml. Prepared by diluting 2.0 ml of the master standard (section 6.3.1 if the hot acid extraction was used or section 6.3.2 if the ultrasonic extraction procedure was used) to 100 ml with acid of the same concentration as used in preparing the master standard.</P>
        <P>9.2 <E T="03">Calibration standards.</E> Prepare daily by diluting the working standard, with the same acid matrix, as indicated below. Other lead concentrations may be used.</P>
        <GPOTABLE CDEF="s50,9,9" COLS="3" OPTS="L2">
          <BOXHD>
            <CHED H="1">Volume of 20 <E T="21">μ</E>g/ml working standard, ml</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Final volume, ml</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Concentration <E T="21">μ</E>g Pb/ml</CHED>
          </BOXHD>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">0</ENT>
            <ENT>100</ENT>
            <ENT>0</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">1.0</ENT>
            <ENT>200</ENT>
            <ENT>0.1</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">2.0</ENT>
            <ENT>200</ENT>
            <ENT>0.2</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">2.0</ENT>
            <ENT>100</ENT>
            <ENT>0.4</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">4.0</ENT>
            <ENT>100</ENT>
            <ENT>0.8</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">8.0</ENT>
            <ENT>100</ENT>
            <ENT>1.6</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">15.0</ENT>
            <ENT>100</ENT>
            <ENT>3.0</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">30.0</ENT>
            <ENT>100</ENT>
            <ENT>6.0</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">50.0</ENT>
            <ENT>100</ENT>
            <ENT>10.0</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">100.0</ENT>
            <ENT>100</ENT>
            <ENT>20.0</ENT>
          </ROW>
        </GPOTABLE>
        <P>9.3 <E T="03">Preparation of calibration curve.</E> Since the working range of analysis will vary depending on which lead line is used and the type of instrument, no one set of instructions for preparation of a calibration curve can be given. Select standards (plus the reagent blank), in the same acid concentration as the samples, to cover the linear absorption range indicated by the instrument manufacturer. Measure the absorbance of the blank and standards as in section 8.0. Repeat until good agreement is obtained between replicates. Plot absorbance (y-axis) versus concentration in <E T="21">μ</E>g Pb/ml (x-axis). Draw (or compute) a straight line through the linear portion of the curve. Do not force the calibration curve through zero. Other calibration procedures may be used.</P>

        <P>To determine stability of the calibration curve, remeasure—alternately—one of the following calibration standards for every 10th sample analyzed: Concentration <E T="22">≤</E> 1<E T="21">μ</E>g Pb/ml; concentration <E T="22">≤</E> 10 <E T="21">μ</E>g Pb/ml. If either standard deviates by more than 5 percent from the value predicted by the calibration curve, recalibrate and repeat the previous 10 analyses.</P>
        <P>10. <E T="03">Calculation.</E>
        </P>
        <P>10.1 <E T="03">Measured air volume.</E> Calculate the measured air volume at Standard Temperature and Pressure as described in Reference 10.</P>
        <P>10.2 <E T="03">Lead concentration.</E> Calculate lead concentration in the air sample.</P>
        <MATH DEEP="38" SPAN="2">
          <MID>50-766.eps</MID>
        </MATH>
        <PRTPAGE P="60"/>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">C = Concentration, <E T="21">μ</E>g Pb/sm<E T="21">3</E>.</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
          <E T="21">μ</E>g Pb/ml = Lead concentration determined from section 8.</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">100 ml/strip = Total sample volume.</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">12 strips = Total useable filter area, 8″×9″. Exposed area of one strip, <FR>3/4</FR>″×7″.</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Filter = Total area of one strip, <FR>3/4</FR>″×8″.</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">F<E T="22">b</E> = Lead concentration of blank filter, <E T="21">μ</E>g, from section 6.1.1.2.3.</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">V<E T="22">STP</E> = Air volume from section 10.2.</FP>
        
        <P>11. <E T="03">Quality control.</E>
        </P>
        <P>

          <FR>3/4</FR>″×8″ glass fiber filter strips containing 80 to 2000 <E T="21">μ</E>g Pb/strip (as lead salts) and blank strips with zero Pb content should be used to determine if the method—as being used—has any bias. Quality control charts should be established to monitor differences between measured and true values. The frequency of such checks will depend on the local quality control program.</P>

        <P>To minimize the possibility of generating unreliable data, the user should follow practices established for assuring the quality of air pollution data, (<E T="03">13</E>) and take part in EPA's semiannual audit program for lead analyses.</P>
        <P>12. <E T="03">Trouble shooting.</E>
        </P>
        <P>1. During extraction of lead by the hot extraction procedure, it is important to keep the sample covered so that corrosion products—formed on fume hood surfaces which may contain lead—are not deposited in the extract.</P>
        <P>2. The sample acid concentration should minimize corrosion of the nebulizer. However, different nebulizers may require lower acid concentrations. Lower concentrations can be used provided samples and standards have the same acid concentration.</P>
        <P>3. Ashing of particulate samples has been found, by EPA and contractor laboratories, to be unnecessary in lead analyses by atomic absorption. Therefore, this step was omitted from the method.</P>
        <P>4. Filtration of extracted samples, to remove particulate matter, was specifically excluded from sample preparation, because some analysts have observed losses of lead due to filtration.</P>
        <P>5. If suspended solids should clog the nebulizer during analysis of samples, centrifuge the sample to remove the solids.</P>
        <P>13. <E T="03">Authority.</E>
        </P>
        <P>(Secs. 109 and 301(a), Clean Air Act, as amended (42 U.S.C. 7409, 7601(a)))</P>
        <P>14. <E T="03">References.</E>
        </P>

        <P>1. Scott, D. R. et al. “Atomic Absorption and Optical Emission Analysis of NASN Atmospheric Particulate Samples for Lead.” <E T="03">Envir. Sci. and Tech., 10,</E> 877-880 (1976).</P>
        <P>2. Skogerboe, R. K. et al. “Monitoring for Lead in the Environment.” pp. 57-66, Department of Chemistry, Colorado State University, Fort Collins, CO 80523. Submitted to National Science Foundation for publications, 1976.</P>

        <P>3. Zdrojewski, A. et al. “The Accurate Measurement of Lead in Airborne Particulates.” <E T="03">Inter. J. Environ. Anal. Chem., 2,</E> 63-77 (1972).</P>
        <P>4. Slavin, W., “Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy.” Published by Interscience Company, New York, NY (1968).</P>
        <P>5. Kirkbright, G. F., and Sargent, M., “Atomic Absorption and Fluorescence Spectroscopy.” Published by Academic Press, New York, NY 1974.</P>

        <P>6. Burnham, C. D. et al., “Determination of Lead in Airborne Particulates in Chicago and Cook County, IL, by Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy.” Envir. Sci. and Tech., 3, <E T="01">472-475 (1969).</E>
        </P>

        <P>7. “Proposed Recommended Practices for Atomic Absorption Spectrometry.” <E T="03">ASTM Book of Standards,</E> part 30, pp. 1596-1608 (July 1973).</P>

        <P>8. Koirttyohann, S. R. and Wen, J. W., “Critical Study of the APCD-MIBK Extraction System for Atomic Absorption.” <E T="03">Anal. Chem., 45,</E>  1986-1989 (1973).</P>
        <P>9. <E T="03">Collaborative Study of Reference Method for the Determination of Suspended Particulates in the Atmosphere (High Volume Method).</E> Obtainable from National Technical Information Service, Department of Commerce, Port Royal Road, Springfield, VA 22151, as PB-205-891.</P>
        <P>10. [Reserved]</P>

        <P>11. Dubois, L., et al., “The Metal Content of Urban Air.” JAPCA, <E T="03">16,</E> 77-78 (1966).</P>
        <P>12. EPA Report No. 600/4-77-034, June 1977, “Los Angeles Catalyst Study Symposium.” Page 223.</P>
        <P>13. <E T="03">Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement System. Volume 1—Principles.</E> EPA-600/9-76-005, March 1976.</P>

        <P>14. Thompson, R. J. et al., “Analysis of Selected Elements in Atmospheric Particulate Matter by Atomic Absorption.” <E T="03">Atomic Absorption Newsletter, 9,</E> No. 3, May-June 1970.</P>
        <P>15. To be published. EPA, QAB, EMSL, RTP, N.C. 27711</P>
        <P>16. <E T="03">Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems. Volume II—Ambient Air Specific Methods.</E> EPA-600/4-77/027a, May 1977.</P>
        <GPH DEEP="329" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="61"/>
          <GID>50-767.eps</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="366" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="62"/>
          <GID>50-768.eps</GID>
        </GPH>
        <CITA TYPE="W">(Secs. 109, 301(a) of the Clean Air Act, as amended (42 U.S.C. 7409, 7601(a)); secs. 110, 301(a) and 319 of the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 7410, 7601(a), 7619))
        </CITA>
        <CITA TYPE="W">[43 FR 46258, Oct. 5, 1978; 44 FR 37915, June 29, 1979, as amended at 46 FR 44163, Sept. 3, 1981; 52 FR 24664, July 1, 1987]</CITA>
      </APPENDIX>
      <APPENDIX>
        <EAR>Pt. 50, App. H</EAR>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">
          <E T="05">Appendix H to Part 50—Interpretation of the 1-Hour Primary and Secondary National Ambient Air Quality Standards for Ozone</E>
        </HD>
        <HD SOURCE="HD1">
          <E T="05">1. General</E>
        </HD>

        <P>This appendix explains how to determine when the expected number of days per calendar year with maximum hourly average concentrations above 0.12 ppm (235 <E T="21">μ</E>g/m<E T="21">3</E>) is equal to or less than 1. An expanded discussion of these procedures and associated examples are contained in the “Guideline for Interpretation of Ozone Air Quality Standards.” For purposes of clarity in the following discussion, it is convenient to use the term “exceedance” to describe a daily maximum hourly average ozone measurement that is greater than the level of the standard. Therefore, the phrase “expected number of days with maximum hourly average ozone concentrations above the level of the standard” may be simply stated as the “expected number of exceedances.”<PRTPAGE P="63"/>
        </P>
        <P>The basic principle in making this determination is relatively straightforward. Most of the complications that arise in determining the expected number of annual exceed-ances relate to accounting for incomplete sampling. In general, the average number of exceedances per calendar year must be less than or equal to 1. In its simplest form, the number of exceedances at a monitoring site would be recorded for each calendar year and then averaged over the past 3 calendar years to determine if this average is less than or equal to 1.</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD1">
          <E T="05">2. Interpretation of Expected Exceedances</E>
        </HD>
        <P>The ozone standard states that the expected number of exceedances per year must be less than or equal to 1. The statistical term “expected number” is basically an arithmetic average. The following example explains what it would mean for an area to be in compliance with this type of standard. Suppose a monitoring station records a valid daily maximum hourly average ozone value for every day of the year during the past 3 years. At the end of each year, the number of days with maximum hourly concentrations above 0.12 ppm is determined and this number is averaged with the results of previous years. As long as this average remains “less than or equal to 1,” the area is in compliance.</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD1">
          <E T="05">3. Estimating the Number of Exceedances for a Year</E>
        </HD>
        <P>In general, a valid daily maximum hourly average value may not be available for each day of the year, and it will be necessary to account for these missing values when estimating the number of exceedances for a particular calendar year. The purpose of these computations is to determine if the expected number of exceedances per year is less than or equal to 1. Thus, if a site has two or more observed exceedances each year, the standard is not met and it is not necessary to use the procedures of this section to account for incomplete sampling.</P>
        <P>The term “missing value” is used here in the general sense to describe all days that do not have an associated ozone measurement. In some cases, a measurement might actually have been missed but in other cases no measurement may have been scheduled for that day. A daily maximum ozone value is defined to be the highest hourly ozone value recorded for the day. This daily maximum value is considered to be valid if 75 percent of the hours from 9:01 a.m. to 9:00 p.m. (LST) were measured or if the highest hour is greater than the level of the standard.</P>
        <P>In some areas, the seasonal pattern of ozone is so pronounced that entire months need not be sampled because it is extremely unlikely that the standard would be exceeded. Any such waiver of the ozone monitoring requirement would be handled under provisions of 40 CFR, part 58. Some allowance should also be made for days for which valid daily maximum hourly values were not obtained but which would quite likely have been below the standard. Such an allowance introduces a complication in that it becomes necessary to define under what conditions a missing value may be assumed to have been less than the level of the standard. The following criterion may be used for ozone:</P>
        <P>A missing daily maximum ozone value may be assumed to be less than the level of the standard if the valid daily maxima on both the preceding day and the following day do not exceed 75 percent of the level of the standard.</P>
        <P>Let z denote the number of missing daily maximum values that may be assumed to be less than the standard. Then the following formula shall be used to estimate the expected number of exceedances for the year:</P>
        <MATH DEEP="12" SPAN="1">
          <MID>EC08NO91.086</MID>
        </MATH>
        <P>(*Indicates multiplication.)
        </P>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">e = the estimated number of exceedances for the year,</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">N = the number of required monitoring days in the year,</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">n = the number of valid daily maxima,</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">v = the number of daily values above the level of the standard, and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">z = the number of days assumed to be less than the standard level.</FP>
        
        <P>This estimated number of exceedances shall be rounded to one decimal place (fractional parts equal to 0.05 round up).</P>
        <P>It should be noted that N will be the total number of days in the year unless the appropriate Regional Administrator has granted a waiver under the provisions of 40 CFR part 58.</P>
        <P>The above equation may be interpreted intuitively in the following manner. The estimated number of exceedances is equal to the observed number of exceedances (v) plus an increment that accounts for incomplete sampling. There were (N-n) missing values for the year but a certain number of these, namely z, were assumed to be less than the standard. Therefore, (N-n-z) missing values are considered to include possible exceedances. The fraction of measured values that are above the level of the standard is v/n. It is assumed that this same fraction applies to the (N-n-z) missing values and that (v/n)*(N-n-z) of these values would also have exceeded the level of the standard.</P>
        <CITA>[44 FR 8220, Feb. 8, 1979, as amended at 62 FR 38895, July 18, 1997]</CITA>
      </APPENDIX>
      <APPENDIX>
        <PRTPAGE P="64"/>
        <EAR>Pt. 50, App. I</EAR>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">
          <E T="05">Appendix I to Part 50—Interpretation of the 8-Hour Primary and Secondary National Ambient Air Quality Standards for Ozone</E>
        </HD>
        <P> 1. <E T="03">General.</E>
        </P>
        <P>This appendix explains the data handling conventions and computations necessary for determining whether the national 8-hour primary and secondary ambient air quality standards for ozone specified in § 50.10 are met at an ambient ozone air quality monitoring site. Ozone is measured in the ambient air by a reference method based on appendix D of this part. Data reporting, data handling, and computation procedures to be used in making comparisons between reported ozone concentrations and the level of the ozone standard are specified in the following sections. Whether to exclude, retain, or make adjustments to the data affected by stratospheric ozone intrusion or other natural events is subject to the approval of the appropriate Regional Administrator.</P>
        <P> 2. <E T="03">Primary and Secondary Ambient Air Quality Standards for Ozone.</E>
        </P>
        <P>2.1 <E T="03"> Data Reporting and Handling Conventions.</E>
        </P>
        <P>2.1.1<E T="03"> Computing 8-hour averages</E>. Hourly average concentrations shall be reported in parts per million (ppm) to the third decimal place, with additional digits to the right being truncated. Running 8-hour averages shall be computed from the hourly ozone concentration data for each hour of the year and the result shall be stored in the first, or start, hour of the 8-hour period. An 8-hour average shall be considered valid if at least 75% of the hourly averages for the 8-hour period are available. In the event that only 6 (or 7) hourly averages are available, the 8-hour average shall be computed on the basis of the hours available using 6 (or 7) as the divisor. (8-hour periods with three or more missing hours shall not be ignored if, after substituting one-half the minimum detectable limit for the missing hourly concentrations, the 8-hour average concentration is greater than the level of the standard.) The computed 8-hour average ozone concentrations shall be reported to three decimal places (the insignificant digits to the right of the third decimal place are truncated, consistent with the data handling procedures for the reported data.)</P>
        <P> 2.1.2 <E T="03"> Daily maximum 8-hour average concentrations.</E> (a) There are 24 possible running 8-hour average ozone concentrations for each calendar day during the ozone monitoring season. (Ozone monitoring seasons vary by geographic location as designated in part 58, appendix D to this chapter.) The daily maximum 8-hour concentration for a given calendar day is the highest of the 24 possible 8-hour average concentrations computed for that day. This process is repeated, yielding a daily maximum 8-hour average ozone concentration for each calendar day with ambient ozone monitoring data. Because the 8-hour averages are recorded in the start hour, the daily maximum 8-hour concentrations from two consecutive days may have some hourly concentrations in common. Generally, overlapping daily maximum 8-hour averages are not likely, except in those non-urban monitoring locations with less pronounced diurnal variation in hourly concentrations.</P>
        <P>(b) An ozone monitoring day shall be counted as a valid day if valid 8-hour averages are available for at least 75% of possible hours in the day (i.e., at least 18 of the 24 averages). In the event that less than 75% of the 8-hour averages are available, a day shall also be counted as a valid day if the daily maximum 8-hour average concentration for that day is greater than the level of the ambient standard.</P>
        <P>2.2 <E T="03"> Primary and Secondary Standard-related Summary Statistic.</E> The standard-related summary statistic is the annual fourth-highest daily maximum 8-hour ozone concentration, expressed in parts per million, averaged over three years. The 3-year average shall be computed using the three most recent, consecutive calendar years of monitoring data meeting the data completeness requirements described in this appendix. The computed 3-year average of the annual fourth-highest daily maximum 8-hour average ozone concentrations shall be expressed to three decimal places (the remaining digits to the right are truncated.)</P>
        <P>2.3<E T="03"> Comparisons with the Primary and Secondary Ozone Standards.</E> (a) The primary and secondary ozone ambient air quality standards are met at an ambient air quality monitoring site when the 3-year average of the annual fourth-highest daily maximum 8-hour average ozone concentration is less than or equal to 0.08 ppm. The number of significant figures in the level of the standard dictates the rounding convention for comparing the computed 3-year average annual fourth-highest daily maximum 8-hour average ozone concentration with the level of the standard. The third decimal place of the computed value is rounded, with values equal to or greater than 5 rounding up. Thus, a computed 3-year average ozone concentration of 0.085 ppm is the smallest value that is greater than 0.08 ppm.</P>

        <P>(b) This comparison shall be based on three consecutive, complete calendar years of air quality monitoring data. This requirement is met for the three year period at a monitoring site if daily maximum 8-hour average concentrations are available for at least 90%, on average, of the days during the designated ozone monitoring season, with a minimum data completeness in any one year of at least 75% of the designated sampling days. When <PRTPAGE P="65"/>computing whether the minimum data completeness requirements have been met, meteorological or ambient data may be sufficient to demonstrate that meteorological conditions on missing days were not conducive to concentrations above the level of the standard. Missing days assumed less than the level of the standard are counted for the purpose of meeting the data completeness requirement, subject to the approval of the appropriate Regional Administrator.</P>
        <P>(c) Years with concentrations greater than the level of the standard shall not be ignored on the ground that they have less than complete data. Thus, in computing the 3-year average fourth maximum concentration, calendar years with less than 75% data completeness shall be included in the computation if the average annual fourth maximum 8-hour concentration is greater than the level of the standard.</P>
        <P>(d) Comparisons with the primary and secondary ozone standards are demonstrated by examples 1 and 2 in paragraphs (d)(1) and (d) (2) respectively as follows:</P>
        <P>(1) As shown in example 1, the primary and secondary standards are met at this monitoring site because the 3-year average of the annual fourth-highest daily maximum 8-hour average ozone concentrations (i.e., 0.084 ppm) is less than or equal to 0.08 ppm. The data completeness requirement is also met because the average percent of days with valid ambient monitoring data is greater than 90%, and no single year has less than 75% data completeness.</P>
        <GPOTABLE CDEF="s10,10,10,10,10,10,10" COLS="7" OPTS="L2,i1">
          <TTITLE>
            <E T="04">Example 1. Ambient monitoring site attaining the primary and secondary ozone standards</E>
          </TTITLE>
          <BOXHD>
            <CHED H="1">Year</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Percent Valid Days</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">1st Highest Daily Max 8-hour Conc. (ppm)</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">2nd Highest Daily Max 8-hour Conc. (ppm)</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">3rd Highest Daily Max 8-hour Conc. (ppm)</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">4th Highest Daily Max 8-hour Conc. (ppm)</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">5th Highest Daily Max 8-hour Conc. (ppm)</CHED>
          </BOXHD>
          <ROW RUL="s">
            <ENT I="01">1993</ENT>
            <ENT>100%</ENT>
            <ENT>0.092</ENT>
            <ENT>0.091</ENT>
            <ENT>0.090</ENT>
            <ENT>0.088</ENT>
            <ENT>0.085</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW RUL="s">
            <ENT I="01">1994</ENT>
            <ENT>96%</ENT>
            <ENT>0.090</ENT>
            <ENT>0.089</ENT>
            <ENT>0.086</ENT>
            <ENT>0.084</ENT>
            <ENT>0.080</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW RUL="d">
            <ENT I="01">1995</ENT>
            <ENT>98%</ENT>
            <ENT>0.087</ENT>
            <ENT>0.085</ENT>
            <ENT>0.083</ENT>
            <ENT>0.080</ENT>
            <ENT>0.075</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="03">Average</ENT>
            <ENT>98%</ENT>
          </ROW>
        </GPOTABLE>
        <P>(2) As shown in example 2, the primary and secondary standards are not met at this monitoring site because the 3-year average of the fourth-highest daily maximum 8-hour average ozone concentrations (i.e., 0.093 ppm) is greater than 0.08 ppm. Note that the ozone concentration data for 1994 is used in these computations, even though the data capture is less than 75%, because the average fourth-highest daily maximum 8-hour average concentration is greater than 0.08 ppm.</P>
        <GPOTABLE CDEF="s10,10,10,10,10,10,10" COLS="7" OPTS="L2,i1">
          <TTITLE>
            <E T="04">Example 2. Ambient Monitoring Site Failing to Meet the Primary and Secondary Ozone Standards</E>
          </TTITLE>
          <BOXHD>
            <CHED H="1">Year</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Percent Valid Days</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">1st Highest Daily Max 8-hour Conc. (ppm)</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">2nd Highest Daily Max 8-hour Conc. (ppm)</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">3rd Highest Daily Max 8-hour Conc. (ppm)</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">4th Highest Daily Max 8-hour Conc. (ppm)</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">5th Highest Daily Max 8-hour Conc. (ppm)</CHED>
          </BOXHD>
          <ROW RUL="s">
            <ENT I="01">1993</ENT>
            <ENT>96%</ENT>
            <ENT>0.105</ENT>
            <ENT>0.103</ENT>
            <ENT>0.103</ENT>
            <ENT>0.102</ENT>
            <ENT>0.102</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW RUL="s">
            <ENT I="01">1994</ENT>
            <ENT>74%</ENT>
            <ENT>0.090</ENT>
            <ENT>0.085</ENT>
            <ENT>0.082</ENT>
            <ENT>0.080</ENT>
            <ENT>0.078</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW RUL="d">
            <ENT I="01">1995</ENT>
            <ENT>98%</ENT>
            <ENT>0.103</ENT>
            <ENT>0.101</ENT>
            <ENT>0.101</ENT>
            <ENT>0.097</ENT>
            <ENT>0.095</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="03">Average</ENT>
            <ENT>89%</ENT>
          </ROW>
        </GPOTABLE>
        <P>3. <E T="03">Design Values for Primary and Secondary Ambient Air Quality Standards for Ozone.</E> The air quality design value at a monitoring site is defined as that concentration that when reduced to the level of the standard ensures that the site meets the standard. For a concentration-based standard, the air quality design value is simply the standard-related test statistic. Thus, for the primary and secondary ozone standards, the 3-year average annual fourth-highest daily maximum 8-hour average ozone concentration is also the air quality design value for the site.</P>
        <CITA>[62 FR 38895, July 18, 1997]</CITA>
      </APPENDIX>
      <APPENDIX>
        <EAR>Pt. 50, App. J</EAR>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">
          <E T="05">Appendix J to Part 50—Reference Method for the Determination of Particulate Matter as PM</E>
          <E T="52">10</E>
          <E T="05"> in the Atmosphere</E>
        </HD>
        <P>1.0 <E T="03">Applicability.</E>
          <PRTPAGE P="66"/>
        </P>

        <P>1.1 This method provides for the measurement of the mass concentration of particulate matter with an aerodynamic diameter less than or equal to a nominal 10 micrometers (PM<E T="52">1O</E>) in ambient air over a 24-hour period for purposes of determining attainment and maintenance of the primary and secondary national ambient air quality standards for particulate matter specified in § 50.6 of this chapter. The measurement process is nondestructive, and the PM<E T="52">10</E> sample can be subjected to subsequent physical or chemical analyses. Quality assurance procedures and guidance are provided in part 58, appendices A and B, of this chapter and in References 1 and 2.</P>
        <P>2.0 <E T="03">Principle.</E>
        </P>

        <P>2.1 An air sampler draws ambient air at a constant flow rate into a specially shaped inlet where the suspended particulate matter is inertially separated into one or more size fractions within the PM<E T="52">10</E> size range. Each size fraction in the PM<E T="52">1O</E> size range is then collected on a separate filter over the specified sampling period. The particle size discrimination characteristics (sampling effectiveness and 50 percent cutpoint) of the sampler inlet are prescribed as performance specifications in part 53 of this chapter.</P>

        <P>2.2 Each filter is weighed (after moisture equilibration) before and after use to determine the net weight (mass) gain due to collected PM<E T="52">10.</E> The total volume of air sampled, corrected to EPA reference conditions (25 C, 101.3 kPa), is determined from the measured flow rate and the sampling time. The mass concentration of PM<E T="52">10</E> in the ambient air is computed as the total mass of collected particles in the PM<E T="52">10</E> size range divided by the volume of air sampled, and is expressed in micrograms per standard cubic meter (<E T="61">μ</E>g/std m<SU>3</SU>). For PM<E T="52">10</E> samples collected at temperatures and pressures significantly different from EPA reference conditions, these corrected concentrations sometimes differ substantially from actual concentrations (in micrograms per actual cubic meter), particularly at high elevations. Although not required, the actual PM<E T="52">10</E> concentration can be calculated from the corrected concentration, using the average ambient temperature and barometric pressure during the sampling period.</P>
        <P>2.3 A method based on this principle will be considered a reference method only if (a) the associated sampler meets the requirements specified in this appendix and the requirements in part 53 of this chapter, and (b) the method has been designated as a reference method in accordance with part 53 of this chapter.</P>
        <P>3.0 <E T="03">Range.</E>
        </P>

        <P>3.1 The lower limit of the mass concentration range is determined by the repeatability of filter tare weights, assuming the nominal air sample volume for the sampler. For samplers having an automatic filter-changing mechanism, there may be no upper limit. For samplers that do not have an automatic filter-changing mechanism, the upper limit is determined by the filter mass loading beyond which the sampler no longer maintains the operating flow rate within specified limits due to increased pressure drop across the loaded filter. This upper limit cannot be specified precisely because it is a complex function of the ambient particle size distribution and type, humidity, filter type, and perhaps other factors. Nevertheless, all samplers should be capable of measuring 24-hour PM<E T="52">10</E> mass concentrations of at least 300 μg/std m<SU>3</SU> while maintaining the operating flow rate within the specified limits.</P>
        <P>4.0 <E T="03">Precision.</E>
        </P>
        <P>4.1 The precision of PM<E T="52">10</E> samplers must be 5 μg/m<SU>3</SU> for PM<E T="52">10</E> concentrations below 80 μg/m<SU>3</SU> and 7 percent for PM<E T="52">10</E> concentrations above 80 μg/m<SU>3</SU>, as required by part 53 of this chapter, which prescribes a test procedure that determines the variation in the PM<E T="52">10</E> concentration measurements of identical samplers under typical sampling conditions. Continual assessment of precision via collocated samplers is required by part 58 of this chapter for PM<E T="52">10</E> samplers used in certain monitoring networks.</P>
        <P>5.0 <E T="03">Accuracy.</E>
        </P>

        <P>5.1 Because the size of the particles making up ambient particulate matter varies over a wide range and the concentration of particles varies with particle size, it is difficult to define the absolute accuracy of PM<E T="52">10</E> samplers. Part 53 of this chapter provides a specification for the sampling effectiveness of PM<E T="52">10</E> samplers. This specification requires that the expected mass concentration calculated for a candidate PM<E T="52">10</E> sampler, when sampling a specified particle size distribution, be within <E T="61">±</E>10 percent of that calculated for an ideal sampler whose sampling effectiveness is explicitly specified. Also, the particle size for 50 percent sampling effectivensss is required to be 10<E T="61">±</E>0.5 micrometers. Other specifications related to accuracy apply to flow measurement and calibration, filter media, analytical (weighing) procedures, and artifact. The flow rate accuracy of PM<E T="52">10</E> samplers used in certain monitoring networks is required by part 58 of this chapter to be assessed periodically via flow rate audits.</P>
        <P>6.0 <E T="03">Potential Sources of Error.</E>
        </P>
        <P>6.1 <E T="03">Volatile Particles.</E> Volatile particles collected on filters are often lost during shipment and/or storage of the filters prior to the post-sampling weighing <SU>3</SU>. Although shipment or storage of loaded filters is sometimes unavoidable, filters should be reweighed as soon as practical to minimize these losses.</P>
        <P>6.2 <E T="03">Artifacts.</E> Positive errors in PM<E T="52">10</E> concentration measurements may result from retention of gaseous species on filters <E T="51">4, 5.</E> Such errors include the retention of sulfur <PRTPAGE P="67"/>dioxide and nitric acid. Retention of sulfur dioxide on filters, followed by oxidation to sulfate, is referred to as artifact sulfate formation, a phenomenon which increases with increasing filter alkalinity <SU>6</SU>. Little or no artifact sulfate formation should occur using filters that meet the alkalinity specification in section 7.2.4. Artifact nitrate formation, resulting primarily from retention of nitric acid, occurs to varying degrees on many filter types, including glass fiber, cellulose ester, and many quartz fiber filters <E T="51">5, 7, 8, 9, 10.</E> Loss of true atmospheric particulate nitrate during or following sampling may also occur due to dissociation or chemical reaction. This phenomenon has been observed on Teflon<E T="51">®</E> filters <SU>8</SU> and inferred for quartz fiber filters <E T="51">11, 12.</E> The magnitude of nitrate artifact errors in PM<E T="52">10</E> mass concentration measurements will vary with location and ambient temperature; however, for most sampling locations, these errors are expected to be small.</P>
        <P>6.3 <E T="03">Humidity.</E> The effects of ambient humidity on the sample are unavoidable. The filter equilibration procedure in section 9.0 is designed to minimize the effects of moisture on the filter medium.</P>
        <P>6.4 <E T="03">Filter Handling.</E> Careful handling of filters between presampling and postsampling weighings is necessary to avoid errors due to damaged filters or loss of collected particles from the filters. Use of a filter cartridge or cassette may reduce the magnitude of these errors. Filters must also meet the integrity specification in section 7.2.3.</P>
        <P>6.5 <E T="03">Flow Rate Variation.</E> Variations in the sampler's operating flow rate may alter the particle size discrimination characteristics of the sampler inlet. The magnitude of this error will depend on the sensitivity of the inlet to variations in flow rate and on the particle distribution in the atmosphere during the sampling period. The use of a flow control device (section 7.1.3) is required to minimize this error.</P>
        <P>6.6 <E T="03">Air Volume Determination.</E> Errors in the air volume determination may result from errors in the flow rate and/or sampling time measurements. The flow control device serves to minimize errors in the flow rate determination, and an elapsed time meter (section 7.1.5) is required to minimize the error in the sampling time measurement.</P>
        <P>7.0 <E T="03">Apparatus.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.1 <E T="03">PM</E>
          <E T="52">10</E>
          <E T="03">Sampler.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.1.1 The sampler shall be designed to:</P>
        <P>a. Draw the air sample into the sampler inlet and through the particle collection filter at a uniform face velocity.</P>
        <P>b. Hold and seal the filter in a horizontal position so that sample air is drawn downward through the filter.</P>
        <P>c. Allow the filter to be installed and removed conveniently.</P>
        <P>d. Protect the filter and sampler from precipitation and prevent insects and other debris from being sampled.</P>
        <P>e. Minimize air leaks that would cause error in the measurement of the air volume passing through the filter.</P>
        <P>f. Discharge exhaust air at a sufficient distance from the sampler inlet to minimize the sampling of exhaust air.</P>
        <P>g. Minimize the collection of dust from the supporting surface.</P>
        <P>7.1.2 The sampler shall have a sample air inlet system that, when operated within a specified flow rate range, provides particle size discrimination characteristics meeting all of the applicable performance specifications prescribed in part 53 of this chapter. The sampler inlet shall show no significant wind direction dependence. The latter requirement can generally be satisfied by an inlet shape that is circularly symmetrical about a vertical axis.</P>
        <P>7.1.3 The sampler shall have a flow control device capable of maintaining the sampler's operating flow rate within the flow rate limits specified for the sampler inlet over normal variations in line voltage and filter pressure drop.</P>

        <P>7.1.4 The sampler shall provide a means to measure the total flow rate during the sampling period. A continuous flow recorder is recommended but not required. The flow measurement device shall be accurate to <E T="61">±</E>2 percent.</P>

        <P>7.1.5 A timing/control device capable of starting and stopping the sampler shall be used to obtain a sample collection period of 24 <E T="61">±</E>1 hr (1,440 <E T="61">±</E>60 min). An elapsed time meter, accurate to within <E T="61">±</E>15 minutes, shall be used to measure sampling time. This meter is optional for samplers with continuous flow recorders if the sampling time measurement obtained by means of the recorder meets the <E T="61">±</E>15 minute accuracy specification.</P>
        <P>7.1.6 The sampler shall have an associated operation or instruction manual as required by part 53 of this chapter which includes detailed instructions on the calibration, operation, and maintenance of the sampler.</P>
        <P>7.2 <E T="03">Filters.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.2.1 <E T="03">Filter Medium.</E> No commercially available filter medium is ideal in all respects for all samplers. The user's goals in sampling determine the relative importance of various filter characteristics (e.g., cost, ease of handling, physical and chemical characteristics, etc.) and, consequently, determine the choice among acceptable filters. Furthermore, certain types of filters may not be suitable for use with some samplers, particularly under heavy loading conditions (high mass concentrations), because of high or rapid increase in the filter flow resistance that would exceed the capability of the sampler's flow control device. However, samplers equipped with automatic filter-changing <PRTPAGE P="68"/>mechanisms may allow use of these types of filters. The specifications given below are minimum requirements to ensure acceptability of the filter medium for measurement of PM<E T="52">10</E> mass concentrations. Other filter evaluation criteria should be considered to meet individual sampling and analysis objectives.</P>
        <P>7.2.2 <E T="03">Collection Efficiency.</E>
          <E T="61">≥</E>99 percent, as measured by the DOP test (ASTM-2986) with 0.3 μm particles at the sampler's operating face velocity.</P>
        <P>7.2.3 <E T="03">Integrity.</E>
          <E T="61">±</E>5 μg/m<SU>3</SU> (assuming sampler's nominal 24-hour air sample volume). Integrity is measured as the PM<E T="52">10</E> concentration equivalent corresponding to the average difference between the initial and the final weights of a random sample of test filters that are weighed and handled under actual or simulated sampling conditions, but have no air sample passed through them (i.e., filter blanks). As a minimum, the test procedure must include initial equilibration and weighing, installation on an inoperative sampler, removal from the sampler, and final equilibration and weighing.</P>
        <P>7.2.4 <E T="03">Alkalinity.</E>
          <E T="61">&lt;</E>25 microequivalents/gram of filter, as measured by the procedure given in Reference 13 following at least two months storage in a clean environment (free from contamination by acidic gases) at room temperature and humidity.</P>
        <P>7.3 <E T="03">Flow Rate Transfer Standard.</E> The flow rate transfer standard must be suitable for the sampler's operating flow rate and must be calibrated against a primary flow or volume standard that is traceable to the National Bureau of Standards (NBS). The flow rate transfer standard must be capable of measuring the sampler's operating flow rate with an accuracy of <E T="61">±</E>2 percent.</P>
        <P>7.4 <E T="03">Filter Conditioning Environment.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.4.1 Temperature range: 15 to 30 C.</P>
        <P>7.4.2 Temperature control: <E T="61">±</E>3 C.</P>
        <P>7.4.3 Humidity range: 20% to 45% RH.</P>
        <P>7.4.4 Humidity control: <E T="61">±</E>5% RH.</P>
        <P>7.5 <E T="03">Analytical Balance.</E> The analytical balance must be suitable for weighing the type and size of filters required by the sampler. The range and sensitivity required will depend on the filter tare weights and mass loadings. Typically, an analytical balance with a sensitivity of 0.1 mg is required for high volume samplers (flow rates &gt;0.5 m<SU>3</SU>/min). Lower volume samplers (flow rates <E T="61">&lt;</E>0.5 m<SU>3</SU>/min) will require a more sensitive balance.</P>
        <P>8.0 <E T="03">Calibration.</E>
        </P>
        <P>8.1 <E T="03">General Requirements.</E>
        </P>
        <P>8.1.1 Calibration of the sampler's flow measurement device is required to establish traceability of subsequent flow measurements to a primary standard. A flow rate transfer standard calibrated against a primary flow or volume standard shall be used to calibrate or verify the accuracy of the sampler's flow measurement device.</P>

        <P>8.1.2 Particle size discrimination by inertial separation requires that specific air velocities be maintained in the sampler's air inlet system. Therefore, the flow rate through the sampler's inlet must be maintained throughout the sampling period within the design flow rate range specified by the manufacturer. Design flow rates are specified as actual volumetric flow rates, measured at existing conditions of temperature and pressure (Q<E T="52">a</E>). In contrast, mass concentrations of PM<E T="52">10</E> are computed using flow rates corrected to EPA reference conditions of temperature and pressure (Q<E T="52">std</E>).</P>
        <P>8.2 <E T="03">Flow Rate Calibration Procedure.</E>
        </P>
        <P>8.2.1 PM<E T="52">10</E> samplers employ various types of flow control and flow measurement devices. The specific procedure used for flow rate calibration or verification will vary depending on the type of flow controller and flow indicator employed. Calibration in terms of actual volumetric flow rates (Q<E T="52">a</E>) is generally recommended, but other measures of flow rate (e.g., Q<E T="52">std</E>) may be used provided the requirements of section 8.1 are met. The general procedure given here is based on actual volumetric flow units (Q<E T="52">a</E>) and serves to illustrate the steps involved in the calibration of a PM<E T="52">10</E> sampler. Consult the sampler manufacturer's instruction manual and Reference 2 for specific guidance on calibration. Reference 14 provides additional information on the use of the commonly used measures of flow rate and their interrelationships.</P>
        <P>8.2.2 Calibrate the flow rate transfer standard against a primary flow or volume standard traceable to NBS. Establish a calibration relationship (e.g., an equation or family of curves) such that traceability to the primary standard is accurate to within 2 percent over the expected range of ambient conditions (i.e., temperatures and pressures) under which the transfer standard will be used. Recalibrate the transfer standard periodically.</P>
        <P>8.2.3 Following the sampler manufacturer's instruction manual, remove the sampler inlet and connect the flow rate transfer standard to the sampler such that the transfer standard accurately measures the sampler's flow rate. Make sure there are no leaks between the transfer standard and the sampler.</P>

        <P>8.2.4 Choose a minimum of three flow rates (actual m<SU>3</SU>/min), spaced over the acceptable flow rate range specified for the inlet (see 7.1.2) that can be obtained by suitable adjustment of the sampler flow rate. In accordance with the sampler manufacturer's instruction manual, obtain or verify the calibration relationship between the flow rate (actual m<SU>3</SU>/min) as indicated by the transfer standard and the sampler's flow indicator response. Record the ambient temperature and barometric pressure. Temperature and pressure corrections to subsequent flow indicator readings may be required for certain types of <PRTPAGE P="69"/>flow measurement devices. When such corrections are necessary, correction on an individual or daily basis is preferable. However, seasonal average temperature and average barometric pressure for the sampling site may be incorporated into the sampler calibration to avoid daily corrections. Consult the sampler manufacturer's instruction manual and Reference 2 for additional guidance.</P>
        <P>8.2.5 Following calibration, verify that the sampler is operating at its design flow rate (actual m<SU>3</SU>/min) with a clean filter in place.</P>
        <P>8.2.6 Replace the sampler inlet.</P>
        <P>9.0 <E T="03">Procedure.</E>
        </P>

        <P>9.1 The sampler shall be operated in accordance with the specific guidance provided in the sampler manufacturer's instruction manual and in Reference 2. The general procedure given here assumes that the sampler's flow rate calibration is based on flow rates at ambient conditions (Q<E T="52">a</E>) and serves to illustrate the steps involved in the operation of a PM<E T="52">10</E> sampler.</P>
        <P>9.2 Inspect each filter for pinholes, particles, and other imperfections. Establish a filter information record and assign an identification number to each filter.</P>
        <P>9.3 Equilibrate each filter in the conditioning environment (see 7.4) for at least 24 hours.</P>
        <P>9.4 Following equilibration, weigh each filter and record the presampling weight with the filter identification number.</P>
        <P>9.5 Install a preweighed filter in the sampler following the instructions provided in the sampler manufacturer's instruction manual.</P>
        <P>9.6 Turn on the sampler and allow it to establish run-temperature conditions. Record the flow indicator reading and, if needed, the ambient temperature and barometric pressure. Determine the sampler flow rate (actual m<SU>3</SU>/min) in accordance with the instructions provided in the sampler manufacturer's instruction manual. NOTE.—No onsite temperature or pressure measurements are necessary if the sampler's flow indicator does not require temperature or pressure corrections or if seasonal average temperature and average barometric pressure for the sampling site are incorporated into the sampler calibration (see step 8.2.4). If individual or daily temperature and pressure corrections are required, ambient temperature and barometric pressure can be obtained by on-site measurements or from a nearby weather station. Barometric pressure readings obtained from airports must be station pressure, not corrected to sea level, and may need to be corrected for differences in elevation between the sampling site and the airport.</P>
        <P>9.7 If the flow rate is outside the acceptable range specified by the manufacturer, check for leaks, and if necessary, adjust the flow rate to the specified setpoint. Stop the sampler.</P>
        <P>9.8 Set the timer to start and stop the sampler at appropriate times. Set the elapsed time meter to zero or record the initial meter reading.</P>
        <P>9.9 Record the sample information (site location or identification number, sample date, filter identification number, and sampler model and serial number).</P>
        <P>9.10 Sample for 24<E T="61">±</E>1 hours.</P>
        <P>9.11 Determine and record the average flow rate (Q<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">a</E>) in actual m<SU>3</SU>/min for the sampling period in accordance with the instructions provided in the sampler manufacturer's instruction manual. Record the elapsed time meter final reading and, if needed, the average ambient temperature and barometric pressure for the sampling period (see note following step 9.6).</P>
        <P>9.12 Carefully remove the filter from the sampler, following the sampler manufacturer's instruction manual. Touch only the outer edges of the filter.</P>
        <P>9.13 Place the filter in a protective holder or container (e.g., petri dish, glassine envelope, or manila folder).</P>
        <P>9.14 Record any factors such as meteorological conditions, construction activity, fires or dust storms, etc., that might be pertinent to the measurement on the filter information record.</P>
        <P>9.15 Transport the exposed sample filter to the filter conditioning environment as soon as possible for equilibration and subsequent weighing.</P>
        <P>9.16 Equilibrate the exposed filter in the conditioning environment for at least 24 hours under the same temperature and humidity conditions used for presampling filter equilibration (see 9.3).</P>
        <P>9.17 Immediately after equilibration, reweigh the filter and record the postsampling weight with the filter identification number.</P>
        <P>10.0 <E T="03">Sampler Maintenance.</E>
        </P>
        <P>10.1 The PM<E T="52">10</E> sampler shall be maintained in strict accordance with the maintenance procedures specified in the sampler manufacturer's instruction manual.</P>
        <P>11.0 <E T="03">Calculations.</E>
        </P>

        <P>11.1 Calculate the average flow rate over the sampling period corrected to EPA reference conditions as Q<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">std.</E> When the sampler's flow indicator is calibrated in actual volumetric units (Q<E T="52">a</E>), Q<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">std</E> is calculated as:
        </P>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Q<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">std</E>=Q<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">a</E>×(P<E T="52">av</E>/T<E T="52">av</E>)(T<E T="52">std</E>/P<E T="52">std</E>)</FP>
        
        <FP>where</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Q<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">std</E> = average flow rate at EPA reference conditions, std m<SU>3</SU>/min;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Q<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">a</E> = average flow rate at ambient conditions, m<SU>3</SU>/min;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">P<E T="52">av</E> = average barometric pressure during the sampling period or average barometric pressure for the sampling site, kPa (or mm Hg);</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">T<E T="52">av</E> = average ambient temperature during the sampling period or seasonal average <PRTPAGE P="70"/>ambient temperature for the sampling site, K;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">T<E T="52">std</E> = standard temperature, defined as 298 K;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">P<E T="52">std</E> = standard pressure, defined as 101.3 kPa (or 760 mm Hg).</FP>
        
        <P>11.2 Calculate the total volume of air sampled as:
        </P>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">V<E T="52">std</E> = Q<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">std</E>×t</FP>
        
        <FP>where</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">V<E T="52">std</E> = total air sampled in standard volume units, std m<SU>3</SU>;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">t = sampling time, min.</FP>
        
        <P>11.3 Calculate the PM<E T="52">10</E> concentration as:
        </P>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">PM<E T="52">10</E> = (W<E T="52">f</E>−W<E T="52">i</E>)×10<SU>6</SU>/V<E T="52">std</E>
        </FP>
        
        <FP>where</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">PM<E T="52">10</E> = mass concentration of PM<E T="52">10,</E> μg/std m<SU>3</SU>;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">W<E T="52">f,</E> W<E T="52">i</E> = final and initial weights of filter collecting PM<E T="52">1O</E> particles, g;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">10<SU>6</SU> = conversion of g to μg.</FP>
        
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>
          <P>If more than one size fraction in the PM<E T="52">10</E> size range is collected by the sampler, the sum of the net weight gain by each collection filter [<E T="61">Σ</E>(W<E T="52">f</E>−W<E T="52">i</E>)] is used to calculate the PM<E T="52">10</E> mass concentration.</P>
        </NOTE>
        <P>12.0 <E T="03">References.</E>
        </P>
        <P>1. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems, Volume I, Principles. EPA-600/9-76-005, March 1976. Available from CERI, ORD Publications, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 26 West St. Clair Street, Cincinnati, OH 45268.</P>
        <P>2. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems, Volume II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a, May 1977. Available from CERI, ORD Publications, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 26 West St. Clair Street, Cincinnati, OH 45268.</P>
        <P>3. Clement, R.E., and F.W. Karasek. Sample Composition Changes in Sampling and Analysis of Organic Compounds in Aerosols. Int. J. Environ. Analyt. Chem., 7:109, 1979.</P>
        <P>4. Lee, R.E., Jr., and J. Wagman. A Sampling Anomaly in the Determination of Atmospheric Sulfate Concentration. Amer. Ind. Hyg. Assoc. J., 27:266, 1966.</P>
        <P>5. Appel, B.R., S.M. Wall, Y. Tokiwa, and M. Haik. Interference Effects in Sampling Particulate Nitrate in Ambient Air. Atmos. Environ., 13:319, 1979.</P>
        <P>6. Coutant, R.W. Effect of Environmental Variables on Collection of Atmospheric Sulfate. Environ. Sci. Technol., 11:873, 1977.</P>
        <P>7. Spicer, C.W., and P. Schumacher. Interference in Sampling Atmospheric Particulate Nitrate. Atmos. Environ., 11:873, 1977.</P>
        <P>8. Appel, B.R., Y. Tokiwa, and M. Haik. Sampling of Nitrates in Ambient Air. Atmos. Environ., 15:283, 1981.</P>
        <P>9. Spicer, C.W., and P.M. Schumacher. Particulate Nitrate: Laboratory and Field Studies of Major Sampling Interferences. Atmos. Environ., 13:543, 1979.</P>
        <P>10. Appel, B.R. Letter to Larry Purdue, U.S. EPA, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory. March 18, 1982, Docket No. A-82-37, II-I-1.</P>
        <P>11. Pierson, W.R., W.W. Brachaczek, T.J. Korniski, T.J. Truex, and J.W. Butler. Artifact Formation of Sulfate, Nitrate, and Hydrogen Ion on Backup Filters: Allegheny Mountain Experiment. J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc., 30:30, 1980.</P>
        <P>12. Dunwoody, C.L. Rapid Nitrate Loss From PM<E T="52">10</E> Filters. J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc., 36:817, 1986.</P>
        <P>13. Harrell, R.M. Measuring the Alkalinity of Hi-Vol Air Filters. EMSL/RTP-SOP-QAD-534, October 1985. Available from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, EMSL/QAD, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.</P>
        <P>14. Smith, F., P.S. Wohlschlegel, R.S.C. Rogers, and D.J. Mulligan. Investigation of Flow Rate Calibration Procedures Associated With the High Volume Method for Determination of Suspended Particulates. EPA-600/4-78-047, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711, 1978.</P>
        <CITA>[52 FR 24664, July 1, 1987; 52 FR 29467, Aug. 7, 1987]</CITA>
      </APPENDIX>
      <APPENDIX>
        <EAR>Pt. 50, App. K</EAR>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">
          <E T="05">Appendix K to Part 50—Interpretation of the National Ambient Air Quality Standards for Particulate Matter</E>
        </HD>
        <P>1.0<E T="03">General.</E>
        </P>

        <P>(a) This appendix explains the computations necessary for analyzing particulate matter data to determine attainment of the 24-hour and annual standards specified in 40 CFR 50.6. For the primary and secondary standards, particulate matter is measured in the ambient air as PM<E T="52">10</E> (particles with an aerodynamic diameter less than or equal to a nominal 10 micrometers) by a reference method based on appendix J of this part and designated in accordance with part 53 of this chapter, or by an equivalent method designated in accordance with part 53 of this chapter. The required frequency of measurements is specified in part 58 of this chapter.</P>
        <P>(b) The terms used in this appendix are defined as follows:</P>
        <P>
          <E T="03">Average</E> refers to an arithmetic mean. All particulate matter standards are expressed in terms of expected annual values: Expected number of exceedances per year for the 24-hour standards and expected annual arithmetic mean for the annual standards.</P>
        <P>
          <E T="03">Daily value</E> for PM<E T="52">10</E> refers to the 24-hour average concentration of PM<E T="52">10</E> calculated or measured from midnight to midnight (local time).</P>
        <P>
          <E T="03">Exceedance</E> means a daily value that is above the level of the 24-hour standard after <PRTPAGE P="71"/>rounding to the nearest 10 μg/m<SU>3</SU> (i.e., values ending in 5 or greater are to be rounded up).</P>
        <P>
          <E T="03">Expected annual value</E> is the number approached when the annual values from an increasing number of years are averaged, in the absence of long-term trends in emissions or meteorological conditions.</P>
        <P>
          <E T="03">Year</E> refers to a calendar year.</P>
        <P>(c) Although the discussion in this appendix focuses on monitored data, the same principles apply to modeling data, subject to EPA modeling guidelines.</P>
        <P>2.0<E T="03">Attainment Determinations.</E>
        </P>
        <P>2.1<E T="03">24-Hour Primary and Secondary Standards.</E>
        </P>
        <P>(a) Under 40 CFR 50.6(a) the 24-hour primary and secondary standards are attained when the expected number of exceedances per year at each monitoring site is less than or equal to one. In the simplest case, the number of expected exceedances at a site is determined by recording the number of exceedances in each calendar year and then averaging them over the past 3 calendar years. Situations in which 3 years of data are not available and possible adjustments for unusual events or trends are discussed in sections 2.3 and 2.4 of this appendix. Further, when data for a year are incomplete, it is necessary to compute an estimated number of exceedances for that year by adjusting the observed number of exceedances. This procedure, performed by calendar quarter, is described in section 3.0 of this appendix. The expected number of exceedances is then estimated by averaging the individual annual estimates for the past 3 years.</P>
        <P>(b) The comparison with the allowable expected exceedance rate of one per year is made in terms of a number rounded to the nearest tenth (fractional values equal to or greater than 0.05 are to be rounded up; e.g., an exceedance rate of 1.05 would be rounded to 1.1, which is the lowest rate for nonattainment).</P>
        <P>2.2<E T="03">Annual Primary and Secondary Standards.</E> Under 40 CFR 50.6(b), the annual primary and secondary standards are attained when the expected annual arithmetic mean PM<E T="52">10 </E>concentration is less than or equal to the level of the standard. In the simplest case, the expected annual arithmetic mean is determined by averaging the annual arithmetic mean PM<E T="52">10 </E>concentrations for the past 3 calendar years. Because of the potential for incomplete data and the possible seasonality in PM<E T="52">10 </E>concentrations, the annual mean shall be calculated by averaging the four quarterly means of PM<E T="52">10 </E>concentrations within the calendar year. The equations for calculating the annual arithmetic mean are given in section 4.0 of this appendix. Situations in which 3 years of data are not available and possible adjustments for unusual events or trends are discussed in sections 2.3 and 2.4 of this appendix. The expected annual arithmetic mean is rounded to the nearest 1 μg/m<SU>3</SU> before comparison with the annual standards (fractional values equal to or greater than 0.5 are to be rounded up).</P>
        <P>2.3<E T="03">Data Requirements.</E>
        </P>

        <P>(a) 40 CFR 58.13 specifies the required minimum frequency of sampling for PM<E T="52">10</E>. For the purposes of making comparisons with the particulate matter standards, all data produced by National Air Monitoring Stations (NAMS), State and Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS) and other sites submitted to EPA in accordance with the part 58 requirements must be used, and a minimum of 75 percent of the scheduled PM<E T="52">10 </E>samples per quarter are required.</P>
        <P>(b) To demonstrate attainment of either the annual or 24-hour standards at a monitoring site, the monitor must provide sufficient data to perform the required calculations of sections 3.0 and 4.0 of this appendix. The amount of data required varies with the sampling frequency, data capture rate and the number of years of record. In all cases, 3 years of representative monitoring data that meet the 75 percent criterion of the previous paragraph should be utilized, if available, and would suffice. More than 3 years may be considered, if all additional representative years of data meeting the 75 percent criterion are utilized. Data not meeting these criteria may also suffice to show attainment; however, such exceptions will have to be approved by the appropriate Regional Administrator in accordance with EPA guidance.</P>
        <P>(c) There are less stringent data requirements for showing that a monitor has failed an attainment test and thus has recorded a violation of the particulate matter standards. Although it is generally necessary to meet the minimum 75 percent data capture requirement per quarter to use the computational equations described in sections 3.0 and 4.0 of this appendix, this criterion does not apply when less data is sufficient to unambiguously establish nonattainment. The following examples illustrate how nonattainment can be demonstrated when a site fails to meet the completeness criteria. Nonattainment of the 24-hour primary standards can be established by the observed annual number of exceedances (e.g., four observed exceedances in a single year), or by the estimated number of exceedances derived from the observed number of exceedances and the required number of scheduled samples (e.g., two observed exceedances with every other day sampling). Nonattainment of the annual standards can be demonstrated on the basis of quarterly mean concentrations developed from observed data combined with one-half the minimum detectable concentration substituted for missing values. In both cases, expected annual values must exceed the levels allowed by the standards.</P>
        <P>2.4<E T="03">Adjustment for Exceptional Events and Trends.</E>
          <PRTPAGE P="72"/>
        </P>
        <P>(a) An exceptional event is an uncontrollable event caused by natural sources of particulate matter or an event that is not expected to recur at a given location. Inclusion of such a value in the computation of exceedances or averages could result in inappropriate estimates of their respective expected annual values. To reduce the effect of unusual events, more than 3 years of representative data may be used. Alternatively, other techniques, such as the use of statistical models or the use of historical data could be considered so that the event may be discounted or weighted according to the likelihood that it will recur. The use of such techniques is subject to the approval of the appropriate Regional Administrator in accordance with EPA guidance.</P>
        <P>(b) In cases where long-term trends in emissions and air quality are evident, mathematical techniques should be applied to account for the trends to ensure that the expected annual values are not inappropriately biased by unrepresentative data. In the simplest case, if 3 years of data are available under stable emission conditions, this data should be used. In the event of a trend or shift in emission patterns, either the most recent representative year(s) could be used or statistical techniques or models could be used in conjunction with previous years of data to adjust for trends. The use of less than 3 years of data, and any adjustments are subject to the approval of the appropriate Regional Administrator in accordance with EPA guidance.</P>
        <P>3.0<E T="03">Computational Equations for the 24-hour Standards.</E>
        </P>
        <P>3.1<E T="03">Estimating Exceedances for a Year.</E>
        </P>
        <P>(a) If PM<E T="52">10</E> sampling is scheduled less frequently than every day, or if some scheduled samples are missed, a PM<E T="52">10</E> value will not be available for each day of the year. To account for the possible effect of incomplete data, an adjustment must be made to the data collected at each monitoring location to estimate the number of exceedances in a calendar year. In this adjustment, the assumption is made that the fraction of missing values that would have exceeded the standard level is identical to the fraction of measured values above this level. This computation is to be made for all sites that are scheduled to monitor throughout the entire year and meet the minimum data requirements of section 2.3 of this appendix. Because of possible seasonal imbalance, this adjustment shall be applied on a quarterly basis. The estimate of the expected number of exceedances for the quarter is equal to the observed number of exceedances plus an increment associated with the missing data. The following equation must be used for these computations:</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Equation 1</HD>
        <GPH DEEP="19" SPAN="1">
          <GID>ER18jy97.180</GID>
        </GPH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">e<E T="52">q</E> = the estimated number of exceedances for calendar quarter q;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">v<E T="52">q</E> = the observed number of exceedances for calendar quarter q;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">N<E T="52">q</E> = the number of days in calendar quarter q;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">n<E T="52">q</E> = the number of days in calendar quarter q with PM<E T="52">10</E> data; and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">q = the index for calendar quarter, q=1, 2, 3 or 4.</FP>
        
        <P>(b) The estimated number of exceedances for a calendar quarter must be rounded to the nearest hundredth (fractional values equal to or greater than 0.005 must be rounded up).</P>
        <P>(c) The estimated number of exceedances for the year, e, is the sum of the estimates for each calendar quarter.</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Equation 2</HD>
        <GPH DEEP="31" SPAN="1">
          <GID>ER18jy97.181</GID>
        </GPH>
        <P>(d) The estimated number of exceedances for a single year must be rounded to one decimal place (fractional values equal to or greater than 0.05 are to be rounded up). The expected number of exceedances is then estimated by averaging the individual annual estimates for the most recent 3 or more representative years of data. The expected number of exceedances must be rounded to one decimal place (fractional values equal to or greater than 0.05 are to be rounded up).</P>
        <P>(e) The adjustment for incomplete data will not be necessary for monitoring or modeling data which constitutes a complete record, i.e., 365 days per year.</P>
        <P>(f) To reduce the potential for overestimating the number of expected exceedances, the correction for missing data will not be required for a calendar quarter in which the first observed exceedance has occurred if:</P>
        <P>(1) There was only one exceedance in the calendar quarter;</P>
        <P>(2) Everyday sampling is subsequently initiated and maintained for 4 calendar quarters in accordance with 40 CFR 58.13; and</P>

        <P>(3) Data capture of 75 percent is achieved during the required period of everyday sampling. In addition, if the first exceedance is observed in a calendar quarter in which the monitor is already sampling every day, no adjustment for missing data will be made to the first exceedance if a 75 percent data capture rate was achieved in the quarter in which it was observed.<PRTPAGE P="73"/>
        </P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Example 1</HD>

        <P>a. During a particular calendar quarter, 39 out of a possible 92 samples were recorded, with one observed exceedance of the 24-hour standard. Using Equation 1, the estimated number of exceedances for the quarter is:
        </P>
        <FP>e<E T="52">q</E>=1×92/39=2.359 or 2.36.</FP>
        
        <P>b. If the estimated exceedances for the other 3 calendar quarters in the year were 2.30, 0.0 and 0.0, then, using Equation 2, the estimated number of exceedances for the year is 2.36+2.30+0.0+0.0 which equals 4.66 or 4.7. If no exceedances were observed for the 2 previous years, then the expected number of exceedances is estimated by: (1/3)×(4.7+0+0)=1.57 or 1.6. Since 1.6 exceeds the allowable number of expected exceedances, this monitoring site would fail the attainment test.</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Example 2</HD>

        <P>In this example, everyday sampling was initiated following the first observed exceedance as required by 40 CFR 58.13. Accordingly, the first observed exceedance would not be adjusted for incomplete sampling. During the next three quarters, 1.2 exceedances were estimated. In this case, the estimated exceedances for the year would be 1.0+1.2+0.0+0.0 which equals 2.2. If, as before, no exceedances were observed for the two previous years, then the estimated exceedances for the 3-year period would then be (1/3)×(2.2+0.0+0.0)=0.7, and the monitoring site would <E T="03">not</E> fail the attainment test.</P>
        <P>3.2 <E T="03">Adjustments for Non-Scheduled Sampling Days.</E>
        </P>
        <P>(a) If a systematic sampling schedule is used and sampling is performed on days in addition to the days specified by the systematic sampling schedule, e.g., during episodes of high pollution, then an adjustment must be made in the eqution for the estimation of exceedances. Such an adjustment is needed to eliminate the bias in the estimate of the quarterly and annual number of exceedances that would occur if the chance of an exceedance is different for scheduled than for non-scheduled days, as would be the case with episode sampling.</P>
        <P>(b) The required adjustment treats the systematic sampling schedule as a stratified sampling plan. If the period from one scheduled sample until the day preceding the next scheduled sample is defined as a sampling stratum, then there is one stratum for each scheduled sampling day. An average number of observed exceedances is computed for each of these sampling strata. With nonscheduled sampling days, the estimated number of exceedances is defined as:</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Equation 3</HD>
        <GPH DEEP="33" SPAN="1">
          <GID>ER18jy97.182</GID>
        </GPH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">e<E T="52">q</E> = the estimated number of exceedances for the quarter;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">N<E T="52">q</E> = the number of days in the quarter;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">m<E T="52">q</E> = the number of strata with samples during the quarter;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">v<E T="52">j</E> = the number of observed exceedances in stratum j; and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">k<E T="52">j</E> = the number of actual samples in stratum j.</FP>
        
        <P>(c) Note that if only one sample value is recorded in each stratum, then Equation 3 reduces to Equation 1.</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Example 3</HD>

        <P>A monitoring site samples according to a systematic sampling schedule of one sample every 6 days, for a total of 15 scheduled samples in a quarter out of a total of 92 possible samples. During one 6-day period, potential episode levels of PM<E T="52">10</E> were suspected, so 5 additional samples were taken. One of the regular scheduled samples was missed, so a total of 19 samples in 14 sampling strata were measured. The one 6-day sampling stratum with 6 samples recorded 2 exceedances. The remainder of the quarter with one sample per stratum recorded zero exceedances. Using Equation 3, the estimated number of exceedances for the quarter is:
        </P>
        <FP>e<E T="52">q</E>=(92/14)×(2/6+0+. . .+0)=2.19.</FP>
        
        <P>4.0 <E T="03">Computational Equations for Annual Standards.</E>
        </P>
        <P>4.1 <E T="03">Calculation of the Annual Arithmetic Mean.</E> (a) An annual arithmetic mean value for PM<E T="52">10</E> is determined by averaging the quarterly means for the 4 calendar quarters of the year. The following equation is to be used for calculation of the mean for a calendar quarter:</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Equation 4</HD>
        <GPH DEEP="31" SPAN="1">
          <GID>ER18jy97.183</GID>
        </GPH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">q</E> = the quarterly mean concentration for quarter q, q=1, 2, 3, or 4,</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">n<E T="52">q</E> = the number of samples in the quarter, and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<E T="52">i</E> = the ith concentration value recorded in the quarter.</FP>
        

        <P>(b) The quarterly mean, expressed in μg/m<SU>3</SU>, must be rounded to the nearest tenth (fractional values of 0.05 should be rounded up).<PRTPAGE P="74"/>
        </P>
        <P>(c) The annual mean is calculated by using the following equation:</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Equation 5</HD>
        <GPH DEEP="31" SPAN="1">
          <GID>ER18jy97.184</GID>
        </GPH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<AC T="8"/> = the annual mean; and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">q</E> = the mean for calendar quarter q.</FP>
        
        <P>(d) The average of quarterly means must be rounded to the nearest tenth (fractional values of 0.05 should be rounded up).</P>
        <P>(e) The use of quarterly averages to compute the annual average will not be necessary for monitoring or modeling data which results in a complete record, i.e., 365 days per year.</P>
        <P>(f) The expected annual mean is estimated as the average of three or more annual means. This multi-year estimate, expressed in μg/m<SU>3</SU>, shall be rounded to the nearest integer for comparison with the annual standard (fractional values of 0.5 should be rounded up).</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Example 4</HD>

        <P>Using Equation 4, the quarterly means are calculated for each calendar quarter. If the quarterly means are 52.4, 75.3, 82.1, and 63.2 μg/m <SU>3</SU>, then the annual mean is:
        </P>
        <FP>x<AC T="8"/> = (1/4)×(52.4+75.3+82.1+63.2) = 68.25 or 68.3.</FP>
        
        <P>4.2 <E T="03">Adjustments for Non-scheduled Sampling Days.</E> (a) An adjustment in the calculation of the annual mean is needed if sampling is performed on days in addition to the days specified by the systematic sampling schedule. For the same reasons given in the discussion of estimated exceedances, under section 3.2 of this appendix, the quarterly averages would be calculated by using the following equation:</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Equation 6</HD>
        <GPH DEEP="28" SPAN="1">
          <GID>ER18jy97.185</GID>
        </GPH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">q</E> = the quarterly mean concentration for quarter q, q=1, 2, 3, or 4;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<E T="52">ij</E> = the ith concentration value recorded in stratum j;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">k<E T="52">j</E> = the number of actual samples in stratum j; and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">m<E T="52">q</E> = the number of strata with data in the quarter.</FP>
        
        <P>(b) If one sample value is recorded in each stratum, Equation 6 reduces to a simple arithmetic average of the observed values as described by Equation 4.</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Example 5</HD>

        <P>a. During one calendar quarter, 9 observations were recorded. These samples were distributed among 7 sampling strata, with 3 observations in one stratum. The concentrations of the 3 observations in the single stratum were 202, 242, and 180 μg/m<SU>3</SU>. The remaining 6 observed concentrations were 55, 68, 73, 92, 120, and 155 μg/m<SU>3</SU>. Applying the weighting factors specified in Equation 6, the quarterly mean is:
        </P>
        <FP>x<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">q</E> = (1/7) × [(1/3) × (202 + 242 + 180) + 155 + 68 + 73 + 92 + 120 + 155] = 110.1</FP>
        
        <P>b. Although 24-hour measurements are rounded to the nearest 10 μg/m<SU>3</SU> for determinations of exceedances of the 24-hour standard, note that these values are rounded to the nearest 1 μg/m<SU>3</SU> for the calculation of means.</P>
        <CITA>[62 FR 38712, July 18, 1997]</CITA>
      </APPENDIX>
      <APPENDIX>
        <EAR>Pt. 50, App. L</EAR>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">
          <E T="05">Appendix L to Part 50—Reference Method for the Determination of Fine Particulate Matter as PM</E>
          <E T="52">2.5</E>
          <E T="05"> in the Atmosphere</E>
        </HD>
        <P>1.0 <E T="03">Applicability.</E>
        </P>

        <P>1.1 This method provides for the measurement of the mass concentration of fine particulate matter having an aerodynamic diameter less than or equal to a nominal 2.5 micrometers (PM<E T="52">2.5</E>) in ambient air over a 24-hour period for purposes of determining whether the primary and secondary national ambient air quality standards for fine particulate matter specified in § 50.7 of this part are met. The measurement process is considered to be nondestructive, and the PM<E T="52">2.5</E> sample obtained can be subjected to subsequent physical or chemical analyses. Quality assessment procedures are provided in part 58, appendix A of this chapter, and quality assurance guidance are provided in references 1, 2, and 3 in section 13.0 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>1.2 This method will be considered a reference method for purposes of part 58 of this chapter only if:</P>
        <P>(a) The associated sampler meets the requirements specified in this appendix and the applicable requirements in part 53 of this chapter, and</P>
        <P>(b) The method and associated sampler have been designated as a reference method in accordance with part 53 of this chapter.</P>
        <P>1.3 PM<E T="52">2.5</E> samplers that meet nearly all specifications set forth in this method but have minor deviations and/or modifications of the reference method sampler will be designated as “Class I” equivalent methods for PM<E T="52">2.5</E> in accordance with part 53 of this chapter.</P>
        <P>2.0 <E T="03">Principle.</E>
        </P>

        <P>2.1 An electrically powered air sampler draws ambient air at a constant volumetric flow rate into a specially shaped inlet and <PRTPAGE P="75"/>through an inertial particle size separator (impactor) where the suspended particulate matter in the PM<E T="52">2.5</E> size range is separated for collection on a polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) filter over the specified sampling period. The air sampler and other aspects of this reference method are specified either explicitly in this appendix or generally with reference to other applicable regulations or quality assurance guidance.</P>

        <P>2.2 Each filter is weighed (after moisture and temperature conditioning) before and after sample collection to determine the net gain due to collected PM<E T="52">2.5</E>. The total volume of air sampled is determined by the sampler from the measured flow rate at actual ambient temperature and pressure and the sampling time. The mass concentration of PM<E T="52">2.5</E> in the ambient air is computed as the total mass of collected particles in the PM<E T="52">2.5</E> size range divided by the actual volume of air sampled, and is expressed in micrograms per cubic meter of air (<E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E>).</P>
        <P>3.0 <E T="03"/>PM<E T="52">2.5</E>
          <E T="03">Measurement Range.</E>
        </P>
        <P>3.1 <E T="03">Lower concentration limit.</E> The lower detection limit of the mass concentration measurement range is estimated to be approximately 2 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E>, based on noted mass changes in field blanks in conjunction with the 24 m<E T="51">3</E> nominal total air sample volume specified for the 24-hour sample.</P>
        <P>3.2 <E T="03">Upper concentration limit.</E> The upper limit of the mass concentration range is determined by the filter mass loading beyond which the sampler can no longer maintain the operating flow rate within specified limits due to increased pressure drop across the loaded filter. This upper limit cannot be specified precisely because it is a complex function of the ambient particle size distribution and type, humidity, the individual filter used, the capacity of the sampler flow rate control system, and perhaps other factors. Nevertheless, all samplers are estimated to be capable of measuring 24-hour PM<E T="52">2.5</E> mass concentrations of at least 200 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E> while maintaining the operating flow rate within the specified limits.</P>
        <P>3.3 <E T="03">Sample period.</E> The required sample period for PM<E T="52">2.5</E> concentration measurements by this method shall be 1,380 to 1500 minutes (23 to 25 hours). However, when a sample period is less than 1,380 minutes, the measured concentration (as determined by the collected PM<E T="52">2.5</E> mass divided by the actual sampled air volume), multiplied by the actual number of minutes in the sample period and divided by 1,440, may be used as if it were a valid concentration measurement for the specific purpose of determining a violation of the NAAQS. This value assumes that the PM<E T="52">2.5</E> concentration is zero for the remaining portion of the sample period and therefore represents the minimum concentration that could have been measured for the full 24-hour sample period. Accordingly, if the value thus calculated is high enough to be an exceedance, such an exceedance would be a valid exceedance for the sample period. When reported to AIRS, this data value should receive a special code to identify it as not to be commingled with normal concentration measurements or used for other purposes.</P>
        <P>4.0 <E T="03">Accuracy.</E>
        </P>

        <P>4.1 Because the size and volatility of the particles making up ambient particulate matter vary over a wide range and the mass concentration of particles varies with particle size, it is difficult to define the accuracy of PM<E T="52">2.5</E> measurements in an absolute sense. The accuracy of PM<E T="52">2.5</E> measurements is therefore defined in a relative sense, referenced to measurements provided by this reference method. Accordingly, accuracy shall be defined as the degree of agreement between a subject field PM<E T="52">2.5</E> sampler and a collocated PM<E T="52">2.5</E> reference method audit sampler operating simultaneously at the monitoring site location of the subject sampler and includes both random (precision) and systematic (bias) errors. The requirements for this field sampler audit procedure are set forth in part 58, appendix A of this chapter.</P>
        <P>4.2 <E T="03">Measurement system bias.</E> Results of collocated measurements where the duplicate sampler is a reference method sampler are used to assess a portion of the measurement system bias according to the schedule and procedure specified in part 58, appendix A of this chapter.</P>
        <P>4.3 <E T="03">Audits with reference method samplers to determine system accuracy and bias.</E> According to the schedule and procedure specified in part 58, appendix A of this chapter, a reference method sampler is required to be located at each of selected PM<E T="52">2.5</E> SLAMS sites as a duplicate sampler. The results from the primary sampler and the duplicate reference method sampler are used to calculate accuracy of the primary sampler on a quarterly basis, bias of the primary sampler on an annual basis, and bias of a single reporting organization on an annual basis. Reference 2 in section 13.0 of this appendix provides additional information and guidance on these reference method audits.</P>
        <P>4.4 <E T="03">Flow rate accuracy and bias.</E> Part 58, appendix A of this chapter requires that the flow rate accuracy and bias of individual PM<E T="52">2.5</E> samplers used in SLAMS monitoring networks be assessed periodically via audits of each sampler's operational flow rate. In addition, part 58, appendix A of this chapter requires that flow rate bias for each reference and equivalent method operated by each reporting organization be assessed quarterly and annually. Reference 2 in section 13.0 of this appendix provides additional information and guidance on flow rate accuracy audits and calculations for accuracy and bias.</P>
        <P>5.0 <E T="03">Precision.</E> A data quality objective of 10 percent coefficient of variation or better has <PRTPAGE P="76"/>been established for the operational precision of PM<E T="52">2.5</E> monitoring data.</P>
        <P>5.1 Tests to establish initial operational precision for each reference method sampler are specified as a part of the requirements for designation as a reference method under § 53.58 of this chapter.</P>
        <P>5.2 <E T="03">Measurement System Precision.</E> Collocated sampler results, where the duplicate sampler is not a reference method sampler but is a sampler of the same designated method as the primary sampler, are used to assess measurement system precision according to the schedule and procedure specified in part 58, appendix A of this chapter. Part 58, appendix A of this chapter requires that these collocated sampler measurements be used to calculate quarterly and annual precision estimates for each primary sampler and for each designated method employed by each reporting organization. Reference 2 in section 13.0 of this appendix provides additional information and guidance on this requirement.</P>
        <P>6.0 <E T="03">Filter for PM</E>
          <E T="52">2.5</E>
          <E T="03">Sample Collection.</E> Any filter manufacturer or vendor who sells or offers to sell filters specifically identified for use with this PM<E T="52">2.5</E> reference method shall certify that the required number of filters from each lot of filters offered for sale as such have been tested as specified in this section 6.0 and meet all of the following design and performance specifications.</P>
        <P>6.1 <E T="03">Size.</E> Circular, 46.2 mm diameter <E T="61">±</E>0.25 mm.</P>
        <P>6.2 <E T="03">Medium.</E> Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE Teflon), with integral support ring.</P>
        <P>6.3 <E T="03">Support ring.</E> Polymethylpentene (PMP) or equivalent inert material, 0.38  <E T="61">±</E>0.04 mm thick, outer diameter 46.2 mm  <E T="61">±</E>0.25 mm, and width of 3.68 mm ( <E T="61">±</E>0.00, -0.51 mm).</P>
        <P>6.4 <E T="03">Pore size.</E> 2 <E T="61">m</E>m as measured by ASTM F 316-94.</P>
        <P>6.5 <E T="03">Filter thickness.</E> 30 to 50 <E T="61">m</E>m.</P>
        <P>6.6 <E T="03">Maximum pressure drop (clean filter).</E> 30 cm H<E T="52">2</E>O column @ 16.67 L/min clean air flow.</P>
        <P>6.7 <E T="03">Maximum moisture pickup.</E> Not more than 10 <E T="61">m</E>g weight increase after 24-hour exposure to air of 40 percent relative humidity, relative to weight after 24-hour exposure to air of 35 percent relative humidity.</P>
        <P>6.8 <E T="03">Collection efficiency.</E> Greater than 99.7 percent, as measured by the DOP test (ASTM D 2986-91) with 0.3 <E T="61">m</E>m particles at the sampler's operating face velocity.</P>
        <P>6.9 <E T="03">Filter weight stability.</E> Filter weight loss shall be less than 20 <E T="61">m</E>g, as measured in each of the following two tests specified in sections 6.9.1 and 6.9.2 of this appendix. The following conditions apply to both of these tests: Filter weight loss shall be the average difference between the initial and the final filter weights of a random sample of test filters selected from each lot prior to sale. The number of filters tested shall be not less than 0.1 percent of the filters of each manufacturing lot, or 10 filters, whichever is greater. The filters shall be weighed under laboratory conditions and shall have had no air sample passed through them, i.e., filter blanks. Each test procedure must include initial conditioning and weighing, the test, and final conditioning and weighing. Conditioning and weighing shall be in accordance with sections 8.0 through 8.2 of this appendix and general guidance provided in reference 2 of section 13.0 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>6.9.1 <E T="03">Test for loose, surface particle contamination.</E> After the initial weighing, install each test filter, in turn, in a filter cassette (Figures L-27, L-28, and L-29 of this appendix) and drop the cassette from a height of 25 cm to a flat hard surface, such as a particle-free wood bench. Repeat two times, for a total of three drop tests for each test filter. Remove the test filter from the cassette and weigh the filter. The average change in weight must be less than 20 <E T="61">m</E>g.</P>
        <P>6.9.2 <E T="03">Test for temperature stability.</E> After weighing each filter, place the test filters in a drying oven set at 40 °C <E T="61">±</E>2 °C for not less than 48 hours. Remove, condition, and reweigh each test filter. The average change in weight must be less than 20 <E T="61">m</E>g.</P>
        <P>6.10 <E T="03">Alkalinity.</E> Less than 25 microequivalents/gram of filter, as measured by the guidance given in reference 2 in section 13.0 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>6.11 <E T="03">Supplemental requirements.</E> Although not required for determination of PM<E T="52">2.5</E> mass concentration under this reference method, additional specifications for the filter must be developed by users who intend to subject PM<E T="52">2.5</E> filter samples to subsequent chemical analysis. These supplemental specifications include background chemical contamination of the filter and any other filter parameters that may be required by the method of chemical analysis. All such supplemental filter specifications must be compatible with and secondary to the primary filter specifications given in this section 6.0 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>7.0 <E T="03">PM</E>
          <E T="52">2.5</E>
          <E T="03">Sampler.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.1 <E T="03">Configuration.</E> The sampler shall consist of a sample air inlet, downtube, particle size separator (impactor), filter holder assembly, air pump and flow rate control system, flow rate measurement device, ambient and filter temperature monitoring system, barometric pressure measurement system, timer, outdoor environmental enclosure, and suitable mechanical, electrical, or electronic control capability to meet or exceed the design and functional performance as specified in this section 7.0 of this appendix. The performance specifications require that the sampler:</P>
        <P>(a) Provide automatic control of sample volumetric flow rate and other operational parameters.</P>
        <P>(b) Monitor these operational parameters as well as ambient temperature and pressure.</P>

        <P>(c) Provide this information to the sampler operator at the end of each sample period in <PRTPAGE P="77"/>digital form, as specified in table L-1 of section 7.4.19 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>7.2 <E T="03">Nature of specifications.</E> The PM<E T="52">2.5</E> sampler is specified by a combination of design and performance requirements. The sample inlet, downtube, particle size discriminator, filter cassette, and the internal configuration of the filter holder assembly are specified explicitly by design figures and associated mechanical dimensions, tolerances, materials, surface finishes, assembly instructions, and other necessary specifications. All other aspects of the sampler are specified by required operational function and performance, and the design of these other aspects (including the design of the lower portion of the filter holder assembly) is optional, subject to acceptable operational performance. Test procedures to demonstrate compliance with both the design and performance requirements are set forth in subpart E of part 53 of this chapter.</P>
        <P>7.3 <E T="03">Design specifications.</E> Except as indicated in this section 7.3 of this appendix, these components must be manufactured or reproduced exactly as specified, in an ISO 9001-registered facility, with registration initially approved and subsequently maintained during the period of manufacture. See § 53.1(t) of this chapter for the definition of an ISO-registered facility. Minor modifications or variances to one or more components that clearly would not affect the aerodynamic performance of the inlet, downtube, impactor, or filter cassette will be considered for specific approval. Any such proposed modifications shall be described and submitted to the EPA for specific individual acceptability either as part of a reference or equivalent method application under part 53 of this chapter or in writing in advance of such an intended application under part 53 of this chapter.</P>
        <P>7.3.1 <E T="03">Sample inlet assembly.</E> The sample inlet assembly, consisting of the inlet, downtube, and impactor shall be configured and assembled as indicated in Figure L-1 of this appendix and shall meet all associated requirements. A portion of this assembly shall also be subject to the maximum overall sampler leak rate specification under section 7.4.6 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>7.3.2 <E T="03">Inlet.</E> The sample inlet shall be fabricated as indicated in Figures L-2 through L-18 of this appendix and shall meet all associated requirements.</P>
        <P>7.3.3 <E T="03">Downtube.</E> The downtube shall be fabricated as indicated in Figure L-19 of this appendix and shall meet all associated requirements.</P>
        <P>7.3.4 <E T="03">Impactor.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.3.4.1 The impactor (particle size separator) shall be fabricated as indicated in Figures L-20 through L-24 of this appendix and shall meet all associated requirements. Following the manufacture and finishing of each upper impactor housing (Figure L-21 of this appendix), the dimension of the impaction jet must be verified by the manufacturer using Class ZZ go/no-go plug gauges that are traceable to NIST.</P>
        <P>7.3.4.2 Impactor filter specifications:</P>
        <P>(a) Size. Circular, 35 to 37 mm diameter.</P>
        <P>(b) Medium. Borosilicate glass fiber, without binder.</P>
        <P>(c) Pore size. 1 to 1.5 micrometer, as measured by ASTM F 316-80.</P>
        <P>(d) Thickness. 300 to 500 micrometers.</P>
        <P>7.3.4.3 Impactor oil specifications:</P>
        <P>(a) Composition. Tetra-methyl-tetra-phenyl-trisiloxane, single-compound diffusion oil.</P>
        <P>(b) Vapor pressure. Maximum 2 x 10<E T="51">-8</E> mm Hg at 25 °C.</P>
        <P>(c) Viscosity. 36 to 40 centistokes at 25 °C.</P>
        <P>(d) Density. 1.06 to 1.07 g/cm<E T="51">3</E> at 25 °C.</P>
        <P>(e) Quantity. 1 mL  <E T="61">±</E>0.1 mL.</P>
        <P>7.3.5 <E T="03">Filter holder assembly.</E> The sampler shall have a sample filter holder assembly to adapt and seal to the down tube and to hold and seal the specified filter, under section 6.0 of this appendix, in the sample air stream in a horizontal position below the downtube such that the sample air passes downward through the filter at a uniform face velocity. The upper portion of this assembly shall be fabricated as indicated in Figures L-25 and L-26 of this appendix and shall accept and seal with the filter cassette, which shall be fabricated as indicated in Figures L-27 through L-29 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>(a) The lower portion of the filter holder assembly shall be of a design and construction that:</P>
        <P>(1) Mates with the upper portion of the assembly to complete the filter holder assembly,</P>
        <P>(2) Completes both the external air seal and the internal filter cassette seal such that all seals are reliable over repeated filter changings, and</P>
        <P>(3) Facilitates repeated changing of the filter cassette by the sampler operator.</P>
        <P>(b) Leak-test performance requirements for the filter holder assembly are included in section 7.4.6 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>(c) If additional or multiple filters are stored in the sampler as part of an automatic sequential sample capability, all such filters, unless they are currently and directly installed in a sampling channel or sampling configuration (either active or inactive), shall be covered or (preferably) sealed in such a way as to:</P>
        <P>(1) Preclude significant exposure of the filter to possible contamination or accumulation of dust, insects, or other material that may be present in the ambient air, sampler, or sampler ventilation air during storage periods either before or after sampling; and</P>
        <P>(2) To minimize loss of volatile or semi-volatile PM sample components during storage of the filter following the sample period.</P>
        <P>7.3.6 <E T="03">Flow rate measurement adapter.</E> A flow rate measurement adapter as specified in <PRTPAGE P="78"/>Figure L-30 of this appendix shall be furnished with each sampler.</P>
        <P>7.3.7 <E T="03">Surface finish.</E> All internal surfaces exposed to sample air prior to the filter shall be treated electrolytically in a sulfuric acid bath to produce a clear, uniform anodized surface finish of not less than 1000 mg/ft<E T="51">2</E> (1.08 mg/cm<E T="51">2</E>) in accordance with military standard specification (mil. spec.) 8625F, Type II, Class 1 in reference 4 of section 13.0 of this appendix. This anodic surface coating shall not be dyed or pigmented. Following anodization, the surfaces shall be sealed by immersion in boiling deionized water for not less than 15 minutes. Section 53.51(d)(2) of this chapter should also be consulted.</P>
        <P>7.3.8 <E T="03">Sampling height.</E> The sampler shall be equipped with legs, a stand, or other means to maintain the sampler in a stable, upright position and such that the center of the sample air entrance to the inlet, during sample collection, is maintained in a horizontal plane and is 2.0  <E T="61">±</E>0.2 meters above the floor or other horizontal supporting surface. Suitable bolt holes, brackets, tie-downs, or other means should be provided to facilitate mechanically securing the sample to the supporting surface to prevent toppling of the sampler due to wind.</P>
        <P>7.4 <E T="03">Performance specifications.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.4.1 <E T="03">Sample flow rate.</E> Proper operation of the impactor requires that specific air velocities be maintained through the device. Therefore, the design sample air flow rate through the inlet shall be 16.67 L/min (1.000 m<E T="51">3</E>/hour) measured as actual volumetric flow rate at the temperature and pressure of the sample air entering the inlet.</P>
        <P>7.4.2 <E T="03">Sample air flow rate control system.</E> The sampler shall have a sample air flow rate control system which shall be capable of providing a sample air volumetric flow rate within the specified range, under section 7.4.1 of this appendix, for the specified filter, under section 6.0 of this appendix, at any atmospheric conditions specified, under section 7.4.7 of this appendix, at a filter pressure drop equal to that of a clean filter plus up to 75 cm water column (55 mm Hg), and over the specified range of supply line voltage, under section 7.4.15.1 of this appendix. This flow control system shall allow for operator adjustment of the operational flow rate of the sampler over a range of at least  <E T="61">±</E>15 percent of the flow rate specified in section 7.4.1 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>7.4.3 <E T="03">Sample flow rate regulation.</E> The sample flow rate shall be regulated such that for the specified filter, under section 6.0 of this appendix, at any atmospheric conditions specified, under section 7.4.7 of this appendix, at a filter pressure drop equal to that of a clean filter plus up to 75 cm water column (55 mm Hg), and over the specified range of supply line voltage, under section 7.4.15.1 of this appendix, the flow rate is regulated as follows:</P>

        <P>7.4.3.1 The volumetric flow rate, measured or averaged over intervals of not more than 5 minutes over a 24-hour period, shall not vary more than  <E T="61">±</E>5 percent from the specified 16.67 L/min flow rate over the entire sample period.</P>
        <P>7.4.3.2 The coefficient of variation (sample standard deviation divided by the mean) of the flow rate, measured over a 24-hour period, shall not be greater than 2 percent.</P>
        <P>7.4.3.3 The amplitude of short-term flow rate pulsations, such as may originate from some types of vacuum pumps, shall be attenuated such that they do not cause significant flow measurement error or affect the collection of particles on the particle collection filter.</P>
        <P>7.4.4 <E T="03">Flow rate cut off.</E> The sampler's sample air flow rate control system shall terminate sample collection and stop all sample flow for the remainder of the sample period in the event that the sample flow rate deviates by more than 10 percent from the sampler design flow rate specified in section 7.4.1 of this appendix for more than 60 seconds. However, this sampler cut-off provision shall not apply during periods when the sampler is inoperative due to a temporary power interruption, and the elapsed time of the inoperative period shall not be included in the total sample time measured and reported by the sampler, under section 7.4.13 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>7.4.5 <E T="03">Flow rate measurement.</E>
        </P>

        <P>7.4.5.1 The sampler shall provide a means to measure and indicate the instantaneous sample air flow rate, which shall be measured as volumetric flow rate at the temperature and pressure of the sample air entering the inlet, with an accuracy of  <E T="61">±</E>2 percent. The measured flow rate shall be available for display to the sampler operator at any time in either sampling or standby modes, and the measurement shall be updated at least every 30 seconds. The sampler shall also provide a simple means by which the sampler operator can manually start the sample flow temporarily during non-sampling modes of operation, for the purpose of checking the sample flow rate or the flow rate measurement system.</P>
        <P>7.4.5.2 During each sample period, the sampler's flow rate measurement system shall automatically monitor the sample volumetric flow rate, obtaining flow rate measurements at intervals of not greater than 30 seconds.</P>
        <P>(a) Using these interval flow rate measurements, the sampler shall determine or calculate the following flow-related parameters, scaled in the specified engineering units:</P>
        <P>(1) The instantaneous or interval-average flow rate, in L/min.</P>
        <P>(2) The value of the average sample flow rate for the sample period, in L/min.</P>

        <P>(3) The value of the coefficient of variation (sample standard deviation divided by the <PRTPAGE P="79"/>average) of the sample flow rate for the sample period, in percent.</P>

        <P>(4) The occurrence of any time interval during the sample period in which the measured sample flow rate exceeds a range of  <E T="61">±</E>5 percent of the average flow rate for the sample period for more than 5 minutes, in which case a warning flag indicator shall be set.</P>

        <P>(5) The value of the integrated total sample volume for the sample period, in m<E T="51">3</E>.</P>
        <P>(b) Determination or calculation of these values shall properly exclude periods when the sampler is inoperative due to temporary interruption of electrical power, under section 7.4.13 of this appendix, or flow rate cut off, under section 7.4.4 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>(c) These parameters shall be accessible to the sampler operator as specified in table L-1 of section 7.4.19 of this appendix. In addition, it is strongly encouraged that the flow rate for each 5-minute interval during the sample period be available to the operator following the end of the sample period.</P>
        <P>7.4.6 <E T="03">Leak test capability.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.4.6.1 <E T="03">External leakage.</E> The sampler shall include an external air leak-test capability consisting of components, accessory hardware, operator interface controls, a written procedure in the associated Operation/Instruction Manual, under section 7.4.18 of this appendix, and all other necessary functional capability to permit and facilitate the sampler operator to conveniently carry out a leak test of the sampler at a field monitoring site without additional equipment. The sampler components to be subjected to this leak test include all components and their interconnections in which external air leakage would or could cause an error in the sampler's measurement of the total volume of sample air that passes through the sample filter.</P>
        <P>(a) The suggested technique for the operator to use for this leak test is as follows:</P>
        <P>(1) Remove the sampler inlet and installs the flow rate measurement adapter supplied with the sampler, under section 7.3.6 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>(2) Close the valve on the flow rate measurement adapter and use the sampler air pump to draw a partial vacuum in the sampler, including (at least) the impactor, filter holder assembly (filter in place), flow measurement device, and interconnections between these devices, of at least 55 mm Hg (75 cm water column), measured at a location downstream of the filter holder assembly.</P>
        <P>(3) Plug the flow system downstream of these components to isolate the components under vacuum from the pump, such as with a built-in valve.</P>
        <P>(4) Stop the pump.</P>
        <P>(5) Measure the trapped vacuum in the sampler with a built-in pressure measuring device.</P>
        <P>(6) (i) Measure the vacuum in the sampler with the built-in pressure measuring device again at a later time at least 10 minutes after the first pressure measurement.</P>
        <P>(ii) <E T="04">Caution:</E> Following completion of the test, the adaptor valve should be opened slowly to limit the flow rate of air into the sampler. Excessive air flow rate may blow oil out of the impactor.</P>
        <P>(7) Upon completion of the test, open the adaptor valve, remove the adaptor and plugs, and restore the sampler to the normal operating configuration.</P>
        <P>(b) The associated leak test procedure shall require that for successful passage of this test, the difference between the two pressure measurements shall not be greater than the number of mm of Hg specified for the sampler by the manufacturer, based on the actual internal volume of the sampler, that indicates a leak of less than 80 mL/min.</P>
        <P>(c) Variations of the suggested technique or an alternative external leak test technique may be required for samplers whose design or configuration would make the suggested technique impossible or impractical. The specific proposed external leak test procedure, or particularly an alternative leak test technique, proposed for a particular candidate sampler may be described and submitted to the EPA for specific individual acceptability either as part of a reference or equivalent method application under part 53 of this chapter or in writing in advance of such an intended application under part 53 of this chapter.</P>
        <P>7.4.6.2 <E T="03">Internal, filter bypass leakage.</E> The sampler shall include an internal, filter bypass leak-check capability consisting of components, accessory hardware, operator interface controls, a written procedure in the Operation/Instruction Manual, and all other necessary functional capability to permit and facilitate the sampler operator to conveniently carry out a test for internal filter bypass leakage in the sampler at a field monitoring site without additional equipment. The purpose of the test is to determine that any portion of the sample flow rate that leaks past the sample filter without passing through the filter is insignificant relative to the design flow rate for the sampler.</P>
        <P>(a) The suggested technique for the operator to use for this leak test is as follows:</P>
        <P>(1) Carry out an external leak test as provided under section 7.4.6.1 of this appendix which indicates successful passage of the prescribed external leak test.</P>
        <P>(2) Install a flow-impervious membrane material in the filter cassette, either with or without a filter, as appropriate, which effectively prevents air flow through the filter.</P>
        <P>(3) Use the sampler air pump to draw a partial vacuum in the sampler, downstream of the filter holder assembly, of at least 55 mm Hg (75 cm water column).</P>

        <P>(4) Plug the flow system downstream of the filter holder to isolate the components under <PRTPAGE P="80"/>vacuum from the pump, such as with a built-in valve.</P>
        <P>(5) Stop the pump.</P>
        <P>(6) Measure the trapped vacuum in the sampler with a built-in pressure measuring device.</P>
        <P>(7) Measure the vacuum in the sampler with the built-in pressure measuring device again at a later time at least 10 minutes after the first pressure measurement.</P>
        <P>(8) Remove the flow plug and membrane and restore the sampler to the normal operating configuration.</P>
        <P>(b) The associated leak test procedure shall require that for successful passage of this test, the difference between the two pressure measurements shall not be greater than the number of mm of Hg specified for the sampler by the manufacturer, based on the actual internal volume of the portion of the sampler under vacuum, that indicates a leak of less than 80 mL/min.</P>
        <P>(c) Variations of the suggested technique or an alternative internal, filter bypass leak test technique may be required for samplers whose design or configuration would make the suggested technique impossible or impractical. The specific proposed internal leak test procedure, or particularly an alternative internal leak test technique proposed for a particular candidate sampler may be described and submitted to the EPA for specific individual acceptability either as part of a reference or equivalent method application under part 53 of this chapter or in writing in advance of such intended application under part 53 of this chapter.</P>
        <P>7.4.7 <E T="03">Range of operational conditions.</E> The sampler is required to operate properly and meet all requirements specified in this appendix over the following operational ranges.</P>
        <P>7.4.7.1 <E T="03">Ambient temperature.</E> -30 to +45 °C  (Note: Although for practical reasons, the temperature range over which samplers are required to be tested under part 53 of this chapter is -20 to +40 °C, the sampler shall be designed to operate properly over this wider temperature range.).</P>
        <P>7.4.7.2 <E T="03">Ambient relative humidity.</E> 0 to 100 percent.</P>
        <P>7.4.7.3 <E T="03">Barometric pressure range.</E> 600 to 800 mm Hg.</P>
        <P>7.4.8 <E T="03">Ambient temperature sensor.</E> The sampler shall have capability to measure the temperature of the ambient air surrounding the sampler over the range of -30 to +45 °C, with a resolution of 0.1 °C and accuracy of <E T="61">±</E>2.0 °C, referenced as described in reference 3 in section 13.0 of this appendix, with and without maximum solar insolation.</P>
        <P>7.4.8.1 The ambient temperature sensor shall be mounted external to the sampler enclosure and shall have a passive, naturally ventilated sun shield. The sensor shall be located such that the entire sun shield is at least 5 cm above the horizontal plane of the sampler case or enclosure (disregarding the inlet and downtube) and external to the vertical plane of the nearest side or protuberance of the sampler case or enclosure. The maximum temperature measurement error of the ambient temperature measurement system shall be less than 1.6 °C at 1 m/s wind speed and 1000 W/m2 solar radiation intensity.</P>
        <P>7.4.8.2 The ambient temperature sensor shall be of such a design and mounted in such a way as to facilitate its convenient dismounting and immersion in a liquid for calibration and comparison to the filter temperature sensor, under section 7.4.11 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>7.4.8.3 This ambient temperature measurement shall be updated at least every 30 seconds during both sampling and standby (non-sampling) modes of operation. A visual indication of the current (most recent) value of the ambient temperature measurement, updated at least every 30 seconds, shall be available to the sampler operator during both sampling and standby (non-sampling) modes of operation, as specified in table L-1 of section 7.4.19 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>7.4.8.4 This ambient temperature measurement shall be used for the purpose of monitoring filter temperature deviation from ambient temperature, as required by section 7.4.11 of this appendix, and may be used for purposes of effecting filter temperature control, under section 7.4.10 of this appendix, or computation of volumetric flow rate, under sections 7.4.1 to 7.4.5 of this appendix, if appropriate.</P>
        <P>7.4.8.5 Following the end of each sample period, the sampler shall report the maximum, minimum, and average temperature for the sample period, as specified in table L-1 of section 7.4.19 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>7.4.9 <E T="03">Ambient barometric sensor.</E> The sampler shall have capability to measure the barometric pressure of the air surrounding the sampler over a range of 600 to 800 mm Hg referenced as described in reference 3 in section 13.0 of this appendix; also see part 53, subpart E of this chapter. This barometric pressure measurement shall have a resolution of 5 mm Hg and an accuracy of  <E T="61">±</E>10 mm Hg and shall be updated at least every 30 seconds. A visual indication of the value of the current (most recent) barometric pressure measurement, updated at least every 30 seconds, shall be available to the sampler operator during both sampling and standby (non-sampling) modes of operation, as specified in table L-1 of section 7.4.19 of this appendix. This barometric pressure measurement may be used for purposes of computation of volumetric flow rate, under sections 7.4.1 to 7.4.5 of this appendix, if appropriate. Following the end of a sample period, the sampler shall report the maximum, minimum, and mean barometric pressures for the sample period, as specified in table L-1 of section 7.4.19 of this appendix.<PRTPAGE P="81"/>
        </P>
        <P>7.4.10 <E T="03">Filter temperature control (sampling and post-sampling).</E> The sampler shall provide a means to limit the temperature rise of the sample filter (all sample filters for sequential samplers), from insolation and other sources, to no more 5 °C above the temperature of the ambient air surrounding the sampler, during both sampling and post-sampling periods of operation. The post-sampling period is the non-sampling period between the end of the active sampling period and the time of retrieval of the sample filter by the sampler operator.</P>
        <P>7.4.11 <E T="03">Filter temperature sensor(s).</E>
        </P>

        <P>7.4.11.1 The sampler shall have the capability to monitor the temperature of the sample filter (all sample filters for sequential samplers) over the range of -30 to +45 °C during both sampling and non-sampling periods. While the exact location of this temperature sensor is not explicitly specified, the filter temperature measurement system must demonstrate agreement, within 1 °C, with a test temperature sensor located within 1 cm of the center of the filter downstream of the filter during both sampling and non-sampling modes, as specified in the filter temperature measurement test described in part 53, subpart E of this chapter. This filter temperature measurement shall have a resolution of 0.1 °C and accuracy of  <E T="61">±</E>1.0 °C, referenced as described in reference 3 in section 13.0 of this appendix. This temperature sensor shall be of such a design and mounted in such a way as to facilitate its reasonably convenient dismounting and immersion in a liquid for calibration and comparison to the ambient temperature sensor under section 7.4.8 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>7.4.11.2 The filter temperature measurement shall be updated at least every 30 seconds during both sampling and standby (non-sampling) modes of operation. A visual indication of the current (most recent) value of the filter temperature measurement, updated at least every 30 seconds, shall be available to the sampler operator during both sampling and standby (non-sampling) modes of operation, as specified in table L-1 of section 7.4.19 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>7.4.11.3 For sequential samplers, the temperature of each filter shall be measured individually unless it can be shown, as specified in the filter temperature measurement test described in § 53.57 of this chapter, that the temperature of each filter can be represented by fewer temperature sensors.</P>
        <P>7.4.11.4 The sampler shall also provide a warning flag indicator following any occurrence in which the filter temperature (any filter temperature for sequential samplers) exceeds the ambient temperature by more than 5 °C for more than 30 consecutive minutes during either the sampling or post-sampling periods of operation, as specified in table L-1 of section 7.4.19 of this appendix, under section 10.12 of this appendix, regarding sample validity when a warning flag occurs. It is further recommended (not required) that the sampler be capable of recording the maximum differential between the measured filter temperature and the ambient temperature and its time and date of occurrence during both sampling and post-sampling (non-sampling) modes of operation and providing for those data to be accessible to the sampler operator following the end of the sample period, as suggested in table L-1 of section 7.4.19 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>7.4.12 <E T="03">Clock/timer system.</E>
        </P>
        <P>(a) The sampler shall have a programmable real-time clock timing/control system that:</P>

        <P>(1) Is capable of maintaining local time and date, including year, month, day-of-month, hour, minute, and second to an accuracy of  <E T="61">±</E>1.0 minute per month.</P>
        <P>(2) Provides a visual indication of the current system time, including year, month, day-of-month, hour, and minute, updated at least each minute, for operator verification.</P>
        <P>(3) Provides appropriate operator controls for setting the correct local time and date.</P>
        <P>(4) Is capable of starting the sample collection period and sample air flow at a specific, operator-settable time and date, and stopping the sample air flow and terminating the sampler collection period 24 hours (1440 minutes) later, or at a specific, operator-settable time and date.</P>

        <P>(b) These start and stop times shall be readily settable by the sampler operator to within  <E T="61">±</E>1.0 minute. The system shall provide a visual indication of the current start and stop time settings, readable to  <E T="61">±</E>1.0 minute, for verification by the operator, and the start and stop times shall also be available via the data output port, as specified in table L-1 of section 7.4.19 of this appendix. Upon execution of a programmed sample period start, the sampler shall automatically reset all sample period information and warning flag indications pertaining to a previous sample period. Refer also to section 7.4.15.4 of this appendix regarding retention of current date and time and programmed start and stop times during a temporary electrical power interruption.</P>
        <P>7.4.13 <E T="03">Sample time determination.</E> The sampler shall be capable of determining the elapsed sample collection time for each PM<E T="52">2.5</E> sample, accurate to within  <E T="61">±</E>1.0 minute, measured as the time between the start of the sampling period, under section 7.4.12 of this appendix and the termination of the sample period, under section 7.4.12 of this appendix or section 7.4.4 of this appendix. This elapsed sample time shall not include periods when the sampler is inoperative due to a temporary interruption of electrical power, under section 7.4.15.4 of this appendix. In the event that the elapsed sample time determined for the sample period is not within the <PRTPAGE P="82"/>range specified for the required sample period in section 3.3 of this appendix, the sampler shall set a warning flag indicator. The date and time of the start of the sample period, the value of the elapsed sample time for the sample period, and the flag indicator status shall be available to the sampler operator following the end of the sample period, as specified in table L-1 of section 7.4.19 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>7.4.14 <E T="03">Outdoor environmental enclosure.</E> The sampler shall have an outdoor enclosure (or enclosures) suitable to protect the filter and other non-weatherproof components of the sampler from precipitation, wind, dust, extremes of temperature and humidity; to help maintain temperature control of the filter (or filters, for sequential samplers); and to provide reasonable security for sampler components and settings.</P>
        <P>7.4.15 <E T="03">Electrical power supply.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.4.15.1 The sampler shall be operable and function as specified herein when operated on an electrical power supply voltage of 105 to 125 volts AC (RMS) at a frequency of 59 to 61 Hz. Optional operation as specified at additional power supply voltages and/or frequencies shall not be precluded by this requirement.</P>
        <P>7.4.15.2 The design and construction of the sampler shall comply with all applicable National Electrical Code and Underwriters Laboratories electrical safety requirements.</P>
        <P>7.4.15.3 The design of all electrical and electronic controls shall be such as to provide reasonable resistance to interference or malfunction from ordinary or typical levels of stray electromagnetic fields (EMF) as may be found at various monitoring sites and from typical levels of electrical transients or electronic noise as may often or occasionally be present on various electrical power lines.</P>

        <P>7.4.15.4 In the event of temporary loss of electrical supply power to the sampler, the sampler shall not be required to sample or provide other specified functions during such loss of power, except that the internal clock/timer system shall maintain its local time and date setting within  <E T="61">±</E>1 minute per week, and the sampler shall retain all other time and programmable settings and all data required to be available to the sampler operator following each sample period for at least 7 days without electrical supply power. When electrical power is absent at the operator-set time for starting a sample period or is interrupted during a sample period, the sampler shall automatically start or resume sampling when electrical power is restored, if such restoration of power occurs before the operator-set stop time for the sample period.</P>
        <P>7.4.15.5 The sampler shall have the capability to record and retain a record of the year, month, day-of-month, hour, and minute of the start of each power interruption of more than 1 minute duration, up to 10 such power interruptions per sample period. (More than 10 such power interruptions shall invalidate the sample, except where an exceedance is measured, under section 3.3 of this appendix.) The sampler shall provide for these power interruption data to be available to the sampler operator following the end of the sample period, as specified in table L-1 of section 7.4.19 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>7.4.16 <E T="03">Control devices and operator interface.</E> The sampler shall have mechanical, electrical, or electronic controls, control devices, electrical or electronic circuits as necessary to provide the timing, flow rate measurement and control, temperature control, data storage and computation, operator interface, and other functions specified. Operator-accessible controls, data displays, and interface devices shall be designed to be simple, straightforward, reliable, and easy to learn, read, and operate under field conditions. The sampler shall have provision for operator input and storage of up to 64 characters of numeric (or alphanumeric) data for purposes of site, sampler, and sample identification. This information shall be available to the sampler operator for verification and change and for output via the data output port along with other data following the end of a sample period, as specified in table L-1 of section 7.4.19 of this appendix. All data required to be available to the operator following a sample collection period or obtained during standby mode in a post-sampling period shall be retained by the sampler until reset, either manually by the operator or automatically by the sampler upon initiation of a new sample collection period.</P>
        <P>7.4.17 <E T="03">Data output port requirement.</E> The sampler shall have a standard RS-232C data output connection through which digital data may be exported to an external data storage or transmission device. All information which is required to be available at the end of each sample period shall be accessible through this data output connection. The information that shall be accessible though this output port is summarized in table L-1 of section 7.4.19 of this appendix. Since no specific format for the output data is provided, the sampler manufacturer or vendor shall make available to sampler purchasers appropriate computer software capable of receiving exported sampler data and correctly translating the data into a standard spreadsheet format and optionally any other formats as may be useful to sampler users. This requirement shall not preclude the sampler from offering other types of output connections in addition to the required RS-232C port.</P>
        <P>7.4.18 <E T="03">Operation/instruction manual.</E> The sampler shall include an associated comprehensive operation or instruction manual, as required by part 53 of this chapter, which includes detailed operating instructions on <PRTPAGE P="83"/>the setup, operation, calibration, and maintenance of the sampler. This manual shall provide complete and detailed descriptions of the operational and calibration procedures prescribed for field use of the sampler and all instruments utilized as part of this reference method. The manual shall include adequate warning of potential safety hazards that may result from normal use or malfunction of the method and a description of necessary safety precautions. The manual shall also include a clear description of all procedures pertaining to installation, operation, periodic and corrective maintenance, and troubleshooting, and shall include parts identification diagrams.</P>
        <P>7.4.19 <E T="03">Data reporting requirements.</E> The various information that the sampler is required to provide and how it is to be provided is summarized in the following table L-1.</P>
        <GPOTABLE CDEF="s25,r10,10C,10C,10C,10C,r25,r25" COLS="8" OPTS="L2,i1">
          <TTITLE>
            <E T="04">Table L-1—Summary of Information To Be Provided By the Sampler</E>
          </TTITLE>
          <BOXHD>
            <CHED H="1">Information to be provided</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Appendix L section reference</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Availability</CHED>
            <CHED H="2">Anytime<E T="51">1</E>
            </CHED>
            <CHED H="2">End of period<E T="51">2</E>
            </CHED>
            <CHED H="2">Visual display<E T="51">3</E>
            </CHED>
            <CHED H="2">Data output<E T="51">4</E>
            </CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Format</CHED>
            <CHED H="2">Digital reading<E T="51">5</E>
            </CHED>
            <CHED H="2">Units</CHED>
          </BOXHD>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Flow rate, 30-second maximum interval</ENT>
            <ENT>7.4.5.1</ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>*</ENT>
            <ENT>XX.X</ENT>
            <ENT>L/min</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Flow rate, average for the sample period</ENT>
            <ENT>7.4.5.2</ENT>
            <ENT>*</ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>*</ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>XX.X</ENT>
            <ENT>L/min</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Flow rate, CV, for sample period</ENT>
            <ENT>7.4.5.2</ENT>
            <ENT>*</ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>*</ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
              <E T="72">E</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>XX.X</ENT>
            <ENT>%</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Flow rate, 5-min. average out of spec. (FLAG<E T="51">6</E>)</ENT>
            <ENT>7.4.5.2</ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
              <E T="72">E</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>On/Off</ENT>
            <ENT/>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Sample volume, total</ENT>
            <ENT>7.4.5.2</ENT>
            <ENT>*</ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
              <E T="72">E</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>XX.X</ENT>
            <ENT>m<E T="51">3</E>
            </ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Temperature, ambient, 30-second interval</ENT>
            <ENT>7.4.8</ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT>XX.X</ENT>
            <ENT>°C</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Temperature, ambient, min., max., average for the sample period</ENT>
            <ENT>7.4.8</ENT>
            <ENT>*</ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
              <E T="72">E</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>XX.X</ENT>
            <ENT>°C</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Baro pressure, ambient, 30-second interval</ENT>
            <ENT>7.4.9</ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT>XXX</ENT>
            <ENT>mm Hg</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Baro pressure, ambient, min., max., average for the sample period</ENT>
            <ENT>7.4.9</ENT>
            <ENT>*</ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
              <E T="72">E</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>XXX</ENT>
            <ENT>mm Hg</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Filter temperature, 30-second interval</ENT>
            <ENT>7.4.11</ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT>XX.X</ENT>
            <ENT>°C</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Filter temperature differential, 30-second interval, out of spec. (FLAG<E T="51">6</E>)</ENT>
            <ENT>7.4.11</ENT>
            <ENT>*</ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
              <E T="72">E</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>On/Off</ENT>
            <ENT/>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Filter temperature, maximum differential from ambient, date, time of occurrence</ENT>
            <ENT>7.4.11</ENT>
            <ENT>*</ENT>
            <ENT>*</ENT>
            <ENT>*</ENT>
            <ENT>*</ENT>
            <ENT>X.X, YY/MM/DD HH:mm</ENT>
            <ENT>°C, Yr./Mon./Day Hrs. min</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Date and time</ENT>
            <ENT>7.4.12</ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT>YY/MM/DD HH:mm</ENT>
            <ENT>Yr./Mon./Day Hrs. min</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Sample start and stop time settings</ENT>
            <ENT>7.4.12</ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>YY/MM/DD HH:mm</ENT>
            <ENT>Yr./Mon./Day Hrs. min</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Sample period start time</ENT>
            <ENT>7.4.12</ENT>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
              <E T="72">E</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>YYYY/MM/DD HH:mm</ENT>
            <ENT>Yr./Mon./Day Hrs. min</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Elapsed sample time</ENT>
            <ENT>7.4.13</ENT>
            <ENT>*</ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
              <E T="72">E</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>HH:mm</ENT>
            <ENT>Hrs. min</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Elapsed sample time, out of spec. (FLAG<E T="51">6</E>)</ENT>
            <ENT>7.4.13</ENT>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
              <E T="72">E</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>On/Off</ENT>
            <ENT/>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <PRTPAGE P="84"/>
            <ENT I="01">Power interruptions <E T="61">≤</E>1 min., start time of first 10</ENT>
            <ENT>7.4.15.5</ENT>
            <ENT>*</ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>*</ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>1HH:mm, 2HH:mm, etc ...</ENT>
            <ENT>Hrs. min</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">User-entered information, such as sampler and site identification</ENT>
            <ENT>7.4.16</ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>
              <E T="72">z</E>
              <E T="72">E</E>
            </ENT>
            <ENT>As entered</ENT>
            <ENT/>
          </ROW>
          <TNOTE>
            <E T="72">z</E> Provision of this information is required.</TNOTE>
          <TNOTE>*Provision of this information is optional. If information related to the entire sample period is optionally provided prior to the end of the sample period, the value provided should be the value calculated for the portion of the sampler period completed up to the time the information is provided.</TNOTE>
          <TNOTE>
            <E T="72">E</E> Indicates that this information is also required to be provided to the AIRS data bank; see § § 58.26 and 58.35 of this chapter.</TNOTE>
          
          <TNOTE>
            <E T="51">1</E> Information is required to be available to the operator at any time the sampler is operating, whether sampling or not.</TNOTE>
          <TNOTE>
            <E T="51">2</E> Information relates to the entire sampler period and must be provided following the end of the sample period until reset manually by the operator or automatically by the sampler upon the start of a new sample period.</TNOTE>
          <TNOTE>
            <E T="51">3</E> Information shall be available to the operator visually.</TNOTE>
          <TNOTE>
            <E T="51">4</E> Information is to be available as digital data at the sampler's data output port specified in section 7.4.16 of this appendix following the end of the sample period until reset manually by the operator or automatically by the sampler upon the start of a new sample period.</TNOTE>
          <TNOTE>
            <E T="51">5</E> Digital readings, both visual and data output, shall have not less than the number of significant digits and resolution specified.</TNOTE>
          <TNOTE>
            <E T="51">6</E> Flag warnings may be displayed to the operator by a single-flag indicator or each flag may be displayed individually. Only a set (on) flag warning must be indicated; an off (unset) flag may be indicated by the absence of a flag warning. Sampler users should refer to section 10.12 of this appendix regarding the validity of samples for which the sampler provided an associated flag warning.</TNOTE>
        </GPOTABLE>
        <P>8.0 <E T="03">Filter Weighing.</E> See reference 2 in section 13.0 of this appendix, for additional, more detailed guidance.</P>
        <P>8.1 <E T="03">Analytical balance.</E> The analytical balance used to weigh filters must be suitable for weighing the type and size of filters specified, under section 6.0 of this appendix, and have a readability of  <E T="61">±</E>1 <E T="61">m</E>g. The balance shall be calibrated as specified by the manufacturer at installation and recalibrated immediately prior to each weighing session. See reference 2 in section 13.0 of this appendix for additional guidance.</P>
        <P>8.2 <E T="03">Filter conditioning.</E> All sample filters used shall be conditioned immediately before both the pre- and post-sampling weighings as specified below. See reference 2 in section 13.0 of this appendix for additional guidance.</P>
        <P>8.2.1 <E T="03">Mean temperature.</E> 20 - 23 °C.</P>
        <P>8.2.2 <E T="03">Temperature control.</E>
          <E T="61">±</E>2 °C over 24 hours.</P>
        <P>8.2.3 <E T="03">Mean humidity.</E> Generally, 30-40 percent relative humidity; however, where it can be shown that the mean ambient relative humidity during sampling is less than 30 percent, conditioning is permissible at a mean relative humidity within  <E T="61">±</E>5 relative humidity percent of the mean ambient relative humidity during sampling, but not less than 20 percent.</P>
        <P>8.2.4 <E T="03">Humidity control.</E>
          <E T="61">±</E>5 relative humidity percent over 24 hours.</P>
        <P>8.2.5 <E T="03">Conditioning time.</E> Not less than 24 hours.</P>
        <P>8.3 <E T="03">Weighing procedure.</E>
        </P>
        <P>8.3.1 New filters should be placed in the conditioning environment immediately upon arrival and stored there until the pre-sampling weighing. See reference 2 in section 13.0 of this appendix for additional guidance.</P>
        <P>8.3.2 The analytical balance shall be located in the same controlled environment in which the filters are conditioned. The filters shall be weighed immediately following the conditioning period without intermediate or transient exposure to other conditions or environments.</P>

        <P>8.3.3 Filters must be conditioned at the same conditions (humidity within  <E T="61">±</E>5 relative humidity percent) before both the pre- and post-sampling weighings.</P>
        <P>8.3.4 Both the pre- and post-sampling weighings should be carried out on the same analytical balance, using an effective technique to neutralize static charges on the filter, under reference 2 in section 13.0 of this appendix. If possible, both weighings should be carried out by the same analyst.</P>
        <P>8.3.5 The pre-sampling (tare) weighing shall be within 30 days of the sampling period.</P>

        <P>8.3.6 The post-sampling conditioning and weighing shall be completed within 240 hours (10 days) after the end of the sample period, unless the filter sample is maintained at 4 °C or less during the entire time between retrieval from the sampler and the start of the conditioning, in which case the period shall not exceed 30 days. Reference 2 in section 13.0 of this appendix has additional guidance on transport of cooled filters.<PRTPAGE P="85"/>
        </P>
        <P>8.3.7 <E T="03">Filter blanks.</E>
        </P>

        <P>8.3.7.1 New field blank filters shall be weighed along with the pre-sampling (tare) weighing of each lot of PM<E T="52">2.5</E> filters. These blank filters shall be transported to the sampling site, installed in the sampler, retrieved from the sampler without sampling, and reweighed as a quality control check.</P>

        <P>8.3.7.2 New laboratory blank filters shall be weighed along with the pre-sampling (tare) weighing of each set of PM<E T="52">2.5</E> filters. These laboratory blank filters should remain in the laboratory in protective containers during the field sampling and should be reweighed as a quality control check.</P>
        <P>8.3.8 Additional guidance for proper filter weighing and related quality assurance activities is provided in reference 2 in section 13.0 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>9.0 <E T="03">Calibration.</E> Reference 2 in section 13.0 of this appendix contains additional guidance.</P>
        <P>9.1 <E T="03">General requirements.</E>
        </P>
        <P>9.1.1 Multipoint calibration and single-point verification of the sampler's flow rate measurement device must be performed periodically to establish and maintain traceability of subsequent flow measurements to a flow rate standard.</P>

        <P>9.1.2 An authoritative flow rate standard shall be used for calibrating or verifying the sampler's flow rate measurement device with an accuracy of  <E T="61">±</E>2 percent. The flow rate standard shall be a separate, stand-alone device designed to connect to the flow rate measurement adapter, Figure L-30 of this appendix. This flow rate standard must have its own certification and be traceable to a National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) primary standard for volume or flow rate. If adjustments to the sampler's flow rate measurement system calibration are to be made in conjunction with an audit of the sampler's flow measurement system, such adjustments shall be made following the audit. Reference 2 in section 13.0 of this appendix contains additional guidance.</P>
        <P>9.1.3 The sampler's flow rate measurement device shall be re-calibrated after electromechanical maintenance or transport of the sampler.</P>
        <P>9.2 <E T="03">Flow rate calibration/verification procedure.</E>
        </P>
        <P>9.2.1 PM<E T="52">2.5</E> samplers may employ various types of flow control and flow measurement devices. The specific procedure used for calibration or verification of the flow rate measurement device will vary depending on the type of flow rate controller and flow rate measurement employed. Calibration shall be in terms of actual ambient volumetric flow rates (Q<E T="51">a</E>), measured at the sampler's inlet downtube. The generic procedure given here serves to illustrate the general steps involved in the calibration of a PM<E T="52">2.5</E> sampler. The sampler operation/instruction manual required under section 7.4.18 of this appendix and the Quality Assurance Handbook in reference 2 in section 13.0 of this appendix provide more specific and detailed guidance for calibration.</P>

        <P>9.2.2 The flow rate standard used for flow rate calibration shall have its own certification and be traceable to a NIST primary standard for volume or flow rate. A calibration relationship for the flow rate standard, e.g., an equation, curve, or family of curves relating actual flow rate (Q<E T="52">a</E>) to the flow rate indicator reading, shall be established that is accurate to within 2 percent over the expected range of ambient temperatures and pressures at which the flow rate standard may be used. The flow rate standard must be re-calibrated or re-verified at least annually.</P>
        <P>9.2.3 The sampler flow rate measurement device shall be calibrated or verified by removing the sampler inlet and connecting the flow rate standard to the sampler's downtube in accordance with the operation/instruction manual, such that the flow rate standard accurately measures the sampler's flow rate. The sampler operator shall first carry out a sampler leak check and confirm that the sampler passes the leak test and then verify that no leaks exist between the flow rate standard and the sampler.</P>
        <P>9.2.4 The calibration relationship between the flow rate (in actual L/min) indicated by the flow rate standard and by the sampler's flow rate measurement device shall be established or verified in accordance with the sampler operation/instruction manual. Temperature and pressure corrections to the flow rate indicated by the flow rate standard may be required for certain types of flow rate standards. Calibration of the sampler's flow rate measurement device shall consist of at least three separate flow rate measurements (multipoint calibration) evenly spaced within the range of -10 percent to +10 percent of the sampler's operational flow rate, section 7.4.1 of this appendix. Verification of the sampler's flow rate shall consist of one flow rate measurement at the sampler's operational flow rate. The sampler operation/instruction manual and reference 2 in section 13.0 of this appendix provide additional guidance.</P>

        <P>9.2.5 If during a flow rate verification the reading of the sampler's flow rate indicator or measurement device differs by  <E T="61">±</E>2 percent or more from the flow rate measured by the flow rate standard, a new multipoint calibration shall be performed and the flow rate verification must then be repeated.</P>

        <P>9.2.6 Following the calibration or verification, the flow rate standard shall be removed from the sampler and the sampler inlet shall be reinstalled. Then the sampler's normal operating flow rate (in L/min) shall be determined with a clean filter in place. If the flow rate indicated by the sampler differs by  <E T="61">±</E>2 percent or more from the required sampler <PRTPAGE P="86"/>flow rate, the sampler flow rate must be adjusted to the required flow rate, under section 7.4.1 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>9.3 Periodic calibration or verification of the calibration of the sampler's ambient temperature, filter temperature, and barometric pressure measurement systems is also required. Reference 3 of section 13.0 of this appendix contains additional guidance.</P>
        <P>10.0 <E T="03">PM</E>
          <E T="52">2.5</E>
          <E T="03">Measurement Procedure.</E> The detailed procedure for obtaining valid PM<E T="52">2.5</E> measurements with each specific sampler designated as part of a reference method for PM<E T="52">2.5</E> under part 53 of this chapter shall be provided in the sampler-specific operation or instruction manual required by section 7.4.18 of this appendix. Supplemental guidance is provided in section 2.12 of the Quality Assurance Handbook listed in reference 2 in section 13.0 of this appendix. The generic procedure given here serves to illustrate the general steps involved in the PM<E T="52">2.5</E> sample collection and measurement, using a PM<E T="52">2.5</E> reference method sampler.</P>
        <P>10.1 The sampler shall be set up, calibrated, and operated in accordance with the specific, detailed guidance provided in the specific sampler's operation or instruction manual and in accordance with a specific quality assurance program developed and established by the user, based on applicable supplementary guidance provided in reference 2 in section 13.0 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>10.2 Each new sample filter shall be inspected for correct type and size and for pinholes, particles, and other imperfections. Unacceptable filters should be discarded. A unique identification number shall be assigned to each filter, and an information record shall be established for each filter. If the filter identification number is not or cannot be marked directly on the filter, alternative means, such as a number-identified storage container, must be established to maintain positive filter identification.</P>
        <P>10.3 Each filter shall be conditioned in the conditioning environment in accordance with the requirements specified in section 8.2 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>10.4 Following conditioning, each filter shall be weighed in accordance with the requirements specified in section 8.0 of this appendix and the presampling weight recorded with the filter identification number.</P>
        <P>10.5 A numbered and preweighed filter shall be installed in the sampler following the instructions provided in the sampler operation or instruction manual.</P>
        <P>10.6 The sampler shall be checked and prepared for sample collection in accordance with instructions provided in the sampler operation or instruction manual and with the specific quality assurance program established for the sampler by the user.</P>
        <P>10.7 The sampler's timer shall be set to start the sample collection at the beginning of the desired sample period and stop the sample collection 24 hours later.</P>
        <P>10.8 Information related to the sample collection (site location or identification number, sample date, filter identification number, and sampler model and serial number) shall be recorded and, if appropriate, entered into the sampler.</P>
        <P>10.9 The sampler shall be allowed to collect the PM<E T="52">2.5</E> sample during the set 24-hour time period.</P>
        <P>10.10 Within 96 hours of the end of the sample collection period, the filter, while still contained in the filter cassette, shall be carefully removed from the sampler, following the procedure provided in the sampler operation or instruction manual and the quality assurance program, and placed in a protective container. This protective container shall be made of metal and contain no loose material that could be transferred to the filter. The protective container shall hold the filter cassette securely such that the cover shall not come in contact with the filter's surfaces. Reference 2 in section 13.0 of this appendix contains additional information.</P>
        <P>10.11 The total sample volume in actual m<E T="51">3</E> for the sampling period and the elapsed sample time shall be obtained from the sampler and recorded in accordance with the instructions provided in the sampler operation or instruction manual. All sampler warning flag indications and other information required by the local quality assurance program shall also be recorded.</P>
        <P>10.12 All factors related to the validity or representativeness of the sample, such as sampler tampering or malfunctions, unusual meteorological conditions, construction activity, fires or dust storms, etc. shall be recorded as required by the local quality assurance program. The occurrence of a flag warning during a sample period shall not necessarily indicate an invalid sample but rather shall indicate the need for specific review of the QC data by a quality assurance officer to determine sample validity.</P>

        <P>10.13 After retrieval from the sampler, the exposed filter containing the PM<E T="52">2.5</E> sample should be transported to the filter conditioning environment as soon as possible ideally to arrive at the conditioning environment within 24 hours for conditioning and subsequent weighing. During the period between filter retrieval from the sampler and the start of the conditioning, the filter shall be maintained as cool as practical and continuously protected from exposure to temperatures over 25 °C. See section 8.3.6 of this appendix regarding time limits for completing the post-sampling weighing. See reference 2 in section 13.0 of this appendix for additional guidance on transporting filter samplers to the conditioning and weighing laboratory.<PRTPAGE P="87"/>
        </P>
        <P>10.14. The exposed filter containing the PM<E T="52">2.5</E> sample shall be re-conditioned in the conditioning environment in accordance with the requirements specified in section 8.2 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>10.15. The filter shall be reweighed immediately after conditioning in accordance with the requirements specified in section 8.0 of this appendix, and the postsampling weight shall be recorded with the filter identification number.</P>
        <P>10.16 The PM<E T="52">2.5</E> concentration shall be calculated as specified in section 12.0 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>11.0 <E T="03">Sampler Maintenance.</E> The sampler shall be maintained as described by the sampler's manufacturer in the sampler-specific operation or instruction manual required under section 7.4.18 of this appendix and in accordance with the specific quality assurance program developed and established by the user based on applicable supplementary guidance provided in reference 2 in section 13.0 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>12.0 <E T="03">Calculations</E>
        </P>
        <P>12.1 (a) The PM<E T="52">2.5</E> concentration is calculated as:
        </P>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">PM<E T="52">2.5</E> = (W<E T="52">f</E> − W<E T="52">i</E>)/V<E T="52">a</E>
        </FP>
        
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">PM<E T="52">2.5</E> = mass concentration of PM<E T="52">2.5</E>, <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E>;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">W<E T="52">f</E>, W<E T="52">i</E> = final and initial weights, respectively, of the filter used to collect the PM<E T="52">2.5</E> particle sample, <E T="61">m</E>g;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">V<E T="52">a</E> = total air volume sampled in actual volume units, as provided by the sampler, m<E T="51">3</E>.</FP>
        
        <NOTE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Note:</HD>

          <P>Total sample time must be between 1,380 and 1,500 minutes (23 and 25 hrs) for a fully valid PM<E T="52">2.5</E> sample; however, see also section 3.3 of this appendix.</P>
        </NOTE>
        <P>13.0 <E T="03">References.</E>
        </P>
        <P>1. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems, Volume I, Principles. EPA/600/R-94/038a, April 1994. Available from CERI, ORD Publications, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 26 West Martin Luther King Drive, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268.</P>
        <P>2. Copies of section 2.12 of the Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems, Volume II, Ambient Air Specific Methods, EPA/600/R-94/038b, are available from Department E (MD-77B), U.S. EPA, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.</P>
        <P>3. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems, Volume IV: Meteorological Measurements, (Revised Edition) EPA/600/R-94/038d, March, 1995. Available from CERI, ORD Publications, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 26 West Martin Luther King Drive, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268.</P>
        <P>4. Military standard specification (mil. spec.) 8625F, Type II, Class 1 as listed in Department of Defense Index of Specifications and Standards (DODISS), available from DODSSP-Customer Service, Standardization Documents Order Desk, 700 Robbins Avenue, Building 4D, Philadelphia, PA 1911-5094.</P>
        <P>14.0 <E T="03">Figures L-1 through L-30 to Appendix L.</E>
        </P>
        <GPH DEEP="422" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="88"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.022</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="470" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="89"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.023</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="470" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="90"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.024</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="470" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="91"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.025</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="470" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="92"/>
          <GID>ER17FE98.004</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="468" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="93"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.027</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="470" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="94"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.028</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="470" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="95"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.029</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="470" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="96"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.030</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="470" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="97"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.031</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="470" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="98"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.032</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="470" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="99"/>
          <GID>ER17FE98.005</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="470" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="100"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.034</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="460" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="101"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.035</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="470" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="102"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.036</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="469" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="103"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.037</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="470" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="104"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.038</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="470" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="105"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.039</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="470" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="106"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.040</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="470" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="107"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.041</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="470" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="108"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.042</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="463" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="109"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.043</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="469" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="110"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.044</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="470" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="111"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.045</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="470" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="112"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.046</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="470" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="113"/>
          <GID>ER17FE98.006</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="465" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="114"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.048</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="466" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="115"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.049</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="466" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="116"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.050</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="470" SPAN="2">
          <PRTPAGE P="117"/>
          <GID>ER18JY97.051</GID>
        </GPH>
        <PRTPAGE P="118"/>
        <CITA>[62 FR 38714, July 18, 1997]</CITA>
      </APPENDIX>
      <APPENDIX>
        <EAR>Pt. 50, App. M</EAR>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">
          <E T="05">Appendix M to Part 50—Reference Method for the Determination of Particulate Matter as PM</E>
          <E T="52">10</E>
          <E T="05">in the Atmosphere</E>
        </HD>
        <P>1.0 <E T="03">Applicability.</E>
        </P>

        <P>1.1 This method provides for the measurement of the mass concentration of particulate matter with an aerodynamic diameter less than or equal to a nominal 10 micrometers (PM<E T="52">1O</E>) in ambient air over a 24-hour period for purposes of determining attainment and maintenance of the primary and secondary national ambient air quality standards for particulate matter specified in § 50.6 of this chapter. The measurement process is nondestructive, and the PM<E T="52">10</E> sample can be subjected to subsequent physical or chemical analyses. Quality assurance procedures and guidance are provided in part 58, Appendices A and B of this chapter and in references 1 and 2 of section 12.0 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>2.0 <E T="03">Principle.</E>
        </P>

        <P>2.1 An air sampler draws ambient air at a constant flow rate into a specially shaped inlet where the suspended particulate matter is inertially separated into one or more size fractions within the PM<E T="52">10</E> size range. Each size fraction in the PM<E T="52">1O </E>size range is then collected on a separate filter over the specified sampling period. The particle size discrimination characteristics (sampling effectiveness and 50 percent cutpoint) of the sampler inlet are prescribed as performance specifications in part 53 of this chapter.</P>

        <P>2.2 Each filter is weighed (after moisture equilibration) before and after use to determine the net weight (mass) gain due to collected PM<E T="52">10</E>. The total volume of air sampled, measured at the actual ambient temperature and pressure, is determined from the measured flow rate and the sampling time. The mass concentration of PM<E T="52">10</E> in the ambient air is computed as the total mass of collected particles in the PM<E T="52">10</E> size range divided by the volume of air sampled, and is expressed in micrograms per actual cubic meter (<E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E>).</P>
        <P>2.3 A method based on this principle will be considered a reference method only if the associated sampler meets the requirements specified in this appendix and the requirements in part 53 of this chapter, and the method has been designated as a reference method in accordance with part 53 of this chapter.</P>
        <P>3.0 <E T="03">Range.</E>
        </P>

        <P>3.1 The lower limit of the mass concentration range is determined by the repeatability of filter tare weights, assuming the nominal air sample volume for the sampler. For samplers having an automatic filter-changing mechanism, there may be no upper limit. For samplers that do not have an automatic filter-changing mechanism, the upper limit is determined by the filter mass loading beyond which the sampler no longer maintains the operating flow rate within specified limits due to increased pressure drop across the loaded filter. This upper limit cannot be specified precisely because it is a complex function of the ambient particle size distribution and type, humidity, filter type, and perhaps other factors. Nevertheless, all samplers should be capable of measuring 24-hour PM<E T="52">10</E> mass concentrations of at least 300 μg/m<SU>3</SU> while maintaining the operating flow rate within the specified limits.</P>
        <P>4.0 <E T="03">Precision.</E>
        </P>
        <P>4.1 The precision of PM<E T="52">10</E> samplers must be 5 μg/m<SU>3</SU> for PM<E T="52">10</E> concentrations below 80 μg/m<SU>3</SU> and 7 percent for PM<E T="52">10</E> concentrations above 80 μg/m<SU>3</SU>, as required by part 53 of this chapter, which prescribes a test procedure that determines the variation in the PM<E T="52">10</E> concentration measurements of identical samplers under typical sampling conditions. Continual assessment of precision via collocated samplers is required by part 58 of this chapter for PM<E T="52">10</E> samplers used in certain monitoring networks.</P>
        <P>5.0 <E T="03">Accuracy.</E>
        </P>

        <P>5.1 Because the size of the particles making up ambient particulate matter varies over a wide range and the concentration of particles varies with particle size, it is difficult to define the absolute accuracy of PM<E T="52">10</E> samplers. Part 53 of this chapter provides a specification for the sampling effectiveness of PM<E T="52">10</E> samplers. This specification requires that the expected mass concentration calculated for a candidate PM<E T="52">10</E> sampler, when sampling a specified particle size distribution, be within <E T="61">±</E>10 percent of that calculated for an ideal sampler whose sampling effectiveness is explicitly specified. Also, the particle size for 50 percent sampling effectiveness is required to be 10<E T="61">±</E>0.5 micrometers. Other specifications related to accuracy apply to flow measurement and calibration, filter media, analytical (weighing) procedures, and artifact. The flow rate accuracy of PM<E T="52">10</E> samplers used in certain monitoring networks is required by part 58 of this chapter to be assessed periodically via flow rate audits.</P>
        <P>6.0 <E T="03">Potential Sources of Error.</E>
        </P>
        <P>6.1 <E T="03">Volatile Particles.</E> Volatile particles collected on filters are often lost during shipment and/or storage of the filters prior to the post-sampling weighing <SU>3</SU>. Although shipment or storage of loaded filters is sometimes unavoidable, filters should be reweighed as soon as practical to minimize these losses.</P>
        <P>6.2 <E T="03">Artifacts.</E> Positive errors in PM<E T="52">10</E> concentration measurements may result from retention of gaseous species on filters <E T="51">4, 5</E>. Such errors include the retention of sulfur dioxide and nitric acid. Retention of sulfur dioxide on filters, followed by oxidation to <PRTPAGE P="119"/>sulfate, is referred to as artifact sulfate formation, a phenomenon which increases with increasing filter alkalinity <SU>6</SU>. Little or no artifact sulfate formation should occur using filters that meet the alkalinity specification in section 7.2.4 of this appendix, Artifact nitrate formation, resulting primarily from retention of nitric acid, occurs to varying degrees on many filter types, including glass fiber, cellulose ester, and many quartz fiber filters <E T="51">5, 7, 8, 9, 10</E>. Loss of true atmospheric particulate nitrate during or following sampling may also occur due to dissociation or chemical reaction. This phenomenon has been observed on Teflon<E T="51">®</E>filters <SU>8</SU> and inferred for quartz fiber filters <E T="51">11, 12</E>. The magnitude of nitrate artifact errors in PM<E T="52">10</E> mass concentration measurements will vary with location and ambient temperature; however, for most sampling locations, these errors are expected to be small.</P>
        <P>6.3 <E T="03">Humidity.</E> The effects of ambient humidity on the sample are unavoidable. The filter equilibration procedure in section 9.0 of this appendix is designed to minimize the effects of moisture on the filter medium.</P>
        <P>6.4 <E T="03">Filter Handling.</E> Careful handling of filters between presampling and postsampling weighings is necessary to avoid errors due to damaged filters or loss of collected particles from the filters. Use of a filter cartridge or cassette may reduce the magnitude of these errors. Filters must also meet the integrity specification in section 7.2.3 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>6.5 <E T="03">Flow Rate Variation.</E> Variations in the sampler's operating flow rate may alter the particle size discrimination characteristics of the sampler inlet. The magnitude of this error will depend on the sensitivity of the inlet to variations in flow rate and on the particle distribution in the atmosphere during the sampling period. The use of a flow control device, under section 7.1.3 of this appendix, is required to minimize this error.</P>
        <P>6.6 <E T="03">Air Volume Determination.</E> Errors in the air volume determination may result from errors in the flow rate and/or sampling time measurements. The flow control device serves to minimize errors in the flow rate determination, and an elapsed time meter, under section 7.1.5 of this appendix, is required to minimize the error in the sampling time measurement.</P>
        <P>7.0 <E T="03">Apparatus.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.1 PM<E T="52">10</E> Sampler.</P>
        <P>7.1.1 The sampler shall be designed to:</P>
        <P>(a) Draw the air sample into the sampler inlet and through the particle collection filter at a uniform face velocity.</P>
        <P>(b) Hold and seal the filter in a horizontal position so that sample air is drawn downward through the filter.</P>
        <P>(c) Allow the filter to be installed and removed conveniently.</P>
        <P>(d) Protect the filter and sampler from precipitation and prevent insects and other debris from being sampled.</P>
        <P>(e) Minimize air leaks that would cause error in the measurement of the air volume passing through the filter.</P>
        <P>(f) Discharge exhaust air at a sufficient distance from the sampler inlet to minimize the sampling of exhaust air.</P>
        <P>(g) Minimize the collection of dust from the supporting surface.</P>
        <P>7.1.2 The sampler shall have a sample air inlet system that, when operated within a specified flow rate range, provides particle size discrimination characteristics meeting all of the applicable performance specifications prescribed in part 53 of this chapter. The sampler inlet shall show no significant wind direction dependence. The latter requirement can generally be satisfied by an inlet shape that is circularly symmetrical about a vertical axis.</P>
        <P>7.1.3 The sampler shall have a flow control device capable of maintaining the sampler's operating flow rate within the flow rate limits specified for the sampler inlet over normal variations in line voltage and filter pressure drop.</P>

        <P>7.1.4 The sampler shall provide a means to measure the total flow rate during the sampling period. A continuous flow recorder is recommended but not required. The flow measurement device shall be accurate to <E T="61">±</E>2 percent.</P>

        <P>7.1.5 A timing/control device capable of starting and stopping the sampler shall be used to obtain a sample collection period of 24 <E T="61">±</E>1 hr (1,440 <E T="61">±</E>60 min). An elapsed time meter, accurate to within <E T="61">±</E>15 minutes, shall be used to measure sampling time. This meter is optional for samplers with continuous flow recorders if the sampling time measurement obtained by means of the recorder meets the <E T="61">±</E>15 minute accuracy specification.</P>
        <P>7.1.6 The sampler shall have an associated operation or instruction manual as required by part 53 of this chapter which includes detailed instructions on the calibration, operation, and maintenance of the sampler.</P>
        <P>7.2 <E T="03">Filters.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.2.1 <E T="03">Filter Medium.</E> No commercially available filter medium is ideal in all respects for all samplers. The user's goals in sampling determine the relative importance of various filter characteristics, e.g., cost, ease of handling, physical and chemical characteristics, etc., and, consequently, determine the choice among acceptable filters. Furthermore, certain types of filters may not be suitable for use with some samplers, particularly under heavy loading conditions (high mass concentrations), because of high or rapid increase in the filter flow resistance that would exceed the capability of the sampler's flow control device. However, samplers equipped with automatic filter-changing mechanisms may allow use of these types of filters. The specifications given below are <PRTPAGE P="120"/>minimum requirements to ensure acceptability of the filter medium for measurement of PM<E T="52">10</E> mass concentrations. Other filter evaluation criteria should be considered to meet individual sampling and analysis objectives.</P>
        <P>7.2.2 <E T="03">Collection Efficiency.</E>
          <E T="61">ï¿½</E>99 percent, as measured by the DOP test (ASTM-2986) with 0.3 μm particles at the sampler's operating face velocity.</P>
        <P>7.2.3 <E T="03">Integrity.</E>
          <E T="61">±</E>5 μg/m<SU>3</SU> (assuming sampler's nominal 24-hour air sample volume). Integrity is measured as the PM<E T="52">10</E> concentration equivalent corresponding to the average difference between the initial and the final weights of a random sample of test filters that are weighed and handled under actual or simulated sampling conditions, but have no air sample passed through them, i.e., filter blanks. As a minimum, the test procedure must include initial equilibration and weighing, installation on an inoperative sampler, removal from the sampler, and final equilibration and weighing.</P>
        <P>7.2.4 <E T="03">Alkalinity.</E> &lt;25 microequivalents/gram of filter, as measured by the procedure given in reference 13 of section 12.0 of this appendix following at least two months storage in a clean environment (free from contamination by acidic gases) at room temperature and humidity.</P>
        <P>7.3 <E T="03">Flow Rate Transfer Standard.</E> The flow rate transfer standard must be suitable for the sampler's operating flow rate and must be calibrated against a primary flow or volume standard that is traceable to the National Institute of Standard and Technology (NIST). The flow rate transfer standard must be capable of measuring the sampler's operating flow rate with an accuracy of <E T="61">±</E>2 percent.</P>
        <P>7.4 <E T="03">Filter Conditioning Environment.</E>
        </P>
        <P>7.4.1 <E T="03">Temperature range.</E> 15 to 30 C.</P>
        <P>7.4.2 <E T="03">Temperature control.</E>
          <E T="61">±</E>3 C.</P>
        <P>7.4.3 <E T="03">Humidity range.</E> 20% to 45% RH.</P>
        <P>7.4.4 <E T="03">Humidity control.</E>
          <E T="61">±</E>5% RH.</P>
        <P>7.5 <E T="03">Analytical Balance.</E> The analytical balance must be suitable for weighing the type and size of filters required by the sampler. The range and sensitivity required will depend on the filter tare weights and mass loadings. Typically, an analytical balance with a sensitivity of 0.1 mg is required for high volume samplers (flow rates &gt;0.5 m<SU>3</SU>/min). Lower volume samplers (flow rates &lt;0.5 m<SU>3</SU>/min) will require a more sensitive balance.</P>
        <P>8.0 <E T="03">Calibration.</E>
        </P>
        <P>8.1 <E T="03">General Requirements.</E>
        </P>
        <P>8.1.1 Calibration of the sampler's flow measurement device is required to establish traceability of subsequent flow measurements to a primary standard. A flow rate transfer standard calibrated against a primary flow or volume standard shall be used to calibrate or verify the accuracy of the sampler's flow measurement device.</P>

        <P>8.1.2 Particle size discrimination by inertial separation requires that specific air velocities be maintained in the sampler's air inlet system.  Therefore, the flow rate through the sampler's inlet must be maintained throughout the sampling period within the design flow rate range specified by the manufacturer. Design flow rates are specified as actual volumetric flow rates, measured at existing conditions of temperature and pressure (Q<E T="52">a</E>).</P>
        <P>8.2 <E T="03">Flow Rate Calibration Procedure.</E>
        </P>
        <P>8.2.1 PM<E T="52">10</E> samplers employ various types of flow control and flow measurement devices. The specific procedure used for flow rate calibration or verification will vary depending on the type of flow controller and flow rate indicator employed. Calibration is in terms of actual volumetric flow rates (Q<E T="52">a</E>) to meet the requirements of section 8.1 of this appendix. The general procedure given here serves to illustrate the steps involved in the calibration. Consult the sampler manufacturer's instruction manual and reference 2 of section 12.0 of this appendix for specific guidance on calibration. Reference 14 of section 12.0 of this appendix provides additional information on various other measures of flow rate and their interrelationships.</P>
        <P>8.2.2 Calibrate the flow rate transfer standard against a primary flow or volume standard traceable to NIST. Establish a calibration relationship, e.g., an equation or family of curves, such that traceability to the primary standard is accurate to within 2 percent over the expected range of ambient conditions, i.e., temperatures and pressures, under which the transfer standard will be used. Recalibrate the transfer standard periodically.</P>
        <P>8.2.3 Following the sampler manufacturer's instruction manual, remove the sampler inlet and connect the flow rate transfer standard to the sampler such that the transfer standard accurately measures the sampler's flow rate. Make sure there are no leaks between the transfer standard and the sampler.</P>

        <P>8.2.4 Choose a minimum of three flow rates (actual m<SU>3</SU>/min), spaced over the acceptable flow rate range specified for the inlet, under section 7.1.2 of the appendix, that can be obtained by suitable adjustment of the sampler flow rate. In accordance with the sampler manufacturer's instruction manual, obtain or verify the calibration relationship between the flow rate (actual m<SU>3</SU>/min) as indicated by the transfer standard and the sampler's flow indicator response. Record the ambient temperature and barometric pressure. Temperature and pressure corrections to subsequent flow indicator readings may be required for certain types of flow measurement devices. When such corrections are necessary, correction on an individual or daily basis is preferable. However, seasonal average temperature and average barometric <PRTPAGE P="121"/>pressure for the sampling site may be incorporated into the sampler calibration to avoid daily corrections. Consult the sampler manufacturer's instruction manual and reference 2 in section 12.0 of this appendix for additional guidance.</P>
        <P>8.2.5 Following calibration, verify that the sampler is operating at its design flow rate (actual m<SU>3</SU>/min) with a clean filter in place.</P>
        <P>8.2.6 Replace the sampler inlet.</P>
        <P>9.0 <E T="03">Procedure.</E>
        </P>

        <P>9.1 The sampler shall be operated in accordance with the specific guidance provided in the sampler manufacturer's instruction manual and in reference 2 in section 12.0 of this appendix. The general procedure given here assumes that the sampler's flow rate calibration is based on flow rates at ambient conditions (Q<E T="52">a</E>) and serves to illustrate the steps involved in the operation of a PM<E T="52">10</E> sampler.</P>
        <P>9.2 Inspect each filter for pinholes, particles, and other imperfections. Establish a filter information record and assign an identification number to each filter.</P>
        <P>9.3 Equilibrate each filter in the conditioning environment (see 7.4) for at least 24 hours.</P>
        <P>9.4 Following equilibration, weigh each filter and record the presampling weight with the filter identification number.</P>
        <P>9.5 Install a preweighed filter in the sampler following the instructions provided in the sampler manufacturer's instruction manual.</P>
        <P>9.6  (a) Turn on the sampler and allow it to establish run-temperature conditions. Record the flow indicator reading and, if needed, the ambient temperature and barometric pressure. Determine the sampler flow rate (actual m<SU>3</SU>/min) in accordance with the instructions provided in the sampler manufacturer's instruction manual.</P>
        <P>(b) Note: No onsite temperature or pressure measurements are necessary if the sampler's flow indicator does not require temperature or pressure corrections or if seasonal average temperature and average barometric pressure for the sampling site are incorporated into the sampler calibration, under section 8.2.4 of this appendix. If individual or daily temperature and pressure corrections are required, ambient temperature and barometric pressure can be obtained by on-site measurements or from a nearby weather station. Barometric pressure readings obtained from airports must be station pressure, not corrected to sea level, and may need to be corrected for differences in elevation between the sampling site and the airport.</P>
        <P>9.7 If the flow rate is outside the acceptable range specified by the manufacturer, check for leaks, and if necessary, adjust the flow rate to the specified setpoint. Stop the sampler.</P>
        <P>9.8 Set the timer to start and stop the sampler at appropriate times. Set the elapsed time meter to zero or record the initial meter reading.</P>
        <P>9.9 Record the sample information (site location or identification number, sample date, filter identification number, and sampler model and serial number).</P>
        <P>9.10 Sample for 24<E T="61">±</E>1 hours.</P>
        <P>9.11 Determine and record the average flow rate (Q<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">a</E>) in actual m<SU>3</SU>/min for the sampling period in accordance with the instructions provided in the sampler manufacturer's instruction manual. Record the elapsed time meter final reading and, if needed, the average ambient temperature and barometric pressure for the sampling period, in note following section 9.6 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>9.12 Carefully remove the filter from the sampler, following the sampler manufacturer's instruction manual. Touch only the outer edges of the filter.</P>
        <P>9.13 Place the filter in a protective holder or container, e.g., petri dish, glassine envelope, or manila folder.</P>
        <P>9.14 Record any factors such as meteorological conditions, construction activity, fires or dust storms, etc., that might be pertinent to the measurement on the filter information record.</P>
        <P>9.15 Transport the exposed sample filter to the filter conditioning environment as soon as possible for equilibration and subsequent weighing.</P>
        <P>9.16 Equilibrate the exposed filter in the conditioning environment for at least 24 hours under the same temperature and humidity conditions used for presampling filter equilibration (see section 9.3 of this appendix).</P>
        <P>9.17 Immediately after equilibration, reweigh the filter and record the postsampling weight with the filter identification number.</P>
        <P>10.0 <E T="03">Sampler Maintenance.</E>
        </P>
        <P>10.1 The PM<E T="52">10</E> sampler shall be maintained in strict accordance with the maintenance procedures specified in the sampler manufacturer's instruction manual.</P>
        <P>11.0 <E T="03">Calculations.</E>
        </P>
        <P>11.1 Calculate the total volume of air sampled as:
        </P>
        <FP>V = Q<E T="52">a</E>t</FP>
        
        <FP>where:</FP>
        

        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">V =  total air sampled, at ambient temperature and pressure,m<E T="51">3</E>;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Q<E T="52">a</E> = average sample flow rate at ambient temperature and pressure, m<E T="51">3</E>/min; and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">t = sampling time, min.</FP>
        <P>11.2 (a) Calculate the PM<E T="52">10</E> concentration as:
        </P>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">PM<E T="52">10</E> = (W<E T="52">f</E>−W<E T="52">i</E>)×10<SU>6</SU>/V</FP>
        
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">PM<E T="52">10</E> = mass concentration of PM<E T="52">10</E>, μg/m<SU>3</SU>;<PRTPAGE P="122"/>
        </FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">W<E T="52">f</E>, W<E T="52">i</E> = final and initial weights of filter collecting PM<E T="52">1O </E>particles, g; and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">10<SU>6</SU> = conversion of g to μg.</FP>
        
        <P>(b) Note: If more than one size fraction in the PM<E T="52">10</E> size range is collected by the sampler, the sum of the net weight gain by each collection filter [<E T="61">S</E>(W<E T="52">f</E>−W<E T="52">i</E>)] is used to calculate the PM<E T="52">10</E> mass concentration.</P>
        <P>12.0 <E T="03">References.</E>
        </P>
        <P>1. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems, Volume I, Principles. EPA-600/9-76-005, March 1976. Available from CERI, ORD Publications, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 26 West St. Clair Street, Cincinnati, OH 45268.</P>
        <P>2. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems, Volume II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a, May 1977. Available from CERI, ORD Publications, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 26 West St. Clair Street, Cincinnati, OH 45268.</P>
        <P>3. Clement, R.E., and F.W. Karasek. Sample Composition Changes in Sampling and Analysis of Organic Compounds in Aerosols. Int. J. Environ. Analyt. Chem., 7:109, 1979.</P>
        <P>4. Lee, R.E., Jr., and J. Wagman. A Sampling Anomaly in the Determination of Atmospheric Sulfate Concentration. Amer. Ind. Hyg. Assoc. J., 27:266, 1966.</P>
        <P>5. Appel, B.R., S.M. Wall, Y. Tokiwa, and M. Haik. Interference Effects in Sampling Particulate Nitrate in Ambient Air. Atmos. Environ., 13:319, 1979.</P>
        <P>6. Coutant, R.W. Effect of Environmental Variables on Collection of Atmospheric Sulfate. Environ. Sci. Technol., 11:873, 1977.Spicer, C.W., and P. Schumacher. Interference in Sampling Atmospheric Particulate Nitrate. Atmos. Environ., 11:873, 1977.</P>
        <P>8. Appel, B.R., Y. Tokiwa, and M. Haik. Sampling of Nitrates in Ambient Air. Atmos. Environ., 15:283, 1981.</P>
        <P>9. Spicer, C.W., and P.M. Schumacher. Particulate Nitrate: Laboratory and Field Studies of Major Sampling Interferences. Atmos. Environ., 13:543, 1979.</P>
        <P>10. Appel, B.R. Letter to Larry Purdue, U.S. EPA, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory. March 18, 1982, Docket No. A-82-37, II-I-1.</P>
        <P>11. Pierson, W.R., W.W. Brachaczek, T.J. Korniski, T.J. Truex, and J.W. Butler. Artifact Formation of Sulfate, Nitrate, and Hydrogen Ion on Backup Filters: Allegheny Mountain Experiment. J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc., 30:30, 1980.</P>
        <P>12. Dunwoody, C.L. Rapid Nitrate Loss From PM<E T="52">10</E> Filters. J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc., 36:817, 1986.</P>
        <P>13. Harrell, R.M. Measuring the Alkalinity of Hi-Vol Air Filters. EMSL/RTP-SOP-QAD-534, October 1985. Available from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, EMSL/QAD, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.</P>
        <P>14. Smith, F., P.S. Wohlschlegel, R.S.C. Rogers, and D.J. Mulligan. Investigation of Flow Rate Calibration Procedures Associated With the High Volume Method for Determination of Suspended Particulates. EPA-600/4-78-047, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711, 1978.</P>
        <CITA>[62 FR 38753, July 18, 1997]</CITA>
      </APPENDIX>
      <APPENDIX>
        <EAR>Pt. 50, App. N</EAR>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">
          <E T="05">Appendix N to Part 50—Interpretation of the National Ambient Air Quality Standards for Particulate Matter</E>
        </HD>
        <P>1.0 <E T="03">General.</E>
        </P>

        <P>(a) This appendix explains the data handling conventions and computations necessary for determining when the annual and 24-hour primary and secondary national ambient air quality standards for PM specified in § 50.7 of this chapter are met. Particulate matter is measured in the ambient air as PM<E T="52">10</E> and PM<E T="52">2.5</E> (particles with an aerodynamic diameter less than or equal to a nominal 10 and 2.5 micrometers, respectively) by a reference method based on appendix M of this part for PM<E T="52">10</E> and on appendix L of this part for PM<E T="52">2.5</E>, as applicable, and designated in accordance with part 53 of this chapter, or by an equivalent method designated in accordance with part 53 of this chapter. Data handling and computation procedures to be used in making comparisons between reported PM<E T="52">10</E> and PM<E T="52">2.5</E> concentrations and the levels of the PM standards are specified in the following sections.</P>
        <P>(b) Data resulting from uncontrollable or natural events, for example structural fires or high winds, may require special consideration. In some cases, it may be appropriate to exclude these data because they could result in inappropriate values to compare with the levels of the PM standards. In other cases, it may be more appropriate to retain the data for comparison with the level of the PM standards and then allow the EPA to formulate the appropriate regulatory response. Whether to exclude, retain, or make adjustments to the data affected by uncontrollable or natural events is subject to the approval of the appropriate Regional Administrator.</P>
        <P>(c) The terms used in this appendix are defined as follows:</P>
        <P>
          <E T="03">Average</E> and <E T="03">mean</E> refer to an arithmetic mean.</P>
        <P>
          <E T="03">Daily value</E> for PM refers to the 24-hour average concentration of PM calculated or measured from midnight to midnight (local time) for PM<E T="52">10</E> or PM<E T="52">2.5</E>.</P>
        <P>
          <E T="03">Designated monitors</E> are those monitoring sites designated in a State PM Monitoring Network Description for spatial averaging in areas opting for spatial averaging in accordance with part 58 of this chapter.<PRTPAGE P="123"/>
        </P>
        <P>98<E T="51">th</E>
          <E T="03">percentile</E> (used for PM<E T="52">2.5</E>) means the daily value out of a year of monitoring data below which 98 percent of all values in the group fall.</P>
        <P>99<E T="51">th</E>
          <E T="03">percentile</E> (used for PM<E T="52">10</E>) means the daily value out of a year of monitoring data below which 99 percent of all values in the group fall.</P>
        <P>
          <E T="03">Year</E> refers to a calendar year.</P>
        <P>(d) Sections 2.1 and 2.5 of this appendix contain data handling instructions for the option of using a spatially averaged network of monitors for the annual standard. If spatial averaging is not considered for an area, then the spatial average is equivalent to the annual average of a single site and is treated accordingly in subsequent calculations. For example, paragraph (a)(3) of section 2.1 of this appendix could be eliminated since the spatial average would be equivalent to the annual average.</P>
        <P>2.0 <E T="03">Comparisons with the PM</E>
          <E T="52">2.5</E>
          <E T="03">Standards.</E>
        </P>
        <P>2.1 <E T="03">Annual PM</E>
          <E T="52">2.5</E>
          <E T="03">Standard.</E>
        </P>
        <P>(a) The annual PM<E T="52">2.5</E> standard is met when the 3-year average of the spatially averaged annual means is less than or equal to 15.0 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E>. The 3-year average of the spatially averaged annual means is determined by averaging quarterly means at each monitor to obtain the annual mean PM<E T="52">2.5</E> concentrations at each monitor, then averaging across all designated monitors, and finally averaging for 3 consecutive years. The steps can be summarized as follows:</P>
        <P>(1) Average 24-hour measurements to obtain quarterly means at each monitor.</P>
        <P>(2) Average quarterly means to obtain annual means at each monitor.</P>
        <P>(3) Average across designated monitoring sites to obtain an annual spatial mean for an area (this can be one site in which case the spatial mean is equal to the annual mean).</P>
        <P>(4) Average 3 years of annual spatial means to obtain a 3-year average of spatially averaged annual means.</P>

        <P>(b) In the case of spatial averaging, 3 years of spatial averages are required to demonstrate that the standard has been met. Designated sites with less than 3 years of data shall be included in spatial averages for those years that data completeness requirements are met. For the annual PM<E T="52">2.5</E> standard, a year meets data completeness requirements when at least 75 percent of the scheduled sampling days for each quarter have valid data. However, years with high concentrations and more than a minimal amount of data (at least 11 samples in each quarter) shall not be ignored just because they are comprised of quarters with less than complete data. Thus, in computing annual spatially averaged means, years containing quarters with at least 11 samples but less than 75 percent data completeness shall be included in the computation if the resulting spatially averaged annual mean concentration (rounded according to the conventions of section 2.3 of this appendix) is greater than the level of the standard.</P>
        <P>(c) Situations may arise in which there are compelling reasons to retain years containing quarters which do not meet the data completeness requirement of 75 percent or the minimum number of 11 samples. The use of less than complete data is subject to the approval of the appropriate Regional Administrator.</P>

        <P>(d) The equations for calculating the 3-year average annual mean of the PM<E T="52">2.5</E> standard are given in section 2.5 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>2.2 <E T="03">24-Hour PM</E>
          <E T="52">2.5</E>
          <E T="03">Standard.</E>
        </P>
        <P>(a) The 24-hour PM<E T="52">2.5</E> standard is met when the 3-year average of the 98<E T="51">th</E> percentile values at each monitoring site is less than or equal to 65 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E>. This comparison shall be based on 3 consecutive, complete years of air quality data. A year meets data completeness requirements when at least 75 percent of the scheduled sampling days for each quarter have valid data. However, years with high concentrations shall not be ignored just because they are comprised of quarters with less than complete data. Thus, in computing the 3-year average 98<E T="51">th</E> percentile value, years containing quarters with less than 75 percent data completeness shall be included in the computation if the annual 98<E T="51">th</E> percentile value (rounded according to the conventions of section 2.3 of this appendix) is greater than the level of the standard.</P>
        <P>(b) Situations may arise in which there are compelling reasons to retain years containing quarters which do not meet the data completeness requirement. The use of less than complete data is subject to the approval of the appropriate Regional Administrator.</P>

        <P>(c) The equations for calculating the 3-year average of the annual 98<E T="51">th</E> percentile values is given in section 2.6 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>2.3 <E T="03">Rounding Conventions.</E> For the purposes of comparing calculated values to the applicable level of the standard, it is necessary to round the final results of the calculations described in sections 2.5 and 2.6 of this appendix. For the annual PM<E T="52">2.5</E> standard, the 3-year average of the spatially averaged annual means shall be rounded to the nearest 0.1 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E> (decimals 0.05 and greater are rounded up to the next 0.1, and any decimal lower than 0.05 is rounded down to the nearest 0.1). For the 24-hour PM<E T="52">2.5</E> standard, the 3-year average of the annual 98<E T="51">th</E> percentile values shall be rounded to the nearest 1 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E> (decimals 0.5 and greater are rounded up to nearest whole number, and any decimal lower than 0.5 is rounded down to the nearest whole number).</P>
        <P>2.4 <E T="03">Monitoring Considerations.</E>
        </P>

        <P>(a) Section 58.13 of this chapter specifies the required minimum frequency of sampling <PRTPAGE P="124"/>for PM<E T="52">2.5</E>. Exceptions to the specified sampling frequencies, such as a reduced frequency during a season of expected low concentrations, are subject to the approval of the appropriate Regional Administrator. Section 58.14 of 40 CFR part 58 and section 2.8 of appendix D of 40 CFR part 58, specify which monitors are eligible for making comparisons with the PM standards. In determining a spatial mean using two or more monitoring sites operating in a given year, the annual mean for an individual site may be included in the spatial mean if and only if the mean for that site meets the criterion specified in § 2.8 of appendix D of 40 CFR part 58. In the event data from an otherwise eligible site is excluded from being averaged with data from other sites on the basis of this criterion, then the 3-year mean from that site shall be compared directly to the annual standard.</P>
        <P>(b) For the annual PM<E T="52">2.5</E> standard, when designated monitors are located at the same site and are reporting PM<E T="52">2.5</E> values for the same time periods, and when spatial averaging has been chosen, their concentrations shall be averaged before an area-wide spatial average is calculated. Such monitors will then be considered as one monitor.</P>
        <P>2.5 <E T="03">Equations for the Annual PM</E>
          <E T="52">2.5</E>
          <E T="03">Standard.</E>
        </P>
        <P>(a) An annual mean value for PM<E T="52">2.5</E> is determined by first averaging the daily values of a calendar quarter:</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Equation 1</HD>
        <GPH DEEP="32" SPAN="1">
          <GID>ER18JY97.000</GID>
        </GPH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">q,y,s</E> = the mean for quarter q of year y for site s;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">n<E T="52">q</E> = the number of monitored values in the quarter; and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<E T="52">i,q,y,s</E> = the i<E T="51">th</E> value in quarter q for year y for site s.</FP>
        
        <P>(b) The following equation is then to be used for calculation of the annual mean:</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Equation 2</HD>
        <GPH DEEP="31" SPAN="1">
          <GID>ER18JY97.001</GID>
        </GPH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">y,s</E> = the annual mean concentration for year y (y = 1, 2, or 3) and for site s; and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">q,y,s</E> = the mean for quarter q of year y for site s.</FP>
        

        <P>(c)(1) The spatially averaged annual mean for year y is computed by first calculating the annual mean for each site designated to be included in a spatial average, x<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">y,s</E>, and then computing the average of these values across sites:</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Equation 3</HD>
        <GPH DEEP="31" SPAN="1">
          <GID>ER18JY97.002</GID>
        </GPH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">y</E> = the spatially averaged mean for year y;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">y,s</E> = the annual mean for year y and site s; and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">n<E T="52">s</E> = the number of sites designated to be averaged.</FP>
        
        <P>(2) In the event that an area designated for spatial averaging has two or more sites at the same location producing data for the same time periods, the sites are averaged together before using Equation 3 by:</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Equation 4</HD>
        <GPH DEEP="30" SPAN="1">
          <GID>ER18JY97.003</GID>
        </GPH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">y,s*</E> = the annual mean for year y for the sites at the same location (which will now be considered one site);</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">n<E T="52">c</E> = the number of sites at the same location designated to be included in the spatial average; and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">y,s</E> = the annual mean for year y and site s.</FP>
        
        <P>(d) The 3-year average of the spatially averaged annual means is calculated by using the following equation:</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Equation 5</HD>
        <GPH DEEP="31" SPAN="1">
          <GID>ER18JY97.004</GID>
        </GPH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<AC T="8"/> = the 3-year average of the spatially averaged annual means; and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">y</E> = the spatially averaged annual mean for year y.</FP>
        

        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Example 1—Area Designated for Spatial Averaging That Meets the Primary Annual PM<E T="52">2.5</E> Standard.</HD>

        <P>a. In an area designated for spatial averaging, four designated monitors recorded data in at least 1 year of a particular 3-year period. Using Equations 1 and 2, the annual means for PM<E T="52">2.5</E> at each site are calculated for each year. The following table can be created from the results. Data completeness percentages for the quarter with the fewest number of samples are also shown.<PRTPAGE P="125"/>
        </P>
        <GPOTABLE CDEF="s25,r35,9.1,9.1,9.1,9.1,8.2" COLS="7" OPTS="L2,tp8,i1">
          <TTITLE>
            <E T="04">Table 1—Results from Equations 1 and 2</E>
          </TTITLE>
          <BOXHD>
            <CHED H="1"/>
            <CHED H="1"/>
            <CHED H="1">Site <E T="61">#</E>1</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Site <E T="61">#</E>2</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Site <E T="61">#</E>3</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Site <E T="61">#</E>4</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Spatial mean</CHED>
          </BOXHD>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Year 1</ENT>
            <ENT>Annual mean (μg/m<SU>3</SU>)</ENT>
            <ENT>12.7</ENT>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT>12.7</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="22"/>
            <ENT>% data completeness</ENT>
            <ENT>80</ENT>
            <ENT>0</ENT>
            <ENT>0</ENT>
            <ENT>0</ENT>
            <ENT/>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Year 2</ENT>
            <ENT>Annual mean (μg/m<SU>3</SU>)</ENT>
            <ENT>12.6</ENT>
            <ENT>17.5</ENT>
            <ENT>15.2</ENT>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT>15.05</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="22"/>
            <ENT>% data completeness</ENT>
            <ENT>90</ENT>
            <ENT>63</ENT>
            <ENT>38</ENT>
            <ENT>0</ENT>
            <ENT/>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Year 3</ENT>
            <ENT>Annual mean (μg/m<SU>3</SU>)</ENT>
            <ENT>12.5</ENT>
            <ENT>18.5</ENT>
            <ENT>14.1</ENT>
            <ENT>16.9</ENT>
            <ENT>15.50</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="22"/>
            <ENT>% data completeness</ENT>
            <ENT>90</ENT>
            <ENT>80</ENT>
            <ENT>85</ENT>
            <ENT>50</ENT>
            <ENT/>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">3-year mean</ENT>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT>14.42</ENT>
          </ROW>
        </GPOTABLE>

        <P>b. The data from these sites are averaged in the order described in section 2.1 of this appendix. Note that the annual mean from site #3 in year 2 and the annual mean from site #4 in year 3 do not meet the 75 percent data completeness criteria. Assuming the 38 percent data completeness represents a quarter with fewer than 11 samples, site #3 in year 2 does not meet the minimum data completeness requirement of 11 samples in each quarter. The site is therefore excluded from the calculation of the spatial mean for year 2. However, since the spatial mean for year 3 is above the level of the standard and the minimum data requirement of 11 samples in each quarter has been met, the annual mean from site #4 in year 3 is included in the calculation of the spatial mean for year 3 and in the calculation of the 3-year average. The 3-year average is rounded to 14.4 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E>, indicating that this area meets the annual PM<E T="52">2.5</E> standard.</P>

        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Example 2—Area With Two Monitors at the Same Location That Meets the Primary Annual PM<E T="52">2.5</E> Standard.</HD>

        <P>a. In an area designated for spatial averaging, six designated monitors, with two monitors at the same location (#5 and #6), recorded data in a particular 3-year period. Using Equations 1 and 2, the annual means for PM<E T="52">2.5</E> are calculated for each year. The following table can be created from the results.</P>
        <GPOTABLE CDEF="s25,10,10,10,10,10,10,6.2,6.2" COLS="9" OPTS="L2,tp8,i1">
          <TTITLE>
            <E T="04">Table 2—Results From Equations 1 and 2</E>
          </TTITLE>
          <BOXHD>
            <CHED H="1">Annual mean (μg/m<SU>3</SU>)</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Site <E T="61">#</E>1</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Site <E T="61">#</E>2</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Site <E T="61">#</E>3</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Site <E T="61">#</E>4</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Site <E T="61">#</E>5</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Site <E T="61">#</E>6</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Average of <E T="61">#</E>5 and <E T="61">#</E>6</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Spatial mean</CHED>
          </BOXHD>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Year 1</ENT>
            <ENT>12.9</ENT>
            <ENT>9.9</ENT>
            <ENT>12.6</ENT>
            <ENT>11.1</ENT>
            <ENT>14.5</ENT>
            <ENT>14.6</ENT>
            <ENT>14.55</ENT>
            <ENT>12.21</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Year 2</ENT>
            <ENT>14.5</ENT>
            <ENT>13.3</ENT>
            <ENT>12.2</ENT>
            <ENT>10.9</ENT>
            <ENT>16.1</ENT>
            <ENT>16.0</ENT>
            <ENT>16.05</ENT>
            <ENT>13.39</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">Year 3</ENT>
            <ENT>14.4</ENT>
            <ENT>12.4</ENT>
            <ENT>11.5</ENT>
            <ENT>9.7</ENT>
            <ENT>12.3</ENT>
            <ENT>12.1</ENT>
            <ENT>12.20</ENT>
            <ENT>12.04</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">3-Year mean</ENT>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT/>
            <ENT>12.55</ENT>
          </ROW>
        </GPOTABLE>

        <P>b. The annual means for sites #5 and #6 are averaged together using Equation 4 before the spatial average is calculated using Equation 3 since they are in the same location. The 3-year mean is rounded to 12.6 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E>, indicating that this area meets the annual PM<E T="52">2.5</E> standard.</P>

        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Example 3—Area With a Single Monitor That Meets the Primary Annual PM<E T="52">2.5</E> Standard.</HD>

        <P>a. Given data from a single monitor in an area, the calculations are as follows. Using Equations 1 and 2, the annual means for PM<E T="52">2.5</E> are calculated for each year. If the annual means are 10.28, 17.38, and 12.25 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E>, then the 3-year mean is:</P>
        <GPH DEEP="15" SPAN="2">
          <GID>ER18JY97.005</GID>
        </GPH>

        <P>b. This value is rounded to 13.3, indicating that this area meets the annual PM<E T="52">2.5</E> standard.</P>
        <P>2.6 <E T="03">Equations for the 24-Hour PM</E>
          <E T="52">2.5</E>
          <E T="03">Standard.</E>
        </P>

        <P>(a) When the data for a particular site and year meet the data completeness requirements in section 2.2 of this appendix, calculation of the 98<E T="51">th</E> percentile is accomplished by the following steps. All the daily values from a particular site and year comprise a series of values (x<E T="52">1</E>, x<E T="52">2</E>, x<E T="52">3</E>, ..., x<E T="52">n</E>), that can be sorted into a series where each number is equal to or larger than the preceding number (x<E T="52">[1]</E>, x<E T="52">[2]</E>, x<E T="52">[3]</E>, ..., x<E T="52">[n]</E>). In this case, x<E T="52">[1]</E> is the smallest number and x<E T="52">[n]</E> is the largest value. The 98<E T="51">th</E> percentile is found from the sorted series of daily values which is ordered from the lowest to the highest number. Compute (0.98) <E T="61">×</E> (n) as the number “i.d”, where <PRTPAGE P="126"/>“i” is the integer part of the result and “d” is the decimal part of the result. The 98<E T="51">th</E> percentile value for year y, P<E T="52">0.98, y</E>, is given by Equation 6:</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Equation 6</HD>
        <GPH DEEP="14" SPAN="1">
          <GID>ER18JY97.006</GID>
        </GPH>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">P<E T="52">0.98,y</E> = 98<E T="51">th</E> percentile for year y;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<E T="52">[i+1]</E> = the (i+1)<E T="51">th</E> number in the ordered series of numbers; and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">i = the integer part of the product of 0.98 and n.</FP>
        
        <P>(b) The 3-year average 98<E T="51">th</E> percentile is then calculated by  averaging the annual 98<E T="51">th</E> percentiles:</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Equation 7</HD>
        <GPH DEEP="42" SPAN="1">
          <GID>ER18JY97.007</GID>
        </GPH>
        <P>(c) The 3-year average 98<E T="51">th</E> percentile is rounded according to  the conventions in section 2.3 of this appendix before a comparison with the standard is made.</P>

        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Example 4—Ambient Monitoring Site With Every-Day Sampling That Meets the Primary 24-Hour PM<E T="52">2.5</E> Standard.</HD>

        <P>a. In each year of a particular 3 year period, varying numbers of daily PM<E T="52">2.5</E> values (e.g., 281, 304, and 296) out of a possible 365 values were recorded at a particular site with the following ranked values (in <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E>):</P>
        <GPOTABLE CDEF="10C,10C,10C,10C,10C,10C" COLS="6" OPTS="L2,tp8,i1">
          <TTITLE>
            <E T="04">Table 3—Ordered Monitoring Data For 3 Years</E>
          </TTITLE>
          <BOXHD>
            <CHED H="1">Year 1</CHED>
            <CHED H="2">j rank</CHED>
            <CHED H="2">X<E T="52">j</E> value</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Year 2</CHED>
            <CHED H="2">j rank</CHED>
            <CHED H="2">X<E T="52">j</E> value</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Year 3</CHED>
            <CHED H="2">j rank</CHED>
            <CHED H="2">X<E T="52">j</E> value</CHED>
          </BOXHD>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">275</ENT>
            <ENT>57.9</ENT>
            <ENT>296</ENT>
            <ENT>54.3</ENT>
            <ENT>290</ENT>
            <ENT>66.0</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">276</ENT>
            <ENT>59.0</ENT>
            <ENT>297</ENT>
            <ENT>57.1</ENT>
            <ENT>291</ENT>
            <ENT>68.4</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">277</ENT>
            <ENT>62.2</ENT>
            <ENT>298</ENT>
            <ENT>63.0</ENT>
            <ENT>292</ENT>
            <ENT>69.8</ENT>
          </ROW>
        </GPOTABLE>
        <P>b. Using Equation 6, the 98<E T="51">th</E> percentile values for each year are calculated as follows:</P>
        <GPH DEEP="17" SPAN="2">
          <GID>ER18JY97.008</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="17" SPAN="2">
          <GID>ER18JY97.009</GID>
        </GPH>
        <GPH DEEP="17" SPAN="2">
          <GID>ER18JY97.010</GID>
        </GPH>
        <P>c.1. Using Equation 7, the 3-year average 98<E T="51">th</E> percentile is calculated as follows:</P>
        <GPH DEEP="24" SPAN="2">
          <GID>ER18JY97.011</GID>
        </GPH>
        <P>2. Therefore, this site meets the 24-hour PM<E T="52">2.5</E> standard.</P>
        <P>3.0 <E T="03">Comparisons with the PM</E>
          <E T="52">10</E>
          <E T="03">Standards.</E>
        </P>
        <P>3.1 <E T="03">Annual PM</E>
          <E T="52">10</E>
          <E T="03">Standard.</E>
        </P>
        <P>(a) The annual PM<E T="52">10</E> standard is met when the 3-year average of the annual mean PM<E T="52">10</E> concentrations at each monitoring site is less than or equal to 50 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E>. The 3-year average of the annual means is determined by averaging quarterly means to obtain annual mean PM<E T="52">10</E> concentrations for 3 consecutive, complete years at each monitoring site. The steps can be summarized as follows:</P>
        <P>(1) Average 24-hour measurements to obtain a quarterly mean.</P>
        <P>(2) Average quarterly means to obtain an annual mean.<PRTPAGE P="127"/>
        </P>
        <P>(3) Average annual means to obtain a 3-year mean.</P>
        <P>(b) For the annual PM<E T="52">10</E> standard, a year meets data completeness requirements when at least 75 percent of the scheduled sampling days for each quarter have valid data. However, years with high concentrations and more than a minimal amount of data (at least 11 samples in each quarter) shall not be ignored just because they are comprised of quarters with less than complete data. Thus, in computing the 3-year average annual mean concentration, years containing quarters with at least 11 samples but less than 75 percent data completeness shall be included in the computation if the annual mean concentration (rounded according to the conventions of section 2.3 of this appendix) is greater than the level of the standard.</P>
        <P>(c) Situations may arise in which there are compelling reasons to retain years containing quarters which do not meet the data completeness requirement of 75 percent or the minimum number of 11 samples. The use of less than complete data is subject to the approval of the appropriate Regional Administrator.</P>

        <P>(d) The equations for calculating the 3-year average annual mean of the PM<E T="52">10</E> standard are given in section 3.5 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>3.2 <E T="03">24-Hour PM</E>
          <E T="52">10</E>
          <E T="03">Standard.</E>
        </P>
        <P>(a) The 24-hour PM<E T="52">10</E> standard is met when the 3-year average of the annual 99<E T="51">th</E> percentile values at each monitoring site is less than or equal to 150 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E>. This comparison shall be based on 3 consecutive, complete years of air quality data. A year meets data completeness requirements when at least 75 percent of the scheduled sampling days for each quarter have valid data. However, years with high concentrations shall not be ignored just because they are comprised of quarters with less than complete data. Thus, in computing the 3-year average of the annual 99<E T="51">th</E> percentile values, years containing quarters with less than 75 percent data completeness shall be included in the computation if the annual 99<E T="51">th</E> percentile value (rounded according to the conventions of section 2.3 of this appendix) is greater than the level of the standard.</P>
        <P>(b) Situations may arise in which there are compelling reasons to retain years containing quarters which do not meet the data completeness requirement. The use of less than complete data is subject to the approval of the appropriate Regional Administrator.</P>

        <P>(c) The equation for calculating the 3-year average of the annual 99<E T="51">th</E> percentile values is given in section 2.6 of this appendix.</P>
        <P>3.3 <E T="03">Rounding Conventions.</E> For the annual PM<E T="52">10</E> standard, the 3-year average of the annual PM<E T="52">10</E> means shall be rounded to the nearest 1 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E> (decimals 0.5 and greater are rounded up to the next whole number, and any decimal less than 0.5 is rounded down to the nearest whole number). For the 24-hour PM<E T="52">10</E> standard, the 3-year average of the annual 99<E T="51">th</E> percentile values of PM<E T="52">10</E> shall be rounded to the nearest 10 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E> (155 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E> and greater would be rounded to 160 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E> and 154 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E> and less would be rounded to 150 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E>).</P>
        <P>3.4 <E T="03">Monitoring Considerations.</E> Section 58.13 of this chapter specifies the required minimum frequency of sampling for PM<E T="52">10</E>. Exceptions to the specified sampling frequencies, such as a reduced frequency during a season of expected low concentrations, are subject to the approval of the appropriate Regional Administrator. For making comparisons with the PM<E T="52">10</E> NAAQS, all sites meeting applicable requirements in part 58 of this chapter would be used.</P>
        <P>3.5 <E T="03">Equations for the Annual PM</E>
          <E T="52">10</E>
          <E T="03">Standard.</E>
        </P>
        <P>(a) An annual arithmetic mean value for PM<E T="52">10</E> is determined by first averaging the 24-hour values of a calendar quarter using the following equation:</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Equation 8</HD>
        <GPH DEEP="32" SPAN="1">
          <GID>ER18JY97.012</GID>
        </GPH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">q,y</E> = the mean for quarter q of year y;</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">n<E T="52">q</E> = the number of monitored values in the quarter; and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<E T="52">i,q,y</E> = the i<E T="51">th</E> value in quarter q for year y.</FP>
        
        <P>(b) The following equation is then to be used for calculation of the annual mean:</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Equation 9</HD>
        <GPH DEEP="31" SPAN="1">
          <GID>ER18JY97.013</GID>
        </GPH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">y</E> = the annual mean concentration for year y, (y=1, 2, or 3); and</FP>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<E T="52">q,y</E> = the mean for a quarter q of year y.</FP>
        
        <P>(c) The 3-year average of the annual means is calculated by using the following equation:</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Equation 10</HD>
        <GPH DEEP="31" SPAN="1">
          <GID>ER18JY97.014</GID>
        </GPH>
        <FP>where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<AC T="8"/> = the 3-year average of the annual means; and</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<AC T="8"/>
          <E T="52">y</E> = the annual mean for calendar year y.</FP>
        
        <PRTPAGE P="128"/>

        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Example 5—Ambient Monitoring Site That Does Not Meet  the Annual PM<E T="52">10</E> Standard.</HD>
        <P>a. Given data from a PM<E T="52">10</E> monitor and using Equations 8 and 9, the annual means for PM<E T="52">10</E> are calculated for each year. If the annual means are 52.42, 82.17, and 63.23 <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E>, then the 3-year average annual mean is:</P>
        <GPH DEEP="12" SPAN="2">
          <GID>ER18JY97.015</GID>
        </GPH>
        <P>b. Therefore, this site does not meet the annual PM<E T="52">10</E> standard.</P>
        <P>3.6 <E T="03">Equation for the 24-Hour PM</E>
          <E T="52">10</E>
          <E T="03">Standard.</E>
        </P>

        <P>(a) When the data for a particular site and year meet the data completeness requirements in section 3.2 of this appendix, calculation of the 99<E T="51">th</E> percentile is accomplished by the following steps. All the daily values from a particular site and year comprise a series of values (x<E T="52">1</E>, x<E T="52">2</E>, x<E T="52">3</E>, ..., x<E T="52">n</E>) that can be sorted into a series where each number is equal to or larger than the preceding number (x<E T="52">[1]</E>, x<E T="52">[2]</E>, x<E T="52">[3]</E>, ..., x<E T="52">[n]</E>). In this case, x<E T="52">[1]</E> is the smallest number and x[n] is the largest value. The 99<E T="51">th</E> percentile is found from the sorted series of daily values which is ordered from the lowest to the highest number. Compute (0.99) <E T="61">×</E> (n) as the number “i.d”, where “i” is the integer part of the result and “d” is the decimal part of the result. The 99<E T="51">th</E> percentile value for year y, P<E T="52">0.99,y</E>, is given by Equation 11:</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Equation 11</HD>
        <GPH DEEP="14" SPAN="1">
          <GID>ER18JY97.016</GID>
        </GPH>
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">where:</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">P<E T="52">0.99,y</E> = the 99<E T="51">th</E> percentile for year y;</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">x<E T="52">[i+1]</E> = the (i+1)<E T="51">th</E> number in the ordered series of numbers; and</FP>
        
        <FP SOURCE="FP-1">i = the integer part of the product of 0.99 and n.</FP>
        
        <P>(b) The 3-year average 99<E T="51">th</E> percentile value is then calculated by averaging the annual 99<E T="51">th</E> percentiles:</P>
        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Equation 12</HD>
        <GPH DEEP="42" SPAN="1">
          <GID>ER18JY97.017</GID>
        </GPH>
        <P>(c) The 3-year average 99<E T="51">th</E> percentile is rounded according to the conventions in section 3.3 of this appendix before a comparison with the standard is made.
        </P>

        <HD SOURCE="HD2">Example 6—Ambient Monitoring Site With Sampling Every Sixth Day That Meets the Primary 24-Hour PM<E T="52">10</E> Standard.</HD>

        <P>a. In each year of a particular 3 year period, varying numbers of PM<E T="52">10</E> daily values (e.g., 110, 98, and 100) out of a possible 121 daily values were recorded at a particular site with the following ranked values (in <E T="61">m</E>g/m<E T="51">3</E>):</P>
        <GPOTABLE CDEF="10C,10C,10C,10C,10C,10C" COLS="6" OPTS="L2,tp8,i1">
          <TTITLE>
            <E T="04">Table 4—Ordered Monitoring Data For 3 Years</E>
          </TTITLE>
          <BOXHD>
            <CHED H="1">Year 1</CHED>
            <CHED H="2">j rank</CHED>
            <CHED H="2">X<E T="52">j</E> value</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Year 2</CHED>
            <CHED H="2">j rank</CHED>
            <CHED H="2">X<E T="52">j</E> value</CHED>
            <CHED H="1">Year 3</CHED>
            <CHED H="2">j rank</CHED>
            <CHED H="2">X<E T="52">j</E> value</CHED>
          </BOXHD>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">108</ENT>
            <ENT>120</ENT>
            <ENT>96</ENT>
            <ENT>143</ENT>
            <ENT>98</ENT>
            <ENT>140</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">109</ENT>
            <ENT>128</ENT>
            <ENT>97</ENT>
            <ENT>148</ENT>
            <ENT>99</ENT>
            <ENT>144</ENT>
          </ROW>
          <ROW>
            <ENT I="01">110</ENT>
            <ENT>130</ENT>
            <ENT>98</ENT>
            <ENT>150</ENT>
            <ENT>100</ENT>
            <ENT>147</ENT>
          </ROW>
        </GPOTABLE>
        <P>b. Using Equation 11, the 99<E T="51">th</E> percentile values for each year  are calculated as follows:</P>
        <GPH DEEP="17" SPAN="2">
          <GID>ER18JY97.018</GID>
        </GPH>
        
        <GPH DEEP="17" SPAN="2">
          <GID>ER18JY97.019</GID>
        </GPH>
        
        <GPH DEEP="17" SPAN="2">
          <GID>ER18JY97.020</GID>
        </GPH>
        <PRTPAGE P="129"/>
        <P>c. 1. Using Equation 12, the 3-year average 99<E T="51">th</E> percentile is calculated as follows:</P>
        <GPH DEEP="24" SPAN="2">
          <GID>ER18JY97.021</GID>
        </GPH>
        <P>2. Therefore, this site meets the 24-hour PM<E T="52">10</E> standard.</P>
        <CITA>[62 FR 38755, July 18, 1997]</CITA>
        <EAR>Pt. 51</EAR>
        <PRTPAGE P="130"/>
      </APPENDIX>
    </PART>
    <PART>
      <HD SOURCE="HED">PART 51—REQUIREMENTS FOR PREPARATION, ADOPTION, AND SUBMITTAL OF IMPLEMENTATION PLANS</HD>
      <CONTENTS>
        <SUBPART>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Subparts A-E [Reserved]</HD>
        </SUBPART>
        <SUBPART>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart F—Procedural Requirements</HD>
          <SECHD>Sec.</SECHD>
          <SECTNO>51.100</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Definitions.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.101</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Stipulations.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.102</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Public hearings.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.103</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Submission of plans, preliminary review of plans.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.104</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Revisions.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.105</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Approval of plans.</SUBJECT>
        </SUBPART>
        <SUBPART>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart G—Control Strategy</HD>
          <SECTNO>51.110</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Attainment and maintenance of national standards.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.111</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Description of control measures.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.112</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Demonstration of adequacy.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.113</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>[Reserved]</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.114</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Emissions data and projections.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.115</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Air quality data and projections.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.116</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Data availability.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.117</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Additional provisions for lead.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.118</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Stack height provisions.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.119</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Intermittent control systems.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.120</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Requirements for State Implementation Plan revisions relating to new motor vehicles.</SUBJECT>
        </SUBPART>
        <SUBPART>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart H—Prevention of Air Pollution Emergency Episodes</HD>
          <SECTNO>51.150</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Classification of regions for episode plans.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.151</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Significant harm levels.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.152</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Contingency plans.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.153</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Reevaluation of episode plans.</SUBJECT>
        </SUBPART>
        <SUBPART>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart I—Review of New Sources and Modifications</HD>
          <SECTNO>51.160</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Legally enforceable procedures.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.161</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Public availability of information.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.162</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Identification of responsible agency.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.163</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Administrative procedures.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.164</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Stack height procedures.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.165</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Permit requirements.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.166</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Prevention of significant deterioration of air quality.</SUBJECT>
        </SUBPART>
        <SUBPART>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart J—Ambient Air Quality Surveillance</HD>
          <SECTNO>51.190</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Ambient air quality monitoring requirements.</SUBJECT>
        </SUBPART>
        <SUBPART>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart K—Source Survelliance</HD>
          <SECTNO>51.210</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>General.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.211</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Emission reports and recordkeeping.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.212</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Testing, inspection, enforcement, and complaints.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.213</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Transportation control measures.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.214</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Continuous emission monitoring.</SUBJECT>
        </SUBPART>
        <SUBPART>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart L—Legal Authority</HD>
          <SECTNO>51.230</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Requirements for all plans.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.231</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Identification of legal authority.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.232</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Assignment of legal authority to local agencies.</SUBJECT>
        </SUBPART>
        <SUBPART>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart M—Intergovernmental Consultation</HD>
          <SUBJGRP>
            <HD SOURCE="HED">Agency Designation</HD>
            <SECTNO>51.240</SECTNO>
            <SUBJECT>General plan requirements.</SUBJECT>
            <SECTNO>51.241</SECTNO>
            <SUBJECT>Nonattainment areas for carbon monoxide and ozone.</SUBJECT>
            <SECTNO>51.242</SECTNO>
            <SUBJECT>[Reserved]</SUBJECT>
          </SUBJGRP>
        </SUBPART>
        <SUBPART>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart N—Compliance Schedules</HD>
          <SECTNO>51.260</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Legally enforceable compliance schedules.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.261</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Final compliance schedules.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.262</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Extension beyond one year.</SUBJECT>
        </SUBPART>
        <SUBPART>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart O—Miscellaneous Plan Content Requirements</HD>
          <SECTNO>51.280</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Resources.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.281</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Copies of rules and regulations.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.285</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Public notification.</SUBJECT>
        </SUBPART>
        <SUBPART>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart P—Protection of Visibility</HD>
          <SECTNO>51.300</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Purpose and applicability.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.301</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Definitions.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.302</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Implementation control strategies.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.303</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Exemptions from control.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.304</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Identification of integral vistas.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.305</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Monitoring.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.306</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Long-term strategy.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.307</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>New source review.</SUBJECT>
        </SUBPART>
        <SUBPART>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart Q—Reports</HD>
          <SUBJGRP>
            <HD SOURCE="HED">Air Quality Data Reporting</HD>
            <SECTNO>51.320</SECTNO>
            <SUBJECT>Annual air quality data report.<PRTPAGE P="131"/>
            </SUBJECT>
          </SUBJGRP>
          <SUBJGRP>
            <HD SOURCE="HED">Source Emissions and State Action Reporting</HD>
            <SECTNO>51.321</SECTNO>
            <SUBJECT>Annual source emissions and State action report.</SUBJECT>
            <SECTNO>51.322</SECTNO>
            <SUBJECT>Sources subject to emissions reporting.</SUBJECT>
            <SECTNO>51.323</SECTNO>
            <SUBJECT>Reportable emissions data and information.</SUBJECT>
            <SECTNO>51.324</SECTNO>
            <SUBJECT>Progress in plan enforcement.</SUBJECT>
            <SECTNO>51.326</SECTNO>
            <SUBJECT>Reportable revisions.</SUBJECT>
            <SECTNO>51.327</SECTNO>
            <SUBJECT>Enforcement orders and other State actions.</SUBJECT>
            <SECTNO>51.328</SECTNO>
            <SUBJECT>[Reserved]</SUBJECT>
          </SUBJGRP>
        </SUBPART>
        <SUBPART>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart R—Extensions</HD>
          <SECTNO>51.341</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Request for 18-month extension.</SUBJECT>
        </SUBPART>
        <SUBPART>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart S—Inspection/Maintenance Program Requirements</HD>
          <SECTNO>51.350</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Applicability.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.351</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Enhanced I/M performance standard.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.352</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Basic I/M performance standard.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.353</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Network type and program evaluation.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.354</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Adequate tools and resources.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.355</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Test frequency and convenience.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.356</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Vehicle coverage.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.357</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Test procedures and standards.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.358</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Test equipment.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.359</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Quality control.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.360</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Waivers and compliance via diagnostic inspection.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.361</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Motorist compliance enforcement.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.362</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Motorist compliance enforcement program oversight.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.363</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Quality assurance.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.364</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Enforcement against contractors, stations and inspectors.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.365</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Data collection.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.366</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Data analysis and reporting.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.367</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Inspector training and licensing or certification.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.368</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Public information and consumer protection.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.369</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Improving repair effectiveness.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.370</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Compliance with recall notices.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.371</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>On-road testing.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.372</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>State Implementation Plan submissions.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.373</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Implementation deadlines.</SUBJECT>
          <APP>
            <E T="04">Appendix A to Subpart S—Calibrations, Adjustments and Quality Control</E>
          </APP>
          <APP>
            <E T="04">Appendix B to Subpart S—Test Procedures</E>
          </APP>
          <APP>
            <E T="04">Appendix C to Subpart S—Steady-State Short Test Standards</E>
          </APP>
          <APP>
            <E T="04">Appendix D to Subpart S—Steady-State Short Test Equipment</E>
          </APP>
          <APP>
            <E T="04">Appendix E to Subpart S—Transient Test Driving Cycle</E>
          </APP>
        </SUBPART>
        <SUBPART>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart T—Conformity to State or Federal Implementation Plans of Transportation Plans, Programs, and Projects Developed, Funded or Approved Under Title 23 U.S.C. or the Federal Transit Laws</HD>
          <SECTNO>51.390</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Implementation plan revision.</SUBJECT>
        </SUBPART>
        <SUBPART>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart U—Economic Incentive Programs</HD>
          <SECTNO>51.490</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Applicability.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.491</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Definitions.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.492</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>State program election and submittal.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.493</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>State program requirements.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.494</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Use of program revenues.</SUBJECT>
        </SUBPART>
        <SUBPART>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart W—Determining Conformity of General Federal Actions to State or Federal Implementation Plans</HD>
          <SECTNO>51.850</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Prohibition.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.851</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>State Implementation Plan (SIP) revision.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.852</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Definitions.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.853</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Applicability.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.854</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Conformity analysis.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.855</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Reporting requirements.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.856</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Public participation.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.857</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Frequency of conformity determinations.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.858</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Criteria for determining conformity of general Federal actions.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.859</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Procedures for conformity determinations of general Federal actions.</SUBJECT>
          <SECTNO>51.860</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Mitigation of air quality impacts.</SUBJECT>
          <APP>
            <E T="04">Appendixes A-K [Reserved]</E>
          </APP>
          <APP>
            <E T="05">Appendix L to Part 51—Example Regulations for Prevention of Air Pollution Emergency Episodes</E>
          </APP>
          <APP>
            <E T="05">Appendix M to Part 51—Recommended Test Methods for State Implementation Plans</E>
          </APP>
          <APP>
            <E T="04">Appendixes N-O [Reserved]</E>
          </APP>
          <APP>
            <E T="05">Appendix P to Part 51—Minimum Emission Monitoring Requirements</E>
          </APP>
          <APP>
            <E T="04">Appendixes Q-R [Reserved]</E>
          </APP>
          <APP>
            <E T="05">Appendix S to Part 51—Emission Offset Interpretative Ruling</E>
          </APP>
          <APP>
            <E T="04">Appendixes T-U [Reserved]</E>
          </APP>
          <APP>
            <E T="05">Appendix V to Part 51—Criteria for Determining the Completeness of Plan Submissions</E>
          </APP>
          <APP>
            <E T="05">Appendix W to Part 51—Guideline on Air Quality Models</E>
          </APP>
          <APP>
            <E T="05">Appendix X to Part 51—Examples of Economic Incentive Programs</E>
          </APP>
        </SUBPART>
      </CONTENTS>
      <AUTH>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">Authority:</HD>
        <P>42 U.S.C. 7401, 7411, 7412, 7413, 7414, 7470-7479, 7501-7508, 7601, and 7602.</P>
      </AUTH>
      <SOURCE>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">Source:</HD>
        <P>36 FR 22398, Nov. 25, 1971, unless otherwise noted.</P>
      </SOURCE>
      <SUBPART>
        <PRTPAGE P="132"/>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">Subparts A-E [Reserved]</HD>
      </SUBPART>
      <SUBPART>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart F—Procedural Requirements</HD>
        <AUTH>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Authority:</HD>
          <P>42 U.S.C. 7401, 7411, 7412, 7413, 7414, 7470-7479, 7501-7508, 7601, and 7602.</P>
        </AUTH>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.100</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Definitions.</SUBJECT>
          <P>As used in this part, all terms not defined herein will have the meaning given them in the Act:</P>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Act</E> means the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 7401 <E T="03">et seq.,</E> as amended by Pub. L. 91-604, 84 Stat. 1676 Pub. L. 95-95, 91 Stat., 685 and Pub. L. 95-190, 91 Stat., 1399.)</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Administrator</E> means the Administrator of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) or an authorized representative.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Primary standard</E> means a national primary ambient air quality standard promulgated pursuant to section 109 of the Act.</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">Secondary standard</E> means a national secondary ambient air quality standard promulgated pursuant to section 109 of the Act.</P>
          <P>(e) <E T="03">National standard</E> means either a primary or secondary standard.</P>
          <P>(f) <E T="03">Owner or operator</E> means any person who owns, leases, operates, controls, or supervises a facility, building, structure, or installation which directly or indirectly result or may result in emissions of any air pollutant for which a national standard is in effect.</P>
          <P>(g) <E T="03">Local agency</E> means any local government agency other than the State agency, which is charged with responsibility for carrying out a portion of the plan.</P>
          <P>(h) <E T="03">Regional Office</E> means one of the ten (10) EPA Regional Offices.</P>
          <P>(i) <E T="03">State agency</E> means the air pollution control agency primarily responsible for development and implementation of a plan under the Act.</P>
          <P>(j) <E T="03">Plan</E> means an implementation plan approved or promulgated under section 110 of 172 of the Act.</P>
          <P>(k) <E T="03">Point source</E> means the following:</P>
          <P>(1) For particulate matter, sulfur oxides, carbon monoxide, volatile organic compounds (VOC) and nitrogen dioxide—</P>

          <P>(i) Any stationary source the actual emissions of which are in excess of 90.7 metric tons (100 tons) per year of the pollutant in a region containing an area whose 1980 <E T="03">urban place</E> population, as defined by the U.S. Bureau of the Census, was equal to or greater than 1 million.</P>

          <P>(ii) Any stationary source the actual emissions of which are in excess of 22.7 metric tons (25 tons) per year of the pollutant in a region containing an area whose 1980 <E T="03">urban place</E> population, as defined by the U.S. Bureau of the Census, was less than 1 million; or</P>
          <P>(2) For lead or lead compounds measured as elemental lead, any stationary source that actually emits a total of 4.5 metric tons (5 tons) per year or more.</P>
          <P>(l) <E T="03">Area source</E> means any small residential, governmental, institutional, commercial, or industrial fuel combustion operations; onsite solid waste disposal facility; motor vehicles, aircraft vessels, or other transportation facilities or other miscellaneous sources identified through inventory techniques similar to those described in the “AEROS Manual series, Vol. II AEROS User's Manual,” EPA-450/2-76-029 December 1976.</P>
          <P>(m) <E T="03">Region</E> means an area designated as an air quality control region (AQCR) under section 107(c) of the Act.</P>
          <P>(n) <E T="03">Control strategy</E> means a combination of measures designated to achieve the aggregate reduction of emissions necessary for attainment and maintenance of national standards including, but not limited to, measures such as:</P>
          <P>(1) Emission limitations.</P>
          <P>(2) Federal or State emission charges or taxes or other economic incentives or disincentives.</P>
          <P>(3) Closing or relocation of residential, commercial, or industrial facilities.</P>
          <P>(4) Changes in schedules or methods of operation of commercial or industrial facilities or transportation systems, including, but not limited to, short-term changes made in accordance with standby plans.</P>

          <P>(5) Periodic inspection and testing of motor vehicle emission control systems, at such time as the Administrator determines that such programs are feasible and practicable.<PRTPAGE P="133"/>
          </P>
          <P>(6) Emission control measures applicable to in-use motor vehicles, including, but not limited to, measures such as mandatory maintenance, installation of emission control devices, and conversion to gaseous fuels.</P>
          <P>(7) Any transportation control measure including those transportation measures listed in section 108(f) of the Clean Air Act as amended.</P>
          <P>(8) Any variation of, or alternative to any measure delineated herein.</P>
          <P>(9) Control or prohibition of a fuel or fuel additive used in motor vehicles, if such control or prohibition is necessary to achieve a national primary or secondary air quality standard and is approved by the Administrator under section 211(c)(4)(C) of the Act.</P>
          <P>(o) <E T="03">Reasonably available control technology (RACT)</E> means devices, systems, process modifications, or other apparatus or techniques that are reasonably available taking into account:</P>
          <P>(1) The necessity of imposing such controls in order to attain and maintain a national ambient air quality standard;</P>
          <P>(2) The social, environmental, and economic impact of such controls; and</P>
          <P>(3) Alternative means of providing for attainment and maintenance of such standard. (This provision defines RACT for the purposes of § 51.341(b) only.)</P>
          <P>(p) <E T="03">Compliance schedule</E> means the date or dates by which a source or category of sources is required to comply with specific emission limitations contained in an implementation plan and with any increments of progress toward such compliance.</P>
          <P>(q) <E T="03">Increments of progress</E> means steps toward compliance which will be taken by a specific source, including:</P>
          <P>(1) Date of submittal of the source's final control plan to the appropriate air pollution control agency;</P>
          <P>(2) Date by which contracts for emission control systems or process modifications will be awarded; or date by which orders will be issued for the purchase of component parts to accomplish emission control or process modification;</P>
          <P>(3) Date of initiation of on-site construction or installation of emission control equipment or process change;</P>
          <P>(4) Date by which on-site construction or installation of emission control equipment or process modification is to be completed; and</P>
          <P>(5) Date by which final compliance is to be achieved.</P>
          <P>(r) <E T="03">Transportation control measure</E> means any measure that is directed toward reducing emissions of air pollutants from transportation sources. Such measures include, but are not limited to, those listed in section 108(f) of the Clean Air Act.</P>
          <P>(s) <E T="03">Volatile organic compounds (VOC)</E> means any compound of carbon, excluding carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, carbonic acid, metallic carbides or carbonates, and ammonium carbonate, which participates in atmospheric photochemical reactions.</P>

          <P>(1) This includes any such organic compound other than the following, which have been determined to have negligible photochemical reactivity: methane; ethane; methylene chloride (dichloromethane); 1,1,1-trichloroethane (methyl chloroform); 1,1,2-trichloro-1,2,2-trifluoroethane (CFC-113); trichlorofluoromethane (CFC-11); dichlorodifluoromethane (CFC-12); chlorodifluoromethane (HCFC-22); trifluoromethane (HFC-23); 1,2-dichloro 1,1,2,2-tetrafluoroethane (CFC-114); chloropentafluoroethane (CFC-115); 1,1,1-trifluoro 2,2-dichloroethane (HCFC-123); 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane (HFC-134a); 1,1-dichloro 1-fluoroethane (HCFC-141b); 1-chloro 1,1-difluoroethane (HCFC-142b); 2-chloro-1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane (HCFC-124); pentafluoroethane (HFC-125); 1,1,2,2-tetrafluoroethane (HFC-134); 1,1,1-trifluoroethane (HFC-143a); 1,1-difluoroethane (HFC-152a); parachlorobenzotrifluoride (PCBTF); cyclic, branched, or linear completely methylated siloxanes; acetone; perchloroethylene (tetrachloroethylene); 3,3-dichloro-1,1,1,2,2-pentafluoropropane (HCFC-225ca); 1,3-dichloro-1,1,2,2,3-pentafluoropropane (HCFC-225cb); 1,1,1,2,3,4,4,5,5,5-decafluoropentane (HFC 43-10mee); difluoromethane (HFC-32); ethylfluoride (HFC-161); 1,1,1,3,3,3-hexafluoropropane (HFC-236fa); 1,1,2,2,3-pentafluoropropane (HFC-245ca); 1,1,2,3,3-pentafluoropropane (HFC-245ea); 1,1,1,2,3-pentafluoropropane (HFC-245eb); 1,1,1,3,3-pentafluoropropane <PRTPAGE P="134"/>(HFC-245fa); 1,1,1,2,3,3-hexafluoropropane (HFC-236ea); 1,1,1,3,3-pentafluorobutane (HFC-365mfc); chlorofluoromethane (HCFC-31); 1 chloro-1-fluoroethane (HCFC-151a); 1,2-dichloro-1,1,2-trifluoroethane (HCFC-123a); 1,1,1,2,2,3,3,4,4-nonafluoro-4-methoxy-butane (C<E T="52">4</E>F<E T="52">9</E>OCH<E T="52">3</E>); 2-(difluoromethoxymethyl)-1,1,1,2,3,3,3-heptafluoropropane ((CF<E T="52">3</E>)<E T="52">2</E>CFCF<E T="52">2</E>OCH<E T="52">3</E>); 1-ethoxy-1,1,2,2,3,3,4,4,4-nonafluorobutane (C<E T="52">4</E>F<E T="52">9</E>OC<E T="52">2</E>H<E T="52">5</E>); 2-(ethoxydifluoromethyl)-1,1,1,2,3,3,3-heptafluoropropane ((CF<E T="52">3</E>)<E T="52">2</E>CFCF<E T="52">2</E>OC<E T="52">2</E>H<E T="52">5</E>); methyl acetate and perfluorocarbon compounds which fall into these classes:</P>
          <P>(i) Cyclic, branched, or linear, completely fluorinated alkanes;</P>
          <P>(ii) Cyclic, branched, or linear, completely fluorinated ethers with no unsaturations;</P>
          <P>(iii) Cyclic, branched, or linear, completely fluorinated tertiary amines with no unsaturations; and</P>
          <P>(iv) Sulfur containing perfluorocarbons with no unsaturations and with sulfur bonds only to carbon and fluorine.</P>
          <P>(2) For purposes of determining compliance with emissions limits, VOC will be measured by the test methods in the approved State implementation plan (SIP) or 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, as applicable. Where such a method also measures compounds with negligible photochemical reactivity, these negligibility-reactive compounds may be excluded as VOC if the amount of such compounds is accurately quantified, and such exclusion is approved by the enforcement authority.</P>
          <P>(3) As a precondition to excluding these compounds as VOC or at any time thereafter, the enforcement authority may require an owner or operator to provide monitoring or testing methods and results demonstrating, to the satisfaction of the enforcement authority, the amount of negligibly-reactive compounds in the source's emissions.</P>
          <P>(4) For purposes of Federal enforcement for a specific source, the EPA shall use the test methods specified in the applicable EPA-approved SIP, in a permit issued pursuant to a program approved or promulgated under title V of the Act, or under 40 CFR part 51, subpart I or appendix S, or under 40 CFR parts 52 or 60. The EPA shall not be bound by any State determination as to appropriate methods for testing or monitoring negligibly-reactive compounds if such determination is not reflected in any of the above provisions.</P>
          <P>(t)-(w) [Reserved]</P>
          <P>(x) <E T="03">Time period</E> means any period of time designated by hour, month, season, calendar year, averaging time, or other suitable characteristics, for which ambient air quality is estimated.</P>
          <P>(y) <E T="03">Variance</E> means the temporary deferral of a final compliance date for an individual source subject to an approved regulation, or a temporary change to an approved regulation as it applies to an individual source.</P>
          <P>(z) <E T="03">Emission limitation</E> and <E T="03">emission standard</E> mean a requirement established by a State, local government, or the Administrator which limits the quantity, rate, or concentration of emissions of air pollutants on a continuous basis, including any requirements which limit the level of opacity, prescribe equipment, set fuel specifications, or prescribe operation or maintenance procedures for a source to assure continuous emission reduction.</P>
          <P>(aa) <E T="03">Capacity factor</E> means the ratio of the average load on a machine or equipment for the period of time considered to the capacity rating of the machine or equipment.</P>
          <P>(bb) <E T="03">Excess emissions</E> means emissions of an air pollutant in excess of an emission standard.</P>
          <P>(cc) <E T="03">Nitric acid plant</E> means any facility producing nitric acid 30 to 70 percent in strength by either the pressure or atmospheric pressure process.</P>
          <P>(dd) <E T="03">Sulfuric acid plant</E> means any facility producing sulfuric acid by the contact process by burning elemental sulfur, alkylation acid, hydrogen sulfide, or acid sludge, but does not include facilities where conversion to sulfuric acid is utilized primarily as a means of preventing emissions to the atmosphere of sulfur dioxide or other sulfur compounds.</P>
          <P>(ee) <E T="03">Fossil fuel-fired steam generator</E> means a furnance or bioler used in the process of burning fossil fuel for the primary purpose of producing steam by heat transfer.<PRTPAGE P="135"/>
          </P>
          <P>(ff) <E T="03">Stack</E> means any point in a source designed to emit solids, liquids, or gases into the air, including a pipe or duct but not including flares.</P>
          <P>(gg) <E T="03">A stack in existence</E> means that the owner or operator had (1) begun, or caused to begin, a continuous program of physical on-site construction of the stack or (2) entered into binding agreements or contractual obligations, which could not be cancelled or modified without substantial loss to the owner or operator, to undertake a program of construction of the stack to be completed within a reasonable time.</P>
          <P>(hh)(1) <E T="03">Dispersion technique</E> means any technique which attempts to affect the concentration of a pollutant in the ambient air by:</P>
          <P>(i) Using that portion of a stack which exceeds good engineering practice stack height:</P>
          <P>(ii) Varying the rate of emission of a pollutant according to atmospheric conditions or ambient concentrations of that pollutant; or</P>
          <P>(iii) Increasing final exhaust gas plume rise by manipulating source process parameters, exhaust gas parameters, stack parameters, or combining exhaust gases from several existing stacks into one stack; or other selective handling of exhaust gas streams so as to increase the exhaust gas plume rise.</P>
          <P>(2) The preceding sentence does not include:</P>
          <P>(i) The reheating of a gas stream, following use of a pollution control system, for the purpose of returning the gas to the temperature at which it was originally discharged from the facility generating the gas stream;</P>
          <P>(ii) The merging of exhaust gas streams where:</P>
          <P>(A) The source owner or operator demonstrates that the facility was originally designed and constructed with such merged gas streams;</P>

          <P>(B) After July 8, 1985 such merging is part of a change in operation at the facility that includes the installation of pollution controls and is accompanied by a net reduction in the allowable emissions of a pollutant. This exclusion from the definition of <E T="03">dispersion techniques</E> shall apply only to the emission limitation for the pollutant affected by such change in operation; or</P>
          <P>(C) Before July 8, 1985, such merging was part of a change in operation at the facility that included the installation of emissions control equipment or was carried out for sound economic or engineering reasons. Where there was an increase in the emission limitation or, in the event that no emission limitation was in existence prior to the merging, an increase in the quantity of pollutants actually emitted prior to the merging, the reviewing agency shall presume that merging was significantly motivated by an intent to gain emissions credit for greater dispersion. Absent a demonstration by the source owner or operator that merging was not significantly motivated by such intent, the reviewing agency shall deny credit for the effects of such merging in calculating the allowable emissions for the source;</P>
          <P>(iii) Smoke management in agricultural or silvicultural prescribed burning programs;</P>
          <P>(iv) Episodic restrictions on residential woodburning and open burning; or</P>
          <P>(v) Techniques under § 51.100(hh)(1)(iii) which increase final exhaust gas plume rise where the resulting allowable emissions of sulfur dioxide from the facility do not exceed 5,000 tons per year.</P>
          <P>(ii) <E T="03">Good engineering practice</E> (GEP) stack height means the greater of:</P>
          <P>(1) 65 meters, measured from the ground-level elevation at the base of the stack:</P>

          <P>(2)(i) For stacks in existence on January 12, 1979, and for which the owner or operator had obtained all applicable permits or approvals required under 40 CFR parts 51 and 52.
          </P>
          <EXTRACT>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">H<E T="52">g</E>=2.5H,</FP>
            
            <FP>provided the owner or operator produces evidence that this equation was actually relied on in establishing an emission limitation:</FP>
          </EXTRACT>
          <P>(ii) For all other stacks,
          </P>
          <EXTRACT>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">H<E T="52">g</E>=H + 1.5L</FP>
            
            <FP>where:</FP>
            
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">H<E T="52">g</E> = good engineering practice stack height, measured from the ground-level elevation at the base of the stack,</FP>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">H = height of nearby structure(s) measured from the ground-level elevation at the base of the stack.</FP>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">L = lesser dimension, height or projected width, of nearby structure(s)</FP>
          </EXTRACT>
          
          <PRTPAGE P="136"/>
          <FP>provided that the EPA, State or local control agency may require the use of a field study or fluid model to verify GEP stack height for the source; or</FP>
          <P>(3) The height demonstrated by a fluid model or a field study approved by the EPA State or local control agency, which ensures that the emissions from a stack do not result in excessive concentrations of any air pollutant as a result of atmospheric downwash, wakes, or eddy effects created by the source itself, nearby structures or nearby terrain features.</P>
          <P>(jj) <E T="03">Nearby</E> as used in § 51.100(ii) of this part is defined for a specific structure or terrain feature and</P>
          <P>(1) For purposes of applying the formulae provided in § 51.100(ii)(2) means that distance up to five times the lesser of the height or the width dimension of a structure, but not greater than 0.8 km (<FR>1/2</FR> mile), and</P>

          <P>(2) For conducting demonstrations under § 51.100(ii)(3) means not greater than 0.8 km (<FR>1/2</FR> mile), except that the portion of a terrain feature may be considered to be nearby which falls within a distance of up to 10 times the maximum height (H<E T="22">t</E>) of the feature, not to exceed 2 miles if such feature achieves a height (H<E T="22">t</E>) 0.8 km from the stack that is at least 40 percent of the GEP stack height determined by the formulae provided in § 51.100(ii)(2)(ii) of this part or 26 meters, whichever is greater, as measured from the ground-level elevation at the base of the stack. The height of the structure or terrain feature is measured from the ground-level elevation at the base of the stack.</P>
          <P>(kk) <E T="03">Excessive concentration</E> is defined for the purpose of determining good engineering practice stack height under § 51.100(ii)(3) and means:</P>
          <P>(1) For sources seeking credit for stack height exceeding that established under § 51.100(ii)(2) a maximum ground-level concentration due to emissions from a stack due in whole or part to downwash, wakes, and eddy effects produced by nearby structures or nearby terrain features which individually is at least 40 percent in excess of the maximum concentration experienced in the absence of such downwash, wakes, or eddy effects and which contributes to a total concentration due to emissions from all sources that is greater than an ambient air quality standard. For sources subject to the prevention of significant deterioration program (40 CFR 51.166 and 52.21), an excessive concentration alternatively means a maximum ground-level concentration due to emissions from a stack due in whole or part to downwash, wakes, or eddy effects produced by nearby structures or nearby terrain features which individually is at least 40 percent in excess of the maximum concentration experienced in the absence of such downwash, wakes, or eddy effects and greater than a prevention of significant deterioration increment. The allowable emission rate to be used in making demonstrations under this part shall be prescribed by the new source performance standard that is applicable to the source category unless the owner or operator demonstrates that this emission rate is infeasible. Where such demonstrations are approved by the authority administering the State implementation plan, an alternative emission rate shall be established in consultation with the source owner or operator.</P>
          <P>(2) For sources seeking credit after October 11, 1983, for increases in existing stack heights up to the heights established under § 51.100(ii)(2), either (i) a maximum ground-level concentration due in whole or part to downwash, wakes or eddy effects as provided in paragraph (kk)(1) of this section, except that the emission rate specified by any applicable State implementation plan (or, in the absence of such a limit, the actual emission rate) shall be used, or (ii) the actual presence of a local nuisance caused by the existing stack, as determined by the authority administering the State implementation plan; and</P>

          <P>(3) For sources seeking credit after January 12, 1979 for a stack height determined under § 51.100(ii)(2) where the authority administering the State implementation plan requires the use of a field study or fluid model to verify GEP stack height, for sources seeking stack height credit after November 9, 1984 based on the aerodynamic influence of cooling towers, and for sources <PRTPAGE P="137"/>seeking stack height credit after December 31, 1970 based on the aerodynamic influence of structures not adequately represented by the equations in § 51.100(ii)(2), a maximum ground-level concentration due in whole or part to downwash, wakes or eddy effects that is at least 40 percent in excess of the maximum concentration experienced in the absence of such downwash, wakes, or eddy effects.</P>
          <P>(ll)-(mm) [Reserved]</P>
          <P>(nn) Intermittent control system (ICS) means a dispersion technique which varies the rate at which pollutants are emitted to the atmosphere according to meteorological conditions and/or ambient concentrations of the pollutant, in order to prevent ground-level concentrations in excess of applicable ambient air quality standards. Such a dispersion technique is an ICS whether used alone, used with other dispersion techniques, or used as a supplement to continuous emission controls (i.e., used as a supplemental control system).</P>
          <P>(oo) <E T="03">Particulate matter</E> means any airborne finely divided solid or liquid material with an aerodynamic diameter smaller than 100 micrometers.</P>
          <P>(pp) <E T="03">Particulate matter emissions</E> means all finely divided solid or liquid material, other than uncombined water, emitted to the ambient air as measured by applicable reference methods, or an equivalent or alternative method, specified in this chapter, or by a test method specified in an approved State implementation plan.</P>
          <P>(qq) <E T="03">PM</E>
            <E T="52">10</E> means particulate matter with an aerodynamic diameter less than or equal to a nominal 10 micrometers as measured by a reference method based on appendix J of part 50 of this chapter and designated in accordance with part 53 of this chapter or by an equivalent method designated in accordance with part 53 of this chapter.</P>
          <P>(rr) <E T="03">PM</E>
            <E T="52">10</E> emissions <E T="01">means finely divided solid or liquid material, with an aerodynamic diameter less than or equal to a nominal 10 micrometers emitted to the ambient air as measured by an applicable reference method, or an equivalent or alternative method, specified in this chapter or by a test method specified in an approved State implementation plan.</E>
          </P>
          <P>(ss) <E T="03">Total suspended particulate</E> means particulate matter as measured by the method described in appendix B of part 50 of this chapter.</P>
          <CITA>[51 FR 40661, Nov. 7, 1986, as amended at 52 FR 24712, July 1, 1987; 57 FR 3945, Feb. 3, 1992; 61 FR 4590, Feb. 7, 1996; 61 FR 16060, Apr. 11, 1996; 61 FR 30162, June 14, 1996; 61 FR 52850, Oct. 8, 1996; 62 FR 44903, Aug. 25, 1997; 63 FR 9151, Feb. 24, 1998; 63 FR 17333, Apr. 9, 1998]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.101</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Stipulations.</SUBJECT>
          <P>Nothing in this part will be construed in any manner:</P>
          <P>(a) To encourage a State to prepare, adopt, or submit a plan which does not provide for the protection and enhancement of air quality so as to promote the public health and welfare and productive capacity.</P>
          <P>(b) To encourage a State to adopt any particular control strategy without taking into consideration the cost-effectiveness of such control strategy in relation to that of alternative control strategies.</P>
          <P>(c) To preclude a State from employing techniques other than those specified in this part for purposes of estimating air quality or demonstrating the adequacy of a control strategy, provided that such other techniques are shown to be adequate and appropriate for such purposes.</P>
          <P>(d) To encourage a State to prepare, adopt, or submit a plan without taking into consideration the social and economic impact of the control strategy set forth in such plan, including, but not limited to, impact on availability of fuels, energy, transportation, and employment.</P>
          <P>(e) To preclude a State from preparing, adopting, or submitting a plan which provides for attainment and maintenance of a national standard through the application of a control strategy not specifically identified or described in this part.</P>
          <P>(f) To preclude a State or political subdivision thereof from adopting or enforcing any emission limitations or other measures or combinations thereof to attain and maintain air quality better than that required by a national standard.</P>

          <P>(g) To encourage a State to adopt a control strategy uniformly applicable throughout a region unless there is no <PRTPAGE P="138"/>satisfactory alternative way of providing for attainment and maintenance of a national standard throughout such region.</P>
          <CITA>[61 FR 30163, June 14, 1996]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.102</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Public hearings.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) Except as otherwise provided in paragraph (c) of this section, States must conduct one or more public hearings on the following prior to adoption and submission to EPA of:</P>
          <P>(1) Any plan or revision of it required by § 51.104(a).</P>
          <P>(2) Any individual compliance schedule under (§ 51.260).</P>
          <P>(3) Any revision under § 51.104(d).</P>
          <P>(b) Separate hearings may be held for plans to implement primary and secondary standards.</P>
          <P>(c) No hearing will be required for any change to an increment of progress in an approved individual compliance schedule unless such change is likely to cause the source to be unable to comply with the final compliance date in the schedule. The requirements of §§ 51.104 and 51.105 will be applicable to such schedules, however.</P>
          <P>(d) Any hearing required by paragraph (a) of this section will be held only after reasonable notice, which will be considered to include, at least 30 days prior to the date of such hearing(s):</P>
          <P>(1) Notice given to the public by prominent advertisement in the area affected announcing the date(s), time(s), and place(s) of such hearing(s);</P>
          <P>(2) Availability of each proposed plan or revision for public inspection in at least one location in each region to which it will apply, and the availability of each compliance schedule for public inspection in at least one location in the region in which the affected source is located;</P>
          <P>(3) Notification to the Administrator (through the appropriate Regional Office);</P>
          <P>(4) Notification to each local air pollution control agency which will be significantly impacted by such plan, schedule or revision;</P>
          <P>(5) In the case of an interstate region, notification to any other States included, in whole or in part, in the regions which are significantly impacted by such plan or schedule or revision.</P>
          <P>(6) In the case of hearings on AQMA plans:</P>
          <P>(i) Notification to the chief executives of affected local governments, planning agencies, transportation agencies, environmental control agencies, economic development agencies, and any other affected States, and</P>
          <P>(ii) Public notice of alternative analysis and plan development procedures approved under § 51.63.</P>
          <P>(e) The State must prepare and retain, for inspection by the Administrator upon request, a record of each hearing. The record must contain, as a minimum, a list of witnesses together with the text of each presentation.</P>
          <P>(f) The State must submit with the plan, revision, or schedule a certification that the hearing required by paragraph (a) of this section was held in accordance with the notice required by paragraph (d) of this section.</P>
          <P>(g) Upon written application by a State agency (through the appropriate Regional Office), the Administrator may approve State procedures for public hearings. The following criteria apply:</P>
          <P>(1) Procedures approved under this section shall be deemed to satisfy the requirement of this part regarding public hearings.</P>
          <P>(2) Procedures different from this part may be approved if they—</P>
          <P>(i) Ensure public participation in matters for which hearings are required; and</P>
          <P>(ii) Provide adequate public notification of the opportunity to participate.</P>
          <P>(3) The Administrator may impose any conditions on approval he or she deems necessary.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.103</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Submission of plans, preliminary review of plans.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) The State makes an official plan submission to EPA only when the submission conforms to the requirements of appendix V to this part, and the State delivers five copies of the plan to the appropriate Regional Office, with a letter giving notice of such action.</P>

          <P>(b) Upon request of a State, the Administrator will provide preliminary review of a plan or portion thereof submitted in advance of the date such plan is due. Such requests must be made in <PRTPAGE P="139"/>writing to the appropriate Regional Office and must be accompanied by five copies of the materials to be reviewed. Requests for preliminary review do not relieve a State of the responsibility of adopting and submitting plans in accordance with prescribed due dates.</P>
          <CITA>[51 FR 40661, Nov. 7, 1986, as amended at 55 FR 5830, Feb. 16, 1990; 63 FR 9151, Feb. 24, 1998]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.104</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Revisions.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) States may revise the plan from time to time consistent with the requirements applicable to implementation plans under this part.</P>
          <P>(b) The States must submit any revision of any regulation or any compliance schedule under paragraph (c) of this section to the Administrator no later than 60 days after its adoption.</P>
          <P>(c) EPA will approve revisions only after applicable hearing requirements of § 51.102 have been satisfied.</P>
          <P>(d) In order for a variance to be considered for approval as a revision to the State implementation plan, the State must submit it in accordance with the requirements of this section.</P>
          <CITA>[51 FR 40661, Nov. 7, 1986, as amended at 61 FR 16060, Apr. 11, 1996]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.105</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Approval of plans.</SUBJECT>
          <P>Revisions of a plan, or any portion thereof, will not be considered part of an applicable plan until such revisions have been approved by the Administrator in accordance with this part.</P>
          <CITA>[51 FR 40661, Nov. 7, 1986, as amended at 60 FR 33922, June 29, 1995]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
      </SUBPART>
      <SUBPART>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart G—Control Strategy</HD>
        <SOURCE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Source:</HD>
          <P>51 FR 40665, Nov. 7, 1986, unless otherwise noted.</P>
        </SOURCE>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.110</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Attainment and maintenance of national standards.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) Each plan providing for the attainment of a primary or secondary standard must specify the projected attainment date.</P>
          <P>(b)-(f) [Reserved]</P>
          <P>(g) During developing of the plan, EPA encourages States to identify alternative control strategies, as well as the costs and benefits of each such alternative for attainment or maintenance of the national standard.</P>
          <CITA>[51 FR 40661 Nov. 7, 1986 as amended at 61 FR 16060, Apr. 11, 1996; 61 FR 30163, June 14, 1996]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.111</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Description of control measures.</SUBJECT>
          <P>Each plan must set forth a control strategy which includes the following:</P>
          <P>(a) A description of enforcement methods including, but not limited to:</P>
          <P>(1) Procedures for monitoring compliance with each of the selected control measures,</P>
          <P>(2) Procedures for handling violations, and</P>
          <P>(3) A designation of agency responsibility for enforcement of implementation.</P>
          <P>(b) [Reserved]</P>
          <CITA>[51 FR 40665, Nov. 7, 1986, as amended at 60 FR 33922, June 29, 1995]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.112</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Demonstration of adequacy.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) Each plan must demonstrate that the measures, rules, and regulations contained in it are adequate to provide for the timely attainment and maintenance of the national standard that it implements.</P>
          <P>(1) The adequacy of a control strategy shall be demonstrated by means of applicable air quality models, data bases, and other requirements specified in appendix W of this part (Guideline on Air Quality Models).</P>
          <P>(2) Where an air quality model specified in appendix W of this part (Guideline on Air Quality Models) is inappropriate, the model may be modified or another model substituted. Such a modification or substitution of a model may be made on a case-by-case basis or, where appropriate, on a generic basis for a specific State program. Written approval of the Administrator must be obtained for any modification or substitution. In addition, use of a modified or substituted model must be subject to notice and opportunity for public comment under procedures set forth in § 51.102.</P>
          <P>(b) The demonstration must include the following:</P>

          <P>(1) A summary of the computations, assumptions, and judgments used to determine the degree of reduction of emissions (or reductions in the growth of emissions) that will result from the <PRTPAGE P="140"/>implementation of the control strategy.</P>
          <P>(2) A presentation of emission levels expected to result from implementation of each measure of the control strategy.</P>
          <P>(3) A presentation of the air quality levels expected to result from implementation of the overall control strategy presented either in tabular form or as an isopleth map showing expected maximum pollutant concentrations.</P>
          <P>(4) A description of the dispersion models used to project air quality and to evaluate control strategies.</P>
          <P>(5) For interstate regions, the analysis from each constituent State must, where practicable, be based upon the same regional emission inventory and air quality baseline.</P>
          <CITA>[51 FR 40665, Nov. 7, 1986, as amended at 58 FR 38821, July 20, 1993; 60 FR 40468, Aug. 9, 1995; 61 FR 41840, Aug. 12, 1996]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.113</SECTNO>
          <RESERVED>[Reserved]</RESERVED>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.114</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Emissions data and projections.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) Except for lead, each plan must contain a detailed inventory of emissions from point and area sources. Lead requirements are specified in § 51.117. The inventory must be based upon measured emissions or, where measured emissions are not available, documented emission factors.</P>
          <P>(b) Each plan must contain a summary of emission levels projected to result from application of the new control strategy.</P>
          <P>(c) Each plan must identify the sources of the data used in the projection of emissions.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.115</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Air quality data and projections.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) Each plan must contain a summary of data showing existing air quality.</P>
          <P>(b) Each plan must:</P>
          <P>(1) Contain a summary of air quality concentrations expected to result from application of the control strategy, and</P>
          <P>(2) Identify and describe the dispersion model, other air quality model, or receptor model used.</P>
          <P>(c) Actual measurements of air quality must be used where available if made by methods specified in appendix C to part 58 of this chapter. Estimated air quality using appropriate modeling techniques may be used to supplement measurements.</P>
          <P>(d) For purposes of developing a control strategy, background concentration shall be taken into consideration with respect to particulate matter. As used in this subpart, background concentration is that portion of the measured ambient levels that cannot be reduced by controlling emissions from man-made sources.</P>
          <P>(e) In developing an ozone control strategy for a particular area, background ozone concentrations and ozone transported into an area must be considered. States may assume that the ozone standard will be attained in upwind areas.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.116</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Data availability.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) The State must retain all detailed data and calculations used in the preparation of each plan or each plan revision, and make them available for public inspection and submit them to the Administrator at his request.</P>
          <P>(b) The detailed data and calculations used in the preparation of plan revisions are not considered a part of the plan.</P>

          <P>(c) Each plan must provide for public availability of emission data reported by source owners or operators or otherwise obtained by a State or local agency. Such emission data must be correlated with applicable emission limitations or other measures. As used in this paragraph, <E T="03">correlated</E> means presented in such a manner as to show the relationship between measured or estimated amounts of emissions and the amounts of such emissions allowable under the applicable emission limitations or other measures.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.117</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Additional provisions for lead.</SUBJECT>
          <P>In addition to other requirements in §§ 51.100 through 51.116 the following requirements apply to lead. To the extent they conflict, there requirements are controlling over those of the proceeding sections.</P>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Control strategy demonstration.</E> Each plan must contain a demonstration showing that the plan will attain and maintain the standard in the following areas:<PRTPAGE P="141"/>
          </P>
          <P>(1) Areas in the vicinity of the following point sources of lead: Primary lead smelters, Secondary lead smelters, Primary copper smelters, Lead gasoline additive plants, Lead-acid storage battery manufacturing plants that produce 2,000 or more batteries per day. Any other stationary source that actually emits 25 or more tons per year of lead or lead compounds measured as elemental lead.</P>
          <P>(2) Any other area that has lead air concentrations in excess of the national ambient air quality standard concentration for lead, measured since January 1, 1974.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Time period for demonstration of adequacy.</E> The demonstration of adequacy of the control strategy required under § 51.112 may cover a longer period if allowed by the appropriate EPA Regional Administrator.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Special modeling provisions.</E> (1) For urbanized areas with measured lead concentrations in excess of 4.0 μg/m<SU>3</SU>, quarterly mean measured since January 1, 1974, the plan must employ the modified rollback model for the demonstration of attainment as a minimum, but may use an atmospheric dispersion model if desired, consistent with requirements contained in § 51.112(a). If a proportional model is used, the air quality data should be the same year as the emissions inventory required under the paragraph e.</P>
          <P>(2) For each point source listed in § 51.117(a), that plan must employ an atmospheric dispersion model for demonstration of attainment, consistent with requirements contained in § 51.112(a).</P>
          <P>(3) For each area in the vicinity of an air quality monitor that has recorded lead concentrations in excess of the lead national standard concentration, the plan must employ the modified rollback model as a minimum, but may use an atmospheric dispersion model if desired for the demonstration of attainment, consistent with requirements contained in § 51.112(a).</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">Air quality data and projections.</E> (1) Each State must submit to the appropriate EPA Regional Office with the plan, but not part of the plan, all lead air quality data measured since January 1, 1974. This requirement does not apply if the data has already been submitted.</P>
          <P>(2) The data must be submitted in accordance with the procedures and data forms specified in Chapter 3.4.0 of the “AEROS User's Manual” concerning storage and retrieval of aerometric data (SAROAD) except where the Regional Administrator waives this requirement.</P>
          <P>(3) If additional lead air quality data are desired to determine lead air concentrations in areas suspected of exceeding the lead national ambient air quality standard, the plan may include data from any previously collected filters from particulate matter high volume samplers. In determining the lead content of the filters for control strategy demonstration purposes, a State may use, in addition to the reference method, X-ray fluorescence or any other method approved by the Regional Administrator.</P>
          <P>(e) <E T="03">Emissions data.</E> (1) The point source inventory on which the summary of the baseline lead emissions inventory is based must contain all sources that emit five or more tons of lead per year.</P>
          <P>(2) Each State must submit lead emissions data to the appropriate EPA Regional Office with the original plan. The submission must be made with the plan, but not as part of the plan, and must include emissions data and information related to point and area source emissions. The emission data and information should include the -information identified in the Hazard-ous and Trace Emissions System (HATREMS) point source coding forms for all point sources and the area source coding forms for all sources that are not point sources, but need not necessarily be in the format of those forms.</P>
          <CITA>[41 FR 18388, May 3, 1976, as amended at 58 FR 38822, July 20, 1993]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.118</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Stack height provisions.</SUBJECT>

          <P>(a) The plan must provide that the degree of emission limitation required of any source for control of any air pollutant must not be affected by so much of any source's stack height that exceeds good engineering practice or by any other dispersion technique, except as provided in § 51.118(b). The plan must <PRTPAGE P="142"/>provide that before a State submits to EPA a new or revised emission limitation that is based on a good engineering practice stack height that exceeds the height allowed by § 51.100(ii) (1) or (2), the State must notify the public of the availabilty of the demonstration study and must provide opportunity for a public hearing on it. This section does not require the plan to restrict, in any manner, the actual stack height of any source.</P>
          <P>(b) The provisions of § 51.118(a) shall not apply to (1) stack heights in existence, or dispersion techniques implemented on or before December 31, 1970, except where pollutants are being emitted from such stacks or using such dispersion techniques by sources, as defined in section 111(a)(3) of the Clean Air Act, which were constructed, or reconstructed, or for which major modifications, as defined in §§ 51.165(a)(1)(v)(A), 51.166(b)(2)(i) and 52.21(b)(2)(i), were carried out after December 31, 1970; or (2) coal-fired steam electric generating units subject to the provisions of section 118 of the Clean Air Act, which commenced operation before July 1, 1957, and whose stacks were construced under a construction contract awarded before February 8, 1974.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.119</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Intermittent control systems.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) The use of an intermittent control system (ICS) may be taken into account in establishing an emission limitation for a pollutant under a State implementation plan, provided:</P>
          <P>(1) The ICS was implemented before December 31, 1970, according to the criteria specified in § 51.119(b).</P>
          <P>(2) The extent to which the ICS is taken into account is limited to reflect emission levels and associated ambient pollutant concentrations that would result if the ICS was the same as it was before December 31, 1970, and was operated as specified by the operating system of the ICS before December 31, 1970.</P>
          <P>(3) The plan allows the ICS to compensate only for emissions from a source for which the ICS was implemented before December 31, 1970, and, in the event the source has been modified, only to the extent the emissions correspond to the maximum capacity of the source before December 31, 1970. For purposes of this paragraph, a source for which the ICS was implemented is any particular structure or equipment the emissions from which were subject to the ICS operating procedures.</P>
          <P>(4) The plan requires the continued operation of any constant pollution control system which was in use before December 31, 1970, or the equivalent of that system.</P>
          <P>(5) The plan clearly defines the emission limits affected by the ICS and the manner in which the ICS is taken into account in establishing those limits.</P>
          <P>(6) The plan contains requirements for the operation and maintenance of the qualifying ICS which, together with the emission limitations and any other necessary requirements, will assure that the national ambient air quality standards and any applicable prevention of significant deterioration increments will be attained and maintained. These requirements shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:</P>
          <P>(i) Requirements that a source owner or operator continuously operate and maintain the components of the ICS specified at § 51.119(b)(3) (ii)-(iv) in a manner which assures that the ICS is at least as effective as it was before December 31, 1970. The air quality monitors and meteorological instrumentation specified at § 51.119(b) may be operated by a local authority or other entity provided the source has ready access to the data from the monitors and instrumentation.</P>
          <P>(ii) Requirements which specify the circumstances under which, the extent to which, and the procedures through which, emissions shall be curtailed through the activation of ICS.</P>
          <P>(iii) Requirements for recordkeeping which require the owner or operator of the source to keep, for periods of at least 3 years, records of measured ambient air quality data, meteorological information acquired, and production data relating to those processes affected by the ICS.</P>

          <P>(iv) Requirements for reporting which require the owner or operator of the source to notify the State and EPA within 30 days of a NAAQS violation <PRTPAGE P="143"/>pertaining to the pollutant affected by the ICS.</P>
          <P>(7) Nothing in this paragraph affects the applicability of any new source review requirements or new source performance standards contained in the Clean Air Act or 40 CFR subchapter C. Nothing in this paragraph precludes a State from taking an ICS into account in establishing emission limitations to any extent less than permitted by this paragraph.</P>
          <P>(b) An intermittent control system (ICS) may be considered implemented for a pollutant before December 31, 1970, if the following criteria are met:</P>
          <P>(1) The ICS must have been established and operational with respect to that pollutant prior to December 31, 1970, and reductions in emissions of that pollutant must have occurred when warranted by meteorological and ambient monitoring data.</P>
          <P>(2) The ICS must have been designed and operated to meet an air quality objective for that pollutant such as an air quality level or standard.</P>
          <P>(3) The ICS must, at a minimum, have included the following components prior to December 31, 1970:</P>
          <P>(i) <E T="03">Air quality monitors.</E> An array of sampling stations whose location and type were consistent with the air quality objective and operation of the system.</P>
          <P>(ii) <E T="03">Meteorological instrumentation.</E> A meteorological data acquisition network (may be limited to a single station) which provided meteorological prediction capabilities sufficient to determine the need for, and degree of, emission curtailments necessary to achieve the air quality design objective.</P>
          <P>(iii) <E T="03">Operating system.</E> A system of established procedures for determining the need for curtailments and for accomplishing such curtailments. Documentation of this system, as required by paragraph (n)(4), may consist of a compendium of memoranda or comparable material which define the criteria and procedures for curtailments and which identify the type and number of personnel authorized to initiate curtailments.</P>
          <P>(iv) <E T="03">Meteorologist.</E> A person, schooled in meteorology, capable of interpreting data obtained from the meteorological network and qualified to forecast meteorological incidents and their effect on ambient air quality. Sources may have obtained meteorological services through a consultant. Services of such a consultant could include sufficient training of source personnel for certain operational procedures, but not for design, of the ICS.</P>
          <P>(4) Documentation sufficient to support the claim that the ICS met the criteria listed in this paragraph must be provided. Such documentation may include affidavits or other documentation.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.120</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Requirements for State Implementation Plan revisions relating to new motor vehicles.</SUBJECT>

          <P>(a) The EPA Administrator finds that the State Implementation Plans (SIPs) for the States of Connecticut, Delaware, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, and Vermont, the portion of Virginia included (as of November 15, 1990) within the Consolidated Metropolitan Statistical Area that includes the District of Columbia, are substantially inadequate to comply with the requirements of section 110(a)(2)(D) of the Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. 7410(a)(2)(D), and to mitigate adequately the interstate pollutant transport described in section 184 of the Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. 7511C, to the extent that they do not provide for emission reductions from new motor vehicles in the amount that would be achieved by the Ozone Transport Commission low emission vehicle (OTC LEV) program described in paragraph (c) of this section. This inadequacy will be deemed cured for each of the aforementioned States (including the District of Columbia) in the event that EPA determines through rulemaking that a national LEV-equivalent new motor vehicle emission control program is an acceptable alternative for OTC LEV and finds that such program is in effect. In the event no such finding is made, each of those States must adopt and submit to EPA by February 15, 1996 a SIP revision meeting the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section in order to cure the SIP inadequacy.<PRTPAGE P="144"/>
          </P>
          <P>(b) If a SIP revision is required under paragraph (a) of this section, it must contain the OTC LEV program described in paragraph (c) of this section unless the State adopts and submits to EPA, as a SIP revision, other emission-reduction measures sufficient to meet the requirements of paragraph (d) of this section. If a State adopts and submits to EPA, as a SIP revision, other emission-reduction measures pursuant to paragraph (d) of this section, then for purposes of determining whether such a SIP revision is complete within the meaning of section 110(k)(1) (and hence is eligible at least for consideration to be approved as satisfying paragraph (d) of this section), such a SIP revision must contain other adopted emission-reduction measures that, together with the identified potentially broadly practicable measures, achieve at least the minimum level of emission reductions that could potentially satisfy the requirements of paragraph (d) of this section. All such measures must be fully adopted and enforceable.</P>
          <P>(c) The OTC LEV program is a program adopted pursuant to section 177 of the Clean Air Act.</P>
          <P>(1) The OTC LEV program shall contain the following elements:</P>
          <P>(i) It shall apply to all new 1999 and later model year passenger cars and light-duty trucks (0-5750 pounds loaded vehicle weight), as defined in Title 13, California Code of Regulations, section 1900(b)(11) and (b)(8), respectively, that are sold, imported, delivered, purchased, leased, rented, acquired, received, or registered in any area of the State that is in the Northeast Ozone Transport Region as of December 19, 1994.</P>
          <P>(ii) All vehicles to which the OTC LEV program is applicable shall be required to have a certificate from the California Air Resources Board (CARB) affirming compliance with California standards.</P>

          <P>(iii) All vehicles to which this LEV program is applicable shall be required to meet the mass emission standards for Non-Methane Organic Gases (NMOG), Carbon Monoxide (CO), Oxides of Nitrogen (NO<E T="52">X</E>), Formaldehyde (HCHO), and particulate matter (PM) as specified in Title 13, California Code of Regulations, section 1960.1(f)(2) (and formaldehyde standards under section 1960.1(e)(2), as applicable) or as specified by California for certification as a TLEV (Transitional Low-Emission Vehicle), LEV (Low-Emission Vehicle), ULEV (Ultra-Low-Emission Vehicle), or ZEV (Zero-Emission Vehicle) under section 1960.1(g)(1) (and section 1960.1(e)(3), for formaldehyde standards, as applicable).</P>
          <P>(iv) All manufacturers of vehicles subject to the OTC LEV program shall be required to meet the fleet average NMOG exhaust emission values for production and delivery for sale of their passenger cars, light-duty trucks 0-3750 pounds loaded vehicle weight, and light-duty trucks 3751-5750 pounds loaded vehicle weight specified in Title 13, California Code of Regulations, section 1960.1(g)(2) for each model year beginning in 1999. A State may determine not to implement the NMOG fleet average in the first model year of the program if the State begins implementation of the program late in a calendar year. However, all States must implement the NMOG fleet average in any full model years of the LEV program.</P>
          <P>(v) All manufacturers shall be allowed to average, bank and trade credits in the same manner as allowed under the program specified in Title 13, California Code of Regulations, section 1960.1(g)(2) footnote 7 for each model year beginning in 1999. States may account for credits banked by manufacturers in California or New York in years immediately preceding model year 1999, in a manner consistent with California banking and discounting procedures.</P>
          <P>(vi) The provisions for small volume manufacturers and intermediate volume manufacturers, as applied by Title 13, California Code of Regulations to California's LEV program, shall apply. Those manufacturers defined as small volume manufacturers and intermediate volume manufacturers in California under California's regulations shall be considered small volume manufacturers and intermediate volume manufacturers under this program.</P>

          <P>(vii) The provisions for hybrid electric vehicles (HEVs), as defined in Title 13 California Code of Regulations, section 1960.1, shall apply for purposes of calculating fleet average NMOG values.<PRTPAGE P="145"/>
          </P>
          <P>(viii) The provisions for fuel-flexible vehicles and dual-fuel vehicles specified in Title 13, California Code of Regulations, section 1960.1(g)(1) footnote 4 shall apply.</P>
          <P>(ix) The provisions for reactivity adjustment factors, as defined by Title 13, California Code of Regulations, shall apply.</P>
          <P>(x) The aforementioned State OTC LEV standards shall be identical to the aforementioned California standards as such standards exist on December 19, 1994.</P>
          <P>(xi) All States' OTC LEV programs must contain any other provisions of California's LEV program specified in Title 13, California Code of Regulations necessary to comply with section 177 of the Clean Air Act.</P>
          <P>(2) States are not required to include the mandate for production of ZEVs specified in Title 13, California Code of Regulations, section 1960.1(g)(2) footnote 9.</P>
          <P>(3) Except as specified elsewhere in this section, States may implement the OTC LEV program in any manner consistent with the Act that does not decrease the emissions reductions or jeopardize the effectiveness of the program.</P>
          <P>(d) The SIP revision that paragraph (b) of this section describes as an alternative to the OTC LEV program described in paragraph (c) of this section must contain a set of State-adopted measures that provides at least the following amount of emission reductions in time to bring serious ozone nonattainment areas into attainment by their 1999 attainment date:</P>
          <P>(1) Reductions at least equal to the difference between:</P>
          <P>(i) The nitrogen oxides (NO<E T="52">X</E>) emission reductions from the 1990 statewide emissions inventory achievable through implementation of all of the Clean Air Act-mandated and potentially broadly practicable control measures throughout all portions of the State that are within the Northeast Ozone Transport Region created under section 184(a) of the Clean Air Act as of December 19, 1994; and</P>
          <P>(ii) A reduction in NO<E T="52">X</E> emissions from the 1990 statewide inventory in such portions of the State of 50% or whatever greater reduction is necessary to prevent significant contribution to nonattainment in, or interference with maintenance by, any downwind State.</P>
          <P>(2) Reductions at least equal to the difference between:</P>
          <P>(i) The VOC emission reductions from the 1990 statewide emissions inventory achievable through implementation of all of the Clean Air Act-mandated and potentially broadly practicable control measures in all portions of the State in, or near and upwind of, any of the serious or severe ozone nonattainment areas lying in the series of such areas running northeast from the Washington, DC, ozone nonattainment area to and including the Portsmouth, New Hampshire ozone nonattainment area; and</P>
          <P>(ii) A reduction in VOC emissions from the 1990 emissions inventory in all such areas of 50% or whatever greater reduction is necessary to prevent significant contribution to nonattainment in, or interference with maintenance by, any downwind State.</P>
          <CITA>[60 FR 4736, Jan. 24, 1995]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
      </SUBPART>
      <SUBPART>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart H—Prevention of Air Pollution Emergency Episodes</HD>
        <SOURCE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Source:</HD>
          <P>51 FR 40668, Nov. 7, 1986, unless otherwise noted.</P>
        </SOURCE>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.150</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Classification of regions for episode plans.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) This section continues the classification system for episode plans. Each region is classified separately with respect to each of the following pollutants: Sulfur oxides, particulate matter, carbon monoxide, nitrogen dioxide, and ozone.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Priority I Regions</E> means any area with greater ambient concentrations than the following:</P>
          <P>(1) Sulfur dioxide—100 μg/m<E T="51">3</E> (0.04 ppm) annual arithmetic mean; 455 μg/m<E T="51">3</E> (0.17 ppm) 24-hour maximum.</P>
          <P>(2) Particulate matter—95 μg/m<E T="51">3</E> annual geometric mean; 325 μg/m<E T="51">3</E> 24-hour maximum.</P>
          <P>(3) Carbon monoxide—55 mg/m<E T="51">3</E> (48 ppm) 1-hour maximum; 14 mg/m<E T="51">3</E> (12 ppm) 8-hour maximum.</P>
          <P>(4) Nitrogen dioxide—100 μg/m<E T="51">3</E> (0.06 ppm) annual arithmetic mean.<PRTPAGE P="146"/>
          </P>
          <P>(5) Ozone—195 μg/m<E T="51">3</E> (0.10 ppm) 1-hour maximum.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Priority IA Region</E> means any area which is Priority I primarily because of emissions from a single point source.</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">Priority II Region</E> means any area which is not a Priority I region and has ambient concentrations between the following:</P>
          <P>(1) Sulfur Dioxides—60-100 μg/m<E T="51">3</E> (0.02-0.04 ppm) annual arithmetic mean; 260-445 μg/m<E T="51">3</E> (0.10-0.17 ppm) 24-hour maximum; any concentration above 1,300 μg/m<E T="51">3</E> (0.50 ppm) three-hour average.</P>
          <P>(2) Particulate matter—60-95 μg/m<E T="51">3</E> annual geometric mean; 150-325 μg/m<E T="51">3</E> 24-hour maximum.</P>
          <P>(e) In the absence of adequate monitoring data, appropriate models must be used to classify an area under paragraph (b) of this section, consistent with the requirements contained in § 51.112(a).</P>
          <P>(f) Areas which do not meet the above criteria are classified Priority III.</P>
          <CITA>[51 FR 40668, Nov. 7, 1986, as amended at 58 FR 38822, July 20, 1993]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.151</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Significant harm levels.</SUBJECT>

          <P>Each plan for a Priority I region must include a contingency plan which must, as a mimimum, provide for taking action necessary to prevent ambient pollutant concentrations at any location in such region from reaching the following levels:
          </P>
          <EXTRACT>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
              <E T="03">Sulfur dioxide—</E>2.620 μg/m<E T="51">3</E> (1.0 ppm) 24-hour average.</FP>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">PM<E T="52">10</E>—600 micrograms/cubic meter; 24-hour average.</FP>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
              <E T="03">Carbon monoxide—</E>57.5 mg/m<E T="51">3</E> (50 ppm) 8-hour average; 86.3 mg/m<E T="51">3</E> (75 ppm) 4-hour average; 144 mg/m<E T="51">3</E> (125 ppm) 1-hour average.</FP>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
              <E T="03">Ozone</E>—1,200 ug/m<E T="51">3</E> (0.6 ppm) 2-hour average.</FP>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">
              <E T="03">Nitrogen dioxide</E>—3.750 ug/m<E T="51">3</E> (2.0 ppm) 1-hour average; 938 ug/m<E T="51">3</E> (0.5 ppm) 24-hour average.</FP>
          </EXTRACT>
          <CITA>[51 FR 40668, Nov. 7, 1986, as amended at 52 FR 24713, July 1, 1987]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.152</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Contingency plans.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) Each contingency plan must—</P>
          <P>(1) Specify two or more stages of episode criteria such as those set forth in appendix L to this part, or their equivalent;</P>
          <P>(2) Provide for public announcement whenever any episode stage has been determined to exist; and</P>
          <P>(3) Specify adequate emission control actions to be taken at each episode stage. (Examples of emission control actions are set forth in appendix L.)</P>
          <P>(b) Each contingency plan for a Priority I region must provide for the following:</P>
          <P>(1) Prompt acquisition of forecasts of atmospheric stagnation conditions and of updates of such forecasts as frequently as they are issued by the National Weather Service.</P>
          <P>(2) Inspection of sources to ascertain compliance with applicable emission control action requirements.</P>
          <P>(3) Communications procedures for transmitting status reports and orders as to emission control actions to be taken during an episode stage, including procedures for contact with public officials, major emission sources, public health, safety, and emergency agencies and news media.</P>
          <P>(c) Each plan for a Priority IA and II region must include a contingency plan that meets, as a minimum, the requirements of paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) of this section. Areas classified Priority III do not need to develop episode plans.</P>
          <P>(d) Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section, the Administrator may, at his discretion—</P>
          <P>(1) Exempt from the requirements of this section those portions of Priority I, IA, or II regions which have been designated as attainment or unclassifiable for national primary and secondary standards under section 107 of the Act; or</P>
          <P>(2) Limit the requirements pertaining to emission control actions in Priority I regions to—</P>
          <P>(i) Urbanized areas as identified in the most recent United States Census, and</P>
          <P>(ii) Major emitting facilities, as defined by section 169(1) of the Act, outside the urbanized areas.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.153</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Reevaluation of episode plans.</SUBJECT>

          <P>(a) States should periodically reevaluate priority classifications of all Regions or portion of Regions within their borders. The reevaluation must <PRTPAGE P="147"/>consider the three most recent years of air quality data. If the evaluation indicates a change to a higher priority classification, appropriate changes in the episode plan must be made as expeditiously as practicable.</P>
          <P>(b) [Reserved]</P>
        </SECTION>
      </SUBPART>
      <SUBPART>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart I—Review of New Sources and Modifications</HD>
        <SOURCE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Source:</HD>
          <P>51 FR 40669, Nov. 7, 1986, unless otherwise noted.</P>
        </SOURCE>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.160</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Legally enforceable procedures.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) Each plan must set forth legally enforceable procedures that enable the State or local agency to determine whether the construction or modification of a facility, building, structure or installation, or combination of these will result in—</P>
          <P>(1) A violation of applicable portions of the control strategy; or</P>
          <P>(2) Interference with attainment or maintenance of a national standard in the State in which the proposed source (or modification) is located or in a neighboring State.</P>
          <P>(b) Such procedures must include means by which the State or local agency responsible for final decisionmaking on an application for approval to construct or modify will prevent such construction or modification if—</P>
          <P>(1) It will result in a violation of applicable portions of the control strategy; or</P>
          <P>(2) It will interfere with the attainment or maintenance of a national standard.</P>
          <P>(c) The procedures must provide for the submission, by the owner or operator of the building, facility, structure, or installation to be constructed or modified, of such information on—</P>
          <P>(1) The nature and amounts of emissions to be emitted by it or emitted by associated mobile sources;</P>
          <P>(2) The location, design, construction, and operation of such facility, building, structure, or installation as may be necessary to permit the State or local agency to make the determination referred to in paragraph (a) of this section.</P>
          <P>(d) The procedures must provide that approval of any construction or modification must not affect the responsibility to the owner or operator to comply with applicable portions of the control strategy.</P>
          <P>(e) The procedures must identify types and sizes of facilities, buildings, structures, or installations which will be subject to review under this section. The plan must discuss the basis for determining which facilities will be subject to review.</P>
          <P>(f) The procedures must discuss the air quality data and the dispersion or other air quality modeling used to meet the requirements of this subpart.</P>
          <P>(1) All applications of air quality modeling involved in this subpart shall be based on the applicable models, data bases, and other requirements specified in appendix W of this part (Guideline on Air Quality Models).</P>
          <P>(2) Where an air quality model specified in appendix W of this part (Guideline on Air Quality Models) is inappropriate, the model may be modified or another model substituted. Such a modification or substitution of a model may be made on a case-by-case basis or, where appropriate, on a generic basis for a specific State program. Written approval of the Administrator must be obtained for any modification or substitution. In addition, use of a modified or substituted model must be subject to notice and opportunity for public comment under procedures set forth in § 51.102.</P>
          <CITA>[51 FR 40669, Nov. 7, 1986, as amended at 58 FR 38822, July 20, 1993; 60 FR 40468, Aug. 9, 1995; 61 FR 41840, Aug. 12, 1996]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.161</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Public availability of information.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) The legally enforceable procedures in § 51.160 must also require the State or local agency to provide opportunity for public comment on information submitted by owners and operators. The public information must include the agency's analysis of the effect of construction or modification on ambient air quality, including the agency's proposed approval or disapproval.</P>

          <P>(b) For purposes of paragraph (a) of this section, opportunity for public comment shall include, as a minimum—<PRTPAGE P="148"/>
          </P>
          <P>(1) Availability for public inspection in at least one location in the area affected of the information submitted by the owner or operator and of the State or local agency's analysis of the effect on air quality;</P>
          <P>(2) A 30-day period for submittal of public comment; and</P>
          <P>(3) A notice by prominent advertisement in the area affected of the location of the source information and analysis specified in paragraph (b)(1) of this section.</P>
          <P>(c) Where the 30-day comment period required in paragraph (b) of this section would conflict with existing requirements for acting on requests for permission to construct or modify, the State may submit for approval a comment period which is consistent with such existing requirements.</P>
          <P>(d) A copy of the notice required by paragraph (b) of this section must also be sent to the Administrator through the appropriate Regional Office, and to all other State and local air pollution control agencies having jurisdiction in the region in which such new or modified installation will be located. The notice also must be sent to any other agency in the region having responsibility for implementing the procedures required under this subpart. For lead, a copy of the notice is required for all point sources. The definition of point for lead is given in § 51.100(k)(2).</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.162</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Identification of responsible agency.</SUBJECT>
          <P>Each plan must identify the State or local agency which will be responsible for meeting the requirements of this subpart in each area of the State. Where such responsibility rests with an agency other than an air pollution control agency, such agency will consult with the appropriate State or local air pollution control agency in carrying out the provisions of this subpart.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.163</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Administrative procedures.</SUBJECT>
          <P>The plan must include the administrative procedures, which will be followed in making the determination specified in paragraph (a) of § 51.160.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.164</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Stack height procedures.</SUBJECT>
          <P>Such procedures must provide that the degree of emission limitation required of any source for control of any air pollutant must not be affected by so much of any source's stack height that exceeds good engineering practice or by any other dispersion technique, except as provided in § 51.118(b). Such procedures must provide that before a State issues a permit to a source based on a good engineering practice stack height that exceeds the height allowed by § 51.100(ii) (1) or (2), the State must notify the public of the availability of the demonstration study and must provide opportunity for public hearing on it. This section does not require such procedures to restrict in any manner the actual stack height of any source.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.165</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Permit requirements.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) State Implementation Plan provisions satisfying sections 172(b)(6) and 173 of the Act shall meet the following conditions:</P>
          <P>(1) All such plans shall use the specific definitions. Deviations from the following wording will be approved only if the State specifically demonstrates that the submitted definition is more stringent, or at least as stringent, in all respects as the corresponding definition below:</P>
          <P>(i) <E T="03">Stationary source</E> means any building, structure, facility, or installation which emits or may emit any air pollutant subject to regulation under the Act.</P>
          <P>(ii) <E T="03">Building, structure, facility, or installation</E> means all of the pollutant-emitting activities which belong to the same industrial grouping, are located on one or more contiguous or adjacent properties, and are under the control of the same person (or persons under common control) except the activities of any vessel. Pollutant-emitting activities shall be considered as part of the same industrial grouping if they belong to the same <E T="03">Major Group</E> (i.e., which have the same two-digit code) as described in the <E T="03">Standard Industrial Classification Manual, 1972,</E> as amended by the 1977 Supplement (U.S. Government Printing Office stock numbers 4101-0065 and 003-005-00176-0, respectively).</P>
          <P>(iii) <E T="03">Potential to emit</E> means the maximum capacity of a stationary source to emit a pollutant under its physical and operational design. Any physical or operational limitation on the capacity <PRTPAGE P="149"/>of the source to emit a pollutant, including air pollution control equipment and restrictions on hours of operation or on the type or amount of material combusted, stored, or processed, shall be treated as part of its design only if the limitation or the effect it would have on emissions is federally enforceable. Secondary emissions do not count in determining the potential to emit of a stationary source.</P>
          <P>(iv)(A) <E T="03">Major stationary source</E> means:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">1</E>) Any stationary source of air pollutants which emits, or has the potential to emit 100 tons per year or more of any pollutant subject to regulation under the Act, or</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">2</E>) Any physical change that would occur at a stationary source not qualifying under paragraph (a)(1)(iv)(A)(<E T="03">1</E>) as a major stationary source, if the change would constitute a major stationary source by itself.</P>
          <P>(B) A major stationary source that is major for volatile organic compounds shall be considered major for ozone</P>
          <P>(C) The fugitive emissions of a stationary source shall not be included in determining for any of the purposes of this paragraph whether it is a major stationary source, unless the source belongs to one of the following categories of stationary sources:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">1</E>) Coal cleaning plants (with thermal dryers);</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">2</E>) Kraft pulp mills;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">3</E>) Portland cement plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">4</E>) Primary zinc smelters;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">5</E>) Iron and steel mills;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">6</E>) Primary aluminum ore reduction plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">7</E>) Primary copper smelters;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">8</E>) Municipal incinerators capable of charging more than 250 tons of refuse per day;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">9</E>) Hydrofluoric, sulfuric, or nitric acid plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">10</E>) Petroleum refineries;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">11</E>) Lime plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">12</E>) Phosphate rock processing plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">13</E>) Coke oven batteries;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">14</E>) Sulfur recovery plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">15</E>) Carbon black plants (furnace process);</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">16</E>) Primary lead smelters;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">17</E>) Fuel conversion plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">18</E>) Sintering plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">19</E>) Secondary metal production plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">20</E>) Chemical process plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">21</E>) Fossil-fuel boilers (or combination thereof) totaling more than 250 million British thermal units per hour heat input;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">22</E>) Petroleum storage and transfer units with a total storage capacity exceeding 300,000 barrels;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">23</E>) Taconite ore processing plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">24</E>) Glass fiber processing plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">25</E>) Charcoal production plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">26</E>) Fossil fuel-fired steam electric plants of more than 250 million British thermal units per hour heat input; and</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">27</E>) Any other stationary source category which, as of August 7, 1980, is being regulated under section 111 or 112 of the Act.</P>
          <P>(v)(A) <E T="03">Major modification</E> means any physical change in or change in the method of operation of a major stationary source that would result in a significant net emissions increase of any pollutant subject to regulation under the Act.</P>
          <P>(B) Any net emissions increase that is considered significant for volatile organic compounds shall be considered significant for ozone.</P>
          <P>(C) A physical change or change in the method of operation shall not include:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">1</E>) Routine maintenance, repair and replacement;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">2</E>) Use of an alternative fuel or raw material by reason of an order under sections 2 (a) and (b) of the Energy Supply and Environmental Coordination Act of 1974 (or any superseding legislation) or by reason of a natural gas curtailment plan pursuant to the Federal Power Act;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">3</E>) Use of an alternative fuel by reason of an order or rule section 125 of the Act;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">4</E>) Use of an alternative fuel at a steam generating unit to the extent that the fuel is generated from municipal solid waste;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">5</E>) Use of an alternative fuel or raw material by a stationary source which;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">i</E>) The source was capable of accommodating before December 21, 1976, unless such change would be prohibited under any federally enforceable permit condition which was established after December 12, 1976 pursuant to 40 CFR <PRTPAGE P="150"/>52.21 or under regulations approved pursuant to 40 CFR subpart I or § 51.166, or</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">ii</E>) The source is approved to use under any permit issued under regulations approved pursuant to this section;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">6</E>) An increase in the hours of operation or in the production rate, unless such change is prohibited under any federally enforceable permit condition which was established after December 21, 1976 pursuant to 40 CFR 52.21 or regulations approved pursuant to 40 CFR part 51 subpart I or 40 CFR 51.166.</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">7</E>) Any change in ownership at a stationary source.</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">8</E>) The addition, replacement or use of a pollution control project at an existing electric utility steam generating unit, unless the reviewing authority determines that such addition, replacement, or use renders the unit less environmentally beneficial, or except:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">i</E>) When the reviewing authority has reason to believe that the pollution control project would result in a significant net increase in representative actual annual emissions of any criteria pollutant over levels used for that source in the most recent air quality impact analysis in the area conducted for the purpose of title I, if any, and</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">ii</E>) The reviewing authority determines that the increase will cause or contribute to a violation of any national ambient air quality standard or PSD increment, or visibility limitation.</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">9</E>) The installation, operation, cessation, or removal of a temporary clean coal technology demonstration project, provided that the project complies with:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">i</E>) The State Implementation Plan for the State in which the project is located, and</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">ii</E>) Other requirements necessary to attain and maintain the national ambient air quality standard during the project and after it is terminated.</P>
          <P>(vi)(A) <E T="03">Net emissions increase</E> means the amount by which the sum of the following exceeds zero:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">1</E>) Any increase in actual emissions from a particular physical change or change in the method of operation at a stationary source; and</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">2</E>) Any other increases and decreases in actual emissions at the source that are contemporaneous with the particular change and are otherwise creditable.</P>
          <P>(B) An increase or decrease in actual emissions is contemporaneous with the increase from the particular change only if it occurs before the date that the increase from the particular change occurs;</P>
          <P>(C) An increase or decrease in actual emissions is creditable only if:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">1</E>) It occurs within a reasonable period to be specified by the reviewing authority; and</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">2</E>) The reviewing authority has not relied on it in issuing a permit for the source under regulations approved pursuant to this section which permit is in effect when the increase in actual emissions from the particular change occurs.</P>
          <P>(D) An increase in actual emissions is creditable only to the extent that the new level of actual emissions exceeds the old level.</P>
          <P>(E) A decrease in actual emissions is creditable only to the extent that:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">1</E>) The old level of actual emission or the old level of allowable emissions whichever is lower, exceeds the new level of actual emissions;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">2</E>) It is federally enforceable at and after the time that actual construction on the particular change begins; and</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">3</E>) The reviewing authority has not relied on it in issuing any permit under regulations approved pursuant to 40 CFR part 51 subpart I or the State has not relied on it in demonstrating attainment or reasonable further progress;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">4</E>) It has approximately the same qualitative significance for public health and welfare as that attributed to the increase from the particular change.</P>
          <P>(F) An increase that results from a physical change at a source occurs when the emissions unit on which construction occurred becomes operational and begins to emit a particular pollutant. Any replacement unit that requires shakedown becomes operational only after a reasonable shakedown period, not to exceed 180 days.</P>
          <P>(vii) <E T="03">Emissions unit</E> means any part of a stationary source which emits or <PRTPAGE P="151"/>would have the potential to emit any pollutant subject to regulation under the the Act.</P>
          <P>(viii) <E T="03">Secondary emissons</E> means emissions which would occur as a result of the construction or operation of a major stationary source or major modification, but do not come from the major stationary source or major modification itself. For the purpose of this section, secondary emissions must be specific, well defined, quantifiable, and impact the same general area as the stationary source or modification which causes the secondary emissions. Secondary emissions include emissions from any offsite support facility which would not be constructed or increase its emissions except as a result of the construction of operation of the major stationary source of major modification. Secondary emissions do not include any emissions which come directly from a mobile source such as emissions from the tailpipe of a motor vehicle, from a train, or from a vessel.</P>
          <P>(ix) <E T="03">Fugitive emissions</E> means those emissions which could not reasonably pass through a stack, chimney, vent or other functionally equivalent opening.</P>
          <P>(x) <E T="03">Significant</E> means, in reference to a net emissions increase pr the potential of a source to emit any of the following pollutions, as rate of emissions that would equal or exceed any of the following rates:
          </P>
          <EXTRACT>
            <HD SOURCE="HD1">Pollutant Emission Rate</HD>
            <FP>Carbon monoxide: 100 tons per year (tpy)</FP>
            <FP>Nitrogen oxides: 40 tpy</FP>
            <FP>Sulfur dioxide: 40 tpy</FP>
            <FP>Ozone: 40 tpy of volatile organic compounds</FP>
            <FP>Lead: 0.6 tpy</FP>
          </EXTRACT>
          
          <P>(xi) <E T="03">Allowable emissions</E> means the emissions rate of a stationary source calculated using the maximum rated capacity of the source (unless the source is subject to federally enforceable limits which restrict the operating rate, or hours of operation, or both) and the most stringent of the following:</P>
          <P>(A) The applicable standards set forth in 40 CFR part 60 or 61;</P>
          <P>(B) Any applicable State Implementation Plan emissions limitation including those with a future compliance date; or</P>
          <P>(C) The emissions rate specified as a federally enforceable permit condition, including those with a future compliance date.</P>
          <P>(xii)(A) <E T="03">Actual emissions</E> means the actual rate of emissions of a pollutant from an emissions unit as determined in accordance with paragraphs (a)(1)(xii) (B) through (D) of this section.</P>
          <P>(B) In general, actual emissions as of a particular date shall equal the average rate, in tons per year, at which the unit actually emitted the pollutant during a two-year period which precedes the particular date and which is representative of normal source operation. The reviewing authority shall allow the use of a different time period upon a determination that it is more representative of normal source operation. Actual emissions shall be calculated using the unit's actual operating hours, production rates, and types of materials processed, stored, or combusted during the selected time period.</P>
          <P>(C) The reviewing authority may presume that the source-specific allowable emissions for the unit are equivalent to the actual emissions of the unit.</P>
          <P>(D) For any emissions unit (other than an electric utility steam generating unit specified in paragraph (a)(1)(xii)(E) of this section) which has not begun normal operations on the particular date, actual emissions shall equal the potential to emit of the unit on that date.</P>

          <P>(E) For an electric utility steam generating unit (other than a new unit or the replacement of an existing unit) actual emissions of the unit following the physical or operational change shall equal the representative actual annual emissions of the unit, provided the source owner or operator maintains and submits to the reviewing authority, on an annual basis for a period of 5 years from the date the unit resumes regular operation, information demonstrating that the physical or operational change did not result in an emissions increase. A longer period, not to exceed 10 years, may be required by the reviewing authority if it determines such a period to be more representative of normal source post-change operations.<PRTPAGE P="152"/>
          </P>
          <P>(xiii) <E T="03">Lowest achievable emission rate</E> means, for any source, the more stringent rate of emissions based on the following:</P>
          <P>(A) The most stringent emissions limitation which is contained in the implementation plan of any State for such class or category of stationary source, unless the owner or operator of the proposed stationary source demonstrates that such limitations are not achievable; or</P>
          <P>(B) The most stringent emissions limitation which is achieved in practice by such class or category of stationary sources. This limitation, when applied to a modification, means the lowest achievable emissions rate for the new or modified emissions units within or stationary source. In no event shall the application of the term permit a proposed new or modified stationary source to emit any pollutant in excess of the amount allowable under an applicable new source standard of performance.</P>
          <P>(xiv) <E T="03">Federally enforceable</E> means all limitations and conditions which are enforceable by the Administrator, including those requirements developed pursuant to 40 CFR parts 60 and 61, requirements within any applicable State implementation plan, any permit requirements established pursuant to 40 CFR 52.21 or under regulations approved pursuant to 40 CFR part 51, subpart I, including operating permits issued under an EPA-approved program that is incorporated into the State implementation plan and expressly requires adherence to any permit issued under such program.</P>
          <P>(xv) <E T="03">Begin actual construction</E> means in general, initiation of physical on-site construction activities on an emissions unit which are of a permanent nature. Such activities include, but are not limited to, installation of building supports and foundations, laying of underground pipework, and construction of permanent storage structures. With respect to a change in method of operating this term refers to those on-site activities other than preparatory activities which mark the initiation of the change.</P>
          <P>(xvi) <E T="03">Commence</E> as applied to construction of a major stationary source or major modification means that the owner or operator has all necessary preconstruction approvals or permits and either has:</P>
          <P>(A) Begun, or caused to begin, a continuous program of actual on-site construction of the source, to be completed within a reasonable time; or</P>
          <P>(B) Entered into binding agreements or contractual obligations, which cannot be canceled or modified without substantial loss to the owner or operator, to undertake a program of actual construction of the source to be completed within a reasonable time.</P>
          <P>(xvii) <E T="03">Necessary preconstruction approvals or permits</E> means those Federal air quality control laws and regulations and those air quality control laws and regulations which are part of the applicable State Implementation Plan.</P>
          <P>(xviii) <E T="03">Construction</E> means any physical change or change in the method of operation (including fabrication, erection, installation, demolition, or modification of an emissions unit) which would result in a change in actual emissions.</P>
          <P>(xix)<E T="03">Volatile organic compounds (VOC)</E> is as defined in § 51.100(s) of this part.</P>
          <P>(xx) <E T="03">Electric utility steam generating unit</E> means any steam electric generating unit that is constructed for the purpose of supplying more than one-third of its potential electric output capacity and more than 25 MW electrical output to any utility power distribution system for sale. Any steam supplied to a steam distribution system for the purpose of providing steam to a steam-electric generator that would produce electrical energy for sale is also considered in determining the electrical energy output capacity of the affected facility.</P>
          <P>(xxi) <E T="03">Representative actual annual emissions</E> means the average rate, in tons per year, at which the source is projected to emit a pollutant for the two-year period after a physical change or change in the method of operation of a unit, (or a different consecutive two-year period within 10 years after that change, where the reviewing authority determines that such period is more representative of source operations), considering the effect any such change will have on increasing or decreasing <PRTPAGE P="153"/>the hourly emissions rate and on projected capacity utilization. In projecting future emissions the reviewing authority shall:</P>
          <P>(A) Consider all relevant information, including but not limited to, historical operational data, the company's own representations, filings with the State or Federal regulatory authorities, and compliance plans under title IV of the Clean Air Act; and</P>
          <P>(B) Exclude, in calculating any increase in emissions that results from the particular physical change or change in the method of operation at an electric utility steam generating unit, that portion of the unit's emissions following the change that could have been accommodated during the representative baseline period and is attributable to an increase in projected capacity utilization at the unit that is unrelated to the particular change, including any increased utilization due to the rate of electricity demand growth for the utility system as a whole.</P>
          <P>(xxii) <E T="03">Temporary clean coal technology demonstration project</E> means a clean coal technology demonstration project that is operated for a period of 5 years or less, and which complies with the State Implementation Plan for the State in which the project is located and other requirements necessary to attain and maintain the national ambient air quality standards during the project and after it is terminated.</P>
          <P>(xxiii) <E T="03">Clean coal technology</E> means any technology, including technologies applied at the precombustion, combustion, or post combustion stage, at a new or existing facility which will achieve significant reductions in air emissions of sulfur dioxide or oxides of nitrogen associated with the utilization of coal in the generation of electricity, or process steam which was not in widespread use as of November 15, 1990.</P>
          <P>(xxiv) <E T="03">Clean coal technology demonstration project</E> means a project using funds appropriated under the heading “Department of Energy-Clean Coal Technology,” up to a total amount of $2,500,000,000 for commercial demonstration of clean coal technology, or similar projects funded through appropriations for the Environmental Protection Agency. The Federal contribution for a qualifying project shall be at least 20 percent of the total cost of the demonstration project.</P>
          <P>(xxv) <E T="03">Pollution control project</E> means any activity or project at an existing electric utility steam generating unit for purposes of reducing emissions from such unit. Such activities or projects are limited to:</P>
          <P>(A) The installation of conventional or innovative pollution control technology, including but not limited to advanced flue gas desulfurization, sorbent injection for sulfur dioxide and nitrogen oxides controls and electrostatic precipitators;</P>
          <P>(B) An activity or project to accommodate switching to a fuel which is less polluting than the fuel used prior to the activity or project, including, but not limited to natural gas or coal reburning, or the cofiring of natural gas and other fuels for the purpose of controlling emissions;</P>
          <P>(C) A permanent clean coal technology demonstration project conducted under title II, sec. 101(d) of the Further Continuing Appropriations Act of 1985 (sec. 5903(d) of title 42 of the United States Code), or subsequent appropriations, up to a total amount of $2,500,000,000 for commercial demonstration of clean coal technology, or similar projects funded through appropriations for the Environmental Protection Agency; or</P>
          <P>(D) A permanent clean coal technology demonstration project that constitutes a repowering project.</P>

          <P>(2) Each plan shall adopt a preconstruction review program to satisfy the requirements of sections 172(b)(6) and 173 of the Act for any area designated nonattainment for any national ambient air quality standard under 40 CFR 81.300 <E T="03">et seq.</E> Such a program shall apply to any new major stationary source or major modification that is major for the pollutant for which the area is designated nonattainment, if the stationary source or modification would locate anywhere in the designated nonattainment area.</P>

          <P>(3)(i) Each plan shall provide that for sources and modifications subject to any preconstruction review program adopted pursuant to this subsection the baseline for determining credit for <PRTPAGE P="154"/>emissions reductions is the emissions limit under the applicable State Implementation Plan in effect at the time the application to construct is filed, except that the offset baseline shall be the actual emissions of the source from which offset credit is obtained where;</P>
          <P>(A) The demonstration of reasonable further progress and attainment of ambient air quality standards is based upon the actual emissions of sources located within a designated nonattainment area for which the pre-con-struction review program was adopted; or</P>
          <P>(B) The applicable State Implementation Plan does not contain an emissions limitation for that source or source category.</P>
          <P>(ii) The plan shall further provide that:</P>
          <P>(A) Where the emissions limit under the applicable State Implementation Plan allows greater emissions than the potential to emit of the source, emissions offset credit will be allowed only for control below this potential;</P>
          <P>(B) For an existing fuel combustion source, credit shall be based on the allowable emissions under the applicable State Implementation Plan for the type of fuel being burned at the time the application to construct is filed. If the existing source commits to switch to a cleaner fuel at some future date, emissions offset credit based on the allowable (or actual) emissions for the fuels involved is not acceptable, unless the permit is conditioned to require the use of a specified alternative control measure which would achieve the same degree of emissions reduction should the source switch back to a dirtier fuel at some later date. The reviewing authority should ensure that adequate long-term supplies of the new fuel are available before granting emissions offset credit for fuel switches,</P>
          <P>(C)(<E T="03">1</E>) Emissions reductions achieved by shutting down an existing source or curtailing production or operating hours below baseline levels may be generally credited if such reductions are permanent, quantifiable, and federally enforceable, and if the area has an EPA-approved attainment plan. In addition, the shutdown or curtailment is creditable only if it occurred on or after the date specified for this purpose in the plan, and if such date is on or after the date of the most recent emissions inventory used in the plan's demonstration of attainment. Where the plan does not specify a cutoff date for shutdown credits, the date of the most recent emissions inventory or attainment demonstration, as the case may be, shall apply. However, in no event may credit be given for shutdowns which occurred prior to August 7, 1977. For purposes of this paragraph, a permitting authority may choose to consider a prior shutdown or curtailment to have occurred after the date of its most recent emissions inventory, if the inventory explicitly includes as current <E T="03">existing</E> emissions the emissions from such previously shutdown or curtailed sources.</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">2</E>) Such reductions may be credited in the absence of an approved attainment demonstration only if the shutdown or curtailment occurred on or after the date the new source permit application is filed, or, if the applicant can establish that the proposed new source is a replacement for the -shutdown or curtailed source, and -the cutoff date provisions of § 51.165(a)(3)(ii)(C)(<E T="03">1</E>) are observed.</P>
          <P>(D) No emissions credit may be allowed for replacing one hydrocarbon compound with another of lesser reactivity, except for those compounds listed in Table 1 of EPA's “Recommended Policy on Control of Volatile Organic Compounds” (42 FR 35314, July 8, 1977; (This document is also available from Mr. Ted Creekmore, Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, (MD-15) Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.))</P>
          <P>(E) All emission reductions claimed as offset credit shall be federally enforceable;</P>
          <P>(F) Procedures relating to the permissible location of offsetting emissions shall be followed which are at least as stringent as those set out in 40 CFR part 51 appendix S section IV.D.</P>

          <P>(G) Credit for an emissions reduction can be claimed to the extent that the reviewing authority has not relied on it in issuing any permit under regulations approved pursuant to 40 CFR part 51 subpart I or the State has not relied on it in demonstration attainment or reasonable further progress.<PRTPAGE P="155"/>
          </P>
          <P>(4) Each plan may provide that the provisions of this paragraph do not apply to a source or modification that would be a major stationary source or major modification only if fugitive emission to the extent quantifiable are considered in calculating the potential to emit of the stationary source or modification and the source does not belong to any of the following categories:</P>
          <P>(i) Coal cleaning plants (with thermal dryers);</P>
          <P>(ii) Kraft pulp mills;</P>
          <P>(iii) Portland cement plants;</P>
          <P>(iv) Primary zinc smelters;</P>
          <P>(v) Iron and steel mills;</P>
          <P>(vi) Primary aluminum ore reduction plants;</P>
          <P>(vii) Primary copper smelters;</P>
          <P>(viii) Municipal incinerators capable of charging more than 250 tons of refuse per day;</P>
          <P>(ix) Hydrofluoric, sulfuric, or citric acid plants;</P>
          <P>(x) Petroleum refineries;</P>
          <P>(xi) Lime plants;</P>
          <P>(xii) Phosphate rock processing plants;</P>
          <P>(xiii) Coke oven batteries;</P>
          <P>(xiv) Sulfur recovery plants;</P>
          <P>(xv) Carbon black plants (furnace process);</P>
          <P>(xvi) Primary lead smelters;</P>
          <P>(xvii) Fuel conversion plants;</P>
          <P>(xviii) Sintering plants;</P>
          <P>(xix) Secondary metal production plants;</P>
          <P>(xx) Chemical process plants;</P>
          <P>(xxi) Fossil-fuel boilers (or combination thereof) totaling more than 250 million British thermal units per hour heat input;</P>
          <P>(xxii) Petroleum storage and transfer units with a total storage capacity exceeding 300,000 barrels;</P>
          <P>(xxiii) Taconite ore processing plants;</P>
          <P>(xxiv) Glass fiber processing plants;</P>
          <P>(xxv) Charcoal production plants;</P>
          <P>(xxvi) Fossil fuel-fired steam electric plants of more than 250 million British thermal units per hour heat input;</P>
          <P>(xxvii) Any other stationary source category which, as of August 7, 1980, is being regulated under section 111 or 112 of the Act.</P>
          <P>(5) Each plan shall include enforceable procedures to provide that:</P>
          <P>(i) Approval to construct shall not relieve any owner or operator of the responsibility to comply fully with applicable provision of the plan and any other requirements under local, State or Federal law.</P>
          <P>(ii) At such time that a particular source or modification becomes a major stationary source or major modification solely by virtue of a relaxation in any enforcement limitation which was established after August 7, 1980, on the capacity of the source or modification otherwise to emit a pollutant, such as a restriction on hours of operation, then the requirements of regulations approved pursuant to this section shall apply to the source or modification as though construction had not yet commenced on the source or modification;</P>
          <P>(b)(1) Each plan shall include a preconstruction review permit program or its equivalent to satisfy the requirements of section 110(a)(2)(D)(i) of the Act for any new major stationary source or major modification as defined in paragraphs (a)(1) (iv) and (v) of this section. Such a program shall apply to any such source or modification that would locate in any area designated as attainment or unclassifiable for any national ambient air quality standard pursuant to section 107 of the Act, when it would cause or contribute to a violation of any national ambient air quality standard.</P>
          <P>(2) A major source or major modification will be considered to cause or contribute to a violation of a national ambient air quality standard when such source or modification would, at a minimum, exceed the following significance levels at any locality that does not or would not meet the applicable national standard:</P>
          <GPOTABLE CDEF="s30,r25,r25,r25,r25,r25" COLS="6" OPTS="L2,i1">
            <BOXHD>
              <CHED H="1">Pollutant</CHED>
              <CHED H="1">Annual</CHED>
              <CHED H="1">Averaging time (hours)</CHED>
              <CHED H="2">24</CHED>
              <CHED H="2">8</CHED>
              <CHED H="2">3</CHED>
              <CHED H="2">1</CHED>
            </BOXHD>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">SO<E T="52">2</E>
              </ENT>
              <ENT>1.0 μg/m<SU>3</SU>
              </ENT>
              <ENT>5 μg/m<SU>3</SU>
              </ENT>
              <ENT/>
              <ENT>25 μg/m<SU>3</SU>
              </ENT>
              <ENT/>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">PM<E T="52">10</E>
              </ENT>
              <ENT>1.0 μg/m<SU>3</SU>
              </ENT>
              <ENT>5 μg/m<SU>3</SU>
              </ENT>
              <ENT/>
              <ENT/>
              <ENT/>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">NO<E T="52">2</E>
              </ENT>
              <ENT>1.0 μg/m<SU>3</SU>
              </ENT>
              <ENT/>
              <ENT/>
              <ENT/>
              <ENT/>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <PRTPAGE P="156"/>
              <ENT I="01">CO</ENT>
              <ENT/>
              <ENT/>
              <ENT>0.5 mg/m<SU>3</SU>
              </ENT>
              <ENT/>
              <ENT>2 mg/m<SU>3</SU>
              </ENT>
            </ROW>
          </GPOTABLE>
          <P>(3) Such a program may include a provision which allows a proposed major source or major modification subject to paragraph (b) of this section to reduce the impact of its emissions upon air quality by obtaining sufficient emission reductions to, at a minimum, compensate for its adverse ambient impact where the major source or major modification would otherwise cause or contribute to a violation of any national ambient air quality standard. The plan shall require that, in the absence of such emission reductions, the State or local agency shall deny the proposed construction.</P>
          <P>(4) The requirements of paragraph (b) of this section shall not apply to a major stationary source or major modification with respect to a particular pollutant if the owner or operator demonstrates that, as to that pollutant, the source or modification is located in an area designated as nonattainment pursuant to section 107 of the Act.</P>
          <CITA>[51 FR 40669, Nov. 7, 1986, as amended at 52 FR 24713, July 1, 1987; 52 FR 29386, Aug 7, 1987; 54 FR 27285, 27299 June 28, 1989; 57 FR 3946, Feb. 3, 1992; 57 FR 32334, July 21, 1992]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.166</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Prevention of significant deterioration of air quality.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a)(1) <E T="03">Plan requirements.</E> In accordance with the policy of section 101(b)(1) of the act and the purposes of section 160 of the Act, each applicable State implementation plan shall contain emission limitations and such other measures as may be necessary to prevent significant deterioration of air quality.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Plan revisions.</E> If a State Implementation Plan revision would result in increased air quality deterioration over any baseline concentration, the plan revision shall include a demonstration that it will not cause or contribute to a violation of the applicable increment(s). If a plan revision proposing less restrictive requirements was submitted after August 7, 1977 but on or before any applicable baseline date and was pending action by the Administrator on that date, no such demonstration is necessary with respect to the area for which a baseline date would be established before final action is taken on the plan revision. Instead, the assessment described in paragraph (a)(4) of this section, shall review the expected impact to the applicable increment(s).</P>
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Required plan revision.</E> If the State or the Administrator determines that a plan is substantially inadequate to prevent significant deterioration or that an applicable increment is being violated, the plan shall be revised to correct the inadequacy or the violation. The plan shall be revised within 60 days of such a finding by a State or within 60 days following notification by the Administrator, or by such later date as prescribed by the Administrator after consultation with the State.</P>
          <P>(4) <E T="03">Plan assessment.</E> The State shall review the adequacy of a plan on a periodic basis and within 60 days of such time as information becomes available that an applicable increment is being violated.</P>
          <P>(5) <E T="03">Public participation.</E> Any State action taken under this paragraph shall be subject to the opportunity for public hearing in accordance with procedures equivalent to those established in § 51.102.</P>
          <P>(6) <E T="03">Amendments.</E> (i) Any State required to revise its implementation plan by reason of an amendment to this section, including any amendment adopted simultaneously with this paragraph, shall adopt and submit such plan revision to the Administrator for approval within 9 months after the effective date of the new amendments.</P>
          <P>(ii) Any revision to an implementation plan that would amend the provisions for the prevention of significant air quality deterioration in the plan shall specify when and as to what sources and modifications the revision is to take effect.</P>

          <P>(iii) Any revision to an implementation plan that an amendment to this section required shall take effect no <PRTPAGE P="157"/>later than the date of its approval and may operate prospectively.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Definitions.</E> All State plans shall use the following definitions for the purposes of this section. Deviations from the following wording will be approved only if the State specifically demonstrates that the submitted definition is more stringent, or at least as stringent, in all respects as the corresponding definitions below:</P>
          <P>(1)(i) <E T="03">Major stationary source</E> means:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">a</E>) Any of the following stationary sources of air pollutants which emits, or has the potential to emit, 100 tons per year or more of any pollutant subject to regulation under the Act: Fossil fuel-fired steam electric plants of more than 250 million British thermal units per hour heat input, coal cleaning plants (with thermal dryers), kraft pulp mills, portland cement plants, primary zinc smelters, iron and steel mill plants, primary aluminum ore reduction plants, primary copper smelters, municipal incinerators capable of charging more than 250 tons of refuse per day, hydrofluoric, sulfuric, and nitric acid plants, petroleum refineries, lime plants, phosphate rock processing plants, coke oven batteries, sulfur recovery plants, carbon black plants (furnace process), primary lead smelters, fuel conversion plants, sintering plants, secondary metal production plants, chemical process plants, fossil fuel boilers (or combinations thereof) totaling more than 250 million British thermal units per hour heat input, petroleum storage and transfer units with a total storage capacity exceeding 300,000 barrels, taconite ore processing plants, glass fiber processing plants, and charcoal production plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">b</E>) Notwithstanding the stationary source size specified in paragraph (b)(1)(i)(<E T="03">a</E>) of this section, any stationary source which emits, or has the potential to emit, 250 tons per year or more of any air pollutant subject to regulation under the Act; or</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">c</E>) Any physical change that would occur at a stationary source not otherwise qualifying under paragraph (b)(1) of this section, as a major stationary source if the change would constitute a major stationary source by itself.</P>
          <P>(ii) A major source that is major for volatile organic compounds shall be considered major for ozone.</P>
          <P>(iii) The fugitive emissions of a stationary source shall not be included in determining for any of the purposes of this section whether it is a major stationary source, unless the source belongs to one of the following categories of stationary sources:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">a</E>) Coal cleaning plants (with thermal dryers);</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">b</E>) Kraft pulp mills;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">c</E>) Portland cement plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">d</E>) Primary zinc smelters;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">e</E>) Iron and steel mills;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">f</E>) Primary aluminum ore reduction plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">g</E>) Primary copper smelters;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">h</E>) Municipal incinerators capable of charging more than 250 tons of refuse per day;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">i</E>) Hydrofluoric, sulfuric, or nitric acid plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">j</E>) Petroleum refineries;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">k</E>) Lime plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">l</E>) Phosphate rock processing plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">m</E>) Coke oven batteries;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">n</E>) Sulfur recovery plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">o</E>) Carbon black plants (furnace process);</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">p</E>) Primary lead smelters;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">q</E>) Fuel conversion plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">r</E>) Sintering plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">s</E>) Secondary metal production plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">t</E>) Chemical process plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">u</E>) Fossil-fuel boilers (or combination thereof) totaling more than 250 million British thermal units per hour heat input;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">v</E>) Petroleum storage and transfer units with a total storage capacity exceeding 300,000 barrels;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">w</E>) Taconite ore processing plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">x</E>) Glass fiber processing plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">y</E>) Charcoal production plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">z</E>) Fossil fuel-fired steam electric plants of more that 250 million British thermal units per hour heat input;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">aa</E>) Any other stationary source category which, as of August 7, 1980, is being regulated under section 111 or 112 of the Act.</P>
          <P>(2)(i) <E T="03">Major modification</E> means any physical change in or change in the method of operation of a major stationary source that would result in a significant net emissions increase of any <PRTPAGE P="158"/>pollutant subject to regulation under the Act.</P>
          <P>(ii) Any net emissions increase that is significant for volatile organic compounds shall be considered significant for ozone.</P>
          <P>(iii) A physical change or change in the method of operation shall not include:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">a</E>) Routine maintenance, repair, and replacement;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">b</E>) Use of an alternative fuel or raw material by reason of any order under section 2 (a) and (b) of the Energy Supply and Environmental Coordination Act of 1974 (or any superseding legislation) or by reason of a natural gas curtailment plan pursuant to the Federal Power Act;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">c</E>) Use of an alternative fuel by reason of an order or rule under section 125 of the Act;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">d</E>) Use of an alternative fuel at a steam generating unit to the extent that the fuel is generated from municipal solid waste;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">e</E>) Use of an alternative fuel or raw material by a stationary source which:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">1</E>) The source was capable of accommodating before January 6, 1975, unless such change would be prohibited under any federally enforceable permit condition which was established after January 6, 1975 pursuant to 40 CFR 52.21 or under regulations approved pursuant to 40 CFR subpart I or § 51.166; or</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">2</E>) The source is approved to use under any permit issued under 40 CFR 52.21 or under regulations approved pursuant to 40 CFR 51.166;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">f</E>) An increase in the hours of operation or in the production rate, unless such change would be prohibited under any federally enforceable permit condition which was established after January 6, 1975, pursuant to 40 CFR 52.21 or under regulations approved pursuant to 40 CFR subpart I or § 51.166.</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">g</E>) Any change in ownership at a stationary source.</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">h</E>) The addition, replacement or use of a pollution control project at an existing electric utility steam generating unit, unless the Administrator determines that such addition, replacement, or use renders the unit less environmentally beneficial, or except:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">1</E>) When the reviewing authority has reason to believe that the pollution control project would result in a significant net increase in representative actual annual emissions of any criteria pollutant over levels used for that source in the most recent air quality impact analysis in the area conducted for the purpose of title I, if any, and</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">2</E>) The reviewing authority determines that the increase will cause or contribute to a violation of any national ambient air quality standard or PSD increment, or visibility limitation.</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">i</E>) The installation, operation, cessation, or removal of a temporary clean coal technology demonstration project, provided that the project complies with:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">1</E>) The State implementation plan for the State in which the project is located; and</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">2</E>) Other requirements necessary to attain and maintain the national ambient air quality standards during the project and after it is terminated.</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">j</E>) The installation or operation of a permanent clean coal technology demonstration project that constitutes repowering, provided that the project does not result in an increase in the potential to emit of any regulated pollutant emitted by the unit. This exemption shall apply on a pollutant-by-pollutant basis.</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">k</E>) The reactivation of a very clean coal-fired electric utility steam generating unit.</P>
          <P>(3)(i) <E T="03">Net emissions increase</E> means the amount by which the sum of the following exceeds zero:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">a</E>) Any increase in actual emissions from a particular physical change or change in the method of operation at a stationary source; and</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">b</E>) Any other increases and decreases in actual emissions at the source that are contemporaneous with the particular change and are otherwise creditable.</P>
          <P>(ii) An increase or decrease in actual emissions is contemporaneous with the increase from the particular change only if it occurs within a reasonable period (to be specified by the State) before the date that the increase from the particular change occurs.</P>

          <P>(iii) An increase or decrease in actual emissions is creditable only if the reviewing authority has not relied on it <PRTPAGE P="159"/>in issuing a permit for the source under regulations approved pursuant to this section, which permit is in effect when the increase in actual emissions from the particular change occurs.</P>
          <P>(iv) An increase or decrease in actual emissions of sulfur dioxide, particulate matter, or nitrogen oxides, which occurs before the applicable minor source baseline date is creditable only if it is required to be considered in calculating the amount of maximum allowable increases remaining available. With respect to particulate matter, only PM-10 emissions can be used to evaluate the net emissions increase for PM-10.</P>
          <P>(v) An increase in actual emissions is creditable only to the extent that the new level of actual emissions exceeds the old level.</P>
          <P>(vi) A decrease in actual emissions is creditable only to the extent that:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">a</E>) The old level of actual emissions or the old level of allowable emissions, whichever is lower, exceeds the new level of actual emissions;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">b</E>) It is federally enforceable at and after the time that actual construction on the particular change begins; and</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">c</E>) It has approximately the same qualitative significance for public health and welfare as that attributed to the increase from the particular change.</P>
          <P>(vii) An increase that results from a physical change at a source occurs when the emissions unit on which construction occurred becomes operational and begins to emit a particular pollutant. Any replacement unit that requires shakedown becomes operational only after a reasonable shakedown period, not to exceed 180 days.</P>
          <P>(4) <E T="03">Potential to emit</E> means the maximum capacity of a stationary source to emit a pollutant under its physical and operational design. Any physical or operational limitation on the capacity of the source to emit a pollutant, including air pollution control equipment and restrictions on hours of operation or on the type or amount of material combusted, stored, or processed, shall be treated as part of its design if the limitation or the effect it would have on emissions is federally enforceable. Secondary emissions do not count in determining the potential to emit of a stationary source.</P>
          <P>(5) <E T="03">Stationary source</E> means any building, structure, facility, or installation which emits or may emit any air pollutant subject to regulation under the Act.</P>
          <P>(6) <E T="03">Building, structure, facility, or installation</E> means all of the pollutant-emitting activities which belong to the same industrial grouping, are located on one or more contiguous or adjacent properties, and are under the control of the same person (or persons under common control) except the activities of any vessel. Pollutant-emitting activities shall be considered as part of the same industrial grouping if they belong to the same <E T="03">Major Group</E> (i.e., which have the same two-digit code) as described in the <E T="03">Standard Industrial Classification Manual, 1972,</E> as amended by the 1977 Supplement (U.S. Government Printing Office stock numbers 4101-0066 and 003-005-00176-0, respectively).</P>
          <P>(7) <E T="03">Emissions unit</E> means any part of a stationary source which emits or would have the potential to emit any pollutant subject to regulation under the Act.</P>
          <P>(8) <E T="03">Construction</E> means any physical change or change in the method of operation (including fabrication, erection, installation, demolition, or modification of an emissions unit) which would result in a change in actual emissions.</P>
          <P>(9) <E T="03">Commence</E> as applied to construction of a major stationary source or major modification means that the owner or operator has all necessary preconstruction approvals or permits and either has:</P>
          <P>(i) Begun, or caused to begin, a continuous program of actual on-site construction of the source, to be completed within a reasonable time; or</P>
          <P>(ii) Entered into binding agreements or contractual obligations, which cannot be cancelled or modified without substantial loss to the owner or operator, to undertake a program of actual construction of the source to be completed within a reasonable time.</P>
          <P>(10) <E T="03">Necessary preconstruction approvals or permits</E> means those permits or approvals required under Federal air quality control laws and regulations and those air quality control laws and regulations which are part of the applicable State Implementation Plan.<PRTPAGE P="160"/>
          </P>
          <P>(11) <E T="03">Begin actual construction</E> means, in general, initiation of physical on-site construction activities on an emissions unit which are of a permanent nature. Such activities include, but are not limited to, installation of building supports and foundations, laying of underground pipework, and construction of permanent storage structures. With respect to a change in method of operation this term refers to those on-site activities, other than preparatory activities, which mark the initiation of the change.</P>
          <P>(12) <E T="03">Best available control technology</E> means an emissions limitation (including a visible emissions standard) based on the maximum degree of reduction for each pollutant subject to regulation under the Act which would be emitted from any proposed major stationary source or major modification which the reviewing authority, on a case-by-case basis, taking into account energy, environmental, and economic impacts and other costs, determines is achievable for such source or modification through application of production processes or available methods, systems, and techniques, including fuel cleaning or treatment or innovative fuel combination techniques for control of such pollutant. In no event shall application of best available control technology result in emissions of any pollutant which would exceed the emissions allowed by any applicable standard under 40 CFR parts 60 and 61. If the reviewing authority determines that technological or economic limitations on the application of measurement methodology to a particular emissions unit would make the imposition of an emissions standard infeasible, a design, equipment, work practice, operational standard or combination thereof, may be prescribed instead to satisfy the requirement for the application of best available control technology. Such standard shall, to the degree possible, set forth the emissions reduction achievable by implementation of such design, equipment, work practice or operation, and shall provide for compliance by means which achieve equivalent results.</P>
          <P>(13)(i) <E T="03">Baseline concentration</E> means that ambient concentration level which exists in the baseline area at the time of the applicable minor source baseline date. A baseline concentration is determined for each pollutant for which a minor source baseline date is established and shall include:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">a</E>) The actual emissions representative of sources in existence on the applicable minor source baseline date, except as provided in paragraph (b)(13)(ii) of this section;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">b</E>) The allowable emissions of major stationary sources which commenced construction before the major source baseline date, but were not in operation by the applicable minor source baseline date.</P>
          <P>(ii) The following will not be included in the baseline concentration and will affect the applicable maximum allowable increase(s):</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">a</E>) Actual emissions from any major stationary source on which construction commenced after the major source baseline date; and</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">b</E>) Actual emissions increases and decreases at any stationary source occurring after the minor source baseline date.</P>
          <P>(14)(i) <E T="03">Major source baseline date</E> means:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">a</E>) In the case of particulate matter and sulfur dioxide, January 6, 1975, and</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">b</E>) In the case of nitrogen dioxide, February 8, 1988.</P>
          <P>(ii) <E T="03">Minor source baseline date</E> means the earliest date after the trigger date on which a major stationary source or a major modification subject to 40 CFR 52.21 or to regulations approved pursuant to 40 CFR 51.166 submits a complete application under the relevant regulations. The trigger date is:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">a</E>) In the case of particulate matter and sulfur dioxide, August 7, 1977, and</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">b</E>) In the case of nitrogen dioxide, February 8, 1988.</P>
          <P>(iii) The baseline date is established for each pollutant for which increments or other equivalent measures have been established if:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">a</E>) The area in which the proposed source or modification would construct is designated as attainment or unclassifiable under section 107(d)(i) (D) or (E) of the Act for the pollutant on the date of its complete application under 40 CFR 52.21 or under regulations approved pursuant to 40 CFR 51.166; and<PRTPAGE P="161"/>
          </P>
          <P>(<E T="03">b</E>) In the case of a major stationary source, the pollutant would be emitted in significant amounts, or, in the case of a major modification, there would be a significant net emissions increase of the pollutant.</P>
          <P>(iv) Any minor source baseline date established originally for the TSP increments shall remain in effect and shall apply for purposes of determining the amount of available PM-10 increments, except that the reviewing authority may rescind any such minor source baseline date where it can be shown, to the satisfaction of the reviewing authority, that the emissions increase from the major stationary source, or the net emissions increase from the major modification, responsible for triggering that date did not result in a significant amount of PM-10 emissions.</P>
          <P>(15)(i) <E T="03">Baseline area</E> means any intrastate area (and every part thereof) designated as attainment or unclassifiable under section 107(d)(1) (D) or (E) of the Act in which the major source or major modification establishing the minor source baseline date would construct or would have an air quality impact equal to or greater than 1 μg/m<SU>3</SU> (annual average) of the pollutant for which the minor source baseline date is established.</P>
          <P>(ii) Area redesignations under section 107(d)(1) (D) or (E) of the Act cannot intersect or be smaller than the area of impact of any major stationary source or major modification which:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">a</E>) Establishes a minor source baseline date; or</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">b</E>) Is subject to 40 CFR 52.21 or under regulations approved pursuant to 40 CFR 51.166, and would be constructed in the same State as the State proposing the redesignation.</P>
          <P>(iii) Any baseline area established originally for the TSP increments shall remain in effect and shall apply for purposes of determining the amount of available PM-10 increments, except that such baseline area shall not remain in effect if the permit authority rescinds the corresponding minor source baseline date in accordance with paragraph (b)(14)(iv) of this section.</P>
          <P>(16) <E T="03">Allowable emissions</E> means the emissions rate of a stationary source calculated using the maximum rated capacity of the source (unless the source is subject to federally enforceable limits which restrict the operating rate, or hours of operation, or both) and the most stringent of the following:</P>
          <P>(i) The applicable standards as set forth in 40 CFR parts 60 and 61;</P>
          <P>(ii) The applicable State Implementation Plan emissions limitation, including those with a future compliance date; or</P>
          <P>(iii) The emissions rate specified as a federally enforceable permit condition.</P>
          <P>(17) <E T="03">Federally enforceable</E> means all limitations and conditions which are enforceable by the Administrator, including those requirements developed pursuant to 40 CFR parts 60 and 61, requirements within any applicable State implementation plan, any permit requirements established pursuant to 40 CFR 52.21 or under regulations approved pursuant to 40 CFR part 51, subpart I, including operating permits issued under an EPA-approved program that is incorporated into the State implementation plan and expressly requires adherence to any permit issued under such program.</P>
          <P>(18) <E T="03">Secondary emissions</E> means emissions which occur as a result of the construction or operation of a major stationary source or major modification, but do not come from the major stationary source or major modification itself. For the purposes of this section, secondary emissions must be specific, well defined, quantifiable, and impact the same general areas the stationary source modification which causes the secondary emissions. Secondary emissions include emissions from any offsite support facility which would not be constructed or increase its emissions except as a result of the construction or operation of the major stationary source or major modification. Secondary emissions do not include any emissions which come directly from a mobile source, such as emissions from the tailpipe of a motor vehicle, from a train, or from a vessel.</P>
          <P>(19) <E T="03">Innovative control technology</E> means any system of air pollution control that has not been adequately demonstrated in practice, but would have a substantial likelihood of achieving greater continuous emissions reduction <PRTPAGE P="162"/>than any control system in current practice or of achieving at least comparable reductions at lower cost in terms of energy, economics, or nonair quality environmental impacts.</P>
          <P>(20) <E T="03">Fugitive emissions</E> means those emissions which could not reasonably pass through a stack, chimney, vent, or other functionally equivalent opening.</P>
          <P>(21)(i) <E T="03">Actual emissions</E> means the actual rate of emissions of a pollutant from an emissions unit, as determined in accordance with paragraphs (b)(21) (ii) through (iv) of this section.</P>
          <P>(ii) In general, actual emissions as of a particular date shall equal the average rate, in tons per year, at which the unit actually emitted the pollutant during a two-year period which precedes the particular date and which is representative of normal source operation. The reviewing authority may allow the use of a different time period upon a determination that it is more representative of normal source operation. Actual emissions shall be calculated using the unit's actual operating hours, production rates, and types of materials processed, stored, or combusted during the selected time period.</P>
          <P>(iii) The reviewing authority may presume that source-specific allowable emissions for the unit are equivalent to the actual emissions of the unit.</P>
          <P>(iv) For any emissions unit (other than an electric utility steam generating unit specified in paragraph (b)(21)(v) of this section) which has not begun normal operations on the particular date, actual emissions shall equal the potential to emit of the unit on that date.</P>
          <P>(v) For an electric utility steam generating unit (other than a new unit or the replacement of an existing unit) actual emissions of the unit following the physical or operational change shall equal the representative actual annual emissions of the unit following the physical or operational change, provided the source owner or operator maintains and submits to the reviewing authority, on an annual basis for a period of 5 years from the date the unit resumes regular operation, information demonstrating that the physical or operational change did not result in an emissions increase. A longer period, not to exceed 10 years, may be required by the reviewing authority if it determines such a period to be more representative of normal source post-change operations.</P>
          <P>(22) <E T="03">Complete</E> means, in reference to an application for a permit, that the application contains all the information necessary for processing the application. Designating an application complete for purposes of permit processing does not preclude the reviewing authority from requesting or accepting any additional information.</P>
          <P>(23)(i) <E T="03">Significant</E> means, in reference to a net emissions increase or the potential of a source to emit any of the following pollutants, a rate of emissions that would equal or exceed any of the following rates:
          </P>
          <EXTRACT>
            <HD SOURCE="HD1">Pollutant and Emissions Rate</HD>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Carbon monoxide: 100 tons per year (tpy)</FP>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Nitrogen oxides: 40 tpy</FP>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Sulfur dioxide: 40 tpy</FP>

            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Particulate matter: 25 tpy of particulate matter emissions. 15 tpy of PM<E T="52">10</E> emissions.</FP>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Ozone: 40 tpy of volatile organic compounds</FP>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Lead: 0.6 tpy</FP>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Asbestos: 0.007 tpy</FP>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Beryllium: 0.0004 tpy</FP>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Mercury: 0.1 tpy</FP>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Vinyl chloride: 1 tpy</FP>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Fluorides: 3 tpy</FP>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Sulfuric acid mist: 7 tpy</FP>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Hydrogen sulfide (H<E T="22">2</E> S): 10 tpy</FP>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Total reduced sulfur (including H<E T="22">2</E> S): 10 tpy</FP>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Reduced sulfur compounds (including H<E T="22">2</E> S): 10 tpy</FP>

            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Municipal waste combustor organics (measured as total tetra- through octa-chlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins and dibenzofurans): 3.2 × 10<E T="51">−6</E> megagrams per year (3.5 × 10<E T="51">−6</E> tons per year)</FP>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Municipal waste combustor metals (measured as articulate matter): 14 megagrams per year (15 tons per year) Municipal waste combustor acid gases (measured as sulfur dioxide and hydrogen chloride): 36 megagrams per year (40 tons per year)</FP>
            <FP SOURCE="FP-1">Municipal solid waste landfill emissions (measured as nonmethane organic compounds): 45 megagrams per year (50 tons per year)</FP>
          </EXTRACT>
          
          <P>(ii) <E T="03">Significant</E> means, in reference to a net emissions increase or the potential of a source to emit a pollutant subject to regulation under the Act that paragraph (b)(23)(i) of this section, does not list, any emissions rate.</P>

          <P>(iii) Notwithstanding paragraph (b)(23)(i) of this section, <E T="03">significant</E> means any emissions rate or any net <PRTPAGE P="163"/>emissions increase associated with a major stationary source or major modification, which would construct within 10 kilometers of a Class I area, and have an impact on such area equal to or greater than 1 μg/m<E T="21">3</E> (24-hour average).</P>
          <P>(24) <E T="03">Federal Land Manager</E> means, with respect to any lands in the United States, the Secretary of the department with authority over such lands.</P>
          <P>(25) <E T="03">High terrain</E> means any area having an elevation 900 feet or more above the base of the stack of a source.</P>
          <P>(26) <E T="03">Low terrain</E> means any area other than high terrain.</P>
          <P>(27) <E T="03">Indian Reservation</E> means any federally recognized reservation established by Treaty, Agreement, Executive Order, or Act of Congress.</P>
          <P>(28) <E T="03">Indian Governing Body</E> means the governing body of any tribe, band, or group of Indians subject to the jurisdiction of the United States and recognized by the United States as possessing power of self-government.</P>
          <P>(29) <E T="03">Volatile organic compounds (VOC)</E> is as defined in § 51.100(s) of this part.</P>
          <P>(30) <E T="03">Electric utility steam generating unit</E> means any steam electric generating unit that is constructed for the purpose of supplying more than one-third of its potential electric output capacity and more than 25 MW electrical output to any utility power distribution system for sale. Any steam supplied to a steam distribution system for the purpose of providing steam to a steam-electric generator that would produce electrical energy for sale is also considered in determining the electrical energy output capacity of the affected facility.</P>
          <P>(31) <E T="03">Pollution control project</E> means any activity or project undertaken at an existing electric utility steam generating unit for purposes of reducing emissions from such unit. Such activities or projects are limited to:</P>
          <P>(i) The installation of conventional or innovative pollution control technology, including but not limited to advanced flue gas desulfurization, sorbent injection for sulfur dioxide and nitrogen oxides controls and electrostatic precipitators;</P>
          <P>(ii) An activity or project to accommodate switching to a fuel which is less polluting than the fuel used prior to the activity or project, including but not limited to natural gas or coal re-burning, or the co-firing of natural gas and other fuels for the purpose of controlling emissions;</P>
          <P>(iii) A permanent clean coal technology demonstration project conducted under title II, section 101(d) of the Further Continuing Appropriations Act of 1985 (section 5903(d) of title 42 of the United States Code), or subsequent appropriations, up to a total amount of $2,500,000,000 for commercial demonstration of clean coal technology, or similar projects funded through appropriations for the Environmental Protection Agency, or</P>
          <P>(iv) A permanent clean coal technology demonstration project that constitutes a repowering project.</P>
          <P>(32) <E T="03">Representative actual annual emissions</E> means the average rate, in tons per year, at which the source is projected to emit a pollutant for the two-year period after a physical change or change in the method of operation of a unit, (or a different consecutive two-year period within 10 years after that change, where the reviewing authority determines that such period is more representative of normal source operations), considering the effect any such change will have on increasing or decreasing the hourly emissions rate and on projected capacity utilization. In projecting future emissions the reviewing authority shall:</P>
          <P>(i) Consider all relevant information, including but not limited to, historical operational data, the company's own representations, filings with the State or Federal regulatory authorities, and compliance plans under title IV of the Clean Air Act; and</P>

          <P>(ii) Exclude, in calculating any increase in emissions that results from the particular physical change or change in the method of operation at an electric utility steam generating unit, that portion of the unit's emissions following the change that could have been accommodated during the representative baseline period and is attributable to an increase in projected capacity utilization at the unit that is unrelated to the particular change, including any increased utilization due to the rate of electricity demand <PRTPAGE P="164"/>growth for the utility system as a whole.</P>
          <P>(33) <E T="03">Clean coal technology</E> means any technology, including technologies applied at the precombustion, combustion, or post combustion stage, at a new or existing facility which will achieve significant reductions in air emissions of sulfur dioxide or oxides of nitrogen associated with the utilization of coal in the generation of electricity, or process steam which was not in widespread use as of November 15, 1990.</P>
          <P>(34) <E T="03">Clean coal technology demonstration project</E> means a project using funds appropriated under the heading “Department of Energy—Clean Coal Technology”, up to a total amount of $2,500,000,000 for commercial demonstration of clean coal technology, or similar projects funded through appropriations for the Environmental Protection Agency. The Federal contribution for a qualifying project shall be at least 20 percent of the total cost of the demonstration project.</P>
          <P>(35) <E T="03">Temporary clean coal technology demonstration project</E> means a clean coal technology demonstration project that is operated for a period of 5 years or less, and which complies with the State implementation plan for the State in which the project is located and other requirements necessary to attain and maintain the national ambient air quality standards during and after the project is terminated.</P>
          <P>(36)(i) <E T="03">Repowering</E> means replacement of an existing coal-fired boiler with one of the following clean coal technologies: atmospheric or pressurized fluidized bed combustion, integrated gasification combined cycle, magnetohydrodynamics, direct and indirect coal-fired turbines, integrated gasification fuel cells, or as determined by the Administrator, in consultation with the Secretary of Energy, a derivative of one or more of these technologies, and any other technology capable of controlling multiple combustion emissions simultaneously with improved boiler or generation efficiency and with significantly greater waste reduction relative to the performance of technology in widespread commercial use as of November 15, 1990.</P>
          <P>(ii) Repowering shall also include any oil and/or gas-fired unit which has been awarded clean coal technology demonstration funding as of January 1, 1991, by the Department of Energy.</P>
          <P>(iii) The reviewing authority shall give expedited consideration to permit applications for any source that satisfies the requirements of this subsection and is granted an extension under section 409 of the Clean Air Act.</P>
          <P>(37) <E T="03">Reactivation of a very clean coal-fired electric utility steam generating unit</E> means any physical change or change in the method of operation associated with the commencement of commercial operations by a coal-fired utility unit after a period of discontinued operation where the unit:</P>
          <P>(i) Has not been in operation for the two-year period prior to the enactment of the Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990, and the emissions from such unit continue to be carried in the permitting authority's emissions inventory at the time of enactment;</P>
          <P>(ii) Was equipped prior to shutdown with a continuous system of emissions control that achieves a removal efficiency for sulfur dioxide of no less than 85 percent and a removal efficiency for particulates of no less than 98 percent;</P>
          <P>(iii) Is equipped with low-NO<E T="52">X</E> burners prior to the time of commencement of operations following reactivation; and</P>
          <P>(iv) Is otherwise in compliance with the requirements of the Clean Air Act.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Ambient air increments.</E> The plan shall contain emission limitations and such other measures as may be necessary to assure that in areas designated as Class I, II, or III, increases in pollutant concentration over the baseline concentration shall be limited to the following:</P>
          <GPOTABLE CDEF="s75,5" COLS="2" OPTS="L2,i1">
            <BOXHD>
              <CHED H="1">Pollutant</CHED>
              <CHED H="1">Maximum allowable increase (micrograms per cubic meter)</CHED>
            </BOXHD>
            <ROW EXPSTB="01" RUL="s">
              <ENT I="21">Class I
              </ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW EXPSTB="00">
              <ENT I="11">Particulate matter:</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="03">PM-10, annual arithmetic mean</ENT>
              <ENT>4</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="03">PM-10, 24-hr maximum</ENT>
              <ENT>8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="11">Sulfur dioxide:</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="03">Annual arithmetic mean</ENT>
              <ENT>2</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="03">24-hr maximum</ENT>
              <ENT>5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="03">3-hr maximum</ENT>
              <ENT>25</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW RUL="03,s">
              <PRTPAGE P="165"/>
              <ENT I="01">Nitrogen dioxide: Annual arithmetic mean</ENT>
              <ENT>2.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW EXPSTB="01" RUL="s">
              <ENT I="21">Class II
              </ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW EXPSTB="00">
              <ENT I="11">Particulate matter:</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="03">PM-10, annual arithmetic mean</ENT>
              <ENT>17</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="03">PM-10, 24-hr maximum</ENT>
              <ENT>30</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="11">Sulfur dioxide:</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="03">Annual arithmetic mean</ENT>
              <ENT>20</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="03">24-hr maximum</ENT>
              <ENT>91</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="03">3-hr maximum</ENT>
              <ENT>512</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="11">Nitrogen dioxide:</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW RUL="03,s">
              <ENT I="03">Annual arithmetic mean</ENT>
              <ENT>25</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW EXPSTB="01" RUL="03,s">
              <ENT I="21">Class III</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW EXPSTB="00">
              <ENT I="11">Particulate matter:</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="03">PM-10, annual arithmetic mean</ENT>
              <ENT>34</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="03">PM-10, 24-hr maximum</ENT>
              <ENT>60</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="11">Sulfur dioxide:</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="03">Annual arithmetic mean</ENT>
              <ENT> 40</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="03">24-hr maximum</ENT>
              <ENT>182</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="03">3-hr maximum</ENT>
              <ENT>700</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">Nitrogen dioxide: Annual arithmetic mean</ENT>
              <ENT>50</ENT>
            </ROW>
          </GPOTABLE>
          <FP>For any period other than an annual period, the applicable maximum allowable increase may be exceeded during one such period per year at any one location.</FP>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">Ambient air ceilings.</E> The plan shall provide that no concentration of a pollutant shall exceed:</P>
          <P>(1) The concentration permitted under the national secondary ambient air quality standard, or</P>
          <P>(2) The concentration permitted under the national primary ambient air quality standard, whichever concentration is lowest for the pollutant for a period of exposure.</P>
          <P>(e) <E T="03">Restrictions on area classifications.</E> The plan shall provide that—</P>
          <P>(1) All of the following areas which were in existence on August 7, 1977, shall be Class I areas and may not be redesignated:</P>
          <P>(i) International parks,</P>
          <P>(ii) National wilderness areas which exceed 5,000 acres in size,</P>
          <P>(iii) National memorial parks which exceed 5,000 acres in size, and</P>
          <P>(iv) National parks which exceed 6,000 acres in size.</P>
          <P>(2) Areas which were redesignated as Class I under regulations promulgated before August 7, 1977, shall remain Class I, but may be redesignated as provided in this section.</P>
          <P>(3) Any other area, unless otherwise specified in the legislation creating such an area, is initially designated Class II, but may be redesignated as provided in this section.</P>
          <P>(4) The following areas may be redesignated only as Class I or II:</P>
          <P>(i) An area which as of August 7, 1977, exceeded 10,000 acres in size and was a national monument, a national primitive area, a national preserve, a national recreational area, a national wild and scenic river, a national wildlife refuge, a national lakeshore or seashore; and</P>
          <P>(ii) A national park or national wilderness area established after August 7, 1977, which exceeds 10,000 acres in size.</P>
          <P>(f) <E T="03">Exclusions from increment consumption.</E> (1) The plan may provide that the following concentrations shall be excluded in determining compliance with a maximum allowable increase:</P>
          <P>(i) Concentrations attributable to the increase in emissions from stationary sources which have converted from the use of petroleum products, natural gas, or both by reason of an order in effect under section 2 (a) and (b) of the Energy Supply and Environmental Coordination Act of 1974 (or any superseding legislation) over the emissions from such sources before the effective date of such an order;</P>
          <P>(ii) Concentrations attributable to the increase in emissions from sources which have converted from using natural gas by reason of natural gas curtailment plan in effect pursuant to the Federal Power Act over the emissions from such sources before the effective date of such plan;</P>
          <P>(iii) Concentrations of particulate matter attributable to the increase in emissions from construction or other temporary emission-related activities of new or modified sources;</P>
          <P>(iv) The increase in concentrations attributable to new sources outside the United States over the concentrations attributable to existing sources which are included in the baseline concentration; and</P>

          <P>(v) Concentrations attributable to the temporary increase in emissions of sulfur dioxide, particulate matter, or nitrogen oxides from stationary <PRTPAGE P="166"/>sources which are affected by plan revisions approved by the Administrator as meeting the criteria specified in paragraph (f)(4) of this section.</P>
          <P>(2) If the plan provides that the concentrations to which paragraph (f)(1) (i) or (ii) of this section, refers shall be excluded, it shall also provide that no exclusion of such concentrations shall apply more than five years after the effective date of the order to which paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section, refers or the plan to which paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section, refers, whichever is applicable. If both such order and plan are applicable, no such exclusion shall apply more than five years after the later of such effective dates.</P>
          <P>(3) [Reserved]</P>
          <P>(4) For purposes of excluding concentrations pursuant to paragraph (f)(1)(v) of this section, the Administrator may approve a plan revision that:</P>
          <P>(i) Specifies the time over which the temporary emissions increase of sulfur dioxide, particulate matter, or nitrogen oxides would occur. Such time is not to exceed 2 years in duration unless a longer time is approved by the Administrator.</P>
          <P>(ii) Specifies that the time period for excluding certain contributions in accordance with paragraph (f)(4)(i) of this section, is not renewable;</P>
          <P>(iii) Allows no emissions increase from a stationary source which would:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">a</E>) Impact a Class I area or an area where an applicable increment is known to be violated; or</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">b</E>) Cause or contribute to the violation of a national ambient air quality standard;</P>
          <P>(iv) Requires limitations to be in effect the end of the time period specified in accordance with paragraph (f)(4)(i) of this section, which would ensure that the emissions levels from stationary sources affected by the plan revision would not exceed those levels occurring from such sources before the plan revision was approved.</P>
          <P>(g) <E T="03">Redesignation.</E> (1) The plan shall provide that all areas of the State (except as otherwise provided under paragraph (e) of this section) shall be designated either Class I, Class II, or Class III. Any designation other than Class II shall be subject to the redesignation procedures of this paragraph. Redesignation (except as otherwise precluded by paragraph (e) of this section) may be proposed by the respective States or Indian Governing Bodies, as provided below, subject to approval by the Administrator as a revision to the applicable State implementation plan.</P>

          <P>(2) The plan may provide that the State may submit to the Administrator a proposal to redesignate areas of the State Class I or Class II: <E T="03">Provided,</E> That:</P>
          <P>(i) At least one public hearing has been held in accordance with procedures established in § 51.102.</P>
          <P>(ii) Other States, Indian Governing Bodies, and Federal Land Managers whose lands may be affected by the proposed redesignation were notified at least 30 days prior to the public hearing;</P>
          <P>(iii) A discussion of the reasons for the proposed redesignation, including a satisfactory description and analysis of the health, environmental, economic, social, and energy effects of the proposed redesignation, was prepared and made available for public inspection at least 30 days prior to the hearing and the notice announcing the hearing contained appropriate notification of the availability of such discussion;</P>
          <P>(iv) Prior to the issuance of notice respecting the redesignation of an area that includes any Federal lands, the State has provided written notice to the appropriate Federal Land Manager and afforded adequate opportunity (not in excess of 60 days) to confer with the State respecting the redesignation and to submit written comments and recommendations. In redesignating any area with respect to which any Federal Land Manager had submitted written comments and recommendations, the State shall have published a list of any inconsistency between such redesignation and such comments and recommendations (together with the reasons for making such redesignation against the recommendation of the Federal Land Manager); and</P>

          <P>(v) The State has proposed the redesignation after consultation with the elected leadership of local and other substate general purpose governments in the area covered by the proposed redesignation.<PRTPAGE P="167"/>
          </P>
          <P>(3) The plan may provide that any area other than an area to which paragraph (e) of this section refers may be redesignated as Class III if—</P>
          <P>(i) The redesignation would meet the requirements of provisions established in accordance with paragraph (g)(2) of this section;</P>
          <P>(ii) The redesignation, except any established by an Indian Governing Body, has been specifically approved by the Governor of the State, after consultation with the appropriate committees of the legislature, if it is in session, or with the leadership of the legislature, if it is not in session (unless State law provides that such redesignation must be specifically approved by State legislation) and if general purpose units of local government representing a majority of the residents of the area to be redesignated enact legislation (including resolutions where appropriate) concurring in the redesignation;</P>
          <P>(iii) The redesignation would not cause, or contribute to, a concentration of any air pollutant which would exceed any maximum allowable increase permitted under the classification of any other area or any national ambient air quality standard; and</P>
          <P>(iv) Any permit application for any major stationary source or major modification subject to provisions established in accordance with paragraph (l) of this section which could receive a permit only if the area in question were redesignated as Class III, and any material submitted as part of that application, were available, insofar as was practicable, for public inspection prior to any public hearing on redesignation of any area as Class III.</P>

          <P>(4) The plan shall provide that lands within the exterior boundaries of Indian Reservations may be redesignated only by the appropriate Indian Governing Body. The appropriate Indian Governing Body may submit to the Administrator a proposal to redesignate areas Class I, Class II, or Class III: <E T="03">Provided,</E> That:</P>
          <P>(i) The Indian Governing Body has followed procedures equivalent to those required of a State under paragraphs (g) (2), (3)(iii), and (3)(iv) of this section; and</P>
          <P>(ii) Such redesignation is proposed after consultation with the State(s) in which the Indian Reservation is located and which border the Indian Reservation.</P>
          <P>(5) The Administrator shall disapprove, within 90 days of submission, a proposed redesignation of any area only if he finds, after notice and opportunity for public hearing, that such redesignation does not meet the procedural requirements of this section or is inconsistent with paragraph (e) of this section. If any such disapproval occurs, the classification of the area shall be that which was in effect prior to the redesignation which was disapproved.</P>
          <P>(6) If the Administrator disapproves any proposed area designation, the State or Indian Governing Body, as appropriate, may resubmit the proposal after correcting the deficiencies noted by the Administrator.</P>
          <P>(h) <E T="03">Stack heights.</E> The plan shall provide, as a minimum, that the degree of emission limitation required for control of any air pollutant under the plan shall not be affected in any manner by—</P>
          <P>(1) So much of a stack height, not in existence before December 31, 1970, as exceeds good engineering practice, or</P>
          <P>(2) Any other dispersion technique not implemented before then.</P>
          <P>(i) <E T="03">Review of major stationary sources and major modifications—source applicability and exemptions.</E>
          </P>
          <P>(1) The plan shall provide that no major stationary source or major modification shall begin actual construction unless, as a minumum, requirements equivalent to those contained in paragraphs (j) through (r) of this section have been met.</P>
          <P>(2) The plan shall provide that the requirements equivalent to those contained in paragraphs (j) through (r) of this section shall apply to any major stationary source and any major modification with respect to each pollutant subject to regulation under the Act that it would emit, except as this section would otherwise allow.</P>

          <P>(3) The plan shall provide that requirements equivalent to those contained in paragraphs (j) through (r) of this section apply only to any major stationary source or major modification that would be constructed in an area which is designated as attainment <PRTPAGE P="168"/>or unclassifiable under section 107(a)(1) (D) or (E) of the Act; and</P>
          <P>(4) The plan may provide that requirements equivalent to those contained in paragraphs (j) through (r) of this section do not apply to a particular major stationary source or major modification if:</P>
          <P>(i) The major stationary source would be a nonprofit health or nonprofit educational institution or a major modification that would occur at such an institution; or</P>
          <P>(ii) The source or modification would be a major stationary source or major modification only if fugitive emissions, to the extent quantifiable, are considered in calculating the potential to emit of the stationary source or modification and such source does not belong to any following categories:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">a</E>) Coal cleaning plants (with thermal dryers);</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">b</E>) Kraft pulp mills;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">c</E>) Portland cement plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">d</E>) Primary zinc smelters;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">e</E>) Iron and steel mills;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">f</E>) Primary aluminum ore reduction plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">g</E>) Primary copper smelters;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">h</E>) Municipal incinerators capable of charging more than 250 tons of refuse per day;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">i</E>) Hydrofluoric, sulfuric, or nitric acid plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">j</E>) Petroleum refineries;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">k</E>) Lime plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">l</E>) Phosphate rock processing plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">m</E>) Coke oven batteries;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">n</E>) Sulfur recovery plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">o</E>) Carbon black plants (furnace process);</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">p</E>) Primary lead smelters;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">q</E>) Fuel conversion plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">r</E>) Sintering plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">s</E>) Secondary metal production plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">t</E>) Chemical process plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">u</E>) Fossil-fuel boilers (or combination thereof) totaling more than 250 million British thermal units per hour heat input;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">v</E>) Petroleum storage and transfer units with a total storage capacity exceeding 300,000 barrels;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">w</E>) Taconite ore processing plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">x</E>) Glass fiber processing plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">y</E>) Charcoal production plants;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">z</E>) Fossil fuel-fired steam electric plants of more than 250 million British thermal units per hour heat input;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">aa</E>) Any other stationary source category which, as of August 7, 1980, is being regulated under section 111 or 112 of the Act; or</P>
          <P>(iii) The source or modification is a portable stationary source which has previously received a permit under requirements equivalent to those contained in paragraphs (j) through (r) of this section, if:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">a</E>) The source proposes to relocate and emissions of the source at the new location would be temporary; and</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">b</E>) The emissions from the source would not exceed its allowable emissions; and</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">c</E>) The emissions from the source would impact no Class I area and no area where an applicable increment is known to be violated; and</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">d</E>) Reasonable notice is given to the reviewing authority prior to the relocation identifying the proposed new location and the probable duration of operation at the new location. Such notice shall be given to the reviewing authority not less than 10 days in advance of the proposed relocation unless a different time duration is previously approved by the reviewing authority.</P>
          <P>(5) The plan may provide that requirements equivalent to those contained in paragraphs (j) through (r) of this section do not apply to a major stationary source or major modification with respect to a particular pollutant if the owner or operator demonstrates that, as to that pollutant, the source or modification is located in an area designated as nonattainment under section 107 of the Act.</P>

          <P>(6) The plan may provide that requirements equivalent to those contained in paragraphs (k), (m), and (o) of this section do not apply to a proposed major stationary source or major modification with respect to a particular pollutant, if the allowable emissions of that pollutant from a new source, or the net emissions increase of that pollutant from a modification, would be temporary and impact no Class I area and no area where an applicable increment is known to be violated.<PRTPAGE P="169"/>
          </P>
          <P>(7) The plan may provide that requirements equivalent to those contained in paragraphs (k), (m), and (o) of this section as they relate to any maximum allowable increase for a Class II area do not apply to a modification of a major stationary source that was in existence on March 1, 1978, if the net increase in allowable emissions of each pollutant subject to regulation under the Act from the modification after the application of best available control technology would be less than 50 tons per year.</P>
          <P>(8) The plan may provide that the reviewing authority may exempt a proposed major stationary source or major modification from the requirements of paragraph (m) of this section, with respect to monitoring for a particular pollutant, if:</P>
          <P>(i) The emissions increase of the pollutant from a new stationary source or the net emissions increase of the pollutant from a modification would cause, in any area, air quality impacts less than the following amounts:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">a</E>) Carbon monoxide—575 ug/m<E T="21">3,</E> 8-hour average;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">b</E>) Nitrogen dioxide—14 ug/m<E T="21">3,</E> annual average;</P>
          <P>(c) Particulate matter—10 μg/m<SU>3</SU> of PM-10, 24-hour average.</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">d</E>) Sulfur dioxide—13 ug/m<E T="21">3,</E> 24-hour average;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">e</E>) Ozone; <E T="21">1</E>
            <FTREF/>
          </P>
          <FTNT>
            <P>
              <E T="21">1 </E> No <E T="03">de minimis</E> air quality level is provided for ozone. However, any net increase of 100 tons per year or more of volatile organic compounds subject to PSD would be required to perform and ambient impact analysis, including the gathering of ambient air quality data.</P>
          </FTNT>
          <P>(<E T="03">f</E>) Lead—0.1 μg/m<SU>3</SU>, 3-month average.</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">g</E>) Mercury—0.25 ug/m<E T="21">3,</E> 24-hour average;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">h</E>) Beryllium—0.001 μg/m<SU>3</SU>, 24-hour average:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">i</E>) Fluorides—0.25 ug/m<E T="21">3,</E> 24-hour average;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">j</E>) Vinyl chloride—15 ug/m<E T="21">3,</E> 24-hour average;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">k</E>) Total reduced sulfur—10 ug/m<E T="21">3,</E> 1-hour average;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">l</E>) Hydrogen sulfide—0.2 μg/m<SU>3</SU>, 1-hour average:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">m</E>) Reduced sulfur compounds—10 ug/m<E T="21">3,</E> 1-hour average; or</P>
          <P>(ii) The concentrations of the pollutant in the area that the source or modification would affect are less than the concentrations listed in (i)(8)(i) of this section; or</P>
          <P>(iii) The pollutants is not listed in paragraph (i)(8)(i) of this section.</P>
          <P>(9) If EPA approves a plan revision under 40 CFR 51.166 as in effect before August 7, 1980, any subsequent revision which meets the requirements of this section may contain transition provisions which parallel the transition provisions of 40 CFR 52.21(i)(9), (i)(10) and (m)(1)(v) as in effect on that date, which provisions relate to requirements for best available control technology and air quality analyses. Any such subsequent revision may not contain any transition provision which in the context of the revision would operate any less stringently than would its counterpart in 40 CFR 52.21.</P>
          <P>(10) If EPA approves a plan revision under § 51.166 as in effect [before July 31, 1987], any subsequent revision which meets the requirements of this section may contain transition provisions which parallel the transition provisions of § 52.21 (i)(11), and (m)(1) (vii) and (viii) of this chapter as in effect on that date, these provisions being related to monitoring requirements for particulate matter. Any such subsequent revision may not contain any transition provision which in the context of the revision would operate any less stringently than would its counterpart in § 52.21 of this chapter.</P>
          <P>(11) The plan may provide that the permitting requirements equivalent to those contained in paragraph (k)(2) of this section do not apply to a stationary source or modification with respect to any maximum allowable increase for nitrogen oxides if the owner or operator of the source or modification submitted an application for a permit under the applicable permit program approved or promulgated under the Act before the provisions embodying the maximum allowable increase took effect as part of the plan and the permitting authority subsequently determined that the application as submitted before that date was complete.</P>

          <P>(12) The plan may provide that the permitting requirements equivalent to those contained in paragraph (k)(2) of <PRTPAGE P="170"/>this section shall not apply to a stationary source or modification with respect to any maximum allowable increase for PM-10 if (i) the owner or operator of the source or modification submitted an application for a permit under the applicable permit program approved under the Act before the provisions embodying the maximum allowable increases for PM-10 took effect as part of the plan, and (ii) the permitting authority subsequently determined that the application as submitted before that date was complete. Instead, the applicable requirements equivalent to paragraph (k)(2) shall apply with respect to the maximum allowable increases for TSP as in effect on the date the application was submitted.</P>
          <P>(j) <E T="03">Control technology review.</E> The plan shall provide that:</P>
          <P>(1) A major stationary source or major modification shall meet each applicable emissions limitation under the State Implementation Plan and each applicable emission standards and standard of performance under 40 CFR parts 60 and 61.</P>
          <P>(2) A new major stationary source shall apply best available control technology for each pollutant subject to regulation under the Act that it would have the potential to emit in significant amounts.</P>
          <P>(3) A major modification shall apply best available control technology for each pollutant subject to regulation under the Act for which it would be a significant net emissions increase at the source. This requirement applies to each proposed emissions unit at which a net emissions increase in the pollutant would occur as a result of a physical change or change in the method of operation in the unit.</P>
          <P>(4) For phased construction projects, the determination of best available control technology shall be reviewed and modified as appropriate at the least reasonable time which occurs no later than 18 months prior to commencement of construction of each independent phase of the project. At such time, the owner or operator of the applicable stationary source may be required to demonstrate the adequacy of any previous determination of best available control technology for the source.</P>
          <P>(k) <E T="03">Source impact analysis.</E> The plan shall provide that the owner or operator of the proposed source or modification shall demonstrate that allowable emission increases from the proposed source or modification, in conjunction with all other applicable emissions increases or reduction (including secondary emissions) would not cause or contribute to air pollution in violation of:</P>
          <P>(1) Any national ambient air quality standard in any air quality control region; or</P>
          <P>(2) Any applicable maximum allowable increase over the baseline concentration in any area.</P>
          <P>(l) <E T="03">Air quality models.</E> The plan shall provide for procedures which specify that—</P>
          <P>(1) All applications of air quality modeling involved in this subpart shall be based on the applicable models, data bases, and other requirements specified in appendix W of this part (Guideline on Air Quality Models).</P>
          <P>(2) Where an air quality model specified in appendix W of this part (Guideline on Air Quality Models) is inappropriate, the model may be modified or another model substituted. Such a modification or substitution of a model may be made on a case-by-case basis or, where appropriate, on a generic basis for a specific State program. Written approval of the Administrator must be obtained for any modification or substitution. In addition, use of a modified or substituted model must be subject to notice and opportunity for public comment under procedures set forth in § 51.102.</P>
          <P>(m) <E T="03">Air quality analysis</E>—(1) <E T="03">Pre-application analysis.</E> (i) The plan shall provide that any application for a permit under regulations approved pursuant to this section shall contain an analysis of ambient air quality in the area that the major stationary source or major modification would affect for each of the following pollutants:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">a</E>) For the source, each pollutant that it would have the potential to emit in a significant amount;</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">b</E>) For the modification, each pollutant for which it would result in a significant net emissions increase.<PRTPAGE P="171"/>
          </P>
          <P>(ii) The plan shall provide that, with respect to any such pollutant for which no National Ambient Air Quality Standard exists, the analysis shall contain such air quality monitoring data as the reviewing authority determines is necessary to assess ambient air quality for that pollutant in any area that the emissions of that pollutant would affect.</P>
          <P>(iii) The plan shall provide that with respect to any such pollutant (other than nonmethane hydrocarbons) for which such a standard does exist, the analysis shall contain continuous air quality monitoring data gathered for purposes of determining whether emissions of that pollutant would cause or contribute to a violation of the standard or any maxiumum allowable increase.</P>
          <P>(iv) The plan shall provide that, in general, the continuous air monitoring data that is required shall have been gathered over a period of one year and shall represent the year preceding receipt of the application, except that, if the reviewing authority determines that a complete and adequate analysis can be accomplished with monitoring data gathered over a period shorter than one year (but not to be less than four months), the data that is required shall have been gathered over at least that shorter period.</P>
          <P>(v) The plan may provide that the owner or operator of a proposed major stationary source or major modification of volatile organic compounds who satisfies all conditions of 40 CFR part 51 appendix S, section IV may provide postapproval monitoring data for ozone in lieu of providing preconstruction data as required under paragraph (m)(1) of this section.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Post-construction monitoring.</E> The plan shall provide that the owner or operator of a major stationary source or major modification shall, after construction of the stationary source or modification, conduct such ambient monitoring as the reviewing authority determines is necessary to determine the effect emissions from the stationary source or modification may have, or are having, on air quality in any area.</P>
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Operation of monitoring stations.</E> The plan shall provide that the owner or operator of a major stationary source or major modification shall meet the requirements of appendix B to part 58 of this chapter during the operation of monitoring stations for purposes of satisfying paragraph (m) of this section.</P>
          <P>(n) <E T="03">Source information.</E> (1) The plan shall provide that the owner or operator of a proposed source or modification shall submit all information necessary to perform any analysis or make any determination required under procedures established in accordance with this section.</P>
          <P>(2) The plan may provide that such information shall include:</P>
          <P>(i) A description of the nature, location, design capacity, and typical operating schedule of the source or modification, including specifications and drawings showing its design and plant layout;</P>
          <P>(ii) A detailed schedule for construction of the source or modification;</P>
          <P>(iii) A detailed description as to what system of continuous emission reduction is planned by the source or modification, emission estimates, and any other information as necessary to determine that best available control technology as applicable would be applied;</P>
          <P>(3) The plan shall provide that upon request of the State, the owner or operator shall also provide information on:</P>
          <P>(i) The air quality impact of the source or modification, including meteorological and topographical data necessary to estimate such impact; and</P>
          <P>(ii) The air quality impacts and the nature and extent of any or all general commercial, residential, industrial, and other growth which has occurred since August 7, 1977, in the area the source or modification would affect.</P>
          <P>(o) <E T="03">Additional impact analyses.</E> The plan shall provide that—</P>

          <P>(1) The owner or operator shall provide an analysis of the impairment to visibility, soils, and vegetation that would occur as a result of the source or modification and general commercial, residential, industrial, and other growth associated with the source or modification. The owner or operator need not provide an analysis of the impact on vegetation having no significant commercial or recreational value.<PRTPAGE P="172"/>
          </P>
          <P>(2) The owner or operator shall provide an analysis of the air quality impact projected for the area as a result of general commercial, residential, industrial, and other growth associated with the source or modification.</P>
          <P>(p) <E T="03">Sources impacting Federal Class I areas—additional requirements—</E>(1) <E T="03">Notice to EPA.</E> The plan shall provide that the reviewing authority shall transmit to the Administrator a copy of each permit application relating to a major stationary source or major modification and provide notice to the Administrator of every action related to the consideration of such permit.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Federal Land Manager.</E> The Federal Land Manager and the Federal official charged with direct responsibility for management of Class I lands have an affirmative responsibility to protect the air quality related values (including visibility) of any such lands and to consider, in consultation with the Administrator, whether a proposed source or modification would have an adverse impact on such values.</P>
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Denial—impact on air quality related values.</E> The plan shall provide a mechanism whereby a Federal Land Manager of any such lands may present to the State, after the reviewing authority's preliminary determination required under procedures developed in accordance with paragraph (r) of this section, a demonstration that the emissions from the proposed source or modification would have an adverse impact on the air quality-related values (including visibility) of any Federal mandatory Class I lands, notwithstanding that the change in air quality resulting from emissions from such source or modification would not cause or contribute to concentrations which would exceed the maximum allowable increases for a Class I area. If the State concurs with such demonstration, the reviewing authority shall not issue the permit.</P>
          <P>(4) <E T="03">Class I Variances.</E> The plan may provide that the owner or operator of a proposed source or modification may demonstrate to the Federal Land Manager that the emissions from such source would have no adverse impact on the air quality related values of such lands (including visibility), notwithstanding that the change in air quality resulting from emissions from such source or modification would cause or contribute to concentrations which would exceed the maximum allowable increases for a Class I area. If the Federal land manager concurs with such demonstration and so certifies to the State, the reviewing authority may: <E T="03">Provided,</E> That applicable requirements are otherwise met, issue the permit with such emission limitations as may be necessary to assure that emissions of sulfur dioxide, particulate matter, and nitrogen oxides would not exceed the following maximum allowable increases over minor source baseline concentration for such pollutants:</P>
          <GPOTABLE CDEF="s75,5" COLS="2" OPTS="L2,i1">
            <BOXHD>
              <CHED H="1">Pollutant</CHED>
              <CHED H="1">Maximum allowable increase (micrograms per cubic meter)</CHED>
            </BOXHD>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="11">Particulate matter:</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="03">PM-10, annual arithmetic mean</ENT>
              <ENT>17</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="03">PM-10, 24-hour maximum</ENT>
              <ENT>30</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="11">Sulfur dioxide:</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="03">Annual arithmetic mean</ENT>
              <ENT>20</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="03">24-hr maximum</ENT>
              <ENT>91</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="03">3-hr maximum</ENT>
              <ENT>325</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">Nitrogen dioxide: Annual arithmetic mean</ENT>
              <ENT>25</ENT>
            </ROW>
          </GPOTABLE>
          <P>(5) <E T="03">Sulfur dioxide variance by Governor with Federal Land Manager's concurrence.</E> The plan may provide that—</P>
          <P>(i) The owner or operator of a proposed source or modification which cannot be approved under procedures developed pursuant to paragraph (q)(4) of this section may demonstrate to the Governor that the source or modification cannot be constructed by reason of any maximum allowable increase for sulfur dioxide for periods of twenty-four hours or less applicable to any Class I area and, in the case of Federal mandatory Class I areas, that a variance under this clause would not adversely affect the air quality related values of the area (including visibility);</P>
          <P>(ii) The Governor, after consideration of the Federal Land Manager's recommendation (if any) and subject to his concurrence, may grant, after notice and an opportunity for a public hearing, a variance from such maximum allowable increase; and</P>

          <P>(iii) If such variance is granted, the reviewing authority may issue a permit to such source or modification in <PRTPAGE P="173"/>accordance with provisions developed pursuant to paragraph (q)(7) of this section: <E T="03">Provided,</E> That the applicable requirements of the plan are otherwise met.</P>
          <P>(6) <E T="03">Variance by the Governor with the President's concurrence.</E> The plan may provide that—</P>
          <P>(i) The recommendations of the Governor and the Federal Land Manager shall be transferred to the President in any case where the Governor recommends a variance in which the Federal Land Manager does not concur;</P>
          <P>(ii) The President may approve the Governor's recommendation if he finds that such variance is in the national interest; and</P>

          <P>(iii) If such a variance is approved, the reviewing authority may issue a permit in accordance with provisions developed pursuant to the requirements of paragraph (q)(7) of this section: <E T="03">Provided,</E> That the applicable requirements of the plan are otherwise met.</P>
          <P>(7) <E T="03">Emission limitations for Presidential or gubernatorial variance.</E> The plan shall provide that in the case of a permit issued under procedures developed pursuant to paragraph (q) (5) or (6) of this section, the source or modification shall comply with emission limitations as may be necessary to assure that emissions of sulfur dioxide from the source or modification would not (during any day on which the otherwise applicable maximum allowable increases are exceeded) cause or contribute to concentrations which would exceed the following maximum allowable increases over the baseline concentration and to assure that such emissions would not cause or contribute to concentrations which exceed the otherwise applicable maximum allowable increases for periods of exposure of 24 hours or less for more than 18 days, not necessarily consecutive, during any annual period:</P>
          <GPOTABLE CDEF="s50,6,6" COLS="3" OPTS="L2">
            <TTITLE>
              <E T="04">Maximum Allowable Increase</E>
            </TTITLE>
            <TDESC>[Micrograms per cubic meter]</TDESC>
            <BOXHD>
              <CHED H="1">Period of exposure</CHED>
              <CHED H="1">Terrain areas</CHED>
              <CHED H="2">Low</CHED>
              <CHED H="2">High</CHED>
            </BOXHD>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">24-hr maximum</ENT>
              <ENT>36</ENT>
              <ENT>62</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">3-hr maximum</ENT>
              <ENT>130</ENT>
              <ENT>221</ENT>
            </ROW>
          </GPOTABLE>
          <P>(q) <E T="03">Public participation.</E> The plan shall provide that—</P>
          <P>(1) The reviewing authority shall notify all applicants within a specified time period as to the completeness of the application or any deficiency in the application or information submitted. In the event of such a deficiency, the date of receipt of the application shall be the date on which the reviewing authority received all required information.</P>
          <P>(2) Within one year after receipt of a complete application, the reviewing authority shall:</P>
          <P>(i) Make a preliminary determination whether construction should be approved, approved with conditions, or disapproved.</P>
          <P>(ii) Make available in at least one location in each region in which the proposed source would be constructed a copy of all materials the applicant submitted, a copy of the preliminary determination, and a copy or summary of other materials, if any, considered in making the preliminary determination.</P>
          <P>(iii) Notify the public, by advertisement in a newspaper of general circulation in each region in which the proposed source would be constructed, of the application, the preliminary determination, the degree of increment consumption that is expected from the source or modification, and of the opportunity for comment at a public hearing as well as written public comment.</P>
          <P>(iv) Send a copy of the notice of public comment to the applicant, the Administrator and to officials and agencies having cognizance over the location where the proposed construction would occur as follows: Any other State or local air pollution control agencies, the chief executives of the city and county where the source would be located; any comprehensive regional land use planning agency, and any State, Federal Land Manager, or Indian Governing body whose lands may be affected by emissions from the source or modification.</P>

          <P>(v) Provide opportunity for a public hearing for interested persons to appear and submit written or oral comments on the air quality impact of the source, alternatives to it, the control <PRTPAGE P="174"/>technology required, and other appropriate considerations.</P>
          <P>(vi) Consider all written comments submitted within a time specified in the notice of public comment and all comments received at any public hearing(s) in making a final decision on the approvability of the application. The reviewing authority shall make all comments available for public inspection in the same locations where the reviewing authority made available preconstruction information relating to the proposed source or modification.</P>
          <P>(vii) Make a final determination whether construction should be approved, approved with conditions, or disapproved.</P>
          <P>(viii) Notify the applicant in writing of the final determination and make such notification available for public inspection at the same location where the reviewing authority made available preconstruction information and public comments relating to the source.</P>
          <P>(r) <E T="03">Source obligation.</E> (1) The plan shall include enforceable procedures to provide that approval to construct shall not relieve any owner or operator of the responsibility to comply fully with applicable provisions of the plan and any other requirements under local, State or Federal law.</P>
          <P>(2) The plan shall provide that at such time that a particular source or modification becomes a major stationary source or major modification solely by virtue of a relaxation in any enforceable limitation which was established after August 7, 1980, on the capacity of the source or modification otherwise to emit a pollutant, such as a restriction on hours of operation, then the requirements of paragraphs (j) through (s) of this section shall apply to the source or modification as though construction had not yet commenced on the source or modification.</P>
          <P>(s) <E T="03">Innovative control technology.</E> (1) The plan may provide that an owner or operator of a proposed major stationary source or major modification may request the reviewing authority to approve a system of innovative control technology.</P>
          <P>(2) The plan may provide that the reviewing authority may, with the consent of the Governor(s) of other affected State(s), determine that the source or modification may employ a system of innovative control technology, if:</P>
          <P>(i) The proposed control system would not cause or contribute to an unreasonable risk to public health, welfare, or safety in its operation or function;</P>
          <P>(ii) The owner or operator agrees to achieve a level of continuous emissions reduction equivalent to that which would have been required under paragraph (j)(2) of this section, by a date specified by the reviewing authority. Such date shall not be later than 4 years from the time of startup or 7 years from permit issuance;</P>
          <P>(iii) The source or modification would meet the requirements equivalent to those in paragraphs (j) and (k) of this section, based on the emissions rate that the stationary source employing the system of innovative control technology would be required to meet on the date specified by the reviewing authority;</P>
          <P>(iv) The source or modification would not before the date specified by the reviewing authority:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">a</E>) Cause or contribute to any violation of an applicable national ambient air quality standard; or</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">b</E>) Impact any area where an applicable increment is known to be violated;</P>
          <P>(v) All other applicable requirements including those for public participation have been met.</P>
          <P>(vi) The provisions of paragraph (p) of this section (relating to Class I areas) have been satisfied with respect to all periods during the life of the source or modification.</P>
          <P>(3) The plan shall provide that the reviewing authority shall withdraw any approval to employ a system of innovative control technology made under this section, if:</P>
          <P>(i) The proposed system fails by the specified date to achieve the required continuous emissions reduction rate; or</P>
          <P>(ii) The proposed system fails before the specified date so as to contribute to an unreasonable risk to public health, welfare, or safety; or</P>

          <P>(iii) The reviewing authority decides at any time that the proposed system is unlikely to achieve the required <PRTPAGE P="175"/>level of control or to protect the public health, welfare, or safety.</P>
          <P>(4) The plan may provide that if a source or modification fails to meet the required level of continuous emissions reduction within the specified time period, or if the approval is withdrawn in accordance with paragraph (s)(3) of this section, the reviewing authority may allow the source or modification up to an additional 3 years to meet the requirement for the application of best available control technology through use of a demonstrated system of control.</P>
          <SECAUTH>(Secs. 101(b)(1), 110, 160-169, 171-178, and 301(a), Clean Air Act, as amended (42 U.S.C. 7401(b)(1), 7410, 7470-7479, 7501-7508, and 7601(a)); sec. 129(a), Clean Air Act Amendments of 1977 (Pub. L. 95-95, 91 Stat. 685 (Aug. 7, 1977)))</SECAUTH>
          <CITA>[43 FR 26382, June 19, 1978]</CITA>
          <EDNOTE>
            <HD SOURCE="HED">Editorial Note:</HD>
            <P>For <E T="04">Federal Register</E> citations affecting § 51.166, see the List of CFR Sections Affected in the Finding Aids section of this volume.</P>
          </EDNOTE>
        </SECTION>
      </SUBPART>
      <SUBPART>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart J—Ambient Air Quality Surveillance</HD>
        <AUTH>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Authority:</HD>
          <P>Secs. 110, 301(a), 313, 319, Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 7410, 7601(a), 7613, 7619).</P>
        </AUTH>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.190</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Ambient air quality monitoring requirements.</SUBJECT>
          <P>The requirements for monitoring ambient air quality for purposes of the plan are located in subpart C of part 58 of this chapter.</P>
          <CITA>[44 FR 27569, May 10, 1979]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
      </SUBPART>
      <SUBPART>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart K—Source Survelliance</HD>
        <SOURCE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Source:</HD>
          <P>51 FR 40673, Nov. 7, 1986, unless otherwise noted.</P>
        </SOURCE>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.210</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>General.</SUBJECT>
          <P>Each plan must provide for monitoring the status of compliance with any rules and regulations that set forth any portion of the control strategy. Specifically, the plan must meet the requirements of this subpart.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.211</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Emission reports and recordkeeping.</SUBJECT>
          <P>The plan must provide for legally enforceable procedures for requiring owners or operators of stationary sources to maintain records of and periodically report to the State—</P>
          <P>(a) Information on the nature and amount of emissions from the stationary sources; and</P>
          <P>(b) Other information as may be necessary to enable the State to determine whether the sources are in compliance with applicable portions of the control strategy.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.212</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Testing, inspection, enforcement, and complaints.</SUBJECT>
          <P>The plan must provide for—</P>
          <P>(a) Periodic testing and inspection of stationary sources; and</P>
          <P>(b) Establishment of a system for detecting violations of any rules and regulations through the enforcement of appropriate visible emission limitations and for investigating complaints.</P>
          <P>(c) Enforceable test methods for each emission limit specified in the plan. For the purpose of submitting compliance certifications or establishing whether or not a person has violated or is in violation of any standard in this part, the plan must not preclude the use, including the exclusive use, of any credible evidence or information, relevant to whether a source would have been in compliance with applicable requirements if the appropriate performance or compliance test or procedure had been performed. As an enforceable method, States may use:</P>
          <P>(1) Any of the appropriate methods in appendix M to this part, Recommended Test Methods for State Implementation Plans; or</P>
          <P>(2) An alternative method following review and approval of that method by the Administrator; or</P>
          <P>(3) Any appropriate method in appendix A to 40 CFR part 60.</P>
          <CITA>[51 FR 40673, Nov. 7, 1986, as amended at 55 FR 14249, Apr. 17, 1990; 62 FR 8328, Feb. 24, 1997]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.213</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Transportation control measures.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) The plan must contain procedures for obtaining and maintaining data on actual emissions reductions achieved as a result of implementing transportation control measures.</P>

          <P>(b) In the case of measures based on traffic flow changes or reductions in <PRTPAGE P="176"/>vehicle use, the data must include observed changes in vehicle miles traveled and average speeds.</P>
          <P>(c) The data must be maintained in such a way as to facilitate comparison of the planned and actual efficacy of the transportation control measures.</P>
          <CITA>[61 FR 30163, June 14, 1996]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.214</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Continuous emission monitoring.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) The plan must contain legally enforceable procedures to—</P>
          <P>(1) Require stationary sources subject to emission standards as part of an applicable plan to install, calibrate, maintain, and operate equipment for continuously monitoring and recording emissions; and</P>
          <P>(2) Provide other information as specified in appendix P of this part.</P>
          <P>(b) The procedures must—</P>
          <P>(1) Identify the types of sources, by source category and capacity, that must install the equipment; and</P>
          <P>(2) Identify for each source category the pollutants which must be monitored.</P>
          <P>(c) The procedures must, as a minimum, require the types of sources set forth in appendix P of this part to meet the applicable requirements set forth therein.</P>
          <P>(d)(1) The procedures must contain provisions that require the owner or operator of each source subject to continuous emission monitoring and recording requirements to maintain a file of all pertinent information for at least two years following the date of collection of that information.</P>
          <P>(2) The information must include emission measurements, continuous monitoring system performance testing measurements, performance evaluations, calibration checks, and adjustments and maintenance performed on such monitoring systems and other reports and records required by appendix P of this part.</P>
          <P>(e) The procedures must require the source owner or operator to submit information relating to emissions and operation of the emission monitors to the State to the extent described in appendix P at least as frequently as described therein.</P>
          <P>(f)(1) The procedures must provide that sources subject to the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section must have installed all necessary equipment and shall have begun monitoring and recording within 18 months after either—</P>
          <P>(i) The approval of a State plan requiring monitoring for that source; or</P>
          <P>(ii) Promulgation by the Agency of monitoring requirements for that source.</P>
          <P>(2) The State may grant reasonable extensions of this period to sources that—</P>
          <P>(i) Have made good faith efforts to purchases, install, and begin the monitoring and recording of emission data; and</P>
          <P>(ii) Have been unable to complete the installation within the period.</P>
        </SECTION>
      </SUBPART>
      <SUBPART>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart L—Legal Authority</HD>
        <SOURCE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Source:</HD>
          <P>51 FR 40673, Nov. 7, 1986, unless otherwise noted.</P>
        </SOURCE>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.230</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Requirements for all plans.</SUBJECT>
          <P>Each plan must show that the State has legal authority to carry out the plan, including authority to:</P>
          <P>(a) Adopt emission standards and limitations and any other measures necessary for attainment and maintenance of national standards.</P>
          <P>(b) Enforce applicable laws, regulations, and standards, and seek injunctive relief.</P>
          <P>(c) Abate pollutant emissions on an emergency basis to prevent substantial endangerment to the health of persons, i.e., authority comparable to that available to the Administrator under section 305 of the Act.</P>
          <P>(d) Prevent construction, modification, or operation of a facility, building, structure, or installation, or combination thereof, which directly or indirectly results or may result in emissions of any air pollutant at any location which will prevent the attainment or maintenance of a national standard.</P>
          <P>(e) Obtain information necessary to determine whether air pollution sources are in compliance with applicable laws, regulations, and standards, including authority to require recordkeeping and to make inspections and conduct tests of air pollution sources.</P>

          <P>(f) Require owners or operators of stationary sources to install, maintain, <PRTPAGE P="177"/>and use emission monitoring devices and to make periodic reports to the State on the nature and amounts of emissions from such stationary sources; also authority for the State to make such data available to the public as reported and as correlated with any applicable emission standards or limitations.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.231</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Identification of legal authority.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) The provisions of law or regulation which the State determines provide the authorities required under this section must be specifically identified, and copies of such laws or regulations be submitted with the plan.</P>
          <P>(b) The plan must show that the legal authorities specified in this subpart are available to the State at the time of submission of the plan.</P>
          <P>(c) Legal authority adequate to fulfill the requirements of § 51.230 (e) and (f) of this subpart may be delegated to the State under section 114 of the Act.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.232</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Assignment of legal authority to local agencies.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) A State government agency other than the State air pollution control agency may be assigned responsibility for carrying out a portion of a plan if the plan demonstrates to the Administrator's satisfaction that the State governmental agency has the legal authority necessary to carry out the portion of plan.</P>
          <P>(b) The State may authorize a local agency to carry out a plan, or portion thereof, within such local agency's jurisdiction if—</P>
          <P>(1) The plan demonstrates to the Administrator's satisfaction that the local agency has the legal authority necessary to implement the plan or portion of it; and</P>
          <P>(2) This authorization does not relieve the State of responsibility under the Act for carrying out such plan, or portion thereof.</P>
        </SECTION>
      </SUBPART>
      <SUBPART>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart M—Intergovernmental Consultation</HD>
        <AUTH>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Authority:</HD>
          <P>Secs. 110, 121, 174(a), 301(a), Clean Air Act, as amended (42 U.S.C. 7410, 7421, 7504, and 7601(a)).</P>
        </AUTH>
        <SOURCE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Source:</HD>
          <P>44 FR 35179, June 18, 1979, unless otherwise noted.</P>
        </SOURCE>
        <SUBJGRP>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Agency Designation</HD>
          <SECTION>
            <SECTNO>§ 51.240</SECTNO>
            <SUBJECT>General plan requirements.</SUBJECT>
            <P>Each State implementation plan must identify organizations, by official title, that will participate in developing, implementing, and enforcing the plan and the responsibilities of such organizations. The plan shall include any related agreements or memoranda of understanding among the organizations.</P>
          </SECTION>
          <SECTION>
            <SECTNO>§ 51.241</SECTNO>
            <SUBJECT>Nonattainment areas for carbon monoxide and ozone.</SUBJECT>
            <P>(a) For each AQCR or portion of an AQCR in which the national primary standard for carbon monoxide or ozone will not be attained by July 1, 1979, the Governor (or Governors for interstate areas) shall certify, after consultation with local officials, the organization responsible for developing the revised implementation plan or portions thereof for such AQCR.</P>
            <P>(b)-(f) [Reserved]</P>
            <CITA>[44 FR 35179, June 18, 1979, as amended at 48 FR 29302, June 24, 1983; 60 FR 33922, June 29, 1995; 61 FR 16060, Apr. 11, 1996]</CITA>
          </SECTION>
          <SECTION>
            <SECTNO>§ 51.242</SECTNO>
            <RESERVED>[Reserved]</RESERVED>
          </SECTION>
        </SUBJGRP>
      </SUBPART>
      <SUBPART>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart N—Compliance Schedules</HD>
        <SOURCE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Source:</HD>
          <P>51 FR 40673, Nov. 7, 1986, unless otherwise noted.</P>
        </SOURCE>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.260</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Legally enforceable compliance schedules.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) Each plan shall contain legally enforceable compliance schedules setting forth the dates by which all stationary and mobile sources or categories of such sources must be in compliance with any applicable requirement of the plan.</P>
          <P>(b) The compliance schedules must contain increments of progress required by § 51.262 of this subpart.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.261</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Final compliance schedules.</SUBJECT>

          <P>(a) Unless EPA grants an extension under subpart R, compliance schedules designed to provide for attainment of a primary standard must—<PRTPAGE P="178"/>
          </P>
          <P>(1) Provide for compliance with the applicable plan requirements as soon as practicable; or</P>
          <P>(2) Provide for compliance no later than the date specified for attainment of the primary standard under;</P>
          <P>(b) Unless EPA grants an extension under subpart R, compliance schedules designed to provide for attainment of a secondary standard must—</P>
          <P>(1) Provide for compliance with the applicable plan requirements in a reasonable time; or</P>
          <P>(2) Provide for compliance no later than the date specified for the attainment of the secondary standard under § 51.110(c).</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.262</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Extension beyond one year.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) Any compliance schedule or revision of it extending over a period of more than one year from the date of its adoption by the State agency must provide for legally enforceable increments of progress toward compliance by each affected source or category of sources. The increments of progress must include—</P>
          <P>(1) Each increment of progress specified in § 51.100(q); and</P>
          <P>(2) Additional increments of progress as may be necessary to permit close and effective supervision of progress toward timely compliance.</P>
          <P>(b) [Reserved]</P>
        </SECTION>
      </SUBPART>
      <SUBPART>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart O—Miscellaneous Plan Content Requirements</HD>
        <AUTH>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Authority:</HD>
          <P>Secs. 110, 301(a), 313, 319, Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 7410, 7601(a), 7613, 7619).</P>
        </AUTH>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.280</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Resources.</SUBJECT>
          <P>Each plan must include a description of the resources available to the State and local agencies at the date of submission of the plan and of any additional resources needed to carry out the plan during the 5-year period following its submission. The description must include projections of the extent to which resources will be acquired at 1-, 3-, and 5-year intervals.</P>
          <CITA>[51 FR 40674, Nov. 7, 1986]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.281</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Copies of rules and regulations.</SUBJECT>
          <P>Emission limitations and other measures necessary for attainment and maintenance of any national standard, including any measures necessary to implement the requirements of subpart L must be adopted as rules and regulations enforceable by the State agency. Copies of all such rules and regulations must be submitted with the plan. Submittal of a plan setting forth proposed rules and regulations will not satisfy the requirements of this section nor will it be considered a timely submittal.</P>
          <CITA>[51 FR 40674, Nov. 7, 1986]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.285</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Public notification.</SUBJECT>
          <P>By March 1, 1980, the State shall submit a plan revision that contains provisions for:</P>
          <P>(a) Notifying the public on a regular basis of instances or areas in which any primary standard was exceeded during any portion of the preceeding calendar year,</P>
          <P>(b) Advising the public of the health hazards associated with such an exceedance of a primary standard, and</P>
          <P>(c) Increasing public awareness of:</P>
          <P>(1) Measures which can be taken to prevent a primary standard from being exceeded, and</P>
          <P>(2) Ways in which the public can participate in regulatory and other efforts to improve air quality.</P>
          <CITA>[44 FR 27569, May 10, 1979]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
      </SUBPART>
      <SUBPART>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart P—Protection of Visibility</HD>
        <AUTH>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Authority:</HD>
          <P>Secs. 110, 114, 121, 160-169, 169A, and 301 of the Clean Air Act, (42 U.S.C. 7410, 7414, 7421, 7470-7479, and 7601).</P>
        </AUTH>
        <SOURCE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Source:</HD>
          <P>45 FR 80089, Dec. 2, 1980, unless otherwise noted.</P>
        </SOURCE>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.300</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Purpose and applicability.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Purpose.</E> The primary purposes of this subpart are (1) to require States to develop programs to assure reasonable progress toward meeting the national goal of preventing any future, and remedying and existing, impairment of visibility in mandatory Class I Federal areas which impairment results from <PRTPAGE P="179"/>man-made air pollution, and (2) to establish necessary additional procedures for new source permit applicants, States, and Federal Land Managers to use in conducting the visibility impact analysis required for new sources under § 51.24.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Applicability.</E> (1) The provisions of this subpart are applicable to:</P>
          <P>(i) Each State which has a mandatory Class I Federal area identified in part 81, subpart D, of this title, and (ii) each State in which there is any source the emissions from which may reasonably be anticipated to cause or contribute to any impairment of visibility in any such area.</P>
          <P>(2) The provisions of this subpart are applicable to the following States:</P>
          <P>(i) Alabama</P>
          <P>(ii) Alaska</P>
          <P>(iii) Arizona</P>
          <P>(iv) Arkansas</P>
          <P>(v) California</P>
          <P>(vi) Colorado</P>
          <P>(vii) Florida</P>
          <P>(viii) Georgia</P>
          <P>(ix) Hawaii</P>
          <P>(x) Idaho</P>
          <P>(xi) Kentucky</P>
          <P>(xii) Louisiana</P>
          <P>(xiii) Maine</P>
          <P>(xiv) Michigan</P>
          <P>(xv) Minnesota</P>
          <P>(xvi) Missouri</P>
          <P>(xvii) Montana</P>
          <P>(xviii) Nevada</P>
          <P>(xix) New Hampshire</P>
          <P>(xx) New Jersey</P>
          <P>(xxi) New Mexico</P>
          <P>(xxii) North Carolina</P>
          <P>(xxiii) North Dakota</P>
          <P>(xxiv) Oklahoma</P>
          <P>(xxv) Oregon</P>
          <P>(xxvi) South Carolina</P>
          <P>(xxvii) South Dakota</P>
          <P>(xxviii) Tennessee</P>
          <P>(xxix) Texas</P>
          <P>(xxx) Utah</P>
          <P>(xxxi) Vermont</P>
          <P>(xxxii) Virginia</P>
          <P>(xxxiii) Virgin Islands</P>
          <P>(xxxiv) Washington</P>
          <P>(xxxv) West Virginia</P>
          <P>(xxxvi) Wyoming</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.301</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Definitions.</SUBJECT>
          <P>For purposes of this subpart:</P>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Adverse impact on visibility</E> means, for purposes of section 307, visibility impairment which interferes with the management, protection, preservation, or enjoyment of the visitor's visual experience of the Federal Class I area. This determination must be made on a case-by-case basis taking into account the geographic extent, intensity, duration, frequency and time of visibility impairments, and how these factors correlate with (1) times of visitor use of the Federal Class I area, and (2) the frequency and timing of natural conditions that reduce visibility. This term does not include effects on integral vistas.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Agency</E> means the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Best Available Retrofit Technology (BART)</E> means an emission limitation based on the degree of reduction achievable through the application of the best system of continuous emission reduction for each pollutant which is emitted by an existing stationary facility. The emission limitation must be established, on a case-by-case basis, taking into consideration the technology available, the costs of compliance, the energy and nonair quality environmental impacts of compliance, any pollution control equipment in use or in existence at the source, the remaining useful life of the source, and the degree of improvement in visibility which may reasonably be anticipated to result from the use of such technology.</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">Building, structure, or facility</E> means all of the pollutant-emitting activities which belong to the same industrial grouping, are located on one or more contiguous or adjacent properties, and are under the control of the same person (or persons under common control). Pollutant-emitting activities must be considered as part of the same industrial grouping if they belong to the same <E T="03">Major Group</E> (i.e., which have the same two-digit code) as described in the <E T="03">Standard Industrial Classification Manual, 1972</E> as amended by the 1977 Supplement (U.S. Government Printing Office stock numbers 4101-0066 and 003-005-00176-0 respectively).</P>
          <P>(e) <E T="03">Existing stationary facility</E> means any of the following stationary sources of air pollutants, including any reconstructed source, which was not in operation prior to August 7, 1962, and was <PRTPAGE P="180"/>in existence on August 7, 1977, and has the potential to emit 250 tons per year or more of any air pollutant. In determining potential to emit, fugitive emissions, to the extent quantifiable, must be counted.</P>
          <P>(1) Fossil-fuel fired steam electric plants of more than 250 million British thermal units per hour heat input,</P>
          <P>(2) Coal cleaning plants (thermal dryers),</P>
          <P>(3) Kraft pulp mills,</P>
          <P>(4) Portland cement plants,</P>
          <P>(5) Primary zinc smelters,</P>
          <P>(6) Iron and steel mill plants,</P>
          <P>(7) Primary aluminum ore reduction plants,</P>
          <P>(8) Primary copper smelters,</P>
          <P>(9) Municipal incinerators capable of charging more than 250 tons of refuse per day,</P>
          <P>(10) Hydrofluoric, sulfuric, and nitric acid plants,</P>
          <P>(11) Petroleum refineries,</P>
          <P>(12) Lime plants,</P>
          <P>(13) Phosphate rock processing plants,</P>
          <P>(14) Coke oven batteries,</P>
          <P>(15) Sulfur recovery plants,</P>
          <P>(16) Carbon black plants (furnace process),</P>
          <P>(17) Primary lead smelters,</P>
          <P>(18) Fuel conversion plants,</P>
          <P>(19) Sintering plants,</P>
          <P>(20) Secondary metal production facilities,</P>
          <P>(21) Chemical process plants,</P>
          <P>(22) Fossil-fuel boilers of more than 250 million British thermal units per hour heat input,</P>
          <P>(23) Petroleum storage and transfer facilities with a capacity exceeding 300,000 barrels,</P>
          <P>(24) Taconite ore processing facilities,</P>
          <P>(25) Glass fiber processing plants, and</P>
          <P>(26) Charcoal production facilities.</P>
          <P>(f) <E T="03">Federal Class I area</E> means any Federal land that is classified or reclassified <E T="03">Class I.</E>
          </P>
          <P>(g) <E T="03">Federal Land Manager</E> means the Secretary of the department with authority over the Federal Class I area or, with respect to Roosevelt-Campobello International Park, the Chairman of the Roosevelt-Campobello International Park Commission.</P>
          <P>(h) <E T="03">Federally enforceable</E> means all limitations and conditions which are enforceable by the Administrator under the Clean Air Act including those requirements developed pursuant to parts 60 and 61 of this title, requirements within any applicable State Implementation Plan, and any permit requirements established pursuant to § 52.21 of this chapter or under regulations approved pursuant to part 51, 52, or 60 of this title.</P>
          <P>(i) <E T="03">Fixed capital cost</E> means the capital needed to provide all of the depreciable components.</P>
          <P>(j) <E T="03">Fugitive Emissions</E> means those emissions which could not reasonably pass through a stack, chimney, vent, or other functionally equivalent opening.</P>
          <P>(k) <E T="03">In existence</E> means that the owner or operator has obtained all necessary preconstruction approvals or permits required by Federal, State, or local air pollution emissions and air quality laws or regulations and either has (1) begun, or caused to begin, a continuous program of physical on-site construction of the facility or (2) entered into binding agreements or contractual obligations, which cannot be cancelled or modified without substantial loss to the owner or operator, to undertake a program of construction of the facility to be completed in a reasonable time.</P>
          <P>(l) <E T="03">Installation</E> means an identifiable piece of process equipment.</P>
          <P>(m) <E T="03">In operation</E> means engaged in activity related to the primary design function of the source.</P>
          <P>(n) <E T="03">Integral vista</E> means a view perceived from within the mandatory Class I Federal area of a specific landmark or panorama located outside the boundary of the mandatory Class I Federal area.</P>
          <P>(o) <E T="03">Mandatory Class I Federal Area</E> means any area identified in part 81, subpart D of this title.</P>
          <P>(p) <E T="03">Major Stationary Source</E> and <E T="03">major modification</E> mean <E T="03">major stationary source</E> and <E T="03">major modification,</E> respectively, as defined in § 51.24.</P>
          <P>(q) <E T="03">Natural conditions</E> includes naturally occurring phenomena that reduce visibility as measured in terms of visual range, contrast, or coloration.</P>
          <P>(r) <E T="03">Potential to emit</E> means the maximum capacity of a stationary source to emit a pollutant under its physical and operational design. Any physical or operational limitation on the capacity <PRTPAGE P="181"/>of the source to emit a pollutant including air pollution control equipment and restrictions on hours of operation or on the type or amount of material combusted, stored, or processed, shall be treated as part of its design if the limitation or the effect it would have on emissions is federally enforceable. Secondary emissions do not count in determining the potential to emit of a stationary source.</P>
          <P>(s) <E T="03">Reasonably attributable</E> means attributable by visual observation or any other technique the State deems appropriate.</P>
          <P>(t) <E T="03">Reconstruction</E> will be presumed to have taken place where the fixed capital cost of the new component exceeds 50 percent of the fixed capital cost of a comparable entirely new source. Any final decision as to whether reconstruction has occurred must be made in accordance with the provisions of § 60.15 (f) (1) through (3) of this title.</P>
          <P>(u) <E T="03">Secondary emissions</E> means emissions which occur as a result of the construction or operation of an existing stationary facility but do not come from the existing stationary facility. Secondary emissions may include, but are not limited to, emissions from ships or trains coming to or from the existing stationary facility.</P>
          <P>(v) <E T="03">Significant impairment</E> means, for purposes of section 303, visibility impairment which, in the judgment of the Administrator, interferes with the management, protection, preservation, or enjoyment of the visitor's visual experience of the mandatory Class I Federal area. This determination must be made on a case-by-case basis taking into account the geographic extent, intensity, duration, frequency and time of the visibility impairment, and how these factors correlate with (1) times of visitor use of the mandatory Class I Federal area, and (2) the frequency and timing of natural conditions that reduce visibility.</P>
          <P>(w) <E T="03">Stationary Source</E> means any building, structure, facility, or installation which emits or may emit any air pollutant.</P>
          <P>(x) <E T="03">Visibility impairment</E> means any humanly perceptible change in visibility (visual range, contrast, coloration) from that which would have existed under natural conditions.</P>
          <P>(y) <E T="03">Visibility in any mandatory Class I Federal area</E> includes any integral vista associated with that area.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.302</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Implementation control strategies.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Plan Revision Procedures.</E> (1) Each State identified in section 300(b)(2) must submit, no later than nine months from the date of promulgation of this regulation, an implementation plan revision meeting the requirements of this subpart.</P>
          <P>(2)(i) The State, prior to adoption of any implementation plan required by this subpart, must conduct one or more public hearings on such plan in accordance with § 51.4.</P>
          <P>(ii) In addition to the requirements in § 51.4, the State must provide written notification of such hearings to each affected Federal Land Manager, and other affected States, and must state where the public can inspect a summary prepared by the Federal Land Managers of their conclusions and recommendations, if any, on the proposed plan.</P>
          <P>(3) Submission of plans as required by this subpart must be conducted in accordance with the procedures in § 51.5.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">State and Federal Land Manager Coordination.</E> (1) The State must identify to the Federal Land Managers, in writing and within 30 days of the date of promulgation of these regulations, the title of the official to which the Federal Land Manager of any mandatory Class I Federal area can submit a recommendation on the implementation of this subpart including, but not limited to:</P>
          <P>(i) A list of integral vistas that are to be listed by the State for the purpose of implementing section 304,</P>
          <P>(ii) Identification of impairment of visibility in any mandatory Class I Federal area(s), and</P>
          <P>(iii) Identification of elements for inclusion in the visibility monitoring strategy required by section 305.</P>

          <P>(2) The State must provide opportunity for consultation, in person and at least 60 days prior to holding any public hearing on the plan, with the Federal Land Manager on the proposed SIP revision required by this subpart. <PRTPAGE P="182"/>This consultation must include the opportunity for the affected Federal Land Managers to discuss their:</P>
          <P>(i) Assessment of impairment of visibility in any mandatory Class I Federal area, and</P>
          <P>(ii) Recommendations on the development of the long-term strategy.</P>
          <P>(3) The plan must provide procedures for continuing consultation between the State and Federal Land Manager on the implementation of the visibility protection program required by this subpart.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">General Plan Requirements.</E> (1) The affected Federal Land Manager may certify to the State, at any time, that there exists impairment of visibility in any mandatory Class I Federal area.</P>
          <P>(2) The plan must contain:</P>
          <P>(i) A long-term (10-15 years) strategy, as specified in section 305 and section 306, including such emission limitations, schedules of compliance, and such other measures including schedules for the implementation of the elements of the long-term strategy as may be necessary to make reasonable progress toward the national goal specified in section 300(a).</P>
          <P>(ii) An assessment of visibility impairment and a discussion of how each element of the plan relates to the preventing of future or remedying of existing impairment of visibility in any mandatory Class I Federal area within the State.</P>
          <P>(iii) Emission limitations representing BART and schedules for compliance with BART for each existing stationary facility identified according to paragraph (c)(4) of this section.</P>
          <P>(3) The plan must require each source to maintain control equipment required by this subpart and establish procedures to ensure such control equipment is properly operated and maintained.</P>
          <P>(4) For any existing visibility impairment the Federal Land Manager certifies to the State under paragraph (c)(1) of this section, at least 6 months prior to plan submission:</P>
          <P>(i) The State must identify and analyze for BART each existing stationary facility which may reasonably be anticipated to cause or contribute to impairment of visibility in any mandatory Class I Federal area where the impairment in the mandatory Class I Federal area is reasonably attributable to that existing stationary facility. The State need not consider any integral vista the Federal Land Manager did not identify pursuant to section 304(b) at least 6 months before plan submission.</P>
          <P>(ii) If the State determines that technologicial or economic limitations on the applicability of measurement methodology to a particular existing stationary facility would make the imposition of an emission standard infeasible it may instead prescribe a design, equipment, work practice, or other operational standard, or combination thereof, to require the application of BART. Such standard, to the degree possible, is to set forth the emission reduction to be achieved by implementation of such design, equipment, work practice or operation, and must provide for compliance by means which achieve equivalent results.</P>

          <P>(iii) BART must be determined for fossil-fuel fired generating plants having a total generating capacity in excess of 750 megawatts pursuant to “Guidelines for Determining Best Available Retrofit Technology for Coal-fired Power Plants and Other Existing Stationary Facilities” (1980), which is incorporated by reference, exclusive of appendix E, which was published in the <E T="04">Federal Register</E> on February 6, 1980 (45 FR 8210). It is EPA publication No. 450/3-80-009b and is for sale from the U.S. Department of Commerce, National Technical Information Service, 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, Virginia 22161. It is also available for inspection at the Office of the Federal Register Information Center, 800 North Capitol NW., suite 700, Washington, DC.</P>
          <P>(iv) The plan must require that each existing stationary facility required to install and operate BART do so as expeditiously as practicable but in no case later than five years after plan approval.</P>

          <P>(v) The plan must provide for a BART analysis of any existing stationary facility that might cause or contribute to impairment of visibility in any mandatory Class I Federal area identified under this paragraph (c)(4) at such <PRTPAGE P="183"/>times, as determined by the Administrator, as new technology for control of the pollutant becomes reasonably available if:</P>
          <P>(A) The pollutant is emitted by that existing stationary facility,</P>
          <P>(B) Controls representing BART for the pollutant have not previously been required under this subpart, and</P>
          <P>(C) The impairment of visibility in any mandatory Class I Federal area is reasonably attributable to the emissions of that pollutant.</P>
          <CITA>[45 FR 80089, Dec. 2, 1980, as amended at 57 FR 40042, Sept. 1, 1992]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.303</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Exemptions from control.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a)(1) Any existing stationary facility subject to the requirement under section 302 to install, operate, and maintain BART may apply to the Administrator for an exemption from that requirement.</P>
          <P>(2) An application under this section must include all available documentation relevant to the impact of the source's emissions on visibility in any mandatory Class I Federal area and a demonstration by the existing stationary facility that it does not or will not, by itself or in combination with other sources, emit any air pollutant which may be reasonably anticipated to cause or contribute to a significant impairment of visibility in any mandatory Class I Federal area.</P>
          <P>(b) Any fossil-fuel fired power plant with a total generating capacity of 750 megawatts or more may receive an exemption from BART only if the owner or operator of such power plant demonstrates to the satisfaction of the Administrator that such power plant is located at such a distance from all mandatory Class I Federal areas that such power plant does not or will not, by itself or in combination with other sources, emit any air pollutant which may reasonably be anticipated to cause or contribute to significant impairment of visibility in any such mandatory Class I Federal area.</P>
          <P>(c) Application under this section 303 must be accompanied by a written concurrence from the State with regulatory authority over the source.</P>
          <P>(d) The existing stationary facility must give prior written notice to all affected Federal Land Managers of any application for exemption under this section 303.</P>
          <P>(e) The Federal Land Manager may provide an initial recommendation or comment on the disposition of such application. Such recommendation, where provided, must be part of the exemption application. This recommendation is not to be construed as the concurrence required under paragraph (h) of this section.</P>
          <P>(f) The Administrator, within 90 days of receipt of an application for exemption from control, will provide notice of receipt of an exemption application and notice of opportunity for public hearing on the application.</P>
          <P>(g) After notice and opportunity for public hearing, the Administrator may grant or deny the exemption. For purposes of judicial review, final EPA action on an application for an exemption under this section 303 will not occur until EPA approves or disapproves the State Implementation Plan revision.</P>
          <P>(h) An exemption granted by the Administrator under this section 303 will be effective only upon concurrence by all affected Federal Land Managers with the Administrator's determination.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.304</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Identification of integral vistas.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) On or before December 31, 1985 the Federal Land Manager may identify any integral vista. The integral vista must be identified according to criteria the Federal Land Manager develops. These criteria must include, but are not limited to, whether the integral vista is important to the visitor's visual experience of the mandatory Class I Federal area. Adoption of criteria must be preceded by reasonable notice and opportunity for public comment on the proposed criteria.</P>
          <P>(b) The Federal Land Manager must notify the State of any integral vistas identified under paragraph (a) of this section, and the reasons therefor.</P>

          <P>(c) The State must list in its implementation plan any integral vista the Federal Land Manager identifies at least six months prior to plan submission, and must list in its implementation plan at its earliest opportunity, and in no case later than at the time of <PRTPAGE P="184"/>the periodic review of the SIP required by section 306(c), any integral vista the Federal Land Manager identifies after that time.</P>
          <P>(d) The State need not in its implementation plan list any integral vista the indentification of which was not made in accordance with the criteria in paragraph (a) of this section. In making this finding, the State must carefully consider the expertise of the Federal Land Manager in making the judgments called for by the criteria for identification. Where the State and the Federal Land Manager disagree on the identification of any integral vista, the State must give the Federal Land Manager an opportunity to consult with the Governor of the State.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.305</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Monitoring.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) The State must include in the plan a strategy for evaluating visibility in any mandatory Class I Federal area by visual observation or other appropriate monitoring techniques. Such strategy must take into account current and anticipated visibility monitoring research, the availability of appropriate monitoring techniques, and such guidance as is provided by the Agency.</P>
          <P>(b) The plan must provide for the consideration of available visibility data and must provide a mechanism for its use in decisions required by this subpart.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.306</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Long-term strategy.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a)(1) Each plan must include a long-term (10-15 years) strategy for making reasonable progress toward the national goal specified in section 300(a). This strategy must cover any existing impairment the Federal Land Manager certifies to the State at least 6 months prior to plan submission, and any integral vista of which the Federal Land Manager notifies the State at least 6 months prior to plan submission.</P>
          <P>(2) A long-term strategy must be developed for each mandatory Class I Federal area located within the State and each mandatory Class I Federal area located outside the State which may be affected by sources within the State. This does not preclude the development of a single comprehensive plan for all such areas.</P>
          <P>(3) The plan must set forth with reasonable specificity why the long-term strategy is adequate for making reasonable progress toward the national visibility goal, including remedying existing and preventing future impairment.</P>
          <P>(b) The State must coordinate its long-term strategy for an area with existing plans and goals, including those provided by the affected Federal Land Managers, that may affect impairment of visibility in any mandatory Class I Federal area.</P>
          <P>(c) The plan must provide for periodic review and revision, as appropriate, of the long-term strategy not less frequent than every three years. This review process must include consultation with the appropriate Federal Land Managers, and the State must provide a report to the public and the Administrator on progress toward the national goal. This report must include an assessment of:</P>
          <P>(1) The progress achieved in remedying existing impairment of visibility in any mandatory Class I Federal area;</P>
          <P>(2) The ability of the long-term strategy to prevent future impairment of visibility in any mandatory Class I Federal area;</P>
          <P>(3) Any change in visibility since the last such report, or, in the case of the first report, since plan approval;</P>
          <P>(4) Additional measures, including the need for SIP revisions, that may be necessary to assure reasonable progress toward the national visibility goal;</P>
          <P>(5) The progress achieved in implementing BART and meeting other schedules set forth in the long-term strategy;</P>
          <P>(6) The impact of any exemption granted under section 303;</P>
          <P>(7) The need for BART to remedy existing visibility impairment of any integral vista listed in the plan since the last such report, or, in the case of the first report, since plan approval.</P>

          <P>(d) The long-term strategy must provide for review of the impacts from any new major stationary source or major modifications on visibility in any mandatory Class I Federal area. This review of major stationary sources or major modifications must be in accordance with section 307, § 51.24, § 51.18 and any other binding guidance provided by <PRTPAGE P="185"/>the Agency insofar as these provisions pertain to protection of visibility in any mandatory Class I Federal areas.</P>
          <P>(e) The State must consider, at a minimum, the following factors during the development of its long-term strategy:</P>
          <P>(1) Emission reductions due to ongoing air pollution control programs,</P>
          <P>(2) Additional emission limitations and schedules for compliance,</P>
          <P>(3) Measures to mitigate the impacts of construction activities,</P>
          <P>(4) Source retirement and replacement schedules,</P>
          <P>(5) Smoke management techniques for agricultural and forestry management purposes including such plans as currently exist within the State for these purposes, and</P>
          <P>(6) Enforceability of emission limitations and control measures.</P>
          <P>(f) The plan must discuss the reasons why the above and other reasonable measures considered in the development of the long-term strategy were or were not adopted as part of the long-term strategy.</P>
          <P>(g) The State, in developing the long-term strategy, must take into account the effect of new sources, and the costs of compliance, the time necessary for compliance, the energy and nonair quality environmental impacts of compliance, and the remaining useful life of any affected existing source and equipment therein.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.307</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>New source review.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) For purposes of new source review of any new major stationary source or major modification that would be constructed in an area that is designated attainment or unclassified under section 107(d)(1)(D) or (E) of the Clean Air Act, the State plan must, in any review under § 51.24 with respect to visibility protection and analyses, provide for:</P>
          <P>(1) Written notification of all affected Federal Land Managers of any proposed new major stationary source or major modification that may affect visibility in any Federal Class I area. Such notification must be made in writing and include a copy of all information relevant to the permit application within 30 days of receipt of and at least 60 days prior to public hearing by the State on the application for permit to construct. Such notification must include an analysis of the anticipated impacts on visibility in any Federal Class I area,</P>
          <P>(2) Where the State requires or receives advance notification (e.g. early consultation with the source prior to submission of the application or notification of intent to monitor under § 51.24) of a permit application of a source that may affect visibility the State must notify all affected Federal Land Managers within 30 days of such advance notification, and</P>
          <P>(3) Consideration of any analysis performed by the Federal Land Manager, provided within 30 days of the notification and analysis required by paragraph (a)(1) of this section, that such proposed new major stationary source or major modification may have an adverse impact on visibility in any Federal Class I area. Where the State finds that such an analysis does not demonstrate to the satisfaction of the State that an adverse impact will result in the Federal Class I area, the State must, in the notice of public hearing, either explain its decision or give notice as to where the explanation can be obtained.</P>
          <P>(b) The plan shall also provide for the review of any new major stationary source or major modification:</P>
          <P>(1) That may have an impact on any integral vista of a mandatory Class I Federal area, if it is identified in accordance with section 304 by the Federal Land Manager at least 12 months before submission of a complete permit application, except where the Federal Land Manager has provided notice and opportunity for public comment on the integral vista in which case the review must include impacts on any integral vista identified at least 6 months prior to submission of a complete permit application, unless the State determines under section 304(d) that the identification was not in accordance with the identification criteria, or</P>
          <P>(2) That proposes to locate in an area classified as nonattainment under section 107(d)(1)(A), (B), or (C) of the Clean Air Act that may have an impact on visibility in any mandatory Class I Federal area.</P>

          <P>(c) Review of any major stationary source or major modification under <PRTPAGE P="186"/>paragraph (b) of this section, shall be conducted in accordance with paragraph (a) of this section, and § 51.24(o), (p) (1) through (2), and (q). In conducting such reviews the State must ensure that the source's emissions will be consistent with making reasonable progress toward the national visibility goal referred to in section 300(a). The State may take into account the costs of compliance, the time necessary for compliance, the energy and nonair quality environmental impacts of compliance, and the useful life of the source.</P>
          <P>(d) The State may require monitoring of visibility in any Federal Class I area near the proposed new stationary source or major modification for such purposes and by such means as the State deems necessary and appropriate.</P>
        </SECTION>
      </SUBPART>
      <SUBPART>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart Q—Reports</HD>
        <AUTH>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Authority:</HD>
          <P>Secs. 110, 301(a), 313, 319, Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 7410, 7601(a), 7613, 7619).</P>
        </AUTH>
        <SOURCE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Source:</HD>
          <P>44 FR 27569, May 10, 1979, unless otherwise noted.</P>
        </SOURCE>
        <SUBJGRP>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Air Quality Data Reporting</HD>
          <SECTION>
            <SECTNO>§ 51.320</SECTNO>
            <SUBJECT>Annual air quality data report.</SUBJECT>
            <P>The requirements for reporting air quality data collected for purposes of the plan are located in subpart C of part 58 of this chapter.</P>
          </SECTION>
        </SUBJGRP>
        <SUBJGRP>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Source Emissions and State Action Reporting</HD>
          <SECTION>
            <SECTNO>§ 51.321</SECTNO>
            <SUBJECT>Annual source emissions and State action report.</SUBJECT>
            <P>On an annual (calendar year) basis beginning with calendar year 1979, the State agency shall report to the Administrator (through the appropriate Regional Office) information as specified in §§ 51.323 through 51.326. Reports must be submitted by July 1 of each year for data collected and actions which took place during the period January 1 to December 31 of the previous year.</P>
          </SECTION>
          <SECTION>
            <SECTNO>§ 51.322</SECTNO>
            <SUBJECT>Sources subject to emissions reporting.</SUBJECT>
            <P>(a) Point sources subject to the annual emissions reporting requirements of § 51.321 are defined as follows:</P>
            <P>(1) For particulate matter, PM<E T="52">10,</E> sulfur oxides, VOC and nitrogen oxides, any facility that actually emits a total of 90.7 metric tons (100 tons) per year or more of any one pollutant. For particulate matter emissions, the reporting requirement ends with the reporting of calendar year 1987 emissions. For PM<E T="52">10</E> emissions, the reporting requirement begins with the reporting of calendar year 1988 emissions.</P>
            <P>(2) For carbon monoxide, any facility that actually emits a total of 907 metric tons (1000 tons) per year or more.</P>
            <P>(3) For lead or lead compounds measured as elemental lead, any facility that actually emits a total of 4.5 metric tons (5 tons) per year or more.</P>
            <P>(b) Annual emissions reporting requirements apply only to emissions of each pollutant from any individual emission point within the facility that emits:</P>
            <P>(1) For particulate matter, PM<E T="52">10,</E> sulfur oxides, VOC and nitrogen oxides. 22.7 metric tons (25 tons) per year or more. For particulate matter, the reporting requirement ends with the reporting of calendar year 1987 emissions. For PM<E T="52">10,</E> the reporting requirement begins with the reporting of calendar year 1988 emissions.</P>
            <P>(2) For carbon monoxide, 227 metric tons (250 tons) per year or more.</P>
            <P>(3) For lead or lead compounds measured as elemental lead, 4.5 metric tons (5 tons) per year or more.</P>
            <CITA>[44 FR 27569, May 10, 1979, as amended at 44 FR 65070, Nov. 9, 1979; 52 FR 24714, July 1, 1987]</CITA>
          </SECTION>
          <SECTION>
            <SECTNO>§ 51.323</SECTNO>
            <SUBJECT>Reportable emissions data and information.</SUBJECT>
            <P>(a) The State shall submit in the annual report the following emissions data and information:</P>

            <P>(1) Emissions of particulate matter, sulfur oxides, carbon monoxide, nitrogen oxides, and VOC as specified by AEROS Users Manual, Vol. II (EPA 450/2-76-029, OAQPS No. 1.2-039) to be coded <PRTPAGE P="187"/>into the National Emissions Data System point source coding form,</P>
            <P>(2) Emissions of lead or lead compounds measured as elemental lead as specified by AEROS Users Manual, Vol. II (EPA 45/2-76-029, OAQPS No. 1.2-039) to be coded into the Hazardous and Trace Emissions System points source coding forms, and</P>
            <P>(3) Emissions of PM<E T="52">10</E> as will be specified in a future guideline.</P>
            <P>(b) Such emissions data and information specified in paragraph (a) of this section must be submitted on either paper forms, punched cards, or magnetic tape in the format of the NEDS point source coding forms or the HATREMS point source coding forms as appropriate.</P>
            <P>(c) The emissions data and information specified by paragraph (a) of this section must be submitted in the annual report for any point source for which one or more of the following conditions occurs:</P>
            <P>(1) A source achieves compliance at any time within the reporting period with any regulation of an applicable plan,</P>
            <P>(2) A new or modified source receives approval to construct during the reporting period or begins operating during the reporting period,</P>
            <P>(3) A source ceases operations during the reporting period, or</P>
            <P>(4) A source's emissions have changed more than 5% from the most recently submitted emissions data.</P>
            <P>(d) If, as determined by the State and the Regional Administrator, the emissions from any point source have not changed more than 5% from the most recently submitted emissions data, the State shall update the year of record of the previously reported data and information specified by paragraph (a) of this section.</P>
            <CITA>[44 FR 27569, May 10, 1979, as amended at 52 FR 24714, July 1, 1987]</CITA>
          </SECTION>
          <SECTION>
            <SECTNO>§ 51.324</SECTNO>
            <SUBJECT>Progress in plan enforcement.</SUBJECT>
            <P>(a) For each point source, the State shall report any achievement made during the reporting period of any increment of progress of compliance schedules required by:</P>
            <P>(1) The applicable plan, or</P>
            <P>(2) Any enforcement order or other State action required to be submitted pursuant to § 51.327.</P>
            <P>(b) For each point source, the State shall report any enforcement action taken during the reporting period and not submitted under § 51.327 which results in civil or criminal penalties.</P>
          </SECTION>
          <SECTION>
            <SECTNO>§ 51.326</SECTNO>
            <SUBJECT>Reportable revisions.</SUBJECT>
            <P>The State shall identify and describe all substantive plan revisions during the reporting period of the applicable plan other than revisions to rules and regulations or compliance schedules submitted in accordance with § 51.6(d). Substantive revisions shall include but are not limited to changes in stack-test procedures for determining compliance with applicable regulations, modifications in the projected total manpower needs to carry out the approved plan, and all changes in responsibilities given to local agencies to carry out various portions of the plan.</P>
          </SECTION>
          <SECTION>
            <SECTNO>§ 51.327</SECTNO>
            <SUBJECT>Enforcement orders and other State actions.</SUBJECT>
            <P>(a) Any State enforcement order, including any State court order, must be submitted to the Administrator within 60 days of its issuance or adoption by the State.</P>
            <P>(b) A State enforcement order or other State action must be submitted as a revision to the applicable implementation plan pursuant to § 51.104 and approved by the Administrator in order to be considered a revision to such plan.</P>
            <CITA>[36 FR 22398, Nov. 25, 1971, as amended at 51 FR 40675, Nov. 7, 1986]</CITA>
          </SECTION>
          <SECTION>
            <SECTNO>§ 51.328</SECTNO>
            <RESERVED>[Reserved]</RESERVED>
          </SECTION>
        </SUBJGRP>
      </SUBPART>
      <SUBPART>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart R—Extensions</HD>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.341</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Request for 18-month extension.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) Upon request of the State made in accordance with this section, the Administrator may, whenever he determines necessary, extend, for a period not to exceed 18 months, the deadline for submitting that portion of a plan that implements a secondary standard.</P>

          <P>(b) Any such request must show that attainment of the secondary standards <PRTPAGE P="188"/>will require emission reductions exceeding those which can be achieved through the application of reasonably available control technology.</P>
          <P>(c) Any such request for extension of the deadline with respect to any State's portion of an interstate region must be submitted jointly with requests for such extensions from all other States within the region or must show that all such States have been notified of such request.</P>
          <P>(d) Any such request must be submitted sufficiently early to permit development of a plan prior to the deadline in the event that such request is denied.</P>
          <CITA>[51 FR 40675, Nov. 7, 1986]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
      </SUBPART>
      <SUBPART>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart S—Inspection/Maintenance Program Requirements</HD>
        <SOURCE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Source:</HD>
          <P>57 FR 52987, Nov. 5, 1992, unless otherwise noted.</P>
        </SOURCE>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.350</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Applicability.</SUBJECT>
          <P>Inspection/maintenance (I/M) programs are required in both ozone and carbon monoxide (CO) nonattainment areas, depending upon population and nonattainment classification or design value.</P>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Nonattainment area classification and population criteria.</E> (1) States or areas within an ozone transport region shall implement enhanced I/M programs in any metropolitan statistical area (MSA), or portion of an MSA, within the State or area with a 1990 population of 100,000 or more as defined by the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) regardless of the area's attainment classification. In the case of a multi-state MSA, enhanced -I/M shall be implemented in all ozone transport region portions if the sum of these portions has a population of 100,000 or more, irrespective of the population of the portion in the individual ozone transport region State or area.</P>
          <P>(2) Apart from those areas described in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, any area classified as serious or worse ozone nonattainment, or as moderate or serious CO nonattainment with a design value greater than 12.7 ppm, and having a 1980 Bureau of Census-defined (Census-defined) urbanized area population of 200,000 or more, shall implement enhanced I/M in the 1990 Census-defined urbanized area.</P>
          <P>(3) Any area classified, as of November 5, 1992, as marginal ozone nonattainment or moderate CO nonattainment with a design value of 12.7 ppm or less shall continue operating I/M programs that were part of an approved State Implementation Plan (SIP) as of November 15, 1990, and shall update those programs as necessary to meet the basic I/M program requirements of this subpart. Any such area required by the Clean Air Act, as in effect prior to November 15, 1990, as interpreted in EPA guidance, to have an I/M program shall also implement a basic I/M program. Serious, severe and extreme ozone areas and CO areas over 12.7 ppm shall also continue operating existing -I/M programs and shall upgrade such programs, as appropriate, pursuant to this subpart.</P>
          <P>(4) Any area classified as moderate ozone nonattainment, and not required to implement enhanced I/M under paragraph (a)(1) of this section, shall implement basic I/M in any 1990 Census-defined urbanized area with a population of 200,000 or more.</P>
          <P>(5) [Reserved]</P>
          <P>(6) If the boundaries of a moderate ozone nonattainment area are changed pursuant to section 107(d)(4)(A)(i)-(ii) of the Clean Air Act, such that the area includes additional urbanized areas with a population of 200,000 or more, then a basic I/M program shall be implemented in these additional urbanized areas.</P>
          <P>(7) If the boundaries of a serious or worse ozone nonattainment area or of a moderate or serious CO nonattainment area with a design value greater than 12.7 ppm are changed any time after enactment pursuant to section 107(d)(4)(A) such that the area includes additional urbanized areas, then an enhanced I/M program shall be implemented in the newly included 1990 Census-defined urbanized areas, if the 1980 Census-defined urban area population is 200,000 or more.</P>

          <P>(8) If a marginal ozone nonattainment area, not required to implement enhanced I/M under paragraph (a)(1) of <PRTPAGE P="189"/>this section, is reclassified to moderate, a basic I/M program shall be implemented in the 1990 Census-defined urbanized area(s) with a population of 200,000 or more. If the area is reclassified to serious or worse, an enhanced I/M program shall be implemented in the 1990 Census-defined urbanized area, if the 1980 Census-defined urban area population is 200,000 or more.</P>
          <P>(9) If a moderate ozone or CO nonattainment area is reclassified to serious or worse, an enhanced I/M program shall be implemented in the 1990 Census-defined urbanized area, if the 1980 Census-defined population is 200,000 or more.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Extent of area coverage.</E> (1) In an ozone transport region, the program shall cover all counties within subject MSAs or subject portions of MSAs, as defined by OMB in 1990, except largely rural counties having a population density of less than 200 persons per square mile based on the 1990 Census and counties with less than 1% of the population in the MSA may be excluded provided that at least 50% of the MSA population is included in the program. This provision does not preclude the voluntary inclusion of portions of an excluded county. Non-urbanized islands not connected to the mainland by roads, bridges, or tunnels may be excluded without regard to population.</P>
          <P>(2) Outside of ozone transport regions, programs shall nominally cover at least the entire urbanized area, based on the 1990 census. Exclusion of some urban population is allowed as long as an equal number of non-urban residents of the MSA containing the subject urbanized area are included to compensate for the exclusion.</P>
          <P>(3) Emission reduction benefits from expanding coverage beyond the minimum required urban area boundaries can be applied toward the reasonable further progress requirements or can be used for offsets, provided the covered vehicles are operated in the nonattainment area, but not toward the enhanced I/M performance standard requirement.</P>
          <P>(4) In a multi-state urbanized area with a population of 200,000 or more that is required under paragraph (a) of this section to implement I/M, any State with a portion of the area having a 1990 Census-defined population of 50,000 or more shall implement an I/M program. The other coverage requirements in paragraph (b) of this section shall apply in multi-state areas as well.</P>
          <P>(5) Notwithstanding the limitation in paragraph (b)(3) of this section, in an ozone transport region, States which opt for a program which meets the performance standard described in § 51.351(h) and claim in their SIP less emission reduction credit than the basic performance standard for one or more pollutants, may apply a geographic bubble covering areas in the State not otherwise subject to an I/M requirement to achieve emission reductions from other measures equal to or greater than what would have been achieved if the low enhanced performance standard were met in the subject I/M areas. Emissions reductions from non-I/M measures shall not be counted towards the OTR low enhanced performance standard.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Requirements after attainment.</E> All I/M programs shall provide that the program will remain effective, even if the area is redesignated to attainment status, until the State submits and EPA approves a maintenance plan, under section 175A, which convincingly demonstrates that the area can maintain the relevant standard for the maintenance period without benefit of the emission reductions attributable to the I/M program. The State shall commit to fully implement and enforce the program throughout such period, and, at a minimum, for the purposes of SIP approval, legislation authorizing the program shall not sunset prior to the attainment deadline.</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">SIP requirements.</E> The SIP shall describe the applicable areas in detail and, consistent with § 51.372 of this subpart, shall include the legal authority or rules necessary to establish program boundaries.</P>
          <CITA>[57 FR 52987, Nov. 5, 1992, as amended at 60 FR 48034, Sept. 18, 1995; 61 FR 39036, July 25, 1996]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.351</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Enhanced I/M performance standard.</SUBJECT>

          <P>(a) Enhanced I/M programs shall be designed and implemented to meet or <PRTPAGE P="190"/>exceed a minimum performance standard, which is expressed as emission levels in area-wide average grams per mile (gpm), achieved from highway mobile sources as a result of the program. The emission levels achieved by the State's program design shall be calculated using the most current version, at the time of submittal, of the EPA mobile source emission factor model or an alternative model approved by the Administrator, and shall meet the minimum performance standard both in operation and for SIP approval. Areas shall meet the performance standard for the pollutants which cause them to be subject to enhanced I/M requirements. In the case of ozone nonattainment areas subject to enhanced I/M and subject areas in the Ozone Transport Region, the performance standard must be met for both oxides of nitrogen (NO<E T="52">X</E>) and volatile organic compounds (VOCs), except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section.</P>
          <P>(1) <E T="03">Network type.</E> Centralized testing.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Start date.</E> For areas with existing I/M programs, 1983. For areas newly subject, 1995.</P>
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Test frequency.</E> Annual testing.</P>
          <P>(4) <E T="03">Model year coverage.</E> Testing of 1968 and later vehicles.</P>
          <P>(5) <E T="03">Vehicle type coverage.</E> Light duty vehicles, and light duty trucks, rated up to 8,500 pounds Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).</P>
          <P>(6) <E T="03">Exhaust emission test type.</E> Transient mass-emission testing on 1986 and later model year vehicles using the IM240 driving cycle, two-speed testing (as described in appendix B of this subpart S) of 1981-1985 vehicles, and idle testing (as described in appendix B of this subpart S) of pre-1981 vehicles is assumed.</P>
          <P>(7) <E T="03">Emission standards.</E> (i) Emission standards for 1986 through 1993 model year light duty vehicles, and 1994 and 1995 light-duty vehicles not meeting Tier 1 emission standards, of 0.80 gpm hydrocarbons (HC), 20 gpm CO, and 2.0 gpm NO<E T="52">X</E>;</P>

          <P>(ii) Emission standards for 1986 through 1993 light duty trucks less than 6000 pounds gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR), and 1994 and 1995 trucks not meeting Tier 1 emission standards, of 1.2 gpm HC, 20 gpm CO, and 3.5 gpm NO<E T="52">X</E>;</P>

          <P>(iii) Emission standards for 1986 through 1993 light duty trucks greater than 6000 pounds GVWR, and 1994 and 1995 trucks not meeting Tier 1 emission standards, of 1.2 gpm HC, 20 gpm CO, and 3.5 gpm NO<E T="52">X</E>;</P>

          <P>(iv) Emission standards for 1994 and later light duty vehicles meeting Tier 1 emission standards of 0.70 gpm HC, 15 gpm CO, and 1.4 gpm NO<E T="52">X</E>;</P>

          <P>(v) Emission standards for 1994 and later light duty trucks under 6000 pounds GVWR and meeting Tier 1 emission standards of 0.70 gpm HC, 15 gpm CO and 2.0 gpm NO<E T="52">X</E>;</P>

          <P>(vi) Emission standards for 1994 and later light duty trucks greater than 6000 pounds GVWR and meeting Tier 1 emission standards of 0.80 gpm HC, 15 gpm CO and 2.0 gpm NO<E T="52">X</E>;</P>
          <P>(vii) Emission standards for 1981-1985 model year vehicles of 1.2% CO, and 220 ppm HC for the idle, two-speed tests and loaded steady-state tests (as described in appendix B of this subpart S); and</P>

          <P>(viii) Maximum exhaust dilution measured as no less than 6% CO plus carbon dioxide (CO<E T="52">2</E>) on vehicles subject to a steady-state test (as described in appendix B of this subpart S).</P>
          <P>(8) <E T="03">Emission control device inspections.</E> Visual inspection of the catalyst and fuel inlet restrictor on all 1984 and later model year vehicles.</P>
          <P>(9) <E T="03">Evaporative system function checks.</E> Evaporative system integrity (pressure) test on 1983 and later model year vehicles and an evaporative system transient purge test on 1986 and later model year vehicles.</P>
          <P>(10) <E T="03">Stringency.</E> A 20% emission test failure rate among pre-1981 model year vehicles.</P>
          <P>(11) <E T="03">Waiver rate.</E> A 3% waiver rate, as a percentage of failed vehicles.</P>
          <P>(12) <E T="03">Compliance rate.</E> A 96% compliance rate.</P>
          <P>(13) <E T="03">Evaluation date.</E> Enhanced I/M programs shall be shown to obtain the same or lower emission levels as the model program by 2000 for ozone nonattainment areas and 2001 for CO nonattainment areas, and for severe and extreme ozone nonattainment areas, on each applicable milestone and attainment deadline, thereafter. Milestones for NO<E T="52">X</E> shall be the same as for ozone.<PRTPAGE P="191"/>
          </P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">On-road testing.</E> The performance standard shall include on-road testing of at least 0.5% of the subject vehicle population, or 20,000 vehicles whichever is less, as a supplement to the periodic inspection required in paragraphs (f) and (g) of this section. Specific requirements are listed in § 51.371 of this subpart.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">On-board diagnostics (OBD).</E> The performance standard shall include inspection of all 1996 and later light-duty vehicles and light-duty trucks equipped with certified on-board diagnostic systems, and repair of malfunctions or system deterioration identified by or affecting OBD systems as specified in § 51.357.</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">Modeling requirements.</E> Equivalency of the emission levels which will be achieved by the I/M program design in the SIP to those of the model program described in this section shall be demonstrated using the most current version of EPA's mobile source emission model, or an alternative approved by the Administrator, using EPA guidance to aid in the estimation of input parameters. States may adopt alternative approaches that meet this performance standard. States may do so through program design changes that affect normal I/M input parameters to the mobile source emission factor model, or through program changes (such as the accelerated retirement of high emitting vehicles) that reduce in-use mobile source emissions. If the Administrator finds, under section 182(b)(1)(A)(i) of the Act pertaining to reasonable further progress demonstrations or section 182(f)(1) of the Act pertaining to provisions for major stationary sources, that NO<E T="52">X</E> emission reductions are not beneficial in a given ozone nonattainment area, then NO<E T="52">X</E> emission reductions are not required of the enhanced I/M program, but the program shall be designed to offset NO<E T="52">X</E> increases resulting from the repair of HC and CO failures.</P>
          <P>(e) [Reserved]</P>
          <P>(f) <E T="03">High Enhanced Performance Standard.</E> Except as provided in paragraph (g) of this section, the model program elements for the enhanced I/M performance standard shall be as follows:</P>
          <P>(1) <E T="03">Network type.</E> Centralized testing.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Start date.</E> For areas with existing I/M programs, 1983. For areas newly subject, 1995.</P>
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Test frequency.</E> Annual testing.</P>
          <P>(4) <E T="03">Model year coverage.</E> Testing of 1968 and later vehicles.</P>
          <P>(5) <E T="03">Vehicle type coverage.</E> Light duty vehicles, and light duty trucks, rated up to 8,500 pounds Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).</P>
          <P>(6) <E T="03">Exhaust emission test type.</E> Transient mass-emission testing on 1986 and later model year vehicles using the IM240 driving cycle, two-speed testing (as described in appendix B of this subpart S) of 1981-1985 vehicles, and idle testing (as described in appendix B of this subpart S) of pre-1981 vehicles is assumed.</P>
          <P>(7) <E T="03">Emission standards.</E> (i) Emission standards for 1986 through 1993 model year light duty vehicles, and 1994 and 1995 light-duty vehicles not meeting Tier 1 emission standards, of 0.80 gpm hydrocarbons (HC), 20 gpm CO, and 2.0 gpm NO<E T="52">X</E>;</P>

          <P>(ii) Emission standards for 1986 through 1993 light duty trucks less than 6000 pounds gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR), and 1994 and 1995 trucks not meeting Tier 1 emission standards, of 1.2 gpm HC, 20 gpm CO, and 3.5 gpm NO<E T="52">X</E>;</P>

          <P>(iii) Emission standards for 1986 through 1993 light duty trucks greater than 6000 pounds GVWR, and 1994 and 1995 trucks not meeting the Tier 1 emission standards, of 1.2 gpm HC, 20 gpm CO, and 3.5 gpm NO<E T="52">X</E>;</P>

          <P>(iv) Emission standards for 1994 and later light duty vehicles meeting Tier 1 emission standards of 0.70 gpm HC, 15 gpm CO, and 1.4 gpm NO<E T="52">X</E>;</P>

          <P>(v) Emission standards for 1994 and later light duty trucks under 6000 pounds GVWR and meeting Tier 1 emission standards of 0.70 gpm HC, 15 gpm CO, and 2.0 gpm NO<E T="52">X</E>;</P>

          <P>(vi) Emission standards for 1994 and later light duty trucks greater than 6000 pounds GVWR and meeting Tier 1 emission standards of 0.80 gpm HC, 15 gpm CO and 2.5 gpm NO<E T="52">X</E>;</P>

          <P>(vii) Emission standards for 1981-1985 model year vehicles of 1.2% CO, and 220 gpm HC for the idle, two-speed tests and loaded steady-state tests (as described in appendix B of this subpart S); and<PRTPAGE P="192"/>
          </P>

          <P>(viii) Maximum exhaust dilution measured as no less than 6% CO plus carbon dioxide (CO<E T="52">2</E>) on vehicles subject to a steady-state test (as described in appendix B of this subpart S); and</P>

          <P>(viii) Maximum exhaust dilution measured as no less than 6% CO plus carbon dioxide (CO<E T="52">2</E>) on vehicles subject to a steady-state test (as described in appendix B of this subpart S).</P>
          <P>(8) <E T="03">Emission control device inspections.</E> (i) Visual inspection of the catalyst and fuel inlet restrictor on all 1984 and later model year vehicles.</P>
          <P>(ii) Visual inspection of the positive crankcase ventilation valve on 1968 through 1971 model years, inclusive, and of the exhaust gas recirculation valve on 1972 through 1983 model year vehicles, inclusive.</P>
          <P>(9) <E T="03">Evaporative system function checks.</E> Evaporative system integrity (pressure) test on 1983 and later model year vehicles and an evaporative system transient purge test on 1986 and later model year vehicles.</P>
          <P>(10) <E T="03">Stringency.</E> A 20% emission test failure rate among pre-1981 model year vehicles.</P>
          <P>(11) <E T="03">Waiver rate.</E> A 3% waiver rate, as a percentage of failed vehicles.</P>
          <P>(12) <E T="03">Compliance rate.</E> A 96% compliance rate.</P>
          <P>(13) <E T="03">Evaluation date.</E> Enhanced I/M program areas shall be shown to obtain the same or lower emission levels as the model program described in this paragraph by 2000 for ozone nonattainment areas and 2001 for CO nonattainment areas, and for severe and extreme ozone nonattainment areas, on each applicable milestone and attainment deadline, thereafter. Milestones for NO<E T="52">X</E> shall be the same as for ozone.</P>
          <P>(g) <E T="03">Alternate Low Enhanced I/M Performance Standard.</E> An enhanced I/M area which is either not subject to or has an approved State Implementation Plan pursuant to the requirements of the Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990 for Reasonable Further Progress in 1996, and does not have a disapproved plan for Reasonable Further Progress for the period after 1996 or a disapproved plan for attainment of the air quality standards for ozone or CO, may select the alternate low enhanced I/M performance standard described below in lieu of the standard described in paragraph (f) of this section. The model program elements for this alternate low enhanced I/M performance standard are:</P>
          <P>(1) <E T="03">Network type.</E> Centralized testing.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Start date.</E> For areas with existing I/M programs, 1983. For areas newly subject, 1995.</P>
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Test frequency.</E> Annual testing.</P>
          <P>(4) <E T="03">Model year coverage.</E> Testing of 1968 and newer vehicles.</P>
          <P>(5) <E T="03">Vehicle type coverage.</E> Light duty vehicles, and light duty trucks, rated up to 8,500 pounds GVWR.</P>
          <P>(6) <E T="03">Exhaust emission test type.</E> Idle testing of all covered vehicles (as described in appendix B of subpart S).</P>
          <P>(7) <E T="03">Emission standards.</E> Those specified in 40 CFR part 85, subpart W.</P>
          <P>(8) <E T="03">Emission control device inspections.</E> Visual inspection of the positive crankcase ventilation valve on all 1968 through 1971 model year vehicles, inclusive, and of the exhaust gas recirculation valve on all 1972 and newer model year vehicles.</P>
          <P>(9) <E T="03">Evaporative system function checks.</E> None.</P>
          <P>(10) <E T="03">Stringency.</E> A 20% emission test failure rate among pre-1981 model year vehicles.</P>
          <P>(11) <E T="03">Waiver rate.</E> A 3% waiver rate, as a percentage of failed vehicles.</P>
          <P>(12) Compliance rate. A 96% compliance rate.</P>

          <P>(13) Evaluation date. Enhanced I/M program areas subject to the provisions of this paragraph shall be shown to obtain the same or lower emission levels as the model program described in this paragraph by 2000 for ozone nonattainment areas and 2001 for CO nonattainment areas, and for severe and extreme ozone nonattainment areas, on each applicable milestone and attainment deadline, thereafter. Milestones for NO<E T="52">X</E> shall be the same as for ozone.</P>
          <P>(h) <E T="03">Ozone Transport Region Low-Enhanced Performance Standard.</E> An attainment area, marginal ozone area, or moderate ozone area with a 1980 Census population of less than 200,000 in the urbanized area, in an ozone transport region, that is required to implement enhanced I/M under section 184(b)(1)(A) of the Clean Air Act, but was not previously required to or did not in fact implement basic I/M under the Clean Air Act as enacted prior to 1990 and is <PRTPAGE P="193"/>not subject to the requirements for basic I/M programs in this subpart, may select the performance standard described below in lieu of the standard described in paragraph (f) or (g) of this section as long as the difference in emission reductions between the program described in paragraph (g) and this paragraph are made up with other measures, as provided in § 51.350(b)(5). Offsetting measures shall not include those otherwise required by the Clean Air Act in the areas from which credit is bubbled. The program elements for this alternate OTR enhanced I/M performance standard are:</P>
          <P>(1) <E T="03">Network type.</E> Centralized testing.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Start date.</E> January 1, 1999.</P>
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Test frequency.</E> Annual testing.</P>
          <P>(4) <E T="03">Model year coverage.</E> Testing of 1968 and newer vehicles.</P>
          <P>(5) <E T="03">Vehicle type coverage.</E> Light duty vehicles, and light duty trucks, rated up to 8,500 pounds GVWR.</P>
          <P>(6) <E T="03">Exhaust emission test type.</E> Remote sensing measurements on 1968-1995 vehicles; on-board diagnostic system checks on 1996 and newer vehicles.</P>
          <P>(7) <E T="03">Emission standards.</E> For remote sensing measurements, a carbon monoxide standard of 7.5% (with at least two separate readings above this level to establish a failure).</P>
          <P>(8) <E T="03">Emission control device inspections.</E> Visual inspection of the catalytic converter on 1975 and newer vehicles and visual inspection of the positive crankcase ventilation valve on 1968-1974 vehicles.</P>
          <P>(9) <E T="03">Waiver rate.</E> A 3% waiver rate, as a percentage of failed vehicles.</P>
          <P>(10) <E T="03">Compliance rate.</E> A 96% compliance rate.</P>
          <P>(11) <E T="03">Evaluation dates.</E> Enhanced I/M program areas subject to the provisions of this paragraph shall be shown to obtain the same or lower VOC and NO<E T="52">X</E> emission levels as the model program described in this paragraph by January 1, 2000, 2003, 2006, and 2007. Equality of substituted emission reductions to the benefits of the low enhanced performance standard must be demonstrated for the same evaluation dates.</P>
          <CITA>[57 FR 52987, Nov. 5, 1992, as amended at 58 FR 59367, Nov. 9, 1993; 59 FR 32343, June 23, 1994; 60 FR 48035, Sept. 18, 1995; 61 FR 39036, July 25, 1996; 61 FR 40945, Aug. 6, 1996; 63 FR 24433, May 4, 1998]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.352</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Basic I/M performance standard.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) Basic I/M programs shall be designed and implemented to meet or exceed a minimum performance standard, which is expressed as emission levels achieved from highway mobile sources as a result of the program. The performance standard shall be established using the following model I/M program inputs and local characteristics, such as vehicle mix and local fuel controls. Similarly, the emission reduction benefits of the State's program design shall be estimated using the most current version of the EPA mobile source emission model, and shall meet the minimum performance standard both in operation and for SIP approval.</P>
          <P>(1) <E T="03">Network type.</E> Centralized testing.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Start date.</E> For areas with existing I/M programs, 1983. For areas newly subject, 1994.</P>
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Test frequency.</E> Annual testing.</P>
          <P>(4) <E T="03">Model year coverage.</E> Testing of 1968 and later model year vehicles.</P>
          <P>(5) <E T="03">Vehicle type coverage.</E> Light duty vehicles.</P>
          <P>(6) <E T="03">Exhaust emission test type.</E> Idle test.</P>
          <P>(7) <E T="03">Emission standards.</E> No weaker than specified in 40 CFR part 85, subpart W.</P>
          <P>(8) <E T="03">Emission control device inspections.</E> None.</P>
          <P>(9) <E T="03">Stringency.</E> A 20% emission test failure rate among pre-1981 model year vehicles.</P>
          <P>(10) <E T="03">Waiver rate.</E> A 0% waiver rate.</P>
          <P>(11) <E T="03">Compliance rate.</E> A 100% compliance rate.</P>
          <P>(12) <E T="03">Evaluation date.</E> Basic I/M programs shall be shown to obtain the same or lower emission levels as the model inputs by 1997 for ozone nonattainment areas and 1996 for CO nonattainment areas; and, for serious or worse ozone nonattainment areas, on each applicable milestone and attainment deadline, thereafter.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Oxides of nitrogen.</E> Basic I/M testing in ozone nonattainment areas shall be designed such that no increase in NO<E T="52">X</E> emissions occurs as a result of the program. If the Administrator finds, under section 182(b)(1)(A)(i) of the Act pertaining to reasonable further progress demonstrations or section <PRTPAGE P="194"/>182(f)(1) of the Act pertaining to provisions for major stationary sources, that NO<E T="52">X</E> emission reductions are not beneficial in a given ozone nonattainment area, then the basic I/M NO<E T="52">X</E> requirement may be omitted. States shall implement any required NO<E T="52">X</E> controls within 12 months of implementation of the program deadlines required in § 51.373 of this subpart, except that newly implemented I/M programs shall include NO<E T="52">X</E> controls from the start.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">On-board diagnostics (OBD).</E> The performance standard shall include inspection of all 1996 and later light-duty vehicles and light-duty trucks equipped with certified on-board diagnostic systems, and repair of malfunctions or system deterioration identified by or affecting OBD systems as specified in § 51.357.</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">Modeling requirements.</E> Equivalency of emission levels which will be achieved by the I/M program design in the SIP to those of the model program described in this section shall be demonstrated using the most current version of EPA's mobile source emission model and EPA guidance on the estimation of input parameters. Areas required to implement basic I/M programs shall meet the performance standard for the pollutants which cause them to be subject to basic requirements. Areas subject as a result of ozone nonattainment shall meet the standard for VOCs and shall demonstrate no NO<E T="52">X</E> increase, as required in paragraph (b) of this section.</P>
          <CITA>[57 FR 52987, Nov. 5, 1992, as amended at 61 FR 40945, Aug. 6, 1996; 63 FR 24433, May 4, 1998]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.353</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Network type and program evaluation.</SUBJECT>
          <P>Enhanced I/M programs shall be operated in a centralized test-only format, unless the State can demonstrate that a decentralized program is equally effective in achieving the enhanced I/M performance standard. Basic I/M programs can be centralized, decentralized, or a hybrid at the State's discretion, but shall be demonstrated to achieve the same emission reduction as the program described in § 51.352 of this subpart.</P>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Presumptive equivalency.</E> A decentralized network consisting of stations that only perform official I/M testing (which may include safety-related inspections) and in which owners and employees of those stations, or companies owning those stations, are contractually or legally barred from engaging in motor vehicle repair or service, motor vehicle parts sales, and motor vehicle sale and leasing, either directly or indirectly, and are barred from referring vehicle owners to particular providers of motor vehicle repair services (except as provided in § 51.369(b)(1) of this subpart) shall be considered equivalent to a centralized, test-only system. States may allow such stations to engage in the sale of refreshments for the use of employees and customers waiting at the station and may fulfill other functions typically carried out by the State such as renewal of vehicle registration and driver's licenses, or tax and fee collections.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Case-by-case equivalency.</E> (1) Credits for test-and-repair networks, i.e., those not meeting the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section, are assumed to be 50% less than those for a test-only network for the tailpipe emission test, purge test, evaporative system integrity test, catalyst check, and gas cap check; and 75% less for the evaporative canister checks, PCV check, and air system checks. Smaller reductions in credits for the various test protocols may be claimed if a State can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Administrator that based on past performance with the specific test-type and inspection standards employed, its test-and-repair system will exceed these levels. At a minimum, such a demonstration shall include:</P>
          <P>(i) Surveys that assess the effectiveness of repairs performed on vehicles that failed the tailpipe emission test and evaporative system tests;</P>
          <P>(ii) In programs including tampering checks, measurement of actual tampering rates, their change over time, and the change attributable to finding and fixing such tampering as opposed to deterrence effects; and</P>
          <P>(iii) The results of undercover surveys of inspector effectiveness as it relates to identifying vehicles that need repair.</P>

          <P>(2) In the case of hybrid systems, which may be implemented in basic I/M <PRTPAGE P="195"/>areas, including both test-only and test-and-repair facilities, full credit shall apply to the portion of the fleet initially tested and subsequently retested at a test-only facility meeting the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section, and to the portion of the fleet initially tested and failed at a test-and-repair facility but subsequently passing a comprehensive retest at a test-only facility meeting those same requirements. The credit loss assumptions described in paragraph (b)(1) of this section shall apply to the portion of the fleet initially passed at a test-and-repair facility, and to the portion initially failed at a test-only facility and retested at a test-and-repair facility.</P>
          <P>(3) Areas operating test-and-repair networks or hybrid networks may, in the future, claim greater effectiveness than described in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, if a demonstration of greater effectiveness is made to the satisfaction of the Administrator using the program evaluation protocol described in paragraph (c) of this section.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Program evaluation.</E> Enhanced I/M programs shall include an ongoing evaluation to quantify the emission reduction benefits of the program, and to determine if the program is meeting the requirements of the Clean Air Act and this subpart.</P>
          <P>(1) The State shall report the results of the program evaluation on a biennial basis, starting two years after the initial start date of mandatory testing as required in § 51.373 of this subpart.</P>
          <P>(2) The evaluation shall be considered in establishing actual emission reductions achieved from I/M for the purposes of satisfying the requirements of sections 182(g)(1) and 182(g)(2) of the Clean Air Act, relating to reductions in emissions and compliance demonstration.</P>
          <P>(3) The evaluation program shall consist, at a minimum, of those items described in paragraph (b)(1) of this section and program evaluation data using a sound evaluation methodology, as approved by EPA, and evaporative system checks, specified in § 51.357(a) (9) and (10) of this subpart, for model years subject to those evaporative system test procedures. The test data shall be obtained from a representative, random sample, taken at the time of initial inspection (before repair) on a minimum of 0.1 percent of the vehicles subject to inspection in a given year. Such vehicles shall receive a State administered or monitored test, as specified in this paragraph (c)(3), prior to the  performance of I/M-triggered repairs during the inspection cycle under consideration.</P>
          <P>(4) The program evaluation test data shall be submitted to EPA and shall be capable of providing accurate information about the overall effectiveness of an I/M program, such evaluation to begin no later than November 30, 1998.</P>
          <P>(5) Areas that qualify for and choose to implement an OTR low enhanced I/M program, as established in § 51.351(h), and that claim in their SIP less emission reduction credit than the basic performance standard for one or more pollutants, are exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(4) of this section. The reports required under § 51.366 of this part shall be sufficient in these areas to satisfy the requirements of Clean Air Act for program reporting.</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">SIP requirements.</E> (1) The SIP shall include a description of the network to be employed, the required legal authority, and, in the case of areas making claims under paragraph (b) of this section, the required demonstration.</P>
          <P>(2) The SIP shall include a description of the evaluation schedule and protocol, the sampling methodology, the data collection and analysis system, the resources and personnel for evaluation, and related details of the evaluation program, and the legal authority enabling the evaluation program.</P>
          <CITA>[57 FR 52987, Nov. 5, 1992, as amended at 58 FR 59367, Nov. 9, 1993; 61 FR 39037, July 25, 1996; 63 FR 1368, Jan. 9, 1998]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.354</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Adequate tools and resources.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Administrative resources.</E> The program shall maintain the administrative resources necessary to perform all of the program functions including quality assurance, data analysis and reporting, and the holding of hearings and adjudication of cases. A portion of the test fee or a separately assessed per vehicle fee shall be collected, placed in a dedicated fund and retained, to be <PRTPAGE P="196"/>used to finance program oversight, management, and capital expenditures. Alternatives to this approach shall be acceptable if the State can demonstrate that adequate funding of the program can be maintained in some other fashion (e.g., through contractual obligation along with demonstrated past performance). Reliance on future uncommitted annual or biennial appropriations from the State or local General Fund is not acceptable, unless doing otherwise would be a violation of the State's constitution. This section shall in no way require the establishment of a test fee if the State chooses to fund the program in some other manner.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Personnel.</E> The program shall employ sufficient personnel to effectively carry out the duties related to the program, including but not limited to administrative audits, inspector audits, data analysis, program oversight, program evaluation, public education and assistance, and enforcement against stations and inspectors as well as against motorists who are out of compliance with program regulations and requirements.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Equipment.</E> The program shall possess equipment necessary to achieve the objectives of the program and meet program requirements, including but not limited to a steady supply of vehicles for covert auditing, test equipment and facilities for program evaluation, and computers capable of data processing, analysis, and reporting. Equipment or equivalent services may be contractor supplied or owned by the State or local authority.</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">SIP requirements.</E> The SIP shall include a description of the resources that will be used for program operation, and discuss how the performance standard will be met.</P>
          <P>(1) The SIP shall include a detailed budget plan which describes the source of funds for personnel, program administration, program enforcement, purchase of necessary equipment (such as vehicles for undercover audits), and any other requirements discussed throughout, for the period prior to the next biennial self-evaluation required in § 51.366 of this subpart.</P>
          <P>(2) The SIP shall include a description of personnel resources. The plan shall include the number of personnel dedicated to overt and covert auditing, data analysis, program administration, enforcement, and other necessary functions and the training attendant to each function.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.355</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Test frequency and convenience.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) The performance standards for I/M programs assume an annual test frequency; other schedules may be approved if the required emission targets are achieved. The SIP shall describe the test schedule in detail, including the test year selection scheme if testing is other than annual. The SIP shall include the legal authority necessary to implement and enforce the test frequency requirement and explain how the test frequency will be integrated with the enforcement process.</P>
          <P>(b) In enhanced I/M programs, test systems shall be designed in such a way as to provide convenient service to motorists required to get their vehicles tested. The SIP shall demonstrate that the network of stations providing test services is sufficient to insure short waiting times to get a test and short driving distances. Stations shall be required to adhere to regular testing hours and to test any subject vehicle presented for a test during its test period.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.356</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Vehicle coverage.</SUBJECT>
          <P>The performance standard for enhanced I/M programs assumes coverage of all 1968 and later model year light duty vehicles and light duty trucks up to 8,500 pounds GVWR, and includes vehicles operating on all fuel types. The standard for basic I/M programs does not include light duty trucks. Other levels of coverage may be approved if the necessary emission reductions are achieved. Vehicles registered or required to be registered within the I/M program area boundaries and fleets primarily operated within the I/M program area boundaries and belonging to the covered model years and vehicle classes comprise the subject vehicles.</P>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Subject vehicles.</E> (1) All vehicles of a covered model year and vehicle type shall be tested according to the applicable test schedule, including leased vehicles whose registration or titling is <PRTPAGE P="197"/>in the name of an equity owner other than the lessee or user.</P>
          <P>(2) All subject fleet vehicles shall be inspected. Fleets may be officially inspected outside of the normal I/M program test facilities, if such alternatives are approved by the program administration, but shall be subject to the same test requirements using the same quality control standards as non-fleet vehicles. If all vehicles in a particular fleet are tested during one part of the cycle, then the quality control requirements shall be met during the time of testing only. Any vehicle available for rent in the I/M area or for use in the I/M area shall be subject. Fleet vehicles not being tested in normal I/M test facilities in enhanced I/M programs, however, shall be inspected in independent, test-only facilities, according to the requirements of § 51.353(a) of this subpart.</P>
          <P>(3) Subject vehicles which are registered in the program area but are primarily operated in another I/M area shall be tested, either in the area of primary operation, or in the area of registration. Alternate schedules may be established to permit convenient testing of these vehicles (e.g., vehicles belonging to students away at college should be rescheduled for testing during a visit home). I/M programs shall make provisions for providing official testing to vehicles registered elsewhere.</P>
          <P>(4) Vehicles which are operated on Federal installations located within an I/M program area shall be tested, regardless of whether the vehicles are registered in the State or local I/M area. This requirement applies to all employee-owned or leased vehicles (including vehicles owned, leased, or operated by civilian and military personnel on Federal installations) as well as agency-owned or operated vehicles, except tactical military vehicles, operated on the installation. This requirement shall not apply to visiting agency, employee, or military personnel vehicles as long as such visits do not exceed 60 calendar days per year. In areas without test fees collected in the lane, arrangements shall be made by the installation with the I/M program for reimbursement of the costs of tests provided for agency vehicles, at the discretion of the I/M agency. The installation shall provide documentation of proof of compliance to the I/M agency. The documentation shall include a list of subject vehicles and shall be updated periodically, as determined by the I/M program administrator, but no less frequently than each inspection cycle. The installation shall use one of the following methods to establish proof of compliance:</P>
          <P>(i) Presentation of a valid certificate of compliance from the local I/M program, from any other I/M program at least as stringent as the local program, or from any program deemed acceptable by the I/M program administrator.</P>
          <P>(ii) Presentation of proof of vehicle registration within the geographic area covered by the I/M program, except for any program whose enforcement is not through registration denial.</P>
          <P>(iii) Another method approved by the State or local I/M program administrator.</P>
          <P>(5) Special exemptions may be permitted for certain subject vehicles provided a demonstration is made that the performance standard will be met.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">SIP requirements.</E> (1) The SIP shall include a detailed description of the number and types of vehicles to be covered by the program, and a plan for how those vehicles are to be identified, including vehicles that are routinely operated in the area but may not be registered in the area.</P>
          <P>(2) The SIP shall include a description of any special exemptions which will be granted by the program, and an estimate of the percentage and number of subject vehicles which will be impacted. Such exemptions shall be accounted for in the emission reduction analysis.</P>
          <P>(3) The SIP shall include the legal authority or rule necessary to implement and enforce the vehicle coverage requirement.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.357</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Test procedures and standards.</SUBJECT>
          <P>Written test procedures and pass/fail standards shall be established and followed for each model year and vehicle type included in the program.</P>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Test procedure requirements.</E> Emission tests and functional tests shall be <PRTPAGE P="198"/>conducted according to good engineering practices to assure test accuracy.</P>
          <P>(1) Initial tests (i.e., those occurring for the first time in a test cycle) shall be performed without repair or adjustment at the inspection facility, prior to the test, except as provided in paragraph (a)(10)(i) of this section.</P>
          <P>(2) The vehicle owner or driver shall have access to the test area such that observation of the entire official inspection process on the vehicle is permitted. Such access may be limited but shall in no way prevent full observation.</P>
          <P>(3) An official test, once initiated, shall be performed in its entirety regardless of intermediate outcomes except in the case of invalid test condition, unsafe conditions, or fast pass/fail algorithms.</P>
          <P>(4) Tests involving measurement shall be performed with program-approved equipment that has been calibrated accordingly to the quality procedures contained in appendix A to this subpart.</P>
          <P>(5) Vehicles shall be rejected from testing if the exhaust system is missing or leaking, or if the vehicle is in an unsafe condition for testing.</P>
          <P>(6) Vehicles shall be retested after repair for any portion of the inspection that is failed on the previous test to determine if repairs were effective. To the extent that repair to correct a previous failure could lead to failure of another portion of the test, that portion shall also be retested. Evaporative system repairs shall trigger an exhaust emissions retest.</P>
          <P>(7) <E T="03">Steady-state testing.</E> Steady-state tests shall be performed in accordance with the procedures contained in appendix B to this subpart.</P>
          <P>(8) <E T="03">Emission control device inspection.</E> Visual emission control device checks shall be performed through direct observation or through indirect observation using a mirror, video camera or other visual aid. These inspections shall include a determination as to whether each subject device is present and appears to be properly connected and appears to be the correct type for the certified vehicle configuration.</P>
          <P>(9) <E T="03">Evaporative system purge test procedure.</E> The purge test procedure shall consist of measuring the total purge flow (in standard liters) occurring in the vehicle's evaporative system during the transient dynamometer emission test specified in paragraph (a)(11) of this section. The purge flow measurement system shall be connected to the purge portion of the evaporative system in series between the canister and the engine, preferably near the canister. The inspector shall be responsible for ensuring that all items that are disconnected in the conduct of the test procedure are properly re-connected at the conclusion of the test procedure. Alternative procedures may be used if they are shown to be equivalent or better to the satisfaction of the Administrator. Except in the case of government-run test facilities claiming sovereign immunity, any damage done to the evaporative emission control system during this test shall be repaired at the expense of the inspection facility.</P>
          <P>(10) <E T="03">Evaporative system integrity test procedure.</E> The test sequence shall consist of the following steps:</P>
          <P>(i) Test equipment shall be connected to the fuel tank canister hose at the canister end. The gas cap shall be checked to ensure that it is properly, but not excessively tightened, and shall be tightened if necessary.</P>
          <P>(ii) The system shall be pressurized to 14<E T="61">±</E>0.5 inches of water without exceeding 26 inches of water system pressure.</P>
          <P>(iii) Close off the pressure source, seal the evaporative system and monitor pressure decay for up to two minutes.</P>
          <P>(iv) Loosen the gas cap after a maximum of two minutes and monitor for a sudden pressure drop, indicating that the fuel tank was pressurized.</P>
          <P>(v) The inspector shall be responsible for ensuring that all items that are disconnected in the conduct of the test procedure are properly re-connected at the conclusion of the test procedure.</P>

          <P>(vi) Alternative procedures may be used if they are shown to be equivalent or better to the satisfaction of the Administrator. Except in the case of government-run test facilities claiming sovereign immunity, any damage done to the evaporative emission control <PRTPAGE P="199"/>system during this test shall be repaired at the expense of the inspection facility.</P>
          <P>(11) <E T="03">Transient emission test.</E> The transient emission test shall consist of 240 seconds of mass emission measurement using a constant volume sampler while the vehicle is driven through a computer-monitored driving cycle on a dynamometer with inertial weight settings appropriate for the weight of the vehicle. The driving cycle shall include acceleration, deceleration, and idle operating modes as specified in appendix E to this subpart. The 240 second sequence may be ended earlier using fast pass or fast fail algorithms and multiple pass/fail algorithms may be used during the test cycle to eliminate false failures. The transient test procedure, including algorithms and other procedural details, shall be approved by the Administrator prior to use in an I/M program.</P>
          <P>(12) <E T="03">On-board diagnostic checks.</E> Inspection of the on-board diagnostic system shall be according to the procedure described in 40 CFR 85.2222, at a minimum.</P>
          <P>(13) <E T="03">Approval of alternative tests.</E> Alternative test procedures may be approved if the Administrator finds that—</P>
          <P>(i) Such procedures are in accordance with good engineering practice, including errors of commission (at cutpoints corresponding to equivalent emission reductions) no higher than the tests they would replace;</P>
          <P>(ii) Such procedures show a correlation with the Federal Test Procedure (with respect to their ability to detect high emitting vehicles and ensure their effective repair) equal to or better than the tests they would replace; and</P>
          <P>(iii) Such procedures would produce equivalent emission reductions in combination with other program elements.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Test standards</E>—(1) <E T="03">Emissions standards.</E> HC, CO, and CO+CO<E T="52">2</E> (or CO<E T="52">2</E> alone) emission standards shall be applicable to all vehicles subject to the program and repairs shall be required for failure of any standard regardless of the attainment status of the area. NO<E T="52">X</E> emission standards shall be applied to vehicles subject to a transient test in ozone nonattainment areas and in an ozone transport region, unless a waiver of NO<E T="52">X</E> controls is provided to the State under § 51.351(d) of this subpart.</P>
          <P>(i) <E T="03">Steady-state short tests.</E> The steady-state short test emission standards for 1981 and later model year light duty vehicles and light duty trucks shall be at least as stringent as those in appendix C to this subpart.</P>
          <P>(ii) <E T="03">Transient test.</E> Transient test emission standards shall be established for HC, CO, CO<E T="52">2,</E> and NO<E T="52">X</E> for subject vehicles based on model year and vehicle type.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Visual equipment inspection standards.</E> (i) Vehicles shall fail visual inspections of subject emission control devices if such devices are part of the original certified configuration and are found to be missing, modified, disconnected, or improperly connected.</P>
          <P>(ii) Vehicles shall fail visual inspections of subject emission control devices if such devices are found to be incorrect for the certified vehicle configuration under inspection. Aftermarket parts, as well as original equipment manufacture parts, may be considered correct if they are proper for the certified vehicle configuration. Where an EPA aftermarket approval or self-certification program exists for a particular class of subject parts, vehicles shall fail visual equipment inspections if the part is neither original equipment manufacture nor from an approved or self-certified aftermarket manufacturer.</P>
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Functional test standards</E>—(i) <E T="03">Evaporative system integrity test.</E> Vehicles shall fail the evaporative system pressure test if the system cannot maintain a system pressure above eight inches of water for up to two minutes after being pressurized to 14<E T="61">±</E>0.5 inches of water or if no pressure drop is detected when the gas cap is loosened as described in paragraph (a)(10)(iv) of this section. Additionally, vehicles shall fail the evaporative test if the canister is missing or obviously damaged, if hoses are missing or obviously disconnected, or if the gas cap is missing.</P>
          <P>(ii) <E T="03">Evaporative canister purge test.</E> Vehicles with a total purge system flow measuring less than one liter, over the course of the transient test required in paragraph (a)(9) of this section, shall fail the evaporative purge test.<PRTPAGE P="200"/>
          </P>
          <P>(4) <E T="03">On-board diagnostics test standards.</E> Vehicles shall fail the on-board diagnostic test if they fail to meet the requirements of 40 CFR 85.2207, at a minimum. Failure of the on-board diagnostic test need not result in failure of the vehicle inspection/maintenance test until January 1, 2001.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Fast test algorithms and standards.</E> Special test algorithms and pass/fail algorithms may be employed to reduce test time when the test outcome is predictable with near certainty, if the Administrator approves by letter the equivalency to full procedure testing.</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">Applicability.</E> In general, section 203(a)(3)(A) of the Clean Air Act prohibits altering a vehicle's configuration such that it changes from a certified to a non-certified configuration. In the inspection process, vehicles that have been altered from their original certified configuration are to be tested in the same manner as other subject vehicles.</P>
          <P>(1) Vehicles with engines other than the engine originally installed by the manufacturer or an identical replacement of such engine shall be subject to the test procedures and standards for the chassis type and model year including visual equipment inspections for all parts that are part of the original or now-applicable certified configuration and part of the normal inspection. States may choose to require vehicles with such engines to be subject to the test procedures and standards for the engine model year if it is newer than the chassis model year.</P>
          <P>(2) Vehicles that have been switched from an engine of one fuel type to another fuel type that is subject to the program (e.g., from a diesel engine to a gasoline engine) shall be subject to the test procedures and standards for the current fuel type, and to the requirements of paragraph (d)(1) of this section.</P>
          <P>(3) Vehicles that are switched to a fuel type for which there is no certified configuration shall be tested according to the most stringent emission standards established for that vehicle type and model year. Emission control device requirements may be waived if the program determines that the alternatively fueled vehicle configuration would meet the new vehicle standards for that model year without such devices.</P>
          <P>(4) Mixing vehicle classes (e.g., light-duty with heavy-duty) and certification types (e.g., California with Federal) within a single vehicle configuration shall be considered tampering.</P>
          <P>(e) <E T="03">SIP requirements.</E> The SIP shall include a description of each test procedure used. The SIP shall include the rule, ordinance or law describing and establishing the test procedures.</P>
          <CITA>[57 FR 52987, Nov. 5, 1992, as amended at 61 FR 40945, Aug. 6, 1996; 63 FR 24433, May 4, 1998]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.358</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Test equipment.</SUBJECT>
          <P>Computerized test systems are required for performing any measurement on subject vehicles.</P>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Performance features of computerized test systems.</E> The test equipment shall be certified by the program to meet the requirements contained in appendix D to this subpart, and newly acquired systems shall be subjected to acceptance test procedures to ensure compliance with program specifications.</P>
          <P>(1) Emission test equipment shall be capable of testing all subject vehicles and shall be updated from time to time to accommodate new technology vehicles as well as changes to the program.</P>
          <P>(2) At a minimum, emission test equipment:</P>
          <P>(i) Shall be automated to the highest degree commercially available to minimize the potential for intentional fraud and/or human error;</P>
          <P>(ii) Shall be secure from tampering and/or abuse;</P>
          <P>(iii) Shall be based upon written specifications; and</P>
          <P>(iv) Shall be capable of simultaneously sampling dual exhaust vehicles.</P>
          <P>(3) The vehicle owner or driver shall be provided with a computer-generated record of test results, including all of the items listed in 40 CFR part 85, subpart W as being required on the test record. The test report shall include:</P>
          <P>(i) A vehicle description, including license plate number, vehicle identification number, and odometer reading;</P>
          <P>(ii) The date and time of test;</P>

          <P>(iii) The name or identification number of the individual(s) performing the <PRTPAGE P="201"/>tests and the location of the test station and lane;</P>
          <P>(iv) The type of tests performed, including emission tests, visual checks for the presence of emission control components, and functional, evaporative system checks;</P>
          <P>(v) The applicable test standards;</P>
          <P>(vi) The test results, including exhaust concentrations and pass/fail results for each mode measured, pass/fail results for evaporative system checks, and which emission control devices inspected were passed, failed, or not applicable;</P>
          <P>(vii) A statement indicating the availability of warranty coverage as required in section 207 of the Clean Air Act;</P>
          <P>(viii) Certification that tests were performed in accordance with the regulations and, in the case of decentralized programs, the signature of the individual who performed the test; and</P>
          <P>(ix) For vehicles that fail the tailpipe emission test, information on the possible causes of the specific pattern of high emission levels found during the test.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Functional characteristics of computerized test systems.</E> The test system is composed of emission measurement devices and other motor vehicle test equipment controlled by a computer.</P>
          <P>(1) The test system shall automatically:</P>
          <P>(i) Make a pass/fail decision for all measurements;</P>
          <P>(ii) Record test data to an electronic medium;</P>
          <P>(iii) Conduct regular self-testing of recording accuracy;</P>
          <P>(iv) Perform electrical calibration and system integrity checks before each test, as applicable; and</P>
          <P>(v) Initiate system lockouts for:</P>
          <P>(A) Tampering with security aspects of the test system;</P>
          <P>(B) Failing to conduct or pass periodic calibration or leak checks;</P>
          <P>(C) Failing to conduct or pass the constant volume sampler flow rate check (if applicable);</P>
          <P>(D) Failing to conduct or pass any of the dynamometer checks, including coast-down, roll speed and roll distance, power absorption capability, and inertia weight selection checks (if applicable);</P>
          <P>(E) Failing to conduct or pass the pressure monitoring device check (if applicable);</P>
          <P>(F) Failing to conduct or pass the purge flow metering system check (if applicable); and</P>
          <P>(G) A full data recording medium or one that does not pass a cyclical redundancy check.</P>
          <P>(2) Test systems in enhanced I/M programs shall include a real-time data link to a host computer that prevents unauthorized multiple initial tests on the same vehicle in a test cycle and to insure test record accuracy.</P>
          <P>(3) The test system shall insure accurate data collection by limiting, cross-checking, and/or confirming manual data entry.</P>
          <P>(4) <E T="03">On-board diagnostic test equipment requirements.</E> The test equipment used to perform on-board diagnostic inspections shall function as specified in 40 CFR 85.2231.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">SIP requirements.</E> The SIP shall include written technical specifications for all test equipment used in the program and shall address each of the above requirements. The specifications shall describe the emission analysis process, the necessary test equipment, the required features, and written acceptance testing criteria and procedures.</P>
          <CITA>[57 FR 52987, Nov. 5, 1992, as amended at 61 FR 40945, Aug. 6, 1996]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.359</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Quality control.</SUBJECT>
          <P>Quality control measures shall insure that emission measurement equipment is calibrated and maintained properly, and that inspection, calibration records, and control charts are accurately created, recorded and maintained.</P>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">General requirements.</E> (1) The practices described in this section and in appendix A to this subpart shall be followed, at a minimum. Alternatives or exceptions to these procedures or frequencies may be approved by the Administrator based on a demonstration, including control chart analysis, of equivalent performance.</P>

          <P>(2) Preventive maintenance on all inspection equipment necessary to insure accurate and repeatable operation shall be performed on a periodic basis.<PRTPAGE P="202"/>
          </P>
          <P>(3) Computerized analyzers shall automatically record quality control check information, lockouts, attempted tampering, and any other recordable circumstances which should be monitored to insure quality control (e.g., service calls).</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Requirements for steady-state emissions testing equipment.</E> (1) Equipment shall be maintained according to demonstrated good engineering practices to assure test accuracy. The calibration and adjustment requirements in appendix A to this subpart shall apply to all steady-state test equipment. States may adjust calibration schedules and other quality control frequencies by using statistical process control to monitor equipment performance on an ongoing basis.</P>
          <P>(2) For analyzers that use ambient air as zero air, provision shall be made to draw the air from outside the inspection bay or lane in which the analyzer is situated.</P>
          <P>(3) The analyzer housing shall be constructed to protect the analyzer bench and electrical components from ambient temperature and humidity fluctuations that exceed the range of the analyzer's design specifications.</P>
          <P>(4) Analyzers shall automatically purge the analytical system after each test.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Requirements for transient exhaust emission test equipment.</E> Equipment shall be maintained according to demonstrated good engineering practices to assure test accuracy. Computer control of quality assurance checks and quality control charts shall be used whenever possible. Exceptions to the procedures and the frequency of the checks described in appendix A of this subpart may be approved by the Administrator based on a demonstration of equivalent performance.</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">Requirements for evaporative system functional test equipment.</E> Equipment shall be maintained according to demonstrated good engineering practices to assure test accuracy. Computer control of quality assurance checks and quality control charts shall be used whenever possible. Exceptions to the procedures and the frequency of the checks described in appendix A of this subpart may be approved by the Administrator based on a demonstration of equivalent performance.</P>
          <P>(e) <E T="03">Document security.</E> Measures shall be taken to maintain the security of all documents by which compliance with the inspection requirement is established including, but not limited to inspection certificates, waiver certificates, license plates, license tabs, and stickers. This section shall in no way require the use of paper documents but shall apply if they are used by the program for these purposes.</P>
          <P>(1) Compliance documents shall be counterfeit resistant. Such measures as the use of special fonts, water marks, ultra-violet inks, encoded magnetic strips, unique bar-coded identifiers, and difficult to acquire materials may be used to accomplish this requirement.</P>
          <P>(2) All inspection certificates, waiver certificates, and stickers shall be printed with a unique serial number and an official program seal.</P>
          <P>(3) Measures shall be taken to ensure that compliance documents cannot be stolen or removed without being damaged.</P>
          <P>(f) <E T="03">SIP requirements.</E> The SIP shall include a description of quality control and record keeping procedures. The SIP shall include the procedure manual, rule, ordinance or law describing and establishing the quality control procedures and requirements.</P>
          <CITA>[57 FR 52987, Nov. 5, 1992, as amended at 58 FR 59367, Nov. 9, 1993]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.360</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Waivers and compliance via diagnostic inspection.</SUBJECT>
          <P>The program may allow the issuance of a waiver, which is a form of compliance with the program requirements that allows a motorist to comply without meeting the applicable test standards, as long as the prescribed criteria described below are met.</P>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Waiver issuance criteria.</E> The waiver criteria shall include the following at a minimum.</P>

          <P>(1) Waivers shall be issued only after a vehicle has failed a retest performed after all qualifying repairs have been completed. Qualifying repairs include repairs of the emission control components, listed in paragraph (a)(5) of this section, performed within 60 days of the test date.<PRTPAGE P="203"/>
          </P>
          <P>(2) Any available warranty coverage shall be used to obtain needed repairs before expenditures can be counted towards the cost limits in paragraphs (a)(5) and (a)(6) of this section. The operator of a vehicle within the statutory age and mileage coverage under section 207(b) of the Clean Air Act shall present a written denial of warranty coverage from the manufacturer or authorized dealer for this provision to be waived for approved tests applicable to the vehicle.</P>
          <P>(3) Waivers shall not be issued to vehicles for tampering-related repairs. The cost of tampering-related repairs shall not be applicable to the minimum expenditure in paragraphs (a)(5) and (a)(6) of this section. States may issue exemptions for tampering-related repairs if it can be verified that the part in question or one similar to it is no longer available for sale.</P>
          <P>(4) Repairs shall be appropriate to the cause of the test failure, and a visual check shall be made to determine if repairs were actually made if, given the nature of the repair, it can be visually confirmed. Receipts shall be submitted for review to further verify that qualifying repairs were performed.</P>
          <P>(5) General repairs shall be performed by a recognized repair technician (i.e., one professionally engaged in vehicle repair, employed by a going concern whose purpose is vehicle repair, or possessing nationally recognized certification for emission-related diagnosis and repair) in order to qualify for a waiver. I/M programs may allow the cost of parts (not labor) utilized by non-technicians (e.g., owners) to apply toward the waiver limit. The waiver would apply to the cost of parts for the repair or replacement of the following list of emission control components: oxygen sensor, catalytic converter, thermal reactor, EGR valve, fuel filler cap, evaporative canister, PCV valve, air pump, distributor, ignition wires, coil, and spark plugs. The cost of any hoses, gaskets, belts, clamps, brackets or other accessories directly associated with these components may also be applied to the waiver limit.</P>
          <P>(6) In basic programs, a minimum of $75 for pre-81 vehicles and $200 for 1981 and newer vehicles shall be spent in order to qualify for a waiver. These model year cutoffs and the associated dollar limits shall be in full effect no later than January 1, 1998. Prior to January 1, 1998, States may adopt any minimum expenditure commensurate with the waiver rate committed to for the purposes of modeling compliance with the basic I/M performance standard.</P>
          <P>(7) Beginning on January 1, 1998, enhanced I/M programs shall require the motorist to make an expenditure of at least $450 in repairs to qualify for a waiver. The I/M program shall provide that the $450 minimum expenditure shall be adjusted in January of each year by the percentage, if any, by which the Consumer Price Index for the preceding calendar year differs from the Consumer Price Index of 1989. Prior to January 1, 1998, States may adopt any minimum expenditure commensurate with the waiver rate committed to for the purposes of modeling compliance with the relevant enhanced I/M performance standard.</P>
          <P>(i) The Consumer Price Index for any calendar year is the average of the Consumer Price Index for all-urban consumers published by the Department of Labor, as of the close of the 12-month period ending on August 31 of each calendar year. A copy of the current Consumer Price Index may be obtained from the Emission Planning and Strategies Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2565 Plymouth Road, Ann Arbor, Michigan 48105.</P>
          <P>(ii) The revision of the Consumer Price Index which is most consistent with the Consumer Price Index for calendar year 1989 shall be used.</P>
          <P>(8) States may establish lower minimum expenditures if a program is established to scrap vehicles that do not meet standards after the lower expe nditure is made.</P>

          <P>(9) A time extension, not to exceed the period of the inspection frequency, may be granted to obtain needed repairs on a vehicle in the case of economic hardship when waiver requirements have not been met. After having received a time extension, a vehicle must fully pass the applicable test standards before becoming eligible for another time extension. The extension for a vehicle shall be tracked and reported by the program.<PRTPAGE P="204"/>
          </P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Compliance via diagnostic inspection.</E> Vehicles subject to a transient IM240 emission test at the cutpoints established in §§ 51.351 (f)(7) and (g)(7) of this subpart may be issued a certificate of compliance without meeting the prescribed emission cutpoints, if, after failing a retest on emissions, a complete, documented physical and functional diagnosis and inspection performed by the I/M agency or a contractor to the I/M agency show that no additional emission-related repairs are needed. Any such exemption policy and procedures shall be subject to approval by the Administrator.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Quality control of waiver issuance.</E> (1) Enhanced programs shall control waiver issuance and processing by establishing a system of agency-issued waivers. The State may delegate this authority to a single contractor but inspectors in stations and lanes shall not issue waivers. Basic programs may permit inspector-issued waivers as long as quality assurance efforts include a comprehensive review of waiver issuance.</P>
          <P>(2) The program shall include methods of informing vehicle owners or lessors of potential warranty coverage, and ways to obtain warranty repairs.</P>
          <P>(3) The program shall insure that repair receipts are authentic and cannot be revised or reused.</P>
          <P>(4) The program shall insure that waivers are only valid for one test cycle.</P>
          <P>(5) The program shall track, manage, and account for time extensions or exemptions so that owners or lessors cannot receive or retain a waiver improperly.</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">SIP requirements.</E> (1) The SIP shall include a maximum waiver rate expressed as a percentage of initially failed vehicles. This waiver rate shall be used for estimating emission reduction benefits in the modeling analysis.</P>
          <P>(2) The State shall take corrective action if the waiver rate exceeds that committed to in the SIP or revise the SIP and the emission reductions claimed.</P>
          <P>(3) The SIP shall describe the waiver criteria and procedures, including cost limits, quality assurance methods and measures, and administration.</P>
          <P>(4) The SIP shall include the necessary legal authority, ordinance, or rules to issue waivers, set and adjust cost limits as required in paragraph (a)(5) of this section, and carry out any other functions necessary to administer the waiver system, including enforcement of the waiver provisions.</P>
          <CITA>[57 FR 52987, Nov. 5, 1992, as amended at 58 FR 59367, Nov. 9, 1993; 60 FR 48036, Sept. 18, 1995]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.361</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Motorist compliance enforcement.</SUBJECT>
          <P>Compliance shall be ensured through the denial of motor vehicle registration in enhanced I/M programs unless an exception for use of an existing alternative is approved. An enhanced I/M area may use an existing alternative if it demonstrates that the alternative has been more effective than registration denial. An enforcement mechanism may be considered an “existing alternative” only in States that, for some area in the State, had an I/M program with that mechanism in operation prior to passage of the 1990 Amendments to the Act. A basic I/M area may use an alternative enforcement mechanism if it demonstrates that the alternative will be as effective as registration denial. Two other types of enforcement programs may qualify for enhanced I/M programs if demonstrated to have been more effective than enforcement of the registration requirement in the past: Sticker-based enforcement programs and computer-matching programs. States that did not adopt an I/M program for any area of the State before November 15, 1990, may not use an enforcement alternative in connection with an enhanced I/M program required to be adopted after that date.</P>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Registration denial.</E> Registration denial enforcement is defined as rejecting an application for initial registration or reregistration of a used vehicle (i.e., a vehicle being registered after the initial retail sale and associated registration) unless the vehicle has complied with the I/M requirement prior to granting the application. Pursuant to section 207(g)(3) of the Act, nothing in this subpart shall be construed to require that new vehicles shall receive emission testing prior to <PRTPAGE P="205"/>initial retail sale. In designing its enforcement program, the State shall:</P>
          <P>(1) Provide an external, readily visible means of determining vehicle compliance with the registration requirement to facilitate enforcement of the program;</P>
          <P>(2) Adopt a schedule of testing (either annual or biennial) that clearly determines when a vehicle shall comply prior to registration;</P>
          <P>(3) Design a testing certification mechanism (either paper-based or electronic) that shall be used for registration purposes and clearly indicates whether the certification is valid for purposes of registration, including:</P>
          <P>(i) Expiration date of the certificate;</P>
          <P>(ii) Unambiguous vehicle identification information; and</P>
          <P>(iii) Whether the vehicle passed or received a waiver;</P>
          <P>(4) Routinely issue citations to motorists with expired or missing license plates, with either no registration or an expired registration, and with no license plate decals or expired decals, and provide for enforcement officials other than police to issue citations (e.g., parking meter attendants) to parked vehicles in noncompliance;</P>
          <P>(5) Structure the penalty system to deter non-compliance with the registration requirement through the use of mandatory minimum fines (meaning civil, monetary penalties, in this subpart) constituting a meaningful deterrent and through a requirement that compliance be demonstrated before a case can be closed;</P>
          <P>(6) Ensure that evidence of testing is available and checked for validity at the time of a new registration of a used vehicle or registration renewal;</P>
          <P>(7) Prevent owners or lessors from avoiding testing through manipulation of the title or registration system; title transfers may re-start the clock on the inspection cycle only if proof of current compliance is required at title transfer;</P>
          <P>(8) Prevent the fraudulent initial classification or reclassification of a vehicle from subject to non-subject or exempt by requiring proof of address changes prior to registration record modification, and documentation from the testing program (or delegate) certifying based on a physical inspection that the vehicle is exempt;</P>
          <P>(9) Limit and track the use of time extensions of the registration requirement to prevent repeated extensions;</P>
          <P>(10) Provide for meaningful penalties for cases of registration fraud;</P>
          <P>(11) Limit and track exemptions to prevent abuse of the exemption policy for vehicles claimed to be out-of-state; and</P>
          <P>(12) Encourage enforcement of vehicle registration transfer requirements when vehicle owners move into the I/M area by coordinating with local and State enforcement agencies and structuring other activities (e.g., drivers license issuance) to effect registration transfers.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Alternative enforcement mechanisms—</E>(1) <E T="03">General requirements.</E> The program shall demonstrate that a non-registration-based enforcement program is currently more effective than registration-denial enforcement in enhanced I/M programs or, prospectively, as effective as registration denial in basic programs. The following general requirements shall apply:</P>
          <P>(i) For enhanced I/M programs, the area in question shall have had an operating I/M program using the alternative mechanism prior to enactment of the Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990. While modifications to improve compliance may be made to the program that was in effect at the time of enactment, the expected change in effectiveness cannot be considered in determining acceptability;</P>
          <P>(ii) The State shall assess the alternative program's effectiveness, as well as the current effectiveness of the registration system, including the following:</P>
          <P>(A) Determine the number and percentage of vehicles subject to the I/M program that were in compliance with the program over the course of at least one test cycle; and</P>

          <P>(B) Determine the number and fraction of the same group of vehicles as in paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(A) of this section that were in compliance with the registration requirement over the same period. Late registration shall not be <PRTPAGE P="206"/>considered non-compliance for the purposes of this determination. The precise definition of late registration versus a non-complying vehicle shall be explained and justified in the SIP;</P>
          <P>(iii) An alternative mechanism shall be considered more effective if the fraction of vehicles complying with the existing program, as determined according to the requirements of this section, is greater than the fraction of vehicles complying with the registration requirement. An alternative mechanism is as effective if the fraction complying with the program is at least equal to the fraction complying with the registration requirement.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Sticker-based enforcement.</E> In addition to the general requirements, a sticker-based enforcement program shall demonstrate that the enforcement mechanism will swiftly and effectively prevent operation of subject vehicles that fail to comply. Such demonstration shall include the following:</P>
          <P>(i) An assessment of the current extent of the following forms of non-compliance and demonstration that mechanisms exist to keep such non-compliance within acceptable limits:</P>
          <P>(A) Use of stolen, counterfeit, or fraudulently obtained stickers;</P>
          <P>(B) In States with safety inspections, the use of “Safety Inspection Only” stickers on vehicles that should be subject to the I/M requirement as well; and</P>
          <P>(C) Operation of vehicles with expired stickers, including a stratification of non-compliance by length of noncompliance and model year.</P>
          <P>(ii) The program as currently implemented or as proposed to be improved shall also:</P>
          <P>(A) Require an easily observed external identifier such as the county name on the license plate, an obviously unique license plate tab, or other means that shows whether or not a vehicle is subject to the I/M requirement;</P>
          <P>(B) Require an easily observed external identifier, such as a windshield sticker or license plate tab that shows whether a subject vehicle is in compliance with the inspection requirement;</P>
          <P>(C) Impose monetary fines at least as great as the estimated cost of compliance with I/M requirements (e.g., test fee plus minimum waiver expenditure) for the absence of such identifiers;</P>
          <P>(D) Require that such identifiers be of a quality that makes them difficult to counterfeit, difficult to remove without destroying once installed, and durable enough to last until the next inspection without fading, peeling, or other deterioration;</P>
          <P>(E) Perform surveys in a variety of locations and at different times for the presence of the required identifiers such that at least 10% of the vehicles or 10,000 vehicles (whichever is less) in the subject vehicle population are sampled each year;</P>
          <P>(F) Track missing identifiers for all inspections performed at each station, with stations being held accountable for all such identifiers they are issued; and</P>
          <P>(G) Assess and collect significant fines for each identifier that is unaccounted for by a station.</P>
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Computer matching.</E> In addition to the general requirements, computer-matching programs shall demonstrate that the enforcement mechanism will swiftly and effectively prevent operation of subject vehicles that fail to comply. Such demonstration shall:</P>
          <P>(i) Require an expeditious system that results in at least 90% of the subject vehicles in compliance within 4 months of the compliance deadline;</P>
          <P>(ii) Require that subject vehicles be given compliance deadlines based on the regularly scheduled test date, not the date of previous compliance;</P>
          <P>(iii) Require that motorists pay monetary fines at least as great as the estimated cost of compliance with I/M requirements (e.g., test fee plus minimum waiver expenditure) for the continued operation of a noncomplying vehicle beyond 4 months of the deadline;</P>
          <P>(iv) Require that continued non-compliance will eventually result in preventing operation of the non-complying vehicle (no later than the date of the next test cycle) through, at a minimum, suspension of vehicle registration and subsequent denial of reregistration;</P>

          <P>(v) Demonstrate that the computer system currently in use is adequate to store and manipulate the I/M vehicle database, generate computerized notices, and provide regular backup to said system while maintaining auxiliary storage devices to insure ongoing <PRTPAGE P="207"/>operation of the system and prevent data losses;</P>
          <P>(vi) Track each vehicle through the steps taken to ensure compliance, including:</P>
          <P>(A) The compliance deadline;</P>
          <P>(B) The date of initial notification;</P>
          <P>(C) The dates warning letters are sent to non-complying vehicle owners;</P>
          <P>(D) The dates notices of violation or other penalty notices are sent; and</P>
          <P>(E) The dates and outcomes of other steps in the process, including the final compliance date;</P>
          <P>(vii) Compile and report monthly summaries including statistics on the percentage of vehicles at each stage in the enforcement process; and</P>
          <P>(viii) Track the number and percentage of vehicles initially identified as requiring testing but which are never tested as a result of being junked, sold to a motorist in a non-I/M program area, or for some other reason.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">SIP requirements.</E> (1) The SIP shall provide information concerning the enforcement process, including:</P>
          <P>(i) A description of the existing compliance mechanism if it is to be used in the future and the demonstration that it is as effective or more effective than registration-denial enforcement;</P>
          <P>(ii) An identification of the agencies responsible for performing each of the applicable activities in this section;</P>
          <P>(iii) A description of and accounting for all classes of exempt vehicles; and</P>
          <P>(iv) A description of the plan for testing fleet vehicles, rental car fleets, leased vehicles, and any other subject vehicles, e.g., those operated in (but not necessarily registered in) the program area.</P>
          <P>(2) The SIP shall include a determination of the current compliance rate based on a study of the system that includes an estimate of compliance losses due to loopholes, counterfeiting, and unregistered vehicles. Estimates of the effect of closing such loopholes and otherwise improving the enforcement mechanism shall be supported with detailed analyses.</P>
          <P>(3) The SIP shall include the legal authority to implement and enforce the program.</P>
          <P>(4) The SIP shall include a commitment to an enforcement level to be used for modeling purposes and to be maintained, at a minimum, in practice.</P>
          <CITA>[57 FR 52987, Nov. 5, 1992, as amended at 61 FR 49682, Sept. 23, 1996]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.362</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Motorist compliance enforcement program oversight.</SUBJECT>
          <P>The enforcement program shall be audited regularly and shall follow effective program management practices, including adjustments to improve operation when necessary.</P>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Quality assurance and quality control.</E> A quality assurance program shall be implemented to insure effective overall performance of the enforcement system. Quality control procedures are required to instruct individuals in the enforcement process regarding how to properly conduct their activities. At a minimum, the quality control and quality assurance program shall include:</P>
          <P>(1) Verification of exempt vehicle status by inspecting and confirming such vehicles by the program or its delegate;</P>
          <P>(2) Facilitation of accurate critical test data and vehicle identifier collection through the use of automatic data capture systems such as bar-code scanners or optical character readers, or through redundant data entry;</P>
          <P>(3) Maintenance of an audit trail to allow for the assessment of enforcement effectiveness;</P>
          <P>(4) Establishment of written procedures for personnel directly engaged in I/M enforcement activities;</P>
          <P>(5) Establishment of written procedures for personnel engaged in -I/M document handling and processing, such as registration clerks or personnel involved in sticker dispensing and waiver processing, as well as written procedures for the auditing of their performance;</P>
          <P>(6) Follow-up validity checks on out-of-area or exemption-triggering registration changes;</P>
          <P>(7) Analysis of registration-change applications to target potential violators;</P>

          <P>(8) A determination of enforcement program effectiveness through periodic audits of test records and program compliance documentation;<PRTPAGE P="208"/>
          </P>
          <P>(9) Enforcement procedures for disciplining, retraining, or removing enforcement personnel who deviate from established requirements, or in the case of non-government entities that process registrations, for defranchising, revoking or otherwise discontinuing the activity of the entity issuing registrations; and</P>
          <P>(10) The prevention of fraudulent procurement or use of inspection documents by controlling and tracking document distribution and handling, and making stations financially liable for missing or unaccounted for documents by assessing monetary fines reflecting the “street value” of these documents (i.e., the test fee plus the minimum waiver expenditure).</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Information management.</E> In establishing an information base to be used in characterizing, evaluating, and enforcing the program, the State shall:</P>
          <P>(1) Determine the subject vehicle population;</P>
          <P>(2) Permit EPA audits of the enforcement process;</P>
          <P>(3) Assure the accuracy of registration and other program document files;</P>
          <P>(4) Maintain and ensure the accuracy of the testing database through periodic internal and/or third-party review; through automated or redundant data entry; and, through automated analysis for valid alpha-numeric sequences of the vehicle identification number (VIN), certificate number, or license plate number;</P>
          <P>(5) Compare the testing database to the registration database to determine program effectiveness, establish compliance rates, and to trigger potential enforcement action against non-complying motorists; and</P>
          <P>(6) Sample the fleet as a determination of compliance through parking lot surveys, road-side pull-overs, or other in-use vehicle measurements.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">SIP requirements.</E> The SIP shall include a description of enforcement program oversight and information management activities.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.363</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Quality assurance.</SUBJECT>
          <P>An ongoing quality assurance program shall be implemented to discover, correct and prevent fraud, waste, and abuse and to determine whether procedures are being followed, are adequate, whether equipment is measuring accurately, and whether other problems might exist which would impede program performance. The quality assurance and quality control procedures shall be periodically evaluated to assess their effectiveness and relevance in achieving program goals.</P>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Performance audits.</E> Performance audits shall be conducted on a regular basis to determine whether inspectors are correctly performing all tests and other required functions. Performance audits shall be of two types: overt and covert, and shall include:</P>
          <P>(1) Performance audits based upon written procedures and results shall be reported using either electronic or written forms to be retained in the inspector and station history files, with sufficient detail to support either an administrative or civil hearing;</P>
          <P>(2) Performance audits in addition to regularly programmed audits for stations employing inspectors suspected of violating regulations as a result of audits, data analysis, or consumer complaints;</P>
          <P>(3) Overt performance audits shall be performed at least twice per year for each lane or test bay and shall include:</P>
          <P>(i) A check for the observance of appropriate document security;</P>
          <P>(ii) A check to see that required record keeping practices are being followed;</P>
          <P>(iii) A check for licenses or certificates and other required display information; and</P>
          <P>(iv) Observation and written evaluation of each inspector's ability to properly perform an inspection;</P>
          <P>(4) Covert performance audits shall include:</P>
          <P>(i) Remote visual observation of inspector performance, which may include the use of aids such as binoculars or video cameras, at least once per year per inspector in high-volume stations (i.e., those performing more than 4000 tests per year);</P>
          <P>(ii) Site visits at least once per year per number of inspectors using covert vehicles set to fail (this requirement sets a minimum level of activity, not a requirement that each inspector be involved in a covert audit);</P>

          <P>(iii) For stations that conduct both testing and repairs, at least one covert <PRTPAGE P="209"/>vehicle visit per station per year including the purchase of repairs and subsequent retesting if the vehicle is initially failed for tailpipe emissions (this activity may be accomplished in conjunction with paragraph (a)(4)(ii) of this section but must involve each station at least once per year);</P>
          <P>(iv) Documentation of the audit, including vehicle condition and preparation, sufficient for building a legal case and establishing a performance record;</P>
          <P>(v) Covert vehicles covering the range of vehicle technology groups (e.g., carbureted and fuel-injected vehicles) included in the program, including a full range of introduced malfunctions covering the emission test, the evaporative system tests, and emission control component checks (as applicable);</P>
          <P>(vi) Sufficient numbers of covert vehicles and auditors to allow for frequent rotation of both to prevent detection by station personnel; and</P>
          <P>(vii) Access to on-line inspection databases by State personnel to permit the creation and maintenance of covert vehicle records.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Record audits.</E> Station and inspector records shall be reviewed or screened at least monthly to assess station performance and identify problems that may indicate potential fraud or incompetence. Such review shall include:</P>
          <P>(1) Software-based, computerized analysis to identify statistical inconsistencies, unusual patterns, and other discrepancies;</P>
          <P>(2) Visits to inspection stations to review records not already covered in the electronic analysis (if any); and</P>
          <P>(3) Comprehensive accounting for all official forms that can be used to demonstrate compliance with the program.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Equipment audits.</E> During overt site visits, auditors shall conduct quality control evaluations of the required test equipment, including (where applicable):</P>
          <P>(1) A gas audit using gases of known concentrations at least as accurate as those required for regular equipment quality control and comparing these concentrations to actual readings;</P>
          <P>(2) A check for tampering, worn instrumentation, blocked filters, and other conditions that would impede accurate sampling;</P>
          <P>(3) A check for critical flow in critical flow CVS units;</P>
          <P>(4) A check of the Constant Volume Sampler flow calibration;</P>
          <P>(5) A check for the optimization of the Flame Ionization Detection fuel-air ratio using methane;</P>
          <P>(6) A leak check;</P>
          <P>(7) A check to determine that station gas bottles used for calibration purposes are properly labelled and within the relevant tolerances;</P>
          <P>(8) Functional dynamometer checks addressing coast-down, roll speed and roll distance, inertia weight selection, and power absorption;</P>
          <P>(9) A check of the system's ability to accurately detect background pollutant concentrations;</P>
          <P>(10) A check of the pressure monitoring devices used to perform the evaporative canister pressure test; and</P>
          <P>(11) A check of the purge flow metering system.</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">Auditor training and proficiency.</E> (1) Auditors shall be formally trained and knowledgeable in:</P>
          <P>(i) The use of analyzers;</P>
          <P>(ii) Program rules and regulations;</P>
          <P>(iii) The basics of air pollution control;</P>
          <P>(iv) Basic principles of motor vehicle engine repair, related to emission performance;</P>
          <P>(v) Emission control systems;</P>
          <P>(vi) Evidence gathering;</P>
          <P>(vii) State administrative procedures laws;</P>
          <P>(viii) Quality assurance practices; and</P>
          <P>(ix) Covert audit procedures.</P>
          <P>(2) Auditors shall themselves be audited at least once annually.</P>
          <P>(3) The training and knowledge requirements in paragraph (d)(1) of this section may be waived for temporary auditors engaged solely for the purpose of conducting covert vehicle runs.</P>
          <P>(e) <E T="03">SIP requirements.</E> The SIP shall include a description of the quality assurance program, and written procedures manuals covering both overt and covert performance audits, record audits, and equipment audits. This requirement does not include materials or discussion of details of enforcement <PRTPAGE P="210"/>strategies that would ultimately hamper the enforcement process.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.364</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Enforcement against contractors, stations and inspectors.</SUBJECT>
          <P>Enforcement against licensed stations or contractors, and inspectors shall include swift, sure, effective, and consistent penalties for violation of program requirements.</P>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Imposition of penalties.</E> A penalty schedule shall be developed that establishes minimum penalties for violations of program rules and procedures.</P>
          <P>(1) The schedule shall categorize and list violations and the minimum penalties to be imposed for first, second, and subsequent violations and for multiple violation of different requirements. In the case of contracted systems, the State may use compensation retainage in lieu of penalties.</P>
          <P>(2) Substantial penalties or retainage shall be imposed on the first offense for violations that directly affect emission reduction benefits. At a minimum, in test-and-repair programs inspector and station license suspension shall be imposed for at least 6 months whenever a vehicle is intentionally improperly passed for any required portion of the test. In test-only programs, inspectors shall be removed from inspector duty for at least 6 months (or a retainage penalty equivalent to the inspector's salary for that period shall be imposed).</P>
          <P>(3) All findings of serious violations of rules or procedural requirements shall result in mandatory fines or retainage. In the case of gross neglect, a first offense shall result in a fine or retainage of no less than $100 or 5 times the inspection fee, whichever is greater, for the contractor or the licensed station, and the inspector if involved.</P>
          <P>(4) Any finding of inspector incompetence shall result in mandatory training before inspection privileges are restored.</P>
          <P>(5) License or certificate suspension or revocation shall mean the individual is barred from direct or indirect involvement in any inspection operation during the term of the suspension or revocation.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Legal authority.</E> (1) The quality assurance officer shall have the authority to temporarily suspend station and inspector licenses or certificates (after approval of a superior) immediately upon finding a violation or equipment failure that directly affects emission reduction benefits, pending a hearing when requested. In the case of immediate suspension, a hearing shall be held within fourteen calendar days of a written request by the station licensee or the inspector. Failure to hold a hearing within 14 days when requested shall cause the suspension to lapse. In the event that a State's constitution precludes such a temporary license suspension, the enforcement system shall be designed with adequate resources and mechanisms to hold a hearing to suspend or revoke the station or inspector license within three station business days of the finding.</P>
          <P>(2) The oversight agency shall have the authority to impose penalties against the licensed station or contractor, as well as the inspector, even if the licensee or contractor had no direct knowledge of the violation but was found to be careless in oversight of inspectors or has a history of violations. Contractors and licensees shall be held fully responsible for inspector performance in the course of duty.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Recordkeeping.</E> The oversight agency shall maintain records of all warnings, civil fines, suspensions, revocations, and violations and shall compile statistics on violations and penalties on an annual basis.</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">SIP requirements.</E> (1) The SIP shall include the penalty schedule and the legal authority for establishing and imposing penalties, civil fines, license suspension, and revocations.</P>
          <P>(2) In the case of State constitutional impediments to immediate suspension authority, the State Attorney General shall furnish an official opinion for the SIP explaining the constitutional impediment as well as relevant case law.</P>

          <P>(3) The SIP shall describe the administrative and judicial procedures and responsibilities relevant to the enforcement process, including which agencies, courts, and jurisdictions are involved; who will prosecute and adjudicate cases; and other aspects of the enforcement of the program requirements, the resources to be allocated to this function, and the source of those funds. In States without immediate <PRTPAGE P="211"/>suspension authority, the SIP shall demonstrate that sufficient resources, personnel, and systems are in place to meet the three day case management requirement for violations that directly affect emission reductions.</P>
          <P>(e) Alternative quality assurance procedures or frequencies that achieve equivalent or better results may be approved by the Administrator. Statistical process control shall be used whenever possible to demonstrate the efficacy of alternatives.</P>
          <P>(f) Areas that qualify for and choose to implement an OTR low enhanced I/M program, as established in § 51.351(h), and that claim in their SIP less emission reduction credit than the basic performance standard for one or more pollutants, are not required to meet the oversight specifications of this section.</P>
          <CITA>[57 FR 52987, Nov. 5, 1992, as amended at 61 FR 39037, July 25, 1996]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.365</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Data collection.</SUBJECT>
          <P>Accurate data collection is essential to the management, evaluation, and enforcement of an I/M program. The program shall gather test data on individual vehicles, as well as quality control data on test equipment.</P>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Test data.</E> The goal of gathering test data is to unambiguously link specific test results to a specific vehicle, I/M program registrant, test site, and inspector, and to determine whether or not the correct testing parameters were observed for the specific vehicle in question. In turn, these data can be used to distinguish complying and noncomplying vehicles as a result of analyzing the data collected and comparing it to the registration database, to screen inspection stations and inspectors for investigation as to possible irregularities, and to help establish the overall effectiveness of the program. At a minimum, the program shall collect the following with respect to each test conducted:</P>
          <P>(1) Test record number;</P>
          <P>(2) Inspection station and inspector numbers;</P>
          <P>(3) Test system number;</P>
          <P>(4) Date of the test;</P>
          <P>(5) Emission test start time and the time final emission scores are determined;</P>
          <P>(6) Vehicle Identification Number;</P>
          <P>(7) License plate number;</P>
          <P>(8) Test certificate number;</P>
          <P>(9) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR);</P>
          <P>(10) Vehicle model year, make, and type;</P>
          <P>(11) Number of cylinders or engine displacement;</P>
          <P>(12) Transmission type;</P>
          <P>(13) Odometer reading;</P>
          <P>(14) Category of test performed (i.e., initial test, first retest, or subsequent retest);</P>
          <P>(15) Fuel type of the vehicle (i.e., gas, diesel, or other fuel);</P>
          <P>(16) Type of vehicle preconditioning performed (if any);</P>
          <P>(17) Emission test sequence(s) used;</P>
          <P>(18) Hydrocarbon emission scores and standards for each applicable test mode;</P>
          <P>(19) Carbon monoxide emission scores and standards for each applicable test mode;</P>
          <P>(20) Carbon dioxide emission scores (CO+CO<E T="52">2</E>) and standards for each applicable test mode;</P>
          <P>(21) Nitrogen oxides emission scores and standards for each applicable test mode;</P>
          <P>(22) Results (Pass/Fail/Not Applicable) of the applicable visual inspections for the catalytic converter, air system, gas cap, evaporative system, positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve, fuel inlet restrictor, and any other visual inspection for which emission reduction credit is claimed;</P>
          <P>(23) Results of the evaporative system pressure test expressed as a pass or fail;</P>
          <P>(24) Results of the evaporative system purge test expressed as a pass or fail along with the total purge flow in liters achieved during the test; and</P>
          <P>(25) Results of the on-board diagnostic check expressed as a pass or fail along with the diagnostic trouble codes revealed.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Quality control data.</E> At a minimum, the program shall gather and report the results of the quality control checks required under § 51.359 of this subpart, identifying each check by station number, system number, date, and start time. The data report shall also contain the concentration values of the calibration gases used to perform the <PRTPAGE P="212"/>gas characterization portion of the quality control checks.</P>
          <CITA>[ 57 FR 52987, Nov. 5, 1992, as amended at 61 FR 40945, Aug. 6, 1996]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.366</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Data analysis and reporting.</SUBJECT>
          <P>Data analysis and reporting are required to allow for monitoring and evaluation of the program by program management and EPA, and shall provide information regarding the types of program activities performed and their final outcomes, including summary statistics and effectiveness evaluations of the enforcement mechanism, the quality assurance system, the quality control program, and the testing element. Initial submission of the following annual reports shall commence within 18 months of initial implementation of the program as required by § 51.373 of this subpart. The biennial report shall commence within 30 months of initial implementation of the program as required by § 51.373 of this subpart.</P>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Test data report.</E> The program shall submit to EPA by July of each year a report providing basic statistics on the testing program for January through December of the previous year, including:</P>
          <P>(1) The number of vehicles tested by model year and vehicle type;</P>
          <P>(2) By model year and vehicle type, the number and percentage of vehicles:</P>
          <P>(i) Failing the emissions test initially;</P>
          <P>(ii) Failing each emission control component check initially;</P>
          <P>(iii) Failing the evaporative system functional and integrity checks initially;</P>
          <P>(iv) Failing the first retest for tailpipe emissions;</P>
          <P>(v) Passing the first retest for tailpipe emissions;</P>
          <P>(vi) Initially failed vehicles passing the second or subsequent retest for tailpipe emissions;</P>
          <P>(vii) Initially failed vehicles passing each emission control component check on the first or subsequent retest by component;</P>
          <P>(viii) Initially failed vehicles passing the evaporative system functional and integrity checks on the first or subsequent retest by component;</P>
          <P>(ix) Initially failed vehicles receiving a waiver;</P>
          <P>(x) Vehicles with no known final outcome (regardless of reason);</P>
          <P>(xi) Passing the on-board diagnostic check and failing the I/M emission test;</P>
          <P>(xii) Failing the on-board diagnostic check and passing the I/M emission test;</P>
          <P>(xiii) Passing both the on-board diagnostic check and I/M emission test;</P>
          <P>(xiv) Failing both the on-board diagnostic check and I/M emission test;</P>
          <P>(xv) Passing the on-board diagnostic check and failing the I/M evaporative test;</P>
          <P>(xvi) Failing the on-board diagnostic check and passing the I/M evaporative test;</P>
          <P>(xvii) Passing both the on-board diagnostic check and I/M evaporative test;</P>
          <P>(xviii) Failing both the on-board diagnostic check and I/M evaporative test;</P>
          <P>(xix) MIL is commanded on and no codes are stored;</P>
          <P>(xx) MIL is not commanded on and codes are stored;</P>
          <P>(xxi) MIL is commanded on and codes are stored;</P>
          <P>(xxii) MIL is not commanded on and codes are not stored;</P>
          <P>(xxiii) Readiness status indicates that the evaluation is not complete for any module supported by on-board diagnostic systems;</P>
          <P>(3) The initial test volume by model year and test station;</P>
          <P>(4) The initial test failure rate by model year and test station; and</P>

          <P>(5) The average increase or decrease in tailpipe emission levels for HC, CO, and NO<E T="52">X</E> (if applicable) after repairs by model year and vehicle type for vehicles receiving a mass emissions test.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Quality assurance report.</E> The program shall submit to EPA by July of each year a report providing basic statistics on the quality assurance program for January through December of the previous year, including:</P>
          <P>(1) The number of inspection stations and lanes:</P>
          <P>(i) Operating throughout the year; and</P>
          <P>(ii) Operating for only part of the year;<PRTPAGE P="213"/>
          </P>
          <P>(2) The number of inspection stations and lanes operating throughout the year:</P>
          <P>(i) Receiving overt performance audits in the year;</P>
          <P>(ii) Not receiving overt performance audits in the year;</P>
          <P>(iii) Receiving covert performance audits in the year;</P>
          <P>(iv) Not receiving covert performance audits in the year; and</P>
          <P>(v) That have been shut down as a result of overt performance audits;</P>
          <P>(3) The number of covert audits:</P>
          <P>(i) Conducted with the vehicle set to fail the emission test;</P>
          <P>(ii) Conducted with the vehicle set to fail the component check;</P>
          <P>(iii) Conducted with the vehicle set to fail the evaporative system checks;</P>
          <P>(iv) Conducted with the vehicle set to fail any combination of two or more of the above checks;</P>
          <P>(v) Resulting in a false pass for emissions;</P>
          <P>(vi) Resulting in a false pass for component checks;</P>
          <P>(vii) Resulting in a false pass for the evaporative system check; and</P>
          <P>(viii) Resulting in a false pass for any combination of two or more of the above checks;</P>
          <P>(4) The number of inspectors and stations:</P>
          <P>(i) That were suspended, fired, or otherwise prohibited from testing as a result of covert audits;</P>
          <P>(ii) That were suspended, fired, or otherwise prohibited from testing for other causes; and</P>
          <P>(iii) That received fines;</P>
          <P>(5) The number of inspectors licensed or certified to conduct testing;</P>
          <P>(6) The number of hearings:</P>
          <P>(i) Held to consider adverse actions against inspectors and stations; and</P>
          <P>(ii) Resulting in adverse actions against inspectors and stations;</P>
          <P>(7) The total amount collected in fines from inspectors and stations by type of violation;</P>
          <P>(8) The total number of covert vehicles available for undercover audits over the year; and</P>
          <P>(9) The number of covert auditors available for undercover audits.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Quality control report.</E> The program shall submit to EPA by July of each year a report providing basic statistics on the quality control program for January through December of the previous year, including:</P>
          <P>(1) The number of emission testing sites and lanes in use in the program;</P>
          <P>(2) The number of equipment audits by station and lane;</P>
          <P>(3) The number and percentage of stations that have failed equipment audits; and</P>
          <P>(4) Number and percentage of stations and lanes shut down as a result of equipment audits.</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">Enforcement report.</E> (1) All varieties of enforcement programs shall, at a minimum, submit to EPA by July of each year a report providing basic statistics on the enforcement program for January through December of the previous year, including:</P>
          <P>(i) An estimate of the number of vehicles subject to the inspection program, including the results of an analysis of the registration data base;</P>
          <P>(ii) The percentage of motorist compliance based upon a comparison of the number of valid final tests with the number of subject vehicles;</P>
          <P>(iii) The total number of compliance documents issued to inspection stations;</P>
          <P>(iv) The number of missing compliance documents;</P>
          <P>(v) The number of time extensions and other exemptions granted to motorists; and</P>
          <P>(vi) The number of compliance surveys conducted, number of vehicles surveyed in each, and the compliance rates found.</P>
          <P>(2) Registration denial based enforcement programs shall provide the following additional information:</P>
          <P>(i) A report of the program's efforts and actions to prevent motorists from falsely registering vehicles out of the program area or falsely changing fuel type or weight class on the vehicle registration, and the results of special studies to investigate the frequency of such activity; and</P>
          <P>(ii) The number of registration file audits, number of registrations reviewed, and compliance rates found in such audits.</P>

          <P>(3) Computer-matching based enforcement programs shall provide the following additional information:<PRTPAGE P="214"/>
          </P>
          <P>(i) The number and percentage of subject vehicles that were tested by the initial deadline, and by other milestones in the cycle;</P>
          <P>(ii) A report on the program's efforts to detect and enforce against motorists falsely changing vehicle classifications to circumvent program requirements, and the frequency of this type of activity; and</P>
          <P>(iii) The number of enforcement system audits, and the error rate found during those audits.</P>
          <P>(4) Sticker-based enforcement systems shall provide the following additional information:</P>
          <P>(i) A report on the program's efforts to prevent, detect, and enforce against sticker theft and counterfeiting, and the frequency of this type of activity;</P>
          <P>(ii) A report on the program's efforts to detect and enforce against motorists falsely changing vehicle classifications to circumvent program requirements, and the frequency of this type of activity; and</P>
          <P>(iii) The number of parking lot sticker audits conducted, the number of vehicles surveyed in each, and the noncompliance rate found during those audits.</P>
          <P>(e) <E T="03">Additional reporting requirements.</E> In addition to the annual reports in paragraphs (a) through (d) of this section, programs shall submit to EPA by July of every other year, biennial reports addressing:</P>
          <P>(1) Any changes made in program design, funding, personnel levels, procedures, regulations, and legal authority, with detailed discussion and evaluation of the impact on the program of all such changes; and</P>
          <P>(2) Any weaknesses or problems identified in the program within the two-year reporting period, what steps have already been taken to correct those problems, the results of those steps, and any future efforts planned.</P>
          <P>(f) <E T="03">SIP requirements.</E> The SIP shall describe the types of data to be collected.</P>
          <CITA>[ 57 FR 52987, Nov. 5, 1992, as amended at 61 FR 40945, Aug. 6, 1996]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.367</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Inspector training and licensing or certification.</SUBJECT>
          <P>All inspectors shall receive formal training and be licensed or certified to perform inspections.</P>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Training.</E> (1) Inspector training shall impart knowledge of the following:</P>
          <P>(i) The air pollution problem, its causes and effects;</P>
          <P>(ii) The purpose, function, and goal of the inspection program;</P>
          <P>(iii) Inspection regulations and procedures;</P>
          <P>(iv) Technical details of the test procedures and the rationale for their design;</P>
          <P>(v) Emission control device function, configuration, and inspection;</P>
          <P>(vi) Test equipment operation, calibration, and maintenance;</P>
          <P>(vii) Quality control procedures and their purpose;</P>
          <P>(viii) Public relations; and</P>
          <P>(ix) Safety and health issues related to the inspection process.</P>
          <P>(2) If inspector training is not administered by the program, the responsible State agency shall monitor and evaluate the training program delivery.</P>
          <P>(3) In order to complete the training requirement, a trainee shall pass (i.e., a minimum of 80% of correct responses or lower if an occupational analysis justifies it) a written test covering all aspects of the training. In addition, a hands-on test shall be administered in which the trainee demonstrates without assistance the ability to conduct a proper inspection, to properly utilize equipment and to follow other procedures. Inability to properly conduct all test procedures shall constitute failure of the test. The program shall take appropriate steps to insure the security and integrity of the testing process.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Licensing and certification.</E> (1) All inspectors shall be either licensed by the program (in the case of test-and-repair systems that do not use contracts with stations) or certified by an organization other than the employer (in test-only programs and test-and-repair programs that require station owners to enter into contracts with the State) in order to perform official inspections.</P>
          <P>(2) Completion of inspector training and passing required tests shall be a condition of licensing or certification.</P>

          <P>(3) Inspector licenses and certificates shall be valid for no more than 2 years, at which point refresher training and testing shall be required prior to renewal. Alternative approaches based on <PRTPAGE P="215"/>more comprehensive skill examination and determination of inspector competency may be used.</P>
          <P>(4) Licenses or certificates shall not be considered a legal right but rather a privilege bestowed by the program conditional upon adherence to program requirements.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">SIP requirements.</E> The SIP shall include a description of the training program, the written and hands-on tests, and the licensing or certification process.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.368</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Public information and consumer protection.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Public awareness.</E> The SIP shall include a plan for informing the public on an ongoing basis throughout the life of the I/M program of the air quality problem, the requirements of Federal and State law, the role of motor vehicles in the air quality problem, the need for and benefits of an inspection program, how to maintain a vehicle in a low-emission condition, how to find a qualified repair technician, and the requirements of the I/M program. Motorists that fail the I/M test in enhanced I/M areas shall be offered a list of repair facilities in the area and information on the results of repairs performed by repair facilities in the area, as described in § 51.369(b)(1) of this subpart. Motorists that fail the I/M test shall also be provided with software-generated, interpretive diagnostic information based on the particular portions of the test that were failed.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Consumer protection.</E> The oversight agency shall institute procedures and mechanisms to protect the public from fraud and abuse by inspectors, mechanics, and others involved in the I/M program. This shall include a challenge mechanism by which a vehicle owner can contest the results of an inspection. It shall include mechanisms for protecting whistle blowers and following up on complaints by the public or others involved in the process. It shall include a program to assist owners in obtaining warranty covered repairs for eligible vehicles that fail a test. The SIP shall include a detailed consumer protection plan.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.369</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Improving repair effectiveness.</SUBJECT>
          <P>Effective repairs are the key to achieving program goals and the State shall take steps to ensure the capability exists in the repair industry to repair vehicles that fail I/M tests.</P>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Technical assistance.</E> The oversight agency shall provide the repair industry with information and assistance related to vehicle inspection diagnosis and repair.</P>
          <P>(1) The agency shall regularly inform repair facilities of changes in the inspection program, training course schedules, common problems being found with particular engine families, diagnostic tips and the like.</P>
          <P>(2) The agency shall provide a hot line service to assist repair technicians with specific repair problems, answer technical questions that arise in the repair process, and answer questions related to the legal requirements of State and Federal law with regard to emission control device tampering, engine switching, or similar issues.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Performance monitoring.</E> (1) In enhanced I/M program areas, the oversight agency shall monitor the performance of individual motor vehicle repair facilities, and provide to the public at the time of initial failure, a summary of the performance of local repair facilities that have repaired vehicles for retest. Performance monitoring shall include statistics on the number of vehicles submitted for a retest after repair by the repair facility, the percentage passing on first retest, the percentage requiring more than one repair/retest trip before passing, and the percentage receiving a waiver. Programs may provide motorists with alternative statistics that convey similar information on the relative ability of repair facilities in providing effective and convenient repair, in light of the age and other characteristics of vehicles presented for repair at each facility.</P>
          <P>(2) Programs shall provide feedback, including statistical and qualitative information to individual repair facilities on a regular basis (at least annually) regarding their success in repairing failed vehicles.</P>

          <P>(3) A prerequisite for a retest shall be a completed repair form that indicates <PRTPAGE P="216"/>which repairs were performed, as well as any technician recommended repairs that were not performed, and identification of the facility that performed the repairs.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Repair technician training.</E> The State shall assess the availability of adequate repair technician training in the I/M area and, if the types of training described in paragraphs (c)(1) through (4) of this section are not currently available, shall insure that training is made available to all interested individuals in the community either through private or public facilities. This may involve working with local community colleges or vocational schools to add curricula to existing programs or start new programs or it might involve attracting private training providers to offer classes in the area. The training available shall include:</P>
          <P>(1) Diagnosis and repair of malfunctions in computer controlled, close-loop vehicles;</P>
          <P>(2) The application of emission control theory and diagnostic data to the diagnosis and repair of failures on the transient emission test and the evaporative system functional checks;</P>
          <P>(3) Utilization of diagnostic information on systematic or repeated failures observed in the transient emission test and the evaporative system functional checks; and</P>
          <P>(4) General training on the various subsystems related to engine emission control.</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">SIP requirements.</E> The SIP shall include a description of the technical assistance program to be implemented, a description of the procedures and criteria to be used in meeting the performance monitoring requirements of this section, and a description of the repair technician training resources available in the community.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.370</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Compliance with recall notices.</SUBJECT>
          <P>States shall establish methods to ensure that vehicles subject to enhanced I/M and that are included in either a “Voluntary Emissions Recall” as defined at 40 CFR 85.1902(d), or in a remedial plan determination made pursuant to section 207(c) of the Act, receive the required repairs. States shall require that owners of recalled vehicles have the necessary recall repairs completed, either in order to complete an annual or biennial inspection process or to obtain vehicle registration renewal. All recalls for which owner notification occurs after January 1, 1995 shall be included in the enhanced I/M recall requirement.</P>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">General requirements.</E> (1) The State shall have an electronic means to identify recalled vehicles based on lists of VINs with unresolved recalls made available by EPA, the vehicle manufacturers, or a third party supplier approved by the Administrator. The State shall update its list of unresolved recalls on a quarterly basis at a minimum.</P>
          <P>(2) The State shall require owners or lessees of vehicles with unresolved recalls to show proof of compliance with recall notices in order to complete either the inspection or registration cycle.</P>
          <P>(3) Compliance shall be required on the next registration or inspection date, allowing a reasonable period to comply, after notification of recall was received by the State.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Enforcement.</E> (1) A vehicle shall either fail inspection or be denied vehicle registration if the required recall repairs have not been completed.</P>
          <P>(2) In the case of vehicles obtaining recall repairs but remaining on the updated list provided in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, the State shall have a means of verifying completion of the required repairs; electronic records or paper receipts provided by the authorized repair facility shall be required. The vehicle inspection or registration record shall be modified to include (or be supplemented with other VIN-linked records which include) the recall campaign number(s) and the date(s) repairs were performed. Documentation verifying required repairs shall include the following:</P>
          <P>(i) The VIN, make, and model year of the vehicle; and</P>
          <P>(ii) The recall campaign number and the date repairs were completed.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Reporting requirements.</E> The State shall submit to EPA, by July of each year for the previous calendar year, an annual report providing the following information:<PRTPAGE P="217"/>
          </P>
          <P>(1) The number of vehicles in the I/M area initially listed as having unresolved recalls, segregated by recall campaign number;</P>
          <P>(2) The number of recalled vehicles brought into compliance by owners;</P>
          <P>(3) The number of listed vehicles with unresolved recalls that, as of the end of the calendar year, were not yet due for inspection or registration;</P>
          <P>(4) The number of recalled vehicles still in non-compliance that have either failed inspection or been denied registration on the basis of non-compliance with recall; and</P>
          <P>(5) The number of recalled vehicles that are otherwise not in compliance.</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">SIP submittals.</E> The SIP shall describe the procedures used to incorporate the vehicle lists provided in paragraph (a)(1) of this section into the inspection or registration database, the quality control methods used to insure that recall repairs are properly documented and tracked, and the method (inspection failure or registration denial) used to enforce the recall requirements.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.371</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>On-road testing.</SUBJECT>

          <P>On-road testing is defined as the measurement of HC, CO, NO<E T="52">X,</E> and/or CO<E T="52">2</E> emissions on any road or roadside in the nonattainment area or the I/M program area. On-road testing is required in enhanced I/M areas and is an option for basic I/M areas.</P>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">General requirements.</E> (1) On-road testing is to be part of the emission testing system, but is to be a complement to testing otherwise required.</P>
          <P>(2) On-road testing is not required in every season or on every vehicle but shall evaluate the emission performance of 0.5% of the subject fleet statewide or 20,000 vehicles, whichever is less, including any vehicles that may be subject to the follow-up inspection provisions of paragraph (a)(4) of this section, each inspection cycle.</P>
          <P>(3) The on-road testing program shall provide information about the emission performance of in-use vehicles, by measuring on-road emissions through the use of remote sensing devices or roadside pullovers including tailpipe emission testing. The program shall collect, analyze and report on-road testing data.</P>
          <P>(4) Owners of vehicles that have previously been through the normal periodic inspection and passed the final retest and found to be high emitters shall be notified that the vehicles are required to pass an out-of-cycle follow-up inspection; notification may be by mailing in the case of remote sensing on-road testing or through immediate notification if roadside pullovers are used.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">SIP requirements.</E> (1) The SIP shall include a detailed description of the on-road testing program, including the types of testing, test limits and criteria, the number of vehicles (the percentage of the fleet) to be tested, the number of employees to be dedicated to the on-road testing effort, the methods for collecting, analyzing, utilizing, and reporting the results of on-road testing and, the portion of the program budget to be dedicated to on-road testing.</P>
          <P>(2) The SIP shall include the legal authority necessary to implement the on-road testing program, including the authority to enforce off-cycle inspection and repair requirements.</P>
          <P>(3) Emission reduction credit for on-road testing programs shall be granted for a program designed to obtain significant emission reductions over and above those already predicted to be achieved by other aspects of the I/M program. The SIP shall include technical support for the claimed additional emission reductions.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.372</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>State Implementation Plan submissions.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">SIP submittals.</E> The SIP shall address each of the elements covered in this subpart, including, but not limited to:</P>
          <P>(1) A schedule of implementation of the program including interim milestones leading to mandatory testing. The milestones shall include, at a minimum:</P>
          <P>(i) Passage of enabling statutory or other legal authority;</P>
          <P>(ii) Proposal of draft regulations and promulgation of final regulations;</P>
          <P>(iii) Issuance of final specifications and procedures;</P>
          <P>(iv) Issuance of final Request for Proposals (if applicable);</P>

          <P>(v) Licensing or certifications of stations and inspectors;<PRTPAGE P="218"/>
          </P>
          <P>(vi) The date mandatory testing will begin for each model year to be covered by the program;</P>
          <P>(vii) The date full-stringency cutpoints will take effect;</P>
          <P>(viii) All other relevant dates;</P>
          <P>(2) An analysis of emission level targets for the program using the most current EPA mobile source emission model or an alternative approved by the Administrator showing that the program meets the performance standard described in § 51.351 or § 51.352 of this subpart, as applicable;</P>
          <P>(3) A description of the geographic coverage of the program, including ZIP codes if the program is not county-wide;</P>
          <P>(4) A detailed discussion of each of the required design elements, including provisions for Federal facility compliance;</P>
          <P>(5) Legal authority requiring or allowing implementation of the I/M program and providing either broad or specific authority to perform all required elements of the program;</P>
          <P>(6) Legal authority for I/M program operation until such time as it is no longer necessary (i.e., until a Section 175 maintenance plan without an I/M program is approved by EPA);</P>
          <P>(7) Implementing regulations, interagency agreements, and memoranda of understanding; and</P>
          <P>(8) Evidence of adequate funding and resources to implement all aspects of the program.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Submittal schedule.</E> The SIP shall be submitted to EPA according to the following schedule—</P>
          <P>(1) States shall submit a SIP revision by November 15, 1992 which includes the schedule required in paragraph (a)(1) of this section and a formal commitment from the Governor to the adoption and implementation of an I/M program meeting all requirements of this subpart.</P>
          <P>(2) A SIP revision, including all necessary legal authority and the items specified in (a)(1) through (a)(8) of this section, shall be submitted no later than November 15, 1993.</P>
          <P>(3) States shall revise SIPS as EPA develops further regulations. Revisions to incorporate on-board diagnostic checks in the I/M program shall be submitted by August 6, 1998.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Redesignation requests.</E> Any nonattainment area that EPA determines would otherwise qualify for redesignation from nonattainment to attainment shall receive full approval of a State Implementation Plan (SIP) submittal under Sections 182(a)(2)(B) or 182(b)(4) if the submittal contains the following elements:</P>
          <P>(1) Legal authority to implement a basic I/M program (or enhanced if the State chooses to opt up) as required by this subpart. The legislative authority for an I/M program shall allow the adoption of implementing regulations without requiring further legislation.</P>
          <P>(2) A request to place the I/M plan (if no I/M program is currently in place or if an I/M program has been terminated,) or the I/M upgrade (if the existing I/M program is to continue without being upgraded) into the contingency measures portion of the maintenance plan upon redesignation.</P>
          <P>(3) A contingency measure consisting of a commitment by the Governor or the Governor's designee to adopt or consider adopting regulations to implement an I/M program to correct a violation of the ozone or CO standard or other air quality problem, in accordance with the provisions of the maintenance plan.</P>
          <P>(4) A contingency commitment that includes an enforceable schedule for adoption and implementation of the I/M program, and appropriate milestones. The schedule shall include the date for submission of a SIP meeting all of the requirements of this subpart. Schedule milestones shall be listed in months from the date EPA notifies the State that it is in violation of the ozone or CO standard or any earlier date specified in the State plan. Unless the State, in accordance with the provisions of the maintenance plan, chooses not to implement I/M, it must submit a SIP revision containing an I/M program no more than 18 months after notification by EPA.</P>

          <P>(d) Basic areas continuing operation of I/M programs as part of their maintenance plan without implemented upgrades shall be assumed to be 80% as effective as an implemented, upgraded version of the same I/M program design, unless a State can demonstrate using operating information that the I/<PRTPAGE P="219"/>M program is more effective than the 80% level.</P>
          <P>(e) <E T="03">SIP submittals to correct violations.</E> SIP submissions required pursuant to a violation of the ambient ozone or CO standard (as discussed in paragraph (c) of this section) shall address all of the requirements of this subpart. The SIP shall demonstrate that performance standards in either § 51.351 or § 51.352 shall be met using an evaluation date (rounded to the nearest January for carbon monoxide and July for hydrocarbons) seven years after the date EPA notifies the State that it is in violation of the ozone or CO standard or any earlier date specified in the State plan. Emission standards for vehicles subject to an IM240 test may be phased in during the program but full standards must be in effect for at least one complete test cycle before the end of the 5-year period. All other requirements shall take effect within 24 months of the date EPA notifies the State that it is in violation of the ozone or CO standard or any earlier date specified in the State plan. The phase-in allowances of § 51.373(c) of this subpart shall not apply.</P>
          <CITA>[57 FR 52987, Nov. 5, 1992, as amended at 60 FR 1738, Jan. 5, 1995; 60 FR 48036, Sept. 18, 1995; 61 FR 40946, Aug. 6, 1996; 61 FR 44119, Aug. 27, 1996]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.373</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Implementation deadlines.</SUBJECT>
          <P>I/M programs shall be implemented as expeditiously as practicable.</P>
          <P>(a) Decentralized basic programs shall be fully implemented by January 1, 1994, and centralized basic programs shall be fully implemented by July 1, 1994. More implementation time may be approved by the Administrator if an enhanced I/M program is implemented.</P>
          <P>(b) For areas newly required to implement basic I/M after promulgation of this subpart (as a result of failure to attain, reclassification, or redesignation) decentralized programs shall be fully implemented within one year of obtaining legal authority. Centralized programs shall be fully implemented within two years of obtaining legal authority. More implementation time may be approved by the Administrator if an enhanced I/M program is implemented.</P>
          <P>(c) All requirements related to enhanced I/M programs shall be implemented by January 1, 1995, with the following exceptions.</P>
          <P>(1) Areas switching from an existing test-and-repair network to a test-only network may phase in the change between January of 1995 and January of 1996. Starting in January of 1995 at least 30% of the subject vehicles shall participate in the test-only system (in States with multiple I/M areas, implementation is not required in every area by January 1995 as long as statewide, 30% of the subject vehicles are involved in testing) and shall be subject to the new test procedures (including the evaporative system checks, visual inspections, and tailpipe emission tests). By January 1, 1996, all applicable vehicle model years and types shall be included in the test-only system. During the phase-in period, all requirements of this subpart shall be applied to the test-only portion of the program; existing requirements may continue to apply for the test-and-repair portion of the program until it is phased out by January 1, 1996.</P>
          <P>(2) Areas starting new test-only programs and those with existing test-only programs may also phase in the new test procedures between January 1, 1995 and January 1, 1996. Other program requirements shall be fully implemented by January 1, 1995.</P>
          <P>(d) In the case of areas newly required to implement enhanced I/M after promulgation of this subpart (as a result of failure to attain, reclassification, or nonattainment designation) enhanced I/M shall be implemented within 24 months of obtaining legal authority.</P>
          <P>(e) Legal authority for the implementing agency or agencies to implement and enforce an I/M program consistent with this subpart shall be obtained from the State legislature or local governing body in the first legislative session after November 5, 1992, or after being newly required to implement or upgrade an I/M program as in paragraph (b) or (c) of this section, including sessions already in progress if at least 21 days remain before the final bill submittal deadline.</P>

          <P>(f) Areas that choose to implement an enhanced I/M program only meeting <PRTPAGE P="220"/>the requirements of § 51.351(h) shall fully implement the program no later than July 1, 1999. The availability and use of this late start date does not relieve the area of the obligation to meet the requirements of § 51.351(h)(11) by the end of 1999.</P>
          <P>(g) On-Board Diagnostic checks shall be implemented in all basic, low enhanced and high enhanced areas as part of the I/M program by January 1, 2001.</P>
          <CITA>[57 FR 52987, Nov. 5, 1992, as amended at 58 FR 59367, Nov. 9, 1993; 61 FR 39037, July 25, 1996; 61 FR 40946, Aug. 6, 1996; 63 FR 24433, May 4, 1998]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
        <APPENDIX>
          <EAR>Pt. 51, Subpt. S, App. A</EAR>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Appendix A to Subpart S—Calibrations, Adjustments and Quality Control</HD>
          <HD SOURCE="HD2">(I) Steady-State Test Equipment</HD>
          <P>States may opt to use transient emission test equipment for steady-state tests and follow the quality control requirements in paragraph (II) of this appendix instead of the following requirements.</P>
          <P>(a) Equipment shall be calibrated in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Prior to each test.</E> (1) <E T="03">Hydrocarbon hang-up check.</E> Immediately prior to each test the analyzer shall automatically perform a hydrocarbon hang-up check. If the HC reading, when the probe is sampling ambient air, exceeds 20 ppm, the system shall be purged with clean air or zero gas. The analyzer shall be inhibited from continuing the test until HC levels drop below 20 ppm.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Automatic zero and span.</E> The analyzer shall conduct an automatic zero and span check prior to each test. The span check shall include the HC, CO, and CO2 channels, and the NO and O<E T="52">2</E> channels, if present. If zero and/or span drift cause the signal levels to move beyond the adjustment range of the analyzer, it shall lock out from testing.</P>
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Low flow.</E> The system shall lock out from testing if sample flow is below the acceptable level as defined in paragraph (I)(b)(6) of appendix D to this subpart.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Leak check.</E> A system leak check shall be performed within twenty-four hours before the test in low volume stations (those performing less than the 4,000 inspections per year) and within four hours in high-volume stations (4,000 or more inspections per year) and may be performed in conjunction with the gas calibration described in paragraph (I)(d)(1) of this appendix. If a leak check is not performed within the preceding twenty-four hours in low volume stations and within four hours in high-volume stations or if the analyzer fails the leak check, the analyzer shall lock out from testing. The leak check shall be a procedure demonstrated to effectively check the sample hose and probe for leaks and shall be performed in accordance with good engineering practices. An error of more than <E T="61">±</E>2% of the reading using low range span gas shall cause the analyzer to lock out from testing and shall require repair of leaks.</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">Gas calibration.</E> (1) On each operating day in high-volume stations, analyzers shall automatically require and successfully pass a two-point gas calibration for HC, CO, and CO2 and shall continually compensate for changes in barometric pressure. Calibration shall be checked within four hours before the test and the analyzer adjusted if the reading is more than 2% different from the span gas value. In low-volume stations, analyzers shall undergo a two-point calibration within seventy-two hours before each test, unless changes in barometric pressure are compensated for automatically and statistical process control demonstrates equal or better quality control using different frequencies. Gas calibration shall be accomplished by introducing span gas that meets the requirements of paragraph (I)(d)(3) of this appendix into the analyzer through the calibration port. If the analyzer reads the span gas within the allowable tolerance range (i.e., the square root of sum of the squares of the span gas tolerance described in paragraph (I)(d)(3) of this appendix and the calibration tolerance, which shall be equal to 2%), no adjustment of the analyzer is necessary. The gas calibration procedure shall correct readings that exceed the allowable tolerance range to the center of the allowable tolerance range. The pressure in the sample cell shall be the same with the calibration gas flowing during calibration as with the sample gas flowing during sampling. If the system is not calibrated, or the system fails the calibration check, the analyzer shall lock out from testing.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Span points.</E> A two point gas calibration procedure shall be followed. The span shall be accomplished at one of the following pairs of span points:
          </P>
          <FP SOURCE="FP-2">(A) 300—ppm propane (HC)</FP>
          <FP SOURCE="FP1-2">1.0—% carbon monoxide (CO)</FP>
          <FP SOURCE="FP1-2">6.0—% carbon dioxide (CO2)</FP>
          <FP SOURCE="FP1-2">1000—ppm nitric oxide (if equipped with NO)</FP>
          <FP SOURCE="FP1-2">1200—ppm propane (HC)</FP>
          <FP SOURCE="FP1-2">4.0—% carbon monoxide (CO)</FP>
          <FP SOURCE="FP1-2">12.0—% carbon dioxide (CO2)</FP>
          <FP SOURCE="FP1-2">3000—ppm nitric oxide (if equipped with NO)</FP>
          <FP SOURCE="FP-2">(B) —ppm propane</FP>
          <FP SOURCE="FP1-2">0.0—% carbon monoxide</FP>
          <FP SOURCE="FP1-2">0.0—% carbon dioxide</FP>
          <FP SOURCE="FP1-2">0—ppm nitric oxide (if equipped with NO)</FP>
          <FP SOURCE="FP1-2">600—ppm propane (HC)</FP>
          <FP SOURCE="FP1-2">1.6—% carbon monoxide (CO)</FP>
          <FP SOURCE="FP1-2">11.0—% carbon dioxide (CO2)<PRTPAGE P="221"/>
          </FP>
          <FP SOURCE="FP1-2">1200—ppm nitric oxide (if equipped with NO)</FP>
          
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Span gases.</E> The span gases used for the gas calibration shall be traceable to National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) standards <E T="61">±</E>2%, and shall be within two percent of the span points specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this appendix. Zero gases shall conform to the specifications given in § 86.114-79(a)(5) of this chapter.</P>
          <P>(e) <E T="03">Dynamometer checks</E>—(1) <E T="03">Monthly check.</E> Within one month preceding each loaded test, the accuracy of the roll speed indicator shall be verified and the dynamometer shall be checked for proper power absorber settings.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Semi-annual check.</E> Within six months preceding each loaded test, the road-load response of the variable-curve dynamometer or the frictional power absorption of the dynamometer shall be checked by a coast down procedure similar to that described in § 86.118-78 of this chapter. The check shall be done at 30 mph, and a power absorption load setting to generate a total horsepower (hp) of 4.1 hp. The actual coast down time from 45 mph to 15 mph shall be within <E T="61">±</E>1 second of the time calculated by the following equation:</P>
          <MATH DEEP="27" SPAN="1">
            <MID>EC08NO91.014</MID>
          </MATH>
          <FP>where W is the total inertia weight as represented by the weight of the rollers (excluding free rollers), and any inertia flywheels used, measured in pounds. If the coast down time is not within the specified tolerance the dynamometer shall be taken out of service and corrective action shall be taken.</FP>
          <P>(f) <E T="03">Other checks.</E> In addition to the above periodic checks, these shall also be used to verify system performance under the following special circumstances.</P>
          <P>(1) <E T="03">Gas Calibration.</E> (A) Each time the analyzer electronic or optical systems are repaired or replaced, a gas calibration shall be performed prior to returning the unit to service.</P>
          <P>(B) In high-volume stations, monthly multi-point calibrations shall be performed. Low-volume stations shall perform multi-point calibrations every six months. The calibration curve shall be checked at 20%, 40%, 60%, and 80% of full scale and adjusted or repaired if the specifications in appendix D(I)(b)(1) to this subpart are not met.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Leak checks.</E> Each time the sample line integrity is broken, a leak check shall be performed prior to testing.</P>
          <HD SOURCE="HD2">(II) Transient Test Equipment</HD>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Dynamometer.</E> Once per week, the calibration of each dynamometer and each fly wheel shall be checked by a dynamometer coast-down procedure comparable to that in § 86.118-78 of this chapter between the speeds of 55 to 45 mph, and between 30 to 20 mph. All rotating dynamometer components shall be included in the coast-down check for the inertia weight selected. For dynamometers with uncoupled rolls, the uncoupled rollers may undergo a separate coast-down check. If a vehicle is used to motor the dynamometer to the beginning coast-down speed, the vehicle shall be lifted off the dynamometer rolls before the coast-down test begins. If the difference between the measured coast-down time and the theoretical coast-down time is greater than +1 second, the system shall lock out, until corrective action brings the dynamometer into calibration.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Constant volume sampler.</E> (1) The constant volume sampler (CVS) flow calibration shall be checked daily by a procedure that identifies deviations in flow from the true value. Deviations greater than <E T="61">±</E>4% shall be corrected.</P>
          <P>(2) The sample probe shall be cleaned and checked at least once per month. The main CVS venturi shall be cleaned and checked at least once per year.</P>
          <P>(3) Verification that flow through the sample probe is adequate for the design shall be done daily. Deviations greater than the design tolerances shall be corrected.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Analyzer system</E> —(1) <E T="03">Calibration checks.</E> (A) Upon initial operation, calibration curves shall be generated for each analyzer. The calibration curve shall consider the entire range of the analyzer as one curve. At least 6 calibration points plus zero shall be used in the lower portion of the range corresponding to an average concentration of approximately 2 gpm for HC, 30 gpm for CO, 3 gpm for NO<E T="52">X,</E> and 400 gpm for CO<E T="52">2.</E> For the case where a low and a high range analyzer is used, the high range analyzer shall use at least 6 calibration points plus zero in the lower portion of the high range scale corresponding to approximately 100% of the full-scale value of the low range analyzer. For all analyzers, at least 6 calibration points shall also be used to define the calibration curve in the region above the 6 lower calibration points. Gas dividers may be used to obtain the intermediate points for the general range classifications specified. The calibration curves generated shall be a polynomial of no greater order than 4th order, and shall fit the date within 0.5% at each calibration point.</P>
          <P>(B) For all calibration curves, curve checks, span adjustments, and span checks, the zero gas shall be considered a down-scale reference gas, and the analyzer zero shall be set at the trace concentration value of the specific zero gas used.</P>
          <P>(2) The basic curve shall be checked monthly by the same procedure used to generate the curve, and to the same tolerances.</P>
          <P>(3) On a daily basis prior to vehicle testing—<PRTPAGE P="222"/>
          </P>
          <P>(A) The curve for each analyzer shall be checked by adjusting the analyzer to correctly read a zero gas and an up-scale span gas, and then by correctly reading a mid-scale span gas within 2% of point. If the analyzer does not read the mid-scale span point within 2% of point, the system shall lock out. The up-scale span gas concentration for each analyzer shall correspond to approximately 80 percent of full scale, and the mid-point concentration shall correspond to approximately 15 percent of full scale; and</P>
          <P>(B) After the up-scale span check, each analyzer in a given facility shall analyze a sample of a random concentration corresponding to approximately 0.5 to 3 times the cut point (in gpm) for the constituent. The value of the random sample may be determined by a gas blender. The deviation in analysis from the sample concentration for each analyzer shall be recorded and compared to the historical mean and standard deviation for the analyzers at the facility and at all facilities. Any reading exceeding 3 sigma shall cause the analyzer to lock out.</P>
          <P>(4) <E T="03">Flame ionization detector check.</E> Upon initial operation, and after maintenance to the detector, each Flame Ionization Detector (FID) shall be checked, and adjusted if necessary, for proper peaking and characterization. Procedures described in SAE Paper No. 770141 are recommended for this purpose. A copy of this paper may be obtained from the Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc. (SAE), 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, Pennsylvania, 15096-0001. Additionally, every month the response of each FID to a methane concentration of approximately 50 ppm CH<E T="52">4</E> shall be checked. If the response is outside of the range of 1.10 to 1.20, corrective action shall be taken to bring the FID response within this range. The response shall be computed by the following formula:</P>
          <MATH DEEP="28" SPAN="2">
            <MID>EC08NO91.015</MID>
          </MATH>
          <P>(5) <E T="03">Spanning frequency.</E> The zero and up-scale span point shall be checked, and adjusted if necessary, at 2 hour intervals following the daily mid-scale curve check. If the zero or the up-scale span point drifts by more than 2% for the previous check (except for the first check of the day), the system shall lock out, and corrective action shall be taken to bring the system into compliance.</P>
          <P>(6) <E T="03">Spanning limit checks.</E> The tolerance on the adjustment of the up-scale span point is 0.4% of point. A software algorithm to perform the span adjustment and subsequent calibration curve adjustment shall be used. However, software up-scale span adjustments greater than <E T="61">±</E>10% shall cause the system to lock out, requiring system maintenance.</P>
          <P>(7) <E T="03">Integrator checks.</E> Upon initial operation, and every three months thereafter, emissions from a randomly selected vehicle with official test value greater than 60% of the standard (determined retrospectively) shall be simultaneously sampled by the normal integration method and by the bag method in each lane. The data from each method shall be put into a historical data base for determining normal and deviant performance for each test lane, facility, and all facilities combined. Specific deviations exceeding <E T="61">±</E>5% shall require corrective action.</P>
          <P>(8) <E T="03">Interference.</E> CO and CO<E T="52">2</E> analyzers shall be checked prior to initial service, and on a yearly basis thereafter, for water interference. The specifications and procedures used shall generally comply with either § 86.122-78 or § 86.321-79 of this chapter.</P>
          <P>(9) <E T="03">NO</E>
            <E T="52">X</E> converter check. <E T="01">The converter efficiency of the NO</E>
            <E T="52">2</E> to NO converter shall be checked on a weekly basis. The check shall generally conform to § 86.123-78 of this chapter, or EPA MVEL Form 305-01. Equivalent methods may be approved by the Administrator.</P>
          <P>(10) <E T="03">NO/NO</E>
            <E T="52">X</E> flow balance. <E T="01">The flow balance between the NO and NO</E>
            <E T="52">X</E> test modes shall be checked weekly. The check may be combined with the NO<E T="52">X</E> convertor check as illustrated in EPA MVEL Form 305-01.</P>
          <P>(11) <E T="03">Additional checks.</E> Additional checks shall be performed on the HC, CO, CO<E T="52">2,</E> and NO<E T="52">X</E> analyzers according to best engineering practices for the measurement technology used to ensure that measurements meet specified accuracy requirements.</P>
          <P>(12) <E T="03">System artifacts (hang-up).</E> Prior to each test a comparison shall be made between the background HC reading, the HC reading measured through the sample probe (if different), and the zero gas. Deviations from the zero gas greater than 10 parts per million carbon (ppmC) shall cause the analyzer to lock out.</P>
          <P>(13) <E T="03">Ambient background.</E> The average of the pre-test and post-test ambient background levels shall be compared to the permissible levels of 10 ppmC HC, 20 ppm CO, and 1 ppm NO<E T="52">X.</E> If the permissible levels are exceeded, the test shall be voided and corrective action taken to lower the ambient background concentrations.</P>
          <P>(14) <E T="03">Analytical gases.</E> Zero gases shall meet the requirements of § 86.114-79(a)(5) of this <PRTPAGE P="223"/>chapter. NO<E T="52">X</E> calibration gas shall be a single blend using nitrogen as the diluent. Calibration gas for the flame ionization detector shall be a single blend of propane with a diluent of air. Calibration gases for CO and CO<E T="52">2</E> shall be single blends using nitrogen or air as a diluent. Multiple blends of HC, CO, and CO<E T="52">2</E> in air may be used if shown to be stable and accurate.</P>
          <HD SOURCE="HD2">(III) Purge Analysis System</HD>

          <P>On a daily basis each purge flow meter shall be checked with a simulated purge flow against a reference flow measuring device with performance specifications equal to or better than those specified for the purge meter. The check shall include a mid-scale rate check, and a total flow check between 10 and 20 liters. Deviations greater than <E T="61">±</E>5% shall be corrected. On a monthly basis, the calibration of purge meters shall be checked for proper rate and total flow with three equally spaced points across the flow rate and the totalized flow range. Deviations exceeding the specified accuracy shall be corrected. The dynamometer quality assurance checks required under paragraph (II) of this appendix shall also apply to the dynamometer used for purge tests.</P>
          <HD SOURCE="HD2">(IV) Evaporative System Integrity Test Equipment</HD>
          <P>(a) On a weekly basis pressure measurement devices shall be checked against a reference device with performance specifications equal to or better than those specified for the measurement device. Deviations exceeding the performance specifications shall be corrected. Flow measurement devices, if any, shall be checked according to paragraph III of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(b) Systems that monitor evaporative system leaks shall be checked for integrity on a daily basis by sealing and pressurizing.</P>
          <CITA>[57 FR 52987, Nov. 5, 1992, as amended at 58 FR 59367, Nov. 9, 1993]</CITA>
        </APPENDIX>
        <APPENDIX>
          <EAR>Pt. 51, Subpt. S, App. B</EAR>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Appendix B to Subpart S—Test Procedures</HD>
          <HD SOURCE="HD2">(I) Idle test</HD>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">General requirements—</E>(1) <E T="03">Exhaust gas sampling algorithm.</E> The analysis of exhaust gas concentrations shall begin 10 seconds after the applicable test mode begins. Exhaust gas concentrations shall be analyzed at a minimum rate of two times per second. The measured value for pass/fail determinations shall be a simple running average of the measurements taken over five seconds.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Pass/fail determination.</E> A pass or fail determination shall be made for each applicable test mode based on a comparison of the short test standards contained in appendix C to this subpart, and the measured value for HC and CO as described in paragraph (I)(a)(1) of this appendix. A vehicle shall pass the test mode if any pair of simultaneous measured values for HC and CO are below or equal to the applicable short test standards. A vehicle shall fail the test mode if the values for either HC or CO, or both, in all simultaneous pairs of values are above the applicable standards.</P>
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Void test conditions.</E> The test shall immediately end and any exhaust gas measurements shall be voided if the measured concentration of CO plus CO<E T="52">2</E> falls below six percent or the vehicle's engine stalls at any time during the test sequence.</P>
          <P>(4) <E T="03">Multiple exhaust pipes.</E> Exhaust gas concentrations from vehicle engines equipped with multiple exhaust pipes shall be sampled simultaneously.</P>
          <P>(5) This test shall be immediately terminated upon reaching the overall maximum test time.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Test sequence.</E> (1) The test sequence shall consist of a first-chance test and a second-chance test as follows:</P>
          <P>(i) The first-chance test, as described under paragraph (c) of this section, shall consist of an idle mode.</P>
          <P>(ii) The second-chance test as described under paragraph (I)(d) of this appendix shall be performed only if the vehicle fails the first-chance test.</P>
          <P>(2) The test sequence shall begin only after the following requirements are met:</P>
          <P>(i) The vehicle shall be tested in as-received condition with the transmission in neutral or park and all accessories turned off. The engine shall be at normal operating temperature (as indicated by a temperature gauge, temperature lamp, touch test on the radiator hose, or other visual observation for overheating).</P>
          <P>(ii) For all pre-1996 model year vehicles, a tachometer shall be attached to the vehicle in accordance with the analyzer manufacturer's instructions. For 1996 and newer model year vehicles the OBD data link connector will be used to monitor RPM. In the event that an OBD data link connector is not available or that an RPM signal is not available over the data link connector, a tachometer shall be used instead.</P>
          <P>(iii) The sample probe shall be inserted into the vehicle's tailpipe to a minimum depth of 10 inches. If the vehicle's exhaust system prevents insertion to this depth, a tailpipe extension shall be used.</P>
          <P>(iv) The measured concentration of CO plus CO<E T="52">2</E> shall be greater than or equal to six percent.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">First-chance test.</E> The test timer shall start (tt=0) when the conditions specified in paragraph (I)(b)(2) of this appendix are met. The first-chance test shall have an overall maximum test time of 145 seconds (tt=145). The first-chance test shall consist of an idle mode only.<PRTPAGE P="224"/>
          </P>
          <P>(1) The mode timer shall start (mt=0) when the vehicle engine speed is between 350 and 1100 rpm. If engine speed exceeds 1100 rpm or falls below 350 rpm, the mode timer shall reset zero and resume timing. The minimum mode length shall be determined as described under paragraph (I)(c)(2) of this appendix. The maximum mode length shall be 90 seconds elapsed time (mt=90).</P>
          <P>(2) The pass/fail analysis shall begin after an elapsed time of 10 seconds (mt=10). A pass or fail determination shall be made for the vehicle and the mode shall be terminated as follows:</P>
          <P>(i) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, prior to an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30), measured values are less than or equal to 100 ppm HC and 0.5 percent CO.</P>
          <P>(ii) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be terminated at the end of an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30), if prior to that time the criteria of paragraph (I)(c)(2)(i) of this appendix are not satisfied and the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (I)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(iii) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, at any point between an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) and 90 seconds (mt=90), the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (I)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(iv) The vehicle shall fail the idle mode and the test shall be terminated if none of the provisions of paragraphs (I)(c)(2)(i), (ii) and (iii) of this appendix is satisfied by an elapsed time of 90 seconds (mt=90). Alternatively, the vehicle may be failed if the provisions of paragraphs (I)(c)(2)(i) and (ii) of this appendix are not met within an elapsed time of 30 seconds.</P>
          <P>(v) <E T="03">Optional.</E> The vehicle may fail the first-chance test and the second-chance test shall be omitted if no exhaust gas concentration lower than 1800 ppm HC is found by an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30).</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">Second-chance test.</E> If the vehicle fails the first-chance test, the test timer shall reset to zero (tt=0) and a second-chance test shall be performed. The second-chance test shall have an overall maximum test time of 425 seconds (tt=425). The test shall consist of a preconditioning mode followed immediately by an idle mode.</P>
          <P>(1) <E T="03">Preconditioning mode.</E> The mode timer shall start (mt=0) when the engine speed is between 2200 and 2800 rpm. The mode shall continue for an elapsed time of 180 seconds (mt=180). If engine speed falls below 2200 rpm or exceeds 2800 rmp for more than five seconds in any one excursion, or 15 seconds over all excursions, the mode timer shall reset to zero and resume timing.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Idle mode</E>—(i) <E T="03">Ford Motor Company and Honda vehicles.</E> The engines of 1981-1987 Ford Motor Company vehicles and 1984-1985 Honda Preludes shall be shut off for not more than 10 seconds and restarted. This procedure may also be used for 1988-1989 Ford Motor Company vehicles but should not be used for other vehicles. The probe may be removed from the tailpipe or the sample pump turned off if necessary to reduce analyzer fouling during the restart procedure.</P>
          <P>(ii) The mode timer shall start (mt=0) when the vehicle engine speed is between 350 and 1100 rpm. If engine speed exceeds 1100 rpm or falls below 350 rpm, the mode timer shall reset to zero and resume timing. The minimum idle mode length shall be determined as described in paragraph (I)(d)(2)(iii) of this appendix. The maximum idle mode length shall be 90 seconds elapsed time (mt=90).</P>
          <P>(iii) The pass/fail analysis shall begin after an elapsed time of 10 seconds (mt=10). A pass or fail determination shall be made for the vehicle and the idle mode shall be terminated as follows:</P>
          <P>(A) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, prior to an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30), measured values are less than or equal to 100 ppm HC and 0.5 percent CO.</P>
          <P>(B) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be terminated at the end of an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30), if prior to that time the criteria of paragraph (I)(d)(2)(iii)(A) of this appendix are not satisfied and the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (I)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(C) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, at any point between an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) and 90 seconds (mt=90), measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards described in paragraph (I)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(D) The vehicle shall fail the idle mode and the test shall be terminated if none of the provisions of paragraphs (I)(d)(2)(iii)(A), (d)(2)(iii)(B), and (d)(2)(iii)(C) of this appendix are satisfied by an elapsed time of 90 seconds (mt=90).</P>
          <HD SOURCE="HD2">(II) Two Speed Idle Test</HD>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">General requirements</E>—(1) <E T="03">Exhaust gas sampling algorithm.</E> The analysis of exhaust gas concentrations shall begin 10 seconds after the applicable test mode begins. Exhaust gas concentrations shall be analyzed at a rate of two times per second. The measured value for pass/fail determinations shall be a simple running average of the measurements taken over five seconds.<PRTPAGE P="225"/>
          </P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Pass/fail determination.</E> A pass or fail determination shall be made for each applicable test mode based on a comparison of the short test standards contained in appendix C to this subpart, and the measured value for HC and CO as described in paragraph (II)(a)(1) of this appendix. A vehicle shall pass the test mode if any pair of simultaneous values for HC and CO are below or equal to the applicable short test standards. A vehicle shall fail the test mode if the values for either HC or CO, or both, in all simultaneous pairs of values are above the applicable standards.</P>
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Void test conditions.</E> The test shall immediately end and any exhaust gas measurements shall be voided if the measured concentration of CO plus CO<E T="52">2</E> falls below six percent or the vehicle's engine stalls at any time during the test sequence.</P>
          <P>(4) <E T="03">Multiple exhaust pipes.</E> Exhaust gas concentrations from vehicle engines equipped with multiple exhaust pipes shall be sampled simultaneously.</P>
          <P>(5) The test shall be immediately terminated upon reaching the overall maximum test time.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Test sequence.</E> (1) The test sequence shall consist of a first-chance test and a second-chance test as follows:</P>
          <P>(i) The first-chance test, as described under paragraph (II)(c) of this appendix, shall consist of an idle mode followed by a high-speed mode.</P>
          <P>(ii) The second-chance high-speed mode, as described under paragraph (II)(c) of this appendix, shall immediately follow the first-chance high-speed mode. It shall be performed only if the vehicle fails the first-chance test. The second-chance idle mode, as described under paragraph (II)(d) of this appendix, shall follow the second-chance high-speed mode and be performed only if the vehicle fails the idle mode of the first-chance test.</P>
          <P>(2) The test sequence shall begin only after the following requirements are met:</P>
          <P>(i) The vehicle shall be tested in as-received condition with the transmission in neutral or park and all accessories turned off. The engine shall be at normal operating temperature (as indicated by a temperature gauge, temperature lamp, touch test on the radiator hose, or other visual observation for overheating).</P>
          <P>(ii) For all pre-1996 model year vehicles, a tachometer shall be attached to the vehicle in accordance with the analyzer manufacturer's instructions. For 1996 and newer model year vehicles the OBD data link connector will be used to monitor RPM. In the event that an OBD data link connector is not available or that an RPM signal is not available over the data link connector, a tachometer shall be used instead.</P>
          <P>(iii) The sample probe shall be inserted into the vehicle's tailpipe to a minimum depth of 10 inches. If the vehicle's exhaust system prevents insertion to this depth, a tailpipe extension shall be used.</P>
          <P>(iv) The measured concentration of CO plus CO<E T="52">2</E> shall be greater than or equal to six percent.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">First-chance test and second-chance high-speed mode.</E> The test timer shall start (tt=0) when the conditions specified in paragraph (b)(2) of this section are met. The first-chance test and second-chance high-speed mode shall have an overall maximum test time of 425 seconds (tt=425). The first-chance test shall consist of an idle mode followed immediately by a high-speed mode. This is followed immediately by an additional second-chance high-speed mode, if necessary.</P>
          <P>(1) <E T="03">First-chance idle mode.</E> (i) The mode timer shall start (mt=0) when the vehicle engine speed is between 350 and 1100 rpm. If engine speed exceeds 1100 rpm or falls below 350 rpm, the mode timer shall reset to zero and resume timing. The minimum idle mode length shall be determined as described in paragraph (II)(c)(1)(ii) of this appendix. The maximum idle mode length shall be 90 seconds elapsed time (mt=90).</P>
          <P>(ii) The pass/fail analysis shall begin after an elapsed time of 10 seconds (mt=10). A pass or fail determination shall be made for the vehicle and the mode terminated as follows:</P>
          <P>(A) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the mode shall be immediately terminated if, prior to an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30), measured values are less than or equal to 100 ppm HC and 0.5 percent CO.</P>
          <P>(B) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the mode shall be terminated at the end of an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) if, prior to that time, the criteria of paragraph (II)(c)(1)(ii)(A) of this appendix are not satisfied, and the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (II)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(C) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the mode shall be immediately terminated if, at any point between an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) and 90 seconds (mt=90), the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (II)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(D) The vehicle shall fail the idle mode and the mode shall be terminated if none of the provisions of paragraphs (II)(c)(1)(ii)(A), (B), and (C) of this appendix is satisfied by an elapsed time of 90 seconds (mt=90). Alternatively, the vehicle may be failed if the provisions of paragraphs (II)(c)(2)(i) and (ii) of this appendix are not met within an elapsed time of 30 seconds.</P>
          <P>(E) <E T="03">Optional.</E> The vehicle may fail the first-chance test and the second-chance test shall be omitted if no exhaust gas concentration less than 1800 ppm HC is found by an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30).<PRTPAGE P="226"/>
          </P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">First-chance and second-chance high-speed modes.</E> This mode includes both the first-chance and second-chance high-speed modes, and follows immediately upon termination of the first-chance idle mode.</P>
          <P>(i) The mode timer shall reset (mt=0) when the vehicle engine speed is between 2200 and 2800 rpm. If engine speed falls below 2200 rpm or exceeds 2800 rpm for more than two seconds in one excursion, or more than six seconds over all excursions within 30 seconds of the final measured value used in the pass/fail determination, the measured value shall be invalidated and the mode continued. If any excursion lasts for more than ten seconds, the mode timer shall reset to zero (mt=0) and timing resumed. The minimum high-speed mode length shall be determined as described under paragraphs (II)(c)(2)(ii) and (iii) of this appendix. The maximum high-speed mode length shall be 180 seconds elapsed time (mt=180).</P>
          <P>(ii) <E T="03">Ford Motor Company and Honda vehicles.</E> For 1981-1987 model year Ford Motor Company vehicles and 1984-1985 model year Honda Preludes, the pass/fail analysis shall begin after an elapsed time of 10 seconds (mt=10) using the following procedure. This procedure may also be used for 1988-1989 Ford Motor Company vehicles but should not be used for other vehicles.</P>
          <P>(A) A pass or fail determination, as described below, shall be used, for vehicles that passed the idle mode, to determine whether the high-speed test should be terminated prior to or at the end of an elapsed time of 180 seconds (mt=180).</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">1</E>) The vehicle shall pass the high-speed mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, prior to an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30), the measured values are less than or equal to 100 ppm HC and 0.5 percent CO.</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">2</E>) The vehicle shall pass the high-speed mode and the test shall be terminated at the end of an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) if, prior to that time, the criteria of paragraph (II)(c)(2)(ii)(A)(<E T="03">1</E>) of this appendix are not satisfied, and the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (II)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">3</E>) The vehicle shall pass the high-speed mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, at any point between an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) and 180 seconds (mt=180), the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (II)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">4</E>) <E T="03">Restart.</E> If at an elapsed time of 90 seconds (mt=90) the measured values are greater than the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (II)(a)(2) of this appendix, the vehicle's engine shall be shut off for not more than 10 seconds after returning to idle and then shall be restarted. The probe may be removed from the tailpipe or the sample pump turned off if necessary to reduce analyzer fouling during the restart procedure. The mode timer will stop upon engine shut off (mt=90) and resume upon engine restart. The pass/fail determination shall resume as follows after 100 seconds have elapsed (mt=100).</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">i</E>) The vehicle shall pass the high-speed mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, at any point between an elapsed time of 100 seconds (mt=100) and 180 seconds (mt=180), the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards described in paragraph (II)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">ii</E>) The vehicle shall fail the high-speed mode and the test shall be terminated if paragraph (II)(c)(2)(ii)(A)(<E T="03">4</E>)(<E T="03">i</E>) of this appendix is not satisfied by an elapsed time of 180 seconds (mt=180).</P>

          <P>(B) A pass or fail determination shall be made for vehicles that <E T="03">failed</E> the idle mode and the high-speed mode terminated at the <E T="03">end</E> of an elapsed time of 180 seconds (mt=180) as follows:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">1</E>) The vehicle shall pass the high-speed mode and the mode shall be terminated at an elapsed time of 180 seconds (mt=180) if any measured values of HC and CO exhaust gas concentrations during the high-speed mode are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (II)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">2</E>) <E T="03">Restart.</E> If at an elapsed time of 90 seconds (mt=90) the measured values of HC and CO exhaust gas concentrations during the high-speed mode are greater than the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (II)(a)(2) of this appendix, the vehicle's engine shall be shut off for not more than 10 seconds after returning to idle and then shall be restarted. The probe may be removed from the tailpipe or the sample pump turned off if necessary to reduce analyzer fouling during the restart procedure. The mode timer will stop upon engine shut off (mt=90) and resume upon engine restart. The pass/fail determination shall resume as follows after 100 seconds have elapsed (mt=100).</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">i</E>) The vehicle shall pass the high-speed mode and the mode shall be terminated at an elapsed time of 180 seconds (mt=180) if any measured values of HC and CO exhaust gas concentrations during the high-speed mode are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (II)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">ii</E>) The vehicle shall fail the high-speed mode and the test shall be terminated if paragraph (II)(c)(2)(ii)(B)(<E T="03">2</E>)(<E T="03">i</E>) of this appendix is not satisfied by an elapsed time of 180 seconds (mt=180).</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">iii</E>) <E T="03">All other light-duty motor vehicles.</E> The pass/fail analysis for vehicles not specified in paragraph (II)(c)(2)(ii) of this appendix shall <PRTPAGE P="227"/>begin after an elapsed time of 10 seconds (mt=10) using the following procedure.</P>
          <P>(A) A pass or fail determination, as described below, shall be used for vehicles that passed the idle mode, to determine whether the high-speed mode should be terminated prior to or at the end of an elapsed time of 180 seconds (mt=180).</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">1</E>) The vehicle shall pass the high-speed mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, prior to an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30), any measured values are less than or equal to 100 ppm HC and 0.5 percent CO.</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">2</E>) The vehicle shall pass the high-speed mode and the test shall be terminated at the end of an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) if, prior to that time, the criteria of paragraph (II)(c)(2)(iii)(A)(<E T="03">1</E>) of this appendix are not satisfied, and the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (II)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">3</E>) The vehicle shall pass the high-speed mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, at any point between an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) and 180 seconds (mt=180), the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (II)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">4</E>) The vehicle shall fail the high-speed mode and the test shall be terminated if none of the provisions of paragraphs (II)(c)(2)(iii)(A)(<E T="03">1</E>), (<E T="03">2</E>), and (<E T="03">3</E>) of this appendix is satisfied by an elapsed time of 180 seconds (mt=180).</P>

          <P>(B) A pass or fail determination shall be made for vehicles that <E T="03">failed</E> the idle mode and the high-speed mode terminated at the <E T="03">end</E> of an elapsed time of 180 seconds (mt=180) as follows:</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">1</E>) The vehicle shall pass the high-speed mode and the mode shall be terminated at an elapsed time of 180 seconds (mt=180) if any measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (II)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(<E T="03">2</E>) The vehicle shall fail the high-speed mode and the test shall be terminated if paragraph (II)(c)(2)(iii)(B)(<E T="03">1</E>) of this appendix is not satisfied by an elapsed time of 180 seconds (mt=180).</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">Second-chance idle mode.</E> If the vehicle fails the first-chance idle mode and passes the high-speed mode, the test timer shall reset to zero (tt=0) and a second-chance idle mode shall commence. The second-chance idle mode shall have an overall maximum test time of 145 seconds (tt=145). The test shall consist of an idle mode only.</P>
          <P>(1) The engines of 1981-1987 Ford Motor Company vehicles and 1984-1985 Honda Preludes shall be shut off for not more than 10 seconds and restarted. The probe may be removed from the tailpipe or the sample pump turned off if necessary to reduce analyzer fouling during the restart procedure. This procedure may also be used for 1988-1989 Ford Motor Company vehicles but should not be used for other vehicles.</P>
          <P>(2) The mode timer shall start (mt=0) when the vehicle engine speed is between 350 and 1100 rpm. If the engine speed exceeds 1100 rpm or falls below 350 rpm the mode timer shall reset to zero and resume timing. The minimum second-chance idle mode length shall be determined as described in paragraph (II)(d)(3) of this appendix. The maximum second-chance idle mode length shall be 90 seconds elapsed time (mt=90).</P>
          <P>(3) The pass/fail analysis shall begin after an elapsed time of 10 seconds (mt=10). A pass or fail determination shall be made for the vehicle and the second-chance idle mode shall be terminated as follows:</P>
          <P>(i) The vehicle shall pass the second-chance idle mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, prior to an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30), any measured values are less than or equal to 100 ppm HC and 0.5 percent CO.</P>
          <P>(ii) The vehicle shall pass the second-chance idle mode and the test shall be terminated at the end of an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) if, prior to that time, the criteria of paragraph (II)(d)(3)(i) of this appendix are not satisfied, and the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (II)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(iii) The vehicle shall pass the second-chance idle mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, at any point between an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) and 90 seconds (mt=90), the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (II)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(iv) The vehicle shall fail the second-chance idle mode and the test shall be terminated if none of the provisions of paragraph (II)(d)(3)(i), (ii), and (iii) of this appendix is satisfied by an elapsed time of 90 seconds (mt=90).</P>
          <HD SOURCE="HD2">(III) Loaded Test</HD>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">General requirements—</E>(1) <E T="03">Exhaust gas sampling algorithm.</E> The analysis of exhaust gas concentrations shall begin 10 seconds after the applicable test mode begins. Exhaust gas concentrations shall be analyzed at a minimum rate of two times per second. The measured value for pass/fail determinations shall be a simple running average of the measurements taken over five seconds.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Pass/fail determination.</E> A pass or fail determination shall be made for each applicable test mode based on a comparison of the short test standards contained in appendix C to this subpart and the measured value for HC and CO as described in paragraph (III)(a)(1) of this appendix. A vehicle shall <PRTPAGE P="228"/>pass the test mode if any pair of simultaneous values for HC and CO are below or equal to the applicable short test standards. A vehicle shall fail the test mode if the values for either HC or CO, or both, in all simultaneous pairs of values are above the applicable standards.</P>
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Void test conditions.</E> The test shall immediately end and any exhaust gas measurements shall be voided if the measured concentration of CO plus CO<E T="52">2</E> falls below six percent or the vehicle's engine stalls at any time during the test sequence.</P>
          <P>(4) <E T="03">Multiple exhaust pipes.</E> Exhaust gas concentrations from vehicle engines equipped with multiple exhaust pipes shall be sampled simultaneously.</P>
          <P>(5) The test shall be immediately terminated upon reaching the overall maximum test time.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Test sequence.</E> (1) The test sequence shall consist of a loaded mode using a chassis dynamometer followed immediately by an idle mode as described under paragraphs (III)(c)(1) and (2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(2) The test sequence shall begin only after the following requirements are met:</P>
          <P>(i) The dynamometer shall be warmed up, in stabilized operating condition, adjusted, and calibrated in accordance with the procedures of appendix A to this subpart. Prior to each test, variable-curve dynamometers shall be checked for proper setting of the road-load indicator or road-load controller.</P>
          <P>(ii) The vehicle shall be tested in as-received condition with all accessories turned off. The engine shall be at normal operating temperature (as indicated by a temperature gauge, temperature lamp, touch test on the radiator hose, or other visual observation for overheating).</P>
          <P>(iii) The vehicle shall be operated during each mode of the test with the gear selector in the following position:</P>
          <P>(A) In drive for automatic transmissions and in second (or third if more appropriate) for manual transmissions for the loaded mode;</P>
          <P>(B) In park or neutral for the idle mode.</P>
          <P>(iv) For all pre-1996 model year vehicles, a tachometer shall be attached to the vehicle in accordance with the analyzer manufacturer's instructions. For 1996 and newer model year vehicles the OBD data link connector will be used to monitor RPM. In the event that an OBD data link connector is not available or that an RPM signal is not available over the data link connector, a tachometer shall be used instead.</P>
          <P>(v) The sample probe shall be inserted into the vehicle's tailpipe to a minimum depth of 10 inches. If the vehicle's exhaust system prevents insertion to this depth, a tailpipe extension shall be used.</P>
          <P>(vi) The measured concentration of CO plus CO<E T="52">2</E> shall be greater than or equal to six percent.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Overall test procedure.</E> The test timer shall start (tt=0) when the conditions specified in paragraph (III)(b)(2) of this appendix are met and the mode timer initiates as specified in paragraph (III)(c)(1) of this appendix. The test sequence shall have an overall maximum test time of 240 seconds (tt=240). The test shall be immediately terminated upon reaching the overall maximum test time.</P>
          <P>(1) <E T="03">Loaded mode</E>—(i) <E T="03">Ford Motor Company and Honda vehicles.</E> (Optional) The engines of 1981-1987 Ford Motor Company vehicles and 1984-1985 Honda Preludes shall be shut off for not more than 10 seconds and restarted. This procedure may also be used for 1988-1989 Ford Motor Company vehicles but should not be used for other vehicles. The probe may be removed from the tailpipe or the sample pump turned off if necessary to reduce analyzer fouling during the restart procedure.</P>
          <P>(ii) The mode timer shall start (mt=0) when the dynamometer speed is within the limits specified for the vehicle engine size according to the following schedule. If the dynamometer speed falls outside the limits for more than five seconds in one excursion, or 15 seconds over all excursions, the mode timer shall reset to zero and resume timing. The minimum mode length shall be determined as described in paragraph (III)(c)(1)(iii)(A) of this appendix. The maximum mode length shall be 90 seconds elapsed time (mt=90).</P>
          <GPOTABLE CDEF="s10,9,6-4" COLS="3" OPTS="L2,i1">
            <TTITLE>
              <E T="04">Dynamometer Test Schedule</E>
            </TTITLE>
            <BOXHD>
              <CHED H="1">Gasoline engine size (cylinders)</CHED>
              <CHED H="1">Roll speed (mph)</CHED>
              <CHED H="1">Normal loading (brake horsepower)</CHED>
            </BOXHD>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">4 or less</ENT>
              <ENT>22-25</ENT>
              <ENT>2.8-4.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">5-6</ENT>
              <ENT>29-32</ENT>
              <ENT>6.8-8.4</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">7 or more</ENT>
              <ENT>32-35</ENT>
              <ENT>8.4-10.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
          </GPOTABLE>
          <P>(iii) The pass/fail analysis shall begin after an elapsed time of 10 seconds (mt=10). A pass or fail determination shall be made for the vehicle and the mode shall be terminated as follows:</P>
          <P>(A) The vehicle shall pass the loaded mode and the mode shall be immediately terminated if, at any point between an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) and 90 seconds (mt=90), measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards described in paragraph (a)(2) of this section.</P>
          <P>(B) The vehicle shall fail the loaded mode and the mode shall be terminated if paragraph (III)(c)(1)(iii)(A) of this appendix is not satisfied by an elapsed time of 90 seconds (mt=90).</P>
          <P>(C) <E T="03">Optional.</E> The vehicle may fail the loaded mode and any subsequent idle mode shall be omitted if no exhaust gas concentration less than 1800 ppm HC is found by an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30).<PRTPAGE P="229"/>
          </P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Idle mode</E>—(i) <E T="03">Ford Motor Company and Honda vehicles.</E> (Optional) The engines of 1981-1987 Ford Motor Company vehicles and 1984-1985 Honda Preludes shall be shut off for not more than 10 seconds and restarted. This procedure may also be used for 1988-1989 Ford Motor Company vehicles but should not be used for other vehicles. The probe may be removed from the tailpipe or the sample pump turned off if necessary to reduce analyzer fouling during the restart procedure.</P>
          <P>(ii) The mode timer shall start (mt=0) when the dynamometer speed is zero and the vehicle engine speed is between 350 and 1100 rpm. If engine speed exceeds 1100 rpm or falls below 350 rpm, the mode timer shall reset to zero and resume timing. The minimum idle mode length shall be determined as described in paragraph (II)(c)(2)(ii) of this appendix. The maximum idle mode length shall be 90 seconds elapsed time (mt=90).</P>
          <P>(iii) The pass/fail analysis shall begin after an elapsed time of 10 seconds (mt=10). A pass or fail determination shall be made for the vehicle and the mode shall be terminated as follows:</P>
          <P>(A) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, prior to an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30), measured values are less than or equal to 100 ppm HC and 0.5 percent CO.</P>
          <P>(B) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be terminated at the end of an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) if, prior to that time, the criteria of paragraph (III)(c)(2)(iii)(A) of this appendix are not satisfied, and the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (III)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(C) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, at any point between an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) and 90 seconds (mt=90), measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards described in paragraph (III)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(D) The vehicle shall fail the idle mode and the test shall be terminated if none of the provisions of paragraphs (III)(c)(2)(iii)(A), (c)(2)(iii)(B), and (c)(2)(iii)(C) of this appendix is satisfied by an elapsed time of 90 seconds (mt=90).</P>
          <HD SOURCE="HD2">(IV) Preconditioned IDLE TEST</HD>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">General requirements</E>—(1) <E T="03">Exhaust gas sampling algorithm.</E> The analysis of exhaust gas concentrations shall begin 10 seconds after the applicable test mode begins. Exhaust gas concentrations shall be analyzed at a minimum rate of two times per second. The measured value for pass/fail determinations shall be a simple running average of the measurements taken over five seconds.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Pass/fail determination.</E> A pass or fail determination shall be made for each applicable test mode based on a comparison of the short test standards contained in appendix C to this subpart, and the measured value for HC and CO as described in paragraph (IV)(a)(1) of this appendix. A vehicle shall pass the test mode if any pair of simultaneous values for HC and CO are below or equal to the applicable short test standards. A vehicle shall fail the test mode if the values for either HC or CO, or both, in all simultaneous pairs of values are above the applicable standards.</P>
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Void test conditions.</E> The test shall immediately end and any exhaust gas measurements shall be voided if the measured concentration of CO plus CO<E T="52">2</E> falls below six percent or the vehicle's engine stalls at any time during the test sequence.</P>
          <P>(4) <E T="03">Multiple exhaust pipes.</E> Exhaust gas concentrations from vehicle engines equipped with multiple exhaust pipes shall be sampled simultaneously.</P>
          <P>(5) The test shall be immediately terminated upon reaching the overall maximum test time.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Test sequence.</E> (1) The test sequence shall consist of a first-chance test and a second-chance test as follows:</P>
          <P>(i) The first-chance test, as described under paragraph (IV)(c) of this appendix, shall consist of a preconditioning mode followed by an idle mode.</P>
          <P>(ii) The second-chance test, as described under paragraph (IV)(d) of this appendix, shall be performed only if the vehicle fails the first-chance test.</P>
          <P>(2) The test sequence shall begin only after the following requirements are met:</P>
          <P>(i) The vehicle shall be tested in as-received condition with the transmission in neutral or park and all accessories turned off. The engine shall be at normal operating temperature (as indicated by a temperature gauge, temperature lamp, touch test on the radiator hose, or other visual observation for overheating).</P>
          <P>(ii) For all pre-1996 model year vehicles, a tachometer shall be attached to the vehicle in accordance with the analyzer manufacturer's instructions. For 1996 and newer model year vehicles the OBD data link connector will be used to monitor RPM. In the event that an OBD data link connector is not available or that an RPM signal is not available over the data link connector, a tachometer shall be used instead.</P>
          <P>(iii) The sample probe shall be inserted into the vehicle's tailpipe to a minimum depth of 10 inches. If the vehicle's exhaust system prevents insertion to this depth, a tailpipe extension shall be used.</P>
          <P>(iv) The measured concentration of CO plus CO2 shall be greater than or equal to six percent.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">First-chance test.</E> The test timer shall start (tt=0) when the conditions specified in paragraph (IV)(b)(2) of this appendix are met. <PRTPAGE P="230"/>The test shall have an overall maximum test time of 200 seconds (tt=200). The first-chance test shall consist of a preconditioning mode followed immediately by an idle mode.</P>
          <P>(1) <E T="03">Preconditioning mode.</E> The mode timer shall start (mt=0) when the engine speed is between 2200 and 2800 rpm. The mode shall continue for an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30). If engine speed falls below 2200 rpm or exceeds 2800 rpm for more than five seconds in any one excursion, or 15 seconds over all excursions, the mode timer shall reset to zero and resume timing.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Idle mode.</E> (i) The mode timer shall start (mt=0) when the vehicle engine speed is between 350 and 1100 rpm. If engine speed exceeds 1100 rpm or falls below 350 rpm, the mode timer shall reset to zero and resume timing. The minimum idle mode length shall be determined as described in paragraph (IV)(c)(2)(ii) of this appendix. The maximum idle mode length shall be 90 seconds elapsed time (mt=90).</P>
          <P>(ii) The pass/fail analysis shall begin after an elapsed time of 10 seconds (mt=10). A pass or fail determination shall be made for the vehicle and the mode shall be terminated as follows:</P>
          <P>(A) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, prior to an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30), measured values are less than or equal to 100 ppm HC and 0.5 percent CO.</P>
          <P>(B) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be terminated at the end of an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) if, prior to that time, the criteria of paragraph (IV)(c)(2)(ii)(A) of this appendix are not satisfied, and the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (IV)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(C) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, at any point between an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) and 90 seconds (mt=90), measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (IV)(a)(2) of this section.</P>
          <P>(D) The vehicle shall fail the idle mode and the test shall be terminated if none of the provisions of paragraphs (IV)(c)(2)(ii)(A), (B), and (C) of this appendix is satisfied by an elapsed time of 90 seconds (mt=90). Alternatively, the vehicle may be failed if the provisions of paragraphs (IV)(c)(2) (i) and (ii) of this appendix are not met within an elapsed time of 30 seconds.</P>
          <P>(E) <E T="03">Optional.</E> The vehicle may fail the first-chance test and the second-chance test shall be omitted if no exhaust gas concentration less than 1800 ppm HC is found at an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30).</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">Second-chance test.</E> If the vehicle fails the first-chance test, the test timer shall reset to zero and a second-chance test shall be performed. The second-chance test shall have an overall maximum test time of 425 seconds. The test shall consist of a preconditioning mode followed immediately by an idle mode.</P>
          <P>(1) <E T="03">Preconditioning mode.</E> The mode timer shall start (mt=0) when engine speed is between 2200 and 2800 rpm. The mode shall continue for an elapsed time of 180 seconds (mt=180). If the engine speed falls below 2200 rpm or exceeds 2800 rpm for more than five seconds in any one excursion, or 15 seconds over all excursions, the mode timer shall reset to zero and resume timing.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Idle mode</E>—(i) <E T="03">Ford Motor Company and Honda vehicles.</E> The engines of 1981-1987 Ford Motor Company vehicles and 1984-1985 Honda Preludes shall be shut off for not more than 10 seconds and then shall be restarted. The probe may be removed from the tailpipe or the sample pump turned off if necessary to reduce analyzer fouling during the restart procedure. This procedure may also be used for 1988-1989 Ford Motor Company vehicles but should not be used for other vehicles.</P>
          <P>(ii) The mode timer shall start (mt=0) when the vehicle engine speed is between 350 and 1100 rpm. If the engine speed exceeds 1100 rpm or falls below 350 rpm, the mode timer shall reset to zero and resume timing. The minimum idle mode length shall be determined as described in paragraph (IV)(d)(2)(iii) of this appendix. The maximum idle mode length shall be 90 seconds elapsed time (mt=90).</P>
          <P>(iii) The pass/fail analysis shall begin after an elapsed time of 10 seconds (mt=10). A pass or fail determination shall be made for the vehicle and the mode shall be terminated as follows:</P>
          <P>(A) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, prior to an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30), measured values are less than or equal to 100 ppm HC and 0.5 percent CO.</P>
          <P>(B) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be terminated at the end of an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) if, prior to that time, the criteria of paragraph (IV)(d)(2)(iii)(A) of this appendix are not satisfied, and the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (IV)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(C) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, at any point between an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) and 90 seconds (mt=90), measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards described in paragraph (IV)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>

          <P>(D) The vehicle shall fail the idle mode and the test shall be terminated if none of the provisions of paragraphs (IV)(d)(2)(iii) (A), (B), and (C) of this appendix is satisfied by an elapsed time of 90 seconds (mt=90).<PRTPAGE P="231"/>
          </P>
          <HD SOURCE="HD2">(V) Idle Test With Loaded Preconditioning</HD>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">General requirements</E>—(1) <E T="03">Exhaust gas sampling algorithm.</E> The analysis of exhaust gas concentrations shall begin 10 seconds after the applicable test mode begins. Exhaust gas concentrations shall be analyzed at a minimum rate of two times per second. The measured value for pass/fail determinations shall be a simple running average of the measurements taken over five seconds.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Pass/fail determination.</E> A pass or fail determination shall be made for each applicable test mode based on a comparison of the short test standards contained in appendix C to this subpart, and the measured value for HC and CO as described in paragraph (V)(a)(1) of this appendix. A vehicle shall pass the test mode if any pair of simultaneous values for HC and CO are below or equal to the applicable short test standards. A vehicle shall fail the test mode if the values for either HC or CO, or both, in all simultaneous pairs of values are above the applicable standards.</P>
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Void test conditions.</E> The test shall immediately end and any exhaust gas measurements shall be voided if the measured concentration of CO plus CO<E T="52">2</E> falls below six percent or the vehicle's engine stalls at any time during the test sequence.</P>
          <P>(4) <E T="03">Multiple exhaust pipes.</E> Exhaust gas concentrations from vehicle engines equipped with multiple exhaust pipes shall be sampled simultaneously.</P>
          <P>(5) The test shall be immediately terminated upon reaching the overall maximum test time.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Test sequence.</E> (1) The test sequence shall consist of a first-chance test and a second-chance test as follows:</P>
          <P>(i) The first-chance test, as described under paragraph (V)(c) of this appendix, shall consist of an idle mode.</P>
          <P>(ii) The second-chance test as described under paragraph (V)(d) of this appendix shall be performed only if the vehicle fails the first-chance test.</P>
          <P>(2) The test sequence shall begin only after the following requirements are met:</P>
          <P>(i) The dynamometer shall be warmed up, in stabilized operating condition, adjusted, and calibrated in accordance with the procedures of appendix A to this subpart. Prior to each test, variable-curve dynamometers shall be checked for proper setting of the road-load indicator or road-load controller.</P>
          <P>(ii) The vehicle shall be tested in as-received condition with all accessories turned off. The engine shall be at normal operating temperature (as indicated by a temperature gauge, temperature lamp, touch test on the radiator hose, or other visual observation for overheating).</P>
          <P>(iii) The vehicle shall be operated during each mode of the test with the gear selector in the following position:</P>
          <P>(A) In drive for automatic transmissions and in second (or third if more appropriate) for manual transmissions for the loaded preconditioning mode;</P>
          <P>(B) In park or neutral for the idle mode.</P>
          <P>(iv) For all pre-1996 model year vehicles, a tachometer shall be attached to the vehicle in accordance with the analyzer manufacturer's instructions. For 1996 and newer model year vehicles the OBD data link connector will be used to monitor RPM. In the event that an OBD data link connector is not available or that an RPM signal is not available over the data link connector, a tachometer shall be used instead.</P>
          <P>(v) The sample probe shall be inserted into the vehicle's tailpipe to a minimum depth of 10 inches. If the vehicle's exhaust system prevents insertion to this depth, a tailpipe extension shall be used.</P>
          <P>(vi) The measured concentration of CO plus CO<E T="52">2</E> shall be greater than or equal to six percent.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">First-chance test.</E> The test timer shall start (tt=0) when the conditions specified in paragraph (V)(b)(2) of this appendix are met. The test shall have an overall maximum test time of 155 seconds (tt=155). The first-chance test shall consist of an idle mode only.</P>
          <P>(1) The mode timer shall start (mt=0) when the vehicle engine speed is between 350 and 1100 rpm. If the engine speed exceeds 1100 rpm or falls below 350 rpm, the mode timer shall reset to zero and resume timing. The minimum mode length shall be determined as described in paragraph (V)(c)(2) of this appendix. The maximum mode length shall be 90 seconds elapsed time (mt=90).</P>
          <P>(2) The pass/fail analysis shall begin after an elapsed time of 10 seconds (mt=10). A pass or fail determination shall be made for the vehicle and the mode shall be terminated as follows:</P>
          <P>(i) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, prior to an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30), measured values are less than or equal to 100 ppm HC and 0.5 percent CO.</P>
          <P>(ii) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be terminated at the end of an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) if, prior to that time, the criteria of paragraph (V)(c)(2)(i) of this appendix are not satisfied, and the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (V)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(iii) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, at any point between an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) and 90 seconds (mt=90), the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (V)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>

          <P>(iv) The vehicle shall fail the idle mode and the test shall be terminated if none of the <PRTPAGE P="232"/>provisions of paragraphs (V)(c)(2)(i), (ii), and (iii) of this appendix is satisfied by an elapsed time of 90 seconds (mt=90). Alternatively, the vehicle may be failed if the provisions of paragraphs (V)(c)(2) (i) and (ii) of this appendix are not met within an elapsed time of 30 seconds.</P>
          <P>(v) <E T="03">Optional.</E> The vehicle may fail the first-chance test and the second-chance test shall be omitted if no exhaust gas concentration less than 1800 ppm HC is found at an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30).</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">Second-chance test.</E> If the vehicle fails the first-chance test, the test timer shall reset to zero (tt=0) and a second-chance test shall be performed. The second-chance test shall have an overall maximum test time of 200 seconds (tt=200). The test shall consist of a preconditioning mode using a chassis dynamometer, followed immediately by an idle mode.</P>
          <P>(1) <E T="03">Preconditioning mode.</E> The mode timer shall start (mt=0) when the dynamometer speed is within the limits specified for the vehicle engine size in accordance with the following schedule. The mode shall continue for a minimum elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30). If the dynamometer speed falls outside the limits for more than five seconds in one excursion, or 15 seconds over all excursions, the mode timer shall reset to zero and resume timing.</P>
          <GPOTABLE CDEF="s50,6,3-4" COLS="3" OPTS="L2,i1">
            <BOXHD>
              <CHED H="1">Gasoline engine size (cylinders)</CHED>
              <CHED H="1">Dynamometer test schedule</CHED>
              <CHED H="2">Roll speed (mph)</CHED>
              <CHED H="2">Normal loading (brake horsepower)</CHED>
            </BOXHD>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">4 or less</ENT>
              <ENT>22-25</ENT>
              <ENT>2.8-4.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">5-6</ENT>
              <ENT>29-32</ENT>
              <ENT>6.8-8.4</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">7 or more</ENT>
              <ENT>32-35</ENT>
              <ENT>8.4-10.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
          </GPOTABLE>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Idle mode.</E> (i) <E T="03">Ford Motor Company and Honda vehicles.</E> (Optional) The engines of 1981-1987 Ford Motor Company vehicles and 1984-1985 Honda Preludes shall be shut off for not more than 10 seconds and restarted. This procedure may also be used for 1988-1989 Ford Motor Company vehicles but should not be used for other vehicles. The probe may be removed from the tailpipe or the sample pump turned off if necessary to reduce analyzer fouling during the restart procedure.</P>
          <P>(ii) The mode timer shall start (mt=0) when the dynamometer speed is zero and the vehicle engine speed is between 350 and 1100 rpm. If the engine speed exceeds 1100 rpm or falls below 350 rpm, the mode timer shall reset to zero and resume timing. The minimum idle mode length shall be determined as described in paragraph (V)(d)(2)(ii) of this appendix. The maximum idle mode length shall be 90 seconds elapsed time (mt=90).</P>
          <P>(iii) The pass/fail analysis shall begin after an elapsed time of 10 seconds (mt=10). A pass or fail determination shall be made for the vehicle and the mode shall be terminated as follows:</P>
          <P>(A) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, prior to an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30), measured values are less than or equal to 100 ppm HC and 0.5 percent CO.</P>
          <P>(B) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be terminated at the end of an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) if, prior to that time, the criteria of paragraph (V)(d)(2)(ii)(A) of this appendix are not satisfied, and the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (V)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(C) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, at any point between an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) and 90 seconds (mt=90), the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (V)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(D) The vehicle shall fail the idle mode and the test shall be terminated if none of the provisions of paragraphs (V)(d)(2)(ii)(A), (B), and (C) of this appendix is satisfied by an elapsed time of 90 seconds (mt=90).</P>
          <HD SOURCE="HD2">(VI) Preconditioned Two Speed Idle Test</HD>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">General requirements—</E>(1) <E T="03">Exhaust gas sampling algorithm.</E> The analysis of exhaust gas concentrations shall begin 10 seconds after the applicable test mode begins. Exhaust gas concentrations shall be analyzed at a minimum rate of two times per second. The measured value for pass/fail determinations shall be a simple running average of the measurements taken over five seconds.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Pass/fail determination.</E> A pass or fail determination shall be made for each applicable test mode based on a comparison of the short test standards contained in appendix C to this subpart, and the measured value for HC and CO as described in paragraph (VI)(a)(1) of this appendix. A vehicle shall pass the test mode if any pair of simultaneous values for HC and CO are below or equal to the applicable short test standards. A vehicle shall fail the test mode if the values for either HC or CO, or both, in all simultaneous pairs of values are above the applicable standards.</P>
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Void test conditions.</E> The test shall immediately end and any exhaust gas measurements shall be voided if the measured concentration of CO plus CO<E T="52">2</E> falls below six percent or the vehicle's engine stalls at any time during the test sequence.</P>
          <P>(4) <E T="03">Multiple exhaust pipes.</E> Exhaust gas concentrations from vehicle engines equipped with multiple exhaust pipes shall be sampled simultaneously.<PRTPAGE P="233"/>
          </P>
          <P>(5) The test shall be immediately terminated upon reaching the overall maximum test time.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Test sequence.</E> (1) The test sequence shall consist of a first-chance test and a second-chance test as follows:</P>
          <P>(i) The first-chance test, as described under paragraph (VI)(c) of this appendix, shall consist of a first-chance high-speed mode followed immediately by a first-chance idle mode.</P>
          <P>(ii) The second-chance test as described under paragraph (VI)(d) of this appendix shall be performed only if the vehicle fails the first-chance test.</P>
          <P>(2) The test sequence shall begin only after the following requirements are met:</P>
          <P>(i) The vehicle shall be tested in as-received condition with the transmission in neutral or park and all accessories turned off. The engine shall be at normal operating temperature (as indicated by a temperature gauge, temperature lamp, touch test on the radiator hose, or other visual observation for overheating).</P>
          <P>(ii) For all pre-1996 model year vehicles, a tachometer shall be attached to the vehicle in accordance with the analyzer manufacturer's instructions. For 1996 and newer model year vehicles the OBD data link connector will be used to monitor rpm. In the event that an OBD data link connector is not available or that an rpm signal is not available over the data link connector, a tachometer shall be used instead.</P>
          <P>(iii) The sample probe shall be inserted into the vehicle's tailpipe to a minimum depth of 10 inches. If the vehicle's exhaust system prevents insertion to this depth, a tailpipe extension shall be used.</P>
          <P>(iv) The measured concentration of CO plus CO<E T="52">2</E> shall be greater than or equal to six percent.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">First-chance test.</E> The test timer shall start (tt=0) when the conditions specified in paragraph (VI)(b)(2) of this appendix are met. The test shall have an overall maximum test time of 290 seconds (tt=290). The first-chance test shall consist of a high-speed mode followed immediately by an idle mode.</P>
          <P>(1) <E T="03">First-chance high-speed mode.</E> (i) The mode timer shall reset (mt=0) when the vehicle engine speed is between 2200 and 2800 rpm. If the engine speed falls below 2200 rpm or exceeds 2800 rpm for more than two seconds in one excursion, or more than six seconds over all excursions within 30 seconds of the final measured value used in the pass/fail determination, the measured value shall be invalidated and the mode continued. If any excursion lasts for more than ten seconds, the mode timer shall reset to zero (mt=0) and timing resumed. The high-speed mode length shall be 90 seconds elapsed time (mt=90).</P>
          <P>(ii) The pass/fail analysis shall begin after an elapsed time of 10 seconds (mt=10). A pass or fail determination shall be made for the vehicle and the mode shall be terminated as follows:</P>
          <P>(A) The vehicle shall pass the high-speed mode and the mode shall be terminated at an elapsed time of 90 seconds (mt=90) if any measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (VI)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(B) The vehicle shall fail the high-speed mode and the mode shall be terminated if the requirements of paragraph (VI)(c)(1)(ii)(A) of this appendix are not satisfied by an elapsed time of 90 seconds (mt=90).</P>
          <P>(C) <E T="03">Optional.</E> The vehicle shall fail the first-chance test and any subsequent test shall be omitted if no exhaust gas concentration lower than 1800 ppm HC is found at an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30).</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">First-chance idle mode.</E> (i) The mode timer shall start (mt=0) when the vehicle engine speed is between 350 and 1100 rpm. If the engine speed exceeds 1100 rpm or falls below 350 rpm, the mode timer shall reset to zero and resume timing. The minimum first-chance idle mode length shall be determined as described in paragraph (VI)(c)(2)(ii) of this appendix. The maximum first-chance idle mode length shall be 90 seconds elapsed time (mt=90).</P>
          <P>(ii) The pass/fail analysis shall begin after an elapsed time of 10 seconds (mt=10). A pass or fail determination shall be made for the vehicle and the mode shall be terminated as follows:</P>
          <P>(A) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, prior to an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30), measured values are less than or equal to 100 ppm HC and 0.5 percent CO.</P>
          <P>(B) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be terminated at the end of an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) if, prior to that time, the criteria of paragraph (VI)(c)(2)(ii)(A) of this appendix are not satisfied, and the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (VI)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(C) The vehicle shall pass the idle mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, at any point between an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) and 90 seconds (mt=90), the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (VI)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>

          <P>(D) The vehicle shall fail the idle mode and the test shall be terminated if none of the provisions of paragraphs (VI)(c)(2)(ii) (A), (B), and (C) of this appendix is satisfied by an elapsed time of 90 seconds (mt=90). Alternatively, the vehicle may be failed if the provisions of paragraphs (VI)(c)(2)(i) and (ii) of this appendix are not met within the elapsed time of 30 seconds.<PRTPAGE P="234"/>
          </P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">Second-chance test.</E> (1) If the vehicle fails either mode of the first-chance test, the test timer shall reset to zero (tt=0) and a second-chance test shall commence. The second-chance test shall be performed based on the first-chance test failure mode or modes as follows:</P>
          <P>(A) If the vehicle failed only the first-chance high-speed mode, the second-chance test shall consist of a second-chance high-speed mode as described in paragraph (VI)(d)(2) of this appendix. The overall maximum test time shall be 280 seconds (tt=280).</P>
          <P>(B) If the vehicle failed only the first-chance idle mode, the second-chance test shall consist of a second-chance pre-conditioning mode followed immediately by a second-chance idle mode as described in paragraphs (VI)(d) (3) and (4) of this appendix. The overall maximum test time shall be 425 seconds (tt=425).</P>
          <P>(C) If both the first-chance high-speed mode and first-chance idle mode were failed, the second-chance test shall consist of the second-chance high-speed mode followed immediately by the second-chance idle mode as described in paragraphs (VI)(d) (2) and (4) of this appendix. However, if during this second-chance procedure the vehicle fails the second-chance high-speed mode, then the second-chance idle mode may be eliminated. The overall maximum test time shall be 425 seconds (tt=425).</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Second-chance high-speed mode</E>—(i) <E T="03">Ford Motor Company and Honda vehicles.</E> The engines of 1981-1987 Ford Motor Company vehicles and 1984-1985 Honda Preludes shall be shut off for not more than 10 seconds and then shall be restarted. The probe may be removed from the tailpipe or the sample pump turned off if necessary to reduce analyzer fouling during the restart procedure. This procedure may also be used for 1988-1989 Ford Motor Company vehicles but should not be used for other vehicles.</P>
          <P>(ii) The mode timer shall reset (mt=0) when the vehicle engine speed is between 2200 and 2800 rpm. If the engine speed falls below 2200 rpm or exceeds 2800 rpm for more than two seconds in one excursion, or more than six seconds over all excursions within 30 seconds of the final measured value used in the pass/fail determination, the measured value shall be invalidated and the mode continued. The minimum second-chance high-speed mode length shall be determined as described in paragraphs (VI)(d)(2) (iii) and (iv) of this appendix. If any excursion lasts for more than ten seconds, the mode timer shall reset to zero (mt=0) and timing resumed. The maximum second-chance high-speed mode length shall be 180 seconds elapsed time (mt=180).</P>

          <P>(iii) In the case where the second-chance high-speed mode is <E T="03">not</E> followed by the second-chance idle mode, the pass/fail analysis shall begin after an elapsed time of 10 seconds (mt=10). A pass or fail determination shall be made for the vehicle and the mode shall be terminated as follows:</P>
          <P>(A) The vehicle shall pass the high-speed mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, prior to an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30), measured values are less than or equal to 100 ppm HC and 0.5 percent CO.</P>
          <P>(B) The vehicle shall pass the high-speed mode and the test shall be terminated if at the end of an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) if, prior to that time, the criteria of paragraph (VI)(d)(2)(iii)(A) of this appendix are not satisfied, and the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (VI)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(C) The vehicle shall pass the high-speed mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, at any point between an elapsed time for 30 seconds (mt=30) and 180 seconds (mt=180), the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (VI)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(D) The vehicle shall fail the high-speed mode and the test shall be terminated if none of the provisions of paragraphs (VI)(d)(2)(iii) (A), (B), and (C) of this appendix is satisfied by an elapsed time of 180 seconds (mt=180).</P>
          <P>(iv) In the case where the second-chance high-speed mode <E T="03">is</E> followed by the second-chance idle mode, the pass/fail analysis shall begin after an elapsed time of 10 seconds (mt=10). A pass or fail determination shall be made for the vehicle and the mode shall be terminated as follows:</P>
          <P>(A) The vehicle shall pass the high-speed mode and the mode shall be terminated at the end of an elapsed time of 180 seconds (mt=180) if any measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (VI)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(B) The vehicle shall fail the high-speed mode and the mode shall be terminated if paragraph (VI)(d)(2)(iv)(A) of this appendix is not satisfied by an elapsed time of 180 seconds (mt=180).</P>
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Second-chance preconditioning mode.</E> The mode timer shall start (mt=0) when engine speed is between 2200 and 2800 rpm. The mode shall continue for an elapsed time of 180 seconds (mt=180). If the engine speed falls below 2200 rpm or exceeds 2800 rpm for more than five seconds in any one excursion, or 15 seconds over all excursions, the mode timer shall reset to zero and resume timing.</P>
          <P>(4) <E T="03">Second-chance idle mode</E>—(i) <E T="03">Ford Motor Company and Honda vehicles.</E> The engines of 1981-1987 Ford Motor Company vehicles and 1984-1985 Honda Preludes shall be shut off for not more than 10 seconds and then shall be restarted. The probe may be removed from the tailpipe or the sample pump turned off if necessary to reduce analyzer fouling during <PRTPAGE P="235"/>the restart procedure. This procedure may also be used for 1988-1989 Ford Motor Company vehicles but should not be used for other vehicles.</P>
          <P>(ii) The mode timer shall start (mt=0) when the vehicle engine speed is between 350 and 1100 rpm. If the engine exceeds 1100 rpm or falls below 350 rpm the mode timer shall reset to zero and resume timing. The minimum second-chance idle mode length shall be determined as described in paragraph (VI)(d)(4)(iii) of this appendix. The maximum second-chance idle mode length shall be 90 seconds elapsed time (mt=90).</P>
          <P>(iii) The pass/fail analysis shall begin after an elapsed time of 10 seconds (mt=10). A pass or fail determination shall be made for the vehicle and the mode shall be terminated as follows:</P>
          <P>(A) The vehicle shall pass the second-chance idle mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, prior to an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30), measured values are less than or equal to 100 ppm HC and 0.5 percent CO.</P>
          <P>(B) The vehicle shall pass the second-chance idle mode and the test shall be terminated at the end of an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) if, prior to that time, the criteria of paragraph (VI)(d)(4)(iii)(A) of this appendix are not satisfied, and the measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards as described in paragraph (VI)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(C) The vehicle shall pass the second-chance idle mode and the test shall be immediately terminated if, at any point between an elapsed time of 30 seconds (mt=30) and 90 seconds (mt=90), measured values are less than or equal to the applicable short test standards described in paragraph (VI)(a)(2) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(D) The vehicle shall fail the second-chance idle mode and the test shall be terminated if none of the provisions of paragraphs (VI)(d)(4)(iii) (A), (B), and (C) of this appendix is satisfied by an elapsed time of 90 seconds (mt=90).</P>
          <CITA>[ 57 FR 52987, Nov. 5, 1992, as amended at 61 FR 40946, Aug. 6, 1996]</CITA>
        </APPENDIX>
        <APPENDIX>
          <EAR>Pt. 51, Subpt. S, App. C</EAR>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Appendix C to Subpart S—Steady-State Short Test Standards</HD>
          <HD SOURCE="HD2">(I) Short Test Standards for 1981 and Later Model Year Light-Duty Vehicles</HD>
          <P>For 1981 and later model year light-duty vehicles for which any of the test procedures described in appendix B to this subpart are utilized to establish Emissions Performance Warranty eligibility (i.e., 1981 and later model year light-duty vehicles at low altitude and 1982 and later model year vehicles at high altitude to which high altitude certification standards of 1.5 gpm HC and 15 gpm CO or less apply), short test emissions for all tests and test modes shall not exceed:</P>
          <P>(a) Hydrocarbons: 220 ppm as hexane.</P>
          <P>(b) Carbon monoxide: 1.2%.</P>
          <HD SOURCE="HD2">(II) Short Test Standards for 1981 and Later Model Year Light-Duty Trucks</HD>
          <P>For 1981 and later model year light-duty trucks for which any of the test procedures described in appendix B to this subpart are utilized to establish Emissions Performance Warranty eligibility (i.e., 1981 and later model year light-duty trucks at low altitude and 1982 and later model year trucks at high altitude to which high altitude certification standards of 2.0 gpm HC and 26 gpm CO or less apply), short test emissions for all tests and test modes shall not exceed:</P>
          <P>(a) Hydrocarbons: 220 ppm as hexane.</P>
          <P>(b) Carbon monoxide: 1.2%.</P>
        </APPENDIX>
        <APPENDIX>
          <EAR>Pt. 51, Subpt. S, App. D</EAR>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Appendix D to Subpart S—Steady-State Short Test Equipment</HD>
          <HD SOURCE="HD2">(I) Steady-State Test Exhaust Analysis System</HD>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Sampling system</E>—(1) <E T="03">General requirements.</E> The sampling system for steady-state short tests shall, at a minimum, consist of a tailpipe probe, a flexible sample line, a water removal system, particulate trap, sample pump, flow control components, tachometer or dynamometer, analyzers for HC, CO, and CO<E T="52">2,</E> and digital displays for exhaust concentrations of HC, CO, and CO<E T="52">2,</E> and engine rpm. Materials that are in contact with the gases sampled shall not contaminate or change the character of the gases to be analyzed, including gases from alcohol fueled vehicles. The probe shall be capable of being inserted to a depth of at least ten inches into the tailpipe of the vehicle being tested, or into an extension boot if one is used. A digital display for dynamometer speed and load shall be included if the test procedures described in appendix B to this subpart, paragraphs (III) and (V), are conducted. Minimum specifications for optional NO analyzers are also described in this appendix. The analyzer system shall be able to test, as specified in at least one section in appendix B to this subpart, all model vehicles in service at the time of sale of the analyzer.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Temperature operating range.</E> The sampling system and all associated hardware shall be of a design certified to operate within the performance specifications described in paragraph (I)(b) of this appendix in ambient air temperatures ranging from 41 to 110 degrees Fahrenheit. The analyzer system shall, where necessary, include features to keep the sampling system within the specified range.</P>
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Humidity operating range.</E> The sampling system and all associated hardware shall be of a design certified to operate within the <PRTPAGE P="236"/>performance specifications described in paragraph (I)(b) of this appendix at a minimum of 80 percent relative humidity throughout the required temperature range.</P>
          <P>(4) <E T="03">Barometric pressure compensation.</E> Barometric pressure compensation shall be provided. Compensation shall be made for elevations up to 6,000 feet (above mean sea level). At any given altitude and ambient conditions specified in paragraph (I)(b) of this appendix, errors due to barometric pressure changes of <E T="61">±</E>2 inches of mercury shall not exceed the accuracy limits specified in paragraph (I)(b) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(5) <E T="03">Dual sample probe requirements.</E> When testing a vehicle with dual exhaust pipes, a dual sample probe of a design certified by the analyzer manufacturer to provide equal flow in each leg shall be used. The equal flow requirement is considered to be met if the flow rate in each leg of the probe has been measured under two sample pump flow rates (the normal rate and a rate equal to the onset of low flow), and if the flow rates in each of the legs are found to be equal to each other (within 15% of the flow rate in the leg having lower flow).</P>
          <P>(6) <E T="03">System lockout during warm-up.</E> Functional operation of the gas sampling unit shall remain disabled through a system lockout until the instrument meets stability and warm-up requirements. The instrument shall be considered “warmed up” when the zero and span readings for HC, CO, and CO<E T="52">2</E> have stabilized, within <E T="61">±</E>3% of the full range of low scale, for five minutes without adjustment.</P>
          <P>(7) <E T="03">Electromagnetic isolation and interference.</E> Electromagnetic signals found in an automotive service environment shall not cause malfunctions or changes in the accuracy in the electronics of the analyzer system. The instrument design shall ensure that readings do not vary as a result of electromagnetic radiation and induction devices normally found in the automotive service environment, including high energy vehicle ignition systems, radio frequency transmission radiation sources, and building electrical systems.</P>
          <P>(8) <E T="03">Vibration and shock protection.</E> System operation shall be unaffected by the vibration and shock encountered under the normal operating conditions encountered in an automotive service environment.</P>
          <P>(9) <E T="03">Propane equivalency factor.</E> The propane equivalency factor shall be displayed in a manner that enables it to be viewed conveniently, while permitting it to be altered only by personnel specifically authorized to do so.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Analyzers</E>—(1) <E T="03">Accuracy.</E> The analyzers shall be of a design certified to meet the following accuracy requirements when calibrated to the span points specified in appendix A to this subpart:</P>
          <GPOTABLE CDEF="s30,4-4,4.2,2.2,3.2" COLS="5" OPTS="L2,i1">
            <BOXHD>
              <CHED H="1">Channel</CHED>
              <CHED H="1">Range</CHED>
              <CHED H="1">Accuracy</CHED>
              <CHED H="1">Noise</CHED>
              <CHED H="1">Repeat-ability</CHED>
            </BOXHD>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">HC, ppm</ENT>
              <ENT>0-400</ENT>
              <ENT>
                <E T="61">±</E>12</ENT>
              <ENT>6</ENT>
              <ENT>8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">as hexane</ENT>
              <ENT>401-1000</ENT>
              <ENT>
                <E T="61">±</E>30</ENT>
              <ENT>10</ENT>
              <ENT>15</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="22"/>
              <ENT>1001-2000</ENT>
              <ENT>
                <E T="61">±</E>80</ENT>
              <ENT>20</ENT>
              <ENT>30</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">CO, %</ENT>
              <ENT>0-2.00</ENT>
              <ENT>
                <E T="61">±</E>0.06</ENT>
              <ENT>0.02</ENT>
              <ENT>0.03</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="22"/>
              <ENT>2.01-5.00</ENT>
              <ENT>
                <E T="61">±</E>0.15</ENT>
              <ENT>0.06</ENT>
              <ENT>0.08</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="22"/>
              <ENT>5.01-9.99</ENT>
              <ENT>
                <E T="61">±</E>0.40</ENT>
              <ENT>0.10</ENT>
              <ENT>0.15</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">CO<E T="22">2,</E> %</ENT>
              <ENT>0-4.0</ENT>
              <ENT>
                <E T="61">±</E> 0.6</ENT>
              <ENT>0.2</ENT>
              <ENT>0.3</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="22"/>
              <ENT>4.1-14.0</ENT>
              <ENT>
                <E T="61">±</E>0.5</ENT>
              <ENT>0.2</ENT>
              <ENT>0.3</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">NO, ppm</ENT>
              <ENT>0-1000</ENT>
              <ENT>
                <E T="61">±</E>32</ENT>
              <ENT>16</ENT>
              <ENT>20</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="22"/>
              <ENT>1001-2000</ENT>
              <ENT>
                <E T="61">±</E>60</ENT>
              <ENT>25</ENT>
              <ENT>30</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="22"/>
              <ENT>2001-4000</ENT>
              <ENT>
                <E T="61">±</E>120</ENT>
              <ENT>50</ENT>
              <ENT>60</ENT>
            </ROW>
          </GPOTABLE>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Minimum analyzer display resolution.</E> The analyzer electronics shall have sufficient resolution to achieve the following:</P>
          <GPOTABLE CDEF="s10,xls80" COLS="2" OPTS="L0,7/8,g1,t1,i1">
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">HC</ENT>
              <ENT>1ppm HC as hexane.</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">CO</ENT>
              <ENT>0.01% CO.</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">CO<E T="52">2</E>
              </ENT>
              <ENT>0.1% CO<E T="52">2</E>.</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">NO</ENT>
              <ENT>1ppm NO.</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">RPM</ENT>
              <ENT>1rpm.</ENT>
            </ROW>
          </GPOTABLE>
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Response time.</E> The response time from the probe to the display for HC, CO, and CO<E T="52">2</E> analyzers shall not exceed eight seconds to 90% of a step change in input. For NO analyzers, the response time shall not exceed twelve seconds to 90% of a step change in input.</P>
          <P>(4) <E T="03">Display refresh rate.</E> Dynamic information being displayed shall be refreshed at a minimum rate of twice per second.</P>
          <P>(5) <E T="03">Interference effects.</E> The interference effects for non-interest gases shall not exceed <E T="61">±</E>10 ppm for hydrocarbons, <E T="61">±</E>0.05 percent for carbon monoxide, <E T="61">±</E>0.20 percent for carbon dioxide, and <E T="61">±</E>20 ppm for oxides of nitrogen.</P>
          <P>(6) <E T="03">Low flow indication.</E> The analyzer shall provide an indication when the sample flow is below the acceptable level. The sampling system shall be equipped with a flow meter (or equivalent) that shall indicate sample flow degradation when meter error exceeds three percent of full scale, or causes system response time to exceed 13 seconds to 90 percent of a step change in input, whichever is less.</P>
          <P>(7) <E T="03">Engine speed detection.</E> The analyzer shall utilize a tachometer capable of detecting engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm) with a 0.5 second response time and an accuracy of <E T="61">±</E>3% of the true rpm.</P>
          <P>(8) <E T="03">Test and mode timers.</E> The analyzer shall be capable of simultaneously determining the amount of time elapsed in a test, and in a mode within that test.</P>
          <P>(9) <E T="03">Sample rate.</E> The analyzer shall be capable of measuring exhaust concentrations of gases specified in this section at a minimum rate of twice per second.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Demonstration of conformity.</E> The analyzer shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the inspection program manager, through acceptance testing procedures, to meet the requirements of this section and <PRTPAGE P="237"/>that it is capable of being maintained as required in appendix A to this subpart.</P>
          <HD SOURCE="HD2">(II) Steady-State Test Dynamometer</HD>
          <P>(a) The chassis dynamometer for steady-state short tests shall provide the following capabilities:</P>
          <P>(1) <E T="03">Power absorption.</E> The dynamometer shall be capable of applying a load to the vehicle's driving tire surfaces at the horsepower and speed levels specified in paragraph (II)(b) of this appendix.</P>
          <P>(2) <E T="03">Short-term stability.</E> Power absorption at constant speed shall not drift more than <E T="61">±</E>0.5 horsepower (hp) during any single test mode.</P>
          <P>(3) <E T="03">Roll weight capacity.</E> The dynamometer shall be capable of supporting a driving axle weight up to four thousand (4,000) pounds or greater.</P>
          <P>(4) <E T="03">Between roll wheel lifts.</E> These shall be controllable and capable of lifting a minimum of four thousand (4,000) pounds.</P>
          <P>(5) <E T="03">Roll brakes.</E> Both rolls shall be locked when the wheel lift is up.</P>
          <P>(6) <E T="03">Speed indications.</E> The dynamometer speed display shall have a range of 0-60 mph, and a resolution and accuracy of at least 1 mph.</P>
          <P>(7) <E T="03">Safety interlock.</E> A roll speed sensor and safety interlock circuit shall be provided which prevents the application of the roll brakes and upward lift movement at any roll speed above 0.5 mph.</P>
          <P>(b) The dynamometer shall produce the load speed relationships specified in paragraphs (III) and (V) of appendix B to this subpart.</P>
          <HD SOURCE="HD2">(III) Transient Emission Test Equipment <E T="01">[Reserved]</E>
          </HD>
          <HD SOURCE="HD2">(IV) Evaporative System Purge Test Equipment <E T="01">[Reserved]</E>
          </HD>
          <HD SOURCE="HD2">(V) Evaporative System Integrity Test Equipment <E T="01">[Reserved]</E>
          </HD>
          <CITA>[57 FR 52987, Nov. 5, 1992, as amended at 58 FR 59367, Nov. 9, 1993]</CITA>
        </APPENDIX>
        <APPENDIX>
          <EAR>Pt. 51, Subpt. S, App. E</EAR>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Appendix E to Subpart S—Transient Test Driving Cycle</HD>
          <P>(I) <E T="03">Driver's trace.</E> All excursions in the transient driving cycle shall be evaluated by the procedures defined in § 86.115-78(b)(1) and § 86.115(c) of this chapter. Excursions exceeding these limits shall cause a test to be void. In addition, provisions shall be available to utilize cycle validation criteria, as described in § 86.1341-90 of this chapter, for trace speed versus actual speed as a means to determine a valid test.</P>
          <P>(II) <E T="03">Driving cycle.</E> The following table shows the time speed relationship for the transient IM240 test procedure.</P>
          <GPOTABLE CDEF="s50,3.2" COLS="2" OPTS="L2,i1">
            <BOXHD>
              <CHED H="1">Second</CHED>
              <CHED H="1">MPH</CHED>
            </BOXHD>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">0</ENT>
              <ENT>0</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">1</ENT>
              <ENT>0</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">2</ENT>
              <ENT>0</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">3</ENT>
              <ENT>0</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">4</ENT>
              <ENT>0</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">5</ENT>
              <ENT>3</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">6</ENT>
              <ENT>5.9</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">7</ENT>
              <ENT>8.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">8</ENT>
              <ENT>11.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">9</ENT>
              <ENT>14.3</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">10</ENT>
              <ENT>16.9</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">11</ENT>
              <ENT>17.3</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">12</ENT>
              <ENT>18.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">13</ENT>
              <ENT>20.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">14</ENT>
              <ENT>21.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">15</ENT>
              <ENT>22.4</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">16</ENT>
              <ENT>22.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">17</ENT>
              <ENT>22.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">18</ENT>
              <ENT>21.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">19</ENT>
              <ENT>20.9</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">20</ENT>
              <ENT>20.4</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">21</ENT>
              <ENT>19.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">22</ENT>
              <ENT>17</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">23</ENT>
              <ENT>14.9</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">24</ENT>
              <ENT>14.9</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">25</ENT>
              <ENT>15.2</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">26</ENT>
              <ENT>15.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">27</ENT>
              <ENT>16</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">28</ENT>
              <ENT>17.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">29</ENT>
              <ENT>19.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">30</ENT>
              <ENT>21.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">31</ENT>
              <ENT>22.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">32</ENT>
              <ENT>22.9</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">33</ENT>
              <ENT>22.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">34</ENT>
              <ENT>22.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">35</ENT>
              <ENT>21.3</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">36</ENT>
              <ENT>19</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">37</ENT>
              <ENT>17.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">38</ENT>
              <ENT>15.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">39</ENT>
              <ENT>15.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">40</ENT>
              <ENT>17.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">41</ENT>
              <ENT>19.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">42</ENT>
              <ENT>21.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">43</ENT>
              <ENT>23.2</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">44</ENT>
              <ENT>24.2</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">45</ENT>
              <ENT>24.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">46</ENT>
              <ENT>24.9</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">47</ENT>
              <ENT>25</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">48</ENT>
              <ENT>25.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">49</ENT>
              <ENT>26.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">50</ENT>
              <ENT>26.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">51</ENT>
              <ENT>27.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">52</ENT>
              <ENT>28.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">53</ENT>
              <ENT>29.3</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">54</ENT>
              <ENT>29.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">55</ENT>
              <ENT>30.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">56</ENT>
              <ENT>30.4</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">57</ENT>
              <ENT>30.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">58</ENT>
              <ENT>30.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">59</ENT>
              <ENT>30.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">60</ENT>
              <ENT>30.4</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">61</ENT>
              <ENT>30.3</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">62</ENT>
              <ENT>30.4</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">63</ENT>
              <ENT>30.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">64</ENT>
              <ENT>30.4</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">65</ENT>
              <ENT>29.9</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">66</ENT>
              <ENT>29.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">67</ENT>
              <ENT>29.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">68</ENT>
              <ENT>30.3</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">69</ENT>
              <ENT>30.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">70</ENT>
              <ENT>30.9</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">71</ENT>
              <ENT>31</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">72</ENT>
              <ENT>30.9</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">73</ENT>
              <ENT>30.4</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <PRTPAGE P="238"/>
              <ENT I="01">74</ENT>
              <ENT>29.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">75</ENT>
              <ENT>29.9</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">76</ENT>
              <ENT>30.2</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">77</ENT>
              <ENT>30.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">78</ENT>
              <ENT>31.2</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">79</ENT>
              <ENT>31.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">80</ENT>
              <ENT>32.2</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">81</ENT>
              <ENT>32.4</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">82</ENT>
              <ENT>32.2</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">83</ENT>
              <ENT>31.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">84</ENT>
              <ENT>28.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">85</ENT>
              <ENT>25.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">86</ENT>
              <ENT>21.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">87</ENT>
              <ENT>18.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">88</ENT>
              <ENT>14.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">89</ENT>
              <ENT>11.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">90</ENT>
              <ENT>7.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">91</ENT>
              <ENT>4.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">92</ENT>
              <ENT>0.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">93</ENT>
              <ENT>0</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">94</ENT>
              <ENT>0</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">95</ENT>
              <ENT>0</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">96</ENT>
              <ENT>0</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">97</ENT>
              <ENT>0</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">98</ENT>
              <ENT>3.3</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">99</ENT>
              <ENT>6.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">100</ENT>
              <ENT>9.9</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">101</ENT>
              <ENT>13.2</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">102</ENT>
              <ENT>16.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">103</ENT>
              <ENT>19.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">104</ENT>
              <ENT>22.2</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">105</ENT>
              <ENT>24.3</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">106</ENT>
              <ENT>25.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">107</ENT>
              <ENT>26.4</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">108</ENT>
              <ENT>25.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">109</ENT>
              <ENT>25.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">110</ENT>
              <ENT>24.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">111</ENT>
              <ENT>25.2</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">112</ENT>
              <ENT>25.4</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">113</ENT>
              <ENT>27.2</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">114</ENT>
              <ENT>26.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">115</ENT>
              <ENT>24</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">116</ENT>
              <ENT>22.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">117</ENT>
              <ENT>19.4</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">118</ENT>
              <ENT>17.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">119</ENT>
              <ENT>17.2</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">120</ENT>
              <ENT>18.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">121</ENT>
              <ENT>18.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">122</ENT>
              <ENT>20</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">123</ENT>
              <ENT>20.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">124</ENT>
              <ENT>21.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">125</ENT>
              <ENT>22.4</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">126</ENT>
              <ENT>22.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">127</ENT>
              <ENT>22.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">128</ENT>
              <ENT>21.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">129</ENT>
              <ENT>20.9</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">130</ENT>
              <ENT>20.4</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">131</ENT>
              <ENT>19.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">132</ENT>
              <ENT>17</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">133</ENT>
              <ENT>17.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">134</ENT>
              <ENT>15.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">135</ENT>
              <ENT>15.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">136</ENT>
              <ENT>17.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">137</ENT>
              <ENT>19.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">138</ENT>
              <ENT>21.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">139</ENT>
              <ENT>22.2</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">140</ENT>
              <ENT>24.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">141</ENT>
              <ENT>24.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">142</ENT>
              <ENT>24.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">143</ENT>
              <ENT>24.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">144</ENT>
              <ENT>24.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">145</ENT>
              <ENT>24.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">146</ENT>
              <ENT>25.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">147</ENT>
              <ENT>25.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">148</ENT>
              <ENT>25.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">149</ENT>
              <ENT>25.4</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">150</ENT>
              <ENT>24.9</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">151</ENT>
              <ENT>25</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">152</ENT>
              <ENT>25.4</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">153</ENT>
              <ENT>26</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">154</ENT>
              <ENT>26</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">155</ENT>
              <ENT>25.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">156</ENT>
              <ENT>26.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">157</ENT>
              <ENT>26.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">158</ENT>
              <ENT>27.3</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">159</ENT>
              <ENT>30.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">160</ENT>
              <ENT>33.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">161</ENT>
              <ENT>36.2</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">162</ENT>
              <ENT>37.3</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">163</ENT>
              <ENT>39.3</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">164</ENT>
              <ENT>40.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">165</ENT>
              <ENT>42.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">166</ENT>
              <ENT>43.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">167</ENT>
              <ENT>45.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">168</ENT>
              <ENT>46</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">169</ENT>
              <ENT>46.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">170</ENT>
              <ENT>47.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">171</ENT>
              <ENT>47.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">172</ENT>
              <ENT>47.3</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">173</ENT>
              <ENT>47.2</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">174</ENT>
              <ENT>47.2</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">175</ENT>
              <ENT>47.4</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">176</ENT>
              <ENT>47.9</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">177</ENT>
              <ENT>48.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">178</ENT>
              <ENT>49.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">179</ENT>
              <ENT>49.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">180</ENT>
              <ENT>50</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">181</ENT>
              <ENT>50.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">182</ENT>
              <ENT>51</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">183</ENT>
              <ENT>51.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">184</ENT>
              <ENT>52.2</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">185</ENT>
              <ENT>53.2</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">186</ENT>
              <ENT>54.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">187</ENT>
              <ENT>54.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">188</ENT>
              <ENT>54.9</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">189</ENT>
              <ENT>55</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">190</ENT>
              <ENT>54.9</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">191</ENT>
              <ENT>54.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">192</ENT>
              <ENT>54.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">193</ENT>
              <ENT>54.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">194</ENT>
              <ENT>55.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">195</ENT>
              <ENT>55.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">196</ENT>
              <ENT>55.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">197</ENT>
              <ENT>56.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">198</ENT>
              <ENT>56.3</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">199</ENT>
              <ENT>56.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">200</ENT>
              <ENT>56.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">201</ENT>
              <ENT>56.7</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">202</ENT>
              <ENT>56.3</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">203</ENT>
              <ENT>56</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">204</ENT>
              <ENT>55</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">205</ENT>
              <ENT>53.4</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">206</ENT>
              <ENT>51.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">207</ENT>
              <ENT>51.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">208</ENT>
              <ENT>52.1</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">209</ENT>
              <ENT>52.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">210</ENT>
              <ENT>53</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">211</ENT>
              <ENT>53.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">212</ENT>
              <ENT>54</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">213</ENT>
              <ENT>54.9</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">214</ENT>
              <ENT>55.4</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">215</ENT>
              <ENT>55.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">216</ENT>
              <ENT>56</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">217</ENT>
              <ENT>56</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">218</ENT>
              <ENT>55.8</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">219</ENT>
              <ENT>55.2</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">220</ENT>
              <ENT>54.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">221</ENT>
              <ENT>53.6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <PRTPAGE P="239"/>
              <ENT I="01">222</ENT>
              <ENT>52.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">223</ENT>
              <ENT>51.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">224</ENT>
              <ENT>50.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">225</ENT>
              <ENT>48</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">226</ENT>
              <ENT>44.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">227</ENT>
              <ENT>41</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">228</ENT>
              <ENT>37.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">229</ENT>
              <ENT>34</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">230</ENT>
              <ENT>30.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">231</ENT>
              <ENT>27</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">232</ENT>
              <ENT>23.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">233</ENT>
              <ENT>20</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">234</ENT>
              <ENT>16.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">235</ENT>
              <ENT>13</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">236</ENT>
              <ENT>9.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">237</ENT>
              <ENT>6</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">238</ENT>
              <ENT>2.5</ENT>
            </ROW>
            <ROW>
              <ENT I="01">239</ENT>
              <ENT>0</ENT>
            </ROW>
          </GPOTABLE>
          <CITA>[57 FR 52987, Nov. 5, 1992, as amended at 58 FR 59367, Nov. 9, 1993]</CITA>
        </APPENDIX>
      </SUBPART>
      <SUBPART>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart T—Conformity to State or Federal Implementation Plans of Transportation Plans, Programs, and Projects Developed, Funded or Approved Under Title 23 U.S.C. or the Federal Transit Laws</HD>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.390</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Implementation plan revision.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) States with areas subject to this subpart and part 93, subpart A, of this chapter must submit to the EPA and DOT a revision to their implementation plan which contains criteria and procedures for DOT, MPOs and other State or local agencies to assess the conformity of transportation plans, programs, and projects, consistent with this subpart and part 93, subpart A, of this chapter. This revision is to be submitted by November 25, 1994 (or within 12 months of an area's redesignation from attainment to nonattainment, if the State has not previously submitted such a revision). Further revisions to the implementation plan required by amendments to part 93, subpart A, of this chapter must be submitted within 12 months of the date of publication of such final amendments. EPA will provide DOT with a 30-day comment period before taking action to approve or disapprove the submission. A State's conformity provisions may contain criteria and procedures more stringent than the requirements described in this subpart and part 93, subpart A, of this chapter only if the State's conformity provisions apply equally to non-federal as well as Federal entities.</P>
          <P>(b) The Federal conformity rules under part 93, subpart A, of this chapter, in addition to any existing applicable State requirements, establish the conformity criteria and procedures necessary to meet the requirements of Clean Air Act section 176(c) until such time as EPA approves the conformity implementation plan revision required by this subpart. Following EPA approval of the State conformity provisions (or a portion thereof) in a revision to the applicable implementation plan, conformity determinations would be governed by the approved (or approved portion of the) State criteria and procedures. The Federal conformity regulations contained in part 93, subpart A, of this chapter would apply only for the portion, if any, of the State's conformity provisions that is not approved by EPA. In addition, any previously applicable implementation plan conformity requirements remain enforceable until the State submits a revision to its applicable implementation plan to specifically remove them and that revision is approved by EPA.</P>
          <P>(c) The implementation plan revision required by this section must meet all of the requirements of part 93, subpart A, of this chapter.</P>
          <P>(d) In order for EPA to approve the implementation plan revision submitted to EPA and DOT under this subpart, the plan must address all requirements of part 93, subpart A, of this chapter in a manner which gives them full legal effect. In particular, the revision shall incorporate the provisions of the following sections of part 93, subpart A, of this chapter in verbatim form, except insofar as needed to clarify or to give effect to a stated intent in the revision to establish criteria and procedures more stringent than the requirements stated in the following sections of this chapter: §§ 93.101, 93.102, 93.103, 93.104, 93.106, 93.109, 93.110, 93.111, 93.112, 93.113, 93.114, 93.115, 93.116, 93.117, 93.118, 93.119, 93.120, 93.121, 93.126, and 93.127.</P>
          <CITA>[62 FR 43801, Aug. 15, 1997]</CITA>
        </SECTION>
      </SUBPART>
      <SUBPART>
        <PRTPAGE P="240"/>
        <HD SOURCE="HED">Subpart U—Economic Incentive Programs</HD>
        <SOURCE>
          <HD SOURCE="HED">Source:</HD>
          <P>59 FR 16710, Apr. 7, 1994, unless otherwise noted.</P>
        </SOURCE>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.490</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Applicability.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) The rules in this subpart apply to any statutory economic incentive program (EIP) submitted to the EPA as an implementation plan revision to comply with sections 182(g)(3), 182(g)(5), 187(d)(3), or 187(g) of the Act. Such programs may be submitted by any authorized governmental organization, including States, local governments, and Indian governing bodies.</P>
          <P>(b) The provisions contained in these rules, except as explicitly exempted, shall also serve as the EPA's policy guidance on discretionary EIP's submitted as implementation plan revisions for any purpose other than to comply with the statutory requirements specified in paragraph (a) of this section.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.491</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>Definitions.</SUBJECT>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Act</E> means the Clean Air Act as amended November 15, 1990.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Actual emissions</E> means the emissions of a pollutant from an affected source determined by taking into account actual emission rates associated with normal source operation and actual or representative production rates (i.e., capacity utilization and hours of operation).</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Affected source</E> means any stationary, area, or mobile source of a criteria pollutant(s) to which an EIP applies. This term applies to sources explicitly included at the start of a program, as well as sources that voluntarily enter (i.e., opt into) the program.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Allowable emissions</E> means the emissions of a pollutant from an affected source determined by taking into account the most stringent of all applicable SIP emissions limits and the level of emissions consistent with source compliance with all Federal requirements related to attainment and maintenance of the NAAQS and the production rate associated with the maximum rated capacity and hours of operation (unless the source is subject to federally enforceable limits which restrict the operating rate, or hours of operation, or both).</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Area sources</E> means stationary and nonroad sources that are too small and/or too numerous to be individually included in a stationary source emissions inventory.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Attainment area</E> means any area of the country designated or redesignated by the EPA at 40 CFR part 81 in accordance with section 107(d) as having attained the relevant NAAQS for a given criteria pollutant. An area can be an attainment area for some pollutants and a nonattainment area for other pollutants.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Attainment demonstration</E> means the requirement in section 182(b)(1)(A) of the Act to demonstrate that the specific annual emissions reductions included in a SIP are sufficient to attain the primary NAAQS by the date applicable to the area.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Directionally-sound strategies</E> are strategies for which adequate procedures to quantify emissions reductions or specify a program baseline are not defined as part of the EIP.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Discretionary economic incentive program</E> means any EIP submitted to the EPA as an implementation plan revision for purposes other than to comply with the statutory requirements of sections 182(g)(3), 182(g)(5), 187(d)(3), or 187(g) of the Act.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Economic incentive program (EIP)</E> means a program which may include State established emission fees or a system of marketable permits, or a system of State fees on sale or manufacture of products the use of which contributes to O<E T="52">3</E> formation, or any combination of the foregoing or other similar measures, as well as incentives and requirements to reduce vehicle emissions and vehicle miles traveled in the area, including any of the transportation control measures identified in section 108(f). Such programs may be directed toward stationary, area, and/or mobile sources, to achieve emissions reductions milestones, to attain and maintain ambient air quality standards, and/or to provide more flexible, lower-cost approaches to meeting environmental goals. Such programs are categorized into the following three categories: Emission-limiting, market-<PRTPAGE P="241"/>response, and directionally-sound strategies.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Emission-limiting strategies</E> are strategies that directly specify limits on total mass emissions, emission-related parameters (e.g., emission rates per unit of production, product content limits), or levels of emissions reductions relative to a program baseline that are required to be met by affected sources, while providing flexibility to sources to reduce the cost of meeting program requirements.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Indian governing body</E> means the governing body of any tribe, band, or group of Indians subject to the jurisdiction of the U.S. and recognized by the U.S. as possessing power of self-government.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Maintenance plan</E> means an implementation plan for an area for which the State is currently seeking designation or has previously sought redesignation to attainment, under section 107(d) of the Act, which provides for the continued attainment of the NAAQS.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Market-response strategies</E> are strategies that create one or more incentives for affected sources to reduce emissions, without directly specifying limits on emissions or emission-related parameters that individual sources or even all sources in the aggregate are required to meet.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Milestones</E> means the reductions in emissions required to be achieved pursuant to section 182(b)(1) and the corresponding requirements in section 182(c)(2) (B) and (C), 182(d), and 182(e) of the Act for O<E T="52">3</E> nonattainment areas, as well as the reduction in emissions of CO equivalent to the total of the specified annual emissions reductions required by December 31, 1995, pursuant to section 187(d)(1).</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Mobile sources</E> means on-road (highway) vehicles (e.g., automobiles, trucks and motorcycles) and nonroad vehicles (e.g., trains, airplanes, agricultural equipment, industrial equipment, construction vehicles, off-road motorcycles, and marine vessels).</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">National ambient air quality standard (NAAQS)</E> means a standard set by the EPA at 40 CFR part 50 under section 109 of the Act.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Nonattainment area</E> means any area of the country designated by the EPA at 40 CFR part 81 in accordance with section 107(d) of the Act as nonattainment for one or more criteria pollutants. An area could be a nonattainment area for some pollutants and an attainment area for other pollutants.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Nondiscriminatory</E> means that a program in one State does not result in discriminatory effects on other States or sources outside the State with regard to interstate commerce.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Program baseline</E> means the level of emissions, or emission-related parameter(s), for each affected source or group of affected sources, from which program results (e.g., quantifiable emissions reductions) shall be determined.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Program uncertainty factor</E> means a factor applied to discount the amount of emissions reductions credited in an implementation plan demonstration to account for any strategy-specific uncertainties in an EIP.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Reasonable further progress (RFP) plan</E> means any incremental emissions reductions required by the CAA (e.g., section 182(b)) and approved by the EPA as meeting these requirements.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Replicable</E> refers to methods which are sufficiently unambiguous such that the same or equivalent results would be obtained by the application of the methods by different users.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">RFP baseline</E> means the total of actual volatile organic compounds or nitrogen oxides emissions from all anthropogenic sources in an O<E T="52">3</E> nonattainment area during the calendar year 1990 (net of growth and adjusted pursuant to section 182(b)(1)(B) of the Act), expressed as typical O<E T="52">3</E> season, weekday emissions.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Rule compliance factor</E> means a factor applied to discount the amount of emissions reductions credited in an implementation plan demonstration to account for less-than-complete compliance by the affected sources in an EIP.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Shortfall</E> means the difference between the amount of emissions reductions credited in an implementation plan for a particular EIP and those that are actually achieved by that EIP, as determined through an approved reconciliation process.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">State</E> means State, local government, or Indian-governing body.<PRTPAGE P="242"/>
          </P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">State implementation plan (SIP)</E> means a plan developed by an authorized governing body, including States, local governments, and Indian-governing bodies, in a nonattainment area, as required under titles I &amp; II of the Clean Air Act, and approved by the EPA as meeting these same requirements.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Stationary source</E> means any building, structure, facility or installation, other than an area or mobile source, which emits or may emit any criteria air pollutant or precursor subject to regulation under the Act.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Statutory economic incentive program</E> means any EIP submitted to the EPA as an implementation plan revision to comply with sections 182(g)(3), 182(g)(5), 187(d)(3), or 187(g) of the Act.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Surplus</E> means, at a minimum, emissions reductions in excess of an established program baseline which are not required by SIP requirements or State regulations, relied upon in any applicable attainment plan or demonstration, or credited in any RFP or milestone demonstration, so as to prevent the double-counting of emissions reductions.</P>
          <P>
            <E T="03">Transportation control measure (TCM)</E> is any measure of the types listed in section 108(F) of the Act, or any measure in an applicable implementation plan directed toward reducing emissions of air pollutants from transportation sources by a reduction in vehicle use or changes in traffic conditions.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.492</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>State program election and submittal.</SUBJECT>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Extreme O</E>
            <E T="52">3</E>
            <E T="03">nonattainment areas.</E> (1) A State or authorized governing body for any extreme O<E T="52">3</E> nonattainment area shall submit a plan revision to implement an EIP, in accordance with the requirements of this part, pursuant to section 182(g)(5) of the Act, if:</P>
          <P>(i) A required milestone compliance demonstration is not submitted within the required period.</P>
          <P>(ii) The Administrator determines that the area has not met any applicable milestone.</P>
          <P>(2) The plan revision in paragraph (a)(1) of this section shall be submitted within 9 months after such failure or determination, and shall be sufficient, in combination with other elements of the SIP, to achieve the next milestone.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Serious CO nonattainment areas.</E> (1) A State or authorized governing body for any serious CO nonattainment area shall submit a plan revision to implement an EIP, in accordance with the requirements of this part, if:</P>
          <P>(i) A milestone demonstration is not submitted within the required period, pursuant to section 187(d) of the Act.</P>
          <P>(ii) The Administrator notifies the State, pursuant to section 187(d) of the Act, that a milestone has not been met.</P>
          <P>(iii) The Administrator determines, pursuant to section 186(b)(2) of the Act that the NAAQS for CO has not been attained by the applicable date for that area. Such revision shall be submitted within 9 months after such failure or determination.</P>
          <P>(2) Submittals made pursuant to paragraphs (b)(1) (i) and (ii) of this section shall be sufficient, together with a transportation control program, to achieve the specific annual reductions in CO emissions set forth in the implementation plan by the attainment date. Submittals made pursuant to paragraph (b)(1)(iii) of this section shall be adequate, in combination with other elements of the revised plan, to reduce the total tonnage of emissions of CO in the area by at least 5 percent per year in each year after approval of the plan revision and before attainment of the NAAQS for CO.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Serious and severe O</E>
            <E T="52">3</E>
            <E T="03">nonattainment areas.</E> If a State, for any serious or severe O<E T="52">3</E> nonattainment area, elects to implement an EIP in the circumstances set out in section 182(g)(3) of the Act, the State shall submit a plan revision to implement the program in accordance with the requirements of this part. If the option to implement an EIP is elected, a plan revision shall be submitted within 12 months after the date required for election, and shall be sufficient, in combination with other elements of the SIP, to achieve the next milestone.</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">Any nonattainment or attainment area.</E> Any State may at any time submit a plan or plan revision to implement a discretionary EIP, in accordance with the requirements of this part, pursuant to sections 110(a)(2)(A) <PRTPAGE P="243"/>and 172(c)(6) and other applicable provisions of the Act concerning SIP submittals. The plan revision shall not interfere with any applicable requirement concerning attainment and RFP, or any other applicable requirements of the Act.</P>
        </SECTION>
        <SECTION>
          <SECTNO>§ 51.493</SECTNO>
          <SUBJECT>State program requirements.</SUBJECT>
          <P>Economic incentive programs shall be State and federally enforceable, nondiscriminatory, and consistent with the timely attainment of NAAQS, all applicable RFP and visibility requirements, applicable PSD increments, and all other applicable requirements of the Act. Programs in nonattainment areas for which credit is taken in attainment and RFP demonstrations shall be designed to ensure that the effects of the program are quantifiable and permanent over the entire duration of the program, and that the credit taken is limited to that which is surplus. Statutory programs shall be designed to result in quantifiable, significant reductions in actual emissions. The EIP's shall include the following elements, as applicable:</P>
          <P>(a) <E T="03">Statement of goals and rationale.</E> This element shall include a clear statement as to the environmental problem being addressed, the intended environmental and economic goals of the program, and the rationale relating the incentive-based strategy to the program goals.</P>
          <P>(1) The statement of goals must include the goal that the program will benefit both the environment and the regulated entities. The program shall be designed so as to meaningfully meet this goal either directly, through increased or more rapid emissions reductions beyond those that would be achieved through a traditional regulatory program, or, alternatively, through other approaches that will result in real environmental benefits. Such alternative approaches include, but are not limited to, improved administrative mechanisms, reduced administrative burdens on regulatory agencies, improved emissions inventories, and the adoption of emission caps which over time constrain or reduce growth-related emissions beyond traditional regulatory approaches.</P>
          <P>(2) The incentive-based strategy shall be described in terms of one of the following three strategies:</P>
          <P>(i) Emission-limiting strategies, which directly specify limits on total mass emissions, emission-related parameters (e.g., emission rates per unit of production, product content limits), or levels of emissions reductions relative to a program baseline that affected sources are required to meet, while providing flexibility to sources to reduce the cost of meeting program requirements.</P>
          <P>(ii) Market-response strategies, which create one or more incentives for affected sources to reduce emissions, without directly specifying limits on emissions or emission-related parameters that individual sources or even all sources in the aggregate are required to meet.</P>
          <P>(iii) Directionally-sound strategies, for which adequate procedures to quantify emissions reductions are not defined.</P>
          <P>(b) <E T="03">Program scope.</E> (1) This element shall contain a clear definition of the sources affected by the program. This definition shall address:</P>
          <P>(i) The extent to which the program is mandatory or voluntary for the affected sources.</P>
          <P>(ii) Provisions, if any, by which sources that are not required to be in the program may voluntarily enter the program.</P>
          <P>(iii) Provisions, if any, by which sources covered by the program may voluntarily leave the program.</P>
          <P>(2) Any opt-in or opt-out provisions in paragraph (b)(1) of this section shall be designed to provide mechanisms by which such program changes are reflected in an area's attainment and RFP demonstrations, thus ensuring that there will not be an increase in the emissions inventory for the area caused by voluntary entry or exit from the program.</P>
          <P>(3) The program scope shall be defined so as not to interfere with any other Federal requirements which apply to the affected sources.</P>
          <P>(c) <E T="03">Program baseline.</E> A program baseline shall be defined as a basis for projecting program results and, if applicable, for initializing the incentive mechanism (e.g., for marketable permits <PRTPAGE P="244"/>programs). The program baseline shall be consistent with, and adequately reflected in, the assumptions and inputs used to develop an area's RFP plans and attainment and maintenance demonstrations, as applicable. The State shall provide sufficient supporting information from the areawide emissions inventory and other sources to justify the baseline used in the EIP.</P>
          <P>(1) For EIP's submitted in conjunction with, or subsequent to, the submission of any areawide progress plan due at the time of EIP submission (e.g., the 15 percent RFP plan and/or subsequent 3 percent plans) or an attainment demonstration, a State may exercise flexibility in setting a program baseline provided the program baseline is consistent with and reflected in all relevant progress plans or attainment demonstration. A flexible program baseline may be based on the lower of actual, allowable, or some other intermediate or lower level of emissions. For any EIP submitted prior to the submittal of an attainment demonstration, the State shall include the following with its EIP submittal:</P>
          <P>(i) A commitment that its subsequent attainment demonstration and all future progress plans, if applicable, will be consistent with the EIP baseline.</P>
          <P>(ii) A discussion of how the baseline will be integrated into the subsequent attainment demonstration, taking into account the potential that credit issued prior to the attainment demonstration may no longer be surplus relative to the attainment demonstration.</P>
          <P>(2) Except as provided for in paragraph (c)(4) of this section, for EIP's submitted during a time period when any progress plans are required but not yet submitted (e.g., the 15 percent RFP plan and/or the subsequent 3 percent plans), the program baseline shall be based on the lower-of-actual-or-allowable emissions. In such cases, actual emissions shall be taken from the most appropriate inventory, such as the 1990 actual emission inventory (due for submission in November 1992), and allowable emissions are the lower of SIP-allowable emissions or the level of emissions consistent with source compliance with all Federal requirements related to attainment and maintenance of the NAAQS.</P>
          <P>(3) For EIP's that are designed to implement new and/or previously existing RACT requirements through emissions trading and are submitted in conjunction with, or subsequent to, the submission of an associated RACT rule, a State may exercise flexibility in setting a program baseline provided the program baseline is consistent with and reflected in the associated RACT rule, and any applicable progress plans and attainment demonstrations.</P>
          <P>(4) For EIP's that are designed to implement new and/or previously existing RACT requirements through emissions trading and are submitted prior to the submission of a required RFP plan or attainment demonstration, States also have flexibility in determining the program baseline, provided the following conditions are met.</P>
          <P>(i) For EIP's that implement new RACT requirements for previously unregulated source categories through emissions trading, the new RACT requirements must reflect, to the extent practicable, increased emissions reductions beyond those that would be achieved through a traditional RACT program.</P>
          <P>(ii) For EIP's that impose new RACT requirements on previously unregulated sources in a previously regulated source category (e.g., RACT “catch-up” programs), the new incentive-based RACT rule shall, in the aggregate, yield reductions in actual emissions at least equivalent to that which would result from source-by-source compliance with the existing RACT limit for that source category.</P>
          <P>(5) A program baseline for individual sources shall, as appropriate, be contained or incorporated by reference in federally-enforceable operating permits or a federally-enforceable SIP.</P>

          <P>(6) An initial baseline for TCM's shall be calculated by establishing the preexisting conditions in the areas of interest. This may include establishing to what extent TCM's have already been implemented, what average vehicle occupancy (AVO) levels have been achieved during peak and off-peak periods, what types of trips occur in the region, and what mode choices have been <PRTPAGE P="245"/>made in making these trips. In addition, the extent to which travel options are currently available within the region of interest shall be determined. These travel options may include, but are not limited to, the degree of dispersion of transit services, the current ridership rates, and the availability and usage of parking facilities.</P>
          <P>(7) Information used in setting a program baseline shall be of sufficient quality to provide for at least as high a degree of accountability as currently exists for traditional control requirements for the categories of sources affected by the program.</P>
          <P>(d) <E T="03">Replicable emission quantification methods.</E> This program element, for programs other than those which are categorized as directionally-sound, shall include credible, workable, and replicable methods for projecting program results from affected sources and, where necessary, for quantifying emissions from individual sources subject to the EIP. Such methods, if used to determine credit taken in attainment, RFP, and maintenance demonstrations, as applicable, shall yield results which can be shown to have a level of certainty comparable to that for source-specific standards and traditional methods of control strategy development. Such methods include, as applicable, the following elements:</P>
          <P>(1) Specification of quantification methods. This element shall specify the approach or the combination or range of approaches that are acceptable for each source category affected by the program. Acceptable approaches may include, but are not limited to:</P>
          <P>(i) Test methods for the dir